V mfr^^r" ^,'fr^-^y.'^yff^- 
 
 ■mm-m 
 
 
TREASUFc ROO^i 
 
 COL. GEORGE WASHINGTON FLOWERS 
 MEMORIAL COLLECTION 
 
 DUKE UNIVERSITY LIBRARY 
 DURHAM, N. C. 
 
 PRESENTED BY 
 W. W. FLOWERS 
 
Digitized by the Internet Archive 
 in 2011 with funding from 
 Duke University Libraries 
 
 http://www.archive.org/details/manualofinstruct01gilh 
 
MANUAL OF IiNSTRDCTIOiN 
 
 VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA 
 
 CONFEDERATE STATES. 
 
 WILLIAM GILHAM, 
 
 COLONEL OF VOLUNTEERS, IN8TBCCT0R OF TACTICS, A>1) COMMANDAXT OF CADETS, 
 riROlNIA MIUTART OSTITUTE. 
 
 E I C II M O N D : 
 
 WEST & JOHNSTON, 
 
 145 Main Street. 
 
 1862. 
 
Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1861, by 
 
 WEST & JOHNSTON 
 
 Tn the Clerks Office of tlie District Court of the Confederate States for the 
 Eiutcrn District of Virginia. 
 
 Pmimi) BY EvAXS & Cogswell, No. 3 Broad Street, Charleston, S. C. 
 
PREFACE 
 
 The following work was undertaken with the hope of meeting, to 
 some extent at least, a long-felt want among the volunteers ami mili- 
 tia; that is, a manual, which, besides containing everything which 
 may be necessary for mere tictical instruction, should also embrace 
 more or less instruction on various other subjects of equal importance 
 with tactics ; subjects that few men who have not been regularly 
 trained in the military service have much familiarity with. In tho 
 regular service the neces.sity for such a work is not felt, at least not to 
 the same extent as among the volunteers and militia, from tho fact 
 that the military system being in constant operation, and each indi- 
 vidual, no matter what his present rank may be, having gradually 
 risen from a low, or perhaps the very lowest grade, has abundant 
 opportunities for becoming familiar with it in all its details, before he 
 is called upon for any extensive exercise of his professional knowledge. 
 With tho volunteers and militia, however, where no such process for 
 the acquisition of important practical knowledge is attainable, the ease 
 is very different. Called suddenlj- into active service, from the various 
 pursuits of civil life, all, even tho highest in rank, and the best in- 
 formed, meet with diflicuUies on every side; what would seem to be 
 comparatively plain and simple to the old campaigner, must of neces- 
 sity bo more or less obscure to the volunteer or militia officer, whoso 
 opportunities for the attainment of military- knowledge have been 
 limited. 
 
 It is not intended, nor indeed would it be desirable, that the present 
 work should embrace everj'thing which is proper to be known by our 
 citizen soldiery ; its aim is simplj' to aid the inexperienced so far as 
 to enable them to become familiar with such principles and practical 
 details of the military service as are absolutely essential to those who 
 would be competent officers, whether in the line or in the staff. If it 
 accomplishes this, it will not have been compiled in vain. 
 
 The introduction, or '' Glossary," will, it is hoped, bo found useful 
 to the student of military art or science, and to the reader of military 
 history. 
 
 :^;50276 
 
IV PREFACE. 
 
 Article I, on Army Organization, ronimenccc with a poncral account 
 of the four arms of the service — Infantry, Cavalry, Artillery, and 
 Engineer.' — the duticp of each in the conduct of a campaign, and the 
 proportion they t<hould hear to each other in an army. The latter part 
 of the Article enters more fully into the details of the organization of 
 each of the three lending armF, and closes with a short account of the 
 duties of the various departments of the staff. 
 
 In Article II, upon Arms and Ammunition, trill be found a con- 
 densed account of the various arms and kinds of ammunition used by 
 infantry, cavalry, and artillery, together with the manner of preparing 
 and using the latter. 
 
 From Article III to Article XI, inclusive, will be found the tactical 
 portion of the work ; it embraces very full instructions for ever}- kind 
 of Infantry troops, from the School of the Soldier to that of the Bat- 
 talion ; Cuvalr)' tactics, from the School of the Trooper to the Instruc- 
 tion of the Regiment; ami Artillery tactics, from the School of the 
 Piece to the Evolutions of the Battcrj'. The whole will be found to 
 be in strict conformity with the requirements of the United States 
 service. 
 
 Article XII cnibrncps directinns and forms for the conduct of every 
 form of parade; the kinds and duties of guards; together with much 
 other matter of a kindred nature. 
 
 In Article XIII the duties of captains, and other company oflBcers, 
 in regard to the internal management, police, and morale of their com- 
 panies, together with the proper equipment of officers and men to 
 secure efficicnc}- as well as comfort when in the field, camps, marches, 
 etc., are discussed. 
 
 Article XIV is devoted to the Staff, and embraces such directions 
 for the conduct of those departments of the staff upon which the 
 efficiency of an army in the field must mainly dc]icnd as seemed 
 most necessary. In this Article will also bo found directions and 
 forms for the prcparution of the morning reports of Companies, Regi- 
 ments, Biigades, and I)ivision.«, together with such forms for requisi- 
 tions, returns, etc., as are in most freciucnt u.^^e. 
 
 In Artirle XV will be found some account of the various orders of 
 battle, together with an outline of the manner in which the different 
 kinds of trooj)s should be handled in action. 
 
 Article XVI contains directions for the organization and conduct of 
 Military Courts; and, lastly, the Appendi.x, containing the Articles of 
 War, presents us with the Militury Larc now in force. 
 
 . W. G. 
 
 Virginia Mimtarv Institute, Decimher, 1860. 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 Tltt numhfj-s refer to paragraphs and not to pagti. 
 
 ARTICLE I. 
 
 ARMY ORGANIZATION, 
 
 1. Army corps; 2. Infantry — Proportion of infantry to the other 
 arms — Distiuction between licavy and lif^ht troops — The musket — 
 Uses and formatiou of infantry of the line; .S. Lij^ht infantry and 
 riflemen — The rifle and sword-bayonet — Duties, and mode of forma- 
 tion of light troops; 4. Cavalry — Its rank, and the proportion it 
 should bear to the infantry — Distinguishing qualities and uses; 5. 
 Artillery and its rank — Proportion to other ajrias — Light and heavy 
 artillery — Distinction between mounted and horse artillery — Uses 
 of artillery' ; 6. Engineer troops. 
 
 ORGAN IIATION OF ISFAKTUY. 
 
 7. The company aad its officers — The Platoon — Formation of the com- 
 pany ; Comrades in battle; 8. Posts of officers, etc. ; 9. The regi- 
 meut^ — Its officer.^; 10. Posts of the field and staff of the regiment; 
 11. Pioneers, field music, and baud: 12. Color guard; 1:5. (ri-neral 
 guides and markers; 14. Battalion in column: 15. Posts of officers 
 in column; 16. Brigades and divisions — Posts of genera,! officers in 
 line and in column. ^ 
 
 ORGANIZATION OF CAVALRY, 
 
 17. The company — Posts of officers, etc. ; 18. The squadron — Posts of 
 officers and file-closers; 19. The regiment in line — Posts of the field 
 and staff, etc.; 20. The regiment in column by twos ami fours: 21. 
 In column of platoons ; 22. In column by division ; 23. Order in 
 close column of squadron, cavalry brigades, and divisions. 
 
 ORGANIZATION OF FIELD ARTILLERY. 
 
 25. Batteries — Guns and howitzers — Relative proportions of these — 
 Caissons: 26. Complement of officers and men necessary to man the 
 battery; 27. The order in line; 28. The order in column; 29. The 
 order in battery; 30. Two or more batteries united; 31. The posi- 
 tion of artillery. 
 
 '50276 
 
VI CONTKNTS. 
 
 THE STAFF. 
 
 32. The diflerent departments of the stnfT; 33. AdjutaDt-f^cneral's 
 department; 34. The in^pcctor-Keneral's depnnnient : 35. The quar- 
 tci ii.:i? tcr's di'piirdncnt ; uf>. The (■<.niniis.--iir_v fU'parlinL'nt ; .17. The 
 engineer department: 38. The ordnanoo dc]'ar^nciit; SU. The pay 
 department; -10. The medical department. 
 
 ARTISLE II. 
 
 ARMS AND A :M M U N I T I N . 
 
 41. Fmall arms new in nsc ; 42. The fmcnth hore musket; 43. The 
 rifled musket — The cylindro-conical ball; 44. The "altered mus- 
 ket;" 45. The rifle (Minio); 40. Kiflcd eiirhine.'-' and breceh-loading 
 rifles; 47. Pi.«tols and pistol-earbine," ; 48. Pabris; 49. Artillery — 
 Guns — Ilowitzer.s — Jlortars — The difTcrent calibres of each in use; 
 50. Field guns — Siege and garri.-^on guns — Sea-eoast guns; 51. How- 
 itzer.'; — Field — Mountain — Siege and garrison — Sea-coast; 52. Field 
 howitzers; 53. Mortars: 64. Trunnions; 55. Field gun-carriages; 
 56. Caissons ; 57, 68. Cartridges for small arms, and how to prepare 
 them; 59. Ball, and ball and buckshot cartridges; (U). To till car- 
 tridges; fil, 02. Cartridges for elongal<'<l projectihs ; 03. How to 
 use them; 04. Cartridges for artillery — Fi.xed umnninition ; 65. 
 Dimensions, and how made; 00. The charges of powder; 67, 68. 
 Sabots ; 69. Canister shot, and how prejiared ; 70. To attach the 
 cartridge to the iinjcclile : 71, 72. Cartridge-blocks and paper-caps; 
 73, 74. Shells and their charges; 75. Si)bcrical-case .«hot ; 70. To 
 load spheri<al-case; 77. The fuse; 78,79. The Bormann fuse, and 
 how to use it; SO. Priming and friciion tubes; 81. Port-fires, and 
 their uses. 
 
 ARTICLE III. 
 
 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 
 
 82. (icniral directions; 83. Position of sddicr; 84-86. The facings; 
 iu. Balance step — Direct ste]) ; S8-92. Common time — Quicklime — 
 doubie-Cjuick step — Duulile-i|uick time; 93. (tcneral directions fur 
 manual; 94-141. Manual for the musket; 112-190. Manual for the 
 rifle; 191-190. The firings; 197. Bayonet e.xercise; 198. Salute 
 with the sword or sabre:' 199. Color "salute ; 200-203. The align- 
 ments; 204. To march to front; 206. Tfie oblique; 206, 207. The 
 doublc-fiuick and the about; 208-210. To march by a flank; 211- 
 215. AVheeliug and turning. 
 
 ARTICLE IV. 
 
 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 
 
 210. To form the company; 217. To open and close ranks ; 218-221. 
 The alignments; 222, 223. To slack arms; 225-2.;0. The firings; 
 231-236. To advance in line — The oblii|ue — Murk time — March in 
 retreat— The about; 237-239. To march by flunk; 240. On right by 
 file into line; 241. Marching by the Hunk to form com|>uny or 
 platooUM ; 242-245. Breaking into, and the march of a column of 
 platoons; 246-248. To iorm a column of platoons into line to the 
 
CONTENTS. Vn 
 
 left or right; 249, 250. A company marching in line, to break into 
 column of platoons, and to re-form company; 251. In column of 
 platoons, to break files to the rear ; 262-255. The route step ; 250. 
 The countermarch : 257. In column of platoons, to form line on the 
 right; 258-261. To form from two to four ranks, and reciprocally; 
 262. General dircctit>ns for skirmi.shers ; 263. Deployments; 264. 
 To deploy forward; 265. To deploy by a flunk: 266. To deploy on 
 the centre; 267,268. To extend and close intervals ; 269. To relieve 
 a company deploj'ed as skirmishers ; 270-27-3. The advance, retreat, 
 changes of directions, etc.; 274-276. The firings; 277-282. The 
 rally; 283. The assembly. 
 
 ARTICLE V. 
 
 TARGET PRACTICE. 
 
 284-296. The various rules for securing accuracy of aim and skill in 
 the use of small urins. 
 
 ARTICLE Yl. 
 
 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 297. To form the regiment or battalion ; 298. To open and close ranks ; 
 299. The firings; 300. To break to the right into column; 301. 302. 
 To break to the right and rear into column ; 30.3-305. To form close 
 column; 306-308. To march in column at full distance; 309-312. 
 To close the column to half distance, or in mass; 313, 314. In 
 column at half distance, or closed in mass, to take distances; 315- 
 317. In column closed in mass, to change direction; 318-320. In 
 column by company, to form divisions; 321. The countermarch; 
 322. Manner of determining the line of battle; 323-325. A column 
 at full distance formed into line of battle to the left or right; 327. 
 Successive formations; 328. On the right into line: 329,330. Col- 
 umn at half distance forward into line: 331-3.">2. Into line faced to 
 the rear; 333-335. Formation of the line of battle by two move- 
 ments; 336-339. Different modes of passing from a column at half- 
 distance into line of battle ; 340-343. Deployments of columns 
 closed in mass; 344-347. The advance and retreat in line of battle, 
 and the movements incident thereto; 348-350. The passage of obsta- 
 cles ; 351. To pass a defile in retreat; 352, 353. To march by a 
 flank; 354. To form the battalion on the right or left, by file, into 
 line; 355-357. Changes of front; 358, 359. To form the battalion 
 into double column ; 360-303. The deployment of the double column; 
 364-397. Dispositions against cavalry, or the formation of squares; 
 380. To deploy the battalion as skirmishers; 381. The rally. 
 
 ARTICLE VIL 
 
 SCHOOL OF THE TROOPER. 
 
 382-384. Directions for, and position of trooper before mounting; ?85. 
 To mount; 386. Position of trooper mounted; 387-3S9. The use of 
 the arms and logs; 390. To march: 391. To turn to the right or 
 Icit: 392. To the right or left about; 393. To make a quarter turn 
 to tiie right or left; 304. To rein back; 395. To dismount; 396. To 
 
Vni CONTENTS. 
 
 file off; 397-429. Exercises in the riditij^-liouse in single and in 
 double ranks; -1.10-432. Principles of the gallop; 4.13-438. The 
 wheelinfTS in single and douhle ranks, and on fixed and movable 
 pivots; 439-JG1. ."^abre exercise; 402— ItJO. Manual of carViine or 
 breech-loading rifle for horscraeu ; 467-409. Manual for Colt's 
 revolvers. 
 
 ARTICLE VIII. 
 
 SCHOOL OF THE TROOP. 
 
 470, 471. General directions — Mounting and forming ranks ; 472-476. 
 The alignments; 477. To open and close ranks; 478. To rein back; 
 479-48(1. To lircak the troop by file, and the direct march in file ; 
 481. The oblinuG march; 482-481. Th troop marching in column, 
 b_v file, to form it into line to the front, to the left, or on the right ; 
 485-487. To break the troop by twos and by fours, and the direct and 
 obli(iue march ; 4S8-490. The troop inarching in column by twos 
 or by fours, to form it to the front, to the left, or on the right into 
 line; 491. To break the troop by the left; 492. To break by twos 
 and fours at the trot and at the gallop ; 493, 491. To form the troop 
 to the left into one rank, and to tlie right into two ranks; 495-499. 
 To form twos and fours at the same gait, and to break by twos 
 and by fours at the same gait; 500-504. To form twos and fours 
 in doubling the gait, and to break by twos and fours in doubling 
 the gait; 505, 50C. Sabre exercise; 507, 508. Direct march of 
 the troop in line; 509. The countermarch; 510-512. The troop 
 being in line, to form it into column with distance, and the march of 
 this column; 513. The oblii(ue march in column; 514-521. In col- 
 umn, to break by fours, by twos, and b}- tile, and to form twos, fours, 
 and platoons at the same gait ; 522-527. The same movements in 
 doubling the gait; 528, 529. The al)out in column, and the halt; 
 530-532. To form line to left, and right; 533, 534. To form lino on 
 the right, and on the left; 535. To form front into line; 536, 537. 
 The formation of lines faced to the rear; 538-542. Movements by 
 fours, the troop being in column, with distance; 543-517. The 
 changes of direction of a troop marching in line; 548. Movement 
 by fours, the troop in line ; 549. The troop marching in line, to break 
 it by platoons to the right, and to re-form it; 550, 551. The troop 
 marching in line, to break it to the front by platoons, and to re-form 
 it; 552-557. The charge; 558. Rallying; 559. Skirmishing. 
 
 ARTICLE IX. 
 
 SCHOOL OF THE SQUADRON. 
 
 560, 501. The movements of the si|uadron ; 562. Successive align- 
 ments of platoons in the squadron; 563,564. To break from the 
 right to march to the left; 5()5. To break by platoons to the right, 
 and to advance; 500. To form line to the front by inversion; 507. 
 Break to the right by ])latoons, head of column to the left or half- 
 left ; 508. To form line faced to the rear, by inversion, on tlie rear of 
 the column ; 509. By ])latoons to the right, head of column to the 
 right or half-right; 570. To form lino face to the rear, by inversion, 
 on the head of the column; 571. The obliciue; 572. The oblique by 
 platoons ; 573. By fours about, and face to the front again ; 574. The 
 
CONTENTS. IX 
 
 about by platoons; 575. To break the squadron to tbe front by pla- 
 toons, and to re-form it; 57fi. 577. The passage of obstacles; 578- 
 581. Skirmishing; 582-587. The column by division. 
 
 ARTICLE X. 
 
 EVOLUTIONS OF THE REGIMENT. 
 
 588. Positions of the guides in column ; 589, 590. The alignments, 
 591. To break the regiment by four.s ; 592, 593. Form platoons, 
 and to break the platoons by fours; 594, 595. The same movements 
 in doubling the gait; 596-598. To form the regiment to the front, 
 to the left, and upon the right into line; 599. To form the regiment 
 into column, with distance; fiOO, 6fll. To break from the right, to 
 march to the left ; ()02-605. To form the regiment into close column; 
 606, 607. The inarch, and change of direction in column ; 608. Pla- 
 toons left about wheel ; 609, 610. By four.s to the right, and right 
 or left about: 611. The oblique; 612-620. Various methods of 
 forming a regiment into line of battle; 621, 622. The deployments 
 of a close column; 62.3. The march in line: 621. The regiment 
 marching in line to oblique by platoons: 625. To gain ground to the 
 right: 626. To march in retreat; 627, 628. The changes of front of 
 the Hue; 629, 630. The passage of defiles; 631, 632. The charge. 
 
 ARTICLE XI. 
 
 LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 
 
 633-635. Manner of forming the gun detachments, and posting the 
 cannoneers; 636-643. Loading and firing the piece; 644, 645. Mov- 
 ing the piece by hand: 646, 647. Changing po.sts and equipments; 
 648-650. Limbering; 651. Posts of cannoneers, the piece limbered; 
 652-656. To form the detachments, their posts, and changing posts : 
 657. Moving the piece by hand, when limbered; 658-660. Unlim- 
 bered and coming into action; 661. Movements with the prolonge ; 
 662. Service of the gun with diminished numbers : 663. Supply of 
 ammunition when in action; 664-666. Pointing and ranges; 667. 
 Comjiosition of the battery — The officers and men necessary to man 
 it; 668. Posts of officers, etc. ; 669. Manning the battery: 670, 671. 
 To mount and dismount the cannoneers: 672-684. To unpack, and 
 to perform various movements in column; 6S5-687. Various ways of 
 passing from the or<lcr in column to the order in line ; 688-695. To 
 pass from the order in line to the order in column ; 696, 697. To form 
 the double column iuto line ; 698-700. To advance, to change direc- 
 tion in line, and to halt: 701-717. Formations in battery: 718. To 
 ])ass from the order in battery to the order in column : 719-723. The 
 firings; 724-727. The changes of front iu battery; 728, 729. The 
 passage of defiles. 
 
 ARTICLE XIL 
 
 730. H mors paid by troops to the Preside-it, Governor, Gencral-in- 
 chief, Major-Gener.il. Brigadier-General, etc.. Members of the Cabi- 
 net, etc.. Foreign Ministers, Officers, etc.: 731. Compliments paid by 
 guards — Compliments paid by officers and soldiers to their superiors ; 
 
X rONTKNTS. 
 
 732. Artillcrj calutes; 733. Escorts of honor, liow formed and oon- 
 ductfd ; 734. Funeral honors — The escort fcr various grades — The 
 niutUK-r of coniluctinp tlie march, etc. : 7.'?5, 73(). Alaiuier of inspect- 
 ing infantry an>l cavalry ; 737-711. Forms of i)arude — Dress parade 
 — Review of infantry — Review of cavalry — Review of artillery: 712. 
 Ouard niounrin^ — Relievinj^ sentinels and guards : 743. Method of 
 escorting ami receiving the color of an infantry regiment; 744. 
 Method of escorting and riccivinp ihe standard of a cavalrj' regi- 
 ment : 746. Method of receiving one hody of troops by another; 746. 
 Manner in which orders should be written and eomniunicaled ; 747. 
 Ihe manner ol' eouducfing musters of the troops; 748. The roster, 
 or details for service, how made; 740. Sentinels are relieved, how 
 often — The countersign and jiarole — Duties of officers, non-commis- 
 sioned officers, and privates of guards — Manner of challenging — 
 Receiving the "grand rounds." etc., etc.: 750. (lencral arrange- 
 ment of the guards of a camp or position ; 7ol. The difl'erent kinds 
 of guards — Police guards — Pickets — (Irand guards — Outposts — 
 Patrols; 752. Strength and duties of the police guard — Duties of 
 the regimental officer of the day ; 753. Strength and duties of the 
 jiickets: 754—757. Strength and duties of the grand guards and out- 
 ]'osts — Manner of posting theiu, etc., etc. 
 
 ARTICLE XIII. 
 
 DUTIES OF CAPTAINS — COMPANIES — DUTIES IN CAMP 
 AND GARRISON, ETC. 
 
 758. Responsibility of eajitains: 759. Manner of issuing arms to vol- 
 unteer companies ; 7G0. The uniform and eiiuijunent of volunteers 
 and militia — 'J'he knapsack — lliivcrsa<k — Bedsa<'k — lilanktts, etc.; 
 761. Tents— The Sibley tent — The shelter tent— Tent knapsack — 
 Half-faced camp; 762. The "kit," or necessary' equipment for the 
 field; 763. Interior police of companies — Method of keejiing the 
 arms, etc., in order — The ration, how cooked and served : 704, 765. 
 Duties in camp and garrison—The reveille — ]{reakl:ist call — Trooji — 
 Surgeon's call — Dinner cul! — Retreat — Tattoo — Stublc call — Drum- 
 mer's call; 765. Daily duties — General officers of the day — Field 
 officers of the day — Regimental officers of the day — Their duties; 
 766. Ciuiiii of infantry : 767. Camp of cavalry ; 768. Cam)) of artil- 
 lery : 761I. Bivouacs; 770. Cantoniniiiis ; 771. Preliininaiics for the 
 march — The genera! — Long roll — Directions for the conduct of the 
 march: 772. The camping party — Going into camji — Details for 
 duty. 
 
 ARTICLE XIV. 
 
 THE STAFF. 
 
 773-778. Duties of the adjutant-general's department — Adjutant-gen- 
 erals and assi.-^lant adjutant-generals — Morning reports of brigades 
 anil divisions — Onlcrs, how dislrilmtrd — The parole and countersign, 
 how isiutd and to wiiom sent — Manner of folding the countersign — 
 Brigade and division inspectors — Adjutants of regiments — Morning 
 report of regiment; 779-785. Quartermaster's dei>arlmtnl — Quar- 
 ters, and the allowance of — Transportation — The forage ration — 
 Stationery — Camp and garrison eiiuipage — Depot, quartermaster's, 
 
CONTENTS. XI 
 
 etc.; 786-789. Subsistence department — The ration — Provision re- 
 turns — Issues; 790, 791. Tbe medical department — Surgeon's call, 
 and morning sick report; 792. The pay department. 
 
 ARTICLE XV. 
 
 BATTLES. ' 
 
 79.3. Tbe difiercnt kinds of battles; 794. "Wlun a defensive battle 
 should he given ; 795. Conditions to be satisfied in a deft nsive posi- 
 tion ; 796. Offensive battles ; 797. Tbe meeting of two armies ; 798, 
 799. The dificrent orders of battle; SOU-808. Tbe infantry— The 
 defence — Attack — Pur.»iiiit — Retreat — Means of prolonging the 
 engagement — Defence against cavalry — Against artillery— Attack on 
 artillery; 809-812. The jiosition of cavalry — The defence — Its attack 
 upon infantry — Upon iirlillery ; 8i;J-815. Position of artillery — 
 Defence — Attack. 
 
 ARTICLE XVL 
 
 COURTS MARTIAL. 
 
 Sl(i. Courts martial defined ; 817. What (ifTiiers eligible as members; 
 818. Kinds and powers of courts martial; 819. Who may asstmble 
 general ci'urts martial, and mnT.ncr of assembling them; 820. Niini- 
 bcr of officers necessary to compose a court ; 821. Revision ot the 
 proceedings, etc.; 822. RcginicDial and garrison courts; how con- 
 vened, etc.; 82.V828. Tbe tri!;l— Challenges— The oath of the mem- 
 bers, and of the judge advocate — The }>lea of the prisoner — The 
 examination of tie witnesses — The defence; 829-831. The findings ; 
 832-834. The sentence; 835. 836. Duties of the judge advocate; 
 637. Form of order convening a court; 838. Form of proceedings. 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 THE ARTICLES OF WAR. 
 
INTRODUCTIOX 
 
 GLOSSARY, 
 
 AisATia. A species of intrenchment; it consists of trees felled, and 
 laid witli their brandies sharpened and interwoven so as to present 
 a thick row of pointed stakes toward the enemy. Thej- are general- 
 ly used in front of field works: while the enemy is removing them 
 he is exposed to a destruetive fire from the defenders. 
 
 About. A technical word, to express the movement by which a body 
 of troops reverses its Iront. In infantry the about is always to the 
 right; in cavalry it is either to the right or left; and in artillery it 
 is to the left. 
 
 AccE.ssiBLE. A place is said to be accessible, by land or sea, when it 
 can be approached by a hostile force on cither of these sides. 
 
 AccouTnEMENTS. A term denoting the belts, cartridge-box, scabbard, 
 etc., of a soldier. 
 
 Action, in military language, is an engagement between two armies, or 
 any smaller bodies of troops. 
 
 An.ii'TANT. A regimental stafT-oflficer, who discharges all the duties of 
 detail of a regiment or military post, communicates all orders, forms 
 the battalion for drills, parados, etc., mounts the guards, and in the 
 manoeuvres assists the lieutenant-colonel. 
 
 AnJUTANT-GENERAL is the chief staff-officer of the army, division, or 
 brigade to which he belongs, and assists the general in the discharge 
 of his duties; he keeps the roster of the officers: makes details for 
 duty ; makes up the morning reports, returns, etc. ; publishes the 
 orders of the general ; and is the channel through which all reports 
 to and correspondence with the general pass. 
 
 Advanced — signifies some part of the army in front of the rest, as in 
 advanced guards, which alwaj'S precede the main body; it applies 
 also to any portion of the command which is thrown in front of tho 
 first line. 
 
 Advantage-groi'nd. a ground that gives superiority, or an opportu- 
 nity for annoyance or resistance. 
 
 Affair. An action or engagement; generally between small bodies of 
 troops. 
 
 Aide-de-Camp. An officer appointed to attend a general officer: he re- 
 ceives and carries orders, and discharges such other duties as may 
 be necessary. A brigadier-general is entitled to one, and a major- 
 general to (tco aides-de-camp. 
 
MV GLOSSARY. 
 
 Aim. The act of bringing the fire-arm to its proper line of direction 
 
 with the object to be si ruck. 
 Alaum is a sudden npprohencion of an attack, by which men take to 
 
 their arms, and stand upon their guard. 
 
 Alaiim Post is the place npp'>inted for every regiment or detachmcut 
 to assemble in case of alarm. 
 
 Ai-ert. Vigilant. 
 
 ALifi.\MKNT is the placing of men on the same line. In artillery it ap- 
 plies to the gun-curriages, caissons, etc. 
 
 Ally, in a military sense, implies a nation united to another under 
 treaty, cither offensive or defen.sive. 
 
 Ambuscade. A body of men posted in some secret or concealed place, 
 for the j)urposo of falling upon an enemy by surprise. 
 
 Ambcsh. a place of concealment for a body of troops intended for a 
 gurpri.se. • •> 
 
 A.MMf.NiTiON implies everything in the way of powder, balls, shells, 
 cartridges, canister and grape shot, etc., etc. 
 
 Appointments. Warlike habiliments, accoutrements, etc. 
 
 Appkkhend. Seizing or confining anj' person. 
 
 Api'Iioaches. The works that are carried on toward a work that is 
 bes^icged. 
 
 CoK/i/cr-AppROACHES. The works carried on by the besieged against 
 those of the besiegers. 
 
 ApnoN. In, gunnery, a piece of leather to cover the vent of a pieeo of 
 ordnance. 
 
 Arm. a term used to signify a particular kind of troops, as the infan- 
 try nnii, cavalry nriii. etc. 
 
 To Arm. To take arms, or prepare to meet an enemy. 
 
 Ahmed. Something provided with or carrying arms. 
 
 An Armed hodi/ <>/ men denotes a corps or detachment ready for an 
 engagement. 
 
 Armistice. A temporary truce. 
 
 Armory. A place for the construction of arms; also a place of deposit 
 for arms. 
 
 Armb. All weapons, whether of offence or defence. 
 
 Fire-ARWS. Any machine discharged by inflamed gunpowder. 
 
 Place of' Arms. A part of the covered-way of a fortification. (See 
 Forti/icalion.) 
 
 AuMY. An organized body of armed men coinniandcd by a general. 
 In time of peace, the whole organized military force of the state is 
 intended when we speak of the army ; in time of war this force is 
 broken up into several distinct bodies, ca';li of which is an army. 
 These armies arc named from the particular duty assigned them, as 
 the army of inriiHioii, army if Dcvnpatlon, etc.; or from the country 
 or direction iu which they ojjcrate — as, army of the North, army of 
 Mexico, etc.; or from the general who commands it — lis, army of 
 Scott, etc. An army is made up of a staff and administrative depart- 
 ments, and four distinct arms — Infantry, Cavalry, Artillei-y, and 
 
GLOSSARY. XV 
 
 Engineers: each having distinct duties, but all combiuing to form 
 one and the same military body. 
 
 Arrest. The depriving an officer of his sword preparatory to trial 
 for an ofiFence against military law. The order for arrest usually 
 designates the particular limits within which the officer is required 
 to confine himself. An officer under arrest must not call upon his 
 commanding officer without permission, and then it must be upon 
 business. 
 
 Breach of Arrest. Going beyond the limits prescribed in the order of 
 arrest of an officer. It is a grave offence. 
 
 AnsKNAL. A place of deposit for arms and other implements. Arse- 
 nals are sometimes nrsenttls of i-oimlnictinn, a term which signifies 
 that it is a place of construction as weil as deposit. 
 
 Articles op War. Rules for the better government of the army. 
 
 Artit.i-ery. Every sort of fire-arms of large calibre, as guns, mortars, 
 howitzers, etc., together with everything necessary for serving them 
 in the field, nt sieges, etc. Also, a term applied to the science which 
 treats of the construction and service of artillery. Also, a name 
 given to the troops which serve artillery. 
 
 Assault. A furious effort to carry a fortified post, camp, or fortifica- 
 tion. 
 
 Assembly. The signal to form by company. 
 
 Attack. An onset upon the enemy, either to gain a post or break 
 his ranks; or to divert his attention and make him divide his forces, 
 when it becomes a/alse attack. 
 
 Baggage. The clothing, tents, utensils, provisions, etc., of an army or 
 corps. 
 
 Band. A body of musicians attached to any regiment or battalion. 
 
 Banquette. A small elevation of earth three or four feet wide, and 
 four feet nine inches below the crest of the parapet, to enable the 
 shortest men to lire over it with facility. 
 
 Barbette Batteries are platforms raised behind a parapet to enable 
 the guns mounted on them to fire over the parapet, and sweep the 
 surrounding country. They are usually placed in the nalietit points 
 of works. 
 
 Barracks. Permanent buildings for the quartering of troops. 
 
 Barricade. To barricade, is to block up the avenues bj' which an 
 enemy might have access to any position. This is done by abatis, 
 wagons, etc. 
 
 Barrier. A passive obstacle. 
 
 Bastion, in fortification, is a work constructed at one of the angles of 
 a polygon, consisting of two faces and two flanks. It is so con- 
 structed that every part of it is defended by the flanking fire of 
 some other part of the works. 
 
 Battalion. Any body of infantry from two companies to ten, and 
 serving under the same commander. 
 
 Batter. A cannonade of heavy ordnance. 
 
XVI GLOSSARY. 
 
 To Batter i'm In-mrh is a honvy cannonade of many pieces directed to 
 a single point in the walls of a fortification. 
 
 Battehies The name piven to any place where guns, howitzers, or 
 mortars are mounted, cither for the piir])o.«e of attacking the enemy 
 or of hatlering a fortification. AVhcn a nuniher of pieces of artillery 
 are thrown together they also constitute a battery, as a mounted bat- 
 Irrt/, where from four to six or eight pieces are together, the can- 
 noneers serving on foot ; or a hurm-arlillrri/ hulltry. where the same 
 number of pieces constitute the battery, the cannoneers being 
 mounted on horses. 
 
 Battle. An action in which the forces of two contending armies are 
 engaged. 
 
 Bayonet. A kind of triangular dagger, with a hollow shank, which 
 fits over the muzzle of the musket, ritlc, or carbine. It is principally 
 u.^ed by infantry troops. A new form of bayonet has of late years 
 been introduced for use on the rifle; this bayonet is in the form of a 
 short sabre. It is called the sabre-boyoiict, and is intended for use in 
 the hand as well as on the rifle. 
 
 Behm. a narrow space between the ditch and parapet of a work, to 
 keep the parajict from falling into the ditch. 
 
 To Besiege. To lay siege to, or invest any place with an armed force. 
 
 Besieged. The garrison that defends a place. 
 
 Besiegebs. The troops that lay siege to a fortified place. 
 
 Bivouac. An army is said to bivouac, when, instead of camping in 
 tents, the men sleep around the fires, or make temporary shelters of 
 branches of trees, etc. 
 
 Body. Any number of men serving under one commander, as the main 
 body, etc. 
 
 Bombard. To throw shells from mortars. 
 
 Bheach. An opening in the works of a fortified place, made by the 
 artillery or mines of the besiegers preparatory to making an as- 
 sault. 
 
 Breech of a gnu. The portion from the vcut to the cascabel. 
 
 Brigade. Two or more regiments of infantry or cavalry, or both, 
 under the command of a brigadier-general. 
 
 Bri«ai)Ier-(ji;neiiai,. The commander of a brigade; an ofiBcer whose 
 rank is next above that of a colonel. 
 
 C. 
 
 Cadence. Uniform lime and pace in marching — an indispensable re- 
 quisite in the manoeuvres of troops. 
 
 Calibre, in gunnery, is the diameter of the bore of any piece of ord- 
 nance, or the weight of the solid shot which it carries. 
 
 CAis-iOX. A carriage for artillery ammunition; each piece of field 
 artillery is followed by its caisson. 
 
 Camp is the e.vtcnt of ground occupied by an army when under can- 
 vas. 
 
 Cami'Aio.n. The period of each year that an army is in the field. 
 
 Cannon. A general term for every form of artillery. 
 
(JLOSSARV. XVII 
 
 Cannonkeus. Soldiers who servo or manage pieces of artillery. 
 
 Cantees. a small vessel used by soldiers to rarr^* water, etc. 
 
 Cantonments. Troops are in cantonments when quartered in towns 
 and villages, lying as near as possible to each other. 
 
 To Capitulate is to surrender any place or body of troops to the ene- 
 my on certain stipulated conditions. 
 
 Capitulation. The conditions on which the garrison of a besieged 
 place agree to give it up. 
 
 Caponnieke, in fortification, is a ditch defence; they are of two sorts, 
 single or double. 
 
 Captain. The commander of a company. 
 
 Carbine. A species of fire-arms smaller than tha musket, a:id used 
 mainly by cavalrj". 
 
 Cartel. An agreement between two states at war for an exchange of 
 prisoners of war. 
 
 Cartridge. A case of paper or fl.vnncl, fitted to the bore of a piece, 
 and holding the exact charge of gunpowder. Cartridges for small 
 arms are made of strong paper, those for artillery are made of flan- 
 nel, or some other woollen goods. 
 
 Cartridge-Box. A box made of stout leather, attached to a belt 
 which is worn over the shoulder, or around the waist, and used to 
 hold cartridges for small arms. 
 
 Cascabel, in anillurj'. is the part of the gun in rear of the breech, 
 and consists of the neck and the knob. 
 
 Casemate. A chamber covered with a bomb-proof arch, in a fortificji- 
 tion, having an embrasure cut through the wall through which the 
 gun is fired. Used in fortifications on the sea-coast. 
 
 Cavalier. A work constructed in the interior of a bastion. 
 
 CwALRY. That portion of an army which serves and fights on horse- 
 back. 
 
 Chamber, of n mortar or howitzer. A cavity at the bottom of the 
 mortar or howitzer, intended to receive the cartridge. 
 
 CnARGE, in gunnery, ileuotes the tjuanlity of powder wi!h which the 
 piece is loaded. 
 
 In the evolutions, the charge expresses the advance of a body of 
 infantry to attack the enemy with ba^'onats fixed: or the rapid 
 attack of cavalry. 
 
 Chase of a gun. The length from the trunnions to the muzzle. 
 
 Chkek. The pieces of timber which form the sides of gun-carriages, 
 and upon which the trunnions rest : also, in fortification, the oblique 
 sides of the embrasure. 
 
 CnKVAL-DE-FRisE. A piscc of timber some six inches square, pierced 
 with many holes, through whioh pass pieces of wood some six feet 
 long, crossing each other at right angles, and pointed at the ends. 
 Tbey are used to stop up breaches, to block up the avenues of ap- 
 proach, etc. 
 Line of Circumvallation. An earthen work consistin:; of a low para- 
 pjtand trjujh, mxde around a plaee which it is iutendod to besiege. 
 Colonel. The commander of a re:'im3ut. 
 
XVI 11 OI,{)!?SAHV. 
 
 CoLon. Large silk flags fixed on wooden polof". 
 
 Cnmp C'liloii. Small flags, eighteen inches scpiHrc. and used to mark 
 the cidor line, points of wheeling, etc.; they are also carried by the 
 markers in th^ evolutions. 
 
 OoMDAT. A battle. 
 
 CoMMissART. An oflTicer charged with the purchu.'e and issue of pro- 
 visions for the troops. 
 
 Company. A small body "f from fifty to one hundred men, an<l com- 
 manded by a captain. 
 
 Convoy. A detachment of troops employed to guard any suiiply of 
 men, money, ammunition, provisions, etc., conveyed in time of war 
 to a town or ariny. 
 
 CoRPOiiAL. A non-commissioned officer of the lowest grade. 
 
 Corps. A body of troops acting together under one commander. 
 
 Countersign. A particular word which is exchanged between guards, 
 and entrusted to thos^e employed on dutj- in camp or garrison. 
 
 Court Martial. A military court for the investigation and punish- 
 ment of all ofl!"enccs commitled by officers and soldiers in resistance 
 of military law. 
 
 CuiRAS.siERS. Heavy cavalrj' armed with breastplates of metal, or 
 cuirasses. 
 
 A Curtain, in fortification, connects two contiguous bastions. 
 
 Dffence, in fortification, consists of all sorts of works that cover and 
 defend an array or place. 
 
 Defile. A narrow pas.^age or road through which troops can only 
 inarch by flunk, or with a very small front. 
 
 Deploy. To display, or spread out troops. 
 
 Depot. A place of deposit for military stores. 
 
 Detachment. A body of troops taken from an army for a particular 
 service. 
 
 Discipline. The instruction and government of soldiers. 
 
 Dislodge. To drive an enemy from his position. 
 
 Dismantle. To strip a town or fortress of its outworks. 
 
 DiTiii. An excavation or treiicli made around the works of a fortifica- 
 tion, from whence the csirth necessary for the construction of the 
 parapet is raised. Ditches are of two kinds — wet and dr}'. 
 
 Draooon.s arc a kind of cavalry who serve both on horseback and on 
 foot. 
 
 E. 
 
 Echelon. A position in tactics, when different bodies, whether the 
 divisions of a battalion, battalions, or brigades, follow each other on 
 difi'creiit lines. By this arrangement, both the front and one or both 
 flanks may be ])rotceted at once. 
 
 Elevation. In gunnery, the angle included between the hori/.on and 
 <hc axis of any piece of artillery. 
 
(Jl-OSSARV. XIX 
 
 EMBtiASfRE. In fortification, an openino; or aperture in the parapet 
 of a work, through which pieces of artillery are fired at the enemy. 
 
 EycEiNTE, in fortification, is the interior wall or rampart which sur- 
 rounds a place. 
 
 Encounter. Combat. Fight. 
 
 Enemy. One who is on the opposite side in war. 
 
 To Enfilade is to throw shot along the whole length of the enemy's 
 line. 
 
 Engineers. Officers charged with planning, constructing, and repair- 
 ing all fortifications and all defensive works; with planning the at- 
 tack and defence of military works, etc., etc. 
 
 Epati.ement. a kind of breastwork to cover troops in front, or on the 
 flank. 
 
 Epaulette.s. Shoulder-knots worn by officers. 
 
 Eprouvette. a small mortar for trying the strength of gunpowder. 
 
 Equipage. All kinds of furniture made use of by an army. 
 
 Establishment implies the quota of officers and men in an army, regi- 
 ment, troop, or company. 
 
 Evolution. The movement made by a body of troops when they 
 change their disposition. 
 
 Exempts. Men who, from their age or occupation, are not liable to 
 be called upon for military service. 
 
 Expedition. A voyage or march against an enemy. 
 
 FALSE-o/tirm. An alarm cither designedly or unintentionally created 
 by noise, reports, etc., without being dangerous. 
 
 FALSE-n^act. An approach which is made for the purpose of divert- 
 ing an enemy from the real point of attack. 
 
 Fascines. Long cylindrical bundles of twigs, intended to support the 
 earth in the parapets of field fortifications, etc. 
 
 Feint. A mock attack made to conceal the true one. 
 
 Field. The place of battle. A campaign, or the action of an army 
 while it is iu the field. 
 
 Field oncers. The colonel, lieutenant-colonel, and major of a regi- 
 ment. 
 
 Fight. Battle. 
 
 File. A line of soldiers drawn up behind each other. As a general 
 thing a file means two soldiers, the front and rear-rank men. 
 
 FiitE-AUMS. Every description of arms charged with powder and ball. 
 
 Flanks. The right and left of an army, encampment, battalion, com- 
 pany, etc. 
 
 Flank. In firtification, any part of a work defending another by a 
 fire along the outside of the parapet. 
 
 Foil. A blunt sword used in fencing. 
 
 Forage. The hay, straw, and oats required for the subsistence of the 
 horses of an army. 
 
XX (il^S.SAUY. 
 
 FuiK'K. Any hody cf troops assoiublcd for luilitary jturposes. 
 Foni.oiix-noi'E. Mi-n appointcl to make the fir:^t attack in tbc day of 
 
 bttttlo, or (o be the Brs^t to storm in a sic;re. 
 FoiiT. A fortified place surrounded by a ditch, etc. 
 Fortification. The art of surrounding a phieo by works so disposed 
 
 as to render it cajialile of a lasting defence against a bcsiegin;; armj'. 
 Field FouTincATiON is the art of constructing all kinds of temporary 
 
 works in the field. 
 Froxt. a word of command, signifying that the men are to turn to 
 
 their proper front. 
 Fi'flLKMAN. A well drilled, in'clligent soldier, advanced in front of 
 
 tlie line to give the time in the manual, etc. 
 FriiLOUGH. A leave of absence. 
 FfSE. A tube fixed into a shell filled with combustible materials, 
 
 which, when the shell is fired, burns and causes the shell to explode. 
 
 G. 
 
 Gabio.v. A cylindrical basket without bottom, and employed in throw- 
 ing up intrenchnicnts, etc. 
 
 Gallery. A passage in a mine. 
 
 Gakuison. a place where troops are (juartercd. 
 
 Gkserai, Ofkiceus. All officers above the rank of colonel. The only 
 grades iu our service are brigadier-general, major-general, and lieu- 
 tenaut-geucral. 
 
 Glacis. In permanent fortifications, the parapet of the covorcd-way. 
 
 Qrenade. a small shell thrown from the hand upon the enemy. 
 Used in defending a work. 
 
 Grape. A kind of shot. 
 
 Guard. A body of men whose dutj' it is to protect an army or place 
 from surprise. It also applies to troops kept to guard generals and 
 other persons, or public property, etc. 
 
 GriDONS. Small silk standards for cavalry. 
 
 Gu.N'i'owDEit. A comi)osition of sulphur, nitre (or saltpetre), and char- 
 coal, mi.xed together and granulated, which, if fire be applied to it, 
 bums with an cxiilosion. 
 
 ir. 
 
 Harass To annoy, perplex, hang upon the rear or flanks of a body 
 
 of men, or an army, or to interrupt the operations of a siege by 
 
 repeated attacks. 
 Haversack. A linen bag to carry a soldier's ratimis on the march. 
 IlEAD-gi-AKTEHS. The i)lace where the officer commanding an army, 
 
 or indepeudi-nt body of troops, takes up his residence. 
 Hilt. The handle of a sword. 
 Holsters. Cases I'or a hor.-ciuan's pistols, attached to the pommel of 
 
 the saddle. 
 
 Hosi'iTAL. A place appointed for the sick and wounded. 
 
ULltSSAKV. XXI 
 
 ]losT. An army. 
 
 Hostility — denotes a state of war between two nations. 
 
 llowiTZKR. A piece of artillery, chambered at the bottom of the bore, 
 
 and intended for firing hollow shot, canister, and, if necessary, cau 
 
 be used for firing solid shot. 
 
 I. 
 
 I.VFASTUY. Foot soldiers armed with the musket or rifle. 
 Inroad. Sudden and desultory invasion. 
 
 Inspectok-Gkneral. An oflTu'er whose duty it is to inspect the troops 
 • at stated times, and report the state of their discipline, elBciency, 
 
 etc. 
 I.NTnENcmfENT. Any work intended to fortify a post against the attack 
 
 of an enemy. 
 Invasion. The entrance or attack of the troops of a nation on the 
 
 dominions of another. 
 To Invest. To seize upon all the avenues of approach to a place or 
 
 town, so as to cut it off from succor. 
 
 Knapsa('K. A leather or canvas bag, worn on the backs of infantry 
 soldiers, and which contains his clothing and other/necessaries. 
 
 L. 
 
 Laboratory. A place where all sorts of fireworks are prepared, 
 whether for actual service or for display. 
 
 Lieutenant. The lowest grade of commissioned officers. 
 
 Line of Battle is the disposition of the troops for battle. 
 
 Links. Thongs of leather used by cavalry to fasten their horses to- 
 gether. 
 
 Litter. A sort of bed on which wounded officers and men are carried 
 o(T the field. 
 
 LoncMEXT. Possession of the whole or a part of the enemy's works. 
 
 LrNETTE. A small field work. 
 
 M. 
 
 Magazine. A place in which stores, arms, ammunition, or provi.-^ions 
 
 are kept. 
 Major. An officer next in rank to a lieutenant-colonel. 
 Martial Law. The law of war. 
 Match. A preparation to communicate fire to guns, mortars, mines, 
 
 etc. 
 MiNF.s. Subterranean passages dug under the walls of a fortification, 
 
 or under the works of a besieging army, for the purpose of blowing 
 
 them up by means of gunpowder. 
 Mortars. Short ciinuon with large bores fitted with chambers, and 
 
 used for throwing shells, stones, etc. 
 
xxii c;lossahy. 
 
 MrSTEn. A pjir.idi- of troops for the purpose of iiifpcctioD, au<I takiug 
 
 an account of tht-ir numbors. presence, etc. 
 MuTiKY. Any seditious or refractory conduct among soldiers. 
 
 N. 
 
 Nitre. A compound of nitric acid and potash, used in the manufac- 
 ture of gunpowder. 
 
 0. 
 
 Orpers. All such lawful directions as may be issued by a superior 
 officer. 
 
 Ohdnaxck. a general term fur all guns. Iiowitzers, and mortars. 
 
 Outposts. Bodies of troops posted beyond the bounds or limits of the 
 encampment. 
 
 OuTWoiiKS. in fortification, are the works constructed beyond the prin- 
 cipal works. 
 
 P. 
 
 Palisades. In fortifications, stakes made of strong pieces of wood, 
 
 and set in the ground. 
 Parallels. The trenches or lines made bj- the besiegers aroufld the 
 
 works of the besicj^ed. 
 Parapet. In fortification, an elevation of earth designed for covering 
 
 the soldiers from the fire of the enemy. 
 Park of Artillery. The place appointed for the artillery. 
 Parley. A conference with the enemy. 
 Parole. The promise or word of honor given by a prisoner of war 
 
 when permitted to be at large, that he will return at the time ap- 
 pointed. 
 Parole is also a word given out in orders for the imrposc of distin- 
 guishing friends from foes. 
 Party. A small detachment of troops emploj-eil upon niiy duty, as 
 
 fatigue party, etc. 
 Patrol. A small party under a non-commissioned offit'cr detached. 
 
 from one of the guards, to move from post to post, through streets, 
 
 along rpads, etc., to ensure vigilance, order, etc. 
 Paymaster. An officer charged with the payment of the troops. 
 Pickets. Outguards occupying the first line-l)eyond the police guards; 
 
 when attacked, the outposts and grand guards fall back upon the 
 
 pickets lor support. 
 PiLi.AfiE. Plunder. 
 Piom:i:rs. A small body of soldiers, provided with saws, axes, etc., 
 
 aii(l inti'iiiJcd to ilear the way for troops on the march, to work on the 
 
 iiitri-nchnKiils, etc. 
 Platoon. Half a company. 
 Pontoons. Small boats used to sustain the bridge across streams for 
 
 the passage of troops. 
 Poht-firk. A sort of match fur firing guns, etc. 
 Provost-Marshal. An otficcr whose duty it is to see punishments 
 
 put in force, secure prisoners, etc. 
 PyiiOTEtiiNV. Kvcrv kind of artitici;il fireworks. 
 
GLOSSARY. XXIU 
 
 Q- 
 
 QrARTER. To give quarter is to spare the life of a vanquished enemy. 
 QrARTERMASTEn. An officer whose duty it is to supply the quartets, 
 fuel, clothing, transportation, etc., to the troops. 
 
 R. 
 
 Rally. To re-form disordered or dispersed troops into regular order. 
 
 Rampart. A bank of earth raised about a place to resist the enemy's 
 shot, cover the buildings, etc. 
 
 Range. The, distance from the gun to the place where the projectile 
 touches the ground. 
 
 Rank. A line of soldiers drawn up side by side. 
 
 Rank and File. Non-commissioned officers and prirates. 
 
 Ration. The daily allowance of bread, meat, etc., to the soldiers. 
 
 Rear-guard. A detachment of troops which brings up and protects 
 the rear of an army. 
 
 Reconnoitre. To view and examine the country in which an enemy 
 is operating; to examine the approaches to an enemy's works ; ascer- 
 tain his position, strength, etc. 
 
 REDOfBT. A small work in fortification. 
 
 Regiment. A body of troops composed of ten or twelve companies, 
 and commanded by a colonel. 
 
 Reserve. A body of troops so posted as not to come into action until 
 near its close, or until a critical moment in the battle. 
 
 Retreat. To retreat is to make a retrograde movement. 
 
 Retrenchment. Any work raised to cover a point, and fortify it 
 against an enemy. 
 
 Ricochet. The rebounding of shot or shells after striking the ground. 
 
 Rosters are li.«ts or tables by which the dct.nils of officers, non-com- 
 missioned officers, and privates, for various duties, are regulated. 
 
 RoTTNP. A general discharge of cannon or small arms. 
 
 RouNPs. A visiting or personal inspection of the guards and sentinels 
 on duty. 
 
 RorT. The confusion created in an aimy or body of troops when de- 
 feated or dispersed. 
 
 S. 
 
 Sabre. A species of sword with a broad and heavy blade, curved 
 
 toward the point. 
 Sack. An cxpressiim used when a town has been taken by storm and 
 
 given up to pillsigc. 
 Safegiiari). a protection granted by the general of an armj' for 
 
 tome of the enemy's lauds or persons, to preserve them from being 
 
 insulted or plundered. 
 Sally. A sally, or sortie, is a secret movement of attack made by 
 
 strong detachments of troops from a besieged place for the purpose 
 
 of destroying the enemy's works. 
 Salute. A discbarge of artillery in compliment of some individual. 
 
 It also means the ceremony of presenting arms. 
 
XXIV <iI.i).s.SAUV. 
 
 Sand-Dags. Uii?;.s filled with oarth for the purpose of repairing 
 breiichcs, etc. 
 
 Scouts. Ilorsomcn sent iu advance or on the wings of an army to 
 discover the enemy. 
 
 Se.nti.vel. a ])rivate soldier placed upon a post, whose duty it is to 
 watch the motions of the enuray, prevent surprise, and in general to 
 enforce any 8i)ecific order with which he may be entrusted. 
 
 Seroeaxt. a non-commissioned oflScer. 
 
 SEnoKANT-MAJou. The first non-commissioned officer of his regiment, 
 and ai$sist.s the adjutant iu the discharge of his duties. 
 
 Service. Every kind of duty which a military man may be called 
 upon to perform. 
 
 Shells. Hollow iron balls thrown among the enomy from mortars 
 and howitzers. Bein;; filled with powder, and provided with a fuse 
 which sets fire to the contents, the shell e.xplodes. 
 
 Siege. The art of surroumlin^ a fortified place with an army, and 
 attacking it by means of batteries, mines, and trenches. 
 
 Skirmish. A loose, desultory kind of combat in presence of two 
 armies. 
 
 Sorties. Parties that sally out of a place secretly to annoy the be- 
 siegers. 
 
 Spherical-case Shot. Thin shells filled with musket balls, and fired 
 from a howitzer. 
 
 Storm. A vigorous assault on a fortified place. 
 
 Stratagem. A scheme or plan devised by a general to cover his do- 
 signs during a campaign. 
 
 Strategy. The ho.^tile movements of armies beyond the range of each 
 other's cannon. 
 
 SuKPRiSE. To fall upon an enemy unexpectedly. 
 
 T. 
 
 Traverses. Parapets of earth raised to cover troops from the enfilad- 
 ing fire of an enemy. 
 
 Trenches. Ditches made during a siege, to enable the assailants to 
 approach more securely. 
 
 Titooi". A company of cavalrj'. 
 
 Tuoriiv. Anything captured from an enemy. 
 
 V. 
 
 Vedettes. Sentries on horseback upon outposts. 
 
 Vent. The opening in fire-arms through which the fire is communi- 
 cated to the charge. 
 Volley. The simultaneous discharge of a number of fire-arms. 
 
 AV. 
 Windage. The difTereaee between the diameter of the bore and the 
 
 diameter of the shot or shell. 
 Wings. The right or left divisions of an army or battalion. 
 Works. Fortifications. 
 
MANUAL 
 
 VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA 
 
 Article I. 
 
 ARMY ORGANIZATION. 
 
 1. Every thoronghlj- organized army consists of one or more armr/ 
 corps, made tip of infantry and cavalry, with an artillery equipage of 
 one or more batteries, depending upon the strength of the corps, engi- 
 neer troops, bridge-trains, etc. 
 
 2. The infantry, from its powers of endurance, its capability of 
 operating successfully in almost every position, its entire indepen- 
 dence of the various casualties which sometimes completely paralyze 
 cavalry and artillery, ranks first in importance in the organization of 
 any army. The strength of the other arms is always based upon that 
 of the infantry, which long experience has shown should be about /our- 
 fiftht of the entire force. 
 
 The troops which compose the infantry are usually divided into 
 heavy and light ; these distinctions arise partly from the nature of 
 the weapons, and partly from their different destination on the field of 
 battle. The former is known as the infantry of the line, the latter as 
 light infantry and rifles. 
 
 The only arm of the infantry of the line of the present day is the 
 musket, provided with the bayonet, which in all the manoeuvres is 
 fixed to the piece. The rifled musket possesses all the essential quali- 
 ties of the rifle, together with the advantages peculiar to the musket, 
 making it a most efiBcicnt weapon in the hands of well disciplined 
 troops. 
 
 The infantry of the line should be so disciplined as to act as one 
 mass which knows no breaking; it should be prepared to deliver its 
 fire in line, in the face of an opposing foe ; to form in columns to 
 3 \ 
 
26 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 attack with the bayonet ; form into square to resist the charge of cav- 
 alrj' ; or stand unmoved under the fire of artillery. To it must be 
 confided cvcrylhing in the conduct of a battle which requires unyield- 
 ing firnincs.« — as the attack and defence of strong points, the formation 
 of attacking or sujiporting columns, the reserves, etc. 
 
 The hubituitl formation of the infantry of the line of our service is 
 in two ranks ; the men of each rank being side by side, with an inter- 
 val of thirteen inches between the backs of the men of the front rank 
 and the breasts of those of the rear rank. 
 
 .3. Light infantry may be armed with the mu.^kct, the .^amc as the 
 infantry of the line, the bayonet being worn by the side except upon 
 rare occasions, when it is fixed; or it maj' be armed with rifles, when 
 light infantry men become rijlcmen. The rifle now used is short, light, 
 easil)' carried on long or rapid marches, and possesses the additional 
 advantage of the stcord-bayotiet, which in a charge maj- be used like 
 the ordinary bayonet, or as a sword in the hand to hand engagement. 
 
 The duties of light troops are to open an engagement, and to do 
 their part during its continuance. They should cover the front and 
 flanks of the infantry of the line, in the advance of the latter, driving 
 the enemy out of all covers, etc.= — only retiring upon the main body 
 when too stronglj' pressed to maintain their position. Upon them 
 usually devolve advance-post, detachment, and advance and rear-guard 
 service. 
 
 Light troops form as other infantry when occasion requires, but the 
 habitual order of battle is the dispersed order, in which each man is 
 separated some distance from his neighbor, and must depend in a great 
 degree upon himself. 
 
 They should be expert marksmen, cool, circumspect, skilful in taking 
 advantage of their jjosition to secure cover, etc., and should bo pre- 
 pared to keep an enemy occupied for many hours at once, and maintain 
 their ground inch by inch. 
 
 All infantry now receives very nearly the same instruction, so as to 
 enable it to perform all the duties that may be required of the light 
 infantry soldier, making the distinction between heavy and light 
 troops much less. 
 
 The volunteers and militia of our country possess in an eminent 
 degree all the qualities requisite for both heavy and light troops, and 
 were they disciplined and well-instructed, as all must be to be truly 
 formidable, might serve in either capacity with as much efliciency aa 
 any other troops, let them come from whatever quarter they may. 
 
 4. "In all countries where military art is justly appreciated the car- 
 airy arm is placed in the second rank to infantry. To it an aimy is 
 often indebted for turning the scales of victory, and giving a decisive 
 
ARMY ORGANIZATION. 27 
 
 character to the issue. To it the infantrj, when exhausted by fatigue, 
 or broken, often owes its safety, and through the respite gained by its 
 charges finds time to breathe and re-form. Without it, much of 
 adranced-post duty, patrols, and detachment service, requiring great 
 activity, would be but badlj' performed. 
 
 "But the arm of cavalry by itself can effect but little; and in many 
 circumstances does not suffice for its own safety. The smallest obsta- 
 cles are sufficient to render it powerless ; it can neither attack nor hold 
 a post without the aid of infantry; and at night is alarmed, and justly 
 80, at every phantom. The proportion borne by the cavalry to the 
 infantry should vary with the features of the seat of war; being greater 
 in a champaign than in a broken or mountainous country. The pro- 
 portion of onc-fonrth of the infantry for the first, and one-sixth for the 
 last, is generally admitted by received military authority as the best." 
 — Mahan. 
 
 The essential qualities of cavalry, which distinguish it from all other 
 troops, are that of celerity, and the irresistible force with which, under 
 favorable circumstances, it bears down all opposition ; making it, when 
 properly handled, a trulj' formidable arm. 
 
 Cavalry, to be efficient, should unite several essential conditions: 
 horses and weapons in good condition; sufficient ground to gather 
 speed for the charge, and space for rallying; to have its flanks covered 
 to prevent a surprise; to be led boldly into action; and to be followed 
 by a support or reserve sufficient to cover a retreat, or secure it from 
 confusion if brought up unexpectedly bj' the enemy. 
 
 In European armies there is a marked distinction between heavy and 
 light cavalry, but in ours the distinction is more nominal than real — all 
 cavalry being called upon alike for the discharge of the duties of both 
 heavy and light troops. 
 
 When acting as heavy cavalry, its duties are usually confined to the 
 field of battle ; there, placed in reserve, it is held in hand until the 
 decisive moment arrives, when it is sent forth to achieve victory or 
 prevent defeat. 
 
 To the light cavalry are entrusted the duties of securing the heavy 
 cavalry from surprise ; of watching over the safety of the field artillery ; 
 of performing the services required of it by infantry divisions, and of 
 those pertaining to outpost and detachment service in general. 
 
 In our service all cavalry is armed with the sabre and Colt's revolv- 
 ing pistols, and some with breech-loading riJJes or carbines, of which 
 there are several different patterns now in use: as Sharpe's rifle and 
 carbine, Burnside's and Maynard's rifles. Hall's carbine, etc. 
 
 5. " The artillery is placed third in rank among the arms. Its duties 
 are to support and cover the other arms; keep the enemy from ap- 
 
28 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS ANH MILITIA. 
 
 proaching too near ; hold him in check ns he advances ; and prevent 
 his debouching at pnrticnlar points. To perform these duties it is con- 
 sidered that an allowance of one piece for ench ihoiiinnd men' of the 
 other arms, and one in reserve form the proper quota of this arm. It is 
 to be remarked, however, that this proportion supposes the other arms 
 in an excellent state of organization and discipline. In the contrary 
 case, the quota of artillerj' must be increased; for it inspires poor 
 troops with confidence, as they rely upon it to keep off the enemy and 
 cover their retreat." — Mahan. 
 
 Artillery is incapable of defending itself, and must always be pro- 
 tected by a sufficient force of cavalry or infantry. 
 
 Field artillery, like the other arm.«, is divided into lif/lil and heavy; a 
 division which results from differences in the calibre of the pieces, and 
 the manner in which they are used. The heavy field artillery comprises 
 the 12-pounder gun, and the 24 and 32-pounder howitzer; they are 
 generally reserved for batteries in position, and are seldom shifted 
 during an action. 
 
 The light field artillery is composed of the G-poundcr field gun, and 
 the 12-pounder howitzer. When the cannoneers arc mounted upon 
 horses during the evolution, it is called horse artillery ; when they 
 follow the pieces on foot, it becomes mounted artillery. 
 
 To the heavy artillery arc assigned the duties of occupying posi- 
 tions for strengthening the weak points of the field of battle; of 
 securing the retreat of the army ; of defending all objects whose pos- 
 session might be of importance to the enemy, as villages, defiles, etc. ; 
 and of breaking down all obstacles that protect the enemy, or check 
 the progress of the other arms. 
 
 The light pieces, serving as mounted artillery, follow the move- 
 ments of the infantry ; covering the flanks of its position, preparing 
 the way for its advance, and arresting that of the enemy. When well- 
 disciplined and skilfully handled, mounted artillery, by having the 
 cannoneers mounted upon the ammunition boxes, may be moved with 
 great celerity, and made almost, if not quite as efficient as horse 
 artillery. 
 
 The horse artillery, besides performing the same duties as the 
 mounted batteries, may be used with great effect at the decisive mo- 
 ments of an action. " When launched forth, its arrival and execution 
 shoubl be unexpected and instantaneous. Ready to repair all disasters 
 and partial reverses, it at one moment temporarily replaces a battery 
 of foot, and at the next is at another point of the field, to force back an 
 
 1 The proportion in our service is two pieces to every ouo thousand men, and one 
 in reserve. 
 
ARMY ORGANIZATION. 29 
 
 enemy's column. In preparing the attacks of cavalry this arm is 
 often indispensable, and always invaluable; brought with rapidity in 
 front of a line, or opposite to squares of infantrj^ within the range of 
 canister, its well-directed fire, in a few discharges opens a gap, or so 
 shakes the entire mass that the cavalier finds but a feeble obstacle 
 ■where, without this aid, he would in vain have exhausted all his pow- 
 ers." 
 
 6. Engineer troops constitute a fourth arm of service; as compared 
 with artillery, their relative numbers are about as two to three. They 
 are divided into the staff, guards, or fort-keepers, artificers, sappers 
 and pioneers, miners and pontoniers. 
 
 The officers constituting the staff are charged in time of peace with 
 planning, constructing, and repairing all fortifications and other de- 
 fensive works, etc.; in time of war, engineer troops are charged with 
 the attack and defence of military works, the laying out and con- 
 struction of field defences, redoubts, intrenchments, roads, etc.; in the 
 attack they form a part of the advanced guard, to remove obstructions; 
 and in retreat they form a part of the rear guard, to erect obstacles, 
 destroy roads, bridges, etc., so as to retard an enemy's pursuit. 
 
 ORGAN IZATIOX OF INFANTRY. 
 
 7. In the organization of infantry, the smallest number complete in 
 itself is the company, which varies in number from 50 to 100, rank and 
 file. 
 
 A captain, two or more Uentenante, from four to six eeryeants, and as 
 many corporah are attached to every company. The captain and 
 lieutenants are the officers, and the sergeants and corporals the iio»i- 
 commisaioiied officers of the company. • 
 
 The captain is responsible for the instruction, discipline, general 
 efficiencj', and moral tone of the company. 
 
 The lieutenants assist the captain in the maintenance of discipline, 
 and in the instruction. 
 
 The company is divided into two equal parts, which are designated 
 as the first and second platoon, counting from the right; and each 
 platoon is, in like manner, divided into two seetiona. 
 
 The company is formed into two ranks in the following manner : the 
 corporals on the right and left of platoons, according to height; the 
 tallest corporal and the tallest man form the first file on the right, the 
 next two tallest men form the second file, and so on to the last file, 
 which is composed of the shortest corporal and the shortest man. 
 
 The odd and even files, numbered as one, two, in the companj', from 
 right to left, form groups of four men, who, when they act as light 
 troops, are designated comrades in battle. 
 
30 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 8. The officers and non-coinmissioncJ officers of the company are 
 posted in the fuUowiug manner : 
 
 The captain on the right of the company, touching with the left 
 elbow. 
 
 The first sergeant in the rear rauk^ touching with the left elbow, and 
 covering the captain. In the manojuvres he is denominated covering 
 tergeant, or right guide of the company. 
 
 The remaining officers and sergeants arc posted as file-closers, in the 
 rank offile-clogers, two paces behind the rear rank. 
 
 The_/?r»( lieutenant opposite the centre of the fourth section. 
 
 The second lieutenant opposite the centre of the first platoon. 
 
 The third lieutenant opposite the centre of the second platoon. 
 
 The second sergeant opposite the second file from the left of the 
 company. In the manoeuvres he is called the It/t guide of the com- 
 pany. 
 
 The third sergeant opposite the second file from the right of the 
 second platoon. 
 
 The fourth sergeant opposite the second file from the left of the first 
 platoon. 
 
 The fifth sergeant opposite the second file from the right of the first 
 platoon. 
 
 The corporals are posted in the front rank, as directed in No. 7. 
 (Fig-1.) 
 
 The Regiment. 
 
 9. A regiment is composed of ten companies, which are habitually 
 posted from right to left, in the following order : first, sixth, fourth, 
 ninth, third, eighth, fifth, tenth, seventh, second, according to the rank of 
 the captain. With a less number of companies the same principle will 
 be observed, viz: the first captain commands the right companj', the 
 second captain the left company, the third captain the right centre 
 company, and so on. 
 
 The companies thus posted are designated from right to left, yjr»t 
 company, second company, etc. This designation is observed in all the 
 manoeuvres. 
 
 The first two companies on the right, whatever their denomination, 
 form the first division; the ne.xt two companies the second division; 
 and 80 on to the left. 
 
 In all exercises and manoeuvres, every regiment or part of a regi- 
 ment composed of two or more companies is called a battalion. 
 
 Every regiment is provided with a color, which is posted with its 
 guard, to be designated hereafter, oq the left of the right centre com- 
 pany; that company, and all on its right, belongs to the right wing of 
 
ARMY ORGANIZATION. 31 
 
 the regiment or battalion ; the remaining companies constitute the 
 left iciny. 
 
 To each regiment are attached a colonel, who commands it, and is 
 responsible for its general discipline and instruction, a lietiteiiant- 
 colonel, a major (sometimes two — senior and junior), a quartermaster, 
 commissary, paymaster, snrijeon, assistant luryeon, adjutant, sergeant- 
 major, qtiartermaster-seri/eant, and commissary-sergeant. The four first 
 named of these oflScers are iha field-officers of the regiment; the others 
 constitute its commissioned and non-commissioned staff. 
 
 Posts of Field-Officers and Regimental Staff". 
 
 10. The field-officers are supposed to be mounted, and on active ser- 
 vice must be on horseback. The adjutant, when the battalion ia 
 manoeuvring, is on foot; when on the march, or in action, he is 
 mounted. 
 
 The colonel's post is thirty paces in rear of the file-closers, and oppo- 
 site the centre of the battalion. The lieutenant-colonel and senior 
 major are behind the centres of the right and left wings respectively, 
 the junior major behind the centre of the battalion, all twelve paces in 
 rear of the file-closers. 
 
 The adjutant and sergeant-major are opposite the right and left of 
 the battalion respectively, and eight paces in rear of the file-closers. 
 They assist the lieutenant-colonel and major, respectively, in the 
 manoeuvres. 
 
 The quartermaster, surgeon, and other staff-officers, are in one rank 
 on the left of the colonel, and three paces in his rear. The (luarter- 
 master-sergeant is on aline with the front rank of the field music, and 
 two paces on its right. (Fig. 2.) 
 
 Pioneers, Field Music, and Band. 
 
 11. The pioneers (one for each company) are drawn up in two ranks, 
 and posted on the right, having their left four paces from the right of 
 the first company. A corporal of pioneers, selected from the corporals 
 by the colonel, is posted on the right of the pioneers. 
 
 The field music (two musicians to each company) is drawn up in 
 four ranks, and posted twelve paces in rear of the file-closers, the left 
 opposite the centre company. The principal musician is two paces in 
 front of the field music. The regimental band (not to exceed sixteen 
 musicians), if there be one, is drawn up in two or four ranks, accord- 
 ing to its numbers, and posted five paces in rear of the field music, 
 having a principal musician at its head. 
 
32 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 Colo)'-Gua7-d. 
 
 12. The color-guard of a regiment or battalion is composed of eiglit 
 corporals, posted on the left of the right centre company, of which 
 company, for the time being, the guard forms a part. 
 
 The front rank is composed of n sergeant selected hy the colonel, 
 ■who is called the color-lrarcr, with the two ranking corporals on his 
 right and left ; the rear rank is composed of the three corporals next 
 in rank; the three remaining corporals are posted in rear in the rank 
 of file-closers. The left guide of the color-companj', when the three 
 last named corporals are in the rank of file-closers, is immediately on 
 their left. 
 
 In battalions of less than five companies, there should be no color- 
 guard, and no display of colors, except at reviews. 
 
 General Guides and JMarlers. 
 
 13. There should be two tjeneraJ guides in each battalion, selected by 
 the colonel from among the sergeants (other than first sergeants) for 
 their accuracy in marching. These sergeants are denominated rit/ht 
 and left general guide, respectively, and are posted in the line of file- 
 closers : the first in rear of the right, and the second in rear of the 
 left flank of the battalion. 
 
 Three markers are required to every battalion; they are posted 
 behind the first company, in the rank of filc-closcrs, when the battalion 
 is in line, and behind the leading company or division whenever it is 
 in column. 
 
 The Battalion in Column. 
 
 14. For the march, in many of the manoeuvres, etc., the battalion is 
 in column. The column may be one of companies or of divisions; in 
 rare instances it is one of platoons. It may be a column right in front, 
 in which case the first company or division is in front, all the others 
 being behind it in regular succession; or it may be a column left in 
 
 front, in which the last cotnpanj' or division leads, the others following 
 in the inverse order of their numbers. 
 
 When the right is in front the guides of the column arc habitually 
 to the lff(, and to the right when the column is left in front. 
 
 The column may be one at full distance, at half-distnnce, or closed 
 in /nass ; in the first case the distance between the guides of any two 
 consecutive companies of the column is equal to the width of one of 
 the companies or divisions; in the second case it is one-half the width 
 of the company or division; and in the last case, that of the column 
 cloted in mns.v, the distance between the guides is six paces. 
 
ARMY ORGANIZATION. 33 
 
 Posts of (he Officers when the Battalion is in Column. 
 
 15. The colonel is on the directing flank, fifteen or twenty paces 
 from the guides, and abreast the centre of his battalion; the lieuten- 
 ant-colonel is on the directing flank, abreast with the leading company 
 or division, and six paces from the guide ; the majors are on the same 
 flank, the senior abreast with the rearmost company or division, and 
 six paces from the guide, the junior in a corresponding position abreast 
 the centre company; the adjutant is near the lieutenant-colonel, and 
 the sergeant-major near the senior major. 
 
 In a column of companies, the captains are two paces in front of the 
 centres of their companies; the right guide of each company is on the 
 right of the front rank, the left guide in a corresponding position on 
 the left: the lieutenants and remaining sergeants are in the rank of 
 file-closers. 
 
 In a column of divisions the senior captain of each division is two 
 paces in front of the centre of his division, the junior captain in the 
 interval between the two companies; the right guide of the right 
 company is on the right of the front rank of the division, the left 
 guide of the left company is in a corresponding position on the left; 
 the right guide of the left companj' is in the rear rank, behind the 
 junior captain, and the left guide of the light comi)ar,y is in the rank 
 of file-closers. 
 
 Brigades and Divisions. 
 
 16. Two or more regiments serving together constitute a brigade, 
 under the command of a hrir/adier-general. 
 
 Two or more brigades serving together constitute a diiision, com- 
 manded by a major-general. 
 
 Two divisions serving together constitute an army corps. 
 
 The army corps, when supplied with a due proportion of cavalry, 
 artillery, etc., comprises within itself all the elements of a complete 
 army, ready for any emergency. 
 
 The interval between two contiguous regiments in the same brigade, 
 division, or army corps, is twenty-two paces. 
 
 As often as one or more brigades or divisions, united in the same 
 line, manoeuvre together, each battalion will be designated by its num- 
 ber, according to its position in the line. The battalion on the right of 
 the whole is denominctcd firai, that next on its left second, the follow- 
 ing one third, and so on to the battalion that closes the left of the 
 line. 
 
 In line of battle, the general (the senior major-general present) has 
 no fixed pusition; he goes whithersoever he may judge his presence 
 necessary. 
 
34 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AXD MILITIA. 
 
 In column, be will huld himself habitually at its head, in ordor to 
 direct it according to his views. In the evolutions, he will place him- 
 self at the point whence be can best direct the general execution of 
 the movement. 
 
 In lino of battle, yeneraU of diriiiloiii place themselves at about 
 seventy paces in rear of the centres of their divisions. 
 
 Id column, they hold themselves on the directing flank, abreast 
 with the centres of their divisions, and at thirty or forty paces from 
 the guides. 
 
 In line of battle, yencrah of brigades place themselves at about forty 
 paces in rear of the centre of their brigades. 
 
 In column, they hold themselves at fifteen or twenty paces outsido 
 the guides, and abreast with the centre of their brigades. 
 
 R G A X I Z A T I X OF CAVALRY. 
 2'he Company. 
 
 17. The company in cavalry is denominated the imnp ; it is organ- 
 ized upon the same principles as that of infantry; its habitual forma- 
 tion is in two ranks. 
 
 When the company is in line, and acting singly, the officers and non- 
 commissioned officers are posted as follows : 
 
 The captain in front of the centre, one pace from the front rank. 
 
 The jiritt lieKtoiiant in rear of the centre, in the rank of file-closars. 
 
 The second ^iViifeiiaiif commands the first platoon; in the absence of 
 a third lieutenant, the second platoon is commanded by the nenior »<t- 
 tjeant. The chiefs of platoons are posted one pace in front of the 
 centres of their respective platoons. 
 
 The jimt genjeaiil in rear of the right, in the rank of file-closers. 
 
 The second and third sergeants on the right anil left of the company, 
 and denominated the guide of the right, and guide of the left, respec- 
 tively. 
 
 The fourth icrgeunt is on the left of the first platoon, in the front 
 rank, and counted in the rank; Iho Ji/lh sergeant is in a corresponding 
 position on the right of the second platoon. 
 
 Corporals on the flanks of platoons. 
 
 IJuglers twenty paces in rear of the centre. 
 
 IVie Squadron. 
 
 IS. Two companies united constitute the squadron. Each squadron 
 is composed of four platoons, distinguished by the dcuumiualiou of 
 first, second, third, and fourth, commencing on the right. 
 
ARMY ORGANIZATION. 36 
 
 The first and second platoons form the first diviai'on, the third and 
 fourth form the second division. 
 
 The senior captain of the squadron is denominated the captain com- 
 manding, the junior captain the second captain. 
 
 When the squadron is in line, the ofiScers and non-commissioned 
 officers are posted as follows : 
 
 The captain commanding at the centre of the squadron, the croup of 
 his horse one pace in front of the heads of the horses of the front 
 rank. 
 
 The second captain three paces in rear of the centre of the squadron. 
 He is charged with the alignment of the rear rank and line of file- 
 closers. 
 
 The senior first lieutenant commands the first platoon ; the junior first 
 lieutenant commands the fourth platoon. 
 
 The senior second lieutenant commands the second platoon ; the Junior 
 second lieutenant commands the third platoon. 
 
 Each of these officers is posted at the centre of his platoon, with the 
 croup of his horse one pace in front of the heads of the horses of the 
 front rank. 
 
 The senior sergeant is posted behind the first file from the right of 
 the first platoon ; he is principal guide when the column of squadrons 
 is left in front. 
 
 The second sergeant is behind the third file from the left of the fourth 
 platoon; he is principal guide when the column of squadrons is right 
 in front. 
 
 The third sergeant is posted on the right of the front rank of the 
 squadron ; he is the guide of the right, and is not counted in the rank. 
 
 The fourth sergeant on the left of the front rank ; he is guide of the 
 left, and not counted in the rank. 
 
 Tho fifth sergeant on the left of the first platoon, and counted in the 
 rank. 
 
 The sixth sergeant on the right of the second platoon, also counted 
 in the rank. 
 
 The seventh sergeant on the right of the third platoon; the eighth 
 sergeant on the right of the fourth platoon — both are counted iu the 
 rank. 
 
 The heads of the horses of the file-closers are at one pace from the 
 croups of those of the rear rank. 
 
 The corjmrals are in the front rank, on the right and left of their 
 respective platoons, and supply the places of sergeants when neces- 
 sary. 
 
 When guidons are used thoy are carried by the non-commissioned 
 officers on the left of the first and third platoons. 
 
36 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 The Regiment in Line. 
 
 19. The ret/imeiit is made up of five squn(lron.«!, distinfruished by the 
 denominations _^r»/, »<Tr»i(/, (hird, fourth, and Ji/th ; they arc formed on 
 the same lino, in the order of these numbers, conimencing on the right, 
 and with an interval of twelve paces. 
 
 This is the primitive and habitual order of the squadrons in regi- 
 ments. 
 
 When a regiment is to mount haota and taddleg is sounded; at 
 this signal the horses are saddled, bridled, and prepared to bo led 
 out. 
 
 At the signal to horse the first sergeants direct the men to lead 
 out. 
 
 The sergeants, corporals, and privates being in two ranks, in the 
 order of their platoons, at the heads of their horses, the orderly-ser- 
 geant ealls the roll. 
 
 The captain directs them to call ofl' by fours and to mount (see No. 
 3S.3), and on reaching the regimental parade reports all absentees to 
 the adjutant through the orderly-sergeant. 
 
 In ease of alarm or surprise to horse is sounded ; the men then 
 saddle, bridle, and mount with the utmost celerity, and repair to the 
 place of assembly, which is alwaj's previously designated. 
 
 The officers and non-commissioned officers of the Jield and staff of 
 the regiment are posted as follows : 
 
 The colonel twenty-five paces in front of the centre of the regiment, 
 having a chief bugler behind him. 
 
 The lieutenant-colonel twelve paces in advance of the centre of the 
 right wing. 
 
 Tlie major twelve paces in advance of the centre of the left wing. 
 
 The junior major, when there is one, twelve paces in front of the 
 centre of the regiment. 
 
 The colonel moves where his presence may be necessarj'. 
 
 The adjutant on a line with the front rank, two paces from the right 
 of the regiment. When the regiment marches in line with the guide 
 right it is his duty to give the points of direction, and superintend the 
 guides and the direction of the march. 
 
 The Ki-rycant-major on a line with the front rank, two paces from the 
 left of the regiment, lie is charged with the same functions as the 
 adjutant when the march is in line with the guide left. 
 
 The adjutant, assisted by the sergeant-major, is also charged with 
 tracing the lines. 
 
 The standard-bearer is placed at the last file but one from the left 
 of the front rank of the platoon on the right of the centre of the 
 regiment. 
 
ARMY ORGANIZATION. 37 
 
 General staff-officers (surgeon, paymaster, etc.), serving with the regi- 
 ment, twenty-five paces in rear of tbfe right of the first squadron, 
 according to rank. 
 
 The qitartermaster-aerjeant behind the adjutant, on the line of the 
 rear rank. 
 
 The general guides of the right and left arc placed in the rank of 
 file-closers, in rear of the sergeant-major and quartermaster-sergeant. 
 
 The trumpeters, formed in two ranks, arc twenty-five pace? in rear of 
 the centre of the regiment. 
 
 The trumpeters of a squadron acting separately are posted in the 
 same manner, but in one rank. (Fig. 3.) 
 
 Order of the Regiment in Column. 
 
 By Two or hy Four. 
 
 20. In this order the squadrons preserve an interval of twelve paces 
 between each other; the same as in line. This distance is measured 
 from the croups of the horses of the last files of one squadron to tho 
 heads of the horses of tho first files of the next squadron. 
 
 The colonel marches at tho centre of the regiment, on the side of the 
 guides, twenty-five paces from the flank of the column, having behind 
 him a chief bugler. 
 
 The lieutenant-colonel on the side of the guides, twelve paces from 
 the flank of the column ; he marches on a line with tho lieutenant 
 commanding the first platoon of the first squadron. 
 
 The major marches in the same direction as the lieutenant-colonel, 
 and on a line with the guide of the left of the fifth squadron. 
 
 The adjutant marches on the side of the guides, two paces from tho 
 flank, and on a line with the leading files of the column, to observe 
 the guides and the direction of the march. 
 
 The sergeant-major marches on the side of the guides, two paces from 
 the flank of the column, and on a line with the guide of the left of the 
 fifth squadron ; if the left is in front he executes on the side of 
 the guides what is prescribed for the adjutant when the right is in 
 front. 
 
 The qi0>rtcrmaster-sergeant having the right general guide behind 
 him marches on the side opposite the guides, two paces from the flank, 
 and on a line with the first files of the column. 
 
 The captains commanding march on the sides of the guides, four 
 paces from the flank, and abreast of the centre of their squadrons. 
 
 The second captains march on the side opposite the guides, four paces 
 from the flank, and abreast of the centre of their squadrons. 
 
 Theylr«< lieutenant of each squadron marches at the head of the first 
 
38 MANUAL FOR VOLl'NTEKRS AND MILITIA. 
 
 platoon, one pnoc in ndvancc of the first file, bnving the guiilc" of the 
 right on his right. 
 
 The chiefs of the otlicr platoons march on the .«i(.lc of the guides, 
 one pace from the flank of the column, and abreast of their first files ; 
 the filc-closcrs march on the side opposite the guides, one pace from the 
 flank, and on a line with the centre of their platoons. 
 
 They all march in a similar manner on the flanks of the column 
 when the left is in front ; and in this case it is the junior first lieuten- 
 ant who marches in the column at the head of the fourth platoon of 
 each squadron. 
 
 The guide who in line is posted on the left of the squadron marches 
 behind the last file of the squadron ; when the column is left in front 
 he takes post on the left of the officer commanding the fourth platoon, 
 one pace in front of the left file. 
 
 Order in Column of Platoons. 
 
 21. In this order the distance from one platoon to another, measured 
 from the men of one front rank to those of another front rank, is equal 
 to the front of a platoon ; that is to say, it is twelve paces if the platoons 
 are of twelve files; subtracting the depth of two ranks, which is six 
 paces, there remain six paces from the croups of the horses of the rear 
 rank of one platoon to the heads of the horses of the front rank of 
 the next platoon, a distance which is equal to half of the front of a 
 'platoon. 
 
 The colonel marches at the centre of the regiment, on the side of the 
 guides, tw;enty-five paces from the flank of the column. 
 
 The liiutcuaiit-coloiiel marches on the side of the guides, twelve paces 
 from the flank of the column, and on a line with the lieutenant com- 
 manding the first platoon of the fir.st squadron. 
 
 The major marches in the direction of the lieutenant-colonel, and 
 abreast of the file-closers of the last platoon of the column. 
 
 The (idjutnnt marches behind the left file of the first platoon to direct 
 the guide of the column ; he should occa.sionally place himself in front 
 of this file to satisfy himself that the guides of each platoon preserve 
 the same distance. « 
 
 The scrgtant-miijor marches on the side of the guides, two paces from 
 the flank of the column, and abreast of the file-closers of the fourth 
 platoon of the fifth squadron; and if the left is in front he executes 
 on the side of the guides that which is prescribed for the adjutant when 
 the right is in front. 
 
 The qiiartermasler-sci-gedut having the right general guide behind 
 him marches on the side opposite to the guides, two paces from the 
 
i 
 
 ARMY ORGANIZATION. 39 
 
 flank of the column, and on a line with the front rank of the first 
 platoon. 
 
 The captains ccunmatiding march on the side of the guides, four 
 paces from the flank of the column, and habitually abreast of the 
 centre of their squadrons. 
 
 The neroiid captains march on the side opposite to the guides, four 
 paces from the flank of the column, and abreast of the centre of their 
 squadrons. 
 
 The first and second lieutenants march at the centre of their platoons, 
 one pace from the front rank ; those who command the platoons at the 
 head of squadrons preserve, besides their distance, the ground neces- 
 sary to enable each squadron, in wheeling into line, to maintain its 
 interval. 
 
 The sergeants who are file-closers march on the side opposite to the 
 guides, behind the third file of their platoons. 
 
 When the column marches right in front the guide at the right of 
 each squadron marches on the right of the first platoon ; and the guide 
 of the left places himself as file-closer behind the second file from the 
 left of the fourth platoon. 
 
 T he post of these sergeants is the reverse when the left is in front. 
 (JFig- 4.) 
 
 Order in Column of Divisions. 
 
 22. The colonel, licutenant-colunel, major, and adjutant are posted as 
 in the column of platoons. 
 
 It is the same for the captains commanding/ and the second captains. 
 
 The senior Jirst lieutenant commands the first division, the other Jirst 
 lieutenant the second ; they remain, however, at the centre of their pla- 
 toons. 
 
 All the other officers and sergeants of each division are posted as 
 prescribed in the order in column of platoons, the file-closers remaining 
 in their places, on whatever side the guide may be. (Fig. 5.) 
 
 Order in close Column of Squadrons. 
 
 23. In this order the distance from one squadron to another is 
 twelve paces, measured from the croups of the horses of the rear rank of 
 one squadron to the heads of the horses of the front rank of the next 
 squadron. 
 
 The colonel, iieutenant-colonel, and major are posted as in column of 
 platoons. 
 
 The adjutant marches behind the left guide of the first squadron, on 
 the alignment of the file-closers, to superintend the direction of the 
 march. 
 
40 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 Th^»rrg<^ant-)nnjor is posted as in column of platoons, and when the 
 left is in front he performs the same duties as the adjutant when the 
 ri;;ht is in front. 
 
 The qiiarteniinstcr-sfrgfniit inarches on the side opposite the guides, 
 as in column of platoons. 
 
 The <7«ii/c u/ (he left of the left wing of the first squadron moves to 
 the front, ou the alignment of the ofDoers; ho is replaced by the sergeant 
 file-closer of the fourth platoon. If the left is in front the guide of 
 the right of the fifth squadron places himself on the alignment of the 
 officers to serve as guide: he is replaced by the sergeant file-closer of 
 the first platoon. 
 
 All the oflicers of the squadron, and the file-closers remain posted as 
 in the order of battle, except the captains commanding, who march on 
 the sides of the guides, four paces from the flank, and on a line with 
 the officers of their squadrons. (Fig. 6.) 
 
 Cavalry Brigades and Divisions. 
 
 24. Two or more regiments of cavalry constitute a brigade ; and two 
 or more brigades constitute a division. They are ofliccred in the same 
 manner as infantry brigades and divisions. 
 
 Mi.xed brigades and divisions, composed of regiments of infantry 
 and cavalr}', arc sometimes formed. 
 
 ORGANIZATION OF FIELD ARTILLERY. 
 
 25. Field artillery is always formed into batteries. A battery may be 
 composed of fonr, six, or eight pieces ; the pieces maj- be all 6-pounder 
 or 12-pounder guns, or it may be composed of O-pounder guns and 
 12-pounder howitzers, or 12-pounder guns and 2-t or 32-pounder how- 
 itzers. 
 
 The number of guns should be double that of the howit/.ers ; for a 
 defensive war, from l-4th to l-5th of the pieces should be 12-pounder 
 guns and 24 or 32-pounder howitzers. For an offensive war, from l-7th 
 to l-8th only should bo of these calibres, otherwise the batteries could 
 not be moved with sutneient celerity. 
 
 Each ]]icce is followed by a caisson for ammunition ; each piece and 
 caisson is drawn by four or six horses. 
 
 26. A l)attery of six pieces will bo supposed: it is divided into three 
 sections, the right, centre, and left; each containing two pieces and 
 two caissons. In each section the pieces are denominated right pieces 
 and left pieces. 
 
 The battery is also divided into half-batterie.o, denominated right 
 and left half-batteries. 
 
ARMY ORGANIZATION. 41 
 
 The word joj'ece applies to the gun or howitzer, either with or without 
 its limber; and sometimes to the piece and caisson together. 
 
 The officers and men required for the service of the battery are as 
 follows : 
 
 One captain, who commands the battery. 
 
 Four lieitteitanls ; the first in rank commanding the right section (of 
 two pieces), the second the left, the third the centre, and the fourth the 
 line of caissons. When half-batleries are formed, the first commands 
 the right, and the second the left. 
 
 Six mounted sergeantu, each charged with guiding and superintend- 
 ing a piece. 
 
 Twenty-four or thirty-six drivem, being one to each pair of horses. 
 
 Six detachments of cannoneem, each containing nine men in mounted 
 batteries, and eleven in horse artillerj', including the chief of the caii- 
 soH, and the gunner who commands the detachment. In each detach- 
 ment of horse artillery the two last extra men are horne-holden, who 
 hold the horses of the detachment while it is serving the piece. 
 
 Two trumpeters or buglers. One guidon. 
 
 Order in Line. 
 
 27. The order in line is that in which the carriages are formed in two 
 lines; the horses all facing the same direction (to the front), the pieces 
 limbered, and each followed or preceded by its caisson. 
 
 The interval between the carriages in a mounted battery is fourteen 
 yards; in a horse-artillery battery it is seventeen yards. 
 
 The distance between the two lines in a mounted battery, measured 
 from the rear of the carriages of one line to the heads of the horses of 
 the second, is two yards; iu horse artillerj', the detachments being two 
 yards in rear of their pieces, the second line is two j-ards iu rear of 
 them. 
 
 In a mounted battery the cannoneers are at their posts. 
 
 The captain is four yards in front of the centre ; but during the 
 manoeuvres he goes wherever his presence may be most necessary, and 
 where his commands may be best heard. 
 
 Each chief of section is iu line with his leading drivers, and midway 
 between the leading carriages of his section. 
 
 The chief of the line of caissons is opposite the centre, four yards 
 behind the rear line of carriages. 
 
 Each chief of piece is on the left, and near the leading driver of his 
 leading carriage. In horse artillery, when the chiefs of caissons are 
 mounted, each chief of carriage is near its leading driver on the left. 
 
 The trumpeter is near the captain. (Fig. 7.) 
 4 
 
42 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS ANP MILITIA. 
 
 Order in Column. 
 
 28. Tho order in column is that in which the battery is formed by 
 sections: the carria^^cs being in two files, and each piece being fol- 
 lowed or preceded bj' its caisson. 
 
 In a mounted battery the interval between the two pieces of each 
 section of the column is fourteen yards; the distance between the car- 
 riages is two yards. The cannoneers are in file on each side of their 
 pieces. 
 
 In horse artillery the interval between carriages is seventeen yards. 
 The distance between the carriages and detachments is two yards. 
 The detachments, formed in two ranks, are two yards in rear of th^ir 
 pieces. 
 
 The captain is generally fourteen yards from the column, and oppo- 
 site the centre. 
 
 Each chief of section is in line with his leading drivers, and midway 
 between his leading carriages. 
 
 The chief of the line of caisgons is in line with the captain, on the 
 same side of the column, and four yards from it; but he does not 
 change his position to conform to that of the captain. 
 
 The chiefs of pieces and caissons are posted as in line. (Fig. 8.) 
 
 Order in Battery. 
 
 29. The order in battery is that in which the pieces are prepared for 
 firing; the pieces, limbers, and caissons being turned toward the 
 enemy, and formed in three parallel lines. 
 
 In a mounted battery the interval between the carriages is fourteen 
 yards. The distance between the lines of pieces and limbers is six 
 yards, measured from the end of the handspike to the heads of the 
 leading horses. Tho distance between the lines of limbers and caissons 
 is eleven yards, measuring from the rear of the limbers to the heads of 
 the leading horses of the caissons. The cannoneers are at their posts. 
 
 In horse artillery the interval between the pieces is seventeen yards. 
 The distances between the lines are the same as for the mounted bat- 
 tery. The cannoneers arc at their posts, and tho detachments of 
 horses are four yards in rear of the limbers. 
 
 The captain is generally on tho left of the chief of the centre sec- 
 tion ; but ho may go wherever his presence is required. 
 
 Each chief of section is habitually in the centre of his section, half- 
 way between the lines of pieces and limbers. 
 
 The chief of the line of caissonii is opposite the centre, four j'ards in 
 rear of the line of caissons. 
 
 Each chief of piece is outside the file on the left of his piece, but 
 
ARMY ORGANIZATION. 43 
 
 near it, and opposite the middle of the trail handspike. During the 
 executions of the firings he habituallj' dismounts and gives the reins 
 of his horse to the driver of the wheel-horses of the limber. 
 
 Each chief of caisson is on the left, and four yards in rear of the 
 limber of the piece. In horse artillery he gives the reins of his torse 
 to the driver of the wheel-horses of the caissons. (Fig. 9.) 
 
 Two or more Batteries united. 
 
 30. When necessarj', two or more batteries may be united: they may 
 be formed by sections in one or more parallel columns, or in two 
 columns joined, and presenting a front of four pieces with the same 
 intervals as in line. Sometimes they are formed in close column with 
 a front of four or six pieces, and the batteries being placed a distance 
 apart equal to the interval between two pieces. When the batteries 
 are in line the intervals between them are twice the intervals between 
 the pieces. 
 
 The Position of Artillery. 
 
 31. Artillery seldom or never acts in an independent capacity, but in 
 conjunction with either infantry or cavalry, or both. 
 
 The positions usually assigned batteries are on the flanks, or in the 
 intervals between regiments and brigades, these intervals being in- 
 creased suflSciently to admit them. When a battery is brought into 
 action it is usually thrown forward some sixty paces in front of the 
 main line. 
 
 Two mounted batteries arc usually assigned to each division of 
 infantry, and one of horse artillery to every division of cavalry. 
 Besides, for each army corps of infantry, there is a reserve of several 
 batteries. 
 
 THE STAFF. 
 
 32. The well-being and eflRcicncy of an army must depend in a large 
 degree upon the thorough organization of the various departments of 
 the Staff. 
 
 These are ; 
 
 An Adjutant-General's Department. 
 An Inspector-General's Department. 
 A Quartermaster's Department. 
 A Commissary Department. 
 An Engineer Department. 
 An Ordnance Department. 
 A Pay Department. 
 A Medical Department. 
 
44 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 33. The officers of the afljutant-^eneral's department are, an adju- 
 tant-ijcnernl, with such rank as inav bo assi^rned him hy lepislative 
 enactment, usually that of colonel or brigadior-geueral, with as many 
 amUtant ndJHtitnt-ri'>nernl» as the exigencies of the service may require. 
 
 The adjutaut-gcneral should be the chief of the staff of the com- 
 mander-in-chief. He is the regular channel through which command- 
 ers of corps and chiefs of departments communicate with the com- 
 mander-in-chief: and all orders, special instructions, and general 
 regulations, issueil by the ooniniaudcr-in-chief relative to the organiza- 
 tion, discipline, and instruction of the forces, are prepared and pub- 
 lished by the a<ljutant-gencral, conformably to the direction of the 
 commander-in-chief. 
 
 When the commander-in-chief takes the field the adjutant-general 
 should accompany him : when an army in the field is under the com- 
 mand of any general not the gcneral-in-chief, an assistant adjutant- 
 general is assigned to him as chief of his stafi". 
 
 An assistant adjutant-general with the rank of captain, is assigned 
 to the commander of each brigade, and one with the rank of major is 
 assigned to the general of every division. In each case the assistant 
 adjutant-general is the chief of staff of his general, and his duties are 
 of the same general nature as those of the adjutant-general. 
 
 An adjutant is the chief of staff of his regiment. 
 
 34. The officers of the inspector-general's department are, one or 
 more innpector-geiierah, with a division iiisjjector for each division, and 
 a brigade inspector for each brigade. 
 
 To the inspector-general and the division and brigade inspectors 
 are assigned the duties of inspecting the troops, fortifications, camps, 
 etc., at stated times ; and division and brigade inspectors are specially 
 entrusted with the instruction of regimental officers. The militia laws 
 of Virginia, and some of the other states, impose all the duties of this 
 department upou that oi' the adjutant-general, in which case the divis- 
 ion and brigade inspectors become the chiefs of staff of their divisions 
 and brigades, and discharge all the duties which usually devolve upon 
 the assistant adjutant-general. 
 
 35. The officers of the quartermaster's department are, a quarter- 
 master-general, who has the control of the department, one or more 
 assistant quartermaster-generals, quartermasters, and asuistant quarter- 
 masters. 
 
 The duties of this department are, to provide quarters and transpor- 
 tation for the troops; storage and transportation for all army supplies; 
 clothing for the troops; camp and garrison equipage; cavalry and 
 artillery horses ; fuel; forage; straw, and stationery. 
 
 3(j. The officers of the commissary department are, a commissari/- 
 
ARMY ORGAMZATIOX. 45 
 
 geuerni, one or more asiistant eommi'>iinn/-generfih, and as many com- 
 missaries and atsistnnt comminsaries as the exigencies of the service 
 may require. 
 
 To this department are assigned the duties of providing all the sup- 
 plies necessary for the subsistence of the troops. 
 
 37. The officers of the engineer department are, a chief engineer, and 
 as many officers of engineers as may be necessary to give efficiency to 
 the department. 
 
 The duties of this department usually relate to the construction of 
 permanent and field fortifications; works for the attack and defence 
 of places ; for the passage of rivers; for the movements and operations 
 of troops in the field, and .such reconnoissances and surveys as may be 
 required for these objects. 
 
 38. The ordnance department is officered in the same manner as that 
 of the engineers. 
 
 This department has charge of all arsenals and armories ; all cannon 
 and artillery carriages and equipments ; all apparatus and machines 
 for the .service and manceuvres of artillery; all small arms and accou- 
 trements and horse equipments ; all ammunition, and all materials for 
 the construction of munitions of war. 
 
 39. The officers of the pay department are, n, paymaster-general, one 
 or more deputy paymaster-generals, and one paymaster, ordinarily, to 
 every regiment. When large bodies of troops are serving together, the 
 number of paymasters may be very much reduced without detriment to 
 the service. 
 
 To this department belong all the duties pertaining to the payment of 
 the troops when they are in service. 
 
 40. The officers of the medical department are, a surgeon-general , with 
 one surgeon to each regiment, and such other surgeons and assistant 
 surgeons as a proper attention to the health of the troops maj- require. 
 
 The senior medical officer on dutj' with any corps in the field, unless 
 otherwise specially ordered by the commanding officer, will be, ex 
 officio, the medical director, and will have the general control of the 
 medical officers, and the supervision of the hospitals under their charge. 
 
46 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 Article II. 
 
 ARMS. 
 
 41. The principal small arms used in warfare at the present day are 
 the common or smooth bore musket with percussion lock, the rifled 
 musket, the rifle with elongated ball, rifled carbines, pistols, and sabres. 
 
 42. The smooth bore musket (U. S. service pattern) is four feet ten 
 inches in length from the but to the muzzle; is provided with a bayonet 
 eighteen inches in length, which fits upon the outside of the muzzle, and 
 locks, so as to prevent its removal by an adversary' ; it has a bore of 
 0.69 of an inch in diameter, and carries a leaden ball running 32 to the 
 pound. The musket with its bayonet weighs ten pounds nearly. The 
 fire of the musket is inaccurate, but in a general action, where accuracy 
 of. fire is not attainable, it may be made efTective up to 300 yards; be- 
 yond 400 yards it is useless. 
 
 This arm is being rapidly superseded bj' the rifled musket, or Minie 
 musket, as it is sometimes called. 
 
 43. The rifled musket is nothing but the common musket "rifled ;" 
 the groove! are three in number, thej' are of equal width, and equal in 
 width to the "lands ;" the twist of the grooves is a uniform spiral of 
 one turn to six feet in length ; the grooves are very shallow at the muz- 
 zle (0.005 of an inch), and deepen slightly as they go down to the 
 breech. The projectile, instead of being round, as in the common 
 musket, is made ri/lhidi-o-conicnl, the cylindrical portion having three 
 grooves around it, and the base or bottom being hollowed out in a coni- 
 cal form. Fig. 10 is a representation of the exterior of the ball, and 
 fig. 11 is a section through it showing the shape of the grooves and the 
 cone at the base. The object of giving the ball a pointed form is that 
 it may meet with the least possible resistance in its flight through the 
 air; the effect of the grooves is, by the action of the air upon them, to 
 keep the point of the ball in front, and cause it to strike first; the ob- 
 ject of making it hollow at the base is to make it expand when the 
 piece is fired, thereby causing it to fill the grooves, and follow them in 
 its passage out of the piece. 
 
 The dimensions of the rifled musket (U. S. pattern) are as follows: 
 length without bayonet, four feet eight inches; with bayonet fixed, six 
 feet two inches; weight, ten pounds; diameter of bore, 0.58 of an 
 inch ; weight of ball, 500 grains. 
 
 44. The "altered musket" of the U. S. service is the old pattern 
 musket rifled; the principal difi"ercuce between this and the new rifled 
 
ARMS. 47 
 
 musket being that the altered musket has a larger bore, its diameter 
 being 0.69 of an inch. The ball carried by it is heavier, weighing 730 
 grains, and a heavier charge of powder is necessary. 
 
 46. The rijle, or Minie rifle, as it is generally called, is rifled in 
 the same manner as the muskets ; the diameter of the bore is 0.58 of an 
 inch, the same as the new musket, and the same ball is used: it is 
 shorter than the musket, being but four feet one inch in length without 
 the bayonet, and not quite si.\ feet with the bayonet fixed; its weight 
 is greater than that of the musket, it being, without the bayonet, ten 
 pounds within a small fraction, and thirteen with it. The bayonet is 
 not quite twenty-two inches in length ; it is made in the form of a 
 heavy sabre, but slightly curved near the point. It is usually worn at 
 the side, and is only fi.xed when pressed by cavalry or in ii charge. 
 
 46. There are several forms of rifles and carbines which are more or 
 less in use by mounted troops, as Colt's repeating carbines and repeat- 
 ing rifles, Maynard's, Burnside's, and Sharpe's rifles, and Sharpe's car- 
 bine, all of which are breech-loading arms. Colt's arms are intended 
 for both round and elongated balls ; in the others the elongated ball is 
 alone used. 
 
 47. The pistols in general use at this time are the largest size of 
 Colt's repeaters ; they are rifled, and may be used as carbines by the 
 attachment of an '' a<ljustable breech." 
 
 There is also a "pistol carbine" manufactured by the U. S. ord- 
 nance department; it is rifled, has the same bore as the rifle and rifle 
 musket, and the same ball may be used, although a ball with a larger 
 cavity than that of the rifle ball is preferable. This arm may be used 
 as a pistol or carbine — in the latter case an adjustable breech becomes 
 necessary. 
 
 48. All cavalrj' and artillery troops are armed with sabres. The U. 
 S. cavalry and artillery sabres have steel scabbards, are forty-three 
 and thirty eight inches long respectively, and are attached to " sling " 
 belts, which are worn around the waist. 
 
 49. The fire-arms used in artillery are divided into three classes, 
 f/ii)i», hoict'izcrs, and mortars. Guns are used to throw solid shot, which 
 cut by their force of percussion, hence they are always fired with large 
 charges of powder, say from one-fifth to one-half the weight of the 
 ball. They are used to strike an object direct, and at a distance; or by 
 their ricvchet fire for reaching objects not attainable by direct fire. 
 They are also used to batter down the walls of fortifications. They 
 are always designated bj- the weight of solid shot which they carry. 
 
 There are nine difi'erent calibres, which are divided into three classes ; 
 they are 6, 12, 18, 24, 32, and 42-pounders, and 8, 10, and 15-inch 
 columbiads. 
 
48 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 50. The 6 and 12-poundcr8, usually made of bronze, but sometimes 
 of ca.it iron, constitute one class called firld 7hii» ,- the 12, 18, and 24- 
 pounders, made of cast iron, constitute a secoud known as »ie<]e and 
 rfarriaoii yiins ; and the 32 and 42-pounder3, and 8, 10, and 15-inch 
 colunibiads, also cast iron, make the third, denominated gca-cnasi-gnns. 
 
 Field guns are used in the field as U'jht (irtilUri/ ; siege and garrison 
 guns are used in permanent and field fortifications, and in uteijca to 
 batter down the walls, etc.; sca-co.ast guns are principally used in per- 
 manent fortifications on the seaboard. 
 
 51. A hotcitzer is a gun with a chambni in it. It is used principally 
 for firing hollow projectiles or shells ; in order to prevent breaking the 
 shell, and at the same time to give the projectile sufficient velocity, a 
 small charge of powder is fired from a cylindrical chamber at the bot- 
 tom of the bore. 
 
 The calibre of howitzers is designated by the weight of the solid shot 
 which they would carry, or by the number of inches the bore is in 
 diameter. They are divided into fii:ld hoicilzers, mountuin howitzerg, 
 eiefje and (jarriiton, and sen-roast hoirilzers ; field howitzers are 12, 24, 
 and .32-pounders ; mountain howitzers are 12-pounders; siege and gar- 
 rison howitzers are 24-pounders and 8-iueh ; and sea-coast howitzers 
 are 8 and 10-inch. 
 
 52. Field howitzers are used with light batteries in the field ; the 
 mountain howitzer is for service in countries too rough to admit the 
 passage of wheeled carriages ; siege and garrison howitzers are used 
 in the trenches at sieges, and in the defence of permanent fortifica- 
 tions; and sea-coast howitzers are used in permanent fortifications on 
 the seaboard. 
 
 53. There are several kinds of mortars, ranging from si.x to sixteen 
 inches in calibre ; the heavy mortars are principally used on the sea- 
 coast; the others are for use in the trenches at sieges, and in the de- 
 fence of fortifications of all kinds. 
 
 54. Pieces of artillery arc mounted on their carriages by means of 
 trunnions ; they are cylinders cast with the gun, having a common axis 
 at right angles to that of the gun. The trunnions of the 6-pi)unJer 
 gun ami 12-pounder howitzer have the same diameter, so that guns 
 and howitzers may be mounted on the same sized carriages, and serve 
 together in the same battery; the trunnions of the TJ-poundcr gun 
 and 24 and 32-poundor howitzer are also of the same size, so that they 
 may be used together in the same battery. Fig. 12 gives the form of 
 the C-pouiider gun, with the names of the parts: and tig. 13 represents 
 a 12 and 21-pounder howitzer. 
 
 55. The field gun-carriage is composed of two parts — the portion on 
 which the piece rests whuu it is fired, and the limber. The first part, 
 
 i 
 
AMMUNITION. 49 
 
 or carriage proper, is two-wheeled; from the axle proceeds the itock, to 
 which are fastened two upright pieces called checks, upon which the 
 trunnions rest. The end of the stock, designated the trail, rests on the 
 ground during the firings; at other times it is attached to the limber; 
 the piece gets its proper elevation by means of the elevatiiKj screw, 
 which works through a plate on the stock. Fig. 14 represents the gun 
 and carriage with the names of the parts, one wheel being removed to 
 show them the better. The limber is the part of the carriage to which 
 the horses are attached; on the end of the trail is an iron plate called 
 the lunette, through which there is an opening, which goes over a hook 
 on the axle of the limber called the ptiifle-livok, aiid is secured in its 
 place by a bolt called the pintle-bolt. The limber also carries an 
 ammunition bo.x, which may be removed at pleasure. 
 
 56. Each piece is followed by its caisson, or carriage for ammunition. 
 The wheels of the carriage, limber, and caisson are all of the same size; 
 and may, when necessary, replace each other; and a spare wheel is car- 
 ried on the rear of every caisson. The caisson carries three ammu- 
 nition boxes of the same size as the one on the limber, and movable, 
 so that when the box on the limber is empty it may be exchanged for 
 a full one from the caisson. The bo.ves are partitioned off into small 
 compartments, each compartment being the receptacle for a charge of 
 ammunition. 
 
 Every artillery carriage is draw ; ly from four to six horses, a driver 
 being required for each pair of h'>: - s. 
 
 AMMUNITION. 
 
 67. When troops are in the field it is not only necessary that they 
 should go with a suflScient supply of ammunition, but that it should be 
 put up in such form as to be convenient for use, and at the same time 
 as well protected as possible from the effects of the weather, etc. 
 Cartridges made of paper or flannel, or some other woollen goods, are 
 in general use; the former for small arms, and the latter for artillery. 
 
 68. To make the cylinders for blank cartridge.*, the paper is cut in 
 the form represented in fig. 15. with a pattern. The former is a cylin- 
 der of hard wood of the same diameter as the ball, concave at one end 
 and convex at the other. The paper is laid on a table with the side 
 perpendicular to the bases next the workman, the broad end to the left, 
 the former laid on it with the concave end half an inch from the broad 
 edge of the paper, and enveloped in it once. The right hand is then 
 laid flat on the former, and all the paper rolled on it. The projecting 
 end of the paper is now neatly folded down into the concavity of the 
 
 5 
 
50 MANUAL FOR VOLLNTEEUS AND MILITIA. 
 
 former, pasted and pressed on a hall imbedded in the tahlc for the 
 purpose. 
 
 Instead of being pasted, the.«c cylinders may bo clo.oed liy choking 
 with a string tied to the table, and having at the other end a stick by 
 which to hold it. The convex end of the former is placed to the left, 
 and after the paper is rolled on, the former is taken in the left hand, 
 and a turn made around it with the choking string, half an inch from 
 the end of the paper. While the string is drawn tight with the right 
 band, the former is held in the left, with the forefinger resting on the 
 end of the cylinder, folding it neatly down upon the end of the former. 
 The choke is then firmly tieil with twine. 
 
 59. For ball cartridges the cylinders are made and choked as above, 
 and the choke tied without cutting the twine. The former is then 
 withdrawn, the ball inserted, and followed by the concave end of the 
 former. Two half-bitches are made ju^t above the ball, and the twine 
 cut off. 
 
 For ball and buckshot cartridges make the cylinder as before, insert 
 three buckshot, fasten them with a half-hitch, and insert and secure 
 the ball as before. 
 
 For buckshot cartridges make the cylinder as before, insert four 
 tiers of three buckshot each, as at first, making a half-hitch between 
 the tiers, and ending with a double hitch. 
 
 60. To fill the cartridges the cylinders are placed upright in a bo.x, 
 and the charge poured into each from a conical charger of the appro- 
 
 jiriatc size; the mouths of the cylinders are now folded down ou tho 
 powder by two rectangular fidds, and the cartridges bundled in pack- 
 ages of ten. For this a folding-box is necessary ; it is made with but 
 two vertical sides, at a distance from each other equal to five diameters 
 of the ball and two diameters high. 
 
 Put a wrapper in the folding-box, and place in it two tiers of five 
 cartridges each, parallel to each other and to the short sides of the 
 wrai)pcr, the balls alternating; wrap the cartridges while in the fold- 
 ing-box, by folding the paper over them, and tie them. A package of 
 twelve ^>e»THs»ioH cupn is placed in each )>undlo of ten cartridges. 
 The bundles are marked with the number and kind of cartridge. 
 6L The cartridges for elongated projectiles differ so much from those 
 used with the spherical bullet that a separate description is necessary- 
 Each cartridge is made of three pieces of paper — the larger piece or 
 cartridge proper (see fig. 16, No. 1) is made of what is known as car- 
 tridge paper, but it should not be too strong; the second piece (No. 2) is 
 made of the same or stronger paper, and the third (No. 3) is made of 
 the stoutest rocket paper. 
 
 Before enveloping tho balls in tho cartridges, their cylindrical parts 
 
AMxMUNITIOX. 51 
 
 should be covered with a melted composition of one part beeswax and 
 three parts tallow; it should be applied hot, in which ease the super- 
 fluous part would run off. Care should be taken to remove all the 
 grease from the bottom of the ball, lest by coming in contact with the 
 bottom of the case it penetrate the paper and injure the powder. 
 
 62. The sticks on which the cartridges are rolled are made of the 
 same diameter as the bore of the piece ; the dimensions given are for 
 the U. S. musket or rifle of 0.58 bore. The piece of stifiF paper, No. 3, 
 is laid upon No. 2, as shown in the dotted line.of the figure ; the stick 
 is laid down on the side a, b, c, the end being at b, and the j)aper 
 rolled around it; the projecting end is then folded down and pasted. 
 After the cylinder thus made is dry, it is again put on the stick ; the 
 stick is then taken in the left hand and laid upon the outer wrapper, 
 the end not far from the middle of the wrapper (the oblique edge 
 of the wrapper turned from the workman, the longer vertical edge 
 toward his left hand), and snugly rolled up. The ball is then inserted 
 in the open end of the cartridge, the base resting on the cylinder case, 
 the paper neatly choked around the point of the ball, and fastened by 
 tying with cartridge thread. The stick is then withdrawn, sixty grains 
 of powder poured into the case, and the mouth of the cartridge is 
 "pinched" or folded in the usual way. The cartridge is shown in 
 fig. 17. 
 
 63. To use this cartridge, tear the fold and pour out the powder; 
 then seize the ball end firmly between the thumb and forefinger of the 
 right hand, and strike the cylinder a smart blow across the muzzle of 
 the piece ; this breaks the cartridge and exposes the bottom of the ball ; 
 a sligbt pressure of the thumb and forefinger forces the ball into the 
 bore clear of all cartridge paper. In striking the cartridge the cylinder 
 should be held square across, or at right angles to the muzzle ; other- 
 wise, a blow given in an oblique direction would only bend the cartridge 
 without breaking it. — 
 
 64. The ammunition for artillery consists of a charge of powder con- 
 tained in a cartridge bag, and the projectile, which may be either fixed 
 to, or separate from the cartridge. When the two arc fastened together, 
 the whole constitutes a charge ot fixed antmunition. 
 
 65. The cartridge bag should be made of merino, bombazcttc, or flan- 
 nel, which should be all wool, otherwise fire might be left in the piece 
 after its discharge. The texture and sewing should be close enough to 
 prevent the powder sifting through. Untwilled stuff is preferable. The 
 bag is formed of two pieces — a rectangle which forms the cylinder, and 
 a circular piece which forms the bottom. As the stufi" does not stretch 
 in the direction of its length, the long side of the rectangle should be 
 taken in that direction, otherwise the cartridge might become too largo 
 
52 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 for convcniout use with its piece. The material is laid sometimes sev- 
 eral folds thick on a table, and the rcctaujrlos and circles marked out on 
 it with chalk, using for the purpose patterns made of hard, well sea- 
 soned wood, sheet iron, or tin. The pieces are then cut with the scissors. 
 For a 6-ixiunder gun and 12-puunder howit/.er, the rectangle is 11.4 
 inches long by 7.25 inches in height, the diameter of the bottom being 
 4.37 inches — the seam is half an inch wide. For the 12-pounder gun, 
 and 21 and 32-pouuder howitzer, the rectangle is 14.2 inches by 10, and 
 the diameter of the bottom is 5.25 inches. The short sides of the rec- 
 tangle are sewed together, and the bottom sewed in. The sewing is done 
 with woollen j'arn, twelve stitches to the inch. The two edges of the 
 seam are turned down on the same side, and basted, to prevent the 
 powder from sifting through. 
 
 Blank cartridge bags, or those intended for immediate use, may bo 
 made of two rectangular pieces with semicircular ends sewed together. 
 
 66. When special accuracj' is required, charges are carefully weighed 
 in delicate scales ; but usually the bags are filled by measurement. The 
 powder-measures are made of sheet copper ; they are cylindrical, and 
 their diameters and height are equal. A measure 3.628 inches in diam- 
 eier aud height holds one and a quarter pounds of powder, the charge 
 for a 6-pounder gun when it fires solid shot; one of 3.368 inches holds 
 one pound of powder, the charge for the same gun when it fires spheri- 
 cal case or canister; it is also the charge for the 12-pounder how- 
 itzer. A measure of 4.24 inches in diameter and height holds two 
 pounds of powder, the light charge for a 24-pounder howitzer ; one of 
 4.57 inches holds two and a half pounds of powder, the heaviest charge 
 for the 24-pouuder howitzer, and the light charge for the 32-pounder. 
 The one pound and a quarter measure, and the two pound measure, 
 making three and a quarter pounds, will be the heavy charge for the 
 32-pounder howitzer. 
 
 67. Blank cartridges, and those for the 12-poundcr gun, are, after 
 being filled, simply tied firmly about the neck with twine. Those for 
 fixed ammunition are attached to pieces of wood called sabots by tying 
 them with strong twine ; before attaching them to the sabots, however, 
 the sabot must be fastened to the projectile. 
 
 The sabot (see fig. IS) for guns is cylindrical, or nearly so, in shape, 
 and for howitzers conical. For shot and spherical case for guns, they 
 have one groove for attaching the cartridge ; those for gun canisters 
 and for 12-pounder howitzer shells, spherical case, and canister, have 
 two grooves. Sabots for 32-pounder and 21-poundcr howitzers have 
 no grooves, but are furnished witli handles made of a piece of cord pass- 
 ing through two holes, aud fastened by knots countersunk on the inside. 
 
 68. The sabots are fastened to shot and shell with strips of sheet tin. 
 
AMMUNITION. 53 
 
 For shot there are two straps crossing at right angles (see fig. 19), one 
 passing through a slit in the middle of the other. For shell? there are 
 four straps soldered to a ring of tin : the straps are nailed to the sabot. 
 If tin cannot be procured, straps may be made of strong canras, one 
 inch wide, sewed at the point of crossing. The part of the ball which 
 is to be inserted into the socket is dipped in glue : the straps are glued 
 to the ball and nailed to the sabot. 
 
 69. A cauister xhnt is a cylinder of tin, of the same diameter as the 
 bore of the piece, filled with small balls. (See fig. 20.) The cylinder 
 is left open at both ends ; after being soldered it is nailed to the sabot, 
 and a plate of rolled iron placed at the bottom of the sabot. To pre- 
 vent rusting, the cylinder before filling should be covered with beeswax 
 dissolved in spirits of turpentine, and the balls should be painted or 
 lacquered. 
 
 To fill the canister, place it upright on its sabot : put in a tier of balls, 
 filling the interstices with dry sawdust, packing it with a pointed stick, 
 so that the balls will hold by themselves when the case is turned over, 
 and throw out the loose sawdust. Place another tier of balls, and pro- 
 ceed in the same manner until the canister is filled; cover the top tier 
 with a layer of sawdust, and put on the cover, which is a circular plate 
 of sheet iron, settling it well with a mallet in order to compress the 
 sawdust. The top of the cylinder is cut into slits about half an inch 
 long, which are turned down over the cover to secure it. 
 
 70. The shot, shell, or canister being secured to the sabot, the car- 
 tridge is tied to it, making the charge complete. The mouths of the 
 bag are first twisted and pressed down, so as to settle the powder; they 
 are then opened and the powder smoothed. The sabot is introduced, 
 and the cartridge drawn up around it, until it reaches the powder; the 
 cartridge is then secured by passing several turns of strong twine 
 around it in the grooves and tying it, after which the excess of the bag 
 is cut off. (Fig. 21.) 
 
 71. The cartridge and projectile for the 24 and 32-pounder howitzers 
 are kept separate: the projectile is attached to the sabot as has been 
 shown (see No. 68 and fig. 10), and the cartridge to a cylindrical piece 
 of light wood called a cartridge block. (Fig. 22.) 
 
 These blocks give a better finish to the cartridge, help to fill the 
 chamber and keep the cartridge from turning in the bore while the piece 
 is being loaded. They have but one groove ; the grooved end is insert- 
 ed in the mouth of the cartridge, and pressed down upon the powder; 
 the bag is pulled over it and tied with twine in the groove. The mouth 
 of the bag is then turned down, and another tie made over it, which 
 keeps the powder from working up between the block and the bag. The 
 superfluous part of the bag is then cut off. 
 
54 MANUAL FOU VOLUNTEERS AND MTLTTIA. 
 
 72. For the greater security of field ammunition, the cartridges are 
 covered with paper cylinders and caps. They are both made together, 
 on the same former, which is a piece of board with slightly inclined 
 sides and rounded edges. The paper is pasted around this. The requi- 
 site length for the cylinder is cut from the smaller end, the rest forming 
 the cap, which is choked at the end from which the cylinder is cut. For 
 choking, a cylindrical former of wood, with a hemispherical end, is 
 used, which should be bored through the end to facilitate the drawing 
 off of the cap. The cylinder fits over the body of the cartridge and a 
 part of the sabot to %vhich it is tied, while the cap fits over the end. 
 When the cap is drnwn off, which is always done when the cartridge is 
 placed in the piece, the lower end is left exposed so that the priming 
 wire, or fire from the friction-tube can reach it without going through 
 any paper. 
 
 73. Shells arc hollow shot, the interior space being formed of a sphere 
 concentric with the outer surface, making the sides of equal thickness. 
 Thej' have a conical opening or eye, used to load the shell, and in which 
 is inserted the /kzc to communicate fire to the charge. 
 
 74. To load shells, they are set upon their sabots, the charges meas- 
 ured out in the proper powder-measure, and poured in through a copper 
 funnel. The 32-poundcr requires a charge of one pound of powder (rifle 
 or musket powder) to burst it, the 24-pounder twelve ounces, and the 
 12-pounder seven ounces. If the shell is to be fired by an ordinary fuze 
 (see article on fuzes), a conical piece of dry beech is firmly driven into 
 the ej'c, and then a hole is reamed out through it to receive the fuze, 
 and stopped with a wad of tow, the fuzo not to be driven in until the 
 shell is to be fired. 
 
 75. iSjjherical cane, or Shropiiel shot, as they are called, after the 
 English ofljcer who brought them to perfection, are thin-sided sliells in 
 which, besides the bursting charge, are placed a number of musket 
 balls. Their sides are much ihinner than those of the ordinary shell, 
 in order that they i:iay contain a greater number of bullets ; and these, 
 acting as a support to the sides of the shell, prevent it from being l)roken 
 by the force of the discharge. The woigiit of the empty case is about 
 one-half that of the solid shot of the same diameter. Lead being much 
 more dense than iron, the shrapnel is, when loaded, nearly as heavy 
 as the solid shot of the same calibre ; but on account of the less charge 
 which it is necessary to use to prevent breaking tha case, their firo is 
 neither so accurate nor the range so great as with the solid shot. But 
 when the shrapnel bursts just in front of an object the effect is terri- 
 ble, being as great a.s the discharge of grape from a piece at a very 
 short range. 
 
 76. To load a shrapnel shot, the requisite number of balls are placed 
 
AMMUNITION. 55 
 
 in; the shell for the 6-pounder gun requires thirty-eight balls, that for 
 the 12-pouncler gun and howitzer seventy-eight, the 24-pouuder howitzer 
 one hundred and seventy-five, and the 32-pounder howitzer two hundred 
 and twenty-five. The balls being inserted, a stick a little less in diam- 
 eter than the fuze-hole, and having a groove on each side of it. is in- 
 serted and pushed to the bottom of the chamber by working the balls 
 aside. The shell is then heated to about the molting poiut of sulphur, 
 and melted sulphur is poured in to fill up the interstices between the 
 balls. When the shell is cool the stick is withdrawn, and any adhering 
 "sulphur is removed. 
 
 If a fuze-i)lug and common fuze are to be used the charge is placed 
 in, and the plug inserted as for shells; but if the Bormann fuze is to 
 be used (see the article on fuzes), the charge is to be inserted and the 
 stopper and fuze are screwed into their places. The bursting charges 
 are as follows : for the 6-pouDder 2.5 ounces; for the 12-pounder 4.5 
 ounces; for the 24-pounder 6 ounces; and for the 32-pounder S ounces. 
 
 77. A fuze is a contrivance for communicating fire to the charge in 
 a shell. It consists of a highly inflammable composition, inclosed in a 
 wood, metal, or paper case. The paper fuze consists of a conical 
 paper case containing the composition, whose rate of burning is shown 
 by the color of the case, as follows : 
 
 lilnck burns two seconds to the inch. 
 
 Red " three " " " 
 
 Gretn " four " " '* 
 
 Yellow '" five " " " 
 
 Each fuiie is made two inches long, and tha yellow burns conse- 
 quontly ten seconds. For any shorter time the fuze is cut with a sharp 
 knife. This fuze is not placed in the shell until it is to be fired, when 
 the wad of tow is removed from the fuze-plug, and the fuze pressed 
 down wiih the thumb. 
 
 78. The Belgian or Bormann fuze is the best now in use. The fuze- 
 case is made of motal (an alloy of lead and tin), and consists first (see 
 fig. 23) of a short cylinder, having at one end a horseshoe shaped in- 
 dentation, one end only of which communicates with the magazine of 
 the fuze placed in the centre. The indentation extends nearly to the 
 other end of the cylinder, a thin layer of metal only intervening. 
 This is graduated on the outside into equal parts, representing seconds 
 and quarter seconds, as represented in fig. 24. In the bottom of this 
 channel a smooth layer of the composition is placed, with a piece of 
 wick or yarn underneath it; on this is placed the piece of met.al repre- 
 sented in fig. 25, the cross section of it being wedge-shaped ; and this 
 is by machinery pressed down upon the composition. The cylindrical 
 opening, represented at a, fig. 23, is filled with fine powder and covered 
 
56 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 with a sheet of tin, which is soldered in its place, closing the magazine 
 from the external air. Before using the fu/.e several holes are punched 
 through this sheet of tin to nllow the finme to escape into the shell. 
 On the side of the fuze the thread of a screw is cut which fits into one 
 on the inside of the luze-hole, and the fuze is screwed into the shell 
 with a wrench. 
 
 79. The thiu layer of metal over the composition is cut awny with a 
 gouge or chisel of any kind at the point marked with the number of 
 seconds which we wish the fuze to burn. The metal of this fuze being 
 soft, there is danger of its being driven into the shell by the explosive 
 force of the charge. To prevent this a circular piece of iron, of a less 
 diameter than the fuze, with a hole through its centre, and the thread 
 of a screw on the outside, is screwed into the fuze-hole before the fuze 
 is placed in. 
 
 The regularity and certainty of this fuze is very great ; one of its 
 most important advantages is the fact that the shells can be loaded, all 
 ready for use, and remain so for any length of time perfectly' safe from 
 explosion : as the fuze can be screwed to its place, and the composition 
 never exposed to external fire until the metal is cut through. The only 
 operation to be performed when the shell is to be fired is to gouge 
 through the metal at the proper point, which may be done with any 
 kind of a chisel, knife, or other sharp instrument. 
 
 80. Fire is communicated to the charge in a cannon by means of 
 priming tubes and friction-tubes. 
 
 Quill priming tubes are made from quills by cutting otT the barrel at 
 both ends, and splitting down the large end for about half an inch into 
 seven or any other odd number of parts ; these are bent outward, per- 
 pendicular to the body of the quill, and form the cup of the tube. 
 Fine woollen yarn is then woven into these slits like basket-work, the 
 end being brought down and tied on the stem ; or a perforated disc of 
 paper is pasted on them. 
 
 These tubes are filled by injecting into them with a tubc-iiijector a 
 liquid paste made of mealed powder and spirits of wine; a better 
 method is, not to make the paste too thin, and then press it in with the 
 thumb. A strand of quick-match two inches long is now laid across 
 the cup, and pasted in them with the powder paste. A small wire is 
 then run through the tube, an(i remains there until the paste is dry ; 
 this leaves an aperture, furnishing a quick communication for the fire 
 along the tube. A paper cap is placed over the cup, and twisted tightly 
 around the tube under the cup. 
 
 Tubes are also made of metal ; they are either moulded, or formed 
 into tubes by machinery. They are filled, primed, and capped in the 
 same way as quill tubes. / 
 
AMMUNITION. 57 
 
 Priming tnhes ore now almost entirely superseded hj frirtinn-tuhea 
 which are made by maehinery at the C. S. arsenals. 
 
 81. To fire priming tubes porl-firen are used: thej* consist of paper 
 cases, filled with a highly inSammable but slowly burning composi- 
 tion, the flame of which is very intense and penetrating, and cannot be 
 extinguished with water. 
 
 Friction-tubes are fired by means of a lanyard; this is a stout cord, 
 which has a wooden handle at one end and an iron hook at the other; 
 the cannoneer puts the hook through the loop in the wire of the friction- 
 tube (see fig. 26), and, holding the lanyard by the handle, pulls steadily 
 until the wire is withdrawn, when an explosion takes place, induced by 
 the friction of the wire against the composition in the tube. 
 
58 manua;, for voluntekus and mit.itia. 
 
 A K T I c L p: III. 
 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 
 
 GENERAL RULES. 
 
 82. The object of this school is the individual instruction of the sol- 
 dier; it should be taught with the greatest possible care and precision, 
 as on it depends the eflSciency of the instruction of the company, which 
 is again so necessary to that of the battalion, and from that of the bat- 
 talion to the evolutions of the line, where an entire army is manoeuvred 
 with as much precision as a single company. 
 
 The instructor should never require a movement to be executed until 
 he has fully explained it, and joined example to precept by performing 
 the movement in person. He should accustom the soldier to talte for 
 himself the position required, correcting him when necessary, and 
 should labor to prevent the formation of a habit of carelessness in the 
 execution of the movements. 
 
 Each movement should be thoroughly luulcrstood before passing to 
 another. After they have been properly executed in the order laid 
 down, the instructor should no longer confine himself to that order. 
 The men should be allowed to rest for a few moments, frequently, in the 
 earlier stages of their instruction, and as often at other times as the 
 instructor may think necessary to prevent weariness, which is tlie pic- 
 lude to carelessness. When they are at attention, however, he should 
 not allow any looking to the right or left; no changing of position, or 
 laughing, or whispering, etc., so common among volunteers and militia. 
 Here is the place to make the individual soldier, to give him habits of 
 attention, teach him subordination, etc. If he does not acquire them 
 in this school, it will be too late when he is advanced to the eompunj'. 
 
 At the command ukst, the soldier is no longer required to preserve 
 immol)ility, or to remain in his place. If the instructor wishes merely 
 to relieve the 'attention of the soldier ho commands, »)i place — rest; 
 the soldier is then only required to keep one of his feet in place; if ho 
 wishes to move that foot, tlie other is first brought up to its proper 
 position. 
 
 Tlie gfhool «f the Soldier is divided into three parts, the fir.-^t compre- 
 hending what ought to be taught to recruits without arms; the second 
 the manual of arms, the loadings and firings; the third the principles 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 59 
 
 of alignment, the march by the front, the different steps, the march by 
 the flank, the principles of wheeling and those of change of direction. 
 In this school the company is broken up into small squads, the number 
 of men in each squad being proportioned to the number of instructors; 
 the squads for the first and second part should be as small as possible, 
 and the men placed in single rank ; for instruction in the third part, 
 two or more squads of about equal proficiency should be united. 
 
 PART FIRST. 
 
 In this part the men should be without arms, and about one pace 
 apart. 
 
 Position of the Soldier. 
 
 8.3. Heels on the same line, as near each other as the conformation of 
 the men will permit ; because if one were in rear of the other the 
 shoulder on that side would be thrown back. 
 
 The feet turned out equall}', and forming with each other something 
 less than a right angle ; because if one foot were turned out more 
 than the other a shoulder would bo deranged, and if both feet be 
 too much turned out it would not be practicable to give the body its 
 proper position. 
 
 The knees straight, without stiffness ; because if stiffened constraint 
 and fatigue wouM be uuavdidable. 
 
 The body erect on the hips, inclining a little forward, because it gives 
 stability to the position. Soldiers are at first disposed to project the 
 belly and throw back the shoulders when they wish to hold themselves 
 erect, from which result many inconveniences in marching; it is there- 
 fore important that the instructor should be particular to enforce thiii 
 rule at the beginning. 
 
 The shoulders square, and falling equally ; if the shoulders are ad- 
 vanced beyond the line of the breast, and the back arched (the defect 
 called round-ihouldcrcd), the man cannot align himself, nor use his piece 
 with skill. In correcting this defect, the instructor will take care that 
 the shoulders arc not thrown too much to the rear, causing the body to 
 project and the small of the back to ciirve. 
 
 The arms hanging naturally ; elbows near the body ; palms of the 
 hands turned a little to the front, the little finger behind the seam of 
 the pantaloons. These positions are important to the shoulder itrms, to 
 prevent the man from occupying more space in ranks than is neces- 
 sary, and to keep the shoulders in proper position. 
 
60 ^fANUAL FOR V0LUNTEKR8 AND MILITIA. 
 
 The head erect, and square to the front, without constraint; the chin 
 slightly drawn in ; the eyes fixed straijrht to the front, in order to pre- 
 vent derangement of the shoulders, and striking the ground at the dis- 
 tance of aliout fifteen jiaccs. 
 
 81. The instructor Laving given the squad the position of the soldier 
 without arms, will now teaeli the turning of the head and eyes. He 
 will command : 
 
 1. Eyes — Right. 2. Front. 
 
 At the word ri<jht, the soldier, will turn his bead gently, so as to 
 bring the inner corner of the left eye in a line with the buttons of 
 the coat, the eyes fixed on the line of the eyes of the men in the same 
 rank. At the command Front, the head will resume the direct or 
 habitual position. The instructor will take care that the movement 
 of the head does not derange the squareness of the shoulders, and 
 that the men do not acquire a habit of throwing down the head in 
 dressing. 
 
 The movement of Ei/es — Left will be executed by inverse means. 
 
 Facings. 
 
 85. Facing to the right and left will be executed in one time or 
 pause. The instructor commands: 
 
 1. Squad. 2. Right {or left) — Face. 
 
 At the word Face, raise the riyht foot slightlj', turn on the left heel 
 to the right (or left), raising the left toe a little, and then replace the 
 right heel beside the left, and on the same Hue. The face should al- 
 ways be through a right angle, and should be executed by the feet and 
 legs, the body moving around to the right {or left) without twisting or 
 constraint. The instructor should labor to keep the body steady, and 
 to prevent the formation of the habit of bending the knees, or spring- 
 ing. 
 
 86. The full face to the rear is always to the riyht, and is executed 
 in two tiinea, or pauses. The instructor commands : 
 
 1. Squad. 2. About — Face. 
 
 First motion. At the word about, the soldier will turn far enough on 
 the left heel to liring the left toe directly to the front, at the same time 
 carrying his right foot to the rear, the hollow opposite to and full three 
 inches from the left huel, the feet square to each other. The back of 
 the right hand is placed a little above the right hip, and the body is 
 turned to the right sufficiently to give ease to the position. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 61 
 
 Second motion. At the word face, the soldier raises his toes a little, 
 turns upon both heels, faces to the rear, keeping his legs straight, and 
 draws back the right heel by the side of the left, at the same time 
 dropping his right hand by his side. 
 
 Balance Step. 
 
 87. Before commencing to march the soldier should alwaj's be in- 
 structed in the balance step, the object of which is to teach him the 
 free movement of his limbs, while he at the same time preserves per- 
 fect squareness of the shoulders, with the greatest steadiness of the 
 body; no labor should be spared to attain this object, which lies at the 
 very foundation of good marching. 
 
 The squad being at attention the instructor commands: 
 
 Le/l foot — Forward, 
 
 At this command the soldier will throw his left foot gently forward 
 •about twenty-four inches, balancing his body well on the right foot 
 without changing the position of the shoulders, and without the body 
 losing its erect position. The toe should be turned out as in the posi- 
 tion of the soldier, the foot about three inches from the ground and 
 very nearly parallel to it, the toe being very slightly depressed. 
 
 At the comm.and : 
 
 Left foot — Rear, 
 
 the left foot is brought gently back, the ball of the left foot close to the 
 right heel, the leg straight, toe raised, and heel depressed. 
 
 As soon as the soldier becomes steaily in the new position, the in- 
 structor repeats the command left font foncard, then left foot rear, 
 for several times, and then commands : 
 
 Halt, 
 
 at which the left foot, either advanced or to the rear, is brought to the 
 right, as in the position of the soldier. 
 
 The instructor then causes the soldier to balance on the left foot, by 
 advancing and retiring the right, as has been directed for the left. 
 
 The Direct Step. 
 
 88. After the soldier is sufficiently instructed in the balance step to 
 execute it on either foot without losing his balance, the instructor will 
 
62 MANUAL roll VOLL'NTEEKS AND MILITIA. 
 
 proceed to instruct him in the mechanism of the direct step. For this 
 purpose he will coinniand: 
 
 1. By the numbers — Forward. 2. One. 
 
 At the command one, the soldier will throw forward the left foot, as 
 in the position of le/t /out fonrard ; the instructor then commands: 
 
 Two. 
 
 At this comtnand the weight of the hody is thrown forward, the left 
 foot striking the ground without shock, at the distance of twenty-eight 
 inches from the right; the body assumes the perpendicular position, 
 and the right foot is brought up to the position of ri'^ht foot rear. 
 
 The right foot is then brought forward at the command otie, and the 
 step completed at the command two ; thus the squad is made to ailvance 
 step by step. Tlie halt is executed as in the hala»ce step. 
 
 89. When the squad is sufficiently instructed in the mechanism of the 
 direct step, the instructor will cause it to take up the march in common 
 time; for this purpose he will command: 
 
 1. Squad foricard — Common time. 2. March. 
 
 At the command forward, the soldier will throw the weight of his 
 body on the right leg with')ut bending the left knee. 
 
 At the command march, he will smartly, but without a jerk, carry 
 straight forward the left foot twenty-eight inches from the right, the 
 solo near the ground, the leg extended, the toe a little depressed, and 
 both it and the knee slightly turned out; he will at the same time throw 
 the weight of the body forward, and plant flat the left foot without 
 shock precisely at the distance where it finds itself from the right 
 when the weight of tho body is brought forward, the whole of which 
 will now rest on tho left foot. The soldier will next in like manner 
 advance the right foot and plant it as directed for the left, the heel 
 twenty-eight inches from the heel of the left foot, and thus continue the 
 march without crossing the legs or striking one against the other, with- 
 out turning the shoulders, and always preserving the face direct to the 
 front. Common time is executed at the rate of ninety steps to the 
 minute. 
 
 When the instructor wishes to arrest the march ho commands: 
 
 1. Squad. 2. Halt. 
 
 The command halt should bo given just as one foot has como to the 
 ground and the other is raised for making the next step; the soldier 
 
SCHOOL OF THK SOLDIER. 63 
 
 instinctively completes the pace with the raised foot and brings the 
 other firmly to its place beside it. By careful attention to this rule a 
 large command may be as readily halted at the same instant as a single 
 individual. 
 
 . 90. The principles of the step in quick time are the same as for com- 
 mon time ; it is executed, however, at the rate of 1 10 steps per minute. 
 After the soldier is well established in the length and swiftness of the 
 step at common time be should be practised in quick time, as it is the 
 pace best adapted to marches, the manoeuvres, etc. 
 
 The instructor wishing the squad to march in quick time commands : 
 
 1. Squad forward. 2. March. 
 
 Principles of the Double-quick Step. 
 
 91. The length of the double-quick step is thirty-three inches, and its 
 swiftness is at the rate of 165 steps per minute. This step is designed 
 especially for light troops, such as light infantry and riflemen, and to 
 them it is indispensable ; its utility has, however, been so frequently 
 demonstrated of late years as to make it proper that it should form a 
 part of the instruction of all infantry troops. 
 
 The instructor wishing to teach his squad the principles and mechan- 
 ism of the double-quick step commands : 
 
 1. Double-quickstep. 2. March. 
 
 At the command double-quick step, the soldier will raise his hands to 
 a level with his hips, the hands closed, the nails toward the body, the 
 elbows to the rear and well drawn in toward the body. 
 
 At the command march, he will raise his left knee as high as possible 
 without derangement of the body, keeping his leg from the knee down 
 in a vertical position, the toe depressed ; he will then replace his foot in 
 its former position. At the command lino, he will execute with the right 
 leg what has just been prescribed S<x the left, and the alternate move- 
 ment of the legs at the commands one, lien, will be continued until the 
 command : 
 
 1. Squad. 2. Halt. 
 
 At the command halt, the soldier will bring the foot which is raised 
 by the side of the other, and at the same time dropping his hands by 
 his side will resume the position of the soldier without arms. 
 
 When the squad has learned to execute the step properly the instruc- 
 
64 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MIHTIA. 
 
 tor will repeat tlic words one, iiro, in more rapid siieecssion, and will 
 finally drop lliem, Icavinji the files to execute the 8tep in their own time. 
 The instructor will see that the step is taken in rapid succession, and 
 that none of the files lose the step. 
 
 92. The S(ddier bein-j sufficiently established in the principles of this 
 step, the instructor will command: 
 
 1. Squad, forward. 2. Double-quick. 3. Maucu. 
 
 At the command forward, the soldier will throw the weight of Lis 
 body on the right leg, without bending the left knee. 
 
 At the command double-quick, he will place his arms as indicated 
 above. 
 
 At the command march, he will carry forward the left foot, and plant 
 it, tlie toe first, at the distance of thirty-three inches from the right, 
 the leg slightly bent, and the knee somewhat raised ; he will then 
 execute with the right foot what has just been jjrescribed for the left. 
 This alternate movement of the legs will take place by throwing the 
 weight of the body on the foot that is planted, and by allowing a 
 natural, oscillatory motion to the arms. The feet should not be raised 
 too much, a common fault with beginners, and the body should incline 
 slightly forward. 
 
 The double-quick step may be e.vecuted with different degrees of 
 swiftness. Under urgent circumstances, the cadence of this step may 
 be increased to 180 per minute. At this rate, a distance of 4000 yards 
 would be passed over in about twenty-fivp minutes. 
 
 The men should also be exercised in running: the principles are the 
 same as for the double-quick step, the only difference consisting in a 
 greater degree of swiftness. 
 
 It is recommended, in marching in double-quick time or the run, 
 that the men should breathe as much as possible through the nose, 
 keeping the mouth closed. 
 
 PART SECOND. 
 
 General Rules. 
 
 93. The instructor will not pass the soldiers to this second part until 
 they are well established in the position of the body, and in the man- 
 ner of marching at the (lifTcrent steps. 
 
 In the manual of arms each command will be executed in one time 
 (or pause), but this time will be divided into motions, the better to 
 
SCHOOL OP THE SOLDIER. 65 
 
 make known the mechanism and to secure uniformitj' and precision in 
 the movements 
 
 The rate (or swiftness) of each motion in the manual of arms is 
 fixed at the ninetieth part of a minute; but the instructor will at first 
 look more particularly to the execution of the motions, without requir- 
 ing a nice observance of the cadence, to which he will bring the men 
 progressively, and after they have become a little familiarized with the 
 use of the weapon. 
 
 The motions relative to the cartridge, to the rammer, and to the 
 fixing and unfixing of the baj'onet, cannot be executed at the rate pre- 
 scribed, or even with uniform swiftness : the instructor will however 
 labor to have these motions executed with promptne.ss and regularity. 
 
 The last syllable of the command will decide the brisk execution of 
 the first motion of each time (or pause). The commands tiro, three, 
 and /our will decide the brisk execution of the other motions. As 
 soon as the men comprehend well the positions of the several motions 
 of a time they will be taught to execute' the time without resting on its 
 motions; the mechanism of the time must however bo observed, aa 
 well to give perfect use of the weapon as to prevent carelessness or 
 slighting of the motions. When the men have acquired sufficient pro- 
 ficiency to execute the times without resting the instructor must be 
 careful to have the proper cadence observed ; great promptness in the 
 execution of the motions is not incompatible with the observance of a 
 pause between them, so that they may be executed at the prescribed 
 rate — that is, of ninety to the minute. Those instructors who insist 
 most upon the strict observance of this rule are those whose squads 
 execute the manual in the best manner. 
 
 Principles of Shoulder Arms. 
 
 94. Each soldier being in the ponition of the noldier, the instructor 
 will cause him to turn up the left hand without bending the wrist, the 
 left forearm only acting. The instructor will raise tlie piece perpen- 
 dicularly, and place it as follows : 
 
 (Fig. 27.) The piece in the left hand, the arm very slightly bent, the 
 elbow back near the body, the palm of the hand pressing on the outer 
 flat of the but; the outer edge of the latter on the upper joints of the 
 fingers, the heel of the but between the middle and forefingers, the 
 thumb on the front screw of the but-plate, the remaining fingers under 
 the but, the but more or less kept back according to the conformation 
 of the man, so that the piece, seen from the front, shall appear perpen- 
 dicular, and also that the movement of the thigh, in marching, may 
 
Cti MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 not raise it or cause it to waver; tbe stock, below the tail-band, resting 
 against the hollow of tbe shoulder just within the joint, the right arm 
 hanging naturally, as prescribed in the potitioii of the tuldier. 
 
 Soldiers on first bearing arms are liable to derange their position, 
 and particularly to distort the shoulders, which causing the musket to 
 lose its point of support, they drop the left hand to prevent the musket 
 from falling from the shoulder, which again causes that shoulder to 
 droop, a curvature of the side, spreading -of the elbows, etc. The 
 instructor will be careful to correct all these faults by continually recti- 
 fying the position ; he will avoid fatiguing the men too much in the 
 beginning, but labor to render this position so natural and easy by 
 degrees that they may remain in it a long time without fatigue. 
 
 The instructor will also take great care that the musket bo not car- 
 ried too high or too low ; if too high the left elbow would spread out, 
 the soldier would occupy too much space in ranks, and the musket 
 would be unsteady; if too low the files would be too close, the man 
 would not have the necessary space to handle his musket with facility, 
 the left arm would become too much fatigued, the shouUier w«uld 
 droop, etc. 
 
 The manual of the musket will be taught in the following order: 
 
 The instructor commands: 
 
 Support — Arms. 
 
 One time and three yuotious. 
 
 95. First motion. (Fig. 28.) With the right hand seize the small of 
 the stock briskly, four inches below tbe lock, raising the piece a little, 
 but not turning it. 
 
 j^econd motion. Take the left liand from the but: extend the left 
 forearm upward acros.s the body, and under the hammer, the left hand 
 flat on the right breast. 
 
 Third motion. Drop the right hand .«niartly to its position. 
 
 The squad being at support anus, the instructor commauds : 
 
 Carry — Arms. 
 
 One time and three motions. 
 
 96. First motion. Carry quickly the right baud to the small of the 
 stock. 
 
 Second motion. Place the lelt hand under the but, as in the jiositiun 
 of shoulder arms. 
 
 Third motion. Let full smartly the right Land to its position, and 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 67 
 
 drop with the left, at the same time, the piece into the position of 
 shoulder arms. 
 
 Present — Arms. 
 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 97. First motion. (Fig. 29.) Turn the piece with the left hand, the 
 lock out, and seize the small of the stock at the same time with the 
 right hand, the piece perpendicular and detached from the shoulder, 
 the left hand remaining under the but. 
 
 Second motion. Complete the turning inward of the piece, so as to 
 bring it erect before the centre of the body, the rammer to the front, 
 the right hand under and against the guard ; seize it smartly at the 
 same time with the left hand just above the lock, the thumb extended 
 along the barrel ani on the stock, the left forearm resting on the body 
 without constraint, and the hand at the height of the elbow. 
 
 Shoulder — Arms. 
 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 98. First motion. Turn the piece with the right hand, the barrel to 
 the front, raise and support it against the left shoulder with the right 
 hand, drop the left under the but, the right hand resting on, without 
 grasping, the small of the stock. 
 
 Second motion. Drop quickly the right hand into its position. 
 
 Order — Arms. 
 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 99. First motion. Drop the piece smartly by extending the left arm, 
 seize it at the same time with the right hand, above and near the tail- 
 band ; quit the hold of the left hand, and carry the piece opposite to 
 the right shoulder, the rammer to the front, the little finger behind the 
 barrel, the right hand supported against the hip, the but three inches 
 from the ground, the piece erect, the left hand hanging by the side. 
 
 Second motion. Let the piece slip through the right hand to the 
 ground without shock, and take the position about to be described. 
 
 Position of Order Arms. 
 
 100. (Fig. 30.) The hand low, the barrel between the thumb and 
 forefinger extended along the stock ; the other fingers extended and 
 
68 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 joined; the muzzle about two inches from the right shoulder; the ram- 
 mer in front; the toe of the but against and in a line with the toe of 
 the right foot, the barrel perpendicular. 
 
 101. When the instructor wishes to give repose in this position, he 
 commands : 
 
 Rest. 
 
 At this command the soldiers will not be required to preserve silence 
 or steadiness. They, however, will not quit the ranks without special 
 permission. 
 
 102. When the instructor wishes the men to pass from this position 
 to that of silence and steadiness, he commands : 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Squad. 
 
 At the second word, the men will resume the position of order arms, 
 and remain firm and silent. 
 
 Shoulder — Arms. 
 
 One time nnd two motions. 
 
 103. First motion. Raise smartly the piece with the right hand, 
 carry it against the left shoulder, turning it so as to bring the barrel 
 to the front ; at the same time place the left hand under the but, and 
 slip the right hand down to the lock. 
 
 Second motion. Let the right hand fall briskly to its position. 
 
 Charge — Bayonet. 
 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 104. First motion. Make a half-face to the right on the left heel, 
 bring the left toe directly to the front, at the same time place the right 
 foot behind and at right angles with the left, the hollow of the right 
 foot opposite to and about three inches from the left heel; turn the 
 piece with the left hand, the lock outward, and seize the small of the 
 stock at the same time with the right hand, the luusket perpendicular 
 and detached from the shoulder, the left hand under the but. 
 
 Second motion. Bring down the piece with the right hand, letting it 
 fall firmly into the loft, the latter seizing it a little in advance of the 
 tail-band, the barrel up, the left elbow near the body, the right hand 
 against the hip, the point of the bayonet as high as the eye. (Fig. 31.) 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 69 
 
 Shoulder — Arms. 
 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 105. First motion. Face to the front by turning on the left heel, 
 bring up the right bj the side of the left heel ; at the same time bring 
 up the piece with the right hand to the left shoulder, and place the left 
 hand under the but. 
 
 Second motion. Let the right hand fall promptly into its position. 
 
 Load in ten times. 
 1. Load. 
 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 106. First motion. Drop the piece by a smart extension of the left 
 arm, seize it with the right hand above and near the lower band; at 
 the same time carry the right foot forward, the heel against the hollow 
 of the left foot. 
 
 Second motion. Drop the piece with the right hand along the left 
 thigh, seize it with the left hand above the right, and with the left 
 band let it descend to the ground without shock, the piece touching 
 the left thigh and the muzzle opposite the centre of the body ; carry 
 the right hand quickly to the cartridge-bo.\, and open it. (Fig. 32.) 
 
 2. Handle — Cartridge. 
 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 107. Seize the cartridge with the thumb and the next two fingers, 
 and place it between the teeth. 
 
 3. Tear — Cartridge. 
 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 108. Tear the paper down to the powder, hold the cartridge upright 
 between the thumb and two next fingers, near the top; in this position, 
 place it in front of and near the muzzle, the back of the baud to the 
 front. 
 
 4. Charge — Cartridge. 
 
 109. Fix the eye on the muzzle, turn quickly the back of the right 
 band toward the body, in order to discharge the powder into the barrel. 
 
70 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 raise the elbow to the height of the wrist, shako the cartridge, force it 
 into the muzzle, and leave the hand reversed, the fingers closed but not 
 clenched. (Fig. 33.) 
 
 5. Draw — Rammer. 
 
 One time and three motiont. 
 
 110. Fiiit motion. Drop the right elbow smartly, and seize the ram- 
 mer between the thumb and forefinger bent, the other fingers shut; 
 draw it smartly, extending the arm, seize the rammer again at the 
 middle between the thumb and forefinger, the hand reversed, the palm 
 to the front, the nails up, the eyes following the movement of the 
 hand ; clear the rammer from the pipes by again extending the arm. 
 
 Second motion. Turn rapidly the rammer between the bayonet and 
 the face, closing the fingers, the rammers of the rear rank grazing the 
 right shoulders of the men of the same file in front, the rammer paral- 
 lel to the bayonet, the arm extended, the but of the rammer opposite 
 to the muzzle but not yet inserted, the eyes fixed on the muzzle. 
 
 Third motion. Insert the but of the rammer, and force it down as 
 low as the hand. 
 
 6. Ram — Cartridge. 
 
 " One time and one motion. 
 
 IJl. Extend the arm to its full length to seize the rammer between 
 the right thumb extended and the forefinger bent, the other fingers 
 closed; with force ram home twice, and seize the rammer at the small 
 end between the thumb and forefinger bent, the other fingers closed, 
 the right elbow touching the body. 
 
 7. Relurn — Rammkr. 
 One time and three motionn. 
 
 112. First motion. Draw the rammer briskly, rcseize it at the mid- 
 dle between the thumb and forefinger, the hand reversed, the palm to 
 the front, the nails up, the eyes following the hand; clear the rammer 
 from the barrel by extending the arm. 
 
 Second motion. Turn the rammer rapidly between the b.ayonet and 
 the face, closing the fingers, the rammers of the rear rank grazing the 
 right shoulders of the men in the same file in front, the rammer par- 
 allel to the bayonet, the arm extended, the little end of the rammer 
 opposite to the first pijic but not yet inserted, the ej'cs fixed on that 
 pipe. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 71 
 
 Tmrd motion. Insert the small end, and with the thumb, which will 
 follow the movement, force it as low as the middle band; raise the 
 hand quickly, a little bent, place the little finger on the but of the 
 rammer and force it down; lower the left hand on the barrel to the 
 extent of the arm without depressing the shoulder. 
 
 8. Cast — About. 
 
 One time and tiro motions. 
 
 113. First motion. With the left hand bring up the piece vertically 
 against the left shoulder, seize it smartly with the right hand at the 
 small of the stock, and slide the left hand down as low as the chin. 
 
 Second motion. Make a half-face to the right on the left heel, bring 
 the left toe to the front, place the right foot at the same time close 
 behind, and at right angles with the left, the hollow of the right foot 
 against the left heel; carry the piece opposite to the right shoulder; 
 bring down the piece with the right hand into the left, with which seize 
 it at the tail-band, the thumb extended on the stock, the but under the 
 right forearm, the small of the stock against the body and about two 
 inches under the right breast, the muzzle at the height of the eye, the 
 left elbow supported against the side, the right hand grasping the 
 email of the stock. (Fig. 34.) 
 
 9. Prime. 
 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 114. Place the thumb of the right hand on the hammer (the fingers 
 remaining under and against the guard) and half-cock the piece; 
 brush off the old cap, and with the thumb and first two fingers of the 
 right hand take a cap from the pouch, place it firmly on the cone by 
 pushing it down with the thumb, and seize the piece by the small of the 
 stock. 
 
 10. Shoulder — Arms. 
 
 One time and tico motionn. ~ 
 
 115. First motion. Face to the front by turning on the left heel; at 
 the same time bring the piece briskly with the right hand to the left 
 shoulder and place the left hand under the but. 
 
 Steond motion. Let the right hand fall smartly into its position. 
 
 • 
 
72 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 Ready. (From the position o( prime.) 
 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 116. Place the thumb of the right baud on the hammer (the fingers 
 remaining under and against the guard), cock the piece, and seize the 
 small of the stock. 
 
 Ready. (From the position of shoulder arms.) 
 
 One time and /our motions. 
 
 117. Firtt motion. Turn the piece with the left hand, the lock to the 
 front, seize it at the small of the stock with the right hand, at the same 
 time make a half-face to the right on the left heel, bringing the left too 
 to the front, and placing the right foot behind and at right angles to 
 the left, the hollow of the foot against the left heel. 
 
 Second motion. Bring the piece with the right hand to the middle of 
 the body, place the left hand just above the lock, the thumb extended 
 along the stock at the height of the chin, the counter (or S) plate 
 turned toward the body, the rammer obliquely to the left and front. 
 
 Third motion. Place the thumb on the hammer, the forefinger under 
 and on the guard, the other three fingers joined to the first, the elbow 
 at the height of the hand. 
 
 Fourth motion. Close the right elbow smartly to the body in cocking, 
 without bending the wrist, seize the piece by the small of the stock, lot 
 it descend along the body in the left hand to the tail-band, which will 
 remain at the height of the shoulder. (Fig. 35.) 
 
 Aim. 
 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 118. Raise the but ti) the shoulder, the left elbow a little down, shut 
 the left eye, direct the right along the barrel, drop the head upon the 
 but to catch the object, and place the forefinger on the trigger. The 
 rear rank will at the same time carry the right foot about eight inches 
 toward the left heel of the uum next on his right. (Fig. 36.) 
 
 FlUE. 
 
 One time (Did one motion. 
 
 119. Apply the forefinger with force to the trigger without further 
 lowering or turning the head, and remain in that position. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 73 
 
 Load. (From the Fire.) 
 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 120. First motion. Bring back the piece quickly with both hands, 
 depress the but strongly by extending the right arm, and carry it with 
 the arm thus extended to the left side, ttie barrel to the front and oppo- 
 site to the left shoulder, the left hand at the height of the chin, the back 
 of the hand to the front, the left forearm touching the stock; at the 
 same time face to the front and carry the right foot forward, the heel 
 against the hollow of the left foot. 
 
 Second motion. Let go the handle with the right hand, let the piece 
 descend through the left to the ground without shock, and take the 
 position of the second motion of load. 
 
 Shoulder — Arms. (From the Fire.) 
 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 121. First motion. Bring back the piece with both hands, face to the 
 front, carry the piece against the left shoulder, and place the left h and 
 under the but. 
 
 Second motion. Let the right hand fall smartly to its position . 
 The squad being in the position of aim, the instructor, to habituate 
 the soldiers to wait for the word fire, sometimes commands : 
 
 Recover — Arms. 
 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 122. Withdraw the finger from the trigger, throw up the muzzle 
 smartly, and retake the position of the fourth motion of ready. 
 
 The men being in this position, if the instructor wishes them to come 
 to a shoulder he commands : 
 
 Shoulder — Arms. 
 
 123. At the word shoulder, the squad will face to the front and bring 
 their pieces to the middle of the body again : the left thumb at the height 
 of the chin, the little finger just above the lock; next place the right 
 thumb on the head of the hammer, support the forefinger on the trigger, 
 sustain the hammer carefully in its descent at the same time to the po- 
 sition of half-cock, then seize the small of the stock with the right 
 hand. At the word arms, carry the piece to the shoulder smartly and 
 take the position of shoulder arms. 
 
 7 
 
74 MANUAL iOtt VOI-UNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 To load in four times (or pauses). 
 
 124. The instructor commands: 
 
 1. Load in four times. 2. Load. 
 
 Exteuto the first time of loading, handle cartridge, tear cartridge, 
 charge cartridge. 
 
 Two. 
 
 125. Draw rammer, enter it u.« far as the hand, and rain twioe. 
 
 Three. 
 ll'O. Reuirn rammer, cast about, and prime. 
 
 Four. 
 
 127. E.xccute the tenth time of loadin;:;. 
 
 128. The soldiers being at a shoulder, when the instructor may wish 
 to return bayonets he commands: 
 
 Unfx — B A YOX ET. 
 One time atid three motions. 
 
 Fiitt motion. Drop the piece by a smart extension of the loft arm, 
 seize it with the right hand above and near the tail-band. 
 
 Second motion. Drop the piece with the right hand along the left 
 thigh, seize it with the left hand above the right, lengthen out the left 
 arm, rest the but on the ground without shock, and carry the right 
 hand at the same time to the bayonet, with the thumb lower the clasp 
 against the stop, and then seize the bayonet at the socket and shank. 
 
 Thiid motion. Wrest off the bayonet, return it to the scabbard, place 
 the little finger on tlic but of the rnnimer, lower the left hand along the 
 barrel in extending the arm, without depressing the shoulder. 
 
 Shoulder — Arms. 
 
 One time and three motions. 
 
 129. Firet tnotion. Raise the piece with the left band along the left 
 side, the hand at the height of the chin, the forearm touching the piece, 
 the barrel to the front; drop at the same time the right hand to seize 
 the jiieco a little above the handle, the forefinger touching the cock and 
 the thumb on the counter-plate. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 75 
 
 Second motion. Raise the piece with the right hand, drop the left 
 and place it under the but, support the piece with the right band 
 against the shoulder, in the position prescribed for shoulder arms, the 
 right hand resting on without grasping the piece. 
 
 Third motion. Let fall smartlj' the right hand into its position. 
 
 Fix — Bayonet. 
 
 130. First and second motions. As the first and second motions of 
 unjix bayonet, except that at the end of the second motion, the right 
 hand will go to seize the bayonet by the socket and shank, so that the 
 lower (now upper) end of the socket shall extend about an inch abore 
 the heel of the palm. 
 
 Third motion. Draw the bayonet from the scabbard, carry and fix it 
 on the muzzle, turning the clasp toward the body with the right thumb; 
 place the little finger on the head of the rammer, lower the left hand 
 along the barrel, in extending the arm. 
 
 Shoulder — Arms. 
 
 The same as from the iinjix bayonet. 
 
 Secure — Arms. 
 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 L3L First motion. Seize quickly the piece with the right hand, the 
 thumb on the counter-plate and the forefinger against the cock ; detach 
 the piece from the shoulder at the same instant, the barrel to the front, 
 seize it at the tail-band with the left hand, the thumb extended on the 
 rammer, the piece erect opposite to the shoulder, the left elbow on the 
 piece. 
 
 Second motion. Reverse the piece, pass it under the left arm, the left 
 hand remaining at the tail-band, the thumb on the rammer to prevent 
 it from sliding out, the little finger resting against the hip, and the right 
 hand falling at the same time into its position. (Fig. 37.) 
 
 Shoulder — Arms. 
 
 One time and tioo motions. 
 
 132. First motion. Raise the piece with the left hand, but not too 
 suddenly, lest the rammer should fly out; seize the handle with the 
 right hand to support it against the shoulder, quit the hold of the left 
 hand, and place quickly this hand under the but. 
 
76 MANUAL FOR VOLTJNTKERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 Second motion. Let fall smartly the right hand into its position ; 
 drop at the same time the piece into the position of shouldtr arm*. 
 
 Trail — Arms. 
 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 133. First motion. As the first motion of order arms. 
 
 Second motion. Incline a little the muzzle to the front, the but to 
 the rear and about three inches from the ground, the right hand, sup- 
 ported at the hip, will sustain the piece so that the men of the rear rank 
 may not touch with their bayonets the men in front of them. (Fig. 38.) 
 
 Shoulder — Arms. 
 
 134. At the command shoulder, raise the piece perpendicularly in the 
 right hand ; at the command arms, execute what has been prescribed 
 for the shoulder from the position ot order arms. 
 
 To right shoulder^ shift — Arms. 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 135. Turn the piece with the loft hand, the lock to the front, seize it 
 at the same time with the right hand at the handle, place it on the right 
 shoulder, the left hand not quitting the but, the lock-plate upward, the 
 muzzle up ; sustaiu the piece in this position by placing the right hand 
 on the flat of the but; let fall the left hand by the side. (Fig. 39.) 
 
 Shoulder — Arms. 
 
 136. Raise the piece by extending the right arm, seize it with the left 
 band above the lock, carry it against the left shoulder, turning the bar- 
 rel to the front, the right hand being at the handle, place the left hand 
 under the but, and let the right fall into its position. 
 
 Anns — At will. 
 
 One lime and one motion. 
 
 137. Carry the piece at pleasure on either shoulder, or with one or 
 both hands, the muzzle always up. 
 
 Shoulder — Arms. 
 
 138. Retake smartly the position of shoulder arms. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 77 
 
 Inspection of Arms. 
 
 139. The squad being at order arms and having the bayonet in the 
 scabbard, if the instructor wishes to cause an inspection of arms he 
 will command : 
 
 Inspection of — Arms. 
 
 One time and three vlotiona. 
 
 First motion. Face to the right once and a half on the left heel, car- 
 rying the right foot perpendicularly to the rear of the alignment, about 
 six inches from and at right angles with the left foot; seize promptly 
 the piece with the left hand a little above the middle band, incline the 
 muzzle to the rear without displacing the heel of the but, the rammer 
 turned toward the body; carry at the same time the right hand to the 
 bayonet and seize it as has been prescribed, No. 130. 
 
 Second motion. Draw the bayonet from the scabbard, carry and fix it 
 on the muzzle; seize next the rammer, draw it as has been explained in 
 loading in ten times, and let it glide to the bottom of the bore. 
 
 Third motion. Face promptly to the front, seize the piece with the 
 right hand, and retake the position of order arms. 
 
 The instructor will then inspect in succession the piece of each man 
 in passing along the front of the rank. Each, as the instructor reaches 
 him, will raise smartlj' his piece with his right hand, seize it with the 
 left between the tail-band and the lock-plate, the lock to the front, the 
 left hand at the height of the chin, the piece oppo.site to the left eye 
 (see fig. 40); the instructor will take it with the right hand at the han- 
 dle, and after inspecting it will return it to the soldier, who will receive 
 it back with the right hand and replace it in the position of order arms. 
 
 When the instructor shall have passed him, each soldier will retake 
 the position prescribed at the command inajyection of arms, and return 
 the rammer; after which he will face to the front. 
 
 140. If instead of inspection of arms it be the wish of the instructor 
 only to cause bayonets to be fixed he will command: 
 
 Fix — Bayonet. 
 
 Take the position indicated, inspection of arms (first motion), fix 
 bayonets as has been explained, and immediately face to the front. 
 
 Bayonets fi.\ed, if it be the wish of the instructor, after firing, to as- 
 certain whether the pieces have been discharged he will command: 
 
 Spring — Kammer. 
 
78 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 Put the rammer in the barrel, as has been explained above, and im- 
 mediately face to the front. 
 
 The instructor, for the purpose stated, can take the rammer by the 
 small end and spring it in the barrel, or cause each man to make the 
 rammer ring in the barrel. 
 
 Each man after the instructor passes him will return rammer and face 
 to the front. 
 
 Arms — Port. 
 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 141. Throw the piece diagonally across the body, the lock to the 
 front, seize it smartly at the same instant with both hands, the right at 
 the handle, the left at the tail-band, the two thumbs pointing toward 
 the muzzle, the barrel sloping upward and crossing opposite to the point 
 of the left shoulder, the but proportionately lowered. The palm of the 
 right hand will be above, and that of tl\e left under the piece, the nails 
 of both hands next to the body, to which the elbows will be closed. 
 (Fig. 41.) 
 
 Shoulder — Arms. 
 
 One time and two motioun. 
 
 Firet motion. Bring the piece smartly to the left shoulder, placing the 
 left hand under the but. 
 
 Second motion. Drop the right hand smartly by the side. 
 
 MANUAL OF ARMS FOR THE RIFLE. 
 
 Principles of Shoulder Arma. 
 
 .42. The soldier standing in the position of the soldier, the instructor 
 causes him to bend the right arm slightly, and places the piece in it in 
 the following manner (see fig. 42): the piece in the right hand — the 
 barrel nearly vertical and resting in the hollow of the shoulder — the 
 guard to the front, the arm hanging nearly at its full length near the 
 body; the thumb and forefinger, embracing the guard, the remaining 
 fingers closed together, and grasping the swell of the stock just under 
 the cock, which rests on the little finger. 
 
 Support — Arms. 
 
 One time and three motions. 
 
 143. /'iV»^ motion. Bring the piece with the right hand perpendicu- 
 larly to the front and between the eyes, the barrel to the rear; seize the 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 79 
 
 piece with the left hand at the lower band, raise this hand as high as 
 the chin, and seize the piece at the same time with the right hand four 
 inches below the cock. 
 
 Second motion. Turn the piece with the right hand, the barrel to the 
 front; carry the piece to the left shoulder, and pass the forearm extend- 
 ed on the breast between the right hand and the cock : support the cock 
 against the left forearm, the left hand resting on the right breast. 
 
 Third motion. Drop the right hand by the side. 
 
 Shoulder — AiiMS. 
 One time and three motion*. 
 
 144. Firit motion. Grasp the piece with the right band under and 
 against the left forearm; seize it with the left hand at the lower band, 
 the thumb extended; detach the piece slightly from the shoulder, the 
 left forearm along the stock. 
 
 Second motion. Carry the piece vertically to the right shoulder with 
 both han<ls, the rammer to the front, change the position of the right 
 hand so as to embrace the guard with the thumb and forefinger, slip 
 the left hand to the height of the shoulder, the fingers extended and 
 joined, the right arm nearly straight. 
 
 Third juotion. Drop the left hand quickly by the side. 
 
 Present — Arms. 
 
 One time and tico motionf. 
 
 145. Firnt motion. With the right hand bring the piece erect before 
 the centre of the body, the rammer to the front; at the same time seize 
 the piece with the left hand half-way between the guide-sight and lower 
 band, the thumb extended along the barrel and against the stock, the 
 forearm horizontal and resting against the body, the hand as high as 
 the elbow. 
 
 Second motion. Grasp the small of the stock with the right hand 
 below and against the guard. 
 
 Shoulder — Arms. 
 
 One time and tico motiont. 
 
 146. First motion. Bring the piece to the right shoulder, at the same 
 time change the position of the right hand so as to embrace the guard 
 with the thumb and forefinger, slip up the left hand to the height of 
 
80 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 the shoulder, the fingers extended and joined, the right arm nearly 
 straight. 
 
 Second motion. Drop the left hand quii'kly l>y the side. 
 
 Oi-der — Arms. 
 
 One time atid two vwtious. 
 
 147. First motion. Seize the piece briskly with the left hand near 
 the upper band, and detach it slightly from the shoulder with the right 
 hand ; loosen the grasp of the right hand, lower the piece with the left, 
 reseize the piece with the right hand above the lower band, the little 
 finger iu rear of the barrel, the but about four inches from the ground, 
 the right baud supported against the hip; drop the left hand by the 
 side. 
 
 Second ^notion. Let the piece slip through the right hand to the 
 ground by opening slightly the fingers, and take the position about to 
 be described. 
 
 Position of order anns. 
 
 148. The hand low, the barrel between the thumb and forefinger 
 extended along the stock; the other fingers extended and joined; the 
 muzzle about two inches from the right shoulder; the rammer iu front; 
 the toe (or beak) of the but against and iu a line with the too of the 
 right foot, the barrel perpendicular. 
 
 Shoulder — Arms. 
 
 One time (iiicl tiro motions. 
 
 149. Firnt motion. Raise the piece vertically with the right hand to 
 the height of the right breast and opposite the shoulder, the elbow close 
 to the body ; seize the piece with the left hand below the right and drop 
 quickly the right hand to grasp the ])iece at the swell of the stock, the 
 thumb and forefinger embracing the guard; press the piece against the 
 shoulder with the left hand, the right arm nearly straight. 
 
 Secoitd motion. Drop the left hand quickly by the side. 
 
 Load 171 nine tijiies. 
 
 1. LoAD.^ 
 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 150. Qrasp the piece with the left hand as high as the right elbow, 
 
 1 Whenever the loadings and firings are to be executed, the instrnctor will cauM 
 the cartridge-boxes to be brought to the front. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 81 
 
 and bring it vertically opposite the middle of the body ; shift the right 
 hand to the upper band, place the but between the feet, the barrel to 
 the front; seize it with the left hand near the muzzle, which should be 
 three inches from the body ; carry the right hand to the cartridge-box. 
 (Fig. 43.) 
 
 2. Handle — Cartridge. 
 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 151. Seize the cartridge with the thumb and next two fingers and 
 place it between the teeth. 
 
 3. Tear — Cartridge. 
 
 One time and 07ie motion. 
 
 152. Tear the paper to the powder, hold the cartridge upright between 
 the thumb and first two fingers, near the top; in this position place it 
 in front of and near the muzzle, the back of the hand to the front. 
 
 4. Charge — Cartridge, 
 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 153. Empty the powder into the barrel; disengage the ball from the 
 paper with the right h and and the thumb and first two fingers of the 
 left ; insert it into the bore, the pointed end uppermost, and press it 
 down with the right thumb; seize the head of the rammer with the 
 thumb and forefinger of the right hand, the other fingers closed, the 
 elbows near the body. 
 
 5. Draw — Rammer. 
 
 One time and three motions. 
 
 154. First ^notion. Half-draw the rammer by extending the right 
 arm; steady it in this position with the left thumb; grasp the rammer 
 near the muzzle with the right hand, the little finger uppermost, the 
 nails to the front, the thumb extended along the rammer. 
 
 Second motion. Clear the rammer from the pipes by again extending 
 the arm, the rammer in the prolongation of the pipes. 
 
 Third motion. Turn the rammer, the little end of the rammer pass- 
 ing near the left shoulder; place the head of the rammer on the ball, 
 the back of the hand to the front. 
 
82 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 6. 72am — Cartridge. 
 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 155. Insert the rammer as far as the right hand , and steady it in this 
 position with the thumb of the left hand ; soi/.e the rammer at the 
 small end with the thumb and forefinger of the right hand, the back of 
 the hand to the front; press the ball home, thu elbows near the body. 
 
 7. Return — Rammku. 
 
 One time atid three motions. 
 
 156. First motion. Draw the rammer half-waj' out, and steady it in 
 this position with the left thumb; grasp it near the muzzle with the 
 right hand, the little finger uppermost, the nails to the front, the 
 thumb along the rammer ; |clear the rammer from the bore by extend- 
 ing the arm, the nails to the front, the rammer in the prolongation of 
 the bore. 
 
 Second motion. Turn the rammer, the head of the rammer passing 
 near the left shoulder, and insert it in the pipas uutil the ri ght hand 
 reaches ths muzzle, the back of the hand to the fron t. 
 
 Third motion. Force the rammer home by placing the little finger of 
 the right hand on the head of tha rammer; pass the left hand down 
 the barrel to the extent of the arm without depressing the shouhler. 
 
 8. PuiME. 
 One time and two motionn. 
 
 157. First motiiin. With the left hand raise the piece till the hand is 
 as high as the eye, grasp the small of the stock with the righ t hand ; 
 half-face to the right; place at the same time the right foot behind and 
 at right angles with the left, the hollow of the right foot against the 
 left heel. Slip the left hand down to the lower band, the thumb along 
 the stock, the left elbow against the body ; bring the piece to the right 
 side, the but below the right forearm — the small of the stock against 
 the body and two inches below the right breast, the barrel upward, the 
 muzzle on a level with the eye. 
 
 Second motion. Half-cock with the thumb of the right hand, the 
 fingers supported against the guanl and the small of the stock ; remove 
 the old cap with one of the fingers of the right hand, and with the 
 thumb and forefinger of the same hand take a cap from the pouch, 
 place it on the nipple, and press it diwu with the thumb ; seize the 
 small of the stock with the right hand. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 83 
 
 9. Slwulder — Arms. 
 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 158. First motion. Bring the piece to the right shoulder and support 
 it there with the left hand ; face to the front, bringing the right heel to 
 the side of and on a line with the left; grasp the piece with the right 
 hand as indicated in the position of shoulder arms. 
 
 Second motion. Drop the left hand quickly by the side. 
 
 Ready. 
 
 One time and three motions. 
 
 159. First motion. Raise the piece slightly with the right hand, 
 making a half-face to the right on the left heel ; carrj' the right foot to 
 the rear, and pl.ace it at right angles to the left, the hollow of it oppo- 
 site to and against the left heel ; grasp the piece with the left hand at 
 the lower band and detach it slightly from the shoulder. 
 
 Second motion. Bring down the piece with both hands, the barrel 
 upward, the left thumb extended along the stock, the but below the 
 right forearm, the small of the stock against the body and two inches 
 below the right breast, the muzzle as high as the eye, the left elbow 
 against the side ; place at the same time the right thumb on the head 
 of the cock, the other fingers under and against the guard. 
 
 Third jnotion. Cock, and seize the piece at the small of the stock 
 without deranging the position of the but. 
 
 Aim. 
 
 160. As in the manual for the musket. 
 
 FlUE. 
 
 161. As in the manual for the musket. 
 
 Load. 
 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 162. Bring down the piece with both hands, at the same time face to 
 the front and take the position of load. Each rear rank man will bring 
 his right foot by the side of the left. 
 
 The men being in this position, the instructor will cause the loading 
 to be continued by the commands and means prescribed. No. 151 and 
 following. 
 
 If after firing the instructor should not wish the recruits to reload he 
 will command : 
 
84 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 Shoulder — Arms. 
 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 163. Throw up the piece briskly with the left hand and resume the 
 position of nhotiUler arms, at the game time face to the front, turning 
 on the left heel, and bring the right heel on a line with the left. 
 
 Recover — Arms. 
 
 164. The Slime as in the manual for the musket. 
 
 1C5. The soldiers being in the position of the third motion of ready, 
 if the instru ctor should wish to bring them to a shoulder he will com- 
 mand : 
 
 Shoulder — Arms. 
 
 One time and o?ie motion. 
 
 At the command shoulder, place the thumb upon the cock, the fore- 
 finger on the trigger, half-cock, and seize the small of the stock with 
 the right hand. At the command arms, bring up the piece briskly to 
 the right shoulder and retake the position of shoulder arms. 
 
 The recruits being at shoulder arms, when the instructor shall wish 
 to fix bayonets he will command : 
 
 Fix — Bayonet. 
 
 One time (tnd three mutionii. 
 
 166. Firtt motion. Grasp the piece with the left hand at the height 
 of the shoulder and detach it slightly from the shoulder with the right 
 band. 
 
 Second motion. Quit the piece with the right hand, lower it with the 
 left hand opposite the middle of the body, and place the but between 
 the feet without shock, the rammer to the rear, the barrel vertical, the 
 muzzle three inches from the body; seize it with the right hand at the 
 upper band and carry the left hand reversed to the handle of the 
 Babre-bayonet. 
 
 Third motion. Draw the sabre-bayonct from the scabbard and fi.\ it 
 on the extremity of the barrel ; seize the piece with the left hand, the 
 arm extended, the right band at the upper band. 
 
t 
 
 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 86 
 
 Shoulder — Arms. 
 
 One time and two motion*. 
 
 167. First motion. Raise the piece with the left hand and place it 
 against the right shoulder, the rammer to the front; seize the piece at 
 the same time with the right hand at the small of the stock, the thumb 
 and forefinger embracing the guard, the right arm nearly extended. 
 
 Second motion. Drop briskly the left hand by the side. 
 
 Charge — Bayonet. 
 
 One time aiid two motiont. 
 
 168. Firtt motion. Raise the piece slightly with the right hand and 
 make a half-face to the right on the left heel; place the hollow of the 
 right foot opposite to and three inches from the left heel, the feet square ; 
 seize the piece at the same time with the left hand a little above the 
 lower band. 
 
 Second motion. Bring down the piece with both bands, the barrel 
 uppermost, the left elbow against the body; seize the small of the sto^k 
 at the same time with the right hand, which will be supported against 
 the hip, the point of the sabre-bayonet as high as the eye. 
 
 Shoulder — Arms. 
 
 One time and two motiont. 
 
 169. First motion. Throw up the piece briskly with the left hand in 
 facing to the front, place it against the right shoulder, the rammer to 
 the front; turn the right hand so as to embrace the guard, slide the 
 left hand to the height of the shoulder, the right hand nearly ex- 
 tended. 
 
 Second motion. Drop the left hand smartly by the side. 
 
 Trail — Arms. 
 
 % One time and tico motions. 
 
 170. First motion. The same as the first motion of order arms. 
 Second motion. Incline the muzzle slightly to the front, the but to 
 
 the rear and about four inches from the ground. The right hand, sup- 
 ported at the hip, will so hold the piece that the rear rank men may not 
 touch with their bayonets the men in the front rank. 
 
86 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 Shoulder — Akms. 
 
 171. At the command nhnulrUr, raise tbe piece perpendicularly in the 
 right hand, the little finger in rear of the barrel; at the command arm*, 
 execute what has been prescribed for the shoulder from the position of 
 order armt. 
 
 Unfix — Bayonet. 
 
 One time and three vwtiona. 
 
 172. First and second motions. The same as the first and second mo- 
 tions of Jix bni/onet, except that at the end of the second command the 
 thumb of the right hand will be placed on the spring of the sabrc-bayo- 
 net, and the left hand will embrace the handle of the sabre-bayonet and 
 the barrel, the thumb extended along tbe blade. 
 
 Third motion. Press the thumb of the right band on the spring, 
 wrest off the sabre-bayonet with the left hand, turn it to the right, the 
 edge to the front, lower the guard until it touches the right hand, with 
 which seize the back and the edge of the blade between the thumb and 
 first two fingers, the other fingers holding the piece; change the posi- 
 tion of the left hand without quitting the handle, return the sabre-bayo- 
 uet to the scabbard, and seize the piece with the left hand, the arm 
 extended. 
 
 Shoulder — Arms. 
 
 One time and tiro motions. 
 
 173. First motion. The same as the first motion fromyfjr bayonet. 
 Second motion. The same as the second motion from fix bayonet. 
 
 Secure — Arms. 
 
 One time and three motions. 
 
 174. First motion. The same as the first motion of support arms, 
 except with the right hand seize the piece at the small of the stock. 
 
 Second motion. Turn the piece with both hands, the barrel to the 
 front; bring it opposite the left shoulder, the but against the hip, the 
 left hand at the lower band, tbe thumb as high as the chin and extended 
 on the rammer; the piece erect and detached from the shoulder, the left 
 forearm against the piece. 
 
 Third motion. Reverse the piece, pass it under the left arm, the left 
 hand remaining at the lower band, tbe thumb on the rammer to prevent 
 it from sliding out, the little finger resting against the hip, the right 
 hand falling at the same time by the side. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 87 
 
 Shoulder — Arm§. 
 
 One time and three motions. 
 
 nb. First motion. Kaisc the piece with the left hand and seize it 
 with the right hand at the small of the stock, the piece erect and 
 detached from the shoulder, the but against the hip, the left forearm 
 along the piece. 
 
 Second motion. The same as the second motion of shoulder arms 
 from a support. 
 
 Third motion. The same as the third motion of shoulder arms from 
 a support. 
 
 Right shoulder shijl — Arms. 
 
 One time and tiro motions. 
 
 176. First motion. Detach the piece perpendicularly from the shoul- 
 der with the right hand and seize it with the left between the lower 
 band and guide-sight; raise the piece, the left hand at the height of 
 the shoulder and four inches from it; place at the same time the right 
 hand on the but, the beak between the first two fingers, the other two 
 fingers under the but-plate. 
 
 Second motion. Quit the piece with the left hand, raise and place 
 the piece on the right shoulder with the right hand, the lock-plate up- 
 ward; let fall at the same time the left hand by the side. 
 
 Shoulder — Arms. 
 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 177. First motion. Raise the piece perpendicularly by extending the 
 right arm to its full length, the rammer to the front, at the same time 
 sei/.e the piece with the left hand between the lower band and guide- 
 sight. 
 
 Second motion. Quit the but with the right hand, which will imme- 
 diately embrace the guard; lower the piece to the position of shoulder 
 arms, slide up the loft hand to the height of the shoulder, the fingers 
 extended and closed. Drop the left hand by the side. 
 
 The men being at support arms, the instructor will sometimes cause 
 the pieces to be brought to the right shoulder. To this eflfect he will 
 command: 
 
 Right shoulder shifi — Arms. 
 
 One time and tico motions. 
 
88 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 178. Fiml motion. Sci/.e the piece with the right hand below and 
 near the left forearm, place the left hantl under the but, the heel of the 
 but between the first two fingers. 
 
 Second motion. Turn the piece with the left hand, the lock-plate 
 upward, carry it to the right shoulder, the left hand still holding the 
 but, the muzzle elevated; hold the piece in this position and place the 
 right hand upon the but, and let fall the left hand by the side. 
 
 Support — A R M S . 
 One time and tiro motions. 
 
 179. Firtt motion. The same as the first motion of shoulder arms. 
 Second viotion. Turn the piece with both hands, the barrel to the 
 
 front, carry it opposite the left shoulder, slip the right hand to the 
 small of the stock, place the left forearm extended on the breast, and 
 let fall the right hand by the side. 
 
 Anns — At will. 
 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 180. At this command carry the piece at pleasure on either shoulder, 
 with one or both bands, the muzzle elevated. 
 
 Shoulder — Arms. 
 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 181. At this command retake quickly the position of shoulder arms. 
 
 Inspection of arms. 
 
 182. The soldiers being at order arms, and having the sabro-bayonot 
 in the scabbard, if the instructor wishes to cause an inspection of arms 
 he will command : 
 
 Inspection — Arms. 
 
 One time and two tnotions. 
 
 183. First motion. Seize the piece with the left hand below and near 
 the upper band, carry it with both hands opposite the middle of the 
 body, the but between the feet, the rammer to the rear, the barrel ver- 
 tical, the muz/.lc about three inches from the body; carry the left hand 
 reversed to the sabre-bayonet, draw it from the scabbard and fix it on 
 
SCHOOL OP THE SOLDIER. 89 
 
 the barrel ; grasp the piece with the left hand below and near the upper 
 band, seize the rammer with the thumb and forefinger of the right hand 
 bent, the other fingers closed. 
 
 Second motion. Draw the rammer as has been explained in loading, 
 and let it glide to the bottom of the bore ; replace the piece with the 
 left hand opposite the right shoulder, and retake the position of order 
 arms. 
 
 The instructor will then inspect iu succession the piece of each man 
 in passing along the front of the rank. Each, as the instructor reaches 
 him, will raise smartly his piece with his right hand, seize it with the 
 left between the lower band and guide-sight, the lock to the front, the 
 left hand at the height of the chin, the piece opposite to the left eye; 
 the instructor will take it with the right hand at the handle, and after 
 inspecting it will return it to the man, who will receive it back with the 
 right hand and replace it in the position of order arms. 
 
 When the instructor shall have passed him, each soldier will retake 
 the position prescribed at the command innpection arms, return the ram- 
 mer, and resume the position of order arms. 
 
 If instead of inspection of artns the instructor should merely wish to 
 cause the bayonets to be fixed he will command : 
 
 Fix — Bayonet. 
 
 184. Take the position fix bayonet. No. IS.S, fix bayonet as has been 
 explained, and immediately resume the position of order arms. 
 
 If it be the wish of the instructor, after firing, to ascertain whether 
 the pieces have been discharged he will command : 
 
 Spring — Ramm er. 
 
 This is done as iu the manual for the musket. 
 
 To load in four times. 
 
 185. The first time will be executed at the end of the command; the 
 three others at the commands tico, three, aud four. 
 
 The instructor will command :■ 
 
 1. Load in four titiies. 2. Load. 
 
 186. Execute the times to include charge cartridge. 
 
 Two. 
 
 187. Execute the times to include ram cartridge. 
 
 S 
 
90 manual for volunteers and militia. 
 
 Three. 
 
 188. Execute the times to include prime. 
 
 Four. 
 
 189. Execute the time of nhoiilder anna. 
 
 To load at tcill. 
 
 190. The instructor will next teach loading at will, which will bo 
 executed as loading in four times, but continued and without resting 
 on either of the times. He will command : 
 
 1. Load at will. 2. Load. 
 
 The instructor will habituate the soldiers by degrees to load with the 
 greatest possible promptitude, each without regulating himself by his 
 neighbor, and above all without waiting for him. 
 
 Firings. 
 
 191. The firings are direct or oblique, and will be executed as fol- 
 lows: 
 
 The direct fire. 
 The instructor will give the following commands : 
 
 1. Fire by Squad. 2. Squad. 3. Ready. 4. Aim. 5. Fire. 
 6. Load. 
 
 These several commands will be executed as has been prescribed in 
 the vianual of arms. At the third command the men will come to the 
 position of ready, as heretofore explained. At the fourth they will aim 
 according to the rank in which each may find himself placed, the rear 
 rank men inclining forward a little the upper part of the body, in order 
 that their pieces may reach as much beyond the front rank as possible. 
 
 At the sixth command they will load their pieces and return imme- 
 diately to the position of ready. 
 
 The instructor will recommence the firing by the commands: 
 
 1. Squad. 2. Aim. 3. Fire. 4. Load. 
 
 When the instructor wishes the firing to cease he will command: 
 
 i 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 91 
 
 Cease firing. 
 
 At this command the men will cease firing, but will load their pieces 
 if unloaded, and afterward bring them to a shoulder. 
 
 Oblique firings. 
 
 192. The oblique firings will bo executed to the right and left, and by 
 the same commands as the direct fire, with this single difference — the 
 command aim will always be preceded by the caution right or left 
 oblique. 
 
 Position of the two ranks in the oblique fire to the right. 
 
 At the command ready, the two ranks will execute what has been pre- 
 scribed for the direct fire. 
 
 At the cautionary command right oblique, the two ranks will throw 
 back the right shoulder and look steadily at the object to be hit. 
 
 At the command aim, each front rank man will aim to the right with- 
 out deranging the feet; each rear rank man will advance the left foot 
 about eight inches toward the right heel of the man next on the right 
 of his file-leader and aim to the right, inclining the upper part of the 
 body forward and bending a little the left knee. 
 
 Position of the two ranks in the oblique fire to the left. 
 
 At the cautionary command left oblique, the two ranks will throw back 
 the left shoulder and look steadily at the object to be hit. 
 
 At the command aim, the front rank will take aim to the left without 
 deranging the feet; each man in the rear rank will advance the right 
 foot about eight inches toward the right heel of the man next on the 
 right of his file-leader and aim to the left, inclining the upper part of 
 the body forward and bending a little the right knee. 
 
 In both cases, at the command load, the men of each rank will come 
 to the position of load as prescribed in the direct fire; the rear rank 
 men bringing back the foot which is to the right and front by the side 
 of the other. Each man will continue to load as if isolated. 
 
 To fire by File. 
 
 193. The fire by file will be executed by the two ranks, the files of 
 which will fire successively and without regulating on each other, ex- 
 cept for the first fire. .j. 
 
 The instructor will command: 
 
^2 MANUAL FOR VOIAW'TEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 1. Fire by File. 2. Squad. 3. Rkady. 4. Commknce Firing. 
 
 At the third coniinand the two ranks will take the jiosition prescribed 
 in the direct fire. 
 
 At the fourth coinra.and the file on the right will aim and fire;^he rear 
 rank man in aiming will take the position indicated in No. 118. 
 
 The men of this file will load tlicir pieces briskly and fire a second 
 time; reload and fire again, and so on in continuation. 
 
 The second file will aim at the instant the first brings down its 
 pieces to reload, and will conform in all respects to that which has just 
 been prescribed for the first file. 
 
 After the first fire the front and rear rank men will not be required to 
 fire at the same time. 
 
 Each man after loading will return to the position of ready and con- 
 tinue firing. 
 
 When the instructor wishes the firing to cease he will command: 
 
 Cease — Firing. 
 
 At this command the men will cease firing. If they hare fired they 
 will load their pieces and bring them to a shoulder; if at the position of 
 read;/, they will half-cock and shoulder arms; if in the position of at'm, 
 they will bring down their pieces, half-cock, and shoulder arms. 
 
 To fire by Rank. 
 
 19i. The fire by rank will ba executed by each entire rank, alter- 
 nately. 
 
 The instructor will command: 
 
 1. Fire by Rank. 2. Squad. 3. Ready. 4. Rear rank. 
 5. Aim. 6. Fire. 7. Load. 
 
 At the third command the two ranks will take the position of ready, 
 as prescribed in the direct fire. 
 
 At the seventh command the rear rank will execute that which has 
 been prescribed in the direct fire, and afterward take the position of 
 ready. 
 
 As soon as the instructor sees several men of the rear rank in the 
 position of ready he will command: 
 
 1. Front rank. 2. Aim. 3. Fire. 4. Load. 
 
 At those commands the men in the front rank will execute what has 
 been prescribed for the rear rank, but they will not step off with the 
 right foot. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 93 
 
 The instructor will recommence the firing by the rear rank, and will 
 thus continue to alternate from rank to rank until he shall wish the 
 firing to cease, when he will command cease firing, which will be exe- 
 cuted as heretofore prescribed. 
 
 To fire and load Kneeling. 
 
 195. In this exercise the squad will bo supposed loaded and drawn 
 up in one rauk. The instruction will be given to each man individu- 
 ally, without times or motions, and in the following manner. 
 
 The instructor will command: 
 
 Fire and load Knekling. 
 
 At this command the man on the right of the squad will move for- 
 ward three paces and halt; carry the right foot to the rear and to the 
 right of the left heel and in a position convenient for placing the right 
 knee upon the ground in bending the left leg; place the right knee 
 upon the grpund; lower the piece, the left forearm supported upon the 
 thigh on the same side, the right hand on the small of the stock, the 
 but resting on the right thigh, the loft hand supporting the piece near 
 the lower band. 
 
 He will next move the right leg to the left around the knee supported 
 on the ground, until this leg is nearly perpendicular to the direction of 
 the left foot, and seat himself comfortably on the right heel. 
 
 Raise the piece witli the right hand and support it with the left, 
 holding it near the lower band, the left elbow resting on the left thigh 
 near the knee; seize the hammer with the thumb, the forefinger under 
 the guard; cock and seize the piece at the small of the stock; bring fhe 
 piece to the shoulder; aim and /ice. 
 
 Bring the piece down as soon as it is fired and support it with the 
 left hand, the but resting against the right thigh; carry the piece to 
 the rear, rising on the knee, the barrel downward, the but resting on 
 the ground; in this position support the piece with the left hand at the 
 upper band, draw cartridge with the right and load the piece, ramming 
 the ball, if necessary, with both hands. 
 
 When loaded bring the piece to the front with the left hand, which 
 holds it at the upper band; seize it at the same time with the right 
 hand at the smiiU of the stock; turn the piece, the barrel uppermost 
 and nearly horizontal, the left elbow resting on the left thigh; half- 
 cock, remove the old cap and prime, rise, and return to the ranks. 
 
 The second man will then be taught what has just been prescribed 
 for the first, and so on througli the remainder of the squad. 
 
94 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 To fire and load Lying. 
 
 196. In this exercise the squad will be in one rank and loaded; the 
 instruction will be given individually and without times or motions. 
 
 The instructor will command: 
 
 FiKE AND LOAD LyING. 
 
 At this command the man on the right of the squad will move for- 
 ward three paces and halt; he will then bring his piece to an order, 
 drop on both knees, and jjlace himself on the ground flat on his belly. 
 In this position he will support the piece nearly horizontal with the 
 left hand, holding it near the lower band, the but-end of the piece and 
 the left elbow resting on the ground, the barrel uppermost; cock the 
 piece with the right hand and carry this hand to the small of the 
 stock; raise the piece with both hands, press the but against the shoul- 
 der, and, resting on both elbows, aim andjire. 
 
 As soon as ho has fired bring the piece down and turn uj)ou his left 
 side, still resting on his left elbow; bring back the piece until the cock 
 is opposite his breast, the but-end resting on the ground; 'take out a 
 cartridge with the right hand; seize the small of the stock with this 
 hand, holding the cartridge with the thumb and two first fingers; he 
 will then throw himself on his back, still holding the piece with both 
 hands; carry the piece to the rear, place the but between the heels, 
 the barrel up, the muzzle elevated. In this position charge cartridge, 
 draw rammer, ram cartridge, and return rammer. 
 
 When the man has finished loading he will turn again upon his left 
 side, remove the old cap, and prime, then raise the piece vertically, 
 rise, turn about, and resume his position in the ranks. 
 
 The second man will be taught what has just been prescribed for the 
 first, and so on throughout the squad. 
 
 Bayonet Exercise. 
 
 197. The bayonet exercise in this book will be confined to two move- 
 ments, the guard against infantry and the guard againit cavalry. The 
 men will be placed in one rank with two paces interval, and being at 
 shoulder arms, the instructor will command: 
 
 1. Guard against Infantry. 2. Guard. 
 
 One time and ttco molione. 
 Firtt motion. Make a half-face to the right, turning on both heels, 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 95 
 
 the feet square to each other ; at the same time raise the piece slightly 
 and seize it with the left hand above and near the lower band. 
 
 Second motion. Carry the right foot twenty inches perpendicularly 
 to the rear, the right heel on the prolongation of the left, the knees 
 slightly bent, the weight of the body resting equally on both legs; 
 lower the piece with both hands, the barrel uppermost, the left elbow 
 against the body; seize the piece at the same time with the right hand 
 at the small of the stock, the arms falling naturally, the point of the 
 bayonet slightly elevated. (Fig. 44.) 
 
 Shoulder — Arms. 
 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 Throw up the piece with the left hand and place it against the right 
 shoulder, at the sumc time bring the right heel by the side of the left 
 and face to the front. 
 
 1. Guard against cavalry. 2. Guard. 
 
 One time and two motionn. 
 
 Both motions the same as for yiiard against infantry, except that the 
 right hand will be supported against the hip and the bayonet held at 
 the height of the eye as in charge bayonet. 
 
 Shoulder — Arms. 
 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 Spring up the piece with the left hand and place it against the right 
 shoulder, at the same time bring the right heel by the side of the left 
 and face to the front. 
 
 MANUAL OF THE SWORD OR SABRE FOR OFFICERS. 
 
 POSITION OF THE SWORD OR SABRE UNDER ARMS. 
 
 198. The carry. The gripe in the right hand, which will be sup- 
 ported against the right hip, the back of the blade against the 
 shoulder. 
 
 TO SALUTE WITH THE SWORD OR SABRE. 
 
 Three times (or pauses). 
 
 One. At the distance of six paces from the person to be saluted 
 raise the sword or sabre perpendicularly, the point up, the flat of the 
 
96 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILtTlA. 
 
 blade opposite to the right eye, the guard at the height of (he shouldei*) 
 the elbow supported on the body. 
 
 7*100. Drop the point of the sword ">r sabre by extending the arm 
 so that the right hand may be brought to the side of the right thigh* 
 and remain in that position until the person to whom the salute is ren- 
 dered shall be pa.«.sed, or shall have passed, six paces. 
 
 Three. R.iise the sword or sabre smartly and resume the position 
 first prescribed. 
 
 COLOR-SALUTE. 
 
 199. In the ranks (he color- bearer, whether at a halt or in march, 
 will always carry the heel of the color-lancc supported at the right 
 hip, the right hand generally placed on the lance at the height of the 
 shoulder, to hold it steady. AVhen the color has to render honors, the 
 color-bearer will salute as follows : 
 
 At the distance of six paces slip the right hand along the lance to 
 the height of the eye; lower the lauce by straightening the arm to its 
 fullest extent, the heel of the lance remaining at the hip, and bring 
 back the lance to the habitual position when the person saluted shall 
 be passed, or shall have passed, six paces. 
 
 PART THIRD. 
 
 200. When the men are well established in the principles and mech- 
 ani$in (if the step, the jio^ition of the body, and the manual of arms, 
 the instructor will unite from eight to twelve in a squad, in order to 
 teach them the j)rinciple3 of alignment, the touch of the elbow in 
 marching to the front, the principles of the march bj* the flank, wheel- 
 ing from a halt, wheeling in inarching, and the change of direction to 
 the side of the guide. He will place (he squad in one rank, elbow to 
 elbow, and numbur the men from right to left. 
 
 Ali(/>nne>its. 
 
 201. The instructor will at lirst teach the soldiers to align themselves 
 man by man, in order to make them understand the principles of align- 
 ment better; for this purpose he will command (he two men on the 
 right flank to inarch two paces to the front, aud having aligned (or 
 (/#-««»?{/) them, ho will cause the remainder of the S(|uad to move up, as 
 they may bo successively called, each by his number, as three, four, etc.. 
 and align (or dreiu) themselves successively on the line of the first two 
 men. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 97 
 
 Each man, as designated by his number, will turn his head and eyes 
 to the right, as directed for ei/en right in part first, and march tiro paces 
 forward in quick time, shortening the last step so as to find himself 
 about six inches behind the new line, which he ought never to cross; 
 he will then move up steadily by steps of two or three inches, the legs 
 straight, to the side of the next man to him on the line, so that without 
 throwing the head or the shoulders out of place he may find himself in 
 the exact line with the files on his right, and touching elbows with the 
 nearest one without opening out his arms. 
 
 The instructor, seeing the line properly dressed, commands: 
 
 Front. 
 
 At which the men will turn their eyes to the front and remain firm. 
 Alignments to the left will be conducted on the same principles. 
 
 202. When the men shall have learned to dress correctly man by 
 man, without deranging the head or shoulders and without jostling, 
 the instructor will cause the entire squad to dress at once by the com- 
 mand : 
 
 Squad right (or,/«/i) — Dress. 
 
 At this the squad, except the two men placed in advance as a basis 
 of alignment, will move up in quick time and place themselves on the 
 new line according to the principles just laid down. 
 
 The instructor will superintend tiie dressing, and when he sees the 
 greater number of the squad in their proper places will command : 
 
 Front. 
 
 The instructor may afterward order this or that file forward or hack, 
 designating each man by his number (or name). The file or files desig- 
 nated will slightly turn the head toward the ri<jht (or left) to judge how 
 much they ought to move up or back, place themselves on the line by 
 moving an inch or two at a time, and then turn eyes to the front with- 
 out waiting for any command from the instructor. 
 
 203. Alignments to the rear will be executed on the same principles, 
 the men stepping back a little beyond the line and then dressing up 
 according to the principles laid down in No. 201; the commands of 
 the instructor are : 
 
 Right (or left) backward — Dress. 
 
 To march to the front. 
 
 804. The squad being correctly aligned and the instructor wishing to 
 march it to the front he will place a well instructed man on the right 
 9 
 
98 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 or left, according to the side on which he wi.<he9 the guide to be, and 
 command : 
 
 1. Sijuad. foru-arH. 2. Guide right (or left). 3. AIarch. 
 
 At the command march, the squad will step ofT smartly with the Ictl 
 foot and will take up quirk time, unless otherwise specially ordered. 
 Thi* rule in general. The guide will take care to march straight to 
 the front, keeping his shoulders always square with that line. The men 
 will touch elbows lightly on the side toward the guide, maintaining the 
 shoulders square to the front, no matter on which side the guide may 
 be; they should be careful that they do not open out the left elbow or 
 the right arm ; that they yield to ))ressure coming from the .«ide of the 
 guide and resist that coming from the side opposite;' that they recover 
 by insensible degrees the touch of the elbow if lost ; and if any files 
 are before or behind the line, that they correct themselves by shorten- 
 ing or lengthening the step bj' almost insensible degrees. It is all im- 
 portant that the closest attention should be paid to each one of the 
 above directions, otherwi.se the men cannot attain proficiency, and 
 when they are advanced to the company drill it will be impossible to 
 secure promjitness or accuracy in the manoeuvres. 
 
 205. The men being well established in the principles of the direct 
 march the instructor will exercise them in marching obliquely. The 
 squad being in march the instructor commands: 
 
 1. Right (or left) oblique. 2. March. 
 
 At the command march, each man will make a l]ulf-f:ice to the right 
 (or left), and will then march straight forward in the new direction. 
 As the men no longer touch elbows the)' will glance along the nearest 
 files toward the side to which they arc obliquing, and will regulate 
 their steps so that the right (or left) shoulder shall always be behind 
 the left (or right) shoulder of their next neighbor on the right Cor left), 
 and that his head shall conceal the heads of the other men on the right 
 (or left). The men should be careful to preserve the same length of 
 pace and the same degree of obliquily. The guides must always bo on 
 the flank toward which the oblique takes place. 
 
 The instructor wishing to resume the direct march will command : 
 
 1. Forward. 2. March. 
 
 At the command vmrrh, each man will make a hnlf-face to the left 
 (or right), and all will march straight to the front, conforming to ^he 
 principles laid down fur marching to the front. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 99 
 
 To march to the front in double-quick, time. 
 
 206. Instruction in the principles of this step is recommended for all 
 infantry troops; it mat/ be omitted for hi/niitrt/ of the line, but in no 
 other case; nothing but the imperative necessity for giving all of tho 
 time at the disposal of the instructor to instruction in the principles 
 of the quick step and to the manoeuvres should prevent even infantry 
 of tho line from being thoroughly instructed in the principles of this 
 step. 
 
 The squad being at a march in quick time, the instructor com- 
 mands : 
 
 1. Double-quick. 2. March. 
 
 At the command warch, which will be given when either foot is com- 
 ing to the ground, the squad will set off in double-quick time. The 
 men should be careful to follow the rules already laid down for the 
 march in the double-quick step and to preserve the alignment. 
 
 When the instructor wishes the squad to resume the quick step he 
 will command : 
 
 1. Quick time. 2. March. 
 
 At the command march, which should be given when cither foot is 
 coming to the ground, the squad will retake the step in quick time. 
 
 If the squad is at u halt and the instructor wishes to march at the 
 double-quick step he commands: 
 
 1. Squad, forward. 2. Guide right for left). 3. Double-quick. 
 4. March. 
 
 The squad being on the march in double-quick time the instructor 
 will occasionally cause it to mark time ; the men will then mark double- 
 quick time without altering the cadence. He will also cause them to 
 pass from the direct to the oblique march and the reverse, conforming 
 to what has been prescribed for the oblique march. 
 
 In marching at dvuhlc-qntck time the men will always carry their 
 pieces on the right shoulder or at a trail. This rule is general. 
 
 If the instructor wishes the pieces carried, at a trail he will give the 
 command trail arms before the command double-quick. If, on the con- 
 trary, this command is not given, the men will shift their pieces to the 
 right shoulder at tho command double-quick. In either case, at the 
 command halt, the men will bring their pieces to the position of 
 shoulder arms. This rule is yeneral. 
 
100 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 To face about in marching. 
 
 207. If the squad be inarching in quick or double-quick time and the 
 instructor should with to march in retreat he will command: 
 
 1. Squad, rigid about. 2. March. 
 
 At the command marrh, which should be given at the in."!tant the 
 right /not tonchet the ground, the soldier will complete the ne.\t pace 
 with the left foot, then turning to the right about on both heels he will 
 step off with the left foot. 
 
 To march by the jlank. 
 
 20S. The squad being at a halt and correctly' aligned the instructor 
 will command : 
 
 1. Squad, right — Facf,. 2. Fonvard. 3. March. 
 
 At the command /f(ce, the squad will face to the right ; the even num- 
 bered men, after facing to the right, will step quickly to the right side 
 of the odd numbered men, the latter standing fast, so that when the 
 movement is e.xccuted the men will bo formed into files of two men 
 abreast, or doubled. 
 
 At the command mnrch, the squad will step off smartly with the left 
 foot, the files keeping their dress and preserving their intervals. 
 
 The march by the left flank will be executed by the same commands, 
 substituting the word Ir/t for right, and by inverse means; in this case, 
 the even numbered men after facing to the left will stand fast, and the 
 odd numbered will place themselves on their left. 
 
 When the instructor shall wish to halt the squad, marching by the 
 flank, and to cause it to face to the front he will command : 
 
 1. Squad. 2. Halt. 3. Front. 
 
 At the second command the rank will halt, and afterward no man 
 will stir although he may have lost his distance. This prohibition 
 is necessary, to habituate the men to a constant attention to their dis- 
 tances. 
 
 At the command front, each man will front by facing to the left if 
 marching by the right flank, and by a face to the right if marching by 
 the left flank. The rear rank men will move quickly into their places 
 80 as to form the scjuad into one rank again. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. . 101 
 
 209. The squad being on the march by the flank the instructor will 
 cause it to change direction by commanding: 
 
 1. By file left for right). 2. Mauch. 
 
 At the comraand march, the first file will change direction to the left 
 (or right) in describing a small arc of a circle, .and will then march 
 straight forward; the two men of this file, in wheeling, will keep up 
 the touch of the elbows, and the man on the side to which the wheel is 
 made will shorten the first three or four steps. Each file will come suc- 
 cessively to the wheel on the same spot where that which preceded it 
 wheeled. 
 
 210. The instructi)r will also cause the squad to face by the right or 
 left flank in marching, and for this purpose will command: 
 
 1. Squad, by the right for left) flank. 2. March. 
 
 At the command march, which will be given a little before either foot 
 comes to the ground, the men will turn the body, plant the foot that is 
 raised in the new direction, and step ofi" with the other foot without 
 altering the cadence of the step. When the squad faces to the front or 
 rear in inarching the men who find themselves in rear step to the right 
 or left so as to form a single rank, each man in his place as in the be- 
 ginning; this is called the undoiibliug of files. 
 
 If when the squad is marching to the front or rear the instructor 
 causes it to march by a flank the files will double ; when the squad is 
 on the march to the front, and is faced by the right flank, the even num- 
 bers will step up to the right of the odd ones, as in the first instance in 
 facing from a halt; when it is marched by the left flank, the odd num- 
 bers should double on the left of the even : if the squad is marching to 
 the rear when it is faced by the right flank the odd will double on the 
 ti-cn as in the last case, but if faced by the left flank the even will double 
 to the right of the odd as in the first case. 
 
 The instructor will sometimes vnarch bj- a flank without dr)ubling 
 files; for this purpose he commands : 
 
 In one rank, right — Face. 
 
 In marching at the double-quick, however, the files will always be 
 doubled. 
 
 General principles of wheelings. 
 
 211. Wheelings arc of two kinds: from a halt, or onjixed pivots, and 
 on the march, or on a movable pivot. 
 
 In wheelings from a halt the pivut-man only turns in his place, 
 
102 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITTA. 
 
 without advancing or rectfdine. In the wheels in marching the pivot- 
 man takes steps of nine or eleven inches, according as the squad is 
 marching in quick or douhlc-quick time, so as to clear the wheeling 
 point, which is necessarj' in order that, in a column composed of sec- 
 tions, platoons, or companies, the distances between the different parts 
 of it shall not be lost, as will be more fully explained in the school of 
 the company. 
 
 The man on the wheeling flank will take a full pace of twenty-eight 
 or thirty-three inches, according to whether the time is quick or 
 double-quick. 
 
 Wlieeling from a halt or on a Jixed pivot. 
 
 212. The squad being at a halt, the instructor will place a well in- 
 structed man on the wheeling flank to conduct it and command: 
 
 1. By squad, right wheel. 2. March. 
 
 At the command march, the squad will step off with the left foot, 
 turning the head at the same time a little to the left, the eyes on the 
 line of the eyes of the men to their left; the pivot-man will merely 
 mark time, gradually turning his body in order to conform himself to 
 the movements of the marching flank ; the man who conducts this flank 
 will take steps of twenty-eight inches, and from the first step advance 
 the left .shoulder a little, ca.st his eyes from time to time along the rank, 
 and feci constantly but lightly the elbow of the next man on his right, 
 but never push him. The other man will feel lightly the elbow of the 
 next man to his right, resist pressure coming from the left, and j'ield to 
 any coming from the right: each man will conform himself to the 
 march of tlie men on the left, shortening his step more and more us ho 
 is nearer the right, or pivot. 
 
 The instructor will make the .sijuad wheel round the circle once or 
 twice before halting, in order to cause the principles to be better under- 
 stood ; ho will be watchful that the centre does not break or get too far 
 in advance. 
 
 He will cause tho wheel to the lelt to be executed on the same prin- 
 ciples. 
 
 When the instructor wishes to arrest tho wheel he comrnands : • 
 
 1. Squad. 2. Halt. 
 
 At tho second command the squad will halt and no man stir. Tho 
 instructor going to the left (or right, if the wheel has been to the left) 
 flank will place tlie two outer tnen of that flank in the direction he 
 maj' wish to givo to the squad, without, however, displacing tlie pivot, 
 
BCIIOOTi OF TlIK SOLDIER. 103 
 
 who will conform the line of his shoulders to this direction. The in- 
 structor will take care to have between these two men and the pivot 
 only the space necessary to contain the other men. He will then com- 
 mand : 
 
 Lefl (or right) — Dress. 
 
 At this the squad will place itself on the alignment of the men fixed 
 as the basis, in conformity with the principles laid down for the align- 
 ments. As soon as the men are aligned the instructor commands : 
 
 Front. 
 
 Whe.eU'ng in marrhiiig, <ir on n tiiovable pivot. 
 
 213. When the men have been brought to execute the wheel from a 
 halt properly they will be taught the wheel in marching. 
 
 For this end, the squad being on the march, when the instructor 
 shall wish to cause it to change direction to the flank opposite the 
 guide he will commaml : 
 
 1. Right (or lejl) wheel. 2. March. 
 
 The first command will be given when the squad is /our paces from 
 the wheeling point. 
 
 At the command mnrcb, the wheel will be executed in the same man- 
 ner as from a halt, except that the touch of the elbow will remain to- 
 ward the Ic/t or marching flank instead of the side of the actual pivot; 
 that the pivot-man, instead of merely turning in bis place, will conf()rm 
 himself to the movement of the marching flank, feel lightly the elbow 
 of the next man, take steps of full nine inches, and thus gain ground 
 forward so as to clear the point of the wheel. The middle of the rank 
 will bend slightly to the rear. As soon as the movement shall com- 
 mence the man who conducts the marching flank will cast his eyes on 
 the ground over which he will have to pass. 
 
 The wheel being ended the instructor will command : 
 
 I* Foi-wanl. 2. March. 
 
 The command fortcard will bo given four paces before the wheel is 
 complete. 
 
 At the command march, which will be given at the instant the wheel 
 is complete, the man who conducts the wheel will march straight for- 
 ward; the pivot-man and all the rest of the squad will retake the step 
 of twenty-eight inches and bring the head direct to the front. 
 
104 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 Turning, or change of direction to the side of the guide. 
 
 214. The change of direction to the side of the guide in marching 
 will be executed as follows. The instructor will command: 
 
 1. Left for right) turn. 2. March. 
 
 The first command should be given when the squad is /wur paces 
 from the turning point. 
 
 At the command march, to be pronounced at the instant the rank 
 ought to turn, the guide will face to the left (or right) in marching, 
 and move forward in tlie new direction without changing the pace. 
 The whole squad will promptly conform to the new direction, to effect 
 which each man will advance the shoulder opposite the guide, take the 
 double-quick step, turn the bead and eyes to (he side of the guide, 
 place himself on the line w^ith the guide, from whom he will take the 
 step, touch elbows to the side of the guide, and resume the direct 
 position of the head. The men will arrive in their places in regular 
 succession. 
 
 215. When the men comprehend and can execute the various wheels, 
 etc., in quick time the instructor will cause thcni to be repeated in 
 double-quick time, by the same commands and according to the same 
 principles as in quick time, except that the command double-quick will 
 precede that of march. In wheeling while marching the pivot-man 
 will take steps of eleven inches, and in the changes of direction to the 
 side of the guide the men on the side opposite the guide must increase 
 the gait iu order to bring themselves into lino. 
 
 The instructor, in order not to fatigue the men and not to divide 
 their attention, will cause them to execute the several movements of 
 wheelings, etc., first without arms and next, after the mechanism be 
 well comprehended, with arms. , 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 105 
 
 Article IV. 
 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 
 
 MANNER OF FORMING THE COMPANY. 
 
 216. The whole company being assembled on its parade ground or 
 in the rendezvous, the first or orderly sergeant will command: 
 
 Fall in — Company. 
 
 At this command the corporals and privates will form in one rank 
 faced to the rijrht. and in the trdcr of height from right to left, the 
 tallest man on the right (now head of the company), the nest tallest 
 man immediately covering the first, and so on to the left or rear of the 
 rank, in which position will be placed the shortest man. The other 
 sergeants will take post in the rank of file-closers, two paces to the 
 right of the companj", and assist the first sergeant in forming the com- 
 pany. 
 
 When the men have thtir places the first sergeant will command: 
 
 Froxt. 
 
 The second sergeant, who is the left guide of the company, will now 
 place himself on the left of the company, and the orderly sergeant will 
 promptly command : 
 
 1. In iwi) ranis, form company. 2. Left — Face. 3. March. 
 
 At the command ?f/f /nee, the whole company will face to the left, 
 except the guide and man on the left, who will stand fast. 
 
 At the command march, the whole of the men who have faced to the 
 left will step off together: the second man, counting from the left, will 
 place himself in the rear rank, behind the man next to the guide, and 
 face to the front; the two following men will in like manner on closing 
 up form the nest file, the third man in the front and the fourth in the 
 rear rank behind him, and all the other men will come successively to 
 form files, two deep, to the right of those already formed.* 
 
 * When the company is in good jjiscipline the files may be formed in two ranks 
 at once, each man liaviug liis proper number in the company depend >ipon his 
 height, and being able to take his appropriate place without creating confusion. 
 
106 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTKKRS AND MTTJTTA. 
 
 The oflSccrs will now take their posts as prescribed in No. S ; if the 
 captain has tt) discharge tlie duties of in.-truclor the first lieutenant 
 will take his place ou the ri;^ht of the front rank, the second lieulcuant 
 replacing the first behind the fourth section. 
 
 The instructor will then cause the files to bo numbcrod, and for this 
 purpose will command : 
 
 In each rank — cnunt Twos. 
 
 At this command the men count in each rank from r\g\x\. to left, pro- 
 nouncing in a loud and distinct voice, iu the same tone, without hurry 
 and without turning the head, one, two, according to the place each one 
 occupies. He will also cause the company to be divided into platoons 
 and sections, taking caro that the first platoon is -always composed of 
 an even number of files. 
 
 To open ranks. 
 
 217. The company being at order nnni, the ranks and file-closers 
 well arij;;iel, whjii the instructor shall wish to cause the ranks to be 
 op>;ncd he will direct the left guide to place himself on the left of the 
 frjnt rank, whioh boing e.xecuted ho will comman d: 
 
 1. Company. 2. Shoulder — Arms. 
 
 3. To the rear, open order. 
 
 At the last command the covering sergeant (or orderly-sergeant) and 
 the left guile will step oiV sniartl3' to the rear, four paces of twenty- 
 eight inches from the front rank, in order to mark the position for the 
 rear rank. They will judge this distance by the eye without couutiug 
 thcste[)s. 
 
 The instructor will place himself at tlie same time on the right flank, 
 in order to observe if these two non-commissioned oDicers are on a lino 
 parallel to the front rank, and if necessary to correct their positions, 
 which being executed he will command : 
 
 4. March. 
 
 At this command tho front rank will stand fast. The rear rank will 
 step to the rear without counting the steps and will place itself 
 on the alignment marked for this rank, each man stepping slightly 
 behind the line and then dressing forward as in the backward dress. 
 The covering sergeant will dress the rear rank on the left guide placed 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 107 
 
 to mark the left of this rank. The instructor seeing the rear rank 
 aligned will command : 
 
 5. Fkoxt. 
 
 At this command the sergeant on the left of the rear rank will return 
 to his place as a file-closer. 
 
 Alignments in open ranis. 
 
 218. The ranks being open the instructor will, in the first exercises, 
 align the rank.s, man by man, the better to inculcate the principles. 
 To efl"ect this he will cause two or four men on the right or left of each 
 rank to march two or three paces forward, and after having aligned 
 them conimaiul : 
 
 Byjile, right (or left) — Dress. 
 
 At this the men of each rank will move up successively on the 
 alignment, each man being preceded by his neighbor in the same rank, 
 toward the basis, by two paces, and having correctly aligned himself 
 will cast his eyes to the front. 
 
 219. Successive alignments having habituated the soldier to dress 
 corrcctlj', the instructor will cause the ranks to align themselves at 
 once, forward and backward, sometimes in a direction parallel and 
 sometimes in one oblique to the original direction, giving in each case 
 two or four men to serve as a basis of alignment to each rank, to 
 effect which he will command : 
 
 1. Eight (or left) — Drkss. 2. FroxVT ; 
 
 or, 
 
 1. Right (or left) backward — Drkss. 2. Front. 
 
 In oblique alignments in opened ranks the men of the rear rank will 
 not seek to cover their file-leaders, as the sole object of tho e.tercise is 
 to teach them to align themselves correctly in their respective ranks in 
 the diEfcrcnt directions. 
 
 In the several alignments the captain will superintend the front 
 rank and the covering sergeant the rear rank. For this purpose they 
 will place themselves on the side by which the r.lnks are dressed. 
 
 In oblique alignments the men will conform the line of their shoul- 
 ders to tho new direction of their ranks, and will place themselves on 
 the alignment as has been prescribed in the school of the soldier, 
 according as the new dirccti)n sh.all be in front or rear of the original 
 one. 
 
108 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 To clone ranha. 
 
 220. Tbe instructor will command: 
 
 1. Close order. 2. !March. 
 
 At the command march, the rear rank will close up in quick time, 
 eucU man directing himself on his file-leader. 
 
 Ali(/>ntients in closed ra7iks. 
 
 221. The ranks being closed the instructor will cause to be executed 
 parallel and oblique alignments bj' the right and left, forward and 
 bnckwaril, <.ib.<erving to place alwnj's two or four filrs as a basis of 
 alignment. He will give tl:e same commands prescribed for vprucd 
 ranks. 
 
 In alignments in closed ranks the captain will superintend the front 
 rank and the covering sergeant tbe rear rank. Tlicy will habituate 
 themselves to judge the alignment by the lines of the eyes and shoul- 
 ders, in casting a glance of the eye along the front and rear of the 
 ranks. 
 
 The moment the captain jierceivcs the greater number of the front 
 rank aligned he will command Front, and rectify afterward, if neces- 
 sary, the alignment of the other nun by ordering this or (hat Clc/or- 
 wnrU or bad,-, designating each by its number. The rear rank will 
 conform to the alignment of the front rank, superintended by tbe cov- 
 ering sergeant. 
 
 The ranks being steady the instructor will place himself on the 
 fi.nik to verify their alignment. He will also see that each rear rank 
 man covers accurately his (ile-lcader. 
 
 In all alignments the file-closers will preserve the distance of two 
 paces from the rear rank. 
 
 The alignments being ended the instructor will e.\ercisc the company 
 in the manual, and finish with stacking arms as follows: 
 
 To Slack Ai-rns. 
 
 222. The men being at ruder urme the instructor will command: 
 
 Stack — Arms. 
 
 At this command the front rank man of every even numbered file 
 will pal's his piece before him, seizing it with the left hand above the 
 middle band, and place the but behind and near the right foot of 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 109 
 
 the man next on the left, the barrel turned to the front. At the same 
 time the front rank man of every odd numliered file will pass his piece 
 before him, seizing it with the left hand below the middle band, and 
 hand it to the man next on the left; the latter will receive it with the 
 right hand two inches above the middle band, throw the but about 
 thirty-two inches to the front, ()])posite to his right shoulder, incline 
 the muzzle toward him, and lock the shanks of the two baynucts, the 
 lock of this second piece toward the right and its shank abuve that of 
 the first piece. ■ The rear rank man of every even file will project his 
 bayonet forward and introduce it (using both hands) between and 
 under the shanks of the two other bayonets. He will then abandon the 
 piece to his file-leader, who will receive it with the right hand under 
 the middle band, bring the but to the front, holding up his own piece 
 and the stack with the left hand, and place the but of this third piece 
 between the feet of the man next on the right, the S-platc to the rear. 
 The stack thus formed the roar rank man of every odd file will pass his 
 piece into his left hand, the barrel turned to ihe front, and sloping the 
 bayonet forward rest it on the stack. 
 
 22.3. If the company be armed with rifen, or any piece without the 
 bayonet, arms will be stacked bj- the same commands and in the Ad- 
 lowing manner: at the command utack arms, the front rank man of 
 every even numbered file will pass his piece before him, seizing it with 
 the left hand near the upper band; will place the but a liitlc in ad- 
 vance of his left toe, the barrel turned toward the body, and draw the 
 rammer slightly from its place; the front rank man of every odd num- 
 bered file will also draw the rammer slightly and pass his piece to the 
 man next on his left, who will seize it with the right hand near the 
 upper band and place the but a little in advance of the right toe of the 
 man next on his right, the barrel turned to the front; he will then 
 cross the rammers of the two pieces, the rammer of the piece of the odd 
 numbered man being inside; the rear rank man of every even file will 
 also draw his rammer, lean his piece forward, the lock-plate down- 
 ward, advance the right foot about six inches, and insert the rammer 
 between the rammer and barrel of the piece of his front rank man; 
 with his left hand he will place the but of his piece on the ground, 
 thirty-two inches in rear of and perpendicular to the front rank, 
 bringing back his right foot by the side of the left; the front rank man 
 of every even file will at the same time lean the stack to the rear, quit 
 it with his right hand, and force all the rammers down. The stack 
 being thus formed the rear rank man of every odd file will pass his 
 piece into his left hand, the barrel to the front, and inclining it for- 
 ward will rest it on the stack. 
 
110 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 224. The men of both rank? having taken the position of the soldier 
 without arms the instructor will ooiumand: 
 
 1. Break ranks. 2. Makch. 
 
 7o Resume Anns. 
 
 Both ranks being reformed in rear of their stacks the instructor will 
 command: 
 
 l^ake — Akms. 
 
 At this command the rear rank man of every odd numbered file will 
 withdraw his piece from the stuck; the front rank man of every even 
 file will seize his own piece with the left hand and that of the man on 
 his right with his right hand, both above the lower bund; the rear 
 rank man of the even file will seize his piece with the right hand below 
 the lower band; these two men will raise up the stack to loosen the 
 rammers or bayonets; the front rank man of every odd file will facili- 
 tate the disengagement of the rammers, if necessary, by drawing them 
 out slightly with the left hand, and will receive his piece from the hand 
 of the man ne.\t on his left; the four men will retake the position of 
 the soldier at order arm*. 
 
 The firings. 
 
 To fire by company. 
 
 225. The instructor wishing to cause the fire by company to be exe- 
 cuted will command: 
 
 1. Fire by company. 2. Commence firing. 
 
 At the first command the captain will promptly place himself oppo- 
 site the centre of his company and four paces in rear of the line of 
 file-closers: the covering sergeant will retire to that line and place 
 himself opposite to his interval. Thin rule in general for hath the cap- 
 tain find coreriiig sergeant in all the different Jiringt. 
 
 At the second command the captain will add : 
 
 1. Company. 2. Ready. 3. Aim. 4. Fiue. 5. Load. 
 
 At the command load, the men will load their pieces and then take 
 the position of ready, as prescribed in the school of the soldier. 
 
 The captain will immediately recommence the firing by the com- 
 mands : 
 
 1. Company. 2. Aim. 3. FiitK. 4. Load. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. Ill 
 
 The firing will be thus continued until the signal to cease firing is 
 sounded. 
 
 The captain will sometimes cause aim to be taken to the right or 
 left, simply observing to pronounce rif/ht (or le/l) oblique before the 
 command aim. 
 
 The fire by file. 
 
 226. The instructor wishing to cause the fire by file to be executed 
 will command : 
 
 1. Fire hy file. 2. Company. 3. Ready. 4. Commence firing. 
 
 The third and fourth commands will be executed as prescribed in 
 the school of the soldier. 
 
 The fire will be commenced by the right file of the company; the 
 next file will take aim at the instant the first brings down its pieces 
 to reload, and so on to the left; but this progression will only be ob- 
 served in the first discharge, after which each man will reload and fire 
 without regulating himself by others, conforming himself to what is 
 prescribed in the school of the soldier. 
 
 77(6 fire by rank. 
 
 227. The instructor wishing the fire by rank to be executed will 
 command : 
 
 1. Fire by rank. 2. Company. 3. Ready. A.. Rear rank — Aim. 
 .5. Fire. 6. Load. 
 
 The fifth and sixth commands will be executed as is prescribed in the 
 school of the soldier. 
 
 When the instructor sees one or two pieces in the rear rank at a 
 ready he will command: 
 
 1. Front rank. 2. Aim. 3. Fire. 4. Load. 
 
 The firing will be continued thus, by alternate ranks, until the signal 
 is given to cease firing. 
 
 228. The instructor will sometimes cause aim to be taken to the right 
 and left, conforming to what is prescribed for the oblique fire. 
 
 The instructor will cause the firing to cease, whether by company, by 
 file, or by r.ank, by sounding the signal to cease firiug; at which signal 
 the men will cease to fire. If thej' have fired they will load their 
 pieces and bring them to a shoulder; if at the position of ready thoy 
 
112 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEKRS AND MIl.ITIA. 
 
 will half-cock and shoulder arms. If in the position of <ii'ni Ihoy will 
 bring down their piLVC", half-cock, and shoulder arms. 
 
 229. The signal to cease firing will be always followed by a bugle 
 note or tap of the drum; at which sound the captain and covering 
 sergeant will promptly resume their places in line, and will rectify, if 
 necessary, the alignment of the ranks. 
 
 The fire by lilc bein^ that which is most frequently used against an 
 enemy, it is highly important that it be rendered perfectly faiiiiliar to 
 the troops. The instructor will tlierefore give it almost exclusive 
 preference, and labor to cau.se the men to aim with care, and always, 
 if possible, at some particular object. As it is of the utmost im- 
 portance that the men should aim with precision in battle, this 
 principle will be rigidly enforced in the o.xerci*es for piirpnscs of 
 instruction. 
 
 To fire hy the I'ear rank. 
 
 230. The instructor will cause the several fires to be executed to the 
 rear, that is, by the rear rank. To effect this he will command : 
 
 1. Face by the rear rank. 2. Company. 3. About — Fack. 
 
 At the first command the captain will step out and place himself 
 near to and facing the right file of his company ; the covering ser- 
 geant and file-closers will- pass quickly through the captain's interval 
 and place themselves faced to the rear, the covering sergeant a pace 
 behind the captain and the file-closers two paces from the front 
 rank opposite to their. places in line, each passing behind the covering 
 sergeant. 
 
 At the third command, which will be given at the instant the last 
 file-closer shall have passed through the interval, the company will 
 face about; the captain will place himself in his interval in the rear 
 rank, now become the front, and the covering sergeant will cover him 
 in the front rank, now become the rear. 
 
 The company having faced by the rear rank the instructor will 
 cause it to execute the fire by compauj', both direct and oblique, the 
 fire by file, and the fire bj' rank, by the commands and means pre- 
 scribed. The captain, covering sergeant, and the men will conform 
 themselves in like manner to what is prescribed. 
 
 The fire by file will commence on the left of the company, now 
 become the right. In the fire by rank the firing will commence with 
 the front rank, now become the rear. 
 
 To resume the proper front the instructor will command: 
 
 1. Face by the front rank. 2. Company. 3. About — Face. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 113 
 
 At tbe first command the captain, covering sergeant, and file-closers 
 will conform to what is prescribed above. 
 
 At the third command the company having faced about, the captain 
 and covering sergeant will resume their places in line. 
 
 In this lesson tbe instructor will impress on the men the importance 
 of aiming always at some particular object and of holding the piece as 
 prescribed in the school of the soldier. 
 
 The instructor will recommend to the captain to make a short pause 
 between the commands ai'm and fire, to give the men time to aim with 
 accuracy. 
 
 To advance in line of battle. 
 
 231. The company being in line of battle and correctly aligned, when 
 the instructor shall wish to exercise it in marching by the front he will 
 assure himself that the shoulders of the captain and covering sergeant 
 are perfectly in the direction of their respective ranks, and that the 
 sergeant accurately covers the captain ; the instructor will then place 
 himself twenty-five or thirty paces in front of them, face to the rear, 
 and place himself exactly on the prolongation of the line passing be- 
 tween their heels. 
 
 The instructor being aligned on the directing file will command: 
 
 1. Company, forward. 
 
 At this a sergeant, previously designated, will move six paces in 
 advance of the captain; the instructor, from the position prescribed, 
 will correctly align this sergeant on the prolongation of the directing 
 file. 
 
 This advanced sergeant, who is to be charged wit li the direction, will, 
 the moment his position is assuied, take two points on the ground in 
 the straight line which would pass between his own and the heels of the 
 instructor. 
 
 These dispositions being made the instructor will step aside and com- 
 mand : 
 
 2. March. 
 
 At this the company will step ofi" with life. The directing sergeant 
 will observe with tbe greatest precision the length and cadence of the 
 step, marching on the two points he has chosen ; he will take in succes- 
 sion, and always a little before arriving at the point nearest to him, new 
 points in advance, exactly in tbe samo line with the first two and at the 
 distance of some fifteen or twenty paces from each other. The captain 
 10 
 
114 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS ANn MILITIA. 
 
 will march steadily in the trace of the directing serpcant, keeping al- 
 ways six paces from liiin; each man will maintain the head direct to the 
 front, feel lightly the elbow of his neighbor on the side of direction, and 
 conform himself to the principles prescribed in the school of the soldier 
 for the march by the front. 
 
 The man next to the captain will take special care not to pass him; 
 to this end he will keep the line of his shoulders a little in the rear, but 
 in the same direction with those of the captain. 
 
 The file-closers will march at the habitual distance of two paces 
 behind the rear rank. 
 
 If the men lose the step the instructor will command: 
 
 7o the — Step. 
 
 At this command the men will glance toward the directing sergeant, 
 retake the step from him, and again direct their eyes to the front. 
 
 The instructor will cause the captain and covering sergeant to bo 
 posted sometimes on the right and sometimes on the left of the com- 
 pany. 
 
 The directing sergeant in advance having the greatest influence on 
 the march of the company, he will be selected for the precision of his 
 step, his habit of maintaining his shoulders in a square with a given 
 line of direction, and of prolonging that line without variation. 
 
 To halt the company, marching in line of battle, and to align it. 
 
 The instructor wishing to halt the company will command: 
 
 1. Company. 2. Halt. 
 
 At the second command the company will halt; the directing ser- 
 geant will remain in advance, unless ordered to return to the line of 
 file-closers. The company being at a halt the instructor may advance 
 the first three or four files on the side of direction, and align the com- 
 pany on that basis, or ho may confine himself to causing the alignment 
 to be rectified. In this last case he will command : Captain, rectify 
 the a/i'jiimenl. The captain will direct the covering sergeant to attend 
 to the rear rank, when each, glancing his eyes along his rank, will 
 promptly rectify it, conforming to what is prescribed in the school of 
 the soldier. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 115 
 
 Oblique march in line of battle. 
 
 232. The company being in the direct march when the instructor 
 shall wish to cause it to march obliquely he will command : 
 
 1. Right (or left) oblique. 2. March. 
 
 At the command march, the company will take the oblique step. 
 The men will accurately observe the principles prescribed in the school 
 of the soldier. The rear rank men will preserve their distances and 
 march in rear of the man next on the right (or left) of their habitual 
 file-leaders 
 
 When the instructor wishes the direct march to be resumed he will 
 command: 
 
 1. Forward. 2. March. 
 
 At the command march, the company will resume the direct march. 
 The instructor will move briskly twenty paces iu front of the captain, 
 and facing the company will place himself exactly in the prolongation 
 of the captain and covering sergeant; and then, by a sign, will move 
 the directing sergeant on the same line, if he be not already on it; the 
 latter will immediately take two points on the ground between him- 
 self and the instructor, and as he advances will take new points of 
 direction. 
 
 In the oblique march, the men not having the touch of the elbows, 
 the guide will always be on the side toward which the oblique is made, 
 without any indication to that effect being given ; and when the direct 
 march is resumed the guide will be. equally without indication, on the 
 side where he was previous to the oblique. 
 
 To mark time, to march in double-quick time, and the back step. 
 
 233. The company being in the direct march and in quick time the 
 instructor to cause it to mark time will command : 
 
 1. 3Ia}-k time. 2. March. 
 
 To resume the march ho will command: 
 
 1. Forivard. 2. March. 
 
 To cause the march in double-quick time the instructor will com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. Double-quick. 2. March. 
 
116 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEKRS ANT) MTI.ITIA. 
 
 The cnmmand march will be pmnounrcfl at the instant cither foot is 
 coming to the ground. 
 
 To resume quick time the instructor will command: 
 
 1. Quick lime. 2. Makcii. 
 
 The command march will be pronounced at the instant either foot is 
 coming to the ground. 
 
 The company being at a halt tlio instructor will cau^e it to march in 
 the bijck step; to this effect he will command: 
 
 1. Company, hackioanl. 2. March. 
 
 The back step will be executed according to the principles prescribed 
 in the school of the soldier, but t'le use of it being rare the instructor 
 will not cause more than fifteen or twenty steps to be taken in success- 
 ion, and to that extent but seldom. 
 
 The instructor ought not to exercise the company in marching in 
 double-quick time till the men are well established in the length and 
 swiftness of the pace in quick time; he will then endeavor to render 
 the march of one hundred and sixt_v-five steps in the minute equally 
 easy and familiar, and also cause them to observe the same ercctness of 
 body and composure of mind as if marching in quick time. 
 
 To march in retreat. 
 
 23-4. The companj' being halted and correctly aligned when the 
 instructor shall wish to cause it to march in retreat he will command : 
 
 1. Company. 2. About — Face. 
 
 The company having faced to the rear the iiijtructor will place him- 
 Belf iu front of the directing lile. 
 
 The instructor being correctly established on the prolongation of 
 the directing file will command : 
 
 3. Company, forward. 
 
 At this the directing sergeant will conform himself to what is pre- 
 scribed, No. 2.31, witli this difference — he will place himself si.x phces in 
 front of the line of file-closers, now leading. 
 
 The covering sergeant will step into the line of file-closers, opposite 
 to his interval, and Ihe euiitain will j)laee himself in the rear rank, now 
 become the front. 
 
 This dispo.>:ition being promptly made the instructor will command : 
 
 4. March. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 117 
 
 At this the directing sergeant, the captain, and the men will conform 
 themselves to what is prescribed, No. 2.31. 
 
 The instructor will cause to be executed, marching in retreat, all that 
 is prescribed for marching in advance; the commands and the means of 
 execution will be the same. 
 
 The instructor having halted the company will, when he may wish, 
 cause it to face to the front. The captain, the covering sergeant, and 
 the directing sergeant will resume their habitual places in line the mo- 
 ment they shall have faced about. 
 
 2.35. The company being in march by the front rank, if the instructor 
 should wish it to march in retreat he will cause the right about to be 
 executed while marching, and to this effect he will command : 
 
 1. Company. 2. Right about. 3. March. 
 
 At the third command the comjianj' will promptly face about and re- 
 commence the march by the rear rank. 
 
 The directing sergeant will face about with the company, and will 
 move rapidly six paces in front of the file-closers and upon the prolon- 
 gation of the guide. The instructor will place him in the proper direc- 
 tion by the means prescribed. The captain, the covering sergeant, and 
 the men will conform to the principles prescribed for the march in 
 retreat. 
 
 When the instructor wishes the company to march by the front rank 
 he will give the same commands, and will regulate the direction of 
 the march by the same means. 
 
 236. The instructor will cause all the above marches, except the back- 
 ward march, to be executed in the double-quick time; the latter will bo 
 executed only in quick time. He will give the same commands, observ- 
 ing to add doiihle-quick before the command march. 
 
 When the pieces are carried on the right shoulder, in quick time, the 
 distance between the ranks will be sixteen inches. Whenever, there- 
 fore, the instructor brings the company from a shoulder to this position 
 the rear rank miist shorten a little the first steps in order to gain the 
 prescribed distance, and will lengthen the steps, on the contrary, in 
 order to close up when the pieces are again brought to a shoulder. In 
 marching in double-quick time the distance between the ranks will be 
 twenty-six inches, and the piece.s will be carried habitually on the right 
 shoulder. 
 
 Whenever a company is halted the men will bring their pieces at once 
 to the shoulder at the command hatt. The rear rank will clo.=!e to its 
 proper distance. Thae riilvt are tjeneral. 
 
118 MANUAL FUR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 To march by the flank. 
 
 237. The company being in line of battle and at u halt, when the in- 
 structor shall wish to cause it to march by the right flank he will com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. Company, right — Fack. 2. Forward. 3. March. 
 
 (Fig. 45.) At the first command the companj- will face to the right, 
 the covering sergeant will place himself at the head of the front rank, 
 the captain having stepped out for the purpose so far as to find himself 
 bj' the side of the sergeant and on his left; the two ranks will face to 
 the right at the word, the rear rank stepping off one pace to the right; 
 the even numbers of both ranks will step up to the right of the odd, as 
 directed in the school of the soldier, so that when the movement is com- 
 pleted the files will be formed of four men aligned, and elbow to elbow. 
 The intervals will be preserved. 
 
 The file-closers will also move by side steps to the right, so that when 
 the ranks arc formed they will be two paces from the rearmost rank. 
 
 At the command mnrch, the company will move off briskly in quick 
 time, the covering sergeant at the head of the front rank, and the cap- 
 tain on his left will march straight forward. The men of each file 
 will march abreast of their respective front rank men, heads direct 
 to the front; the file-closers will march opposite their places in line of 
 battle. 
 
 The instructor will cause the march bj' the left flank to be executed 
 by the same commands, substituting left for right; the rear rauk will 
 step one pace to the left, and the odd files of both ranks take their 
 places to the left of the even numbered. 
 
 At the instant the company faces to the left the left guide will place 
 himself at the head of the front rank ; the captain will pass rapidly to 
 the left and place himself by the right side of this guide ; the covering 
 sergeant will replace the captain in the front rauk the moment the lat- 
 ter quits it to go the left. 
 
 The instructor will sometimes exercise the company in facing without 
 doubling; for this purpose he will command : 
 
 1. Company, in two ranks, right— 2. Face. 
 
 The double-quick, however, will never be executed without the ranks 
 being doubled. 
 
 To change direction hy file. 
 
 238. The company being faced by the flauk, and either in march or 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 119 
 
 at a halt, when the instructor shall wish to cause it to wheel by file he 
 will command: 
 
 1. By file, left (or right). 2. March. 
 
 (Fig. 46.) At the command march, the first file will wheel; if to the 
 side of the front rank man the latter will take care not to turn at once, 
 but to describe a short are of a circle, sliortcning a little the first five or 
 six steps in order to give time to the fourth man of this file to conform 
 himself to the movement. If the wheel be to the side of the rear rank 
 the front rank man will wheel in steps of twenty-eight inches, and the 
 fourth man will conform himself to the movement by describing a short 
 arc of a circle as has been explained. Each file will come to wheel on 
 the same ground where that which preceded it wheeled. 
 
 The instructor will see that the wheel be executed according to these 
 principles, in order that the distance between the files may alwaj's be 
 preserved and that there be no cheek or hindcrancc at the wheeling 
 point. 
 
 To halt the company marching by the flank, and to face it to the 
 
 front. 
 
 2.39. To effect these objects the instructor will command: 
 1. Company. 2. Halt. 3. Front. 
 
 The second and third commands will be executed as prescribed in 
 the school of the soldier. As soon as the files have undoublcd the rear 
 rank will close to its proper distance. The captain and covering ser- 
 geant, as well as the left guide, if the march be by the left flank, will 
 return to their habitual places in line at the instant the company faces 
 to the front. 
 
 The instructor may then align the company by one of the mef ;« 
 prescribed. 
 
 27(6 company being in viarch by the flaiik, to form it on the right 
 (or left) by file into line of battle. 
 
 240. If the company be marching by the right flank the instructor 
 will command: 
 
 1. On the right, by file into line. 2. March. 
 
 (Fig. 47.) At the command 7iiarcJi, the rear rank men doubled will 
 mark time; the captain and the covering sergeant will turn to the right. 
 
120 MANUAL FOR VOI,UNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 march straight forwaril and be halted by the instruotor when they shall 
 have pasiicd at least six paces beyond the ranlt of file-closers; the cap- 
 tain will place biuifclf correctly on the line of battle and will direct the 
 alignment as the men of the front rank successively arrive; the cover- 
 ing sergeant will place himself behind the captain at the distance of 
 the rear rank; the two men on the right of the front rank doubled will 
 continue to march, and passing beyond the covering sergeant and tho 
 captain will turn to the right; after turning they will continue to 
 march clbuw to elbow and direct themselves toward the lino of battle, 
 but when they shall arrive at two ])aces from this line the even number 
 will shorten the step so that the odd number may precede him ou the 
 line, the odd number placing himself by the side and on the left of the 
 captain; the even number will afterward oblique to the left and place 
 himself on the left of the odd number; the next two men of the front 
 rank doubled will pass in the same manner behind the two first, turn 
 then to the rigiit and place themselves, according to the means just 
 explained, to the left and by the side of the two men alrcadj' estab- 
 lished on tho line; tho remaining files of this rank will follow in suc- 
 cession, and be formed to the left in the same manner. The rear rank 
 doubled will execute the movement in the manner already explained 
 for tho front rank, taking care not to commence tho movement until 
 four men of the front rank are established on tho line of battle; tho 
 rear rank men as they arrive on the line will cover accurately their 
 file-leaders. 
 
 If the company be marching by the left flank the instructor will 
 causo it to form by file on the left into line of battle according to tho 
 same principles and by the same commands, substituting the iudication 
 left for right. In this case the odd numbers will shorten the step, so 
 that the even numbers may precede them on the line. Tho captain, 
 placed on tho loft of the front rank, and the loft guide will return to 
 thfir places in line of battle, by order of the instructor, after the com- 
 pAuy shall bo formed and aligned. 
 
 To enable tho men the butter to comprehend the mechanism of this 
 movement, the instructor will at first cause it to be executed separately 
 by each rank doubled, and afterward by tho two ranks united and 
 doubled. 
 
 The c impnny being in march by the flank, to form il by company 
 or by platoon into line, and to cause it to face to the riijht and 
 left in marching. 
 
 241. The company being in march by the right flauk, the instructor 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 121 
 
 will order the captain to form it into line; the captain will immediately 
 command : 
 
 1. By company, into line. 2. March. 
 
 (Fig. 48.) At the command march, the covering sergeant will con- 
 tinue to march straight forward ; the men will advance the right 
 shoulder, take the double-quick step, and move into line by the short- 
 est route, taking care to undoublc the files and to come on the line one 
 after the other. 
 
 As the front rank men successively arrive in line with the covering 
 sergeant they will take from him the step, and then turn their eyes to 
 the front. 
 
 The men of the rear rank will conform to the movements of their 
 respective file-leaders, but without endeavoring to arrive in line at the 
 same time with the latter. 
 
 At the instant the movement begins the captain will face to his com- 
 pany in order to follow up the execution ; and as soon as the company 
 is formed he will command guide left, place himself two paces before 
 the centre, face to the front, and take the stop of the company. 
 
 At the command guide left, the second sergeant will promptly place 
 himself in the front rank on the left, to serve as guide, and the cover- 
 ing sergeant who is on the opposite flank will remain there. 
 
 AVhen the company marches by the left flank this movement will 
 be executed by the same commands and according to the same 
 principles; the company being formed the captain will command 
 gttide right, and place himself in front of his company as above; 
 the covering sergeant who is on the right of the front rank will servo 
 as guide, and the second sergeant placed on the left flank will remain 
 there. 
 
 Thus, supposing the company to constitute a part of a column by 
 company, right or left in front, the covering sergeant and the second 
 sergeant of each company will always be placed on the right and 
 left, respectively, of the front rank ; they will be denominated right 
 guide and left guide, and the one or the other charged with the 
 direction. 
 
 The company being in march by the flank, if it be the wish of the 
 instructor to cause it to form platoons he will give an order to that 
 effect to the captain, who will command : 
 
 1. By platoon, into line. 2. March. 
 
 The movement will be executed by each platoon according to the 
 above principles. The captain will place himself before the centre 
 11 
 
122 .MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 of the first plntoon and the first lieutenant before the centre of the 
 second, passing throufrh the opening made in the centre of the 
 company, if (he march be by the right flank, and around the left 
 of his platoon, if the march be by the left; in this last case the 
 captain will also pass around the left of the second platoon in order 
 to place himself in front of the first. Both the captiiin and lieutenant, 
 without waiting for each other, will command tjiiide hft (or riyhi) at 
 the instant their respective platoons are formed. 
 
 At the command yuidr left (or riyht), the guide of each platoon 
 will pass rapidly to the indicated flank of the platoon, if not already 
 there. 
 
 The right guide of the company will always serve as the guide of 
 the right or left of the first platoon, and the left guide of the company 
 will serve in like manner as the guide of the second platoon. 
 
 Thus in a column, by platoon, there will be but one guide to each 
 platoon; he will always be placed on its left flank if the right be in 
 front, and on the right flank if the left be in front. 
 
 In these movements the file-closers will follow the platoons to which 
 they are attached. 
 
 The instructor may cause the company, marching by the flank, 
 to form l)y company or by platoon into line by his own direct com- 
 mands, using those prescribed for the captain. 
 
 The instructor will exercise the company in passing, without halt, 
 from the march by the front to the march by the flank, and recip- 
 rocally. In either ease he will employ the commands prescribed in 
 the school of the soldier, substituting company for nquad. The com- 
 pany will face to the right or left, in marching, and the captain, 
 the guides, and file-closers will conform themselves to what is pre- 
 scribed for each in the march by the flank, or in the march by the 
 front of a company supposed to be a subdivision of a column. 
 
 If, after facing to the right or left, in marching the company find 
 itself faced by the rear rank, the captain will place himself two paces 
 behind the centre of the front rank, now in the rear, the guides will 
 pass to the rear rank, now leading, and the file-closers will march in 
 front of this rank. 
 
 The instructor, in order to avoid fatiguing the men, and to prevent 
 them from being negligent in the position of ulioulclcr arms, will some- 
 times order mijtport aiwii in marching by the flank, and arms on the 
 right shoulder when marching in line. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 123 
 
 To break into column by platoon, either at a halt or tn march. 
 
 242. The company being at a halt, in line of battle, the instructor 
 wishing to break it into column by platoon to the right will command : 
 
 1. By platoon, right wheel. 2. March. 
 
 (Fig. 49.) At the first command the chiefs of platoons will rapidly 
 place themselves two paces before the centres of their respective pla- 
 toons, the lieutenant passing around the left of the company. They 
 need not occupy themselves with dressing one upon the other. The 
 covering sergeant will replace the captain in the front rank. 
 
 At the command march, the right front rank man of each platoon 
 will face to the right, the covering sergeant standing fast ; the chief of 
 each platoon will move quickly by the shortest line, a little beyond the 
 point at which the marching flank will rest when the wheel shall be 
 completed, face to the late rear, and place himself so that the line 
 which he forms with the man on the right (who had faced) shall be 
 perpendicular to that occupied by the company in line of battle ; each 
 platoon will wheel according to the principles prescribed for the wheel 
 on a fi.\ed pivot; and when the man who conducts the marching flank 
 shall approach near to the perpendicular its chief will command : 
 
 1. Platoon. 2. Halt. 
 
 At the command halt, which will be given at the instant the man 
 who conducts the marching flank shall have arrived at three paces 
 from the perpendicular, the platoon will halt; the covering sergeant 
 will move to the point where the left of the first platoon is to rest, 
 passing by the front rank ; the second sergeant will place himself in 
 like manner in respect to the second platoon. Each will take care to 
 leave between himself and the man on the right of his platoon a space 
 equal to its front ; the captain and first lieutenant will look to this, and 
 each take care to align the sergeant between himself and the man of 
 the platoon who had faced to the right. 
 
 The guide of each platoon being thus established on the perpendic- 
 ular each chief will place himself two paces outside of his guide, and 
 facing toward him will command : 
 
 3. Ze/?— Dress. 
 
 The alignment being ended each chief of platoon will command 
 Front, and place himself two paces before its centre. 
 
 The file-closers will conform themselves to the movement of their 
 respective platoons, preserving always the distance of two paces from 
 the rear rank. 
 
124 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 The company will break bj platoon to Ibe left according to the same 
 principlcH. The instructor will command: 
 
 1. Dii platoon, left wheel. 2. March. 
 
 The first command will be executed iu the same manner as if break- 
 ing bj' platoons to the right. 
 
 At the command march, ihe left front rank man of each platoon will 
 face to the left and the platoons will wheel to the left, according to the 
 principles prescribed for the wheel on a fixed pivot; the chiefs of pla- 
 toon.s will conform to the principles indicated. 
 
 At the command hall, given l)y the chief of each platoon, the cover- 
 ing sergeant on the right of the front rank of the first platoon, and the 
 second sergeant near the loft of the second platoon, will each move to 
 the points where the right of his platoon is to rest. The chief of each 
 platoon should be careful to align the sergeant between himself and 
 the man of the platoon who had faced to the left, and will then com- 
 mand : 
 
 Jiight — Dkess. 
 
 The ])latoons being aligned each chief of platoon will command 
 Front, and place himself opposite its centre. 
 
 243. The instructor wishing to break the company by platoon to tho 
 right and to move the column forward after the wheel is completed will 
 caution the companj' to that effect, and command: 
 
 1. By platoon, right wheel. 2. March. 
 
 At the first command the chiefs of platoons will move rapidly in 
 front of their respective platoons, conforming to what has been pre- 
 scribed, and will remain iu tliis position during the continuance of the 
 wheel. The covering sergeant will replace the chief of the first platoon 
 iu the front rank. 
 
 At the command march, the platoons will wheel to the right, con- 
 forming to the principles herein prescribed; the man on the pivot will 
 not face to the right but will mark time, conforming himself to the 
 movement of the marching tlank; and when the man who is on the left 
 of this flank shall arrive near tho perpendicular the instructor will 
 command : 
 
 3. Forward. 4. March. 5. Guide left. 
 
 At the fourth command, which will be given at the instant the wheel 
 is completed, the platoons will move straight to the front, all the men 
 taking the step of twenty-eight inches. The covering sergeant and 
 
SCHOOIi OF THK COMPANY. 125 
 
 the second sergeant will move rapidly to the left of their respective 
 platoons, the former passing before the front rank. The leading guide 
 will immediately take points on the ground in the direction which may 
 be indicated to him by the in.^tructor. 
 
 At the fifth command the men will take the touch of elbows lightly 
 to the left. 
 
 If the guide of the second platoon should lose his distance or the 
 line of direction be will conform to the principles hereinafter pre- 
 scribed. 
 
 If the company be marching in line to the front the instructor will 
 cause it to break b}' platoon to the right by the same commands. At 
 the command march, the platoons will wheel in the manner already ex- 
 plained ; the man on the pivot will take care to mark time in his place 
 without advancing or receding; the instructor, the chiefs of platoons, 
 and the guides will conform to what has been prescribed. 
 
 The company may be broken bj' platoons to the left according to the 
 same principles and by inverse means, the instructor giving the com- 
 mands prescribed, substituting left for right, and reciprocally. 
 
 To march in column. 
 
 244. The company having broken by platoon, right (or left) in front, 
 the instructor wishing to cause the column to march will throw himself 
 twenty-five or thirty paces in front, face to the guides, place himself 
 correctly on their direction, and caution the leading guide to take points 
 on the ground. 
 
 The instructor being thus placed, the guide of the leading platoon 
 will take two points on the ground in the straight line passing between 
 his own and the heels of the instructor. 
 
 These dispositions being made the instructor will step aside and com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. Column, forxSard. 2. Guide left (or right). 3. March. 
 
 At the command march, proniptlj' repeated by the chiefs of platoons, 
 they, as well as the guides, will lead off, by a decided step, their re- 
 spective platoons, in order that the whole maj" move smartly and at the 
 same moment. 
 
 The men will each feel lightly the elbow of his neighbor toward the 
 guide, and conform himself in marching to the principles prescribed in 
 the school of the soldier. The man next to the guide in each platoon 
 will take care never to pass him, and also to march alwaj's about six 
 inches to the right (or left) from him, in order not to push him out of 
 the direction. 
 
 The loading guide will observe with the greatest precision the length 
 
126 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 and cadence of the stop, and maintain the direction of his march by the 
 means prescribed. 
 
 The following guide will march exactly in the trace of the leading 
 one, preserving between the latter and himself a distance precisely 
 equal to the front of his platoon and marching in the same step with 
 the loading guide. 
 
 To change direction. 
 
 The changes of direction of a column while marching will bo exe- 
 cuted according to the principles prescribed for wheeling on the march. 
 Whenever, therefore, a column is to change direction the instructor will 
 change the guide, if not already there, to the flank opposite the side to 
 which the change is to be made. 
 
 245. The column being in march, right in front, if it be the wish of 
 the instructor to change direction to the right he will give the order to 
 the chief of the first platoon, and immediately go himself or send a 
 marker to the point at which the change of direction is to be made; 
 the instructor or marker will place himself on the direction of the 
 guides, so as to present the breast to that flank of the column. 
 
 The leading guide will direct his march on that person, so that in 
 passing his left arm may just graze the m arker's breast. When the lead- 
 ing guide shall have approached near to the marker the chief of his 
 platoon will command : 
 
 1. Right toheel. 2. March. 
 
 (Fig. 50.) The first command will be given when the platoon is at the 
 distance of four paces from the marker. 
 
 At the command march, which will be })ronounced at the instant the 
 guide shall have arrived opposite the murker, the platoon will wheel to 
 the right, conforming to what is prescribed in the school of the soldier. 
 
 The wheel being finished the chief of each platoon will command: 
 
 3. Forward. 4. Makcii. 
 
 These commands will be pronounced and executed as is prescribed in 
 the school of the soldier. The guide of the first platoon will take points 
 on the ground in the new direction, in order the better to regulate the 
 march. 
 
 The second platoon will continue to march straight forward till up 
 with the marker, when it will wheel to tho right and retake the direct 
 march by the same commands and the same means which governed tho 
 first platoon. 
 
 The column being in march, right in front, if tho instructor should 
 
\ 
 
 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 127 
 
 wish to change direction to the left he will command guide right. At 
 this command the two guides will move rapidly to the right of their 
 respective platoons, each passing in front of his subdivision ; the men 
 will take the touch of elbows to the right : the instructor will after- 
 ward conform to what is prescribed, No. 245. 
 
 The change of direction to the left will then be e.iecuted according 
 to the same principles as the change of direction to the right, but by 
 inverse means. 
 
 When the change of direction is completed the instructor will com- 
 mand guide left. 
 
 The changes of direction in a column, left in front, will be executed 
 according to the same principles. 
 
 In changes of direction in double-quick time the platoons will wheel 
 according to the principles prescribed in the school of the soldier. 
 
 In order to prepare the men for those formations in line which can 
 be executed only by turning to the right or the left the instructor will 
 sometimes cause the column to change direction to the side of the 
 guide. In this case the chief of the leading platoon will command: 
 Left (or right) turn, instead of left (or right) wheel. The subdivisions 
 will each turn, in succession, conforming to what is prescribed in the 
 school of the soldier. The leading guide as soon as he has turned 
 will take points on the ground, the better to regulate the direction of 
 the march. 
 
 To halt the column. 
 
 The column being in march, when the instructor shall wish to halt it 
 he will command : 
 
 I. Column. 2. Halt. 
 
 At the second command, promptly repeated by the chiefs of platoons, 
 the column will halt; the guides also will stand fast, although they 
 may have lost both distance and direction. 
 
 If the command halt be not repeated with the greatest vivacity, and 
 executed at the same instant, distances will be lost. 
 
 If a guide, having lost his distance, seeks to recover it after that 
 command, he will only throw his fault on the following guide, who, if 
 he have marched well, will no longer be at bis proper distance; and if 
 the latter regain what he has thus lost the movement will be propagated 
 to the rear of the column. 
 
 Being in column hy platoon., to f<>rm to the right or left into line of 
 battle., either at a halt or on the march. 
 
 2 46. The instructor having halted the column, right in front, and 
 
128 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 wisbing to form it into line of battle, will place himself at platoon 
 distance in front of the leading guide, face to him, and rectify, if 
 necessary, the position of the guide beyond ; which being executed he 
 will command : 
 
 Le/l—^DRKSS. 
 
 At this command, which will not be repeated by the chiefs of platoons, 
 each of them will place himself briskly two paces outside of his guide 
 and direct the alignment of the platoon perpendicularly to the direction 
 of the column. 
 
 Each chief having aligned bis platoon will command Fromt, and 
 return quicklj' to his place in column. 
 
 This disposition being made the instructor will command: 
 
 1. Left into line, wheel. 2. March. 
 
 (Fig. 51.) At the command march, briskly repeated by the chiefs of 
 platoons, the front rank man on the left of each platoon will face to the 
 left and place his breast lightly against the arm of the guide by his 
 side, who stands fast; the platoons will wheel to the left on the prin- 
 ciple of wheels from a halt and in conformity to what is prescribed. 
 Each chief will turn to bis platoon to observe its movement, and when 
 the marching flank has approached near the line of battle he will com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. Platoon. 2. Halt. 
 
 The command halt will bo given when the marching flank of the 
 platoon is three paces from the line of battle. 
 
 The chief of the second platoon having halted it will return to his 
 place as a file-eloser, pa.«i<in<r around the left of his subdivision. 
 
 The captain having halted, the first platoon will move rapidly to the 
 point at which the right of the couii>aiiy will rest in line of battle and 
 command: 
 
 Right — DuKSS. 
 
 At this command the two platoons will dress up on the alignment; 
 the front rank man on the right of the leading platoon, who finds him- 
 self opposite the instructor estal)liKlied on the direction of the guides, 
 will place his breast lightly against the left arm of this ofiicer. The 
 captain will direct the alignment from the right on the man on the 
 opposite flank of the conii)auy. 
 
 The company being aligned the captain will command : 
 
 Front. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 129 
 
 The instructor seeing the company in line of battle will command: 
 
 Guides — Posts. 
 
 At this command the covering sergeant will cover the captain, and 
 the left guide will return to his place as a file-closer. 
 
 If the column be left in front, and the instructor should wish to form 
 it to the right into line of battle, he will place himself at platoon dis- 
 tance in front of the leading guide, face to him, and rectify, if neces- 
 sary, the position of the guide beyond ; which being executed he will 
 command : 
 
 1. Right into line, wheel. 2. March. 
 
 » 
 
 At the command march, the front rank man on the right of each 
 
 platoon will face to the right and place his breast lightly against the 
 left arm of the guide by his side, who stands fast; each platoon will 
 wheel to the right, and will be halted by its chief when the marching 
 flank has approached near the line of battle; for this purpose the chief 
 of each platoon will command : 
 
 1. Platoon. 2. Halt. 
 
 The command halt will be given when the marching flank of the 
 platoon is three paces from the line of battle. The chief of the second 
 platoon having lialted his platoon will resume his place in the rank of 
 file-closers. 
 
 The captain having halted the first platoon, will move briskly to the 
 point at which the left of the company will rest, and command : 
 
 Lejl — Dress. 
 
 At this command the two platoons will dress up on the alignment; 
 the man on the left of the second platoon, opposite the instructor, will 
 place his breast lightlj- against the right arm of this ofiicer, and the 
 captain will direct the alignment from the left on the man on the oppo- 
 site flank of the company. 
 
 The company being aligned, the captain will command: 
 
 Front. 
 
 The instructor will afterward command: 
 
 (tuides — Posts. 
 
 At this command the captain will move to the right of his companj', 
 the covering sergeant will cover him, and the left guide will return to 
 his place as a file-closer. 
 
130 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 247. If the column be marching right in front, and the ius^trui'tor 
 should wish to form it into line without, halting the culuuin, he will 
 give the command : 
 
 1. Left into line, icheel. 2. March, 
 
 and will himself move rapidly to platoon distance in front of the lead- 
 ing guide. 
 
 At the command march, briskly repeated by the chiefs of platoons, 
 the front rank man on the left of each platoon will face to the left, and 
 place his breast lightly against the arm of the guide by his side, who 
 stands fast ; the platoons will wheel to the left on the principle of 
 wheels from a halt. Each chief will turn to his platoon to observe its 
 movement, and conform -to what is prescribed for wheeling into line 
 from a halt. 
 
 If the column be in march left in front this formation will bo made 
 according to the same principles, and bj' inverse means. 
 
 248. If the column be marching right in front and the instructor 
 should wish to form it into line without halting the column, and to 
 march the company in line to the front, he will command : 
 
 1. B^ platoons, left ivheel. 2. Makcii. 
 
 At the command march, briskly repeated by the chiefs of platoons, 
 the left guides will halt; the man next to the left guide in each platoon 
 will mark time; the platoons will wheel to the left, conforming to the 
 principles of the wheel on a fixed pivot. When the right of the pla- 
 toons shall arrive near the line of battle, the instructor will command: 
 
 3. Forward. 4. JVIakcii. 5. Guide right (or left). 
 
 At the fourth command, given at the instant the wheel is completed, 
 all the men of the company will move off together with the step of 
 twenty-eight inches; the captain, the chief of the second platoon, the 
 covering sergeant, and the left guide, will take their positions as in 
 line of battle. 
 
 At the fifth command, wliicli will be given immediately after the 
 fourth, the captain and covering sergeant, if not already there, will 
 move briskly to the side on which the guide is designated. The non- 
 commissioned officer charged with the direction will move rapidly in 
 front of the guide, and will be assured in his lino of march by the 
 instructor. That non-commissioned officer will immediately take 
 points on the ground. The men will take the touch of elbows to tho 
 side of the guide, conforuiing themselves to the principles of the march 
 in line. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 131 
 
 The same principles are applicable to a column left in front. 
 
 A company marching to the front, to break it into platoons, and 
 to reform the company. 
 
 249. The company marching in the cadenced step and supposed to 
 make part of a column, right in front, in which case the guide is left, 
 when the instructor shall wish to cause it to break by platoon he will 
 give the order to the captain, who will command : 
 
 1. Break into platoons, 
 
 and immediately place himself before the centre of the first platoon. 
 
 At the command break into platoons, the first lieutenant will pass 
 quickly around the left to the centre of his platoon, and give the cau- 
 tion : Mark time. 
 
 The captain will then command: 
 
 2. March. 
 
 (Fig. 52.) The first platoon will continue to march straight forward; 
 the covering sergeant will move rapidlj' to the left fiank of this platoon 
 (passing by the front rank) as soon as the flank shall be disengaged. 
 
 At the command march, given by the captain, the second platoon 
 will begin to mark time ; its chief will immediately add : 
 
 1. Right oblique. 2. March. 
 
 The last command will be given so that this platoon may commence 
 obliquing the instant the rear rank of the first platoon shall have 
 passed. The men will shorten the step in obliquing, so that when the 
 command forward, march is given, the platoon may have its exact 
 distance. 
 
 The guide of the second platoon being near the direction of the 
 guide of the first, the chief of the second will command forward, and 
 add March, the instant that the guide of his platoon shall cover the 
 guide of the first. 
 
 In a column, left in front, the company will break into platoons by 
 inverse means, applying to the first platoon all that has been prescribed 
 for the second, and reciprocally. 
 
 In this case the left guide of the company will shift to the right 
 flank of the second platoon, and the covering sergeant will remain on 
 the right of the first. 
 
 250. The column by platoon being in march, right in front, when 
 
132 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 the instructor shall wish to cause it to form companj he will give the 
 order to the captain, who will cummand : 
 
 Form company. 
 
 Ilaving given this command the captain will immediately add: 
 
 1. First platoon. 2. Right oblique. 
 
 The chief of the second platoon will caution it to continue to march 
 straight forward. 
 
 The captain will then command : 
 
 3. March. 
 
 At this command, repeated by the chief of the second, the first pla- 
 ■ toon will oblique to the right in order to unmask the second; the cover- 
 ing sergeant, on the left of the first platoon, will return to the right of 
 the company, passing by the front rank. 
 
 When the first platoon shall have nearly unmasked the second the 
 captain will command: 
 
 1. Mark time, 
 and at the instant the unmasking shall be complete he will add: 
 
 2. March. 
 
 The first platoon will then cease to oblique, and mark time. 
 
 In the mean time the second platoon will have continued to march 
 straight forward, and when it shall be nearly up with the first the 
 caj)tain will command foru-nrcl, and at the instant the two platoons 
 shall unite add Mauch; the first platoon will then cease to mark time. 
 
 In a column left in front, the same movement will be executed by 
 inverse means, the chief of the second platoon giving the command 
 foricard, and the captain adding the command March when the pla- 
 toons arc united. 
 
 The guide of the second platoon, on its right, will pass to its left 
 flank the moment the platoon begins to oblique; the guide of the first, 
 on its right, remaining on that flank of the platoon. 
 
 The instructor will also sometimes cause the company to break and 
 re-form by platoon, by his own direct commands. In this case he will 
 give the general commands prescribed for the captain above : 
 
 1. Break into platoons. 2. March. 
 
 and 
 
 1. Form company. 2. March. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 133 
 
 If in breaking the company into platoons the subdivision that 
 breaks off should mark time too long, it might, in a colulnn of msiny 
 subdivisions, arrest the march of the following one, which would cause 
 a lengthening of the column and a loss of distances. 
 
 Being in column, to break files to the rear, and to cause them to 
 re-enter into line. 
 
 251. The company being in march, and supposed to constitute a sub- 
 division of a column, right (or left) in front, when the instructor shall 
 wish to cause files to break off he will give the order to the captain, 
 who will immediately turn to his company and command : 
 
 1. Tico files from left (or right) to rear. 2. March. 
 
 (Fig. 63.) At the command march, the two files on the left (or right) 
 of the company will mark time, the others will continue to march 
 straight forward; the two rear rank men of these files will, as soon as 
 the rear rank of the company shall clear them, move to the right by 
 advancing the outer shoulder; the odd number will place himself 
 ■behind the third file from that flank, the even number behind the 
 fourth, passing for this pui^o.^e behind the odd number: the two front 
 rank men will, in like manner, move to the right when the rear rank of 
 the company shall clear them, the odd number will place himself behind 
 the first file, the even number behind the second file, passing for this 
 purpose behind the odd number. If the files are broken from the right, 
 the men will move to the left, advancing the outer shoulder, the even 
 number of the rear rank will place himself behind the third file, the 
 odd number of the same rank behind the fourth ; the even number of 
 the front rank behind the first file, the odd number of the same rank 
 behind the second, the odd numbers for this purpose passing behind 
 the oven numbers. The men will be careful not to lose their distances, 
 and to keep aligned. 
 
 If the instructor should still wish to break two files from the same 
 side he will give the order to the captain, who will proceed as above 
 directed. 
 
 At the command march, given by the captain, the files already 
 broken, advancing a little the outer shoulder, will gain the space of 
 two files to the right, if the files are broken from the left, and to the 
 left, if the filfs are broken from the right, shortening, at the same time, 
 the step in order to make room between themselves and the rear rank 
 of the company for the files last ordered to the rear; the latter will 
 break by the same commands and in the same manner as the first. The 
 
134 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 men who double should increase the length of the step in order to pre- 
 vent distances from being lost. 
 
 The instructor may thus diminish the front of a company by break- 
 ing off successive groups of two files, but the new files must always be 
 broken from the same side. 
 
 The instructor wishing to cause files broken off to return into line 
 will give the order to the captain, who will immediately command: 
 
 1. Tico files into line. 2. March. 
 
 At the command march, the first two files of those marching by the 
 flank will return brisklj' into line, and the others will gain the space of 
 two files by advancing the inner shoulder toward the flank to which 
 they belong. 
 
 The captain will turn to his company to watch the observance of the 
 principles which have just been prescribed. 
 
 The instructor having caused groups of two files tojjreak one after 
 another, and to return again into line, will afterward cause two or 
 three groups to break together, and for this purpose will command : 
 Four or six files from left (or right) to renr, Mari'H. The files desig- 
 nated will mark time; each rank will advance a little the outer shoul- 
 der as soon as the rear rank of the companj' shall clear it; will oblique 
 at once, and each group will place itself behind the four neighboring 
 files, and in the same manner as if the movement had been executed 
 group by group, taking care that the distances are preserved. 
 
 The instructor will next order the captain to cause two or three 
 groups to be brought into Hue at once, who, turning to the company, 
 will command : 
 
 Four or six files into line — ]\Iarch. 
 
 At the command march, the files designated will advance the inner 
 shoulder, move up and form on the flank of the company by the 
 shortest lines. 
 
 As often as files shall break off to the rear, the guide on that flank 
 will gradually close on the nearest front rank man remaining in line, 
 and he will also open out to make room for files ordered into line. 
 
 The files which march in the rear are disposed in the following order: 
 the left files as if the company was marching by the right flank, and 
 the right files as if the company was marching by the left flank. Con- 
 sequently, whenever there is on the right or left of a subdivision a file 
 which does not belong to the group it will be broken singly. 
 
 It is necessary to the preservation of distances in colu'lnn that the 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 135 
 
 men should be habituated in the schools of detail to execute the move- 
 ments of this article with precision. 
 
 If new files broken off do not step well to the left or right in ob- 
 liquing; if, when files are ordered into line, they do not move up with 
 promptitude and precision, in either case the following files will be 
 arrested in their march, and thereby cause the column to be length- 
 ened out. 
 
 The instructor will jilace himself on the flank from which the files 
 are broken, to assure himself of the exact observance of the principles. 
 
 Files will only be broken off from the side of direction, in order that 
 the whole company may easily pass from the front to the flank march. 
 
 To march the column in route, and to execute the movements inci- 
 dent thereto. 
 
 252. The swiftness of the route step will be 110 steps in a minute; 
 this swiftness will be habitually maintained in column in route, when 
 the roads and ground may permit. 
 
 The company being at a halt, and supposed to constitute a subdi- 
 vision of a column, when the instructor shall wish to cause it to march 
 in the route step, he will command: 
 
 1. Column, forward. 2. Guide left (or right). 3. Route step. 
 4. March. 
 
 At the command march, repeated by the captain, the two ranks will 
 step off together; the rear rank will take, in marching, by shortening 
 a few steps, a. distance of one pace (twenty-eight inches) from the rank 
 preceding, which distance will be computed from the breasts of the men 
 in the roar rank to the knapsacks of the men in the front rank. The 
 men, without further command, will immediately carry their arms at 
 will, as indicated in the school of the soldier. They will no longer be 
 required to march in the cadenced pace or with the same foot, or to 
 remain silent. The files will march at ease; but care will be taken to 
 prevent the ranks from intermixing, the front rank from getting in 
 advance of the guide, and the rear rank from opening to too great a 
 distance. 
 
 The company marching in the route step the instructor will cause it 
 to change direction, which will be executed without formal commands, 
 on a simple caution from the captain ; the rear rank will come up to 
 change direction in the same manner as the front rank. Each rank 
 will conform itself, although in the route step, to the principles which 
 
136 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 have been prc.''oril)e(l for the change in closed ranks, with this diflfer- 
 cnce only: that the pivot-man. instead of taking steps of nine will take 
 steps of fourteen inches, in order to clear the wheeling point. 
 
 The company marching in the route step, to cause it to pass to the 
 cadenccd step the instructor will first order pieces to be brought to the 
 shoulder, and then command: 
 
 1. Quick time. 2. ^Marcii. 
 
 At the command mnrrh, the men will resume the cadenced step, and 
 will close so as to leave a di.stance of sixteen inches between each rank. 
 
 253. The compan_v marching in the cadenccd pace, the instructor to 
 cause it to take the route step will command: 
 
 1. Route step. 2. March. 
 
 At the command march, the front rank will continue the step of 
 twenty-eight inches, the rear rank will take, by gradually shortening 
 the step, the distance of twenty-eight inches from the front rank; the 
 men will carry their arms at will. 
 
 The instructor will e.xerciso the company in increasing and diminish- 
 ing front by platoon, which will be executed by the same commands 
 and the same means as if the company were marching in the cadenced 
 step. When the company breaks into platoons the chief of each will 
 move to the flank of his platoon, and will take the place of the guide, 
 who will step back into the rear rank. 
 
 2bi. The company being in coliunn by platoon, and marching in 
 the route step, the instructor can cause the front to be diminished and 
 increased by section, if the platoons have a front of twelve files or 
 more. 
 
 The movements of diminishing and increasing front by section will 
 be executed according to the principles indicated for the same move- 
 ment by platoon. The right sections of platoons will be commanded 
 by the captain and first lieutenant, respectively; the left sections by 
 the two next subalterns in rank, or in their absence by sergeants. 
 
 The instructor wishing to diminish by section will give the order to 
 the captain, who will command: 
 
 1. Break into sections. 2. March. 
 
 As soon as the platoons shall be broken each chief of section will 
 place himself on the directing flank in the front rank; the guides who 
 will be thus displaced will fall back into the rear rank; the filc-cloaers 
 will close up to within one pace of this rank. 
 
SCHOOL OP THE COMPANY. 137 
 
 Platoons will be broken into sections only in the column in route; 
 the movement will never be executed in the manoeuvres, whatever may 
 be the front of the company. 
 
 When the instructor shall wish to re-form platoons, he will give the 
 order to the captain, who will command : 
 
 1. Form platoons. 2. March. 
 
 At the first command each chief of section will place himself before 
 its centre, and the guides will pass into the front rank. At the com- 
 mand march, the movement will be executed as has been prescribed for 
 forming company. The moment the platoons are formed the chiefs of 
 the left sections will return to their places as file-closors. 
 
 The instructor will also cause to be executed the diminishing and 
 increasing front by files, as prescribed in the preceding article, and in 
 the same manner as if marching in the cadenccd step. When the 
 company is broken into sections the subdivisions must not bo reduced 
 to a front of less than six files, not counting the chief of the section. 
 
 The company being broken by platoon or by section, the instructor 
 will cause it, marching in the route step, to march by the flank in the 
 same direction, by the commands and the means indicated. The mo- 
 ment the subdivisions shall face to the right (or left) the first file of 
 each will wheel to the left (or right) in marching, to prolong the direc- 
 tion, and to unite with the rear file of the subdivision immediately 
 preceding. The file-closers will take their habitual places in the march 
 by the flank before the union of the subdivisions. 
 
 265. If the company be marchiug by the right flank and the in- 
 structor should wish to undouble the files, which might sometimes be 
 found necessary, he will inform the captain, who after causing the ca- 
 denced step to be resumed and arms to bo shouldered or supported, 
 will command : 
 
 1. Iti two ranks, undouble files. 2. March. 
 
 At the second command the odd numbers will continue to march 
 straight forward, the even numbers will shorten the step and obliquing 
 to the left will place themselves promptly behind the odd numbers; tho 
 rear rank will gain a step to the left so as to retake the touch of elbows 
 on the side of the front rank. 
 
 If the company be marching by the left flank it will be the even 
 numbers who will continue to march forward, and the odd numbers 
 who will undouble. 
 
 If the instructor should wish to double the files he will give the 
 order to the captain, who will command : 
 12 
 
188 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS ANI> MII.ITIA. 
 
 1. In four ranks, double fief. 2. March. 
 
 At the cnminand march, the files will double in the manoer as ex- 
 plained when the comjiany faces by the right or the left flank. The 
 instructor will afterward cause the route step to be resumed. 
 
 The various movements prescribed in this lesson may be executed in 
 double-quick time. The men will be brought by degrees to pass over 
 at this gait about 1100 yards in seven minutes. 
 
 When the company marching in the route step shall halt tho rear 
 rank will close up at the command halt, and the whole will shoulder 
 arms. 
 
 Marching in the route step the men will be permitted to carry their 
 pieces in the manner they shall find most convenient, paying attention 
 only to holding the muzzles up, so as to avoid accidents. 
 
 Countermarch. 
 
 256. The company being at a halt and supposed to constitute a part 
 of a column, right in front, when the instructor shall wish to cause it 
 to countermarch ho will command: 
 
 1. Countermarch. 2. Company, right — Face. 3. By fie lejl. 
 March. 
 
 (Fig. 54.) At the second command the company will face to the 
 right, the two guides to the right about; the captain will go to the right 
 of his company and cause two files to break to the rear, and then place 
 himself by the side of the front rank man to conduct him. 
 
 At the command march, both guides will stand fast ; the company 
 will step off smartly; the first file, conducted hy the captain, will wheel 
 around the right guide and direct it.s march along the front rank so as 
 to arrive behind, and two paces from the left guide; each file will come 
 in succession to wheel on the same ground around the right guide; the 
 leading file having arrived at a point opposite to tho left guide the cap- 
 tain will command : 
 
 1. Company. 2. Halt. 3. Front. 4. Right — Dress. 
 
 The first comiuand will be given at /our paces from the point where 
 the leading file is to rest. 
 
 At tho second command the company will halt. 
 
 At the third it will face to the front. 
 
 At the fourth the company will dress by the right; the captain will 
 atep two puces outside of tho left guide, now on the right, and direct 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 139 
 
 the alignment, so that the front rank may be enclosed between the two 
 guides ; the company being aligned, he will command Front, and place 
 himself before the centre of the company as if in column ; the guides, 
 passing along the front rank will shift to their proper places, on the 
 right and left of that rank. 
 
 In a column by platoon the countermarch will be executed by the 
 same commands and according to the same principles; the guide of 
 each platoon will face about and its chief will place himself by the side 
 of the file on the right, to conduct it. 
 
 In a column left in front, the countermarch will be executed by 
 inverse commands and means, but according to the same principles. 
 Thus, the movement will be made by the right flank of subdivisions if 
 the right be in front, and by the left flank if the left be in front; in 
 both cases the subdivisions will wheel by file to the side of the front 
 rank. 
 
 Being in column by platoon, to forfn on the right (or lejl) into line 
 of battle. 
 
 257. The column by platoon, right in front, being in march, the 
 instructor wishing to form it on the right into line of battle will com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. On the right into line. 2. Guide right. 
 
 (Fig. 55.) At the second command the guide of each platoon will 
 shift quickly to its right flank and the mpn will touch elbows to the 
 right; the column will continue to march straight forward. 
 
 The instructor having given the second command will move briskly 
 to the point at which the right of the company ought to rest in line, 
 and place himself facing the point of direction to the left which he will 
 choose. 
 
 The line of battle ought to be so chosen that the guide of each pla- 
 toon, after having turned to the right, may have at least ten paces to 
 take before arriving upon that line. 
 
 The bead of the column being nearly opposite to the instructor, the 
 chief of the first platoon will command: 1. Right turn; and when 
 exactly opposite to that point he will add : 
 
 2. March. 
 
 At the command march, the first platoon will turn to the right, in 
 conformity with the principles prescribed in the school of the soldier. 
 Its guide will so direct his march as to bring the front rank man next 
 
 / 
 
140 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 on his loft opposite to the instructor; the chief of the platoon will 
 march before its centre; and when its guide shall be near the lino of 
 battle he will command: 
 
 1. Platoon. 2. IIai.t. 
 
 At the command halt, which will be given at the instant the right of 
 the platoon shall arrive at the distance of three paces from the lino of 
 battle, the platoon will halt; the files not yet in line will come up 
 promptly. The guide will throw himself on the line of battle, opposite 
 to one of the three left files of his platoon ; he will face to the in- 
 structor, who will align him on the point of direction to the left. The 
 chief of j)latoon having at the same time gone to the point where the 
 right of the company is to rest, will, as soon as he sees all the files of 
 the platoon in line, command : 
 
 Right — Dress. 
 
 At this the first platoon will align itself; the front rank man, who 
 finds himself opposite to the guide, will rest his breast lightly against 
 the right arm of this guide, and the chief of the platoon, from the right, 
 will direct the alignment on this man. 
 
 The second platoon will continue to march straight forward until its 
 guide shall arrive opposite to the left file of the first; it will then turn 
 to the right at the command of its chief and march toward the lino of 
 battle, its guide directing himself on the left file of the first platoon. 
 
 The guide having arrived at the distance of three paces from tho 
 line of battle this platoon will be halted, as prescribed for the first; at 
 the instant it halts its guide will spring on the line of battle, opposite 
 to one of the three left files of his platoon, and will be assured in his 
 position by the instructor. 
 
 The chief of the second platoon, seeing all its files in line and its 
 guide established on the direction, will command : 
 
 Right — Dress. 
 
 Having given this command he will return to his place as a file- 
 closer, passing around the left; the second platoon will dress up on the 
 alignment of tho first, and when estal)lishcd the captain will com- 
 mand : 
 
 Front. 
 
 The movement ended the instructor will command: 
 Guides — Posts. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 141 
 
 At this command the two guides will return to their places in line of 
 battle. 
 
 A column b}' platoon, left in front, will form on the left into line of 
 battle, according to the same principles, and by inverse means, apply- 
 ing to the second platoon what is prescribed for the first, and recipro- 
 cally. The chief of the second platoon having aligned it from the point 
 d'appui (the left), will retire to his place as a file-closer. The captain 
 having halted the first platoon three paces behind the line of battle, 
 will go to the same point to align this platoon, and then command : 
 Front. At the command guides — postf, given by the instructor, the 
 captain will shift to his proper flank, and the guides take their places 
 in the line of battle. 
 
 Formation of a company from two ranks into four, and recipro- 
 cally, at a halt and in march. 
 
 258. The company being formed in two ranks, at a halt, and sup- 
 posed to form part of a column right in front, when the instructor shall 
 wish to form it into four ranks, he will command : 
 
 1. In four ranks, form company. 2. Company, left — Face. 3. 
 Mauch (or double-quick — March). 
 
 At the second command the left guide will remain faced to the front, 
 the company will face to the left; the rear rank will gain the distance 
 of one pace from the front rank by a side step to the left and rear, anl 
 the men will form into four ranks, as prescribed in the school of the 
 soldier. 
 
 At the command march, the first file of four men will reface to the 
 front without undoubling. All the other files of four will step off, and 
 closing successively to about five inches of the preceding file, will halt 
 and immediately face to the front, the men remaining doubled. 
 
 The file-closers will take their new places in line of battle at two 
 paces in rear of the fourth rank. 
 
 The captain will superintend the movement. 
 
 259. The company being in four ranks, when the instructor shall 
 wish to form it into two ranks he will command: 
 
 1. In two ranks, form company. 2. Company, right — Face. 
 i. March (or double-quick — March). 
 
 At the second command the left guide will stand fast, the company 
 will face to the right. 
 
 At the command march, the right guide will step off and march in 
 
142 MANUAL F(iR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 the prolongation of the front rank. The leading file of four men will 
 step off at the same time, the other files standing fast; the second file 
 will step off when there shall be between it and the first space sufficient 
 to form it into two ranks. The following files will execute successively 
 what has been prescribed fur the second. As soon as the last file shall 
 bare its distance the instructor will command: 
 
 1. Company. 2. Halt. 3. Front. 
 
 At the command /cojif, the company will face to the front, and the 
 files will undouble. 
 
 260. The company being formed in two ranks and marching to the 
 front, when the instructor shall wish to form it into four ranks be will 
 command : 
 
 1. In four ranks, form company. 2. By the left, double Jiles. 
 3. Makch (or double-quick — March). 
 
 At the command march, the left guide and the left file of the com- 
 pany will continue to march straight to the front ; the company will 
 make a half face to the left, the odd numbers placing themselves 
 behind the even numbers. The even numbers of the rear, rank will 
 shorten their steps a little, to permit the odd numbers of the front rank 
 to get between them and the even numbers of that rank. The files 
 thus formed of fours, except the left file, will continue to march 
 obliquely, lengthening their steps slightlj", so as to keep constantly 
 abreast of the guide; each file will close successively on the file next 
 on its left, and when at the proper distance from that file will face to 
 the front by a half face to the right, and take the touch of elbows to 
 the left. 
 
 261. The company being in march to the front in four ranks, when 
 the instructor shall wish to form it into two ranks he will command: 
 
 1. //i tree ranks, fiim company. 2. By the right, undouble Jiles. 
 3. March (or double-quick — March). 
 
 At the command hkii-cA, the left guide and the left file of the com- 
 pany will continue to march straight to the front; the company will 
 make a half face to the right and march obliquely, lengthening the 
 Step a little in order to keep as near as possible abreast of the guide. 
 As soon as the second file from the left shall have gained to the right 
 the interval necessary for the left file to form into two ranks, the sec- 
 ond file will face to the front, by a half face to the left, and march 
 straight forward; the left file will immediately form into two ranks, 
 
INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS. 143 
 
 and take the touch of elbows to the left. Each file will execute suc- 
 cessively what has just been prescribed for the file next to the left, and 
 each will form into two ranks when the file next on its right has ob- 
 liqued the required distance and faced to the front. 
 
 If the company be supposed to make part of a column left in front, 
 these different movements will be executed according to the same prin- 
 ciples and by inverse means, substituting the indication left for right. 
 
 INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS. 
 
 General principles and division of the instruction. 
 
 262. The movements of skirmis-hers should be subjected to such rules 
 as will give to the commander the means of moving them in any direc- 
 tion with the greatest promptitude. 
 
 It is not expected that these movements should be executed with the 
 same precision as in closed ranks, nor is it desirable, as such exactness 
 would materially interfere with their prompt execution. 
 
 When skirmishers are thrown out to clear the way for, and to protect 
 the advance of the main corps, their movements should be so regulated 
 by this corps as to keep it constantly covered. 
 
 Every body of skirmishers should have a reserve, the strength and 
 composition of which will vary according to circumstances. 
 
 If the body thrown out be within sustaining distance of the main 
 corps, a very small reserve will be sufficient for each company, whose 
 duty it shall be to fill vacant places, furnish the line with cartridges, 
 relieve the fatigued, and serve as a rallying point for the skirmishers. 
 
 If the main corps be at a considerable distance, besides the company 
 reserves, another reserve will be required, composed of entire compa- 
 nies, which will be cmploj'ed to sustain and reinforce such parts of the 
 line as may be warmly attacked; this reserve should be strong enough 
 to relieve at least half the companies deployed as skirmishers. 
 
 The movements of skirmishers will be executed in quick, or double- 
 quick time. The run will be resorted to only in cases of urgent neces- 
 sity. 
 
 Skirmishers will be permitted to carry their pieces in the manner 
 most convenient to them. 
 
144 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 The movements will bo habitually iiiilioated by the sounds of the 
 bugle. 
 
 The officers, and if necessary, the non-commissionod officers, will re- 
 peat and cause the commands to be e.\ocuted, as soon as they arc given ; 
 but to avoid mistakes, when the signals are employed, they will wait 
 until the last bugle note is sounded before commencing the movement. 
 
 Deployments. 
 
 263. A company may be deployed as skirmishers in two ways: for- 
 ward, and by the flank. 
 
 The deployment forward will be adopted when the company is behind 
 the line on which it is to bo established as skirmishers; it will bo do- 
 ployed by the flank when it finds itself already on that line. 
 
 Whenever a company is to be deployed as skirmishers, it will be 
 divided into two platoon.s, and each platoon will bo subdivided into 
 two sections; the comrades in battle, forming groups of four men, will 
 be careful to know and sustain each other. The captain will assure him- 
 self that the files in the centre of each platoon and section are desig- 
 nated. 
 
 The interval between skirmishers depends on the e.xtent of ground to 
 be covered; but in general, it is not proper that the groups of four men 
 should be removed more than forty paces from each other. The habit- 
 ual distance between men of tlie same group in open grounds will bo 
 five paces; in no case will they lose sight of each other. 
 
 To deploy forward. 
 
 264. A company being at a halt or in march, when the captain shall 
 wish to deploy it forward on the left file of the first platoon, holding the 
 second platoon in reserve, he will command: 
 
 1. First platoon — as skirmishers. 2. On the lejt file — take inter- 
 vals. 3. March (or double-quick — March). 
 
 (Fig. 56.) At the first command the second and third lieutenants will 
 place themselves rapidly two paces behind the centres of the right and 
 left sections of the first platoon; the fifth sergeant will move one pace 
 in front of the centre of the first platoon and will place himself between 
 the two sections in the front rank as soon as the movement begins; the 
 fourth sergeant will place himself on the left of the front of the same 
 platoon, as soon as he can pass. The captain will indicate to this ser- 
 geant the point on which ho wishes him to direct his march. The first 
 
INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS. 145 
 
 lieutenant, placing himself before the centre of the second platoon, 
 will command : 
 
 Second platoon, hacktoard — March. 
 
 At this command the second platoon will step three paces to the 
 rear, so as to unmask the flank of the first platoon. It will then be 
 halted by its chief, the second sergeant will place himself on the left, 
 and the third sergeant on the right flank of the platoon. 
 
 At the command marvh, the left group of four men, conducted by 
 the fourth sergeant, will direct itself on the point indicated; all the 
 other groups of fours, throwing forward briskly the left shoulder, will 
 move diagonally to the front in double-quick time, so as to gain to the 
 right the space of twenty paces, which shall be the distance between 
 each group and that immediately on its left. When the second group 
 from the left shall arrive on a line wjth and twenty paces from the 
 first, it will march straight to the front, conforming to the gait and 
 direction of the first, keeping eonstantlj' on the same alignment and at 
 twenty paces from it. The third group and all the others will con- 
 form to what has just been prescribed for the second, as they arrive 
 successively on the line. The right guide will arrive with the last 
 group. 
 
 The left guide having reached the point where the left of the line 
 should rest, the captain will command the skirmishers to halt; the 
 men composing each group of fours will then immediately deploy at 
 five paces from each other and to the right and left of the front rank 
 men of the even file in each group, the rear rank men placing them- 
 selves on the left of their file-leaders. If any groups be not in line at 
 the command halt, they will move up rapidly, conforming to what has 
 just been prescribed. 
 
 If during the deployment the line should be fired upon by the enemy, 
 the captain may cause the groups of fours to deploy as they gain their 
 proper distances. 
 
 The line being formed, the non-commissioned ofiicers on the right, 
 left, and centre of the platoon will place themselves ten paces in rear of 
 the line and opposite the positions they respectively occupied. The 
 chiefs of sections will promptly rectify any irregularities, and then 
 place themselves twenty-five or thirty paces in rear of the centre of 
 their sections, each having with him four men taken from the reserve; 
 also a bugler, who will repeat, if necessary, the signals sounded by the 
 captain. 
 
 Skirmishers should be particularly instructed to take advantage of 
 any cover which the ground may offer, and should lie flat on the 
 13 
 
1-16 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 grouud whenever such a trKivcment is necessary to protect them from 
 the fire of the cnriny. Regularity in the alignmcut should yield to 
 this iu]])ortant iidvnntago. 
 
 AVhen the movemeiil begins the first lieutenant will face the second 
 platoon nhdut, and march it promptly and by the shortest line to about 
 150 paces in rear of the centre of the line. He will hold it always at 
 this distance, unless ordered to the contrar}'. 
 
 The reserve will conform itself to all the movenunts of the line. 
 Thin )ule is general. 
 
 Light troops will i arry ihcir biiyonets habitually in the scabbard, 
 and this rule applies equally to the skirmishers and the reserve; when- 
 ever bayonets are required to bo lixed, a particular signal will be given. 
 The captain will give a general superintendence to the whole deploy- 
 ment, and then promptly place himself about eighty paces in rear of 
 the centre of the line, lie will have with him a bugler and four men 
 laken from the reserve. 
 
 The deployment may be made on the right or the centre of the pla- 
 toon by the same cijmmands, substituting the indication i if/lit or ceuire 
 for that of Ir/t file. 
 
 The deployment on the right or the centre will be made according to 
 the principles prescribed above: in this latter case, the centre of the 
 platoon will be marked by the right group of fours in the second sec- 
 tion; the fifth sergeant will place himself on the right of this group, 
 and serve as the guide of the platoon during the deployment. 
 
 In whatever manner the deploj-ment be made, on the right, left, or 
 centre, the men in each group of fours will always deploj' at five paces 
 from each other, and upon the front rank man of the even numbered 
 file. The deploj-ments will habitually be made at twenty paces inter- 
 val; but if a greater interval be required it will be indicated in the 
 command. 
 
 If a company be thrown out as skirmishers so near the main body 
 us to render a reserve unnecessary, the entire companj- will be extended 
 in the same manner, and according to the same principles as for the 
 deployment of a platoon. In this case the third lieutenant will com- 
 mand the fourth section and a non-commissioucd ofllcer, designated for 
 that purpose, the second section; the fifth sergeant will act as centre 
 gui<le; the file-closers will place themselves ten paces in rear of the 
 line, and opposite their places in line of battle. The first and second 
 lieutenants will each have a bugler near him. 
 
 To deploy by the flank. 
 265. The company being at a halt, when the captain shall wish to 
 
INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS. 147 
 
 deploy it by tlic flank, holding the first platoon in reserve, be will 
 eommand : 
 
 1. Second platoon — an skirmishers. 2. By the right flank — take 
 intervals. 3. March (or douhle-quick — March). 
 
 (Fig. .57.) At the first command the fir.-*t and third lieutenants will 
 place themselve.'", respectively, two paces behind the centres of the first 
 and second sections of the second platoon; the fifth sergeant will place 
 himself one pace in front of the centre of the second platoon; the 
 third sergeant, a.s soon as he can pass, will place himself on the right 
 of the front rank of the same platoon. The captain will indicate to 
 him the point on which he wishes him to direct his march. The chief 
 of the first platoon will execute what has been prescribed for the chief 
 of the second platoon, No. 264. The fourth sergeant will place himself 
 on the left flank of the reserve, the first sergeant will remain on the 
 right flank. 
 
 At the second command the first and third lieutenants will place 
 themselves two paces behind the left group of their respective sections. 
 
 At the command march, the second platoon will face to the right 
 and commence the movement; the left group of fours will stand fast, 
 but will deploy as soon as there is room on its right, conforming to 
 what has been prescribed, No. 264; the third sergeant will place him- 
 self on the left of the right group, to conduct it; the second group 
 will halt at twenty paces from the one on its left, the third group at 
 twenty paces from the setynd, and so on to the right. As the groups 
 halt, they will face to the enemj'. and deploy as has been explained for 
 the left group. 
 
 The chiefs of sections will pay particular attention to the successive 
 deployments of the groups, keeping near the group about to halt, so as 
 to rectify any errors which may be committed. AV'hen the deployment 
 is completed they will place themselves thirty paces in rear of the 
 centre of their sections, as has been heretofore prescribed. The non- 
 commissioned officers will also place themselves as previously indi- 
 cated. 
 
 As soon as the movement commences, the chief of the first platoon, 
 causing it to face about, will move it as indicated, No. 264. 
 
 The deployment may be made by the left flank according to the same 
 principles, substituting left for riyht. 
 
 266. If the captain should wish to deploy the company upon the 
 centre of one of the platoons, he will command : 
 
 1. Second platoon — as skirmishers. 2. By the right and left 
 flanks — take intervals. 3. March (or double-quick — March). 
 
148 MANUAL FOR VULLNTEKRS AND MILITIA. 
 
 At the first cotntnand the officers and non-commissioned oQiccrs will 
 conform to what has been prescribed, No. 265. 
 
 At the second command the first lieutenant will place himself behind 
 the left group of the right section of the second platoon, the third lieu- 
 tenant behind the right group of the left section of the same platoon. 
 
 At the command march, the right section will face to the right, the 
 left section will face to the left, the group on the right of this latter 
 section will stand fast. The two sections will move off in opposite 
 directions; the third sergeant will place himself on the left of the 
 right file to conduct it, the second sergeant on the right of the left file. 
 The two groups nearest that which stands fast will each halt at twenty 
 paces from tliis group, and each of the other groups will halt at twenty 
 paces from the group which is in rear of it. Each group \wll deploy as 
 heretofore prescribed. No. 264. 
 
 The first and third lieutenants will direct the movement, holding 
 themselves always abreast of the group which is about to halt. 
 
 The captain can cause the deployment to be made on any named 
 group whatsoever ; in this case the fifth sergeant will place himself 
 before the group indicated, and the deployment will be made according 
 to the principles heretofore prescribed. 
 
 The entire comi)any m.ay bo also deployed, according to the same 
 principles. 
 
 To extend intervals. 
 
 267. This movement, which is employed to extend a line of skirmish- 
 ers, will be executed according to the principles prescribed for deploy- 
 ments. 
 
 If it be supposed that the line of skirmishers is at a halt, and that 
 the captain wishes to extend it to the left, he will command: 
 
 1. By the left Jiank (so viany paces), extend intervals. 2. March 
 (or double-quick — March). 
 
 (Fig. 58.) At the command march, the group on the right will stand 
 fast, all the other groups will face to the left, and each group will ex- 
 tend its interval to the prescribed distance by the means indicated, 
 No. 265. 
 
 The men of the same group will continue to preserve between each 
 other the distance of five paces, unless the nature of the ground should 
 render it necessary that they should close nearer, in order to keep in 
 sight of each othor. The intervals refer to the spaces between the 
 groups, and not to the distances between the men in each group. The 
 intervals will be taken from the right or left man of the neighboring 
 group. 
 
INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS. 149 
 
 If the line of skirmishers be inarching to the front and the captain 
 should wish to extend it to the right he will command : 
 
 1. On the left group (so many paces'), extend intervals. 2. March 
 (or double-quick — March). 
 
 The left group, conducted by the guide, will continue to march on the 
 point of direction ; the other groups throwing forward the left shoulder, 
 and taking the double-quick step, will open their intervals to the pre- 
 scribed distance. 
 
 Intervals may be extended on the centre of this line according to the 
 same prineii>les. 
 
 If in extending intervals it bo intended that one company or platoon 
 should occupy a line which had been previously occupied by two, the 
 men of the company or platoon which is to retire will fall successively 
 to the rear as they are relieved by the extension of the intervals. 
 
 To close intervals. 
 
 268. This movement, like that of openinsr intervals, will be executed 
 according to the principles prescribed for the deployments. 
 
 If the line of skirmishers be halted and the captain should wish to 
 close intervals to the left he will command : 
 
 1. By the left Jiank (so many paces'), close intervals. 2. March 
 (or double-quick — March). 
 
 (Fig. 59) At the command march, the left group will stand fast, the 
 other groups will face to the left and close to the prescribed distance, 
 each group facing to the enemy as it attains its proper distance. 
 
 If the line be marching to the front the captain will command: 
 
 1. On the left group (so many paces), close intervals. 2 March 
 for double-quick — March). 
 
 The left group, conducted by the guide, will continue to move on in 
 the direction previously indicated; the other groups, advancing the 
 right shoulder, will close to the left, until the intervals are reduced to 
 the prescribed distance. 
 
 Intervals may be closed on the right, or on the centre, according to 
 the same principles. 
 
 When intervals are to be closed up, in order to reinforce a line of 
 skirmisliers, so as to cause two companies to cover the' ground which 
 had been previously occupied by one, the new company will deploy so 
 
150 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 as to finish its movement at twenty paces in roar of the line it is to oc- 
 cupy, and the men -will successively move upon that line, as they shall 
 be unmasked by the men of tlie old company. The reserves of the two 
 companies will unite behind the centre of the line. 
 
 To relieve a company deployed as skirmishers. 
 
 269. When a company of skirmishers is to be relieved, the captain 
 will be advised of the intention, which he will immediately communi- 
 cate to the first and second lieutenants. 
 
 The new company will execute its deployment forward so as to finish 
 the movement at about tiver.ty paces in rear of the line. 
 
 Arrived at this distance, the men of the new company, by command 
 of their captain, will advance rapidly a few paces beyond the old line 
 and halt; the new line being established, the old company will assemble 
 on its reserve, taking care not to get into groups of fours until it is 
 bej'ond the fire of the euemj'. 
 
 If the skirmishers to be relieved are marching in retreat, the com- 
 pany thrown out to relieve them will deploy by the flank, iis prescribed, 
 No. 203 and fi>llowing. The old skirmishers will continue to retire 
 with order, and having passed the new line, they will form upon- the 
 reserve. 
 
 To advance. 
 
 To adoanne in line, and to retreat in line. 
 
 270. When a platoon or a company deployed as skirmishers is march- 
 ing by the front the guide will be habitually in the centre. No particu- 
 lar indication to this effect need be given in the commands, but if, on the 
 contrary, it be intended that the directing guide should be on the right, 
 or left, the command r/uidc riijht, or guide left, will be given immedi- 
 ately after that of forward. 
 
 The captain wishing the lino of skirmishers to advance will com- 
 mand: 
 
 1. Forward. 2. Maucii (or double-quick — March). 
 
 This command will be repeated with the greatest rapidity by the 
 chiefs of sections, ami in ease of need, by the sergeants. This rule ia 
 general, whether the skirmishers march by the front or by the flank. 
 
 At the first command three sergeants will move briskly on the 
 lino, the first on the right, the second on the loft, and the third in the 
 centre. 
 
 At the command march, the line will move to the front, the guide 
 
INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS. 151 
 
 charijed with the direction will move on the point indicated to him, tho 
 skirmishers will hold themselves aligned on this guide, and preserve 
 their intervals toward him. 
 
 Tho chiefs of sections will march immediately behind their sections 
 so as to direct their movements. 
 
 The captain will give a general superintendence to the movement. 
 
 When he shall wish to halt tho skirmishers he will command : 
 
 Halt. 
 
 At this command, briskly repeated, the line will halt. The chiefs of 
 sections will promptly' rectify any irregularity in the alignment and 
 intervals, and after taking every possible advantage which tho ground 
 may offer for protecting the men, they, with the three sergeants in tho 
 line, will retire to their proper places in rear. 
 
 271. The captain wishing to march the skirmishers in retreat will 
 Command : 
 
 1. In retreat. 2. March (or douhle-quick — March). 
 
 At the first command tho three sergeants will move on the line, as 
 prescribed, No. 27(1. . 
 
 At the command march, the skirmishers will face about individually 
 and march to the rear, conforming to the principles prescribed. No. 
 270. 
 
 The officers and sergeants will use every exertion to preserve order. 
 
 To halt the skirmishers, marching in retreat, the captain will com- 
 mand : 
 
 Halt. 
 
 At this command the skirmishers will halt and immediately face to 
 the front. 
 
 The chiefs of sections and the three guides will each conform himself 
 to what is prescribed, No. 270. 
 
 To change direction. 
 
 272. If the commander of the line of skirmishers shall wish to cause 
 it to change direction to the right he will command : 
 
 1. Right wheel. 2. March (or double-quick — March). 
 
 At the command march, the right guide will mark time in his place; 
 tho left guide will move in a circle to the right, and that he may prop- 
 erly regulate his movements, will occasionally cast his eyes to the 
 
152 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 right, so as to observe the direction of the line and the nature of the 
 ground to be passed over. The centre guide will also march in a circle 
 to the right, and in order to conform his movements to the general 
 direction, will take care that his steps are only half the length of the 
 steps of the guide on the left. 
 
 The skirmishers will regulate the length of their steps by the distance 
 from the marching flank, being less as they ajiproacli the pivot and 
 greater as they are removed from it ; they will often look to the march- 
 ing flank so as to prc-erve the direction and their intervals. 
 
 When the commander of the line shall wish to resume the direct 
 march he will command: 
 
 1. Forward. 2. March. 
 
 At the command march, the line will cease to wheel and the skir- 
 mishers will move direct to the front; the centre guide will march on 
 the point which will be indicated to him. 
 
 If the captain thould wish to halt the line in pluee of moving it to 
 the front he will command : 
 
 Halt. 
 
 At this command the line will halt. 
 
 A change of direction to the left will be made according to the same 
 principles and bj' inverse means. 
 
 The line of skirmishers marching in retreat will change direction by 
 the same means and by the same commands as a line marching in 
 advance; for example, if the captain should wish to refuse his left, 
 now become the right, ho will command : 
 
 1. Left u-heel. 2. March. 
 
 At the comnianil halt, the skirmishers will face to the enemy. 
 
 15ut if instead of halting the line, the captain should wish to con- 
 tinue to march it in retreat, he will when he judges the line has wheeled 
 sufficiently command : 
 
 1. In retreat. 2. March. 
 
 'To march by the flank. 
 
 273. The captain wi.-hing the skirmishers to march by the right 
 flank will command : 
 
 1. By the right flank. 2. March (or double-quick — March). 
 
INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS. 153 
 
 At the first command the three scrgeauts will place themselves on the 
 line. 
 
 At the command march, the skirmishers will face to the right and 
 move ofiF; the right guide will place himself by the side of the leading 
 man on the right to conduct him, and will march on the point indicated; 
 each skirmisher will take care to follow exactly in the direction of the 
 one immediatelj' preceding him, and to preserve his distance. 
 
 The skirmishers may he marched by the left flank, according to the 
 same principles and by the same commands, substituting Ir/t for right ; 
 the left guide will place himself by the side of the leading man to con- 
 duet him. 
 
 If the skirmishers be marching bj' the flank, and the captain should 
 wish to halt them, he will command: 
 
 Halt. 
 
 At this command the skirmishers will halt and face to the enemy. 
 The officers and sergeants will conform to what has been prescribed, 
 No. 270. 
 
 The reserve should execute all the movements of the line, .and be held 
 always about l.'iO paces from it, so as to be in position to second its 
 operations. 
 
 When the chief of the reserve shall wish to march it in .advance he 
 will command : 
 
 1. Platoon, foru-ard. 2. Guide left. 3. March. 
 If he should wish to march it in retreat he will command: 
 1. In retreat. 2. March. 3. Guide right. 
 
 At the command hull, it will rcface to the enemy. 
 
 The men should be made to understand that the signals or com- 
 mands, such &s forward, mean that the skirmishers shall march on the 
 enemy ; in retreat, that they shall retire; and to the right or left flank, 
 that the men must face to the right or left, whatevir may be their po- 
 sition. 
 
 If the skirmishers bo marching by the flank and the captain should 
 wish to change direction to the right (or left) he will command: 
 
 1. By Jile right {or left). 2. March. 
 
 These movements will also be executed bv the signals. No. 262. 
 
154 MANUAT. FOR VOI-UXTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 THE FIRINGS. 
 
 274. Skirmishurg will Gre cither at a bait or marcLinj^. 
 
 To fire at a halt. 
 To cause this firo to bo executed the captain will commaml : 
 Commehce — Fiuing. 
 
 At this command, briskly repeated, the men of the front rank will 
 commence firing; they will reload ra])idly, and hold themselves in 
 readiness to fire again. During this time the men of the rear rank will 
 como to a ready, and as soon as their respective file-leaders have load- 
 ed, they will also fire and reload. The men of each file will thus con- 
 tinue the firing, conForiuing to this j)rinciple, that the one or the other 
 shall always have his piece loaded. 
 
 Light troops should be always calm, so as to aim with accuracy ; they 
 should, moreover, endeavor to estimate correctly the distances between 
 themselves and the enemy to be hit, and thus be enabled to deliver their 
 fire with the greater certainty of success. 
 
 Skirmishers will not remain in the same place while reloading, unless 
 protected by accidents in the ground. 
 
 Tit fire marching. 
 
 275. This lire will bo executed by the same commands as the fire at 
 a halt. 
 
 At the command commence Jh-iu;/, if the line be advancing the front 
 rank man of every file will halt, firo, and reload before throwing 
 himself forward. Tlie rear rank man of the same file will continue 
 to march, and after passing ten or twelve paces beyond his front 
 rank man will halt, come to a ready, select his object, and fire when 
 bis front rank man has loaded; the firo will thus continue to be exe- 
 cuted by each file; the skirmishers will keep united, and endeavor, 
 as much as possible, to preserve the general direction of the align- 
 ment. 
 
 If the line be marching in retreat, at the command ooHimeiice 
 firing, the front rank man of every file will halt, face to the enemy, 
 fire, and then reload while moving to the rear; the rear rank man 
 of the same file will continue to march, and halt ten or twelve paces 
 beyond his front r:ink man, face about, come to a ready, and firo 
 when his front rank man has passed him in retreat and loaded, after 
 
INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS. 155 
 
 which he will move to the rear and reload; .the front rank man in his 
 turn, after marching briskly to the rear, will halt at ten or twelve 
 paces from the rear rank, face to the enemy, load his piece and fire, 
 conforming to what has just been prescribed; the firing will thus be 
 continued. 
 
 If the company be marching by the right flank, at the command 
 commence firing, the front rank man of every file will face to the 
 enemy, step one pace forward, halt aiTd fire; the rear rank man will 
 continue to move forward. As soon as the front rank man has fired 
 ho will place himself briskly behind his rear rank man and reload 
 while marching. When he has loaded the rear rank man will in his 
 turn step one pace forward, halt and fire, and returning to the ranks 
 will place himself behind his front rank man; the latter, in his turn, 
 will act in the same manner, observing the same principles. At the 
 command cense firinij, the men of the rear rank will retake their origi- 
 nal positions, if not already there. 
 
 If the company be marching by the left flank the fire will be execu- 
 ted according to the same principles, but in this case it will be the rear 
 rank men who will be first. 
 
 The following rules will ba observed in the cases to which they 
 apply : 
 
 If the line be firing at a halt, or while marching by the flank, at 
 the command forward — March, it will be the men whose pieces are 
 loaded, without regard to the particular rank to which they belong, 
 who will move to the front. Those men whose pieces have been dis- 
 charged will remain in their places to load them before moving 
 forward, and the firing will be continued agreeablj' to the principles 
 prescribed above. 
 
 If the line be firing either at a halt, advancing, or while marching 
 by the flunk, at the command in retreat — Mauch, the men whoso 
 pieces are loaded will remain faced to the enemy, and will fire in this 
 position ; the men whose pieces are discharged will retreat loading 
 them, and the fire will be continued agreeably to the principles pre- 
 scribed for the fire in in.archiiig in retreat. 
 
 If the line of skirmishers be firing either at a halt, advancing, or in 
 retreat, at the command by the right (or /e/V) fiattk — March, the men 
 whose pieces are loaded will step one pace out of the general align- 
 ment, face to the enemy, and fire in this position ; the men whose 
 pieces are unloaded will face to the right (or left) and march in the 
 direction indicated. The men who stepped out of the ranks will place 
 themselves, immediately after firing, upon the general direction, and 
 in rear of their front or rear rank men, as the case may be. The fire 
 
156 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 will be continued nccording to the principles prescribed fur firing when 
 marching by a flank. 
 
 Skirmishers will be habituated to load their pieces while marching; 
 but they will bo enjoined to halt always an instant when in the act of 
 charging cartridge and priming. 
 
 They should be practised to fire and load kneeling, lying down, and 
 fitting, and much liberty should be allowed in these exercises in order 
 that they may be executed in the manner found to be most convenient. 
 Skirmishers should be cautioned not to forget that, in whatever posi- 
 tion they may load, it is imjxirtant that the piece should be placed 
 upright before ramming, in order that the entire charge of powder 
 may reach the bottom of the bore. 
 
 In commencing the fire, the men of the same rank should not all firo 
 at once, and the men of the same lile should be particular that one or 
 the other of them be always loaded. 
 
 lu retreating, the officer commanding the skirmishers should seize 
 on every advantage which the ground may present for arresting the 
 enemy as long as possible. 
 
 At the signal to cea«e ^riiit/, the captain will see that the order is 
 prompt!)' obeyed; but the men who may not be loaded will load. If 
 the line be marching it will continue the movement; but the man of 
 each file who happens to be in front will wait until the man in rear 
 shall be abreast with him. 
 
 If a line of skirmishers be firiiw advancing, at the command halt, 
 the line will reform upon the skirmishers who are in front; when the 
 line is retreating, upon the skirmishers who are in rear. 
 
 276. Officers should watch with the greatest possible vigilance over a 
 line of skirmishers : in battle they should neither carry a rifle nor fowl- 
 ing piece. In all the firings, they, as well as the sergeants, should see 
 that order and silence are preserved, and that the skirmishers do not 
 wander imprudently ; not to fire until they distinctly perceive the ob- 
 jects at which they aim, and are sure that those objects are within 
 proper range. Skirmishers should take advantage promptly, and with 
 intelligence, of all shelter and of all accidents of the ground, to con- 
 ceal themselves from the view of the enemy, and to protect them- 
 selves from his fire. It may often happen that intervals are mo- 
 mentarily lost when several men near each other find a common 
 shelter; but when they quit this position they should immediately 
 resume their intervals and their places in line, so that they may not, 
 by crowding, needlessly e.\poso themselves to the fire of the enemy. 
 
INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS. 157 
 
 THE RALLY. 
 To form column. 
 
 277. A company deployed as skirmishers is rallied in order to oppose 
 the enemy with better success; the rallies are made at a run and with 
 bayonets fixed; when ordered to rally the skirmishers fix bayonets 
 without command. 
 
 There are several ways of rallying, which the chief of the line will 
 adopt according to circumstances. 
 
 If the line, marching or at a halt, be merely disturbed by scattered 
 horsemen, it will not be Accessary to fall back on the reserve, but the 
 captain will cause bayonets to bo fixed. If the horsemen should, how- 
 ever, advance to charge the skirmishers, the captain will command, 
 rally by foure. The line will halt if marching, and the four men of each 
 group will execute this rally in the following manner : the front rank 
 man of the even numbered file will take the position of guard against 
 cavalry ; the rear rank man of the odd numbered file will also take the 
 position of guard against cavalry, turning his back to him, his right 
 foot thirteen inches from the right foot of the former and parallel to it; 
 the front rank man of the odd file and the rear rank man of the even 
 file will also place themselves back to back, taking a like position, and 
 between the two men already establisbtd, facing to the right and left; 
 the right feet of the four men will be brought together, forming a square 
 and serving for mutual sup])ort. The four men in each group will come 
 to a ready, fire as occasion may offer, and load without moving their 
 feet. (Fig. 60.) 
 
 The captain and chiefs of sections will each cause the four men who 
 constitute his guard to form square, the men separating so as to enable 
 him and the bugler to place themselves in the centre. The three ser- 
 geants will each promptly place himself in the group nearest him in the 
 line of skirmishers. 
 
 Whenever the captain shall judge these squares too weak, but should 
 wish to hold his position by strengthening his line, he will command: 
 
 Rally by sections. 
 
 278. At this command the chiefs of sections will move rapidly on 
 the centre group of their respective sections, or on any other inferior 
 group whoso position might offer a shelter, or other particular advan- 
 tage ; the skirmishers will collect rapidly at a run on this group, and 
 without distinction of numbers. The men composing the group on 
 which the formation is made will immediately form square, as hereto- 
 
158 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTKERS AND .MILITIA. 
 
 fore explainc'l. and elevate their jiicccs, the lia.voncts uppcrmojt, in 
 order to indicate the point on which the rally is to bo made. The other 
 skirmishers, as they arrive, will occupy and fill the open nn.sular spaces 
 between tlicse four men, ami successively rally around this first nucleus, 
 and in such manner as to form rapidly a compact circle. The skirmish- 
 ers will take, as they arrive, the position of charge bayonet, the point 
 of the bayonet more elevated, and will cock their pieces in this posi- 
 tion. The movement concluded, the two exterior ranks will fire as 
 occasion may offer, and load without moving their feet. (Fig. 61.) 
 
 The captain will move rapidly with his guard wherever he may judge 
 his presence most necessary. 
 
 The ofReers and sergeants will be particular to observe that the rally 
 is made in silence, and with promptitude and order; that sonic pieces 
 iu each of their subdivisions be at all times loaded, and that the fire is 
 directed on those points only where it will be most effective. 
 
 If the reserve should be threatened, it will form into a circle around 
 its chief. 
 
 If the captain, or commander of a line of skirmishers formed of 
 many platoons, should judge that the rally by sections does not offer suf- 
 ficient resistance, he will cause the rally by platoons to be executed, and 
 for this purpose will command: 
 
 Rally hy platoons. 
 
 279. This movement will be executed according to the same princi- 
 ples and by the same means as the rally by sections. The chiefs of 
 platoons will conform to what has been prescribed for the chiefs of 
 sections. 
 
 The captain wishing to rally the skirmishers on the reserve will 
 command : 
 
 Rally on the reserve. 
 
 280. At this command the captain will move briskly on the reserve; 
 the officer who commands it will take immediate steps to form square; 
 for this purpose he will cause the half-sections on the flanks to be 
 thrown perpendicularly to the rear ; he will order the men to come to a 
 ready. 
 
 The skirmishers of each section, taking the run, will form rapidly 
 into groups, and upon that man of each group who is nearest the centre 
 of the section. These groups will direct themselves diagonally toward 
 each other, and in such manner as to form into sections, with the 
 greatest possible rapidity, while moving to the rear; the ofiicers and 
 sergeants will see that this formation is made in proper order, and the 
 chiefs will direct their sections upon the reserve, taking care to unmask 
 
INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS. 159 
 
 it to the right and left. As the skinuishcra arrive, tbcy will continue 
 and complete the formation of the square begun by the reserve, closing 
 in rapidly upon the latter, without re ;ard to their places in line ; they 
 will como to a ready without command, and fire upon the enemy; 
 which will also be done by the reserve as soon as it is unmasked b}' the 
 skirmisher.*. 
 
 If a section should be closely pressed bj' cavalry while retreating, its 
 chief will command halt ; at this command the men will form rapidly 
 into a compact circle around the officer, who will reform his section and 
 resume the march the moment he can do so with safety. 
 
 The formation of the square in a prompt and cflBcient manner 
 requires coolness and activity on the part of both officers and ser- 
 geants. 
 
 The captain will also profit by every moment of respite which the 
 enemy's cavalry may leave him ; as soon as he can, he will endeavor 
 to place bitiiself beyond the reach of their charges, either by gaining a 
 position where he may defend himself with advantage, or by reluming 
 to the corps to which be belongs. For this purpose, being in square, 
 he will cause the company to break into column by platoons at half- 
 distance; to this effect he will command : 
 
 1. Foj)n column. 2. Marcu. 
 
 At the command march, each platoon will dress on its centre, and 
 the platoon which was facing to the rear will face about without com- 
 mand. The guides will place thems-'clvcs on the right and left of their 
 respective platoons, those of the second platoon will place themselves 
 at half-distance from those fif the first, counting from the rear rank. 
 These dispositions being made, the captain can move the column in 
 whatever direction he m.ay judge proper. 
 
 If ho wishes to march it in retreat he will command: 
 
 1. In retreat. 2. March (or double-quick — March). 
 
 At the command march, the column will immediately face by the 
 roar rank and move off in the opposite direction. As soun as the 
 column is in motion the captain will command : 
 
 3. Guide right (or left). 
 
 He will indicate the direction to the leading guide; the guides will 
 march at their proper distances and the men will keep aligned. 
 If again threatened by cavalry the captain will command : 
 
 1. Form square. 2. March. 
 
16U MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 At the cominanil iiinrrh, the column will hnll ; the firsl platoon will 
 face about briskly, and the outer half-sections of each platoon will bo 
 thrown i)erpen(licularly to the roar, so as form the scconil and third 
 fronts of the square. The officers and sergeants will promptly rectify 
 any irregularities which may be committed. 
 
 If he should wish to march the column in advance the captain will 
 command : 
 
 1. For7n column. 2. Mauch. 
 
 Which will be executed as prescribed above. 
 
 The column being formed the captain will command. 
 
 1. Forward. 2. March (or double-quick — March). 3. Guide 
 left (or right). 
 
 At the second command the column will move forwiird, and at the 
 third commaml the men will take the touch of elbows to the side of the 
 guide. 
 
 If the captain should wish the column to gain ground to the right 
 or left he will do so by rapid wheels to the side opposite the guide, 
 and for this purpose will change the guide whenever it may be neces- 
 sary. 
 
 281. If a company be in column by platoon, at half-distance, right 
 in front, the captain can deploy the first platoon as skirmishers by the 
 means already explained; but if it should be his wish to deploy the 
 second platoon forward on the centre file, leaving the first platoon in 
 reserve, he will command : 
 
 1. Second platoon — ast skirmishers. 2. On the centre file — take 
 intervals. 3. March (or double-quick— '^Vkv.cxx). 
 
 At the first command the chief of the first platoon will caution his 
 platoon to stand fast; the chiefs of sections of the second platoon will 
 place themselves before the centre of their sections; the fifth sergeant 
 will place himself one pace in front of the centre of the second pla- 
 toon. 
 
 At the second command the chief of the right section, second pla- 
 toon, will command: ^Section, ritjlit face ; the chief of the left section : 
 Hectioii, Icjt J II <:c. 
 
 At the command march, these sections will move off briskly in oppo- 
 site directions, and having unmasked its first platoon the chiefs of 
 sections will respectively command: Di/ Ike left Jlank — Maucii, and 
 By the riijht Jlank — March; and as soon as these sections arrive ou 
 the alignment of the first platoon they will command: An nkirmUhers — 
 
INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS. 101 
 
 March. The groups will then deploy aceordinpj to pres'Tibed princi- 
 ples, ou the right group of the left section, which will be directe 1 by 
 the fifth sergeant on the point indicated. 
 
 If the captain should wish the deployment made by the flank the 
 second platoon will be moved to the front by the means above stated, 
 and halted after passing some steps beyond the alignment of the first 
 platoon ; the deployment will then be made by the flank according to 
 the principles prescribed. 
 
 When one or more platoons are deployed as skirmishers, and the 
 captain should wish to rally them on the battalion, he will command: 
 
 Rally on the battalion. 
 
 282. At this command the skirmishers and the reserve, no matter 
 what position the company to whJCh they belong may occupy in order 
 of battle, will rapidly unmask the front of the battalion, directing 
 themselves in a run toward its nearest flank, and then form in its 
 rear. 
 
 As soon as the skirmishers have passed beyond the line of file- 
 closers the men will take the quick step, and the chief of each platoon 
 or section will re-form his subdivision, and pl,ace it in column behind 
 the wing on which it is rallicil, and at ten paces from the rank of lile- 
 closers. These subdivisions wiU not be moved except by order of the 
 commander of the battalion, who may, if he thinks proper, throw them 
 into line of battle at the extremities of the line, or in the intervals 
 between the battalions. 
 
 If many platoons should be united behind the same wing of a bat- 
 talion, or behind any shelter whatsoever, they should be formed always 
 into close column, or into column at half-distance. 
 
 When the battalion, covered by a company of skirmishers, shall bo 
 formed into square, the platoons and sections of the covering company 
 will be directed by their chiefs to the rear of the square, which will bo 
 opened at the angles to receive the skirmishers, who will be then 
 formed into close column by platoons in rear of the first front of tho 
 square. 
 
 If circumstances should prevent the angles of the square from being 
 opened, the skirmishers will throw themselves at the feet of the front 
 rank .men, the right knee on the ground, the but of the piece resting 
 on the thigh, the bayonet in a threatening position. A part may also 
 place themselves about the angles, where they can render good service 
 by defending the sectors without fire. 
 
 If the battalion on which the skirmishers are rallied be in column 
 ready to form square, the skirmishers will bo formed into close column 
 14 
 
162 .MANUAL FUR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 by ])latoon, in rear nf the centre (T the tbird division, and at tbc com- 
 mand /orm »qiiare — JlAncR, thev will move forward and close on the 
 buglers. 
 
 When pkirmisbers bave been rallied by platoon or section behind the 
 wings of a battalion, and it be wished to deploy tbem again to the 
 front, they will be marched by the flank toward the intervals on 
 the wings, and be then deployed so as to cover the front of the bat- 
 talion. 
 
 When platoons or sections, placed in the interior of squares or col- 
 umns, arc to be dcploj'ed, they will be marched out by the flank and 
 then thrown forward, as is prescribed, No. 281 ; as soon as they shall 
 have unmai^ked the column or square they will be deployed, the one on 
 the right, the other on the left file. 
 
 The a.tse7nbly. 
 
 283. A company deployed ^s skirmishers will be assembled when 
 there is no longer danger of its being disturbed; the assembly will be 
 made habitually in quick time. 
 
 The captain wishing to assemble the skirmishers on the reserve will 
 command: 
 
 Assemble on (he reserve. 
 
 At this command the skirniisihers will assemble by groups of fours; 
 the front rank men will place themselves behind their rear rank men, 
 and each group of fours will direct itself on the reserve, where each 
 will take its proper place in the ranks. When the company is re- 
 formed it will rejoin the battalion to which it belongs. 
 
 It may be also proper to assemble the skirmishers on the centre, or 
 on the right or left of the line, either marching or at a halt. 
 
 If the captain siiould wish to assemble them on the centre while 
 marching ho will command : 
 
 Assemble on the centre. 
 
 At this command the centre guide will continue to march directly to 
 the front on the point indicated; the front rank man of the directing 
 file will follow the guide and be covered by his rear rank man; the 
 other two comrades of this group, and likewise those on their left, will 
 march diagonally, advancing the left shoulder and accelerating the 
 gait, so as to reform the groups while drawing nearer and nearer, the 
 directing file ; the men of the right section will unite in the same mau- 
 ner into groups, and then upou the directing file, throwing forward the 
 
INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS. 163 
 
 rigbt shoulder. As they successively unite on the centre the men will 
 bring their pieces to the right shoulder. 
 
 To assemble on the right or left file will be executed according to the 
 Bame principles. 
 
 The assembly of a line marching in retreat will also be executed ac- 
 cording to the same principles, the front rank men marching behind 
 their rear rank men. 
 
 To assemble the line of skirmishers at a halt and on the line they 
 occupy, the captain will give the same commands; the skirmishers will 
 face to the right or left, according as they should march by the right 
 or left flank, re-form the groups while marching, and thus arrive on 
 the file which served as the point of formation. As they successively 
 arrive the skirmishers will support arms. 
 
164 MANUAL FOR V0LUNTEEB8 AND MILITIA. 
 
 Article V. 
 TARGET PEACTICE. 
 
 284. In order that fire-arms in the hands of soldit-rs may produce 
 their full effect, it is necessary, 
 
 1st. That the soldier should have suflBcient knowledge of the parts of 
 his piece to enable him to take it apart and put it together again for the 
 purpose of keeping it in order. 
 
 2d. That the soldier should know how to load his piece properly. 
 The school of the soldier contains all that is necessary on this subject. 
 
 3d. That the rules for firing his piece should be known; that is to 
 say, that he knows the manner of regulating his aim according to the 
 distance of the object to be hit. 
 
 4th. That he should be practised in estimating distances within the 
 range of his piece. 
 
 5th. That he should be able to take a position which enables him 
 To aim with ease ; 
 
 To keep the body steady, without constraint; 
 Not to incline the sights to the right or left; 
 To support the recoil. 
 
 6th When pressing on the trigger to discharge the piece, not to 
 derange his aim. 
 
 The above comprises all that is necessar}' for the soldier to know and 
 put in practice in order that he may obtain the maximum effect of his 
 arm. 
 
 EXERCISE PREPARATORY TO FIRING. 
 
 285. In the exercises which constitute this lesson, the company will 
 be divided into as many squads as there are instructors available. 
 When the exercise is conducted on the drill ground the squads will be 
 formed in one rank, with an interval of one pace between the files, and 
 equipped as for drill. The bayonet, as a general rule, will bo in the 
 scabbard, unless otherwise directed. 
 
TARGET PRACTICE. 165 
 
 A iming. 
 
 286. Instruction in aiming will be given at first in the quarters, if 
 practicable. A bag, partially filled with sand or earth, is placed on a 
 bench, the bench on a table ; by striking the bag with the hack of the 
 hand an indentation will be formed in which the piece can be rested. 
 The piece is now placed on the bag and aimed by the instructor on 
 some object, such as a wafer on the wall, being careful that the sights 
 incline neither to the right nor left. He now points out to his squad the 
 two points which determine the line of sight; that is, the top of the 
 front or muzzle sight, and the middle of the notch of the hausse or 
 breech sight. The instructor explains that aiming consists in bringing 
 these two points and the object aimed at in the same right line. 
 
 Each man, in turn, placing himself behind the but of the piece, with- 
 out touching it, closing the left eye, looks through the middle of the 
 notch of the breech sight, over the top of the front sight, and on the 
 centre of the wafer upon which the line of sight was previously direct- 
 ed, and satisfies himself that these three points are in the same right 
 line. The instructor will now derange the position of the gun, and then 
 call up each soldier in turn, who will aim the piece at the point indicat- 
 ed: he will criticise the aiming, pointing out to each of them their error 
 or errors, if any are found, by making them see that the object aimed 
 at is not in the line of sight, but that this line passes to the right, left, 
 above, or below, as the case may be. After having rectified the aiming 
 of each soldier the instructor will be careful to derange the position of 
 the piece. This exercise will be repeated ; but, instead of the instructor 
 rectifying errors himself, he will first call up the men of his squad in 
 turn, and ask each if the line of sight passes to right, left, above, or 
 below the point indicated, or whether the piece inclines to the right or 
 left. When the men have expressed their opinions, the instructor will 
 give his own, correcting thus all the errors which have been committed. 
 The instructor will repeat this exercise as often as may be necessary. 
 
 Two drills of two hours each, devoted to the first part of the instruc- 
 tion in aiming, will be sufficient to teach the generality of men the 
 principles of aiming a gun with the raised sight down. 
 
 In a third drill the instructor will explain to his squad the use of the 
 different parts of his piece, the rules for firing, the object and use of the 
 raised sight, by tracing the figure (see fig. A) on a board, table or floor. 
 Explain that the line of fire is the a.xis of the gun indefinitely produced, 
 that the ball describes a curved line during its flight, that the line of 
 sight is a. right line passing through the middle of the notch of the 
 rear sight and the top of the front sight, that the point-blank is the 
 
166 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 second intersection of the trajectory, or curve, with the line of sight. 
 Assuming the point-blnnk of a gun, with the haussc down, to bo 200 
 yards, he will explain to his squad that to hit a man in the head at 200 
 yards, aim at his head ; at 150, at his throat; at 100, at bis chest, and 
 80 on. Thus, with the assistance of a curved line, and a few simple 
 remarks adapted to the comprehension of any man of ordinary intelli- 
 gence, the squad will receive a lesson which many will find useful in 
 practice, and but few will forget. The instructor will, from time to 
 time during the drill, question the men, and satisfy himself that he is 
 clearly understood. The instructor will also add that by the use of the 
 haussc or raised sight the number of points-blank are increased, and 
 explain the reason. 
 
 The fourth, fifth, and sixth drills that follow will take place on the 
 drill ground, and squads will be exercised in aiming at any distance 
 between 100 and 1,000 j-ards, or up to that point for which the arm is 
 sighted. Each squad is provided with a target, a bag partially filled 
 with sand, and a tripod, formed of poles about six feet long tied or 
 fastened near the top. The tripod is placed in an upright position, the 
 sand-bag on the tripod, and the piece on the sand-bag. Each man aims 
 his own gun. AVhen be pronounces his piece correctly aimed, the in- 
 structor calls up the remainder of ihc squad in turn, who examine the 
 piece and inform the instructor, in a low tone, how, in their opinion, 
 the gun is sighted. lie then examines the piece himself, pronounces 
 how the gun is aimed, calls up those who answered incorrectly, and, 
 having satisfied them of their errors, requires the man who aimed the 
 piece to correct his mistake. Should it be desirable to economize tar- 
 gets, one target will answer for the different squads of the same com- 
 pany during this part of the drill: in that case the tripods will be 
 placed as near together as practicable. Soldiers who have previously 
 been thoroughly instructed in this part of the exercise, and show a 
 knowledge of the first four iliills, may be excused from the last two. 
 
 Posilio7i of a Skirmisher aiming standing. 
 
 287. When the men can aim correctly from a rest, they will bo in- 
 structed in the above position. 
 
 Squads under arms will bo formed in a single rank, with an interval 
 of one pace betwen the files. 
 
 The instructor, facing the squad, will give the details of the position, 
 executing the same himself as he describes them. 
 
TARGET PRACTICE. 167 
 
 Aiming with sight dotcn (when rijled musket is used). 
 One time and three motions. 
 
 First viotion. As first motion of " charge bayonet," except that the 
 right foot is carried fifteen inches to rear of left heel. 
 
 Second motion. Bring down the piece with the right hand to the 
 right side, the barrel uppermost; seizing it with the left band in rear 
 of the hausse or breech sight, the stock resting in the palm of this 
 hand, the thumb extended along the stock, the left elbow close to the 
 body, the muzzle as high as the eye. Cock the piece with the thumb of 
 the right hand, the fingers supported against the guard and the small 
 of the stock; seize the piece at the small of the stock with the right 
 hand. 
 
 Third mtition. Turn in slightly the left toe, raise the piece with both 
 hands; place the but firmly againft the shoulder, the body erect, the 
 left elbow close to the body ; shut the left eye, raise the right shoulder 
 in order to bring the sight to the height of the right eye, the elbow 
 raised nearly to the height of the shoulder: aim, keeping the line of 
 sight horizontal and in the vertical plane of fire, inclining as little as 
 possible the head to the right, the thumb of the right hand over the 
 small of the stock, the last joint of the first finger of the right hand in 
 front of but not touching the trigger, the remaining fingers under, and 
 grasping the small of the stock. 
 
 Aiming with sight down (when rijle is used). 
 One time and three motions. 
 
 First motion. Raise the piece with the right hand : make a half-face 
 to the right on the left heel ; place the hollow of the right foot opposite 
 to, and Cfteeu inches from the left heel ; the feet square ; seize the piece 
 at the same time with the left hand in rear of the hausse or breech sight, 
 the thumb extended along the stock. 
 
 Second motion. Bring down the piece with both hands; the barrel 
 uppermost, the left elbow close to the bodj', the muzzle as high as the 
 eye. Cock the piece with the thumb of the right hand, the fingers sup- 
 ported against the guard and the small of the stock. Seize the piece at 
 the small of the stock with the right hand. 
 
 Third motion. Same as that given for rifled musket. 
 
 The instructor directs each man to take tbe position, commencing on 
 the right of the squad ; during the instruction he will assist the soldier 
 in supporting his arm by placing his right hand under or near the mid- 
 
168 MANUAL FOll VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 die band. Aflcrwiird the niau is made to take the position without any 
 assistance. The commands pivcn in order to make a soldier take or 
 abandon the positions as given above will be: 
 
 As a skirinLsher — Aim. Cease — Ai.ming. 
 
 At the first part of the last command withdraw the finger from in 
 front of the trigger; at the command nimiti</, retake the position of tho 
 second motion of "Aiming with sight down;" half-cock the piece, and 
 come to a shoulder. As tho instructor proceeds with the squad, ho 
 will direct those who have been instructed to exercise themselves in 
 taking the position, keeping it for an instant, an<l then abandoning it, 
 repeating this as often as they can while the rest are being instructed. 
 Men will be cautioned not to cock the piece when repeating the instruc- 
 tion. The squad will now be exercised in aiming together, keeping 
 them in the position long enough to conBrm, but not long enough to 
 fatigue them. This drill maj' 1)6 conducted in the quarters. In this 
 case the instructor will drill but one man at a time; the remainder will 
 exercise themselves in taking and abandoning the position as he pro- 
 ceeds. Two drills will be given to the above exercise. One will sulBco 
 for soldiers who have been previously instructed. 
 
 During the drill the soldier will not bo required to aim at any fixed 
 point, the object being that he may acquire with ease the position of a 
 soldier, " aiming as a skirmisher, standing," and tho habit of readily 
 catching with his eye the two points which determine the line of sight. 
 
 When the men are confirmed in the position described above, they 
 will be exercised at aiming at a mark. First with the sight down ; one 
 drill will be given to this exercise. Previous to the man's aiming, the 
 instructor will order him to direct the line of sight below the point to 
 be aimed at; to raise tho piece slowly until the line of sight is on tho 
 point designated, preserving his aim for an instant, keeping the body 
 and gun immovable. During tho first part of this drill the men will bo 
 instructed individually. 
 
 The men will now be exercised in aiming, using the haussc for ranges 
 for which it is graduated, an<l the intermediate ones. 
 
 Aiming with sight raised (when rijled musket and rijie are used). 
 
 One time and four motioiie. 
 
 First (tiid S'X'jikI. Same as "Aiming with sight down." 
 Tkird motion, liaise tile piece slightly with both hands, at the same 
 timo depressing the muzzle until the piece is horizontal, tho left arm and 
 stock against the body; with the thumb and first finger of the right 
 
TARGET PRACTICE. 169 
 
 hand regulate the hausse for the distance indicated, and seize the piece 
 
 with the right hand at the small of the stock. 
 
 ■ Fourth motion. Same as third motion, '■ Aiming with sight down." 
 
 Two drills will be given to this exercise; during the first drill, the 
 men will be instructed individually, commencing with the lower sights, 
 and then causing the hausse to be raised gradually. 
 
 The position of a soldier aiming as a skirmisher cannot always be 
 taken exactly in the same manner, as it will be found necessary to 
 lower the shoulder and arms in proportion as the hausse is elevated; 
 without moving the bod^', or inclining the head, the soldier, bj' lower- 
 ing the shoulder and arms, can take any line of si^ht from 250 to 1,000 
 yards. This will be found a good exercise for the men. la order to 
 aim at objects 800, 900, and 1,000 yards distant, it is necessary to press 
 the heel of the but of the piece against the shoulder. If men have 
 short necks the position is constrained, and cannot be taken properly. 
 Instructors perceiving this difficulty will cxcrci>e their judgment in 
 requiring men to take the position above designated when firing at 
 these long ranges. 
 
 During the second drill, squads formed on the drill ground will bo 
 exercised in aiming together, using the different lines of sight for 
 which the hausse is regulated. In this drill the bayonet will be fixed 
 when aiming at distances less than 400 yards. 
 
 Position of a soldier kneeling and aiming as a skinnisher. 
 
 288. The instruction will be given without limes or motions. The 
 instructor will command : 
 
 Take the position of a skirmisher kneeling and aiming ; 
 
 or, 
 
 Cease — Aiming. 
 
 The instructor will detail the position of a skirmisher kneeling and 
 aiming as follows : The squad is supposed to be at shoulder arms, the 
 files one pace apart. Take the position of present arms; carry the 
 right foot to the rear and to the right of the left heel, and in a position 
 convenient for placing the right knee upon the ground in bending the 
 left leg; place the right knee upon the ground; lower the piece, the 
 left forearm supported upon the thigh on the same side, the right hand 
 on the small of the stock, the but resting on the right thigh, the left 
 hand supporting the piece near the lower band. Move the right leg to 
 15 
 
170 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 the left, around the knee supported on the ground, until this leg is 
 nearly perpendicular to the direction of the left foot, and thus sent 
 himself on the right heel. Raise the piece with the ripht hand and 
 support it wilh the left, holding it near the lower band, the left elbow 
 resting on the left thigh near the knee. With the thumb and forefinger 
 of the right hand regulate the hau.sse, if necessary; cock the piece, 
 seize it with the right hand at the small of the stock, the right shoulder 
 raised or lowered according to the position of the target, the right 
 elbow nearly to the height of the shoulder; aim at the p"int indicated, 
 keeping the top of the muzzle sight and the bottom of the notch of the 
 hausse in the vertical plane of fire, the thumb of the right band over 
 the small of the .stock, the last joint of the first finger of the right hand 
 in front of but not touching the trigger, the other fingers of this hand 
 grasping the small of the stock. The instructor, having taken and de- 
 tailed at the same time the position of a skirmisher kneeling and aim- 
 ing, will instruct the men in aiming from this position, in conformity 
 with what has been prescribed in the school of the soldier. Two drills 
 will be given to this exercise. One will suffice for soldiers previously 
 instructed in the drill. 
 
 Keeping the piece steady xchen the trigger is pulled. 
 
 2S9. It is easy to preserve the aim until the trigger is pressed upon 
 in order to discharge the piece ; but, when this is done, the aim is 
 maintained with difficult}'. AVhen pressing on the trigger the line of 
 sight is apt to be deranged; although properly directed before touch- 
 ing the trigger, it n)ay not be so at the moment the discharge takes 
 place. The report of the discharge of his piece should find the soldier 
 still preserving his aim. The soldier will attain this if he holds his 
 breath from the moment he commences to touch the trigger until tho 
 gun is discharged; if he does not pull the trigger with a jerk, or sud- 
 denly, but increases tho pressure on the trigger by degrees ; if he 
 places his finger in such a manner upon the trigger as to exercise its 
 full force, pressing not on tho e.xtrcmitj' of the finger, but on the last 
 joint, or as near this joint as tho conformation of tho man will permit. 
 The instructor, holding a gun in a convenient position similar to that 
 of charge bayonet, will point out to each soldier in succession the 
 manner of pulling the trigger, which will be done with the first finger 
 of the right hand as described above, the remaining fingers of this 
 hand under and grasping the small of the stock, the thumb over tho 
 stock. 
 
 TLe men repeat after the instructor, in succession, what he has just 
 executed. After this has been repeated as often as necessary, the in- 
 
TARGET PRACTICE. 171 
 
 structor explains to his squad how they should manage in order to fire 
 without deranging the position of the piece after bringing the line of 
 sight to bear on an object. lie will explain and execute this as fol- 
 lows : 
 
 Press upon the trigger by degrees with the last joint of the first 
 finger of the right hand, closing the muscles of this finger without 
 moving the arm, holding the breath, the sound of the discharge finding 
 the soldier preserving the line of sight upon the point aimed at. Re- 
 main aiming an instant after the gun is discharged, to be assured that 
 the object is still in the line of sight. In actual firing it will be im- 
 possible to preserve the aim the instant the gun is discharged; but 
 should the gun hang firo. the soldier accustomed to remain an instant 
 aiming will be more apt to make a good shot. 
 
 The instructor should make the soldier understand that a good 
 marksman is known by the steadiness with which he preserves his gun 
 when it misses fire. 
 
 The men will be made to take one or the other of the positions of a 
 soldier aiming, as laid down in No. 287. They will be permitted to 
 snap the gun without any commands being given to that effect. The 
 instructor will indicate the distance, either assumed or real, of the tar- 
 get, and will see that the men use the sights corresponding to those 
 distances. The instructor will command, for instance, "Take the 
 position of a 'skirmisher aiming stivnding' at 600 yards aim." 
 
 The exercise given in this article is considered of great importance. 
 It will be repeated for four drills. Two will suflSce for those men who 
 have been previously instructed. 
 
 Simulated Jiring tcilh caps. 
 
 290. This is the same as the preceding, excepting that a cap will bo 
 used, and it will not be necessary to explain to the soldier the manner 
 of pulling the trigger. Squads assembled in the quarters will be made 
 to aim at a lighted candle, which. will be placed three feet or more 
 from the muzzle of the gun. The line of sight will be brought to bear 
 below the flame ; then, gradually raising the piece until the line of 
 sight is directly on <he flame, the cap will be exploded: if the cone and 
 barrel of the piece are perfectly clear, and the piece correctly sighted, 
 the body kept steady when aiming and at the moment the cap explodes, 
 the candle will be extinguished. Simulated firing with eaps will be 
 exewited in two drills. Ten caps per man will be exploded at each 
 drill ; eight caps standing and two kneeling. 
 
172 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 Simulated firing with blank cartridges. 
 
 291. Firing with blank cartri'lgcs will be conducted in conformity 
 with the principles laid down. The squad will be formed on the drill 
 ground, as prescribed in No. 287. The men will fire in succession at a 
 target placed or supposed to be placed at different distances. Tho 
 rules laid down in the foregoing examples relating to a soldier uitniug 
 will bo strictl}' followed. This lesson will be executed in two drills; 
 ten cartridges will be fired por man at each drill; eight standing and 
 two kneeling. 
 
 The object of these drills is to accustom tho men to preserve their 
 aim when firing. 
 
 Estimating distances. 
 
 292. The company, assembled fully equipped as for drill, will be 
 divided into at least three squads, or as many as there are company 
 officers present. Each officer is provided with a small cord, 25 j'arda 
 long. The instructor will measure on the ground a right lino, which 
 will be marked off into distances 
 
 r. . ,„„ ,,„ „„-> , 0.50,100.150.200. 
 0, 60, 100, 150, 200, yards; - — p — | 1 — 
 
 marking these distances, as measured, with a stake, stone, or line, on 
 the ground. He will now direct each man of his squad to pace ofiF 
 the measured distance of 100 yards, cautioning them to be careful 
 and preserve their natural gait, without attempting to increase or 
 diminish the length of their step. He will direct the men to count 
 the number of steps they take in passing over tho distance of 100 
 yards. This having been repeated at least three times by each 
 soldier, who reports each time tho number of steps taken by him in 
 passing over 100 yards, the ratio which a j'ard bears to the step of 
 each soldier becomes known. The instructor will inform each soldier 
 the number of steps it will be necessary for him to fake to pass over 
 10 yards. The soldier now knowing the number of steps he must 
 take to pass over 10 and 100 yards, it will be easy for him to measure 
 an_y distance with sufficient accuracy for all practical purposes when 
 firing. 
 
 To estimate a distance greater than 100 yards — in steps — the sol- 
 dier having started from tho point of departure, will count tho 
 number of steps he should take to pass over 100 yards — extending 
 as a tally, at the moment of arrival, the thumb of his right iNind, 
 the other fingers closed; he will recommence then his count, ex- 
 tendiug tho first finger of the right hand when he has counted the 
 
TARGET PRACTICE. 173 
 
 number of steps necessary to make a second 100 yards, and so on, 
 until he arrives at a point less than 100 yards from the point up to 
 which he is to measure. When the soldier finds himself less than 
 100 yards from the object he will count by tens, saying, " Ten yards," 
 when he has counted the number of steps necessary for him to pass 
 over the distance of J yards, 20, 30 yards, and so on, until he arrives 
 very near the object, when he will increase the length of his step, 
 counting each step a yard; and by adding these to the tens he will 
 then only have to count as hundreds the number of fingers he has 
 raised to know the whole distance expressed in yards. 
 
 The instructor will form his squad at one of the extremities of the 
 200 yards line, which has been measured in such a way that the right 
 line measured shall be perpendicular to the front of the squad. He 
 will order four men to place themlTelves, the first at the point marked 
 50 yards, the second at the point marked 100 yards, the third at the 
 point marked IjO yards, and the fourth at the point marked 200 
 j'ards. The men selected should be as near the same height as practi- 
 cable. The instructor will now direct the attention of the squad to the 
 different parts of the dress, arms, equipment, and figure of the men on 
 the line, such as can bo easily distinguished and recognized at 50 
 yards, and such as cannot be readily recognized at this distance. He 
 questions each man of his squad on these points, not expecting all to 
 answer alike, since the eyesight of men will generally differ. 
 
 The instructor will now call the attention of the men to the soldier 
 placed at the point 100 yards distant, and cause them to make similar 
 observations upon tins man as those already prcscrilied for the soldier 
 at 50 yards. The instructor again questions the men, and will bo 
 careful to point out to them the difference that exists between those 
 two distances, as illustrated by the difference in the appearance of the 
 same objects at these distances. The instructor will make, in suc- 
 cession, upon the two men placed at 150 and 200 yards, similar ob- 
 servations as prescribed for the men at 50 and 100 yards; being very 
 careful to call the attention of each man to the difference which exists 
 between the four distances, illustrated by the distinctness with which 
 certain objects are seen. The instructor will direct the squad to notice 
 that men appear smaller the further they are off, although in reality 
 they are nearly the same height. The men stationed at the different 
 points will be frequently replaced by others. When the men of the 
 squad.s have made a sufficient number of observations upon the four 
 distances above indicated, and when these observations are well im- 
 pressed on their memories, the instructor will cause the squad to 
 estimate intermediate distances between 50 and 200 yards. 
 
174 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 In order to do this the instructor will march his sijuad to a different 
 part of the ground from that on which he inea.sured the distances in 
 the first instance, and form it in one rank. He now sends out one 
 man, directing Lim to halt at a given signal. The instant this man 
 steps off the S(iuad is faced about, in order that the men may not count 
 the steps taken. When the man proceeds a sufficient distance he will 
 be halted, facing toward the squad. The squad will now be faced to 
 the front. The men will estimate the distance which separates them 
 from the srddicr. The instructor cautions the squad to recollect the 
 observations made by them upon the men placed at the measured dis- 
 tances. The instructor, placing himself a short distance from the 
 squad, calls each man to him in turn, directing them to give in their 
 estimates in a low voice. This is necessary in order that uo man 
 may be influenced in his judgment by the opinion of another. The 
 instructor will now cause the distance to be measured, and at the 
 same time stepped off by the men. The instructor now points out 
 to the men the errors, if any were committed, in estimating the dis- 
 tance. In order to do this more distinctly he may send a man to the 
 point from which the squad started, pointing out all errors by observa- 
 tions on this man. The instructor will repeat this exercise as often as 
 in his judgment is necessary, taking care each time to choose a dif- 
 ferent distance, but always between the limits above indicated. 
 
 Estimating distances should take place under different conditions of 
 the atmosphere, cloudj', foggy, etc.; and if the locality permits squads 
 should be drilled on ground the outline of which is divcrsilied by hills, 
 ravines, etc. 
 
 When the instructor judges that the men of his squad — who should, 
 if possible, be the same during these exercises — have acquired a suffi- 
 cient accuracy in estimating distances emuprised between 50 and 200 
 yards, he will proceed to estimate distances comprised between 200 and 
 400 yards. To accoini)lish tliis he will cause to be measure<l a distance 
 of 400 yards, and mark, upon the right line so measured, •distances of 
 
 0, 200, 250, 300, 350. and 400 yards; «- ^O"- ^50, 300, 350. 4,)0. 
 
 The squads will be formed as explained. The instructor now orders 
 five men to place themselves, the first at 200, the second at 250, the 
 third at .^00, the fourth at 350, and the fifth at 400 yards, facing the 
 squad and resting on their arms. He will make upon these different 
 distances observations similar to those already made upon the lesser 
 distances, and for that of 200 3'ards. This last distance should be the 
 object of jjarticular attention and study. The instructor will cause 
 
TARGET PRACTICE. 175 
 
 distances comprised between 200 aud 400 yards to be estimated as ex- 
 plained for the lesser distances. 
 
 When the men have acquired sufficient accuracy in estimating dis- 
 tances comprised between 200 and 400 yards, they will be made to esti- 
 mate distances comprised between 50 and 400 yards. 
 
 This having been accomplished, distances will be no longer estimated 
 on single individuals, but on groups of men. 
 
 Each company, under the command of its captain, will be divided 
 into two platoons, commanded by the firs-t and second lieutenants, 
 when not superintending the firing of a class. The captain will keep 
 himself with one of the two platoons, having an eye to the exercise. 
 The chief of each platoon, having halted his platoon in a favorable 
 position indicated by the captain, will bring his platoon to an order, 
 and rest. A group, composed of a corporal, a drummer or bugler, and 
 Uro men, will proceed immediately in front of the platoon, following a 
 line indicated by the chief of platoon, who will point out to the corpo- 
 ral two points on this lino upon which to direct himself. The corporal, 
 having passed over a distance of 200 yards, but not exceeding 700, 
 w^ill be at liberty to halt his group. He will then place the men one 
 pace apart, in one rank, and, facing the platoon, bring them to an 
 order and rest, and take his place on the right of the rank, the centre 
 of which should be established on the line. The chief of the platoon 
 will now estimate the distance himself, and note the same in his note 
 book. He will now call out the non-commissioned ofiicers, receive 
 their estimates (which should be given in alow tone), and so on with 
 the men. As soon as the officer in charge of the platoon commences to 
 take down the estimates of the men, a sergeant, assisted by two men 
 carrying a cord twenty-five yards long, will measure the distance 
 which separates the platoon from the group, afld note down the same. 
 Should the number of units which remain after having noted the hun- 
 dreds and tens be less or equal to five, they will be rejected ; if greater 
 than five, they will be counted as ten. The officer having taken down 
 the estimates, and the distance separating the platoon from the group 
 having been measured, the ofiicer will display a signal, and the ser- 
 geant who measured the distance will indicate the number of yards by 
 causing the drummer to sound a roll for each hundred, and a single 
 tap for tens. The bugler will indicate the same by long and short 
 notes. 
 
 The group, at the discretion of the officer commanding the platoon, 
 may be made to increase or lessen the distance which separates it 
 from the platoon, the corporal keeping the group within the limits 
 proscribed, and on the line as indicated to him. When he halts the 
 group, he will bo careful to establish it on the line facing the platoon. 
 
17G MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 The 8crp;cnnt charged with measuring the distauce will retire a few 
 paces from the line, after baring marked (he point up to which he last 
 measured. 
 
 lie will observe the platoon, and as soon as its chief commences re- 
 cording the estimates he will measure the distance which separates the 
 group from its first stnti<.n, taking note of this distance and adding it 
 to the first or subtracting it, as the case may be. 
 
 In estimating distances comprised between 700 and 1,000 j-ards, the 
 number cc^niposing n group will be increased to eight men, a corporal, 
 and drummer or bugler. The groups will be formed sometimes in one 
 and sometimes in two ranks. 
 
 In all other respects the rules Inid down for estimating distances 
 between 200 and 700 yards will be followed. 
 
 Instruction in estimating distances will be given when it does not 
 interfere with other parts of the soldiers' drill. It will, however, 
 always precede ball practice, and be carried on during this practice. 
 When one squad is occupied in firing at the target the remaining 
 squnds will be exercised in estimating distances. 
 
 Officers, particularly, should be prompt in estimating distances cor- 
 rectly, as they are called upon to conduct and regulate the fire in pres- 
 ence of an enemy. 
 
 Firmg with Ball Cartridges at Different Distances, Formation of 
 Classes, etc. 
 
 293. The distances at which the targets are placed will be 150, 225, 
 250, .300, 325, 350, -^00, 450, 500, 550, 600, 700, SOO, 'JOO, and 1,000 
 yards. 
 
 These distances will be carefully nunsurcd and stnkcd off on the 
 "firing ground." 
 
 The surfaces fired at will be, 
 at 150 and 225 yards, one target C ft. high and 2^ inches broad. 
 
 225 and 300 " '• " " 44 
 
 325, 350, and 400 " " " " 66 " 
 
 450 and 500 " " " " 88 " 
 
 550 and 600 " " " '< 110 ' 
 
 700 " " " " 132 " 
 
 800 " " " " 176 " 
 
 900 " " " " 220 " 
 
 1,000 " " " " 264 " 
 
 Four rounds will be fired at ciuli of the above distances. The com- 
 pany will be divided into three equal classes, non-conimis.'^ioned officers 
 equally distributed. 
 
I 
 
 TARGET PRACTICE. 177 
 
 After the company Las fired at the several distances, 150. 225, 250, 
 300, 325, 350, and 400 yards, the classes will be rearranged according 
 to merit of firing — the first class composed of those men who have hit 
 the target the greatest Dumber of times, the second class of those who 
 come next in order, and so on with the third, keeping the classes 
 as nearly equal as practicable. Non-commissioned ofiSeers will not be 
 assigned to classes according to merit, but according to rank, a 
 sergeant in each class, the presence of non-commissioned officers being 
 necessary with classes when estimating distances, etc. When the 
 firing has been executed at the fifteen distances the classes will be 
 again reformed, as prescribed above; previous to which no change 
 will be made. 
 
 Men who, from unavoid.'ible causes, have missed drills will be placed 
 in that class to which the number of their shots that hit the target 
 entitles them, which will be determined by a simple calculation. 
 
 A list of the companj', arranged by classes, will be kept exposed in 
 the quarters until r^ew lists are formed. The object in forming classes 
 is that the officers may know the good marksmen in their companies, 
 and to stimulate the pride of the men. 
 
 When the company arrives on the ground the classes will be paraded. 
 The first class, formed in one rank, will take position ten st«ps in rear 
 of the point from which the firing takes place, the centre of the rank 
 on and perpendicular to the plane of fire. 
 
 The remaining classes will be divided into as many squads per class 
 as there are intelligent non-commissioned officers available; and these 
 squads, superintended by an officer, will be exercised on suitable 
 ground near the firing ground, in estimating distances. When estimat- 
 ing distances greater than 400 yards the two classes may be united, in 
 which case the detachment will be commanded by an officer. The offi- 
 cer superintending the firing will order his class to load at will, and 
 then bring them to a " support arms," or " order arms," and rest. 
 
 Before a man fires, a roll on the drum or note on the bugle will be 
 sounded. At this signal the markers will take their places. At the 
 command "Commence firing," the man on the right will take the position 
 in front of the squad that has been pointed out to him, and fire, retiring 
 as soon as he has fired three paces in rear of his first position ; and so 
 on with the rest. When a class has fired it will reload at the commands 
 "Load at will,'' "Load," and thus continue until the four shots have 
 been expended. Three shots will be fired standing, the fourth kneeling. 
 The firing of the other classes will be conducted in the same manner. 
 Officers should retire a short distai;ce from the soldier who is about 
 to fire, and be careful not to speak to him when in the act of firing. 
 
1/5 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 Officers will pay particular atlcntion that all the principles arc followed 
 which have hceu laid down in the foregoing articles. 
 
 Balls which strike within the black lines will have no greater value 
 on the "record book" than those which strike any other part of the 
 target. 
 
 An intelligent noo-coinmisaioned officer, assisted by a man, will place 
 himself in a hole dng at the foot and in front of the target, protected 
 by a breastwork of earth thrown up on that side from which the firing 
 takes place. This nun-comiuissioncd officer will mark the phots which 
 strike the target, lie will be provided with a small flag, and a rod 
 about si.v feet long, on one end of which will be )iailed a circular disc 
 of wood, or other material, six or eight inches in diameter, painted on 
 one side white, on the other black. When a ball strikes outside the 
 black, he will cover the shot hole with the disc, presenting the black 
 side to the detachment; when in:$ido the black, the white side will be 
 presented to view. Firing will only Ije permitted when the flag is down. 
 The marker should be provided with a pot of paste, a brush, and patches 
 of paper, when the target covered with muslin is used. After five shots, 
 the marker will paste patches over the ball holes, or otherwise deface 
 them. When cast iron targets are used, the marker should be provided 
 with black and white paint. 
 
 Should it not be possible to obtain thi- greatest range laid down, the 
 entire number of shots will uevectheless be fired. The shots, in that 
 case, will be divided equally between the 150 yards range and the great- 
 est available range. 
 
 When the first class has nearly completed firing its four rounds the 
 drummer will be directed to sound a roll, or the bugler the signal 
 "Commence firing." 
 
 The second class will then b;i marched to the position occupied by 
 the first, and execute what has been laid down above. 
 
 During the remainder of the drill the first class will be exercised 
 in estimating distances. It will be found to economize lime, and the 
 record of shots can be better kept, by keeping the same non-commis- 
 sioned officer superintending the marking of shots during the entire 
 drill. 
 
 Firing as Skirmishers. 
 
 291. The comi'any will now be exercised in firing as skirmishers. 
 Three drills will be given to this exercise. Ten cartridges will be fired 
 per man at each drill. When firing as skirmishers, the men will be 
 permitted to taue that position which suits them best. The line of 
 
TARGET PRACTICE. 179 
 
 skirmishers will fire first advancing, then retreating, conforming to the 
 principles laid down in the instruction for skirmishers. The targets 
 will be six feet high and twenty-two inches wide, placed upon a line 
 parallel to the line of skirmishers and six yards apart. 
 
 As many targets will be used as the nature of the ground and a due 
 regard to economy will permit. A line will be staked off parallel to 
 the line of targets and 350 yards distant. The line of skirmishers, 
 formed a suitable distance from this line, will advance upon it, and 
 when on the line the command will be given, "Commence tiring;" the 
 line of skirmishers will advance and fire five rounds: the remaining 
 five will be fired retreating. 
 
 The firing during the second drill will be executed as laid down for 
 the first. The surface fired at will be double; the targets placed six 
 yards apart. The firing will commence when the skirmishers arrive 
 on a line 600 yards from the targets. The number of targets will not 
 be limited. Five cartridges will be fired advancing and five retreat- 
 ing. 
 
 Firing dnring the third drill will commence when the skirmishers 
 reach a line 800 y:irds from the line of targets. Four targets will be 
 used, placed 12 yards apart. The dimensions of each target will be 6 
 feet by 88 inches. 
 
 Firing hy Company or Rank, and by Platoon. 
 
 295. The exercises in firing will terminate with firing by file, by 
 company or rank, and by platoon. At each drill six cartridges per 
 man will be fired by file, two by rank or company, and two by platoon. 
 The distances at which the several firings take place will be .300, 400, 
 and 500 yards. The target used will be 6 feet high and 176 inches 
 broad. The vertical aud horizontal stripes on this target will be 12 
 inches in width. 
 
 The firings In' file, by company or rank, and by plat )on, will be exe- 
 cuted in three drills; at the first the firing will commence at 300 yards, 
 the second at 400, aud the third at 500 yards. At each drill the firing 
 will commence by file, then by company or rank, and will end by firing 
 by platoon. When firing at 300 yards, whether bj' file, by compan)' or 
 rank, or platoon, bayonets will be fixed. 
 
 As the position of soldiers firing bj' file, company or rank, and by 
 platoon, is different from that taken when firing as skirmishers, it 
 will be necessary, before executing the above firings, to habituate the 
 men to the positions which they should take by simulated firings. 
 
 The simulated firing will first be by allowing the hammer to fall upon 
 
180 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 the cone. The men nrill be made to take the positions as laid down in 
 the school of a soldier as applicable to those dilTcrcnt firings. They 
 will be accustomed to regulate the hausse in ranks, putting in practice 
 as much as possible, when firing in ranks, what has been prescribed 
 for individual firing. 
 
 During the first i>art of the first drill ten caps per man will be ex- 
 plodod — six in file firing, two in comjiany or runk, and two in platoon. 
 During the second part of the same drill ten blank cartridges will bo 
 fired — six by file, two by company or rank, and two bj- platoon. The 
 front rank will be made frequently to change positions with the rear 
 rank. Firing with ball cartridges will then take place, preceding each 
 real fire bj' simulated firings, when the hammer will be allowed to fall 
 upon the cone. The proper execution of platoon and companj- firing 
 depends in a great degree upon the commands of the officer. If he 
 docs not allow a sufficient interval between the commands "Aim" and 
 '■ Fire," the men will not have time to aim. and to obey the command 
 in time the trigger will be pulled suddenly. The result will be that 
 much of the efficiency of the fire will be lost, and a simultaneous fire, 
 upon which a great deal depends, will not bo obtaiued; for experience 
 and reason demonstrate the fact, everything else being equal, that 
 platoon firing is more eff'ceiive in proportion as it is executed together. 
 When the officer leaves a suitable interval between the commands 
 "Aim" and "Fire," the men have time to adjust the piece to the shoul- 
 der, to place the finger in front of the trigger, and to exercise a slight 
 pressure on the trigger when awaiting the command " Fire." They 
 arc then ready to fire the moment the command is given, thus obtain- 
 ing a simultaneous and oCective fire. But if the officer sujierintending 
 the firing should bo careful to leave a sufficient interval between the 
 commands "Aim" and "Fire," he should no less avoid the ojiposito 
 extreme. If he keeps the men aiming too long, the}' will become 
 fatigued, will loie their aim, and will not be prepared to obey the com- 
 mand when given. •'It is only by commanding, and seeing platoon and 
 company firing executed with ball and cartridge, and judging of its 
 elTect by the number of balls put in the target, that officers can appre- 
 ciate the influence of a command promptly given, and acquire the 
 habit of thus giving their commands. 
 
 When firing b}' file, by company or rank, or by platoon, the officers 
 will indicate the distance which separates the company from the object 
 to be fired at. Men in ranks arc necessarily more or less constrained 
 in their movements. Occupied, moreover, in loading their pieces, sol- 
 diers will not be able to judge tbo distance which separates them from 
 the enemy. 
 
 The most suitable moment to indicate the distance will be imme- 
 
TARGET PRACTICE. 181 
 
 diately before the command " Aim " is given. The men will then be in 
 a position to regulate the hausse. To direct the fire of a platoon upon 
 an enemy, for example, at 400 yards, the officer will comraan'l : 
 
 Fire by platoon. Platoon — Ready — at 400 j/ard.i — Aim — Fire 
 — Load. 
 
 The above observations are applicable to firing by company or rank. 
 
 When firing by file, the distance will bo announced immediately 
 before the command " Commence firing," and after the command 
 " Ready." 
 
 Inaccuracy of fire may arise from very different causes : 
 
 1st. From ignorance of or failing to apply the principles which 
 govern good marksmen when firing. 
 
 2d. A ball, when fired, may be, ami generally is deflected from its 
 conrse when describing the trajectory. 
 
 The first causes may be obviated in a great degree by practical and 
 theoretical instruction. 
 
 The second is attributable to the piece, and exterior influences acting 
 upon the ball. Some of the causes cannot be modified by the most 
 skilful marksman; while others, to a great extent, may be counteracted. 
 It would be unreasonable to expect comparative perfection »)i cve'y gun 
 issued from our large manufactories. Our rifled musket is believed to 
 be as perfect an arm of its kind as has ever been made. A perfect arm 
 can only e.xist in theory. A soldier always firing the same piece will 
 become acquainted with its defects, and will be able to make such allow- 
 ances when firing as experience teaches him to be necessary. 
 
 Among the exterior influences which affect the accuracy of a gun, the 
 principal one is the wind. If the wind blows from the right, the ball 
 will be deflected to the left; to the right, if it blows from the left; 
 raised, if from the rear; and lowered, if from the front; raised and to 
 the left, if it blows from the rear and right. The deviation produced 
 by the wind will be increased in proportion as the distance increases ; 
 it increases even more rapidly than the distance. Experience alone can 
 teach the soldier the allowance he must make for the wind. Not only 
 does the wind affect accuracy of fire by deflecting the ball from its 
 course, but it prevents a person from holding his piece steady. 
 
 The temperature and dampness of the atmosphere influence the ball 
 in its flight. It has been remarked that in dry weather longer ranges 
 have been obtained than in damp weather. 
 
 When firing at an object in motion, allowance must be made for the 
 motion. For instance, when firing at a horseman galloping in a direc- 
 tion perpendicular to the plane of fire, it is necessary that the line of 
 
182 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 sight should move in proportion as the horseman moves, and should be 
 directed in advance of him in proportion as he is further off. 
 
 In opening a fire upon an encmj', particular attention should he paid 
 to discover where the first balls fired strike. It would be better that 
 the balls fall short of, rather than pass over the enemy. In the first 
 case, we stand a chance of a ricochet ball taking effect; from which wo 
 naturally deduce that a soldier should be impressed with the necessity 
 of firing too low rather than too high. 
 
 T A U G E T S . 
 
 296. The diflSculty of procuring any specified material for targets at 
 many posts precludes the adoption of any particular target. 
 
 The surface fired at, at the different distances, will alone be fixed by 
 regulation. 
 
 The following suggestions are offered : 
 
 The best targets, and those recommended for permanent posts, are 
 of cast iron — by far the cheapest and most durable. The different 
 surfaces required could be obtained by having four cast iron targets 
 of the following dimensions: one target fi feet by 22 inches; one 6 
 feet by 44 inches; one 6 feet bj' 66 inches; and one 6 feet by 132 
 inches. 
 
 M'hen cast iron targets cannot be had, the next best are targets form- 
 ed of wrought iron frames with muslin stretched u])on them. Four 
 frames of the following dimensions, by combination, would enable us to 
 obtain the surfaces required : one 6 feet by 22 inches ; one 6 feet by 44 
 inches; one 6 feet by 88 inches; one 6 feet bj' 110 inches; all the parts 
 could bo carried in a wagon body. 
 
 By carefully covering the ball holes with pati-hes of paper pasted on, 
 we strengthen and thicken the target; and one of these targets will last 
 longer than one would suppose. 
 
 The ne.xt best targets are wooden frames composed of four pieces, 6 
 inches wide and 1 inch thick, boiled together; the ends of the vertical 
 sides projecting about a foot below and sharpened, the frame covered 
 with muslin and held in position by four guys fastened to the top and 
 attached to pins in the ground in front and rear. 
 
 Every target will be marked by a vertical and a horizontal stripe, 
 dividing it into four equal parts, and varying in width according to the 
 distance, as follows: 
 
 At 150 
 
 
 and 225 
 
 yar 
 
 ds 4 
 
 " 250 
 
 
 " 300 
 
 
 5 
 
 " 325 
 
 
 " 350 
 
 
 8 
 
 " 400 
 
 450 
 
 " 600 
 
 
 12 
 
 " 550 
 
 600 
 
 " 700 
 
 
 16 
 
 " 800 
 
 900 
 
 " 1000 
 
 
 20 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 183 
 
 Article VI. 
 SCHOOL OF THE R A T T A Ij 1 O N . 
 
 To form the Regiment or Battalion. 
 
 297. At the signal called the adjutant's call, the companies are 
 marched from the company parades by their captains, the music play- 
 ing. The color-company serve? as the basis of the formation, and is 
 the first to form; the color-guard being at the point where the centre 
 of the line is to rest, one marker is placed in front of it, his elbow 
 touching the right corporal of the color-guard, and another on the line 
 at a little less than company distance from him, on his right, and 
 facing toward him; the color-company is halted three paces behind 
 this line, faced to the front, and dressed up upon the line by the cap- 
 tain, who aligns it to the left. 
 
 The company on the left of the color is the next to take its post; it 
 is halted three paces behind the line, its right nearly behind the left 
 file of the color-guard, and faced to the front; as soon as it halts the 
 left guide of the company throws himself out so as to be opposite one 
 of the three left files of the company, faces to the right, and aligns 
 himself upon the two markers; the captain then places himself on the 
 left of the color-guard, on a line with its front rank, and aligns the 
 company to the right. The company on the right of the color forms 
 next upon the same principles ; the right guide posts himself upon 
 the line opposite one of the three right files of the company, and 
 faces to the left; the captain places himself on the right of the color 
 company, and aligns his company to the left. 
 
 The remaining companies take their posts on the left and right in 
 succession, and when the formation is complete the adjutant commands 
 gmden — posts; at this command the guides on the line retire to their 
 places by passing through the intervals between the companies, and 
 those captains who are on the left of their companies shift to the right. 
 
184 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 Opening and cloiinfj ranks, and the execution of the different firex . 
 
 To open and to clone ranks. 
 298. Tbc colonel wishing the ranks to bo opened will coniiunnd: 
 1. Prepare to open ranks. 
 
 At this command the lieutenant-colonel and major will place them- 
 selves on the right of the battalion, the first on the flank of the file- 
 closers, and the second four paces from the front rank of the battalion. 
 
 These dispositions being made the colonel will command : 
 
 2. To the rear, open order. 3. March. 
 
 At the second command the covering sergeants and the sergeant on 
 the left of the baltaliou will place themselves four paces in rear of 
 the front rank, and opposite their places in line of battle, in order ' 
 to mark the new alignment of the rear rank ; they will be aligned by 
 the major on the left sergeant of the battalion, who will be careful 
 to place himself exactly four paces in rear of the front rank, and to 
 hold his piece between the eyes, erect and inverted, the better to 
 indicate to the major the direction to be given to the covering ser- 
 geants. 
 
 At the command march, the rear rank and the file-closers will step 
 to the rear without counting steps ; the men will pass a little in rear of 
 the line traced for this rank, halt, and dress forward on the covering 
 sergeants, who will align correctly the men of their respective compa- 
 nies. 
 
 The file-closers will fall back and preserve the distance of two paces 
 from the rear rank, glancing eyes to the right; the lieutenant-colonel 
 will, from the right, align them on the file-closer of the left, who, 
 having placed himself accurately two paces from the rear rank, will 
 invert his piece, and hold it up erect between his eyes, the bettor to bo 
 seen by the lieutenant-colonel. 
 
 The colonel, seeing the ranks aligned, will command: 
 
 4. Front. 
 
 At this command the lioutonant-colonel, major, and the left sergeant 
 will retake their places in line of battle. 
 
 The colonel will cause the ranks to be closed by the commands pre- 
 scribed for the instructor in the school of the company. 
 
SCnOOL OF THE BATTALION. 185 
 
 THE FIRINGS. 
 
 299. The colonel will cause to be execwtcd the fire by company, the 
 fire by wing, the fire by battalion, the fire by file, and the fire by rank, 
 by the commands to be herein indicated. 
 
 The fire by company and the fire by file will always be direct; the 
 fire by battalion, the fire by wing, and the fire by rank, may be cither 
 direct or oblique. 
 
 When the fire ought to be oblique the colonel will give, at every 
 round, the caution right (or left) oblique, between the commands ready 
 and am. 
 
 The fire by company will be executed alternately by the right and 
 left companies of each division, as if the division were alone. The 
 right company will fire first; the captain of the left will not give his 
 first command till ho shall see one or two pieces at a. ready in the right 
 company: the captain of the latter, after the first discharge, will 
 observe the same rule in respect to the left company; and the fire will 
 thus be continued alternately. 
 
 The colonel will observe the same rule in the firing by wing. 
 
 The fire by file will commence in all the companies at once, and will 
 be executed as has been prescribed in the school of the company. The 
 fire by rank will be executed by each rank alternatelj'. 
 
 The color-guard will not fire, but reserve itself for the defence of the 
 color. 
 
 The fire by company. 
 
 The colonel wishing the fire by company to be executed will com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. Five by company. 2. Commence firing. 
 
 At the first command the captains and covering sergeants will take 
 the positions imiicated in the school of the company. 
 
 The color and its guard will step back at the same time, so as to 
 bring the front rank of the guard in a line with the rear rank of the 
 battalion. Thia rule is general for all the different firings. 
 
 At the second command the odd numbered companies will commence 
 to fire; their captains will each give the commands prescribed in the 
 school of the company, observing to precede the command company by 
 that o{ Jirst, third, fifth, or scvetilh, according to the number of each. 
 
 The captains of the even numbered companies will give, in their 
 turn, the same commands, observing to precede them by the number of 
 their respective companies. 
 16 
 
18G MANUAL FOR VOMNTEKRS AND MILITIA. 
 
 Tn order that the odd nuniVicrcd companies may not all fire at once, 
 tlieir captains will observe, hnt only for the first discharge, to give the 
 command fire one after another: thus, the captain of the third com- 
 pany will not give the command Jlre until he has heard the fire of the 
 first company ; the captain of the fifth will observe the same rule with 
 respect to the third, and the captain of the seventh the same rule with 
 respect to the fifth. 
 
 The colonel will cause the fire to cease by the signal to ceate firing ; 
 at this sound the men will execute what is prescribed in the school of 
 the company ; at the signal for oflRcers to take their places after firing, 
 the captains, covering sergeant.s, and color-guard will promptly re- 
 sume their places in line of battle. Thin rule i» yeneral for all the 
 firinijs. 
 
 Thejire by wing. 
 
 When the colonel shall wish this fire to be executed ho will com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. Fire by wing. 2. Eight wing. 3. Ready. 4. Aim. 5. Fire. 
 6. Load. 
 
 The colonel will cause the wings to fire altcrnatel}', and be will 
 recommence the fire by the commands: 1. Jiii/hi wing; 2. Aim; 
 3. FiUE ; 4. Load. 1. Left viny ; 2. Aim; ?>. Fire; 4. Load; in 
 conforming to what is prescribed in the school of the company. 
 
 Tlie fire by battalion. 
 
 The colonel will cause this fire to be executed by the commands last 
 prescribed, substituting for the first two: 1. Fire by batlalion; 2. Bat- 
 talion. 
 
 The fire by file. 
 
 To cause this to be executed, the colonel will command: 
 
 1. Fire by file. 2. Battalion. 3. Ready. 4. Commence firing. 
 
 At the fourth command the fire will commence on the right of each 
 company. The colonel may, if he thinl(s proper, cause the fire to com- 
 mence on the right of each platoon. 
 
 The fire by rank. 
 To cause thi.H fire to bo executed the colonel will command : 
 
 i 
 
I 
 
 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 187 
 
 1. Fire by rank. 2. Battalion. 3. Ready. 4. Rear rank. 
 5. Aim. 6. Fire. 7. Load. 
 
 This fire will be executed as has been explained in the school of the 
 company, in following the progression prescribed for the two ranks 
 which should fire alternately. 
 
 To fire by the rear rank. 
 
 When the colonel shall wish the battalion to fire to the rear he will 
 command : 
 
 1. Face by the rear rank: 2. Battalion. 3. About — Face. 
 
 At the first command the captains, covering sergeants, and file-closers 
 will execute what has been j)rescribed in the school of the company; 
 the color-bearer will pass into the rear rank, and for this purpose the 
 corporal of his file will step before the corporal next on his right to let 
 the color-bearer pass, and will then take his place in the front rank ; the 
 lieutenant-colonel, adjutant, major, sergeant-major, and the music will 
 place themselves before the front rank, and face to the rear, each oppo- 
 site his place in the line of battle — the first two passing around the 
 right, and the others around the left of the battalion. 
 
 At the third command the battalion will face about, the captains 
 and covering sergeants observing what is prescribed in the school of the 
 company. No. 230. 
 
 The battalion facing thus by the rear rank, the colonel will cause it 
 to execute the different fires by the same commands as if it were faced 
 by the front rank. 
 
 The colonel, after firing to the rear, wishing to face the battalion to 
 its proper front will command : 
 
 1. Face by the front rank. 2. Battalion. 3. About — Face. 
 
 At these commands the battalion will return to its proper front by 
 the means prescribed, No. 2.30. 
 
 Different modes of passing from the urder in battle to the order m 
 column. 
 
 To break to the right or left into column. 
 
 300. Lines of battle will habitually break into column by company; 
 they may also break by division or by platoon. 
 
188 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTKF.RS AM) MILITIA. 
 
 It is here supposed that the colonel wishes to hreak by company to 
 the right; he will command: 
 
 1. By company, riyht whepJ. 2. March for double-quick — 
 March). 
 
 (Fig. 63.) At the first command each captain will place himself rapidly 
 liefore the centre of his company, and caution it that it has to wheel 
 to the right ; each covering sergeant will re]>lace his captain in the front 
 rank. 
 
 At the command march, each company will break to the right, accord- 
 ing to the principles prescribed in the scliool of the company ; each 
 captain will conform himself to what is prescribed for the chiefs of 
 platoons; the left guide, as soon as he can pass, will place himself on 
 the left of the front rank to conduct the marching flank, and when he 
 Bhall have approached near to the perpendicular the captain will com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. Such company. 2. Halt. 
 
 At the second command, which will be given at the instant the left 
 guide shall be at the distance of three paces from the perpendicular, the 
 cumi>any will halt; the guide will advance and place his left arm lightly 
 against the breast of the captain, who will establish him on the align- 
 ment of the man who has faced to the right; the covering sergeant will 
 place himself correctly on the alignment on the right of that man, 
 which being executed, the captain will align his company by the left, 
 Command Front, and place himself two paces before its centre. 
 
 The captains having commanded Front, the guides, although some 
 of them may not bo in the direction of the preceding guides, will stand 
 fast, in order that the error of a companj' that has wheeled too much or 
 too little may not be propagated ; the guides not in the direction will 
 readily come into it when the column is put in march. 
 
 A battalion in line of battle will break into column by company to 
 the left, according to the same principles, and by inverse means. 
 
 When the colonel shall wish to move the column forward without 
 halting, he will intimate his intention, and when the companies have 
 nearly completed the wheel, command : 
 
 3. Forward. 4. March. 5. Guide left. 
 
 To brtnk to the reur, hij the riyht or left, into <:olniiiii. 
 
 301. When the colonel shall wish to cause the battalion to break to 
 the rear, by the right, into column by company, he will command: 
 
 1. By the right of companies, to the rear into column. 2 Battalion, 
 riyht — Fack. 3. M.\RCU (or doub!e-ijuick — March). 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 189 
 
 (Fig. 64.) At the first eommand each captain will place himself 
 before the centre of his company, and caution it to face to the right; 
 the covering sergeants will step into the front rank. 
 
 At the second command the battalion will face to the right; each 
 captain will hasten to the right of his company, and break two files to 
 the rear; the first file will break the whole depth of the two ranks; 
 the second file less ; which being executed the captain will place him- 
 self so that his breast may touch lightly the left arm of the front rank 
 man of the last file in the company next on the right of his own. 
 The captain of the right company will place himself as if there were a 
 company on his right, and will align himself on the other captains. 
 The covering sergeant of each company will break to the rear with the 
 right files, and place himself before the front rank of the first file to 
 conduct him. 
 
 At the command march, the first file of each company will wheel to 
 the right; the covering sergeant placed before this file will conduct 
 it perpendicularly to the rear. The other files will come successively 
 to wheel on the same spot. The captains will stand fast, see their 
 companies file past, and at the instant the last file shall have wheeled 
 each captain will command : 
 
 1. Such company. 2. Halt. 3. Front. 4. Left — Dress. 
 
 At the instant the company faces to the front its left guide will 
 place himself so that his left arm may touch lightly the breast of his 
 captain. 
 
 At the fourth command the company will align itself on its left 
 guide, the captain so directing it that the new alignment may be per- 
 pendicular to that which the company had occupied in lino of battle; 
 and, the better to judge this, he will step back two paces from the 
 flank. 
 
 The company being aligned the captain will command Fuon't, and 
 take his place before its centre. 
 
 302. The battalion marching in line of battle, when the colonel shall 
 wish to break into column by company, to the rear, by the right, he 
 will command : 
 
 1. By the right of companies, to the rear into column. 2. Battalion, 
 by the right flank. 3. M.'i.RCH (or double-quick — March). 
 
 At the first command each captain will step briskly in front of the 
 centre of his company, and caution it to face b;/ the right jlnnk. 
 
 At the command march, the battalion will face to the right; each 
 
190 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AM) MILITIA. 
 
 cnptain will move rapidly to the right of his company and cause it to 
 break to flic right; the first file of each company will wheel to the 
 rif;ht, and the covering sergeant placed in front of this file will conduct 
 it perpendicularly to the rear ; the other files will wheel successively at 
 the same place as the first. The captains will sec their companies file 
 past them ; when the lust files have wheeled the colonel will command : 
 
 3. Battalion, by the leftjlank — March. 4. Guide left. 
 
 At the connniind march, the companies will face to the left, and 
 march in column in the new direction. The captains will place them- 
 selves in front of the centres of their respective companies. 
 
 To break to the rear by the left the colonel will give the same com- 
 mands as in the case of breaking to the rear by the right, substituting 
 the indication left for that of right. 
 
 The battalion may be broken by division to the rear, by the right or 
 left, in like manner. 
 
 To deploy the battalion into close column. 
 
 30.?. This movement may be esecuted by company or by division, on 
 the right or left subdivision, or on any other subdivision, right or left 
 in front. 
 
 To deploy the battalion into close column by division in rear of the 
 first the colonel will command : 
 
 1. Close column, by division. 2. 0?t the Jirst division, right in 
 front. 3. Battalion, right — Face. 4. March — (or double- 
 quick — March). 
 
 (Fig. 65.) At the second command all the chiefs of division.*! will 
 place themselves before the centres of their divisions; the chief of the 
 first will caution it to stand fast; the chiefs of the three others will 
 remind them that they will have to face to the right, and the covering 
 sergeant of the right company of each division will replace his captain 
 in the front rank as soon as the latter steps out. 
 
 At the third command the last three divisions will face to the right; 
 the chief of each division will hasten to its right, and cause files to be 
 broken to the rear, as indicated. No. 301 ; the right guide will break at 
 the same time and place himself before the front rank man of the first 
 file, to conduct him, and each chief of division will place himself by 
 the side of this guide. 
 
 The moment these divisions face to the right the junior captain in 
 each will place himself on the left of the covering sergeant of the left 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 191 
 
 company, who will place himself in the front rank. This rule x» gfnernl 
 for all the dephtynicnts hi) diviniov. 
 
 At the command march, the chief of the first division will add guidn 
 left; at this its left guide will place himself on its left, as soon as the 
 movement of the second division may permit, and the file-closers will 
 advance one pace upon the rear rank. 
 
 All the other divisions, each conducted by its chief, will step off 
 together to take their places in the column ; the second will gain, in 
 wheeling by file to the rear, the space of six paces, which ought to 
 separate its guide from the guide of the first division, and so direct its 
 march as to enter the column on a line parallel to this division ; the 
 third and fourth divisions will direct themselves diagonally toward, 
 but a little in rear of the points at which thej' ought respectively to 
 enter the column ; at six paces from the left flank of the column the 
 head of each of these divisions will incline a little to the left, in order 
 to enter the column as has just been prescribed for the second, taking 
 care also to leave the distance of six paces between its guide and the 
 guide of the preceding division. At the moment the divisions put 
 themselves in march to enter the column the file-closers of each will 
 incline to the left, so as to bring themselves to the distance of one pace 
 from the rear rank. 
 
 Each chief of these three division."! will conduct his division till he 
 shall be up Avitli the guide of the directing one; the chief will then him- 
 self halt, see his division file past, and halt it the instant the last file 
 shall have passed, commanding: 
 
 1. Such division. 2. Halt. 3. Front. 4. Lefl — Dress. 
 
 At the second command the division will halt; the left guide will 
 place himself promptly on the direction, six paces from the guide who 
 precedes him, in order that, the column being formed, the divisi'ins may 
 be separated the distance of four paces. 
 
 At the third command the division will face to the front ; at the fourth 
 it will be aligned by its chief, who will place himself two paces outside 
 of his guide, and direct the alignment so that his division may be par- 
 allel to that which precedes — which being done, he will command 
 Front, and place himself before the centre of his division. 
 
 The lieutenant-colonel, placing himself in succession in rear of the 
 left guides, will assure thcra on the direction as they arrive, and then 
 move to his place outside of the left flank of the column six paces 
 from and abreast with the first division. In assuring the guides on the 
 direction he will be a mere observer, unless one or more should fail 
 to cover exactly the guide or guides already established. This rule i$ 
 yeiieral. 
 
102 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 To deploy the battalion in front of tlie first division, the colonel will 
 give the same command?, gul)stiiuting the in<lication I'fi for that of 
 right in front. (Fig. 66.) 
 
 At the second and third commands the chiefs of divisiions and the 
 junior captains will conform tlicmsielves to what has been prescribed 
 above ; but the chiefs of the last three divisions, instead of causing 
 the first two files to break to the rear, will cause them to break to the 
 front. 
 
 At the fourth command the chief of the first division will add guide 
 right. 
 
 The three other divisions will step off together to take their places 
 in the column in front of the directing division ; each will enter in 
 such manner that when halted its guide may find himself six paces 
 from the guide of the division next previously established in the 
 column. 
 
 Each chief of these divisions will conduct bis division till his right 
 guide shall bo nearly up with the guide of (he directing one ; he will 
 then halt his division, and cause it to face to the front ; at the instant 
 it halts its right guide will face to the rear, place himself six paces from 
 the preceding guide, and cover him exactly — which being done the 
 chief will align his division by the right. 
 
 The lieutenant-colonel, placed in front of the right guide of the first 
 division will assure the guides on the direction as they successively 
 arrive. 
 
 The movement being ended the colonel will command : 
 
 Guides, about — Face. 
 
 At this the guides, who are faced to the rear, will face to the 
 front. 
 
 304. To deploy the battalion in rear, or in front of the fourth divis- 
 ion, the colonel will command : 
 
 1. Close column, by divution. 2. On the fourth division (lejl or 
 right), in front. 3. Battalion, left — Fack. 4. March (or 
 double-quick — March). 
 
 These movements will bo executed according to the principles of 
 those which precede, but by inverse means; the fourth division, on 
 which the battalion deploj's, will stand fast; the instant the movement 
 commences, its chief will command giiitle right (or le/l). 
 
 305. The foregoing examples eml)race all the principles; thus, when 
 tlie colonel shall wish to deploy the battalion on an interior division 
 be will command : 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 193 
 
 1. Close column, hy division. 2. On such division, right (or left) in 
 front. 3. Battalion, inward — Face. 4. March (or double- 
 quick — March). 
 
 (Fig. 67.) The instant the movement coiniueuces the chief of the 
 directing division will command guide left (or right). 
 
 The divisions which, in the order in battle, are to the right of the 
 directing division, will face to the left; those which are to the left will 
 face to the right. 
 
 To march in column at full distance. 
 
 306. When the colonel shall wish to put the column in march he 
 will indicate to the leading guide two distinct objects in front on the 
 line which the guide ought to follow. This guide will immediately 
 put his shoulders in a square with that line, take the more distant 
 object as the point of direction, and the nearer one as the intermediate 
 point. The colonel will then command : 
 
 1, Column, forward. 2. Guide left (or right). 3. March (or 
 double-quick — March). 
 
 At the command march, briskly repeated by the chiefs of subdi- 
 visions, the column will put itself in march, conforming to what is pre- 
 scribed in the school of the company. No. 24-t. 
 
 The leading guide may always maintain himself correctly on the 
 direction by keeping steadily in view the two points indicated to him, 
 or chosen by himself; if these points have a certain elevation ho may 
 be assured he is on the true direction when the nearer masks the more 
 distant point. 
 
 The following guides will preserve with exactness both step and dis- 
 tance; each will march in the trace of the guide who immediately 
 precedes him, without occupying himself with the general direction. 
 
 The lieutenant-colonel will hold himself, habitually, abreast with 
 the' leading guide, to see that he does not deviate from the direction, 
 and will observe, also, that the next guide marches exactly in the trace 
 of the first. 
 
 To change direction in column at full distance. 
 
 307. The column being in march in the cadenced step, when the 
 colonel shall wish to cause it to change direction, he will go to the 
 point at which the change ought to be commenced, and establish a 
 17 
 
194 MA ^ UAL fOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 marker there, presenting the breast to the flank of the column : tliis 
 marker, no matter to which side the change of direction is to be made, 
 ■will he posted on the o]iposite side, and he will remain in position till 
 the las-t subdivision of the battalion shall have passed. The leading 
 subdivision being within a few paces of the marker the culniii'l will 
 command : 
 
 Head of column to the left (or right). 
 
 (Fig. fi8.) At this the chief of the lending subdivision will immedi- 
 atelj- take the guide on the side opposite the change of direction, if 
 not already there. This guide will direct himself so as to gra/.e the 
 breast of the marker; arrived at this point, the chief will cause his 
 subdivision to change direction by the commands and according to 
 the principles prescribed in the school of the company. When the 
 wheel is completed the chief of this subdivision will retake the guide, 
 if changed, on the side of the primitive direction. 
 
 The chief of each succeeding subdivision, as well as the guides, will 
 conform to what has just been explained for the leading subdivision. 
 
 When the column is at half-distance the pivot-man will take a pace 
 of fourteen inches instead of nine. 
 
 The column being in march the colonel will frequently cause the 
 about to be executed while marching; to this effect he will command: 
 
 1. Battalion, right about. 2. March. 3. Guide right. 
 
 At the second command the companies will face to the right about, 
 and the column will then march forward in the opposite direction ; the 
 chiefs of companies will remain behind the front rank, the file-closers 
 in front of the rear rank, and the guides will place themselves in the 
 same rank. 
 
 To halt the column. 
 
 308. The column being in march, when the colonel shall wish to halt 
 it he will command : 
 
 1. Column. 2. Halt. 
 
 At the second command, briskly repeated by the captains, the col- 
 umn will halt; no guide will stir, though he may have lost his distance 
 or be out of the direction of the preceding guides. 
 
 The column being in march in double-quick time will be halted by 
 the same commands. At the command halt, the men will halt in their 
 places, and will themselves rectify their positions in the ranks. 
 
 m 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 195 
 
 The column being halted, when the colonel shall wish to form it into 
 line of battle, he will move a little in front of the leading guide and 
 face to him; this guide and the following one will fix their eyes on the 
 colonel in order prom)itly to conform themselves to his direction. 
 
 If the colonel judge it not necessary to give a general direction to 
 the guides, he will limit himself to rectifying the position of such as 
 may be without, or within the direction, b^' the command fjtiide of 
 (such) company, or ijuides nf (such) compixnie*, ti> the rii/ht (or to the 
 left) ; at this command, the guides designated will place themselves on 
 the direction ; the others will stand fast. 
 
 If on the contrary the colonel judge it necessary to give a general 
 direction to the guides of the column, he will place the first two on the 
 direction be shall have chosen, and command: 
 
 Guides, cover. 
 
 At this the following guides will promptly place themselves on the 
 direction covering the first two in file, and each precisely at a distance 
 equal to the front of his company, from the guide immediately preced- 
 ing; the lieutenant-colonel will assure them in the direction, and the 
 colonel will command: 
 
 Lejl (or 7-ight) — Dress. 
 
 At this command each company will incline to the right or left, and 
 dress forward or backward, so as to bring the designated flank to rest 
 on its guide ; each captain will place himself two paces outside of his 
 guide, promptly align his company parallelly with that which precedes, 
 then command FnONT, and return to his place in column. 
 
 To close the column to half-distance, or in mass. 
 
 309. A column by company being at full distance right in front, and 
 at a halt, when the colonel shall wish to cause it to close to half-dis- 
 tance on the loading company he will command: 
 
 1. To half-distance close column. 2. March (or double-quick — 
 March.) 
 
 At the first command the captain of the leading company will cau- 
 tion it to stand fast. 
 
 At the command march, which will be repeated by all the captains, 
 except the captain of the leading company, this company will stand 
 fast, and its chief will align it by the left; the file-closers will close 
 one pace upon the rear rank. 
 
196 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 All the other companies will continue to march, ami iis each in suc- 
 cession arrives at platoon distiince from the one which precedes, its 
 captain wiU halt it. 
 
 At the instant that each company halts its guide will place himself 
 on the direction of the guides who precede, and the captain will align 
 the company by the left; the file-closers will close one pace upon the 
 rear rank. 
 
 No particular attention need be given to the general direction of the 
 guides before they respoctivel)' halt; it will sulRce if each follow in the 
 trace of the one who precedes him. 
 
 The colonel, on the side of the guides, will superintend the execution 
 of the movement, observing that the captains halt their companies 
 exactly at platoon distance the one from the other. * 
 
 The lieutenant-colonel, a few paces in front, will face to the leading 
 guide and assure the positions of the following guides as they succes- 
 sively place themselves on the direction. 
 
 The major will follow the movement abreast with the last guide. 
 
 If the column be in march the colonel will cause it to close by the 
 same commands. 
 
 If the column be marching in double-quick time, at the first com- 
 mand, the captain of the leading company will command tjiiirk time; 
 the chiefs of the other companies will caution their companies to con- 
 tinue the march. 
 
 At the command march, the leading company will take quick, while 
 the other companies continue to march in double-quick time; and as 
 each arrives at platoon distance from the preceding one its chief will 
 cause it to march in quick time. 
 
 When the rearmost company shall have gained its distance the 
 colonel will command : 
 
 Double-quick — March. 
 
 When the colonel shall wish to halt the column marching at double- 
 quick, and cause it to close to half-<listance at the same time, he will 
 notify the captain of the leading company of his intention, who, at the 
 command march, will halt his company and align it to the left. 
 
 If the column bo marching in quick time, and the colonel should not 
 give the command douhlc-quick, the captain of the loading company 
 will halt his company at the command march, and align it to the left. 
 In the case where the colonel adds the command donhte-tpiivk, the 
 leading comiiany will continue at quick, while all the others, at the 
 command march, take double-quick time. 
 
\ 
 
 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 197 
 
 To close the column on the eighth, or reai~most company. 
 
 310. The column being at a halt, if, instead of causing it to close to 
 half-distance on the first corapanj-, the colonel should wish to cause it 
 to close on the eighth, he will command : 
 
 1. On the eighth company, to half-distance close column. 2. Bat- 
 talion, about — Face. 3. Column, forward. 4. Guide right. 
 5. March (or double-quick — March). 
 
 At the second command all the companies except the eighth will face 
 about, and their guide will remain in the front rank, now the rear. At 
 the fourth command all the captains will place themselves two paces 
 outside of their companies on the side of the guide. 
 
 At the command march, the eighth company will stand fast and its 
 captain will align it to the left; the other companies will put them- 
 selves in march, and as each arrives at platoon distance from the one 
 established before it its captain will halt it and face it to the front. At 
 the moment that each company halts the left guide, remaining faced to 
 the rear, will place himself promptly on the direction of the guides 
 already established. Immediately after, the captain will align bis 
 company to the left and the filc-closers will close one pace on the rear 
 rank. 
 
 If this movement be executed in double-quick time each captain, in 
 turn, will halt, and command: 
 
 Such company, right about — Halt. 
 
 At this command the company designated will face to the right about 
 and halt. 
 
 All the companies being aligned, the colonel will cause the guides, 
 who stand faced to the rear, to face about. 
 
 The lieutenant-colonel placing himself behind the rearmost guide will 
 assure the position of the other guides in succession ; the major will 
 remain abreast with the rearmost company. 
 
 311. The column being in march when the colonel shall wish to close 
 it on the eighth company he will command: ^ 
 
 1. On the eighth company, to half-distance, close column. 2. Bat- 
 talion, right about. 3. March (or double-quick — March). 
 4. Guide right. 
 
 At the first command the captain of the eighth company will caution 
 his company that it will remain faced to the front; the captains of the 
 
198 MANUAL FOU VOLINTEKRS AND MILITIA. 
 
 otber companies will caution their companies that they will have to face 
 about. At the command march, the captain of the eighth company will 
 hail his company and align it to the left; the file-closers will close one 
 pace upon the rear rank. 
 
 The captains of the other companies at the same command will place 
 themselves on the flank of the column ; the subdivisions will face about, 
 and as each arrives at platoon distance from the company immediately 
 preceding it its chief will face it to the front and halt it. The instant 
 each company halts the guide on the directing flank, remaining faced 
 to the rear, will quickly place himself on the direction of the guides 
 already established. Afterward the captain will align the company 
 to the left and the file-closers will close one pace upon the rear rank. 
 
 The lieutenant-colonel will follow the movements abreast of the first 
 company. The major will place himself a few paces in rear of the 
 guide of the eighth company and will assure the position of the other 
 guides in succession. 
 
 312. A column by division at full distance will close to half-distance 
 by the same means and the same commands. 
 
 A column by company, or bj' division, being at full or half-distance, 
 the colonel will cause it to close in mass by the same means and com- 
 mands, substituting the indication column, clo»e in mass for that of to 
 half-distance, close column. 
 
 In a column, left in front, these various movements will be executed 
 on the same principles. 
 
 Being in column at half-distance., or closed in mass, to take 
 distances. 
 
 To take distances hij the head of the column. 
 
 313. The column being by company at half-distance and at a halt, 
 when the colonel shall wish to cause it to take full distances by the 
 head he will command : 
 
 By the head of column, take wheeling distance. 
 
 At this cj^mmand the captain of the leading company will put it in 
 march J to this end be will command: 
 
 1. Firstcompany, forward. 2. Guide left. 3. Maucii (or double- 
 quick — March). 
 
 When the second shall have nearly its wheeling distance its captain 
 will command: 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 199 
 
 1. Second company, forward. 2. Guide lefl. 3. March (^or 
 double-quick — Marc h) . 
 
 At the command march, which will be pronounced at the instant that 
 this company shall have its wheeling distance, it will step off smartly, 
 taking the step from the preceding company. Each of the other com- 
 panies will successively execute what has just been prescribed for the 
 second. 
 
 The colonel will see that each company puts itself in much at the 
 instant it has its distance. The lieutenant-colonel will hold himself at 
 the head of the column and direct the march of the leading guide. The 
 major will hold himself abreast with the rearmost guide. 
 
 If the column, instead of being at a halt be iu march, the colon^il 
 will give the same command,*, and add : 
 
 March (or double-quick — March). 
 
 If the column be marching in quick time, at the command march, the 
 captain of the leading company will cause double-quick time to be taken ; 
 which will also be taken by the other companie-) as they successively 
 attain their proper distance. 
 
 If the column be marching in donhle-qulck time th<i leadin;; com- 
 pany will continue to march at the same gait. The captains of the 
 other companies will cau9e quick time to be taken, and as each com- 
 pany gains its proper distance its captain will cause it to retake the 
 double-qnick »tep. 
 
 To take distances on the rear of the column. 
 
 314. If the colonel wish to take distances on the rearmost company 
 he will establish two markers on the direction he shall wish to give to 
 the line of battle, the first opposite to the rearmost company, the second 
 marker toward the head of the column, at company distance from the 
 first, and both facing to the rear ; at the same time the right general 
 guide, on an intimation from the lieutenant-colonel, will move rapidly 
 a little beyond the point to which the head of the column will extend 
 and place himself correctly on the prolongation of the two markers. 
 These dispositions being made the colonel will command : 
 
 1. On the eighth company, take wheeling distance. 2. Column, for- 
 ward. 3. Guide left. 4. March (or double-quick — March). 
 
 At the third command the captains will place themselves two paces 
 outside of the directing flank ; the captain of th9 eighth company will 
 caution it to stand fast. 
 
200 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 At the command march, repeated by all the captains except the cap- 
 tain of the eighth ecimpany. this latter company irill stand fast: its 
 chief will align it to the left on the first marker, who i« opposite to this 
 company, and )ilacc hini!<i*lf hef'irc its centre after comuiandini!: FitOMT. 
 At this command the marker will retire and the left guide will take his 
 place. 
 
 All the other companies will put themselves in march, the guide of 
 the leading one directing himself a little within the right general guide ; 
 when the seventh company has arrived tipposite the second marker its 
 captain will halt it anfl align it on this marker, in the manner pro- 
 scrihed for the eighth company. 
 
 When the captain of the sixth company shall see that there is 
 between his company and the seventh the necessary space for wheeling 
 into line he will halt his comjiany ; the guide, facing to the rear, will 
 place himself promptly on the direction, and the moment he shall be 
 assured in his position the captain will align the company by the loft, 
 and then place himself two paces before its centre; the other compa- 
 nies will in succession conform to what has been prescribed for the 
 sixth company. 
 
 The colonel will follow the movement, and see that each company 
 halts at the prescribed distance; he will promptl,v remedy any fault 
 that may be committed, and as soon as all the companies shall be 
 aligned he will cause the guides, who are faced to the rear, to face 
 about. 
 
 The lieutenant-colonel will assure the left guides on the direction in 
 succession, placing himself in their rear, as they arrive. The major 
 will hold himself at the bead of the column, and will direct the march 
 of the leading guides. 
 
 7'o take (lislarices on the head of the column. 
 
 315. The colonel wishing to take distances on the leading company 
 will establish two markers in the manner just described, one abreast 
 with this company and the other at company distance in rear of the 
 first, both facing to the front; the left general guide, on an intimation 
 from the lieutenant-colonel, will move rajiidly to the rear, and place 
 himself correctly on the prolongation of the two markers, a little 
 beyond the point to which the rear of the column will extend; those 
 dispositions being made the colonel will command : 
 
 1. On the Jirsl company, take wheeling distance. 2. Battalion, 
 about — Fack. 3. Column, forward. 4. Guide right. 5. Mauch. 
 (or double-quick — Makcii). 
 
SCHOOL OF THK BATTALION. 201 
 
 At the second command all the companies except the one designated 
 will face about, the guides remaining in the front rank now become 
 the rear. At the fourth command the captains will place themselves 
 outside of their guides. 
 
 At the command march, the captain of the designated company will 
 align it on the marker placed by its side. 
 
 The re mainiug companies will put themselves in march, the guide of 
 the rearmost one will direct himself a little within the left general 
 guide; when the second company shall have arrived opposite the 
 second marker its captain will face it about, halt it, and align it as 
 has just been prescribed for the first company. 
 
 The captains of the remaining companies will each in succession 
 conform himself to what has just been prescribed for the captain of the 
 second. 
 
 The colonel, lieutenant-colonel, and major will conform to what is 
 prescribed in No. 314. 
 
 To change direction in column closed in mass. 
 
 To change direction in marching. 
 
 .316. A column by division, closed in mass, being in march, will 
 change direction by the/coii* of subdivisions. 
 
 Whctfier the change be made to the reverse or to the pivot flank, it 
 will alwaj's be executed on the principle of wheeling in marching; to 
 this end the colonel will first cause the battalion to take the guide on 
 the flank opposite to the intended change of direction, if he be not 
 alread3' on that flank. 
 
 A column by division, closed in mass, right in front, having to 
 change direction to the right, the colonel after having caused a marker 
 to be placed at the point where the change ought to commence will 
 command: 
 
 1. Battalion, right wheel. 2. March. 
 
 (Fig. 69.) At the command march, the leading division will wheel as 
 if it were part of a column at half-distance. 
 
 The instant that this division commences the wheel all the others 
 will at once conform themselves to its movement; to this end the left 
 guide of each, advancing slightly the left shoulder and lengthening a 
 little the step, will incline to the left, and will observe at the same time 
 to gain so much ground to the front that there may constantly be an 
 interval of four paces between his division and that which precedes it; 
 
202 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 and as soon as he sliall cover the preceding guide ho will ceasa to in- 
 cline, and then march exactly in his trace. 
 
 Each division will conform itself to the movement of its j;:uide; the 
 men will feel lightly the elbow toward him and advance a little the left 
 shoulder the instant the movement commences; eat-h file in inclining 
 will gain so much the less ground lo the front as the file shall bo nearer 
 to the pivot, and the right guide will gain only so much as may bo 
 necessary to maintain between his own and the preceding division the 
 same distance which separates their marching flanks. 
 
 The colonel seeins^ tlie wheel nearly ended will command: 
 
 1. Forward. 2. March. 
 
 At the second command, which will bo given at the instant the lead- 
 ing division completes its wheel, it will resume the direct march; the 
 other divisions will conform theaiselves to this movement; and if any 
 guide find himself not covering his immediate leader ho will, by slight 
 degrees, bring himself on the trace of that guide by advancing the 
 right shoulder. 
 
 To change direction from a halt. 
 
 317. A column by company', or by division, closed in mass, being at 
 a halt, when the colonel shall wish to give it a new direction, and iu 
 which it is to remain, he will cause it to execute this movement by the 
 flanks of subdivisions in the following manner: 
 
 The battalion having the right iu front, when the colonel shall wish 
 to cause it to change direction by the right flank he will indicate to the 
 lieutenant-colonel the point of direction to the right; this offivisr will 
 immediately establish on the new direction two markers, distant from 
 each other a little less than the front of the first subdivision, the first 
 marker in front of the right file of this subdivision; which being exe- 
 cuted he will command : 
 
 1. Change directim hy the right flank. 2. Battalion, right — Face. 
 3. March (or double-quick — March). 
 
 (Fig. 70.) At the second ciniiuanil the column will face lo the riglit, 
 and each chief of subdivision will place himself by the side of his right 
 guide. 
 
 At the command march, all the subdivisions will step off together; 
 the right guide of the leading one will direct himself from the first 
 step, parallelly to the markers placed in advance oa the new direction; 
 the chief of the subdivision will not follow the movement, but sec it 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 203 
 
 file past, and as soon as the left guide shall have passed, he will com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. First company (or first division). 2. Halt. 3. Front. 
 4. Left — Dress. 
 
 At the fourth command the subdivision will place itself against the 
 two markers, and be promptly aligned by its chief. 
 
 The right guide of each of the following subdivisions will conform 
 himself to the direction of the right guide of the subdivision preceding 
 his own in the column, so as to enter on the new direction parallelly 
 to that subdivision and at the distance of four paces from its rear 
 rank. 
 
 Each chief of subdivision will halt in his own person on arriving 
 opposite to the left guides already placed on the new direction, see his 
 subdivision file past, and conform himself, in halting and aligning it, 
 to what is prescribed above. 
 
 If the change of direction be by the left flank the colonel will cause 
 markers to be established as before, the first in front of the left file of 
 the leading subdivision, and then give the same commands, substitut- 
 ing the indication left for right. 
 
 Being in column by company, closed in mass, to form divisions. 
 
 318. The column being closed in mass, right in front, and at a halt, 
 when the colonel shall wish to form divisions he will command : 
 
 1. Form divisions. 2. Lejl companies, left — Face. 3. March. 
 (or double-quick — March). 
 
 At the first command the captains of the left companies will caution 
 them to face to the left. At the second command the left companies 
 will face to the left, and their captains will place themselves by the 
 sides of their respective left guides. 
 
 The right companies, an<l their captains, will stand fast; but the 
 right and left guides of each of these companies will place themselves 
 respectively before the right and left files of the company, both guides 
 facing to the right, and each resting his right arm gently against the 
 breast of the front rank man of the file, in order to mark the direction. 
 
 At the command march, the left companies only will put themselves 
 in march, their captains standing fast; as each shall see that his com- 
 pany, filing past, has nearl}' cleared the columh he will command : 
 
 1. Such company. 2. Halt. 3. Front. 
 
204 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEKRS AND MILITIA. 
 
 The first coinmaml will be given when the company shall yet have 
 four pacts tn march ; tlie second the instant it shall have cleared its 
 right company ; and the third immediately after the second. 
 
 The company having faced to the front, the files, if there be intervals 
 between them, will promjiOy incline to the right; the cajjtain will place 
 himself on the left of the right company of the division, and align him- 
 self correctly on the front rank of that company. The left guide will 
 at the same time place himself before one of the throe left files of his 
 company, face to the right, and cover th« guides of the right company 
 correctly ; the moment his captain sees him established on the direction 
 be will command : 
 
 Right — DUESS. 
 
 At this the left company will dress forward on the alignment of the 
 right company; the front rank man, who may find himself opposite to 
 the left guide, will, without preceding his rank, rest his breast lightly 
 against the right arm of this guide ; the captain of the left company 
 will direct its alignment on this man, and the alignment being assured 
 he will command Frost, but not quit his position. 
 
 The colonel seeing the divisions formed will command : 
 
 Guides — Posts. 
 
 At this the guides who have marked the fronts of division will 
 return to their places in column, the left guide of each right company 
 passing through the interval in the centre of the division, the senior 
 captain of each division will take bis post two paces in front of the 
 division, and the junior Ciuitain will place himself between the two 
 companies. 
 
 .319. If the column bo in march, instead of at a halt, when the colonel 
 shall wish to form divisions he will command : 
 
 1. Form division.f. 2. Left companies, hy the left jiank. 
 3. Mauch (or double-quick — March). 
 
 At the first command the captains of the right companies will com- 
 mand mark time; the captains of the left companies will caution their 
 companies to face hi/ the left flank. At the third command the right 
 companies will mark time, the left companies will face to the left, the 
 captains of the left companies will each see his company file past him, 
 and when it has cleared the column will command : 
 
 Such company^ hy the right flank — March. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 205 
 
 As soon as the divisions are formed the colonel will command : 
 
 4. Foricard. 5. March. 
 
 At the fifth command the column will resume the gait at which it 
 was marching previous to the commencement of the movement. The 
 guides of each division will remain on the right and left of their 
 respective companies ; the left guide of the right company will pass 
 into the line of file-clo.sers before the two companies arc united ; the 
 right guide of the left company will .step into the rear rank. 
 
 Being in column at full or half-distance to form divisions. 
 
 320. If the column be at a halt, and instead of being closed in mass 
 is at full or half-distance, divisions will be formed in the same manner; 
 but the captains of the left com]ianies, if the movement be made in 
 quick time, after commanding Front, will each place himself before 
 the company and command : 
 
 1. Such company, forward. 2. Guide right. 3. March. 
 
 If the movement be made in double-quick time each will command 
 as soon as his company has closed the column : 
 
 1. Such company, by the right fank. 2. March. 
 
 If the left be in front the movement will be executed by inverse 
 means. 
 
 Countermarch of a column at full or half-distance. 
 
 321. In a column at full or half-distance the countermarch will be 
 executed by the means indicated, school of the company; to this end 
 the colonel will command : 
 
 1. Countermarch. 2. Battalion, right (or lefl) — Face. 3. By 
 file lefl ('or right). 4. March (or double-quick — MarchJ. 
 
 To countermarch a column closed in mass. 
 
 (Fig. 71.) If the column be closed in mass the countermarch will be 
 executed by the commands and means subjoined. 
 
 The column being supposed formed by division right in front, the 
 colonel will command : 
 
 1. Countermarch. 2. Battalion, right and left — Face. 3. By 
 file, left and right. 4. March (or double-quick — March). 
 
206 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 At the first commaiiil the chief? of the ofld nunibererl divisions will 
 caution them to face to the right and the chiefs of the others to face to 
 the left. 
 
 At the second command the odd divisions will face to the right and 
 the even to the left ; the right and left guides of all the divisions will 
 face about; the chiefs of odd divisions will ha.sten to their right and 
 cause two files to break to the rear, and each chief place himself on the 
 left of the leading front rank man of his division ; the chiefs of even 
 divisions will hasten to their left and cause two files to break to the 
 rear, and each chief place himself on the right of bis leading front 
 rank man. 
 
 At the command 7>torch, all the divisions, each conducted by its chief, 
 will step off smartly, the guides standing fast; each odd division will 
 wheel by file to the left around its right guide, each even division will 
 wheel by file to the right around its left guide, each division so direct- 
 ing its march as to arrive behind its opposite guide, and when its head 
 shall be up with this guide the chief will halt the division and cause it 
 to face to the front. 
 
 Each division on facing to the front will be aligned by its chief by 
 the right; to this end the-chiefs of the even divisions will move rapidly 
 to the right of their respective divisions. 
 
 The divisions being aligned, each chief will command FnoxT; at 
 this the guides will shift to their proper flanks. 
 
 In a column with the left in front the countermarch will be executed 
 by the same commands and means; but all the divisions will be aligned 
 by the left; to this end the chiefs of the odd divisions will hasten to 
 the left of their respective divisions as soon as the latter shall have 
 been faced to the front. 
 
 Different modes of passing from the order in column to the order 
 in battle. 
 
 Manner of determining the line of battle. 
 
 322. The line of battle may be marked or determined in three differ- 
 ent ways: 1st, by placing two markers eighty or one hundred paces 
 apart on the direction it is wished to give to the line; 2d, by placing 
 a marker at the point at which it may be intended to rest a flank, and 
 there posting a second point toward or beyond the opposite flank, 
 and then choosing a second marker, distant from each other a little less 
 than the leading subdivision ; 3d, by choosing at first the points of 
 direction for the flanks, and then determining by intermediate points 
 the straight lines between those selected points, both of which may 
 sometimes be beyond reach. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 207 
 
 Colvmn, at full distance, riglit hi front, to the left into line of 
 battle. 
 
 323. A column, right in front, being at a halt, when the colonel shall 
 wish to form it to the left into line he will assure the positions of the 
 guides liy means previously indicated and then command: 
 
 1. Left into line, ivhcel. 2. March (or douhle-qnick — Makch). 
 
 At the first coniiunnd the right guide of the leading company will 
 hasten to place himself en the direction of the left guides of the column, 
 face to them, and place himself so as to be opposite to one of the three 
 right files of his company, when they shall be in line ; he will be assured 
 in this position by the lieutenant-colonel. 
 
 At the command march, briskly repeated by the captains, the left 
 front rank man of each company will face to the left, and rest his breast 
 lightly against the right arm of his guide; the companies will wheel to 
 the left on the principle of wheeling from a hiilt, conforming themselves 
 to what is prescribed, school of the company ; each captain will turn to 
 his company to observe the execution of the movement, and when the 
 right of the company shall arrive at three paces from the line of battle 
 he will command : 
 
 1. Such company. 2. Halt. 
 
 The company being halted the captain will place himself on the line 
 by the side of the left front rank man of the company next on the right, 
 align himself correctly and command : 
 
 3. Right — Dress. 
 
 At this command the company will dress up between the captain and 
 the front rank man on its left, the captain directing the alignment on 
 that man; the front rank man on the right of the right company, who 
 finds himself opposite to its right guide, will lightly rest his breast 
 against the left arm of this guide. 
 
 Each captain having aligned his company will command Front, and 
 the colonel will add : 
 
 Guides — Posts. 
 
 At this command the guides will return to their places in line of 
 battle, each passing through the nearest captain's interval; to permit 
 him to pass the captain will momentarily step before the first file of his 
 
208 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 company and llic covering sergeant bcliind the same file. Tlii'g rule {» 
 grnrrnl for «// thr formatloim into line of hnttle. 
 
 When oonipiuiios form line of battle file-clo.«er.« will always place 
 tbcm.«elves exactly two paces from the rear rank, wliich will .>iufBcMently 
 assure their alignment- 
 
 The battalion being correctly aligned, the colonel, licuteiiant-colouel, 
 and major, as well as the adjutant and sergeant-major, will return to 
 their resi)cctive places in line of battle. Thin rule it ycnemi for all the 
 formationn into Hue of battle. 
 
 A column, with the left in front, will form itself ^< the right iulo Hue 
 of buttle according to the same i)rinciples. 
 
 At the command ijuidcm ptmiii, the captains will take their places in 
 line of battle as well as the guides. This rule i'« geuernl for all forma- 
 tions into Hue of buttle in tchifh the compauici are aligwd by the left. 
 
 321. A column by division may form itself into line of battle by the 
 same commands and means, observing what follows: if the right be in 
 front, at the command hult, given by the chiefs of divisions, the left 
 guide of each right company will place himself on the alignment oppo- 
 site to one of the three files on the left of his company ; the left guide 
 of the first company will be assured on the direction by the lieutenant- 
 colonel ; the left guides of the other right companies will align them- 
 selves correctly on the division guides; to this end the division guides 
 (already' on the line) will invert, and hold their pieces up perpendicu- 
 larly before the centre of their bodies, at the command left into line, 
 wheel. If the column by division be with the left in front, the right 
 guides of the left companies will conform to what has just been pre- 
 scribed for the left guides of the right companies. 
 
 325. A column in march will be formed into line, without halting, by 
 the same commands and means. At the command march, the guides 
 will halt in their places, and the lieutenant-colonel will promptly rectify 
 their positions. 
 
 If in forming the column into line the colonel should wish to move 
 forward without halting he will command: 
 
 1. By companies, lefl wheel. 2. March (or double-quick — 
 March). 
 
 At the command march, repeated by the captains, each company will 
 wheel to the left on a fi.\ed pivot, as prescribed in the school of the 
 company, the left guides will step back into the rank of file-closers 
 before the wheel is completed, and when the right of the companies 
 shall arrive near the line the colonel will command : 
 
 3. Forward. 4. Mauch. 5. Guide centre. 
 
 i 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 209 
 
 At the fourth command, given at the instant the wheel is completed, 
 the companies will march directly to the front. At the fifth command 
 the color and the general guides will move rapidly six paces to the 
 front. The colonel will assume the direction of the color; the captains 
 of companies and the men will at once conform to the principles of the 
 march in lino of battle, to be indicated, No. 343. 
 
 By inversion to the right (or left) into line of battle. 
 
 326. When a column, right in front, shall be under the necessity of 
 forming itself into line faced to the reverse flank and the colonel shall 
 wish to execute this formation by the shortest movement he will com- 
 mand: 
 
 1. By inversion^ right into line, wheel. 2. Battalion, guide right. 
 
 At the first command the lieutenant-colonel will place himself in 
 front and facing to the right guide of the leading subdivision ; at the 
 second command he will rectify as promptly as possible the direction 
 of the right guides of the column ; the captain of the odd company, if 
 there be one, and the column bo by division, will promptly bring the 
 right of bis company on the direction and at company distance from 
 the division next in front ; the left guide of the leading subdivision will 
 place himself on the direction of the right guides, and will be assured 
 in his position by the lieutenant-colonel; which being executed the 
 colonel will command : 
 
 3. March (or double-quick — March). 
 
 At this the right front rank man of each subdivision will face to the 
 right, rest his breast lightly again.«t the left arm of his guide, and the 
 battalion will form itself to the right into line of battle, according to 
 the principles prescribed. 
 
 Successive formations. 
 
 327. Under the denomination of successive formations are included 
 all those formations where the several subdivisions of a column arrive 
 one after another on the line of battle ; such are formations on the 
 right, or left, forward, and faced to the rear into line of battle, as well 
 as deployments of columns in mass. 
 
 The successive formations which may be ordered when the column is 
 marching, and is to continue marcliing, will be executed by a combina- 
 tion of the two gaits, quick and double-quick time. 
 
 In all the successive formations every captain will always observe 
 18 
 
210 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 before dressing his company to place liimstlf correctly on tbe line 
 either on the left or ri>rht of the company which j>rece<les his in Hue, 
 and see that bis guide has been assured on tbe direction by tbe lieuten- 
 ant-colonel. 
 
 Column at full distance, on (he right (or on the left) into line of 
 battle. 
 
 328. A column by company at full distance and right in front having 
 to form itself on the right into line of battle, the colonel will indicate 
 to the lieutenant-colonel in advance the point of appui, or rest, for the 
 right, as well as the point of direction to the left ; the lieutenant-colonel 
 will hasten with two markers, and establish them in the following mftn- 
 ner on the direction indicated : 
 
 The first marker will be placed at tbe point of appui for the right 
 front rank man of the leading company ; the second will indicate the 
 point where one of the three left files of tbe same company will rest 
 when in line ; they will bo placed so as to present the right shoulder to 
 the battalion when formed. 
 
 These dispositions being made the colonel will command: 
 
 1. On the right, into line. 2. Battalion, guide right. 
 
 (Fig. 72.) At tbe second command the right will become the direct- 
 ing flank, and the touch of the elbow will be to that side ; tbe right guide 
 of the leading conii)any will march straight forward until up with the 
 turning point, and each following guide will march in the trace of the 
 one immediately preceding. 
 
 The leading company being nearly up with the first marker its cap- 
 tain will command : 
 
 1. Eight turn, 
 and when the company is precisely up with this marker he will add : 
 
 2. March, 
 
 At the command march, the company will turn to the right; the right 
 guide will so direct himself as to bring the man ue.\t to him opposite to 
 the right marker, and when at three paces from him the captain will 
 command : 
 
 1. First company. 2. Halt, 
 
 At the second eoniiniind the conijiaiiy will halt; the tiles riot yet in 
 line will form promptly ; the left guide will retire as a file-closer; and 
 the captain will then command : 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 211 
 
 3. Right — Dress. 
 
 At this command the company will align itself; the two men who 
 find themselves opposite to the two markers will each lightly rest his 
 breast against the right arm of his marker ; the captain, passing to the 
 right of the front rank, will direct the alignment on these two men. 
 These rules are general for all successi'cc formations. 
 
 The second company will continue to march straight forward; when 
 arrived opposite to the left flank of the preceding company it will turn 
 to the right, and be formed on the line of battle as has just been pre- 
 scribed ; the right guide will direct himself lo as to come upon that 
 line by the side of the man on the left of the first company. 
 
 At the distance of three paces from the line of battle the company 
 will be halted by its captain, who will place himself briskly by the side 
 of the man on the left of the preceding company and align himself 
 correctly on its front rank. 
 
 The left guide will at the same time place himself before one of the 
 three left iles of his company, and facing to the right, he will place 
 himself accurately on the direction of the two markers of the preced- 
 ing company. 
 
 The captain will then command : 
 
 Right — Dress. 
 
 At this command the second company will dress forward on the line ; 
 the captain will direct its alignment on the front rank man who has 
 rested his breast against the left guide of the company. 
 
 The following companies will thus come successively to form them- 
 selves on the lino of battle, each conforming itself to what has just been 
 prescribed for the one next to the right; and when they shall all be 
 established the colonel will command : 
 
 Guides — Post. 
 
 At this command the guides will take their places in line of battle; 
 and the markers placed before the right company will retire. 
 
 If the column be marching in quick time and the colonel should 
 wish to cause the movement to be executed in double-quick time he will 
 add the command : 
 
 Double-quick — March. 
 
 At the command march, all the companies will take the double-quick 
 •tep, and the movement will be executed as prescribed above. 
 
 The colonel will follow up the formation, passing along the front and 
 
212 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 being always opposite the company about to turn; it ia thus that" he 
 will be the better able to see and correct the error that would re- 
 sult from a command given too soon or too late to the preceding com- 
 paiy. 
 
 The lieutenant-colonel will with the greatest care assure the direc- 
 tion of the guides ; to this end the iustant that the markers arc estab- 
 lished for the leading company he will move a little beyond the point 
 at which the left of the next company will rest, establish himself cor- 
 rectly on the prolongation of the two markers, and assure the guide of 
 the second companj' on this direction ; this guide being assured the 
 lieutenant colonel will place himself further to the rear, in order to 
 assure in like manner the guide of the third company, and so on suc- 
 cessively, to the left of the battalion. In assuring the guides in their 
 positions on the line of battle he will take care to let them first place 
 themselves, and confine himself to rectifying their positions if they do 
 not cover accurately, and at the proper distance, the preceding guides 
 or markers. Thin rule in general /or (til siiccennire /onnations. 
 
 When the direction of the line of battle forms a sensible angle with 
 that of the march of the column the colonel before beginning the 
 movement, will give the head of the column a new direction parallel to 
 that line. 
 
 A column, left in front, will form itself on the left into Hue of battle 
 according to the same principles. 
 
 Each captain will cause his companj' to support arms the instant 
 that the captain who folfows him shall have commanded front. This 
 rule i» general /or all nuccessive /orniationg. 
 
 When in the execution of this movement the colonel shall wish 
 to commence firing, he will give the order to that effect to the captain 
 whose company is first on the line ; this captain will immediately 
 place himself behind the centre of his company, and as soon as the 
 next captain shall have commanded /rout, he will commence the fire 
 by file. At the command Jire by Jile, the marker at the outer flank 
 of this company will retire, and the other will place himself against 
 the nearest man of the next company. The captain of the latter 
 will commence tiring as soon as the captain of the third company 
 in line shall have commanded /ront ; the marker before the right or 
 left file retiring, and the guide before the opposite flank taking post 
 before the nearest file of the third company, in Hue; and so ou to the 
 last company. 
 
 Column at full distance, forward into line of battle. 
 
 .329. A column being by company, at full distance, right in front, 
 and at a halt, when the colonel shall wish to form it forward into lino 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 213 
 
 he will conform to what is prescribed in the first part of the last num- 
 ber and then command : 
 
 1. Forward, into line. 2. By company, left half-wheel. 3. March 
 (or double-quick — March). 
 
 (Fig. 73.) At the first command the captain of the leading company 
 will add guide right, put the company in march, halt it three paces 
 from the markers, and align it against the latter by the right. 
 
 At the command march, all the other companies will wheel to the left 
 on fixed pivots ; and at the instant the colonel shall judge, according 
 to the direction of the line of battle, that the companies have sufficiently 
 wheeled he will command: 
 
 4. Forward. 5. March. 6. Guide right. 
 
 At the fifth command the companies ceasing to wheel will march 
 straight forward ; and at the sixth the men will touch elbows toward 
 the right. The right guide of the second company, who is nearest to 
 the line of battle will march straight forward; each succeeding right 
 guide will follow the file immediatelj' before him at the cessation of the 
 wheel. ' 
 
 The second company having arrived opposite to the left file of the 
 first its captain will cause it to turn to the right, in order to approach 
 the line of battle ; and when its right guide shall be at three paces 
 from that line the captain will command : 
 
 1. Second company. 2. Halt. 
 
 At the second command the company will halt; the files not yet in 
 line with the guide will come into it promptly, the left guide will place 
 himself on the line of battle, so as to be opposite to one of the three 
 files on the left of the company ; and as soon as he is assured on the 
 direction by the lieutenant-colonel, the captain having placed himself 
 accurately on the line of battle will command : 
 
 3. Right — Dress. 
 
 At the instant that the guide of the second company begins to turn 
 to the right, the guide of the third, ceasing to follow the file imme- 
 diately before him, will march straight forward ; and when he shall 
 arrive opposite to the left of the second, his captain will cause the 
 company to turn to the right, iiv order to approach the line of battle, 
 halt it at three paces from that line, and align it by the right, as pre- 
 scribed for the second company. 
 
 Each following company will execute what has just been prescribed 
 
214 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTKKRS AND MILITIA. 
 
 for the third, as the procctling company shall turn to the right iu order 
 to approai'h the Hoc of battle. 
 
 The formation ended the colonel will command: 
 
 Guides — Posts. 
 
 The colonel and lieutenant-colonel will observe, in this formation, 
 what is prescribed for them in tlie movement on the ri'jlit into line. 
 
 A column, left iu front, will form itself forward into line of battle 
 according to the same principle.^ and by inverse means. 
 
 330. When a column by company at full distance, right iu frout, and 
 in march, has arrived at company distance from the two markers 
 established on the line the colonel will command : 
 
 1. Forward, into line. 2. By company, left half-wheel. 3. March 
 (or double-quick — March). 
 
 At the first ccfinmand the captain of the first company will com- 
 mand guide right, and caution it to march directly to the front; the 
 captains of the other companies will caution them to wheel to the 
 left. ^ 
 
 At the command march, bri.^^kly repeated bj' the captains, the move- 
 ment will be executed as iu the last case. 
 
 If the colonel should wish to form the column forward into line, and 
 to continue to march in this order, he will not cause markers to be 
 established; the movements will be executed in double-quick time, by 
 the same commauds and means, observing what follows : 
 
 At the first command the captain of the first company will add quick 
 time after the command guide right. At the second command the first 
 company will continue to march in quick time, and will take the touch 
 of elbow to the right; its chief will immediately place himself on its 
 right, and to assure the march will take points of direction to the front. 
 The captain of the second company will cause his company to take the 
 same gait as soon as it shall arrive on a line with the first, and will also 
 move to the right of his company ; the captains of the third and fourth 
 companies will execute in succession what has just been i)rescribed for 
 the second. The companies will preserve the touch of elbows to the 
 right until the command guide centre. 
 
 When the color company shall have entered the line the colonel 
 will command guide centre. At this command the coloi^bcarer and 
 right general guide will move rapidlj'.si.K paces in advance of the line. 
 The colonel will assure the direction of the color-bearer, the lieutenant- 
 colonel and right companies will immediately conform to the princi- 
 ples of the march in line of battle. The left companies and the left 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 215 
 
 general guide, as they arrive in line, will also conform to the same 
 principles. 
 
 1. Column, in full distance, faced to the rear, into line of battle. 
 
 3.31. A column being by company, at full distance, right in front, 
 and at a halt, when the colonel shall wish to form it into line faced to 
 the rear he and the lieutenant-colonel will conform themselves to what 
 is prescribed in the first part of No. 328, and the colonel will then com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. Into line, faced to the rear. 2. Battalion, right — Face. 3. 
 March for double-quick — MarchJ. 
 
 (Fig. 74.) At the first command the cnptain of the leading company 
 will cause it to face to the right and put it in march, causing it to 
 wheel by file to the left, and direct its march toward the lino of battle, 
 which it will pass in rear of the left marker; the first file having passed 
 three paces beyond the line the company will wheel again by file to 
 the left, in order to place itself in rear of the two markers; being in 
 this position its captain will halt it, face it to the front, and align it by 
 the right against the markers. 
 
 At the second command all the other companies will face to the 
 right, each captain placing himself by the side of his right guide. 
 
 At the command ninrch, the companies will put themselves in move- 
 ment; the left guide of the second, who is nearest to the line of battle, 
 will hasten in advance to mark that line; he will place himself on it 
 as prescribed above for successive formations, and thus indicate to his 
 captain the point at which he ought to pass the line of battle, by three 
 paces, in order to wheel by file to the left, and then to direct his com- 
 pany parallelly to that line. 
 
 As soon as the first file of this company shall have arrived near the 
 left file of the preceding one already on the line of battle its captain 
 will command : 
 
 1. Second company. 2. Halt. 3. Front. 4. Right — Dress. 
 
 The first command will be given when the company shall yet have 
 four paces to take to reach the halting point. 
 
 At the second command the company will halt. 
 
 At the third the company will face to the front, and if there be open- 
 ings between the files the latter will promptly close to the right; the 
 captain will immediately place himself by the side of the man on the 
 left of the preceding companj' and align himself on its front rank. 
 
21G MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AM) MILITIA. 
 
 The fourth cuiniUHml will be executed as presoriliod, No. 328. 
 
 The following eonipiinies will be conduoteil and established on the 
 line of battle a.'* ju.<t prescribed for Iho second, each regulating itself 
 by the one that precedes it; the left guides will detach themselves in 
 time to precede their respective companies on the lino by twelve or 
 fifteen paces, aud each place himself so as to be opposite to one of the 
 three left files of his company when in line. If the movement be 
 executed in double-quick time, the moment it is commenced all the left 
 guides will detach themselves at the same time from the column and 
 will move at a run, to establish themselves on the line of battle. 
 
 The formation ended the colonel will coinmand : 
 
 Guides — Posts. 
 
 The colonel and lieutenant-colonel, in this foruiution, will each 
 observe what is prescribed for him in that of on the ri<jht, intu line of 
 battle. 
 
 A column, left in front, will form itself faced to the rear into line of 
 battle according to the same principles and by inverse means. 
 
 3.32. If the column bo in march and nearly at company distance from 
 the two markers cstslblished on the line the colonel will command : 
 
 1. I>}('i line, faced to (he rear. 2. Battalion, hy the ricjhl Jlank. 
 3. March (or double-quick — March). 
 
 At the first command the captains will caution their companies to 
 face by the right flank. 
 
 At the command march, briskly repeated by the captains of companies, 
 all the companies will face to the right, and the movement will be com- 
 pleted as in the last case. 
 
 Formation in line of battle hy two movements. 
 
 333. If a column bj' company, right in front, and at a halt, find itself 
 in part on the line of battle, and the colonel should think proper to 
 form line of battle before all the companies enter the now direction, 
 the formation will be executed as follows : 
 
 It will bo supposed that the column has arrived behind the line of 
 battle, and that five companies have entered the new direction; the 
 colonel having assured the guides of the first five companies on the 
 direction will command : 
 
 1. Left into line, wheel. 2. Three rear companies, forward into 
 
 line. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 217 
 
 At the second command the chief of each of the rear companies will 
 command : By compani/, left hn/f-uhecl, and the colonel will add : 
 
 3. March (or double-quick — March). 
 
 At this command, repeated by the captains, the first five companies 
 will wheel to the Uft into line, and the last three will execute forirard 
 into line, by the means prescribed for this formation : each captain of 
 the three rear companies will, when his company shall have sufficiently 
 wheeled, command : 
 
 1. Forward. 2. March. 3. Guide right. 
 
 If the column be in march the colonel will command: 
 
 1. To the left, and forward into line. 2. March (or double- 
 quick — March). 
 
 If the colonel should wish, in forming the battalion into line, to 
 march immediately forward he will command : 
 
 1. By company, to the lejl, and forward into line. 2. March. 
 
 And when the right of the companies which wheel shall arrive on 
 the line he will command : 
 
 3. Forward. 4. March. 5. Guide centre. 
 
 If the battalion be marching in double-quick time the colouel will 
 cause quick time to be taken before commencing the movement. 
 
 334. If instead of arriving behind, the column should arrive before 
 the line of battle, so that a portion is on the line and the remaining 
 portion still in front of it, the colonel will command : 
 
 1. Left into line, toheel. 2. Three rear companies into line, faced 
 to the rear. 
 
 At the second command the captaiu of each of the three rear com- 
 panies will command : 
 
 1. Such company. 2. Right — Face. 
 
 The colonel will then add: 
 
 3. March (or double-quick — March). 
 
 At this command, repeated by the captains, the first five companies 
 will form to the left into line, and the three last into line, faced to the 
 rear. 
 
 19 
 
21S MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEKRR AN1> MILITIA. 
 
 If the column be in march tho colonel will command: 
 
 1. To the le/i, and into line, faced to the rear. 2. March (or 
 double-quick — Ma rch). 
 
 Different modes of passing from cohtrnji at half-ili stance into line 
 of battle. 
 
 Column at half-distance, to the left for right) into line of battle. 
 
 335. A column at half-distance having to form to the left (or right) 
 into line, the colonel will cause it to take distance by the means pre- 
 scribed, No. 313 ; which being executed lie will form the column into 
 line to the left or right, No. 323. 
 
 If a column by company, at half-distance, be in march and it is 
 necessary to form rapidly into line the colonel will command : 
 
 1. By the rear of column, left (or right) into line, toheel. 
 2. March (or double-quick — Makch). 
 
 At the first command the right general guide will move rapidly to 
 the front, and place himself a little beyond the point where the head 
 of the column will rest and on the prolongation of the guides. The 
 captain of the eighth company will command: Left into Hue, wheel ; the 
 other captains will caution their companies to continue to march to the 
 front. At the command march, repeated by the captain of tho 
 eighth company, the guide of this company will halt and the com- 
 pany will wheel to the left, conforming to the principles laid down for 
 wheeling from a halt; when its right shall arrive near the line the 
 captain will halt the company and align it to the left. The other cap- 
 tains will place themselves briskly on the flank of the column ; when 
 the captain of the seventh sees that there is sufficient distance between 
 his company and the eighth to form the latter into line he will 
 command: Left into line, wheel — March; the left guide will halt, and 
 facing to the roar, will place himself on the line; the company will 
 wheel to the left; the man on the left of the front rank will face to the 
 left and place his breast against the arm of the guide; the captaiu 
 will halt the company when its right shall arrive near the line and 
 will align it to tho left. Tho other companies will conform in suc- 
 cession to what has been prescribed for the seventh. Each captain 
 will direct the alignment of his company on the left man in the front 
 rank of the company next on his right. 
 
 Tho lieutenant-colonel will sue that iho leading guide marches accu- 
 rately on the prolongation of the line of battle and directs himself 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 219 
 
 on the right general guide. The major, placed in rear of the left guide 
 of the eighth company, will, as soon as the seventh company is estab- 
 lished on the direction, hasten in rear of the guides of the other com- 
 panies so as to assure each of them on the line in succession. 
 
 Column, at half-distance , on the right (or leJT) into line of battle. 
 
 336. A column at half-distance will form itself on the right (or Itfi) 
 into line, as prescribed for a column at full distance. 
 
 Column at half-distance, forward, into line of battle. 
 
 337. If it be wished to form a column at half-distance forward into 
 line of battle the colonel will first cause it to close in m.ass and then 
 deplqy it on the leading company. 
 
 Column at half-distance, into line, faced to the rear. 
 
 338. A column at half-distance will be formed into line of battle, 
 faced to the rear, as prescribed for a column at full distance. 
 
 Deployment of columns closed in maxs. 
 
 339. When a column in mass, V>y division, arrives behind the line on 
 which it is intended to deploy it, the colonel will indicate in advance 
 to the lieutenant-colonel the direction of the line of battle, as well as 
 the point on which he may wish to direct the column. The lieutenant- 
 colonel will immediately detach himself with two markers and estab- 
 lish them on tliat line, the first at the point indicated, the second a 
 little less than the front of a division from the first. 
 
 Deployments will always be made upon lines parallel and lines per- 
 pendicular to the line of battle; consequently, if the head of the 
 column be near the line of battle the colonel will commence by estab- 
 lishing the direction of the column perpendicularly to that line, if it 
 be not already so. If the column be in march he will so direct it that 
 it may arrive exactly behind the markers, perpendicularly to the line 
 of battle, and halt it at three paces from that line. 
 
 The column, right in front, being halted, it is supposed that the 
 colonel wishes to deploy it on the first division ; he will order the left 
 general guide to go to a point on the line of battle a little beyond that 
 at whicli the left of the battalion will rest when deployed, and place 
 himself correctly on the prolongation of the markers established before 
 the first division. 
 
220 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 These dispositious being made the colonel will command : 
 1. On the first division, deploy column. 2. Battalion, left — Face. 
 
 (Fig. 75.) At the first command the chief of the first division will 
 caution it to stand fast; the chiefs of the three other divisions will 
 remind them that they will have to face to the left. 
 
 At the second command the three last divisions will face to the left ; 
 the chief of each division will place himself by the side of its left 
 guide, and the junior captain by the side of the covering sergeant of 
 the left company, who will have stepped into the front rank. 
 
 At the same command the lieutenant-colonel will place a third 
 marker on the alignment of the two first, opposite to one of the three 
 left files of the right company, first division, and then place himself on 
 the line of battle, a few' paces beyond the point at which the left of the 
 second division will rest. 
 
 The colonel will then command: 
 
 3. March (or double-quick — March). 
 
 At this command the chief of the first division will go to its right 
 and command : 
 
 Right — DrksS. 
 
 At this the division will dress up against the markers; the chief of 
 the division and its junior captain will each align the company on his 
 left and then cou^mand : 
 
 Front. 
 
 The three divisions, faced to the left, will put themselves in march ; 
 the left guide of the second will direct himself parallclly to the lino of 
 battle; the left guides of the third and fourth divisions will march 
 abreast with the guide of the second, the guides of the third and 
 fourth each preserving the prescribed distance between himself and the 
 guide of the division which preceded his own in the column. 
 
 The chief of the second division will not follow its movement; ho 
 will see it file by him, and when its right guide shall be abreast with 
 him ho will command : 
 
 1. Second division. 2. Halt. 3. Front. 
 
 The first command will bo given when the division shall yet have 
 seven or eight paces to march; the second when the right guide shall 
 be abreast with the chief of tlie division; and the third iuimediately 
 after the second. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 221 
 
 At the second command the division will halt; at the third it will 
 face to the front, and if there be openings between the files the chief of 
 the division will cause them to be promptly closed to the right ; the left 
 guides of both companies will step upon the line of battle, face to the 
 right, and place themselves on the direction of the markers established 
 before the first division, each guide opposite to one of the three left 
 files of his company. 
 
 The division having faced to the front, its chief will place himself 
 accurately on the line of battle, on the left of the first division ; and 
 when he shall see the guides assured on the direction he will com- 
 mand : 
 
 RigTit — Dress. 
 
 At this the division will be aligned by the right in the manner indi- 
 cated for the first. 
 
 The third and fourth divisions will continue to march ; at the com- 
 mand halt, given to the second, the chief of the third will halt in his 
 own person, place himself exactly opposite to the guide of the second, 
 after this division shall have faced to the front .and closed its files ; he 
 will see his division file past, and when his right guide shall be abreast 
 with him he will command: 
 
 1. Third division. 2. Halt. 3. Front. 
 
 As soon as the division faces to the front its chief will place himself 
 two paces before its centre ami command : 
 
 1. Third division, forward. 2. Guide right. 3. March. 
 
 At the third cymniaiul the division will march toward the line of 
 battle ; the right guide will so direct himself as to arrive by the side of 
 the man on the left of the second division, and when the division is at 
 three paces from the line of battle itsxihief will halt it and align it by 
 the right. 
 
 The chief of the fourth division will conform himself (and the chief 
 of the fifth, if there be .a fifth) to what has just been prescribed for the 
 third. 
 
 The deployment ended the colonel will command: 
 
 Guides — Posts. 
 
 At this command the guides will resume their places in line of battle 
 and the markers will retire. 
 
 .■540. If the column be in march and the colonel shall wish to deploy 
 it on the first division without halting the column he will make the 
 
\LZZ MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 necessary dispositions, and wbcn the first division shall have arrived at 
 three paces from the line he will command : 
 
 1. On the ^first divi'^ioti, deploy column. 2. Battalion, by the left 
 Jlank. 3. March (or double-quick — March). 
 
 At the first command the chief of the first division will caution it to 
 halt, and will command yir«f division; the other chiefs will caution 
 their divisions to face by the left flank. 
 
 At the command march, briskly repeated by the chiefs of the rear 
 divisions, the chief of tlie first division will command Halt, and will 
 align his division by the right against the markers ; the other divisions 
 will face to the left, their chiefs hastening to the left of their divisions. 
 The second, third, and fourth divisions will execute what is prescribed, 
 No. 338; but the chief of each division will halt in his own person at 
 the command march, given by the chief of the division which i)recedes 
 him, and when the right of his division arrives abreast of him he will 
 command : 
 
 Such division, by the right Jlank — March. 
 
 If the colonel should wish to deploy the column without halting it, 
 and to continue the march, the markers will not be posted : the move- 
 ment will be executed by the same commandi and means as the fore- 
 going, but with the following modifications : 
 
 At the first command the chief of the first division will command: 
 1. Ouide ritjht. 2. Qiiiclc time. At the command double-quick — 
 March, given by the colonel, the first division will take quick time, 
 and touch elbows to the right ; the captaitis will place themselves on 
 the right of their respective companies ; the captain on the right of 
 the battalion will take points on the ground to assure the direction of 
 the march. The chief of the second division will allow his division to 
 file past him, and when he sees its right abreast of him he will com- 
 mand: 1. Second dirinldii, lii/ the rvjht Jtnnk. 2. MAllcn. 3. (iuideriijht ; 
 and when this division shall arrive on the alignment of the first he will 
 cause it to march in quick time. The third and fourth divisions will 
 deploy according to the same principles as the second. 
 
 The colonel, lieutenant-colonel, major, and color-bearer will conform 
 to what is prescribed. No. 330. 
 
 341. The column being at a halt, if instead of deploying -it on the 
 first the colonel shall wish to deploy it on the rearmost division he 
 will cause the dispi)sitions to be made indicated. No. 338; but it will be 
 the right general guide whom he will send to place himself be3'ond the 
 point at which the right of the battalion will rest when deployed. 
 
 The colonel will then command : 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 223 
 
 1. On the fourth (or such') division, deploy column. 2. Battalion, 
 right — Face. 
 
 (Fig. 76.) At the first command the chief of the fourth division will 
 caution it to stand fast; the chiefs of the other divisions will caution 
 them that thej' will have to face to the right. 
 
 At the second command the first three divisions will face to the 
 right; and the chief of each will place himself by the side of its right 
 guide. 
 
 At the same command the lieutenant-colonel will place a third 
 marker between the first tw), so that this marker may be opposite to 
 one of the three right files of the left company of the division: the 
 lieutenant-colonel will then place himself on the line of battle, a few 
 paces beyond the point at which the right of the third division will 
 rest when deployed. 
 
 The colonel will then command: 
 
 3. March (or double-quick — March). 
 
 At this command the three right divisions will put themselves in 
 march, the guide of the first so directing himself as to pass three paces 
 within the line marked by the right general guide. The chief of the 
 third division will not follow its movement; he will see it file past, halt 
 it when its left guide shall be abreast with him, and cause it to face to 
 the front; and if there be openings between the file? he will cause 
 them to be promptly closed to the left. 
 
 The chief of the fourth division when he sees it nearly unmasked by 
 the three others will command: 
 
 1. Fourth division, forward. 2. Guide left. 3. March. 
 
 At the command march, which will be given the instant the fourth is 
 unmasked, this division will approach the line of battle, and when at 
 three paces from the markers on that line its chief will halt it and 
 command: 
 
 Left — Dress. 
 
 At this command the division will dress forward against the mark- 
 ers; the chief of the division and the junior captain will each align the 
 company on his right and then command: 
 
 Front. 
 
 The instant that the third division is unmasked its chief will cause 
 
224 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 it to approach the line of battle, and halt it in the manner ju.«t pre- 
 scribed for the fourth. 
 
 The incinirl tlie division halls, if." rijrht pviide and the covcrinj: .«er- 
 geaut of its left c< inpauy will elep on the line of battle, placinfr them- 
 selves on the prolon^'ulion of the markers etitablishcd in front of the 
 fourth divi^iion; as ."oon as they shall be assured in their positions the 
 divi.sions will be alifined iis has just been prescribed for the fourth. 
 
 The second and first divi.«ions, which will have continued to march, 
 will, in succession, be halted and aligned by the left in the same man- 
 ner as the third; the chiefs of these divisions will conform themselves 
 to what is prescribed. No. .339. The second being near the lino of 
 battle the command will not be given for it to move on this line, but it 
 will be dressed up to it. 
 
 The deployment ended the colonel will command: 
 
 Guides — Posts. 
 
 342. To deploy the column on an interior division the colonel will 
 cause the line to be traced by the means above indicated, and the 
 general guides will move briskly on the line. This being executed the 
 colonel will command: 
 
 1. On such division, dephy cohtmn. 2. Battalion, outward — 
 Face. 3. March (or double-quick — March). 
 
 (Fig. 77.) Whether the coluinn be with the right or left in front, the 
 divisions which, in the order in battle, belong to the right of the 
 directing one will face to the right: the others, except the directing 
 division, will face lo the left. 
 
 The directing division, the instant it finds itself unmasked, will ap- 
 proach the line of battle, taking the guide left or right, according as 
 the right or left of the column may bo in front. The chief of this 
 division will align it by the directii;g flank, and then step back iuto 
 the rear in order momentarily to give place to the chief of the next 
 for aligning the next division. 
 
 To advance in line of battle. 
 
 .34.?. The battalion being correctly aligned, and supposed to be the 
 directing one, when the colonel shall wish to march in line of battle 
 he will give the lieutenant-colonel an intimation of his purpose, place 
 himself about forty paces in rear of the color-file, and face to the front. 
 
 The lieutenant-colonel will place himself a like distance in front of 
 the same file and face to the cfdunel, who will establish him as cor- 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 225 
 
 reetly as possible by signal of tbe sword, perpendicularly to tbe line of 
 battle opposite to tbe color-bearer. The colonel will next, above the 
 beads of the lieutenant-cidonel and color-bearer, take a point of direc- 
 tion in the field beyond, if a distinct one present itself, exactly in the 
 prolongation of those first two points. 
 
 The colonel will then move twenty ])aces further to the rear, and 
 establish two markers on the f)rolongation of the straight line passing 
 through the color-bearer and tbe lieutenant-colonel; these markers will 
 face to the rear, the first placed about twenty-five paces behind the 
 rear rank of the battalion and the second at the same distance from the 
 first. 
 
 The color-bearer will be instructed to take, the moment the lieuten- 
 ant-colonel shall be established on the perpendicular, two points on the 
 ground in the straight line which drawn from himself would pass be- 
 tween the heels of that officer ; the first of those points will be taken at 
 fifteen or twenty paces from the color-bearer. 
 
 These dispositions being made the colonel will command: 
 
 1. Battalion, forward. 
 
 (Fig. 7S.) At this the front rank of the color-guard will advance six 
 paces to the front; the corporals in the rear rank will place themselves 
 in the front rank of the battalion, and these will be replace<l by those in 
 the rank of file-closers; at the same time the two general guides will 
 move in advance, abreast with the color-bearer, the one on the right, 
 opposite to the captain of the right company, the other opposite to the 
 sergeant who closes the left of the battalion. 
 
 The c.iptains of the left wing will shift, passing before the front rank, 
 to the left of their respective companies ; the sergeant on the left of the 
 battalion will step back into the rear rank. The covering sergeant of 
 the company next on the left of the color-company will step into the 
 front rank. 
 
 The lieutenant-colonel, having assured the color-bearer on the line 
 between himself and the corporal of the color-file, now in the front 
 rank, will go to the position which will be hereinafter indicated. 
 
 The major will place himself six or eight paces on either flank of the 
 color-rank. 
 
 The colonel will then command: 
 
 2. March (or douhle-quick — March). 
 
 At this command the battalion will step off with life; the eolor- 
 bcarer, charged with the step and direction, will scrupulously observe 
 the length and CTdence of the pace, nuircl.ing on the prolongation of 
 
226 MANUAL Foa VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 the two points previously laki-n, and sucoi'ssivi'ly taking otberi- iu ad- 
 vance by the means indicated in the school of the company ; the corpo- 
 ral on his right, and the one on bis left will march in the same step, 
 taking care not to turn the head or shoulders, the color-bearer support- 
 ing the color-lance against the hip. 
 
 The two general guiiies will march in the same stap with the color- 
 rank, each maintaining himself abreast, or nearly so, with that rank, 
 and neither occu|iying himself with the movement of the other. 
 
 The three corijorals of the color-guard, now in the front rank of the 
 battalion, will march well aligned, elbow to elbow, heads direct to the 
 front, and without deranging the line of their shoulders; the centre one 
 will follow exactly in the trace of the color-bearer and niainiain the 
 same step, without lengthening or shortening it, except on an intimation 
 from the colonel or lieutenant-colonel, although he should find himself 
 more or less than six paces from the color-rank. 
 
 The covering sergeant in the front rank, between the color-company 
 and the next on the left, will march elbow to elbow, and on the same 
 line with the three corporals in the centre, his head well to the front. 
 
 The captains of the color-company and the company next to the left 
 will constitute, with the three corporals in the centre of the front rank, 
 the basis of alignment for both wings of the battalion ; they will march 
 in the same step with the color-bearer, and exert themselves to maintain 
 their shoulders exactly in the S(iuarc with the direction. To this end 
 they will keep their heads direct to the front, only occasionally casting 
 an eye on the three centre corporals, with the slightest possible turn of 
 the neck, and if thoy perceive themselves in advance or in rear of these 
 corporals, the captain, or two captains will, almost inseusiblj", shorten 
 or lengthen the step, so as at the end of several paces to regain the true 
 alignment without giving sudden cliecks or impulsions to the wings 
 beyond them respectively. 
 
 The lieutenant-colonel, placed twelve or fifteen paces on the right of 
 the captain of the color-company, will maintain this captain and the 
 ne.xt one beyond abreast with the three centre corporals; to this end 
 he will caution either to lengthen or to shorten the step, as may be 
 necessary, which the captain, or two captains will ^Kccute as has just 
 been explainetl. 
 
 All the other captains will maintain themselves on the prolongation 
 of this basis ; and to this end they will cast their eyes toward the cen- 
 tre, taking care to turn the neck but slightly and not to derange the 
 direction of their shoulders. 
 
 The cai)tains will observe the march of their companies and prevent 
 the men from getting in advance of the line of captains: tliej' will not 
 lengthen or shorten step except when evidently necessary; because to 
 
SCHOOL OP THE BATTALION. 227 
 
 correct, with too scrupulous attention, small faults, is apt to cause the 
 production of greater — loss of calmness, silence, and equality of step, 
 each of which it is so important to maintain. 
 
 The men will constantly keep their heads well directed to the front, 
 feel lightly the elbow toward th« centre, resist pressure coming from 
 the flank, give the greatest attention to the squareness of shoulders, 
 and hold themselves always very slightly behind the line of the cap- 
 tains, in order never to shut out from the view of the latter the basis of 
 alignment; they will from time to time cast an eye on the color-rank, 
 or on the general guide of the wing, in order to march constantly in 
 the same step with those advanced persons. 
 
 Pending the march, the line determined by the two markers will bo 
 prolonged by placing, in proportion as the battaliin advances, a third 
 marker in the rear of the first: then the first marker will quit his place 
 and go a like distance in rear of the third ; the second marker will in 
 his turn do the like in respect to the first, and so on in succession as 
 long as the battalion continues to advance ; each marker, on shifting 
 position, taking care to face to the rear, and to cover accurately the 
 two markers already established on the direction. A staff oflScer, or 
 the quartermaster-sergeant, designated for the purpose, and who will 
 hold himself constantly fifteen or twenty paces from and facing the 
 marker farthest from the battalion, will caution each marker when to 
 shift place, and assure him on the direction behind the other two. 
 
 To halt the battalion, marching in line of battle, and to align it. 
 
 Mi. The battalion marching in the line of battle, when the colonel 
 shall wish to halt it he will command : 
 
 1. Battalion. 2. Halt. 
 
 At the second command the battalion will halt ; the color-rank and 
 the general guides will remain in front; but if the colonel should not 
 wish immediatclj' to resume the advance in line, nor to give a general 
 alignment, he will command : ^ 
 
 Color and general guides — Posts. 
 
 At this command the color-rank and general guides will retake their 
 places in line of battle: the captains in tlie left wing will shift to tho 
 right of their companies. 
 
 If the colonel should then judge it necessary to rectify the alignment 
 ho will command : 
 
228 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 Captainf, rectify the alignment. 
 
 The captuins will immediately' cast an eye toward the centre, 
 align thcmsflves accurately on the hasis of the ulignuient, which the 
 liculcniint-tolonel will sec well dirceted, and then promptly dress 
 their respective comjianies. The lieutenant-colonel will admonish such 
 captains as may not be accurately on the alignment by the command: 
 Captain of (such) company, or vaptains of (such) companus, move up, 
 or /all bad:. 
 
 But when the colonel shall wish to give the battalion a general 
 alignment, either parallel or obli(iuo, instead of rectifying it as above 
 he will move some paces outside of one of the general guides (the right 
 will here be supposed), and caution the right general guide and the 
 cobir-bearer to face him, and then establish them by signal of the 
 sword on the direction which he may wish to give to the battalion. As 
 soon as they shall be correctly established the left general guide will 
 place himself on their direction, and be assured in his position by the 
 major. The color-bearer will carry the color-lance perpendicularly 
 between his eyes, and the two corporals of his rank will return to their 
 places in the front rank the moment he shall face to the colonel. 
 
 This disposition Icing made the colonel will ccmimaml : 
 
 1. Guides — Ox THK LINK. 
 
 At this command the right guide of each company in the right wing, 
 and the left guide of each company in the left, will each place himself 
 on the direction of the color-bearer and the two general guides, face to 
 the color-bearer, place himself in rear of the guide who is next before 
 him, at a distance equal to the front of his company, and align himself 
 upon the color-bearer and the general guide beyond. 
 
 The captains in the right wing will shift to the left of their companies, 
 except the ca])tain of the color-company, who will remiiin on its right, 
 but stc]) into the roar rank ; the oai]tains in the left wing will shift to 
 the right of their comjianics. 
 
 The lieutenant-colonel will jiromjjtly rectify, if necessary, the posi- 
 tions of the guides of the right wing, and the major those of the other; 
 which being executed the colonel will command : 
 
 2. On the centre — Dress. 
 
 At this command the companies will move up in quick time against 
 the guides, where having arrived, each captain will align his company 
 according to prescribed principles, the lieutcnant-cidonel aligning the 
 color-company. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 229 
 
 If the aligninent be oblique the captains will take care to conform 
 their companies to it in conducting them toward the line. 
 The battalion being aligned the colonel will command : 
 
 3. Color and guidex — Posts. 
 
 At this command the color-bearer, the general and company guides, 
 and the captains in the right wing will take their places in the line of 
 battle, and the color-bearer will replace the heel of the color-lance 
 against the right hip. 
 
 To march in retreat in line of battle. 
 
 345. The battalion being halted, if it be the wish of the colonel to 
 cause it to march in retreat he will command : 
 
 1. Face to the rear. 2. Battalion, about — Face. 
 
 At the second command tlie battalion will face about; the color- 
 rank and the general guides, if in advance, will take their places in 
 line; the color-bearer will pass into the rear rank, now leading: the 
 corporal of his file will step behind the corporal next on his own right 
 to let the color-bearer pass, and then step into the front rank, now 
 rear, to reform the color-file; the colonel will place himself behind 
 the front rank, become the rear ; the lieutenant-colonel and major will 
 place themselves before the rear rank, now leading. 
 
 The colonel will take post forty paces behind the color file in order 
 to assure the lieutenant-colonel on the perpendicular, who will place 
 himself at a like distance in front as prescribed for the advance in lino 
 of battle. 
 
 If the battalion be the one charged with the direction the colonel 
 will establish markers in the manner indicated, No. 343, except that 
 they will face to the battalion and that the first will be placed twenty- 
 five paces from the lieutenant-colonel. If the markers be already 
 established the officer charged with replacing them in succession will 
 cause them to face about the moment that the battalion executes this 
 movement, and then the marker nearest to the battalion will hasten to 
 the rear of the two others. 
 
 These dispositions being m.ade the colonel will command : 
 
 3. Battalion, forward. 
 
 At this command the color-bearer will advance six paces beyond the 
 rank of file-closers, accompanied by the two corporals of his guard of 
 that rank, the centre corporal stepping back to let the color-bearer 
 
230 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 pass; the two file-closcrs nearest this centre corpnriil will unite on him 
 behind the color-punrd to serve as a linsis of ulip;nnient for the line of 
 file-closers ; the two general guides will i)lace themselves abreast with 
 the color-rank, the covering sergeants will place themselves in the line 
 of file-closers, and the captains in the rear rank, now leading; the cap- 
 tains in the left wing, now right, will, if not already there, shift to the 
 left of their companies, now become the right. 
 The colonel will then command: 
 
 4. March (or douhle-quick — March). 
 
 The battalion will march in retreat on the same principles which 
 govern the advance in line. 
 
 To halt the battalion, marching in retreat, and to face it to the 
 JroJit. 
 
 346. The colonel having halted the battulion and wishing to face it 
 to the front will command : 
 
 1. Face to the front. 2. Battalion, about — Face. 
 
 At the second command the color-rank, general guides, captains, and 
 covering sergeants will all retake their habitual places in line of battle, 
 and the color-bearer will repass into the front rank. 
 
 347. The battalion marching in line of battle by the front rank, 
 when the colonel shall wish to march it in retreat he will command : 
 
 1. Battalion, right about. 2. March. 
 
 At the command march, the battalion will face to the rear and move 
 off at the same gait b}- the rear rank. If the colonel should wish 
 the battalion to march again by the front he will give the same com- 
 mands. 
 
 Passage of obstacles, advancing and retreating. 
 
 348. The battalion advancing in line will be supposed to encounter 
 an obstacle which covers one or more comjianies; the colonel will cause 
 them to deploy into column at full distance, in rear of the next company 
 toward the color, which will be executed as follows: It will be sup- 
 posed that the obstacle only covers the third company, the colonel will 
 command : 
 
 Tliird comjianij, obstacle. 
 At this command the captain of the third company will place him- 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 231 
 
 self in its front, turn to it, and command: 1. Third company, hy the 
 left flank, to the rear into column. 2. Double quick. 3. March. He 
 will then hasten to the left of his company. 
 
 At the command march, the company will face to the left in march- 
 ing: the two left files will promptly disengage to the rear in double- 
 quick time; the left guide, placing himself at the head of the front 
 rank, will conduct it behind the fourth company, directing himself 
 parallelly with this company; the captain of the third will himself 
 halt opposite to the captain of the fourth and see his company file past; 
 when its right file shall be nearly up with him he will command: I. 
 Third company. 2. By the ri(jht flank. 3. March. Guide right, and 
 place himself befoi-e the centre of the company. 
 
 At the command march, the company will face to the right, preserv- 
 ing the gait, but the moment it shall be at the prescribed distance the 
 captain will command: 
 
 1. Quick time. 2. Mauch. 
 
 This company will follow in column that behind which it finds itself 
 and at wheeling distance, its right guide marching exactly in the trace 
 of the captain of that company. 
 
 As soon as the third company shall have faced to the left the left 
 guide of the second will place himself on the left of the front rank of 
 his company, and maintain between himself and the right of the fourth 
 the space necessary for the return into line of the third. 
 
 The obstacle being passed the colonel will command: 
 
 Third company, forward into line. 
 At this command the captain, turning to his company, will add: 
 1. By company, right half-wheel. 2. Double-quick. 3. March. 
 
 At the command march, the company will take the double-quick step 
 and execute a half-wheel; its captain will then command: 
 
 1. Forward. 2. March. 3. Guide left. 
 
 At the command march, the company will direct itself straight for- 
 ward toward the line and retake its position in it according to the 
 principles prescribed for the formation of forward into line. 
 
 349. It will be supposed that the obstacle covers several contiguous 
 companies (the three companies on the right, for example), the colonel 
 will command : 
 
232 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 1. Three right companies, obstacle. 2. By the left flank, to the 
 rear into column. 3. Double-quick. 4. March. 
 
 At the first coininau<l the captains of the dosiijnatcd companies will 
 each place himself before the centre of his company and caution it that 
 it has to face to the left. 
 
 At the command march, the designated companies will face to the 
 left in marching, and immediately take the double-quick step; each 
 captain will cause the head of his company to disengage itself to the 
 rear, and the left guide will place himself at the bead of the front 
 rank: the captain of the third company will conform to what has been 
 prescribed for him in the last number; the captains of the other com- 
 panies will conduct their companies by the flank in rear of the third, 
 inclining toward the head of the column; and as the head of each 
 company arrives opposite to the right of the one next before it in col- 
 umn its captain will halt, see his company file pa'^t him, face it by the 
 right flank, take guide right, and place himself before its centre. 
 
 When the last company in column shall have passed the obstacle the 
 colonel will command: 
 
 1. Three right companies, forward into line. 
 
 At this Command the captain of each of those three companies will 
 command: lii/ coiiiprmy, n'ljht h(tl/-iehee/. The colonel will then add: 
 
 1. Double-quick. 2. March. 
 
 At this, briskly roi)oatc<l by tiie captains of the three companies, 
 each company will execute, the movement on tiie principles laid down 
 in the movement of forward into line without halting. 
 
 350. If tlic companies belong to the left wing they will execute the 
 passage of an obstacle according to the same principles, but by inverse 
 means. 
 
 If the battalion is marching at double-c|uick and it becomes neces- 
 sary to break off several companies in the passage of an obstacle, the 
 colonel will first bring it to march in quick time. 
 
 When the color-company shall bo obliged to execute the movement 
 of passing an obstacle the color-rank will return into line the moment 
 the company shall face to the right or left; the major will place himself 
 six paces before the extremity of the company beliin<l which the color- 
 company marches in column, in order to give the step and the direc- 
 tion; ho himself first taking the stop from the battalion. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 233 
 
 To pass a defile, in retreat, by the right or lefljlank. 
 
 351. When a battalion, retiring in line, shall encounter a defile which 
 it must pass, the colonel will halt the battalion and face it to the front. 
 
 It will be supposed that the defile is in rear of the left flank, and that 
 its width is sufficient to give passage to a column by plat^ion ; the 
 colonel will place a marker fifteen or twenty paces in rear of the file- 
 closers at the point around which the compimies will have to change 
 direction in order to enter the defile ; be will then command : 
 
 To the rear, hij the right /lank, pass the defile. 
 The captain of the first company will immediately command : 
 
 1. First companr/, right — Face. 2. March (or double-quick — 
 March). 
 
 At the command march, the first company will commence the move- 
 ment; the first file will wheel to the right, march to the rear till it 
 shall have passed four paces beyond the tile-closers, when it will wheel 
 again to the right, and then direct itself straight forward toward the 
 left flank. All the other files of this company will wheel in succession 
 at the same place where the first had wheeled. 
 
 The second company will in its turn execute the movement, by the 
 commands of its cajitain, who will give the command march, so that the 
 first file of his company may immediately follow the last of the first 
 without constraint; the first file of the second company will wheel to 
 the right on its ground; all the other files of this company will in suc- 
 cession wheel lit the same place. The following companies will execute, 
 each in its turn, what has just been prescribed for the second. 
 
 When the whole of the second company shall be on tLo same direc- 
 tion with the first the captain of the first will cause it to form by pla- 
 toon into line, and the moment that it is in column the guide of the first 
 platoon will direct himself on the marker around whom he has to 
 change direction in order to enter the defile. 
 
 The second company will continue to march by the flank, directing 
 itself parallelly with the line; aud it in its turn will form b3' platoon 
 into line when the third company shall be wholly on the same direc- 
 tion with itself. The following companies will execute in succession 
 what has just been prescribed for the second. 
 
 The first platoon of the leading company having arrived opposite to 
 the marker placed at the entrance of the defile, will turn to ths left, 
 20 
 
234 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 and the following platoon? will all execute tlie same movement at the 
 same point. A.s the last company will not be al>le to form platoons 
 before reaching the defile, tlicy will so direct themselves in entering it 
 as to leave room to the left for this movement. 
 
 The battalion will thus pass the defile by platoon ; and as the two 
 platoons of each company shall clear it companies will be formed. The 
 head of the column having cleared the defile, and having reached the 
 distance at which the colonel wishes to reform the line faced to the 
 defile, he may cause the leading company to turn to the left, to pro- 
 long the column in that direction, and then form it to the left into 
 line of battle; or he may halt the column and form it into line faced 
 to the rear. 
 
 If the defile be in rear of the right flank it will be passed by the 
 left; the movement will bo executed according to the same principles 
 and by inverse means. 
 
 If the defile is too narrow to receive the front of a platoon it will bo 
 passed by the flank. 
 
 To march by thcjlank. 
 
 352. The colonel wishing the battalion to march by tho flank will 
 command : 
 
 1. Battalion. 2. Rif/ht* (or lefi) — Face. 3. Forward. 4. 
 March (or douhle-quick — March). 
 
 At the second cimiuiand the captains and covering sergeants will 
 place themselves as prescribe<l in the school of the company. 
 
 The sergeant on the left of the battalion will place himself to the 
 left and by the side of the lust file of Ins company, covering the cap- 
 tains in file. 
 
 The battalion having to face by the left flank, the captains, at the 
 second command, will shift rapidly to the left of their companies, and 
 each place himself by the side of the covering sergeant of tho company 
 preceding his own, e.\ce])t the captain of the left comjiany, who will 
 place himself by the side of the sergeant on the left of the battalion. 
 The covering sergeant of the right company will place himself by the 
 right siile of the front rank man of the rearmost file of his company, 
 covering the captains in file. 
 
 At the command march, the battalion will step off" with life; the 
 sergeant, placed before the leading file (right or left in front), will 
 be careful to preserve exactly the length and cadence of the step, 
 
 *0r in two raids— ri\/ht—¥ACE. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 235 
 
 and to direct himself straight forward ; to this end he will take points 
 on the ground. 
 
 Whether the battalion march bj' the right or left flank the lieutenant- 
 colonel will place himself abreast with the leading file, and the major 
 abreast with the color-file, both on the side of the front rank and about 
 six paces from it. 
 
 The adjutant, placed between the lieutenant-colonel and the front 
 rank, will march in the same step with the head of the battalion, and 
 the sergeant-major, placed between the major and the color-bearer, will 
 march in the same step with the adjutant. 
 
 The captains and file-closers will carefully see that the files neither 
 open out nor close too much, and that they regain insensibly their 
 distances, if lost. 
 
 353. The colonel wishing the battalion to wheel by file will com- 
 mand: 
 
 1. By file right (or left). 2. March. 
 
 The files will wheel in succession, and all at the place where the first 
 had wheeled, in conforming to the principles prescribed in the school 
 of the company. 
 
 The battalion marching by the flank, when the colonel shall wish it 
 to halt he will command: 
 
 1. Battalion. 2. Halt. 3. Front. 
 
 These commands will be executed as prescribed in the school of the 
 company. 
 
 If the battalion be marching by the flank and the colonel should wish 
 to cause it to march in line, either to the front or to the rear, the move- 
 ments will be executed by the commands and means prescribed in the 
 school of the company. 
 
 To form the battalion on the right or left^ by file, into line of 
 battle. 
 
 354. The battalion marching by the right flank, when the colonel 
 shall wish to form it on the right by file he will determine the line of 
 battle, and the lioutenant-colonol will place two markers on that line, 
 in conformity with what is prescribed in No. 327. 
 
 The head of the battalion being nearly up with the first marker, the 
 colonel will command : 
 
 1. On the right, by file into line. 2. March (or double-quick — 
 March). 
 
236 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEKRS AND MILITIA. 
 
 At the command march, the leading company will form itself on tho 
 right, by file, into line of battle, as indicated in the school of the com- 
 pany. No. 240; the front rank man of the first file will rcjt his breast 
 lightly against the right arm of the first marker; the other companies 
 will follow the movement of the leading company ; each captain will 
 place himself on the line at the same time with tho front rank man of 
 his first file and on the right of this man. 
 
 The left guide of each company, except the Icailing one, will place 
 bimsclf on the direction of the markers and opposite to the left file of 
 his company at the instant that the front rank man of this file arrives 
 on the line. 
 
 The formation being ended the colonel will command : 
 
 Guides — Posts. 
 
 The colonel will superintend the successive formation of the bat- 
 talion, moving along the front of the line of battle. 
 
 The lieutenant-colonel will in succession assure the direction of tho 
 guides, and see that the men of the front rank in placing themselves on 
 the line do not pass it. 
 
 Changes of front. 
 
 C'haiiije of f runt perpeiiiliciil((rly /■irirard. 
 
 .355. The battalion being in lino of battle, it is supposed to bo tho 
 wi^h of the colonel to cause a change of front forward on the right 
 company, and that the angle formed bj' the old and new positions be a 
 right angle, or a few degrees more or less than one ; he will cause two 
 markers to be placed on the new direction, before the position to be 
 occupied by that company, and order its captain to establish it against 
 the markers. 
 
 The captain of the right company will immediately direct it upon 
 the markers by a wheel to the right on the fixed pivot; and after having 
 halted it he will align it by the right. 
 
 These disjiositions being made tho colonel will command : 
 
 1 . Change front forward, on first company. 2. Bg company y 
 right half-wheel. 3. Makcu (or double-quick. — March). 
 
 (Fig. 79.) At the second command each captain will place himself 
 before the centre of liis company. 
 
 At the third each company will wheel to the right on the fixed 
 pivot; the left guide of each will place himself on its left as soon as 
 
 *i 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 237 
 
 he shall be able to pass; and when the colonel shall jmlge that the 
 companies have sufficiently wheeled he will command : 
 
 4. Forward. 5. March. 6. Guide right. 
 
 At the fifth command the companies ceasing to wheel will march 
 straight forward ; at the sixth the men will touch elbows toward the 
 right. 
 
 The right guide of the second company will march straight forward 
 until this company shall arrive at the point where it should turn to 
 the right; each succeeding right guide will follow the file immediately 
 before him at the cessation of the wheel, and will march in the trace of 
 this file until this company shall turn to the right to move upon the 
 line ; this guide will then march straight forward. 
 
 The second company having arrived opposite to the left file of the 
 first, iti captain will cause it to turn to the right; the right guide 
 will direct himself so as to arrive squarely upon the line of battle, 
 and when he shall bo at three paces from that line the captain will 
 command : 
 
 1. Second company. 1. Halt. 
 
 At the second command the company will halt; the files not yet in 
 line with the guide will come into it promptly, the left guide will place 
 himself on the line of battle, and as soon as ho is assured in the direc- 
 tion by the lieutenant-colonel the captain will align the company by 
 the right. 
 
 Each following company will confr)rm to what has just been pre- 
 scribed for the second. 
 
 The formation ended the colonel will command : 
 
 Guides — Posts. 
 
 356. If the battalion be in march and the colonel shall wish to 
 change front forward on the first company, and that the angle formed 
 by the old and new positions be a right angle, he will cause two mark- 
 ers to be placed on the new direction bofure the position to be occu- 
 pied by that company and will command : 
 
 1. Change front fonvard, on Jirxt company. 2. By company, 
 right half-wheel. 3. March (or double-quick — March). 
 
 At the first command the captains will move rapidly before the 
 centres of their respective companies; the captain of the first company 
 will command: 1. Right turn. 2. Quick time; the captains of the 
 other eoinpanies will caution them to wheel to tlic right. 
 
238 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 At the command mnrch, tho first company will turn to the right, 
 according to the principles prescribed in the school of tho soldier, iti 
 captain will halt it at three paces from the markers, and the files in 
 rear will promptly come into line. The captain will align the com- 
 pany bj- tho right. 
 
 Each of the other companies will wheel to the right on a fixed pivot; 
 the left guides will place themselves on the left of their respective 
 companies, and when the colonel shall judge they have wheeled suffi- 
 ciently he will command: 
 
 4. Forward. 5. March. 6. Guide rir/ht. 
 
 The colonel will cause the battalion to change front forward on the 
 eighth company according to the same principles and by inverse 
 means. 
 
 Change of front perpendicularly to the rear. 
 
 357. The colonel wishing to change front to the rear on the right 
 company will impart his purpose to tho captain of this company. 
 Tho latter will immediately face his company about, wheel it to the 
 left on a fixed pivot, and halt it when it shall be iu the direction 
 indicated to him by the colonel ; the captain will then face his com- 
 pany to the front and align it by the right against the two markers, 
 whom the colonel will cause to bo established before the right and left 
 files. 
 
 These dispositions being mado^ho colonel will command : 
 
 1. Change front to the rear, on first company. 2. Battalion, 
 about — Face. 3. By company, left half-ivheel. 4. March 
 (or double-quick — March). 
 
 (Fig. 80.) At the second command all tho companies except the 
 right will face about. 
 
 At the third the captains whoso companies have faced about will 
 each place himself behind tho centre of his company, two paces from 
 the front rank, now tho roar. 
 
 At tho fourth these companies will wheel to the left on the fi.ied 
 pivot by the rear rank ; the left guide of each will, as soon as he is 
 able to pass, place himself on the left of the rear rank of his company, 
 now become tho right ; and when the colonel shall judge that the 
 compauies have sufliciently wheeled he will command : 
 
 5. Forward, ti. March. 7. Guide left. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 239 
 
 At the sixth command the companies will cease to wheel, march 
 straight forward toward the new line of battle, and at the seventh take 
 the touch of the elbow toward the left. 
 
 The second company from the right, having arrived opposite to the 
 left of the first, will turn to the left; the guide will so direct himself as 
 to arrive parallelly with the line of battle, cross that line, and when the 
 front rank, now in the rear, shall be three paces beyond it the captain 
 will command : 
 
 1. Second Company. 2. Halt. 
 
 At the second command the company will halt; the files which may 
 not yet be in line with the guide will promptly come into it; the 
 captain will cause the company to face about, and then align it bj- the 
 right. 
 • All the other companies will execute what has just been prescribed 
 for the second, each as it successively arrives opposite to the left of the 
 company that ])rcccdps it on the new line of battle. • 
 
 The formation being ended the colonel will command: 
 
 Guides — Posts. 
 
 The colonel will cause a change of front on the left company of the 
 battalion to the rear, according to the same principles and by inverse 
 means. 
 
 To deploy the battalion into column doubled on the centre. 
 
 358. This movement consists in deploying the corresponding compa- 
 nies of the right and left wings into column at company distance, or 
 closed in mass in rear of the two centre companies. 
 
 The colonel wii^hing to form the double column at company distance 
 (the battalion being in line of battle) will command: 
 
 1. Double column, at half-distance. 2. Battalion, inward — Face. 
 3. March (or double-quick — Makch). 
 
 (Fig. 81.) At the first command the captains will place themselves 
 two paces in front of their respective companies; the captains of the 
 two centre companies will caution them to stand fast, and the other 
 captains will caution their companies to face to the left and right re- 
 spectively. The covering sergeants will step into the front rank. 
 
 At the second command the fourth and fifth companies will stand 
 fast; the others of the right wing will f-ce to the left, and the others 
 of the left wing will face to the right ; each captain wiiose company has 
 
240 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA- 
 
 faced will hasten to break to t!ie rear the two files at the head of bis 
 company ; the left guide of each ri<;ht company, and the right guide of 
 each left company, will each place himself at the head of its front 
 rank, and the captain by the side of his guide. 
 
 At the command vmrcli, the fourth and fifth companies, which are to 
 form the first division, will stand fast; the senior captain of the two 
 will jilace himself before the centre of the division and command : 
 Guide right; the junior captain will place himself in the interval be- 
 tween the two companies, and the left guide of the left company will 
 place himself in the front rank on the left of the division as soon as ho 
 shall be able to pass. 
 
 All the other companies, conducted by their captains, will step off 
 with life to arrange themselves in column at company distance, each 
 company behind the preceding one in the column of the same wing, so 
 that in the right wing the third may be nc.\t behind the fourth, the 
 second next to the third, and so on to the right company; and in the 
 left wing the sixth may be ne.xt behind the fifth, the seventh next to 
 the sixth, and so on to the left company of the battalion. 
 
 The corresponding companies of the two wings will unite into divis- 
 ions in arranging tliemselves in column; an instant before the union, 
 at the centre of the column, the left guides of right companies will pass 
 into the line of lile-closers, and each captain will command: 1. Such 
 compaiii/. 2. Halt. 3. Fito.sT. 
 
 At the second command, which will be given at the instant of union, 
 each company will halt; at the third, it will face to the front. The 
 senior captain in each division will place himself on its right and com- 
 mand liiijlit — DitKSS, and the junior captain will place himself in tho 
 the interval between tho two companies. The division being aligned 
 its chief will command Front, and take his position two paces before 
 its centre. 
 
 The column being thus formed, the divisions will take tho respoctivo 
 denominations ol Jirtt, second, third, etc., according to position in the 
 column, beginning at the front. 
 
 Tho lieutenant-colonel, who, at the second command given by tho 
 colonel, will have placed himself at a little more than company dis- 
 tance in rear of the right guide of the first division, will assure the 
 right guides on tho direction as they successively arrive bj' placing 
 himself in their rear. 
 
 Tlie music will pass to tho rear of tlie column. 
 
 35'J. The battalion being in march, to form tho double column at 
 company distance without halting tho battalion the colonel will com- 
 maTid: 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 241 
 
 1. Double column, at half-distance. 2 Battalion, by the right and 
 le/i Jlanks. 3. March (or double-quick — March). 
 
 At the first command each captain will move briskly in front of the 
 centre of his company; the captains of the fourth and fifth will caution 
 their companies to march straight forward; the other captains will 
 caution their companies to face to the right and left. 
 
 At the command march, the fourth and fifth companies will continue 
 to march straight forward; the senior captain will place himself before 
 the centre of his division and ct>mmand Uiiitle righl ; the junior cap- 
 tain will place himself in the interval between the two companiea. 
 The left guide of the fifth company will place himself on the left of the 
 front rank of the division. The men will take the touch of elbows to 
 the right. The color and general guides will retake their places. The 
 threeright companies will face to the left and the three left companies 
 will face to the right. Each captain will break to the rear two files at 
 the head of hi.s company; the left guides of the right companies, and 
 the right guides of the left companies will each place himself at the 
 head of the front rank of his company, and the captain by the side of 
 his guide. 
 
 The third and sixth companies will enter the column and direct 
 themselves parallelly to the first division. Each of the other compa- 
 nies will in like manner place itself behind the company of the wing 
 to which it belongs, and will be careful to gain as much ground as pos- 
 sible toward the head of the column. 
 
 The corresponding companies of each wing will unite into divisions 
 on taking their positions in column, and each captain the instant the 
 head of his company arrives at the centre of the column will com- 
 mand: L Such company by the right (or le/t) flank. 2. March. The 
 senior captain of the two companies will place himself in front of the 
 centre of his division and command Guide right,- the junior captain 
 will place himself in the interval between the two companies. The two 
 companies thus formed into a division will take the touch of elbows to 
 the right, and when each division has gained its proper distance its 
 chief will cause it to march in quick time. 
 
 The double column, closed in mass, will be formed according to the 
 same principles and by the same commands, substituting the indica- 
 tion closed ill mass for that of at half-distance. 
 
 Deployment of the double column, faced to the front. 
 
 360. The colonel wishing to deploy the double column will place 
 21 
 
:i4:i MANUAL iOK VOLL'NTEEKS A.ND MILITIA. 
 
 a marker respectively before the right and left fiU'S of the first division, 
 and a third lu-fnrp the left file of the right company, same division; 
 which being done, lie will rau.-!e the two general guides to spring out 
 on the alignment of the markers a little beyond the points at which 
 the respective flanks of the battalion ought to rest; lie will then com- 
 mand: 
 
 1. Deploy coJrimn. 2. Batlaliov, oiitward — Fack. 3. Makch 
 (or double-quick — MauchJ. 
 
 (Fig. 82.) The column will deploy it.<elf on the two companies at its 
 head according to the principles prescribed for the deploj-mcnt of col- 
 umn.s in ma.«8. The captains of these companies will each, at the com- 
 mand mnrch, place himself on the right of his own company and align 
 it by the right; the captain of the fourth will then jilacc himself in 
 the rear rank, and the covering sergeant in the rank of filc-clos-^s at 
 the moment the captain of the third shall come to its left to align it. 
 
 The dcploymcul being ended the colonel will command: 
 
 Guides — Posts. 
 
 361. The battalion being in double column and in march, if the 
 colonel shall wish to deploy it without halting the column he will 
 cause three markers to be posted on the line of battle, and when the 
 head of the column shall arrive netir the markers he will command: 1. 
 Deploy column. 2. Battalion, by the right and left Jlankn. .S. March 
 (or doiible-riuirl.- — Mauch). The column will deploy on (he two lead- 
 ing companies, according to the principles prescribed for the deploy- 
 ment of a close column; at the command inarch, the chief of the first 
 division will halt it and the captains of the fourth and fifth companies 
 will align their companies by the right. 
 
 .362. If the column be in march and it is the wish of the colonel to 
 deploy the column and to continue on the march in line of battle, ho 
 will not cause markers to bo established at the head of the column. 
 At the first command the chief of the first division will command quirk 
 time : at the command mnich, the first division will continue to march 
 in quick time; the colonel will command guide centre. The captains 
 of the fourth and fifth companies, the color, and the men, will imme- 
 diately conform to the principles of the march in line. The companies 
 will take the (|uiek step by the command of their captains as they suc- 
 cessively arrive in line. The movement completed, the colonel may 
 cause the baltiiliou to march in double-([uick time. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 243 
 
 To form the double column into line of battle, faced to the right or 
 
 left. 
 
 363. The double column being iit company distance and at a halt, 
 may be formed into line faced to the right or left ; when the colonel 
 ahall wish to form it faced to the right he will command : 
 
 1. Right into line, wheel, left companies on the right into line. 2. 
 Battalion, guide right. 3. March (or double-quick — March). 
 
 At the first command each captain will place himself before the 
 centre of his company ; the right companies will be cautioned that 
 they have to wheel to the right, the left companies that they will have 
 to move straight forward. 
 
 At the second command the left guide of the fourth company 
 will place himself briskly on the direction of the right guides of the 
 column, face to them, and opposite to one of the three last files of 
 his company when in line; the lieutenant-colonel will assure him in 
 that position. 
 
 At the command march, briskly repeated by the captains, the right 
 companies will form to the right into line, the left companies will put 
 themselves in march in order to form on the right into line; the lieu- 
 tenant-colonel will assure the guides of the left wing on the line as 
 they in succession come upon it. 
 
 Dispositions against cavalry. 
 
 364. A battalion being in cidumn by company, at full distance, right 
 in front, and at a halt, when the colonel shall wish to form it into 
 square, he will first cause divisions to be formed ; which being done he 
 will command : 
 
 1. To form square. 2. To half-ditlance, close column. 3. March 
 (or double-quick — March). 
 
 (Fig. 83.) At the command march, the column will close to com- 
 pany distance, the second division taking its distance from the rear 
 rank of the first division. 
 
 At the moment of halting the fourth division the file-closers of each 
 company of which it is composed, passing by the outer flanks of their 
 companies, will place themselves two paces before the front rank oppo- 
 site to their respective places in line of battle, and face toward the 
 head of the column. 
 
 At the commencement of the movement the major will place himself 
 
244 MANUAL FOR VOLL'NTEFRS AM) .MILITIA. 
 
 on the right of the column alircust with the first division ; the buglers 
 formed in two ranks will place themselves at platoon distance behind 
 the inner platoons of the second division. 
 
 These dispositions being made the ctdonel may, acconling to circum- 
 stances, put the column in march, or cause it to form square : if he 
 wish to do the latter he will command : 
 
 1. Form square. 2. Right and left into line, wheel. 
 
 (Fig. 84.) At the first command the lieutenant-colonel, facing to the 
 left guides, and the major, facing to those of the right, will align them, 
 from the front, on the respective guides of the fourth division, who 
 will stand fast, holding up their pieces, inverted, perpendicularly : tho 
 right guitles in placing themselves on the direction will take their 
 exact distances. 
 
 At the second command the chief of the first division will caution it 
 to stand fast ; all the captains of the second and third divisions will 
 place themselves before the centres of their respective companies and 
 caution them that they will have to wiieu'l, the right companies to tho 
 right and the left companies to the left into line of battle. 
 
 The color-bearer will step back into the line of file closers, opposite 
 to his place in lino of battle, and will be replaced by the corporal of his 
 file, who is in the rear rank ; the corporal of the same file who is iu the 
 rank of file-closers will step into the rear rank. 
 
 The chief of the fourth division will command: 1. Fourth dii'inion, 
 forward ; 2. Guide left, and place himself at tho same time two paces 
 outside of its left flank. 
 
 These dispositions ended the colonel will command: 
 
 March (or double-quick — March). 
 
 At this command, briskly repeated, the first division will stand fast; 
 but its right file will face to the right and its left tile to the left. 
 
 The companies of the sccon<l and third divisions will wheel to tho 
 right and left into line, and tlie Imglers will advance a space equal to 
 the front of a company. 
 
 The fourth division will close up to form tho square, and when it 
 shall have closed its chief will halt it, face it about, and align it by the 
 rear rank upon tho guides of tho division, who will for this purpose 
 remain faced to the front. Tho junior captain will pass into tho roar 
 rank, now become tho front, and the covering sergeant of the left com- 
 pany will i)lace himself behind him in the front rank, become rear. 
 The file-i'losers will at tho same time close up a pace on the front rank, 
 and the outer file on each flank of tho division will face outward. 
 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 245 
 
 The square being formed the colonel will command : 
 
 Guides — Posts. 
 
 At this conimand the chiefs of the fir.st ancl fourth divisions, as well 
 as the guides, will enter the square. 
 
 The captains whose companies have formed to the right into line will 
 remain on the left of their companies : the left guide of each of those 
 companies will, in the rear rank, cover his captain, and the covering 
 sergeant of each will place himself as a file-closer behind the right file 
 of his company. 
 
 The field and staff will enter the square, the lieutenant-colonel placing 
 himself behind the left and the major behind the right of the first 
 division. 
 
 If the battalion present ten, instead of eight companies, the fourth 
 division will make the movements prescribed above for the second and 
 third divisions, and the fifth the movements prescribed for the fourth 
 division. 
 
 The fronts of the square will be designated as follows : the first divis- 
 ion will alwaj'S be the Jimt front; the last division the fourth front / 
 the right companies of the other divisions will form the eeeond front ; 
 and the left companies of the same divisions the third front. 
 
 .365. If the battalion, before the square is formed, be in double col- 
 umn, the two leading companies will form the first front, the two rear 
 companies the fourth ; the other companies of the right half-battalion 
 will form the second, and those of the left half-battalion the third 
 front. 
 
 The first and fourth fronts will be commanded by the chiefs of the 
 first and fourth dfvisious; each of the other two by its senior captain. 
 The commander of each front will place himself four paces behind its 
 present rear rank, and will be replaced momentarily in the command 
 of his company by the next in rank therein. 
 
 366. If the column by division, whether double or single, be in mass, 
 and the colonel shall wish to form it into square he will first cause it to 
 take company distance; to this effect he will command : 
 
 1. To form square. 2. By the head of column, take half-distance. 
 
 The colonel will halt the column the moment the third division shall 
 have its distance, and as soon as the necessary dispositions are made 
 form it into square. 
 
 367. The battalion being formed into square, when the colonel shall 
 wish to cause it to advance a distance less than thirty paces he will 
 command: 
 
24G MANl'Al, FOR VOLINTEERS AND MII.ITIA. 
 
 1. By (»m']\) front, fortcard. 2. March. 
 
 If it be supposed that the advance be made by the first front, the 
 chief uf this front will cotnniund : 
 
 1. First front, fur ward. 2. Guide centre. 
 
 The chief of the second front will face his front to the left. The 
 captuins of the companies composing the front will place themselves 
 outside and on the right of their left guides, who will replace them in 
 the front rank; the chief of the third front will face his front to the 
 right, and the captains in this front will place themselves outside and 
 on the left of their covering sergeants; the chief of the fourth front 
 will face his, front about, and comm;iiid: 1. Fourth /rout, foriranl. 2. 
 Guide centre. The captain who is in the centre of the first front will be 
 charged with the direction of the march. 
 
 At the command marcli, the square will put itself in motion ; the 
 companies marching by the flank will be careful not to lose their dis- 
 tances. The chief of the fourth division will cause his division to keep 
 constautly closed ou the flanks of the second and third fronts. 
 
 This movement will only be executed in ([uick time. 
 
 The lieuteiiant-coloncl will place liiuisclf in rear of tiie file of direc- 
 tion, in order to regulate his march. 
 
 If the colonel should wish to halt the square he will command: 
 
 ^ 1. Battalion. 2. Halt. 
 
 At the second command the square will halt ; the fourth frout will 
 face about immediately and without further command; the second and 
 third fronts will face outward; the captains of the companies will re- 
 sume their places in square. 
 
 In moving the square forward by the second, third, or fourth fronts 
 the same rule will be observed. 
 
 .'568. The battalion being formed into s(|U!irc, when the colonel shall 
 wish to cause it to advance he will command: 
 
 1. Form cohunn. 
 The chief of the first front will command: 
 
 1. Fir.-^t dirision, forward. 2. Guide left. 
 
 The commander of tlic fourth front will caution it to stand fast; the 
 commander of the second front will cause it to face to the left, and 
 then command: lii/ comjmuy, by Jile left. The commander of the third 
 
SCHOOL OF THK BATTALION. 247 
 
 front will cause it to face to the right, and then command: Bif com- 
 pniiy, hy file rijht. At the moment the second and third fronts face to 
 the left and right each captain will cause to break to the rear the two 
 leading files of his company. 
 
 Th€sc dispositions being made the colonel will command : 
 
 3. March (or double-quick — March). 
 
 At this command the first front will march forward ; its chief will 
 halt it when it shall have advanced a space ecjual to half its front and 
 align it by the left. 
 
 The corresponding companies of the second and third fronts will 
 wheel by file to the left and right and march to moet each other behind 
 the centre of the first division, and the moment they unite the captain 
 of each company will halt his company and face it to the front. The 
 division being reformed its chief will align it by the left. 
 
 The commander of the fourth front will cause it to face about ; its 
 file-closers will remain before the front rank. 
 
 The column being thus refirmed the colonel may put it in march ; 
 the right guides will preserve company distance exactly as the direct- 
 ing guides. 
 
 When the colonel shall wish to reform square he will give the neces- 
 sary commands. 
 
 369. To cause the square to march in retreat the colonel will first 
 cause column to be formed, and when formed he will cause it to fate 
 by the rear rank; to this end he will command : 
 
 1. To march in retreat. 2. Face by the rear i-ank. 3. Battalion, 
 about — Face. 
 
 (Fig. 85.) At the second command the file-closers of the. interior 
 divisions will place themselves, passing by the outer flauks of their 
 respective companies, behind the front rank opposite to their places in 
 line of battle ; the file-closers of the other divisions will stand fast. 
 
 At the third command the battalion will face about; each chief of 
 division will place himself before its rear rank, now become front, 
 passing through the interval between its two companic--; the guide will 
 step into the rear rank, now front. 
 
 The column being thus disposed the colonel may put it in march, 
 or cause it to form square as if it were faced by the front rank. The 
 square being formed, its fronts will preserve the same designations 
 they had when faced by the front rank. 
 
 The battalion being in square by the rear rank, when the colonel 
 shall wish to march it in retreat or in advance he will conform to what 
 
248 MANUAL FOR VOLLNTKERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 is presrriljod jibove. otherwise he will refurin the column by marching 
 forward the fourth front. 
 
 If the sqniire is to be mnrchcil to the front the colonel will face the 
 column by the front rank : to this end he will command : 
 
 1. To march in advance. 2. Fare by (he/ront rank: 3. Battalion, 
 about — Face. 
 
 370. If the column be marching in advance and the colonel shall 
 wish to march it in retreat he will command : 
 
 1. 7o march in retreat. 2. Battalion, right about. 3. March 
 (or double-tptick — March). 
 
 At the second command the lile-closcrs of the second and third 
 divisions will place themselves rapidly before the front rank of their 
 respective divisions. At the command march, the column will face 
 about and move oil" to the rear. 
 
 If the column be marching in retreat and the ccdonel shall wish to 
 march it in advance he will couiniuud: 
 
 1. To march in advance. 2. Battalion, right abaut. 3. March 
 (or double-quick — M.\RCn). 
 
 At the second command the file-closers of the second and third 
 divisions will place themselves before the rear rank of their respective 
 divisions; at the third the column vi\\\ face by the front rank. 
 
 To reduce the aqttare. 
 
 371. The colonel wi.-liinj; to break the square will command: 
 
 1. Reduce square. 2. March (or double-quick — March). 
 
 This movement will be executed in the manner indicated. No. 368 ; 
 but the file-closers of the fourth front will place themselves behind 
 the rear rank the moment it faces about; the field and stalT, the color- 
 bearer, and buglers will at the same time return to their places in 
 column. 
 
 To form squui-e from line of battle. 
 
 372. To dei)loy the battalion into column upon one of the (lank 
 divisions the colonel will comuiurid : 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 249 
 
 1. To form square. 2. Column at half-distance, hy division. 3. 
 On the first (or fourth) divL<iion. 4. Battalion, right (or left) — 
 Face. 5. March (or double-quick — March). 
 
 This movement will be executed according to the principles already 
 prescribed. 
 
 .37.3. To deploy the battalion into double column the colonel will 
 command: 
 
 1. To form square. 2. Double column at half-distance. 3. 
 Battalion, imoard — Face. 4. March (or double-quick — 
 March). 
 
 374. The battalion bein^j in inarcli, to deploy it into double column 
 to form sq\iare the colonel will command: 
 
 1. 7o form square. 2. Form double column. 3. Battalion, by 
 the right and left flanks. 4. March (or double-quick — 
 March). 
 
 The chief of the leading division will hall his division at the com- 
 mand marvh. 
 
 Squares in four ranks. 
 
 375. If the squares formed in two ranks, according to the preceding 
 rules, should not be deemed sufficiently strong the colonel may cause 
 the square to bo formed in four ranks. 
 
 The battalion being in column by company at full distance, right in 
 front, and at a halt, when the colonel shall wish to form S((uare in four 
 ranks he will first cause divisions to be formed, which being executed 
 he will command: 
 
 1. To firm square in f'Ur rariks. 2. To half-distance, close 
 column. March (or double-quick — March). 
 
 At the first command the chief of the first division will caution the 
 right company to face to the left and the left company to face to the 
 right. The chiefs of the other divisions will cauticm their divisions to 
 move forward. 
 
 At the command march, the right company of the first division will 
 form into four ranks on its left file and the left company into four 
 ranks on its right file. The formation ended the chief of this division 
 will align it by the left. 
 
250 MANUAL FOU VOLUNTEKRR ANT) MILITIA. 
 
 The other divisions will move forwaril and doultle their files march- 
 ing; the right company of each divisiim will double on its left file and 
 the left company on its right file. The formation completed each chief 
 of division will comm:knd: Guide left. Each chief will halt his division 
 when it shall have the <listunce of a company front in four ranks from 
 the preceding one, counting from its rear rank, and will align his 
 division bj ihe left. At the instant the fourth division is halted the 
 file-closers will move rapidly before its front rank. 
 
 The colonel will form square, reform column, and reduce square in 
 four ranks by the same commands and means us prescribed for a but- 
 talion in two ranks. 
 
 .376. If the square formed in four ranks he reduced and at a halt, 
 and the colonel shall wish to form the battalion into two ranks, Ije will 
 command: 
 
 1. In ttoo raids, umlouhle files. 3. Ballalion, outicard — Fack. 
 3. March. 
 
 At the first command the captains will step liefore the centres of 
 their respective companies, and those on the right will caution tlieiu 
 to face to the right and those on the left to face to the left. 
 
 At the second command Ihe battalion will face to the right and left. 
 
 At the command murch, each company will uiidouble its files and 
 reform into two ranks as indicated in the school of the company. 
 Each cu])taiu will halt his company and face it to the front. The for- 
 mation completed each chief of division will align his division by Ibo 
 left. 
 
 377. To form .«quarc in four ranks on one of the Ihink divisions the 
 colonel will command: 
 
 1. 7o form s(ju<ire, in four ranks. 2. Column at half-distance, 
 by division. 3. On the firsl {ov fourth) division. 4. Battalion, 
 right (or Ufl) — Fack. 5. Maucii (or doub.'e-cjuirk Makcii). 
 
 4 
 
 At the second command each chief of division will place himself 
 before the centre of his division and caution it to face to the right. 
 
 At the fourth command the right guide of the first division will 
 remain faced to the front, the battalion will face to the right. 
 
 At the command niiin.-li, the first file of four men of the first division 
 will face to the front, remaining doubled. All the other files of four 
 men will step oflT together, and each in succession will close up to its 
 proper distance on the file preceding it and face to the front, remaining 
 
I 
 
 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 251 
 
 doubled. When the last file shall have closed the chief of division 
 will command : Left — Dress. 
 
 The other divisions will deploy into column in the same manner as 
 with a battaliou in two ranks, observing what follows: the chiefs of 
 divisions instead of allowing their divisions to file past theui on enter- 
 ing the column will continue to lead them, and as each division shall 
 arrive on a line with the right guide of the first division its chief will 
 halt the right guide, who will immediately face to the front; the first 
 file of four men will also halt at the same time and face to the front, 
 remaining doubled. The second file will close on the first, and when 
 closed, halt and face to the front, remaining doubled. All the other 
 files will e.\ecute successively what has just been prescribed for the 
 second. When the last file shall have closed the chief of division will 
 command : Left — Dukss. 
 
 378. If the colonel should wish to form a per]iendieiilar scjiiare in 
 four ranks by double column he will command : 
 
 1. To form square, in four ranks. 2. Double column, at half- 
 distance. 3. Battalion, inicard — Face. 4. March (or double- 
 quick — Ma kc ii) . 
 
 At the second command the captains of companies will place them- 
 selves before the centres of their respective companies, and caution 
 those on the right to face to the left and those on the left to face to the 
 right. The captain of the fifth company will caution his covering ser- 
 geant to stand fast. 
 
 At the third command the battalion will face to the left and right; 
 at the command march, the left file of the fourth and the ri .ht file of 
 the fifth company will face to the front, remaining doubled. The 
 fourth coni])any will close successively by file of fours on the left file, 
 and the fifth company in like manner on the right file; the files will 
 face to the front, remaining doubled. The formation completed the 
 chief of division will command: Kiijiit — Drkss. The junior captain 
 will place himself in the interval between the two companies. 
 
 The other companies will close as prescribed for the double column 
 in two ranks, observing what follows : each captain will halt the lead- 
 ing guide of his company the moment the head of his company arrives 
 on a line with the centre of the column. In the right companies the 
 left guides will step into the line of file-closers, and the left file of four 
 men will face immediately to the front, remaining doubled, and by the 
 side of the right guide of the left companj'. The cpmpanies will each 
 fi>rm into four ranks, the right companies on the left file and the left 
 companies on the right file, The formation completed the junior cap- 
 
252 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 tain will place himself between tlic two compiinics, ami the senior will 
 command: liight — Drkss. 
 
 Column at/ainst cacalry. 
 
 379. Wlien a column clojcd in mass has to form snuiire it will begin 
 by taking company distance; but if so suddenly threatened by cavalry 
 as not to allow time for this disposition it will be formed in the follow- 
 ing manner : 
 
 The colonel will command : 
 
 1. Column against cavalry. 2. March. 
 
 (Fig. Sfi.) At the first cuminand the chief of the leading division 
 will caution it to stand fast, and pass behind the rear rank : in the 
 interior divisions each captain will promptly designate ihe number of 
 files necessary to close the interval between his company and the one 
 in front of it. The captains of the division ne.\t to the one in rear, in 
 addition to closing the interval in front will also close up the interval 
 which separates this division from the last ; the chief of the fourth 
 division will caution it to face about, and its file-closers will- pass 
 briskly before the front rank. 
 
 At the command march, the guides of each division will place them- 
 selves riipidly in the line of lile-elosers. The first division will stand 
 fast, tlie fourth will face about, the outer file of each of those divisions 
 will then face outward ; in the other divisions the files designated for 
 closing the intervals will form to the right and left into line, but in the 
 division next to the rearmost one the first files that come into Hue will 
 close to the right or left until they join the rear division. The files of 
 each company which remain in cidumii will close ou their outer tiles, 
 formed into line, in order to create a vacant space in the middle of the 
 column. 
 
 If the column be in march the rulimiu lujniiist cnvulri/ will be formed 
 by the same comnian<ls and means. At Ihe command miireli, the first 
 and fourth divisions will halt and the latter division will face about; 
 the interior divisions will conform to what has been prescribed above. 
 
 The battalion being no longer threatened by cavalry the colotfel will 
 command : 
 
 1. Foi-m column. 2. March. 
 
 At tlie command jiutirh, the files in column will dose to the left and 
 right to make room for those in line, who will retake their places in 
 column by stepping backward, except those clo.nng the interval be- 
 
8CH00I- OF THE BATTALION. 253 
 
 twcen the two rear divisions, who will take their places in column by 
 a flank movement. The fourth division will face about, the guides will 
 resume their places. 
 
 To deploy the battalion as skirmishers, and to rally (his battalion. 
 
 To deploy the battalion as skirmishers. 
 
 380. A battalion being in line of battle, if the colonel should wish to 
 deploy it on the right of the si.\th company, for example, holding the 
 three right companies in reserve, he will signify his intention to the 
 lieutenant-colonel and adjutant, and also to the major, who will be 
 directed to take charge of the reserve. He will point out to the lieu- 
 tenant-colonel the direction be wishes to give the line as well as the 
 point where he wishes the right of the si.xth company to rest, and to the 
 commander of the reserve the place he may wish it established. 
 
 The lieutenant-colonel will move rapidly in front of the right of the 
 si.vth company, and the adjutant in front of the left of the same com- 
 panj'. The commander of the reserve will dispose of it in the manner 
 to be hereinafter designated. 
 
 The colonel will then command: 
 
 1. First (or second) platoons — as skirmishers. 2. On the righto/ 
 the sixth company — take intervals. 3. March (or double-quick 
 — March). 
 
 At the second command the captains of the fifth and si.\th companies 
 will prepare to deploy the first (or second) platoons of their companies, 
 the sixth on its right, the fifth on its left file. The captain of the 
 fourth company will face it to the right, and the captains of the 
 seventh and eighth companies will face their respective companies to 
 the left. 
 
 At the command march, the movement will commence; the platoons 
 of the fifth and sixth companies will deploy forward (see No. 294): the 
 right guide of the sixth will march on the point which will be indicated 
 to him by the lieutenant-colonel. 
 
 The company which has faced to the right, and also the companies 
 which have faced to the left, will march straight forward. The fourth 
 company will take an interval of 100 paces, counting from the left of 
 the fifth, and its chief will deploy its first platoon on its left file. The 
 seventh and eighth companies will each take an interval of 100 p. ices, 
 counting from the first file of the company which is immediately on its 
 
25-i MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 right; and the chiefs of tlicse Cdnipanifs will aftorward deploy their 
 first platoons on the right file. 
 
 The guides who conduct the files on which the deployment is made 
 should be careful to direct themselves toward the outer man of the 
 neighboring company, already deployed as skirmishers; or if the com- 
 pany has not finished its deployment, they will judge carefully the dis- 
 tance which may still be required to place all these files in line, and will 
 then march on the point thus marked out. The companies as they 
 arrive on the line will align themselves on those already deployed. 
 
 The lieutenant-eoloucl and adjutant will follow the dejiloyment, the 
 one on the right the other on the left; the movement concluded, they 
 will place themselves near the colonel. 
 
 The reserves of the companies will be established in echelon in the 
 following manner: the reserves of the sixth company will be placed 
 15(1 paces in rear of the right of this company; the reserves of tjhe 
 fourth and fifth companies, united, opposite the centre of their line of 
 skirmishers, and thirty paces in advance of the reserve of the si.\th 
 company ; the reserves of the seventh and eighth companies, also united, 
 opposite the centre of their line of skirmishers, and thirty jiaccs further 
 to the rear than the reserve of the sixth company. 
 
 The major commanding the companies composing the reserve, on 
 receiving an order from the colonel to that effect, will march these com- 
 panies thirty paces to the rear, and will then deploy them into column 
 by company at half-distance; after which he will conduct the column 
 to the point which shall have been indicated to him. 
 
 The colonel will have a general superintendence of the movement; 
 and when it is finished will move to a point in rear of the line, whence 
 his view may best embrace all the parts, in order to direct their move- 
 ments. 
 
 If instead of deploying forward it be desired to deploy by the ilank, 
 the sixth and fifth companies will bo moved to the front ten or twelve 
 paces, halted, and deployed by the flank, the one on the right the other 
 on the left file, by the means already indicated. (.See No. 265.) Each 
 of the other companies will bo marched by the flank ; and as soon as the 
 last file of the company next toward the direction shall have taken its 
 interval, it will be moved upon the line established by the fifth and 
 sixth companies, haltetl, and deployed. 
 
 In the preceding example it has been supposed that the battalion 
 was in order of battle ; but if in c<dumn, it would be deployed us 
 skirmishers by the same commands and according to the same prin- 
 ciples. 
 
 If the deployment is to be made j'oitcurd, the directing company as 
 goon as it is uumaskcd will be moved ten or twelve paces in front of 
 
SCHOOL OF TEIE BATTALION. 255 
 
 the head of the column, and will be then ileployed on the file indicated. 
 Each of the other companies will take its interval to the right or left, 
 and deploy as soon as it is taken. 
 
 If the deployment is to be made by the flank, the directing company 
 will be moved in the same manner to the front as soon as it is un- 
 masked, and will then be halted and deployed bj- the flank on the file 
 indicated. Each of the other companies will be marched by the flank, 
 and when its interval is taken will be moved on the line, halted, and 
 deployed as soon as the company next toward the direction shall have 
 finifhed its deployiaent. 
 
 When the color-company is to be d(^^>yed as skirmishers the color, 
 without its guard, will be detached, and remain with the battalion 
 reserve. 
 
 The rally. 
 
 ."581. The colonel may cause all the movements prescribed for a com- 
 pany to be executed by the battalion, and by the same commands and 
 the same signals. When he wishes to rally the battalion he will cause 
 the rally on the hattnUon to be sounded, and so dispose his reserve as to 
 protect this movement. 
 
 The companies deployed as skirmishers will be rallied in squares on 
 their respective reserves (see No. 280); each reserve of two contiguous 
 companies will form the first front of the square, throwing to the rear 
 the sections on the flanks: the skirmishers who arrive first will com- 
 plete the lateral fronts, and the last the fourth front. The oflBcers and 
 sergeants will superintend the rally, and as fast as the men arrive they 
 will form them into two ranks, without regard to height, and cause 
 them to face outward. 
 
 The rally being effected, the commanders of squares will profit by 
 any interval of time the cavalry maj' allow for putting them in safety, 
 either by marching upon the battalion reserve or by seizing an ad- 
 vanced position ; to this end each of the squares will be formed into 
 column, and march in this order; and if threatened anew it will halt, 
 and again form square. 
 
 As the companies successively arrive near the battalion reserve each 
 will reform as promptly as possible, and, without regard to designation 
 or number, take place in the column nest in the rear of the companies 
 already in it. 
 
 The battalion reserve will also form square, if itself threatened by 
 cavalry. In this case the companies in marching toward it will place 
 themselves in the section without fire (i'. e. march on the angles), and 
 thus march on the squares. 
 
256 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 Article VII. 
 SCHOOL OF T II E T HOOPER. 
 
 .S82. The object of this school is to innko troopers skilful in the man- 
 agement of their horses and arms, in all directions and at all gaits. To 
 accomplish this the instructor must attend, particularly from the com- 
 mencement, to placing the men well on horseback, and to habituating 
 them in the application of correct principles. 
 
 The instruction should always commence at a icall:, in order to give 
 tho troopers the facility of seating themselves well and of calming their 
 horses, as they are generally more restive on first being brought 
 together. The instruction should also terminate at a walk. 
 
 At the commencement it is generally necessary to make the troopers 
 march repeatedly on tho same track, at a walk and at a trot ; when, 
 however, they already have some skill in the management of their 
 horses, which is almost invariably the case with volunteer cavalry, this 
 e.vercise is less necessary, and the instructor may proceed almost at 
 once to the changes of direction and other movements. 
 
 When the in.^tructor wishes to rest tho men he commands : 
 
 Rest. 
 
 At this command the trooper is no longer required to remain immov- 
 able. 
 
 When the instructur wishes to resume the drill ho commands: 
 
 Attention, 
 
 When tho trooper resumes his immovable position and fixes his 
 attention. 
 
 In tho first part of the instruction but a very few men should be 
 under the same instructor, or small squads should be formed, as in 
 infantry. 
 
 To conduct the hofses to the drill ground. 
 
 38.3. The horses having the bridle reins near the neck, each trooper 
 takes hold of ihe reins wit'i the right hand, s\x inches from tho mouth 
 of the horse, tlie back of the hand up, the hand elevated and firm, to 
 
SCHOOL OF THE TROOPKR. Z-J i 
 
 prevent the horse from jumping, and leads his horse to the ground, 
 where under the direction of the instructor he places it in such position 
 that all the horses shall be on the same line, or in one rank. 
 The squad being formed the instructor commands : 
 
 Count by fours. 
 
 At this command the men count from right to left, one, tico, three, 
 four, according to the place which each one occupies. 
 The troopers should be without arms or spurs. 
 
 Position of the trooper before mounting. 
 
 384. On the left side of the horse, abreast of the lower jaw ; the 
 reins in the right hand si-t inches from the mouth of the horse, the 
 back of the hand up. Heels upon the same line .as nearly as the con- 
 formation of the man will permit, the feet at a little less than a right 
 angle, and equally turned out; the kuee straight without being stiff; 
 the body perpendicular upon the haunches and slightly inclined for- 
 ward ; the left hand hanging by the side, the palm a little turned out, 
 the little finger along the seam of the pantaloons ; the head erect 
 without being constrained, the chin drawn in, and eyes to the front. 
 
 To 7nount. 
 
 385. The instructor commands : 
 
 Prepare to Mount. 
 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 First motion. (Fig. 87.) Nos. 1 and 3 move forward six paces, 
 stepping off with the left foot, keeping opposite their intervals. Place 
 the right foot three inches in rear of the left j make a face anl a half to 
 the right on both heels, the right toe to the front; let go the right rein ; 
 slip the right hand along the left rein; take two steps, stepping off 
 with the right foot, and face to the left on the toe of the left foot, the 
 right side toward the flank of the horse; carry back the right heel 
 three inches in rear of the left ; the right hand, seizing the end of the 
 reins, is placed upon the cantle of the saddle. 
 
 Second motion. Place a third of the left foot in the stirrup, support- 
 ing it against the forearm of the horse ; rest upon the point of the 
 right foot, and seize a lock of the mane with the left hand over the 
 reins a"' far forward as possible, the extremity of the lock passing out 
 of the hand on the side of the little finger. 
 
258 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTKERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 Mount. 
 
 One time mid ttco viulioiit. 
 
 First moti'on. At the eoininand inoiiut, spring from the right foot, 
 holding firmly to the mnnc, at the same time pressing the cantle with 
 the right hand to prevent the saddle from turning; the body erect. 
 
 Second jnoti'on. Pass the right leg stretched over the croup of the 
 horse without touching him ; sit down lightly in the saddle, placing 
 the right hand at the same time, without quilting the reins, upon 
 the right holster, the palm of the hand resting upon it, the fingers on 
 the outside of it, and take one rein of the bridle (if a snaffle) in each 
 hand. 
 
 If the trooper is u.-<ing the curb bridle he will pass the reins into the 
 left (or bridle) hand, the little finger between the reins, the other fingers 
 well closed, and the thumb upon the second joint of the first finger; 
 the elbow slightly detached from the body, the hand four inches above 
 the pommel of the saddle, the fingers six inches from and turned 
 toward the body; the right hand at the side. 
 
 The instructor should allow but a short interval between the first 
 and second motion, because were the trooper to remain a long time on 
 the stirrup the horse would become restive and move out of place, then 
 command : 
 
 Form — Rank. 
 
 Nos. 1 and 3 raise the wrists (or the bridle hand), and hold the legs 
 close to the body of the horse to keep him quiet: Nos. 2 and 4 enter the 
 intervals without jostling and without precipitation. 
 
 After mouuting, the instructor causes the stirrups to be crossed upon 
 the neck, ihe left stirruii over the right. 
 
 Position of the trooper, mounted. 
 
 88G. The buttocks bearing equally upon the saddle, and as far for- 
 ward as possible: the thighs turned upon their flat side, or knees turned 
 in, without effort, embracing the horse equally, and stretched only by 
 their own weight and that of the legs; a su))ple beud of the knees; 
 the legs below the knee free, and falling naturally ; the toes falling in 
 like manner; the loins supported without stiffness; the upper part of 
 the body at case, free and erect; the shoulders square ; the arms free, 
 the elbows falling naturally ; the head erect, at ease, and not drawn in 
 between the shoulders ; wheu the snaffle is worn, one rein in each 
 hand, the fingers closed, the thumb along each rein, the wrists aa high 
 
SCHOOL OP THE TROOPER. 259 
 
 as the elbow, at six inches from each other, the fingers turned toward 
 each other, the upper extremity of the reins leaving the hand on the 
 side of the thumb. 
 
 The instructor then commands : 
 
 1. Eyes Right (or Left). 2. Front. 
 
 At the word right, the head is turned gently to the right, so that the 
 corner of the left eye next the nose may be in a line with the buttons 
 of the jacket. 
 
 At the command yVojir, the head is gently turned to tie front. 
 
 The use of the reins. 
 
 .387. The reins serve to prepare the horse for the movements he is 
 required to execute, to direct him. and to stop him. Their action should 
 bo progressive and in att'ordance with that of the legs. 
 
 When the trooper makes use of the reins the arms should act with 
 suppleness, and their movements ought to extend from the waist to the 
 shoulder. 
 
 The use of the legs. 
 
 388. The legs serve to urge the horse forward, to support him, and to 
 aid hira in turning to the right or left. Whenever the trooper wishes 
 his horse to move forward he should close the legs bj- degrees behind 
 the girths, causing their effects to correspond with the sensibility of the 
 horse, taking care neither to open nor elevate the knees, of which the 
 bend should he always pliant. The trooper relaxes the legs by degrees 
 as he closed them. 
 
 The effect of the reins and legs combined. 
 
 389. In elevating the wrists, or the bridle hand, a little and closing 
 the legs the trooper "gathers his horse;" in elevating the wrists, or 
 bridle hand, he slackens the pace; in repeating this movement of the 
 wrists, or bridle hand, he stops the horse, or he "reins back.'' The 
 trooper ought to elevate the wrists without curving them, at the same 
 time drawing them slightly toward the body. 
 
 In opening the right rein and closing/the right leg the trooper turns 
 his horse to the right. To open the right rein, the right wrist is carried, 
 without turning it, more or less to the right, according to the sensibility 
 of the horse. When the curb is worn move the bridle hand forward 
 and to the right. 
 
260 MANUAL FOR VOLDNTKERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 In opening the left rein and closing the left leg the trooper turns his 
 horse to the left. The left rein is opened upon the same principle as 
 that on which the right is opened. When the curb is worn move the 
 bridle hand forward and to the left. 
 
 By lowering the wrists, or bridle hand, slightly the horse is at liberty 
 to move forward ; the closing of the legs puts him in motion. 
 
 To march. 
 
 390. The instructor commands : 
 
 1. Squad, forward. 2. M.\nCH. 
 
 At the command squad, Jortcaid, elevate the wrists, or bridle hand, 
 slightly, and close the legs, in order to gather the horse. 
 
 At the command march, lower the wrists, or bridle hand, slightly, 
 and close the legs more or less, according to t^e sensibility of the horse. 
 The horse having obeyed, replace the wrists, or bridle hand, and the 
 legs by degrees. 
 
 After some steps the instructor commands : 
 
 1. Squad. 2. Halt. 
 
 At the first command the trooper gathers his horse without slacken- 
 ing his pace. 
 
 At the command halt, the trooper braces himself in the saddle ; ele- 
 vates the wrists, or bridle hand, at the same time, by degrees, and closes 
 the left to prevent the horse from backing. The horse having obeyed, 
 replace the wrists and legs by degrees. 
 
 7o turn to the right or left. 
 
 391. The instructor commands: 
 
 1. Squad, to the right (or left). 2. March. 3. Halt. 
 
 At the command nqiiail, to the riijht, gather the horse. 
 
 At the command manh, open the right ruin, or move the bridle hand 
 to the right, and gradually close the rigiit log. In order not to turn 
 the horse too short, perform ^the movement on the fourth of a circle 
 three paces in length. The movement being almost completed, dimin- 
 ish the effect of the rein and the right leg, supporting the horse at the 
 same time with tlic left rein and leg to terminate the movement. 
 
 At the command kali, elevate the wrisls or bridle hand slightly and 
 
SCHOOL OF THE TROOPER. 261 
 
 hold the leg? hear, in order to keep the horse straight in the new 
 direction ; replace the wrists and the legs by degrees. 
 
 To turn about to the right, or left. 
 
 392. The instructor commands: 
 
 1. Squad to the right (or lejl) about. 2. March. 3. Halt: 
 
 This command is executed on the principles prescribed for the turn 
 to the right or left, with this diflFerenee, that the horse should pass over 
 a semicircle of six paces and face to the rear. 
 
 To make a quarter turn to the right or left. 
 
 393. The instructor commands : 
 
 1. Squad, right for left) oblique. 2. March. 3. Halt. 
 
 At the command ri;/ht oblique, gather the horse. 
 
 At the command inarch, open the right rein a little, or move the 
 bridle hand slightly to the right and close the right leg slightly, in 
 order to make the horse execute n quarter turn to the right ; cause the 
 horse to feel almost at the same time the effect of the right rein and 
 the left leg, to terminate the movement without increasing the degree 
 of obliquity. 
 
 At the command hnlt, elevate the wrist, or bridle hand, and close the 
 legs slightly, to keep the direction of the quarter turn to the right; 
 replace the wrists and legs by degrees. ' 
 
 The instructor commands halt almost immediately after the com- 
 mand march ; he does not require great exactness in this movement, 
 the object of which is to give the trooper the first idea of the oblique 
 march. 
 
 To rein back, and to cease reining back. 
 
 394. The instructor commands : 
 
 1. Squad, backward. 2. March. 3. Squad. 4. Halt. 
 
 At the command bachtcard, gather the horse. At the command 
 march, keep a firm seat, elevate the wrists, or bridle hand, and close 
 the legs. As soon as the horse obeys lower and elevate the wrists or 
 bridle hand in regular succession, which is called i/iclding and check- 
 ing. If the horse throws the haunches to the right close the right leg; 
 if to the left close the left leg. If these means are not sufficient to 
 
262 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 replace the horse in his proper position open the rein on the side 
 toward which the horse throws the haunches, causing him to feel 
 slightly at the same time the effect of the opposite rein. 
 
 At the command squad, the troopers prepare to stop. At the com- 
 mand halt, lower the wrists, or bridle band, and close the legs. The 
 horse having obeyed, replace the wrists, or bridle baud, and the legs by 
 degrees. 
 
 7'o dismount. 
 
 395. The instructor causes the stirrups to be let down and the feet 
 put in them. lie then commands : 
 
 1. Prepare to Dismount. 
 
 One titne and two motions. 
 
 First motion. Nos. 1 and 3 move forward six paces and keep them- 
 selves opposite their intervals. Pass the right rein of the snafHc (when 
 it is worn) into the left baud, the extremity of the reins leaving the 
 hands on the side of the thumb. 
 
 Second motion. Seize the reins of the snaffle (or of the curb bridle) 
 above and near the left thumb with the right hand, the back of the 
 hand up, and place this hand upon the right holster. Disengage 
 the right foot from the stirrup, and seize with the left hand a lock 
 of the maue over the reins. 
 
 Dismount. 
 
 One ^ime and two motions. 
 
 First motion. At the command dismount, rise upon the loft stirrup ; 
 pass the right leg extended over the croup of the horse without touch- 
 injg him, and bring the right thigh near the left, the body well sus- 
 tained; at the same time place the right hand on the cantle of the 
 saddle, slipping it along th(! reins without lotting them go ; descend 
 lightly to the ground, the body ereot, the heels on the same line. Let 
 go the mane with the left hand. 
 
 Second motion. Make a face and two steps to the left, stopping off 
 with the left foot ; slip the right hand along the left rein, seize both 
 reins with the same hand six inches from the mouth of the horse, biick 
 of the hand up, and take tho position of the trooper dismounted. 
 
 To Jile off. 
 
 396. The instructor commands : 
 
 1. By the riyht (or left) — File off. 2. March. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE TROOPER. 263 
 
 At the command march, the trooper of the right (or left) steps off 
 with the left foot, leading his horse to the front ; he takes four steps, 
 turns to the right (or left), and marches in the new direction, at the 
 same time holding the hand high and firm to keep the horse from 
 jumping. Each trooper executes in succession the same movement 
 when the one who precedes him has moved four paces to the front. 
 
 Exercises in the riding house. 
 
 397. In the instruction which follows the squail is supposed to be 
 exercising in a riding house whose sides are about ninety, and ends 
 thirty yards in length, or on a riding ground which is bounded by lines 
 corresponding fo the walls of the riding house. 
 
 Two of the best instructeil troopers are designated to be conductors ; 
 they are placed on the ri^ht and left of the squad, and use their 
 stirrups. 
 
 I'o march to the right (or left) hand. 
 
 398. The squad being drawn up iu the riding house, or on the 
 ground, parallel to its length, the instructor commands : 
 
 1. Squad, to the right {ov left). 2. March. 3. Forward. 
 
 (Fig. 88.) At the command march, the troopers conform to what is 
 prescribed in order to execute a turn to the right from a halt, as 
 directed in No. 391. 
 
 At the command fonrnrd, the troopers, in lowering their wrists and 
 closing the legs, march straight forward and follow the conductor. 
 
 At the extremity of the riding house the conductor turns to the 
 right, when the troopers march to the right hand, having between them 
 the distance of four feet from head to croup. 
 
 The trooper marches to the right hand when he has the right side 
 toward the interior of the riding house. He mnrches to the left hand 
 when it is the left side. 
 
 To turn to the right (or left) in marching. 
 
 .^99. The troopers follow the condiu-tor and make a turn to the riyht 
 (or left) in marching, or arriving at the angles of the riding hnuse. 
 The instructor directs the trooper to advance the outer hip and shoul- 
 der without inclining inward, iu order to conform to the movement of 
 the horse. 
 
264 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MTLITIA. 
 
 To halt, nn<l to step off. 
 
 400. The trooper!" marching in column on ono of tho long sides the 
 instructor commands : 
 
 1. Squad. 2. Halt. 
 
 The troopers stop as prescribed in No. 390. 
 
 To recommence the march the instructor commands : 
 
 1. Squad, forward. 2. March. 
 
 To pass from the icalk to a trot, and from the trot to a walk. 
 
 401. The troopers becoming habituated to the movement of the hors« 
 the instructor causes them to pass to the trot. When they are in col- 
 umn on one of the long sides he commands : 
 
 1. Trot. 2. March. 
 
 At the command trot, gather the hor.se without increasing liis gait. 
 
 At the command march, lower the wrists a little and close tho legs 
 more or less, according to the sensil)ility of the horse. As soon as the 
 horse obeys, replace the wrists and the le^s by degrees. 
 
 The instructor should employ this gait cautiously at first and at a 
 moderate trot, that the men may not lose their position. 
 
 To pass from the trot to tho walk the instructor commands : 
 
 1. Walk. 2. March. 
 
 At the comm.'ind »■«//,•, gather the horso without affecting his gait. 
 
 At the command march, elevate the wrists, or bridle hand, by de- 
 grees, and hold the legs near, in order to prevent the horse from stop- 
 ping. As soon us tho horse obeys, replace the wrists and legs by 
 degrees. 
 
 Changes of hand. 
 
 402. AVhcn the troopers have marched some time to the ri)/ht (or left) 
 hand, to make tlicm cliange hands in the breadth of the riding house 
 or ground without stopping the instructor commands: 
 
 1. Rujht {or lefi) — TuuN. 2. Forward. 
 
 (Fig. 89.) At the word turn, tho leading file turns to the right. At 
 the command forward, he moves straight forward and crosses the rid- 
 ing hou.'jc or ground in it.-* breadih, followed by the other troopers. 
 
 i 
 
SCHOOL OF THE TROOPER. 265 
 
 The leading file being at two paces from the opposite track, the 
 instructor commands : 
 
 1. Lefl (or right') — Turn. 2. Forward. 
 
 At the command turn, the leading file turns to the left ; and at the 
 command fonrard, he follows the track. All the troopers turn in suc- 
 cession on the same ground. 
 
 The instructor cause."? these changes of hand to be made at a trul/c, 
 and at a trot. 
 
 To turn to the right Cor lejt) by trooper in marching. 
 
 403. The troupers marching in column and having arrived about the 
 middle of one of the long sides the instructor commands : 
 
 1. Squad, to the right (or left). 2. March. 3. Forward. 
 
 (Fig. 90.) At the command nqitad, to the right, gather the horse. At 
 the command march, each trooper executes a turn to the right in 
 marching. At the command forwnrd, each trooper moves straight to 
 the front. 
 
 The troopers being at two paces from the opposite track the instructor 
 commands : 
 
 1. Squad, to the right for lejl). 2. March. 3. Forward. 
 
 At the cummand march, each trooper executes a turn to the right, fol- 
 lowing the same principles ; and at the command forward, all return 
 to the track. 
 
 The same movements are repeated to resume the order in which the 
 troopers were originally. 
 
 To turn about to the right (or le/i) by troopers, in marching on tht 
 same line. 
 
 404. The troopers having made a ttim to the right as has just been 
 explained, and having arrived near the opposite track, the instructor 
 commands : 
 
 1. Squad, to the right (or left) about. 2. March. 3. Forward. 
 
 (Fig. 91.) At the command squad, to the right abotit, gather the 
 horse. At the command march, each trooper e.xecutes a turn to the 
 right about in marching, following the principles laid down in No. 392. 
 At the command /ocicurrf, each trooper moves directly to the front. 
 
 The instructor gives the command march at the moment the troopers 
 23 
 
266 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 are within two paces of tbe track ; tho troopers are then reformed in 
 column upon the opposite track by the movement of nqiuid, to the right 
 (or left). 
 
 To turn about to the right (or left) by trooper^ in marching in 
 column. 
 
 405. The troopers marching in column, and the leading file having 
 arrived near tho end of one of the long sides of the riding house or 
 ground, tbe instructor commands: 
 
 1. Squad, to the right (or left) about. 2. March. 3. Forward. 
 
 (Fig. 92.) At the command sqiidd, to the right about, gather tho 
 horse. At the coinmaud m((rch, each trooper executes a turn to the right 
 about in marching. At the cvmmaiid forward, each trooper moves for- 
 ward. 
 
 On arriving at the short side opposite, the leading file turns to tho 
 left without command ; tho squad returns to tho original order by 
 e.xecuting the inverse movement. 
 
 406. To re»t the squad the instructor causes the troopers to turn to 
 the right (or left) when they are about the middle of one of the long 
 sides of the riding house or ground, and gives the command halt when 
 they are out of the track. The instruction is recommenced by a turn 
 to the right (or lilft). 
 
 To terminate tho drill the stirrups are lot down and the foot placed 
 in them, when tbe instructor commands the troopers to dismount and 
 jJle off. 
 
 During tho rests the instructor exercises tho troopers in vaulting on 
 and/irom their horses without commands. 
 
 To leap to the ground. 
 
 The trooper, holding the reins ns in di.^inountiug, seizes a lock of the 
 mano firmly with tbe left band; places tbe right baud upon tbe pom- 
 mel, raises himself upon his wrists, brings the right t^igh by the side 
 of the left, remains an instant in this position, and descends lightly to 
 the ground. 
 
 To leap on the horse. 
 
 The trooper seizes the mane with the loft hand, places the right hand, 
 which holds tbe reins, upon the pommel of the saddle, springs lively, 
 raising himself upon tbo two wrists, remains an instant in this position, 
 and places himself lightly in the saddle. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE TROOPER. 267 
 
 The instructor sometimes gives the command to rent in marching, in 
 order to calm the horse* after quick pace and to relieve the troopers. 
 During the test in nuxrching the troopers relax themselves, but without 
 changing the pace and without losing their distance. 
 
 Exercises in tico ranks. 
 
 407. The troopers are placed in two ranks opened, with a distance of 
 six paces between the ranks, and the horses at one foot from each other. 
 In this instruction from twelve to sixteen troopers may be united. The 
 stirrups are crossed as in the preceding cases ; the men wear spurs. 
 
 The instructor commands : 
 
 In each rank — count FouKS. 
 
 At the last part of the command the men count in each rank, from 
 right to left, pronouncing in a loud and distinct voice in the same tone, 
 without hurry, and without turning the head, one, two, three, four, ac- 
 cording to the place which each one occupies. 
 •At the command : 
 
 Prepare to Mount, 
 
 Nos. 1 and 3 of each rank move six paces to the front ; stepping off 
 with the left foot, keeping opposite their intervals and regulating by 
 the right. The troopers then execute the Jirst motion of prepare to 
 mount as directed fur a single rank. 
 
 After the troopers are mounted the instructor commands : 
 
 Form — Ranks. ♦ 
 
 At the command ranks, Nos. 1 and 3 raise the wrists (or bridle- 
 hand), and hold the legs close to the body of the horse to keep him 
 quiet; Nos. 2 and 4 enter the intervals without jostling and without 
 precipitation. 
 
 The rear rank being formed closes to the distance of tico feet frum 
 the front. 
 
 Of the spurs. 
 
 408. The instructor explains to the troopers the use and the effect of 
 the spur. 
 
 If the horse does not obey the legs it is necessary to employ the spur. 
 The spur is not an aid; it is a means of chastising. It is only necessary 
 to use it occasionally, but always vigorously and at the moment the 
 horse commits the fault. 
 
268 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 In order to use the spurs it is necessary to keep steady the body, the 
 waist, and the wrists ; to cling to tlie horse with the thijrhs and the 
 calves of the legs : turn the toes a little out ; lower the wrists a little ; 
 press the spurs close l)ehind the girths without moving the body, and 
 let them remain there until the horse obeys; then replace the wrists 
 and legs by degrees. In using the spur the troopers should not bear 
 too much upon the rein, as this would counteract the eflfect of the spur. 
 
 409. To conduct the squad to the riiling house or ground the in- 
 structor commands : 
 
 1. By file to the right (or left). 2. March. 
 
 (Fig. 93.) At the command hi/jile to the right, gather the horse. At 
 the command march, the trooper on the right of each rank executes a 
 turn to the right and moves forward, the trooper of the rear rank ap- 
 proaching in marching to within one foot of the front rank. This 
 movement is executed by all the other troopers in succession. 
 
 To march to the right (or left) hand. 
 
 410. In entering the riding house or ground the instructor marches 
 his squad parallel to the long sides, and when the head of the column 
 arrives toward the middle lie eomuiands : 
 
 1. Right and left — Turn. 2. Forward. 
 
 (Fig. 94.) The leading ~file of the front rank turns to the left, the 
 one of the rear rank turns to the right: when these files have arrived 
 ' within two paces of the track the instructor commands : 
 
 1. Right — Turn. 2. Forward. 
 
 The two columns then march to the right hand and at the same 
 pace. 
 
 The troopers preserve the distance of four feet from head to croup. 
 
 The leading files regulate the pace of their horses so as to arrive 
 at the same time at the opposite angles of the riding house or 
 ground, the leading file of the rear rank regulating himself on him 
 of the front. 
 
 To pass a corner to the right a inni In the right is executed; to pass 
 a corner to the left a turn to the left is made in marching; the move- 
 ment of each one should be independent of the trooper who has gone 
 before; their hands and legs alone should determine the horse to go to 
 the right or to the left. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE TROOPER. 269 
 
 To pass from thk walk to the (rot, and from the trot to the xcalk. 
 
 411. The troopers marching in column upon the long sides the 
 instructor causes them to commence the trot. 
 
 Whenever the change is made from a slow gait lo one more rapid, as 
 from a walk to the trot, it is necessary to commence slowly and increase 
 it gradually to the degree prescribed. 
 
 The troopers marching in column at a trot upon the long sides the 
 instructor causes them to pass to the icalk. 
 
 Whenever the change is made from a lively gait to one more slow, as 
 from the trot to the icallc, it is necessary to commence the last gait as 
 gradually as possible and to reduce it by little and little to the degree 
 indicated. 
 
 Change of direction in the breadth of the riding house or ground. 
 
 412. The instructor causes the change of direction in the breadth of 
 the riding house or ground as directed for the changes of hand, taking 
 care to give the command in sufficient time to prevent the columns 
 from meeting at the end of the change of direction. 
 
 (Fig. 95.) The change of direction ought to be executed so as neither 
 to stop nor check the rear of the column ; the troopers, and particularly 
 the leading files, ought to turn without slackening the pace, aiding 
 themselves not only with their hands but also with their legs. 
 
 Change of direction in the length of the riding house or ground. 
 
 413. (Fig. 96.) This change of direction is executed on the sam* 
 principles as that in the breadth of the riding house or ground, the 
 instructor observing, in order to commence it, to command right or left 
 at the in.stant the leading files arrive at the first angle, and to command 
 (Km when, having passed the corner, tbey are at three paces from the 
 middle of the short side. 
 
 The troopers then cross the riding house or ground in its length in 
 a right line, without touching each other, passing to the left, and 
 re-enter apon the track at the commands : 
 
 1. Bight (or left) — Turn. 2. Forward. 
 
 Change of direction diagonally. 
 414. When the leading files have passed the second corner and have 
 
270 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 arrived upon the long sides, the instructor causes a diagonal change of 
 direction to be executed at the commands : 
 
 1. Right (or /e/?) — Turn. 2. Fouwakd. 
 
 (Fig. 97.) At the command turn, the leading tiles make a hulf-tiirn 
 to the right. At the command forward, they move straight forward, 
 cross the riding house or ground diagonally, pass each other to the 
 left, and re-enter the track at the commands : 
 
 1. Lefl (or right). 2. Turn. 3. Forward. 
 
 All the other troopers execute the same movement in succession, in 
 turning upon the same ground thiit the leading files have turned. 
 
 Change of direction obliquely hy the trouper. 
 
 415. The squad commences a change of direction in the length of 
 the riding house or ground ; as soon a-^ all the troopers have turued 
 and are in the siime direction the instructor commands: 
 
 1. Column. 2. Halt. 
 
 (Fig. 98.) Tiie troopers stop at the same time, keeping their horses 
 straight and at their distances. 
 
 The instructor causes the troopers to make a qunrtcr-turii to the right 
 (or left') from a halt. This movement being executed he assures him- 
 self of the exactness of the directions and intervals, and then oummauds : 
 
 1. Squad, forward. 2. March. 
 
 t 
 
 The troopers march at the same gait, each in the direction he has 
 
 taken. When they arrive one foot from the track the instructor com- 
 mands ■ 
 
 Forward. 
 
 At this command make a r/iiarter-turii to the left in advancing, with 
 the hand light and leg near, to follow the track. 
 
 The instructor causes these movements to bo repeated without halt- 
 ing ; for this purpose, after having commenced the change of direction 
 in the length of the riding house or ground, as soon as the two ranks 
 are in column he commands : 
 
 1. Squad, right (or left) oblique. 2. March. 3. Forward. 
 
 At the command right ohliqnc, gather the horse. At the command 
 march, execute a quarter-turn to the right ; having taken this direction, 
 
SCHOOL OP THE TROOPER. 271 
 
 keep the legs equally near and march straight forward at the same 
 gait. At the command forward, return upon the track, or return to 
 the original direction. 
 
 To march in a circle. 
 
 416. When the leading files have passed over about one-third of the 
 long sides the instructor commands : 
 
 1. In circle to the right ('or /e/?). 2. March. 
 
 (Fig. 99.) At the command in circle to the riijht, the leading files, 
 and in succession the troopers, gather their horses. At the command 
 march, the leading files describe a circle between the two tracks; they 
 are followed by the other troopers, who march exactly in the same 
 direction. 
 
 To change hand on the circle. 
 
 417. The instructor commands : 
 
 1. Right (or lejl) — Turn. 2. Forward. 
 
 (Fig. 100.) At the command turn, the leading files turn to the right. 
 At the command forward, they move straight forward, directing them- 
 selves in passing the centre toward the opposite point of the circum- 
 ference. 
 
 When the leading files are two feet from this point the instructor 
 commands : 
 
 1. Left (or right) — Turn. 2. Forward. 
 
 At the command txrn, the leading files turn to the left. At the com- 
 mand forward, they re-enter upon the circle at the new hand. All the 
 other troopers follow the leading files. 
 
 When the instructor wishes to resume the exercise upon the right 
 line he takes care that the leading ■files are at opposite points of the 
 circumference; and when they are on the track of the long sides he 
 commands : 
 
 Forward. 
 
 At this command the leading files straighten their horse? and re- 
 enter on the track, followed by the other troopers. 
 
 418. (Fig. 101.) To reunite the troopers in order to conduct them to 
 the quarters the instructor causes them to close to the distance of two 
 feet; he then orders a change of direction in the breadth of the riding 
 bouse or ground at the moment the leading files are opposite each 
 other. • 
 
272 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 When the leading files, in the act of meeting each other, arrive 
 toward the middle of the space the instructor commands : 
 
 1. Left and right — Turn. 2. Fokwakd. 
 
 The leader of the front rank turns to the left, that of the rear rank 
 to the right : the two columns thus reunite, the troopers of the rear 
 rank approaching to within fine pace of those of the front. 
 
 The column having arrived on the ground where the squad was 
 formed the instructor commands : 
 
 1. Front. 2. Halt. 
 
 (Fig. 102.) At the command fmnt, the first trooper of each rank 
 turns to the left and moves straight forward. At the command halt, 
 the trouper of the front rank stops, and when the rear rank trooper 
 finds himself at two feet from the front rank he stops also. 
 
 All the other troopers execute a turn to the left, in succession when 
 they are nearly opposite the place they are to occujjy in the rank, and 
 halt ahreast of this rank. 
 
 419. To terminate the exercise the instructor gives the command to 
 dismount in two ranks, as follows : at the command 
 
 PuEPARE TO Dismount, 
 
 Nos. ) and 3 of the front rank move forward six paces; Nos. 2 and 4 
 of the rear rank rein back four paces, and keep themselves opposite 
 their intervals, dressing by the right. 
 
 After the troopers have taken these positions they go through the 
 first motions of prepm-e to ilinmoioit as directed for a single rank, 
 followed by the dismount. 
 
 After the disnioiiiit tlie in.<truetor commands: 
 
 Forjfi — Ranks. 
 
 At the word raukK, Kus. 1 and 3 of each rank elevate the right hand 
 slightly, to keep the horse ijuiet : Nos. 2 and 1 return quietly to their 
 intervals. 
 
 Exercises with stirrups. 
 
 •120. The stirrup should support only the weight of the leg; the foot 
 ought to he inserted one-third of its length, the heel lower than the 
 toe. The stirrups arc of proper length if, when the trooper raises 
 himself on the stirrups, there is a space of six inches between the fork 
 and the saddle. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE TROOPER. 273 
 
 Til turn to the right (or left') by the trooper in marching. 
 
 421. The instructor caus-cs this movement to be executed as already 
 prescribed (No. .398) at the commands: 
 
 1. Squad, to the right. 2. March. 3. Fokward. 
 
 He will observe that, the troopers marohinj; in two columns, the com- 
 mand match ought to be given at the moment the leading files arrive 
 opposite the last, trooper but one of the other column. 
 
 (Fig. 103.) Immediately after the command forward, the troopers 
 move straight forward, preserving iheir gait and direction so that each 
 one may find before him the interval and the place he is to occupy in 
 the column on the opposite track. In passing into the intervals the 
 legs should be kept near to prevent the horse slackening his gait. 
 
 7^0 pas.i in succession from the head to the rear of the column. 
 
 422. This movement is executed in succession in the two columns, at 
 a simple warning from the instructor, by two liyht (or Icfi) about tuj-iis. 
 
 The trooper designated to pass to the rear of the column gathers his 
 horse and executes the movement in advancing, so as not to retard 
 those who are behind him. He holds the outer leg near, in order to 
 describe a semicircle of more than six paces : he marches then parallel 
 to the column, and when he has re-entered upon the track by a second 
 turn he closes to the distance of four feet from the last trooper. The 
 trooper who follows, and who becomes the leader, should gather his 
 horse and direct him with the outer rein and the inner leg, to prevent 
 his following the horse T^ich has left the column. 
 
 Being at a halt, to commence the move at a trot. 
 
 423. The troopers being in column upon the long sides the instructor 
 commands : 
 
 1. Column, forward. 2. Trot. 3. March. 
 
 At the command trot, gather the Iiorse. At the command march, 
 lower the wrists and close the legs by degrees: as soon as the horse 
 obeys replace the wrists and legs slowly. 
 
 Marching at a trot, to halt. 
 
 424. The troopers marching at a trot and in odumn on the long sides, 
 the instructor commands : 
 
274 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 1. Column. 2. Halt. 
 
 At the command column, gather the horse. At the oommand halt, 
 elevate the wrists by degrees until the horse stops, aud hold tiie legs 
 iilwa}-? near, to keep him straight and to prevent his stepping back. 
 The horse having obeyed, gradually replace the wrists and legs. 
 
 The instructor .xhuuld require all the trooper."! to set off freely at the 
 trot at the command march, aud to stop all together wilhout jostling 
 at the command halt. 
 
 To pa.'is from the trot to the trot-out, and from the trot-out to the 
 
 trot. 
 
 425. The troopers marching at the imt and in column upon the long 
 sides the instructor commands : 
 
 Tkot-out. 
 
 At this command lower the wrists a little and close the legs gradu- 
 allj' ; as soon as the horse obeys replace the wrists and the legs by 
 degrees. 
 
 This gait should be e.\ecuted only during one or two turns toward 
 each hand ; in continuing it longer the horses lose their steadiness aud 
 the equality of their gaits is destro3'ed. 
 
 426 To pass from the trot-mit to the trot, the instructor commands: 
 
 Slow tkot. 
 
 At this command elevate the wrists by degrees and close the legs, to 
 prevent the horse from taking the walk ; as soon as the horse obeys 
 rei)lace the wri.'ts and legs by degrees. 
 
 To pan.'f friim the trot to the gallop. 
 
 427. Before commencing this exorcise, and when the rear rank 
 arrives opposite one of the short sides of the riding house or ground, 
 it is formed by causing the troopers to front and h<ilt as directed, No. 
 391, paying attention to make them move forward six paces from the 
 track. 
 
 The troopers of the front rank continue to march, take between them 
 the distance oi four paces, pass to the trot and commence the gallop, in 
 succession, at the indication of the instructor, as follows: 
 
 On apjjroaching the corner lenythen the trot and gather the horse, 
 feeling the left rein slightly, in order to keep back the left shoulder 
 and leave the right perfectly free. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE TROOPER. 275 
 
 At the moment of passing the corner close the legs equally, but not 
 suddenly. The horse having taken the gallop hold a light hand and 
 the legs near, to keep him at his gait. 
 
 After one or two turns the troopers pass fmm the gallop to the trot, 
 and from the trot to the icalk. The instructor makes them change 
 hand in the breadth of the riding ground and recommence the same ex- 
 ercise tu the left hand. The troopers of the front rank are then formed 
 as those of the rear rank, upon the other short side, and the troopers of 
 the rear rank go through with the same exercise. 
 
 To passage to the right or left. 
 
 428. The two columns marching at a tcalk upon the long sides, the 
 instructor causes the movement squad, to the right (or left) to be exe- 
 cuted, No. 398, and having halted the troopers he commands : 
 
 1. Right (or le/i) pass. 2. March. 3. Squad. 4. Halt. 
 
 (Fig. 104.) At the command right pagK, hear the shoulders of the 
 horse to the right in opening the right rein a little and closing the right 
 leg. This movement is one of preparation : it indicates to the trooper 
 that the shoulders of the horse should always commence the march and 
 precede the movement of the haunches. At the command march, open 
 the right rein to incline the horse to the right, closing the left leg at 
 the same time that the haunches may follow, without leaning the body 
 to the left; make use of the left rein and the right leg to support the 
 horse and moderate his movement. 
 
 After some steps upon the side the instructor halts the squad. 
 
 At the command halt, cause the eflTect of the right rein and left leg 
 to cease instanth-, employing the opposite rein and leg: straighten the 
 horse and replace the wrists and legs by degrees. 
 
 To ]>a.<i8age to the left, employ the same principles and inverse 
 means. 
 
 The instructor causes this movement to be executed in the commence- 
 ment by each man separately, and then by all at the same time. 
 
 To passage to the right, or lefl, being in column. 
 
 429. (Fig-ilflo.) The troopers being on the track, and marching to 
 the right (or left) hnud, the instructor orders a change of direction in 
 the length of the riding house or ground; and when the twd columns 
 are by the side of each other he halts them and causes them to execute 
 passage to the right (or left). When the troopers have nearly arrived 
 at the track the instructor halts them. 
 
276 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 Principles of the gallnp. 
 
 430. A horse gallops on the right foot when the right fore and hind 
 legs move in advance of the left fore and hind legs. The gait i." gen- 
 erally divided into three distinct times or treads. The first time is 
 marked by the left bind foot which reaches the ground first ; the 
 second by the lufl fore and right hind feet which tuuch at tue same 
 instant, and the third by the right fore foot. 
 
 A horse gallops on the left foot when the left fore and hind legs move 
 in advance of the right fore and hind legs. In thi.s case the right hind 
 foot first reaches the ground, then the right fore and left bind feet, and 
 lastly the left fore foot. 
 
 A horse gallops true when he gallops on the right foot in exercising 
 or turning to the right hand, and on the left foot in exercising or turn- 
 ing to the left hand. 
 
 A horse gallops false when he gallops on the left foot in exercising or 
 turning to the right baud, and on the right foot in exercising or turn- 
 ing to tlie left bund. 
 
 A horse is "disunited " when be gallops with the near fore leg fol- 
 lowed by the off hind leg, or with the off fore leg followed by the near 
 hind leg. 
 
 When the horse gallops on the right font the rider experiences a sen- 
 sible movement in his position Irom right to left, and when he gallops 
 on the left foot the rider experiences a sensible movement in his posi- 
 tion from left to right. 
 
 When the horse is disunited the trooper cx])ericnces irregular move- 
 ments in his position; the centre of gravity of the horse is deranged 
 and bis strength impaired. 
 
 To gallop on right lines. 
 
 4.31. After the troopers of the rear rank are formed as directed. No. 
 427, the in.structor causes the men of the front rank to take the distance 
 of four ))aces from each other; these troopers marching at the trot, and 
 to the ri'jht hand upon one of the long sides, the instructor commands : 
 
 1. Gallop. 2. March. 
 
 At the command gallop, gather the horse and keep him perfectly 
 straight. At the command niarch, carry the bridle hand slightly 
 forward and to the left, to enable the right shoulder to move in 
 advance of the left, and close the legs behind the girths in order to 
 urge the horse forward, causing him to feel the effect of the left leg 
 
SCHOOL OF THE TROOPER. 277 
 
 lightly. The horse having obeyed, hold a light hand and the legs near, 
 to keep him at his gait. 
 
 To preserve the movement of the horse true it is necessary for the 
 trooper to accommodate himself to all his motions, particularly in pass- 
 ing corners, when the slightest derangement in the seat would render 
 the action of the horse irregular. 
 
 When a horse gallops false, or is disunited, the trooper is ordered to 
 take the trot and pass to the rear of the column, taking care not to 
 interfere with those who follow. When he arrives at the rear he re- 
 sumes the gallnp. 
 
 The troopers should make but a turn or two at the gallop to each 
 hand, and should always be required to pass to the trot in order to 
 change hand. 
 
 When the troopers manage their horses well the distance between is 
 generallj- reduced to four feet. 
 
 The rear rank is carried through the same exercise, and then both 
 ranks at once. 
 
 To gallop on the circle. 
 
 432. When the troopers have been suflSciently exercised at the ijallop, 
 on straight lines, the instructor causes them to make a few turns on the 
 circle, following the principles laid down in No. 416. 
 
 This exercise is commenced on very large circles; the diameter is 
 diminished as the troopers become more skilful. 
 
 WHEELINGS. 
 
 433. There are two kinds of wheels : the wheel on a fixed pirot and the 
 toheel on a movable pirot. The wheel is always on a fixed pivot, except 
 when the command is right (or left) — turn. The troopers should execute 
 this movement without disuniting and without ceasing to observe the 
 alignment. 
 
 In every kind of wheel the conductor of the marching flank should 
 measure with his eye the arc of the circle he is to pass over, so that it 
 may not be necessary for the files to open or close. He turns his head 
 occasionally toward the pivot; if he perceives that the troopers are 
 too much crowded, or too open, he increases or diminishes the extent of 
 his circle gradually. Each trooper of the front rank should describe 
 his circle in the ratio of the distance at which he may be from the pivot. 
 During the wheel- the troopers should turn the head slightly toward 
 the marching flank, to regulate the rapidity of their march and to keep 
 themselves aligned; they should also feel the boot lightly on the side 
 
Ziii MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 of tlie pivot, in order t" remain closed to that side. Tliey should yield 
 to pressure coming from the pivot, and resist that from the opposite 
 direction. The horses are slightly turned toward the pivot in order 
 to keep them uu the circular lino they have to pass over. 
 
 To wheel on a Jixed pivot. 
 
 434. The object of the wheel on a fixed pivot is to pass from the order 
 of battle to the order of colurau, and from the order of column to the 
 order of battle. The trooper who forms the pivot of the wheel turns 
 upon his own ground, without advancing or reining back, and without 
 passing to the right or left. 
 
 The wheelings are executed at first in single rank ; for this purpose 
 the front rank is marched forward, and halted when arrived at a dis- 
 tance from the rear rank equal to double its front. The ranks being 
 aligned the instructor commands: 
 
 1. Squad, in circle right (or left) wheel. 2. March. 
 
 (Fig. 106.) At the command murrh, the troopers put themselves in 
 motion, turning the head toward the marching flank; the flunk file con- 
 ducts the flank at a wall:, measuring with the eye the e.\fent of the 
 circle he is to pass over, that neither opening nor closing may be caused 
 in the rank, and that the troopers maj' keep aligned. The pivot-man 
 turns upon his own ground, regulating himself upon the marching flunk. 
 
 M'hen the squad has executed several wheels, to halt it the instructor 
 commands : 
 
 1. Squad. 2. Halt. 3. Left (or right) — Dress. 4. Front. 
 
 At the command hnli, the troupers straighten their horses and halt 
 with steadiness. At the command Ir/t (or riyfit) — dress, they align 
 themselves to the side indicated. At the command/ronj, turn the head 
 to the front. 
 
 The two ranks are then marched forward, preserving between them 
 the same distance, and made to recommence the wheel. When the in- 
 structor wishes the squad to take the direct march ho commands : 
 
 1. Forward. 2. Guide left (or right.) 
 
 At the command /orwarcf, the pivot resumes the gait at which it was 
 previously marching. All tho other troopers straighten their horses, 
 and the two flanks move forward at the same gait, conforming to the 
 principles of the direct march. At tho command guide left (or rii/ht), 
 the troopers regulate their movements toward the side indicated. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE TROOPER. 279 
 
 If the squad is wheeling to the right, and the instructor wishes it 
 to change the wheel to the left without halting, he commands : 
 
 1. Squad, in circle, lejl wheel. 2. March. 
 
 At the cnminand march, the left flank halts and becomes the pivot. 
 The right flank, assuming the gait at which the left flank was march- 
 ing, moves forward and describes a circle proportionate to the extent 
 of the front. All the other troopers straighten their horses and guide 
 them so as to pass new circles in the inverse sense. 
 
 4:35. The troopers being sutficiently exercised at the wheels in single 
 rank at the walk and the trot, the ranks are closed and the wheels 
 executed iu double ranks. The instructor commands : 
 
 1. Squad, in circle, right (or left) icheel. 2. March. 
 
 (Fig. 107.) At the command vtnrch, the troopers of the front nink 
 execute the movement as prescribed above. The troopers of the rear 
 rank turn the head and carry the hand toward the marching flank, ao 
 that each one may be out of the direction of his file-leader by two 
 troopers. For this purpose, the moment the wheel commences each 
 rear rank man executes a quarter-turn to the left, sustaining the 
 haunches of his horse with the right leg when the wheel is to the right, 
 or a quarter-turn to the riijht when the wheel is to the left, keeping 
 during the wheel in the direction of his new file-leader and remaining 
 at the distance of two feet from the front rank. 
 
 To stop the wheel the instructor commands : 
 
 1. Squad. 2. Halt. 3. Le/l for right) Dress. 4. Front. 
 
 At the command nquad, the rear rank men straighten their horses 
 and return to the direction of their file-leaders. All the troopers halt 
 at the command. At the command left (or right) drenn, they align 
 themselves toward the side indicated. At the command front, turn 
 the head to the front. 
 
 When the instructor wishes the squad to resume the direct march, he 
 commands : 
 
 1. Forward. 2. Guide left (or right). 
 
 At the command foricard. the rear rank men replace themselves 
 behind their file-leaders and march straight forward. 
 
 The squad wheeling to the right, to wheel to the opposite side with- 
 out halting the instructor commands : 
 
 1. Squad, in circle, left wheel. 2. March. 
 
280 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 At the command in rircle, /r/i irheel, the four rank men return ti> tlie 
 directinn of their lile-lcndcrs. At the onmmanil warch, the troopers 
 conform to what has already been laid down. 
 
 The .iquad being halted, to place it in a direction perpeixlicular to 
 the original front the instructor commamfs : 
 
 1. Squad, right (or le/l) wheel. 2. March. 3. Halt. 4. Le/l 
 for ri(/ht) — Dress. 5. Front. 
 
 Which is executed on the same principles as the wheel on a fixed 
 pivot. 
 
 4.36. The sifuad being at the halt, to face it to the rear the instructor 
 commands : 
 
 1. Squad, right for left) about, wheel. 2. March. 3. Halt. 
 4. Left — Dress. 5. Front. 
 
 Which is executed as i/» circle to the right or left, the squad passing 
 over a half-circle. 
 
 437. The squad being at a halt, to place it toward its right in a 
 direction oblique to the original the instructor commands : 
 
 1. Squad, right (or left) half-wheel. 2. March. 3. Halt. 4. 
 Left (or right) — Dress. 5. Front. 
 
 Which is executed on the principles of the wheel on a fixed pivot. 
 
 The squad being ou the march, the same movements are executed at 
 the commands: 1. Squad, riyht (or left) wheel, right (or left) about, 
 wheel, right half (or left hilf) wherl. 2. Makch. 3. Forward. 4. 
 Guide right (or left). 
 
 At the command march, the wheeling flauk wheels at the gait at 
 which the platoon was marching; the pivDt flank halts. At the com- 
 mand fnrwnril, the pivot resumes its original pass and the two flanks 
 move forward at the same gait. 
 
 To wheel on a movable pivot. 
 
 4.38. The wheel on a movable pivot is employed in the successive 
 changes of direction in column. The conductor of the marching flank 
 should measure his gait and describe his are of circle so as to cause 
 the files neither to open nor close. The pivot describes an arc of Jive 
 paret in slackening the gait. The centre men preserve the gait at 
 which the squad was marching. At the end of the wheel the march- 
 ing flank and the pivot resume the gait at which they origiually 
 marched. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE TROOPKR. 281 
 
 The squad being on the march, to cause it to change direction the 
 instructor commands : 
 
 1. Left (or righC) — Turn. 2. Forward. 
 
 (Fig. 108.) At the command hft (or right), the pivot prepares to 
 slacken and the marching flank to augment the gait. At the command 
 turn, the squad turns to the left, or to the right, the pivot slackening 
 his gait ii describing an arc of Jive paces; the marching flank aug- 
 ments its gait and regulates itself by the pivot during the whole of the 
 wheel. At the command forward, all the troopers straighten their 
 horses; the pivot and marching flank move forward in the gait at 
 which the squad was originally marching. 
 
 SABRE EXERCISE. 
 
 439. For instruction in the use of the sabre the men of the squad are 
 on foot and in one rank, about nine feet apart. 
 
 The right side of the gripe is the side opposite the guard. 
 
 The left aide of the gripe is the side next the guard. 
 
 Tierce is the position in which the edge of the blade is turned toward 
 the right, the nails downward. 
 
 Quarte is the position in which the edge of the blade is turned to the 
 left, the nails upward. 
 
 440. The squad being in position the instructor commands : 
 
 Draw — Sabre. 
 
 Tico times and two motions. 
 
 First motion. At the first part of the command, which is draw, turn 
 the head slightly to the left without changing the position of the body ; 
 unhook the sabre with the left hand and bring the hilt to the front; 
 run the right wrist through the sword-knot; seize the gripe, drfiw the 
 blade six inches out of the scabbard, pressing the scabbard against the 
 thigh with the left hand, which secures it at the upper ring, and turn 
 the head to the front. 
 
 Second motion. At the last part of the command, which is sahre, 
 draw the sabre quickly, raising the arm to the full e.xtent; make a 
 slight pause, carry the blade to the right shoulder, the back of it 
 against the hollow of the shoulder, the wrist resting against the hip, 
 the little finger on the outside of the grips. This position is the same 
 when mounted, except that the wrist then naturally falls upon the 
 thigh. 
 
 24 
 
282 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 Present — Sabre. 
 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 441. At the last part of the cummand, which is luhre, carry the sabre 
 to the front, the arm half extended, the thumb opposite to and six 
 inches from the neck, the blade perpendicular, the edge to the left, the 
 thumb extended on the right side of the gripe, the little finger by the 
 side of the others. 
 
 Carry — Sabre. 
 
 442. At the command eahre, carry the back of the blade against the 
 hollow of the shoulder, the wrist resting against the hip, the little fin- 
 ger on the outside of the gripe. 
 
 Return — Sabrk. 
 
 Two tiniea and liro mulioiis. 
 
 443. Fimt motion. At the command return, execute the first motion 
 of retnrn sabre. 
 
 Second motion. At the command sabre, carry the wri.st opposite to 
 and six inches from the left shoulder; lower tho blade and pass it 
 across and along the left arm, the point to the rear; turn the head 
 slightly to the left, fixing the eyes on the opening of the scabbard; 
 return the blade, free the wrist from the sword-knot, turn the head to 
 the front, drop the right hand to the side, and hook up the sabre with 
 the hilt to the rear. 
 
 Guard. 
 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 444. At the command guard, carry the right foot two feet from the 
 left, the heels on the same line; place the left hand, closed, si.x inches 
 from the body and as high as the elbow, the fingers toward the body, 
 the little finger nearer than the thumb {position of the bridle hand) ; at 
 the same time place the right hand in ticn-e at the height of and three 
 inches from the left hand, the thumb extended on the back of the 
 gripe, the liitlu finger by the side of the others, the point of the sabre 
 inclined to the left and two feet higher than the hand. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE TROOPER. 283 
 
 In tierce — Point. 
 
 One time and three motions. 
 
 445. First motion. At the command point, raise the hand in tierce as 
 high aa the eyes, throw back the right shoulder, carrying the elbow to 
 the rear, the point of the sabre to the front, the edge upward. 
 
 Second motion. Thrust to the front, extending the arm to the full 
 length. 
 
 Third motion. Return to the position of guard. 
 
 In quarte — Point. 
 
 One time and three motions. 
 
 446. First motion. At the command p'>i'7i^ lower the hand in quarte 
 near the right hip, the thumb extended on the right side of the gripe, 
 the point a little higher than the wrist. 
 
 Second motion. Thrust to the front, extending the arm the full 
 length. 
 
 Third motion. Return to the position of yuard. 
 
 Lejl — Point. 
 
 One time and three motions. 
 
 447. First motion. At the command ^oi'iif, turn the head to the left, 
 draw back the hand in tierce toward the right, at the height of the 
 neck, the edge upward, the point directed to the left. 
 
 Second motion. Thrust to the left, extending the arm to its full 
 length. 
 
 Third motion. Return to the position of guard. 
 
 Right — Point. 
 
 One time and three motions. 
 
 448. First motion. At the command point, turn the head to the right, 
 carry the hand in quarte near the left breast, the edge upward, the point 
 directed to the right. 
 
 Second motion. Thrust to the right, extending the arm to its full 
 length. 
 
 Third motion. Return to the position of guard. 
 
284 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 Rear — Point. 
 
 One time and three motions. 
 
 449. First motion. At the command point, turn tbe bead to the right 
 and rear, bring the hand in quarte opposite to tbe right shoulder, the 
 arm half extended, the blade horizontal, the point to the rear, tbe edge 
 upward. 
 
 Second motion. Thrust to the rear, extending the arm to its full 
 length. 
 
 Third motion. Return to the position of guard. 
 
 Against infantry, left — Point. 
 
 One time and three motions. 
 
 450. First motion. At the command point, turn the bead to tbe left, 
 raise the hand in tierce near the neck, the point of the sabre directed 
 to the height of the breast of a man on foot. 
 
 Second motion. Thrust down in tierce. 
 
 Third motion. Return to the position of guard. 
 
 Against infantry, right — Point. 
 
 One time and three motions. 
 
 451. First motion. At the command point, turn the bead to the right, 
 carry the hand in quarte near tbe right hip, the point of the sabre 
 directed at tbe height of the breast of a man on foot. 
 
 Second motion. Thrust in quarte. 
 
 Third motion. Return to the position of guard. 
 
 I^ront—CUT. 
 One time and three motions. 
 
 452. First motion. At tbe command cut, raise the sabre, the arm half 
 extended, the hand a little above the head, the edge upward, the point 
 to the rear and higher than the band. 
 
 Second motion. Cut, extending (he arm to its full length, and give a 
 back-handed cut horizontally to the rear. 
 
 Third motion. Return to the position of guard. 
 
I 
 
 SCHOOL OF THE TROOPER. 285 
 
 Right in tierce and quarte — Cut. 
 One time and four motions. 
 
 453. First motion. At the command cut, execute the first motion of 
 right cut. 
 
 Second motion. Execute the second motion of rirjht cut. 
 Third motion. Turn the hand in quarte and cut horizontally. 
 Fourth motion. Return to the position of guard. 
 
 Left in quarte and tierce — Cut. 
 One time and four motions. 
 
 454. First motion. At the command cut, execute the first motion of 
 left cut. 
 
 Second motion. Execute the second motion of le/t cut. 
 Third motion. Turn the hand in tierce and cut horizontally. 
 Fourth motion. Return to the position of guard. 
 
 In tierce — Parry. 
 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 465. First motiiin. At the command ;i>arry, carry the hand quickly 
 a little to the front and right, the nails downward, without moving the 
 elbow; the point inclined to the front as high as the eyes and in the 
 direction of the right slioulder; the thumb extended on the back of the 
 gripe and pressing against the guard. 
 
 Second motion. Return to the position of guard. 
 
 In quarte — Parry. 
 
 One time and tiro motions. 
 
 45fi. First motion. At the command parry, turn the hand and carry 
 it (luickly to the front and left, the nails upward, the edge to the left, 
 the point inclined to the front as high as the eyes and in the direction 
 of the left shoulder ; the thumb extended on the back of the gripe and 
 resting against the guard. 
 
 Second motion. Return to the position of guard. 
 
 For the head — Parky. 
 
 One time and t(co motions. 
 457. First nxotion. At the command parry, raise the sabre quickly 
 
286 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 above the head, the arm nearly extended, the edge upward, the point 
 to the left and about six inches higher than the head. The hand is 
 carried more or less to the right, left, or rear, according to the position 
 of the adversary. 
 
 Second motion. Ueturn to the position of yuard. 
 
 Against infantry, right — Parry. 
 
 One time aitd three iixotionn. 
 
 458. First motion. At the command parry, turn the head to the 
 right, throwing back the right shoulder, raise the sabre, the arm ex- 
 tended to the right and rear, the point upward, the hand in tierce, the 
 thumb extended on the back of the gripe, the edge to the left. 
 
 Second motion. Describe a circle quickly on the right, from rear to 
 front, the arm extended ; turn aside the bayonet with the back of the 
 blade, bringing the hand as high as the head, the point upward. 
 
 Third motion. Return to the position of guard. 
 
 Against infantry, left — Parry. 
 
 One time and three motions. 
 
 459. First motion. At the command 2>arri/, turn the head to the left, 
 raise the sabre, the arm extended to the front and right, the point 
 upward, the hand in tierce, the thumb extended on the back of the 
 gripe, the back of the blade to the front. 
 
 Second motion. Describe a circle quickly on the left, from front to 
 rear along the horse's neck, the arm extended; turn aside the bayonet 
 with the back of the blade, bringing the hand, still in tierce, above the 
 left shoulder. 
 
 Third motio)i. Return to the position of guard. 
 
 460. When the troopers begin to execute the above cuts, thrusts, and 
 parries correctly, the instructor rctiuires them to make the application 
 of them by combined motions, as follows: 
 
 In tierce — Point and front cut. 
 In quartc — Point and pkont cut. 
 Lc/t — Point and cut. 
 Right — Point and cut. 
 
 Rear — PoiNT AND CUT. 
 
 Against infantry, right — Point and cut. 
 
 Ayuinit in/autry, lc/t — PoiNT AND CUT. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE TROOPER. 287 
 
 Inspection of Sabre. 
 
 One time and seven motions. 
 
 461. First motion. At the word sabre, execute the first time of draw 
 sabre 
 
 Second motion. Execute the second time of drair sabre. 
 
 Third motion. Present sabre. 
 
 Fourth motion. Turn the wrist inward to show the other side of the 
 blade. 
 
 Fifth motion. Carry the sabre to the shoulder as is prescribed in 
 carrif sabre. 
 
 Sixth motion. Execute the first time of return sabre. 
 
 Seventh motion. Execute the second time of return sabre. 
 
 xMAInUAL for a BREECH-LOADING CARBINE OR RIFLE. 
 THE TROOPERS MOUNTED. 
 
 462. Whenever the troopers are not exercising with the carbine or 
 riQe, it is sluug by a belt which passes from the left shoulder to the 
 right side, the muzzle down, and in such a position that it may be 
 seized by the right hand at any moment, and at the same time be 
 entirely out of the way when the trooper is exercising with the sabre or 
 pistol. 
 
 The trooper, in conducting his horse to the ground before mounting, 
 ha.« the carbine passed over the right shoulder, the muzzle in the air. 
 
 After mounting, let the carbine fall by the side. 
 
 At the first command to dismount, seize the carbine with the right 
 hand a little above the band and pass it over the right shoulder, the 
 muzzle in the air. 
 
 46o. The trouper being mounted, with the carbine hanging b}' his 
 right side, the instructor commands : 
 
 Advance — Carbine (or Rifle). 
 
 Two times. 
 
 At the command adcance, seize the carbine at the small of the stock 
 with the ri,i:ht hand. At the command carbine (or rifle), elevate it and 
 place the but upon the thigh, the muzzle at the height of the eye and 
 opposite to the right shoulder, the lock to the front. 
 
MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 To load. 
 
 461. The squad being in the position <ii advance carbine (or rijle), the 
 instructor commands : Load in four times. 
 
 1. Load. 
 
 One time and ttco motions. 
 
 First motion. At this command place the carbine (or rifle) in the left 
 hand, which seizes it a little below the band, the thumb along the stock, 
 the muz7,le elevated at the height of and opposite to the left shoulder, 
 with the right baud move back the catch and seize the lever with the 
 thumb and first two fingers. 
 
 Second motion. Spring open the chamber and carrj- the hand to the 
 cartridge-box and open it. 
 
 2. Charge — Cartridge. 
 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 First motion. At the command cartridge, draw a cartridge and insert 
 it in the barrel, and seize the lever with the thumb and first two fingers. 
 
 Second motion. Draw back the lever to its place, half-cock, remove 
 the old cap, and carry the hand to the cap-box, and open it. 
 
 3. Primk. 
 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 At the command /jri'me, place a cap on the nipple, press it down with 
 the thumb, let down the cock, and seize the piece by the small of the 
 stock with the right hand. 
 
 4. Advance — Carbine. 
 
 One time. 
 As i)rescribed above. 
 
 7o ^fire. 
 
 465. The squad being in the position of <e(^'a)ice carbine, the instruc- 
 tor coiunitiiuld : 
 
school of the trooper. 289 
 
 Ready. 
 
 One time. 
 At this command let fall the carbine in the left hand as in the first 
 motion of load, cock it, and return to the position of advance carbine. 
 
 Aim. 
 
 One time. 
 
 At this command carry the but to the shoulder with the right hand, 
 support the piece wtth the thumb and first finger of the left hand a 
 little below the barrel, the others closed in order to hold the reins with- 
 out slacking them; place the face against the stock, shut the left eye, 
 direct the right along the barrel to aim, and place the forefinger of the 
 right hand on the trigger. 
 
 Fire. 
 
 At the command /f re, press the forefinger against the trigger and fire, 
 without lowering the head or turning it, and remain in this position. 
 If after firing the instructor wishes to load he commands : 
 
 Load. 
 
 At the command load, bring down the carbine to the first motion of 
 load ; load at will, and take the position of advance carbine. 
 
 If after firing the instructor does not wish to load he commands : 
 
 Advance — Carbine. 
 
 Which is done as already prescribed. 
 
 To drop the carbine the instructor commands : 
 
 Drop — Carbine. 
 
 Cbie time. 
 
 ^ At the command carbine, lower the muzzle of the carbine and cast 
 the but to the rear. 
 
 inspection of arms. 
 
 466. The instructor commands : 
 
 Inspection — Carbine. 
 
 One time and two motionn. 
 
 First motion. At the command carbine, take the position of advance 
 carbine. 
 
 Second motion. Drop the carbine. 
 25 
 
290 MANUAL FOR VOIANTKKUS AM) MILITIA. 
 
 M A N I' A L FOR COLT'S REVOLVERS* 
 
 467. The troojiiirs being mounted, the pistol either in the holster or 
 pistol case, the ingtructor commands : 
 
 Draw — PiSTOL.f 
 
 Tiro time^ and tiro motion*. 
 
 FirKi miitioii. At the first command unbuckle the holster or pistol 
 case, seize the pistol by the handle with the right hand, holding it 
 betTpeen the palm of the hand and the three Inst fingers, the forefinger 
 resting on the guard, the thumb on the handle. 
 
 Second motion. At the second command draw out the pistol and 
 elevate it, the guard to the front; the wrist at the height of and six 
 inches from the right shoulder. 
 
 Load in aix time.^. 
 
 1. Load. 
 
 ^ Our limr tind one motion. 
 
 Place the pistol in the bridle hand, holding it by the handle in front 
 of the body, the hammer between the thumb and forefinger and turned 
 to the left, the muzzle pointing upward. Carry the right hand to the 
 cartridge-box and open it. 
 
 2. Handle — Cauthidgk. 
 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 Seize the cartridge with the thumb and the first two lingers and 
 carry it to the mouih. 
 
 3. Tear — Cartridge. 
 
 One time nnil one motion. 
 
 Bite ofi" the end and carry the cartridge opposite the chamber nearest 
 the lever, or, if the cartridge is furni.«hed from the manufactory with 
 the pistol, seize the end of the cord, which projects from one end of 
 the cartridge, between the teeth, tenr open the outer case, and take out 
 the cartridge. 
 
 * With very little modification this manual will serve for Colt's Carbine and 
 Kifle. 
 
 f If it is B carbinB or rifle, theconiniand will be advance — carbine (or rife). 
 
SCHOOL OF THE TROOPER. 291 
 
 4. Charge — Cartridge. 
 
 0>u' time ami tiro motions. 
 
 Ftrnt motion. Empty the powder into the chamber nnd insert the 
 ball, pressing it down as far as possible with the thumb and forefinger; 
 or, if it be a cartridge furnished from the manufactory, simply insert it 
 in the chamber, pressing the ball down as before. 
 
 Second motion. Turn the pistol with the left hand, bringing the 
 hammer toward the body, and cock it with the thumb of the right 
 hand. 
 
 5. R(vn — Cartridge. 
 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 First motion. Seize the lever at the catch, with the thumb and fore- 
 finger of the right hand ram down the ball, and replace the lever. 
 
 Second motion. Letdown the hammer with the right hand and carry 
 the hand to the cartridge-box. 
 
 Repeat as above directed until all the chambers are loaded. 
 
 6. Prime. 
 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 First motion. Lower the muzzle toward the right side by turning the 
 wrist of the bridle hand, the muzzle pointing downward, the hammer to 
 the front, the left wrist resting against the stomach ; half-cock the pis- 
 tol with the left th\imb ; turn the cylinder with the thumb and forefinger 
 of the right hand until it clicks. Take a cap and press it on the cone. 
 Turn the cylinder again until it clicks, and so on until all the cones are 
 capped, the hammer resting on the safety notch. 
 
 Second motion. Seize the pistol at the handle witk the right hand 
 and bring it to the position of draw pistol. 
 
 468. The instructor wishing to fire will command : 
 
 Rkady. 
 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 First motion. Place the pistol in the left hand, the little finger touch- 
 ing the key, the barrel nearly vertical, the muzzle a little inclined to the 
 left and front, the guard to the front, the thumb on the head of the 
 hammer, the forefinger along the guard. 
 
 Second motion. Cock the pistol and bring it to the position of draic 
 pi»tol. 
 
292 manual for voluntkers and militia. 
 Aim. 
 
 One lime. 
 
 Lower the iiistol, the arm half-extended, and place the forefinger 
 lightly ou the trigger, the niu/.zle directed to the height of a man's 
 waist. 
 
 FiRK. 
 
 One time. 
 
 Press the forefinger steadilj' on the trigger, fire, and retake the posi- 
 tion of drtur pintul. 
 
 The men being at a read}', and the instructor wishing to fire all the 
 barrels in quick succession, will give intimation to that eflfect and com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. Aim. 2. Fire. 
 
 The men will aim and fire, come to the first position of ready, cock, 
 aim, fire again and so continue until the pistol is discharged; then 
 take the position of draw plutol. 
 
 469. The instructor wishing to reload commands : 
 
 Load at will. 
 Load. 
 
 One time. 
 
 Load the six chambers as heretofore directed aud take the position of 
 draw pistol. 
 
 Return — Pistol. 
 
 • One time. 
 
 Lower the muzzle of the pistol and return it to the holster or pistol- 
 case. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE TROOP. 293 
 
 Article VIII. 
 "SCHOOL OF TIIP] TROOP. 
 
 470. The troopers being sufficiently instructed to manage their 
 horses and use their arms, are passed to the school of the troop. The 
 object of this school is to teach them to exercise properly together and 
 to execute all the movements of the troop, whether in column of pla- 
 toons or in line. 
 
 Each movement after having been correctly executed by the right is 
 repcatetl by the left. 
 
 When the movements are all executed at the iralh the instructor 
 causes them to bo repeated at the trot, requiring always the same 
 simultaneous action and the same precision. This gradation is also 
 followed for exercise at the giu'/op ; but the horses should not be kept 
 long at this gait. 
 
 The troop is composed of all the troopers of a single company ; for 
 exercising it is formed in two ranks and divided into two platoons.* 
 The troop is one-half of the squadron, and when it forms a part of the 
 squadron constituting one of the divisions, the nflScers and non-com- 
 missioned officers are posted as directed for a squadron in line; but 
 where the troop acts singly, as will be supposed in the siJiool of the 
 troiip, the officers and non-commissioned officers take posts as directed 
 for a companj' acting singly. (See No. 17.) 
 
 For the school of the troop the troopers are under arms ; if armed with 
 the carbine it is always slung. 
 
 471. The troop being formed in two ranks, at open order, the troopers 
 and file-closers at the heads of tlieir horses, the chiefs of platoons 
 mounted, facing the platoons, at ten paces from and opposite the centre, 
 the captain commands : 
 
 1. Attkxtion. 2. Right — Dress. 3. Froxt. 
 
 lie then commands: 
 
 In each platoon — and in each 7\mlc — Count by fours. 
 
 At this command the troopers count off in both platoons at once, 
 commencing on the right of each rank. 
 
 * If the pliitoons are siuall, or if the instructor wishes to exorcise the troop in 
 tlie school of the squadron, he m:iy cause it to be formed in a single rank. 
 
294 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILTTIA. 
 
 The captain then gives tlie cornmand mount, which is executed as 
 explained in the school of the trooper, No. 407. 
 
 At the command /'(rHi — Ranks, the chiefs of platoons move forward, 
 face to the front by lurniny to the riyht about, and place themselves 
 before the centres of their platoons, the croups of their horses one pace 
 from the heads of the horses of the front rank. The file-closer's follow 
 the rear rank. 
 
 General principles of alignment. 
 
 472. The troopers in order to align themselves should regulate 
 their shoulders upon those of the men on the side of the alignment and 
 fix the eyes upon the line of the eyes, so as to perceive the breast 
 of the second trooper of their rank on the alignment; for this pur- 
 pose they should turn the head, remaining square upon their horses, 
 feel lightly the boot of the man on tlie side of the alignment, and 
 keep the horses straight in the ranks that all may have a. parallel 
 direction. 
 
 The troopers of the rear rank, independently of the alignment, should 
 be exactly behind their file-leaders and in the same liirection, taking 
 care to preserve the distance of two feet from licad to croup. 
 
 Successive alignment of the files in the troop. 
 
 473. The two files of the right (or left) are moved forward ten paces 
 and aligned parallel to the troop bj' the commands : 
 
 1. Tioo files from the right (or left), forward. 2. March. 
 3. Halt. 4. Right.{or left) — Dress. 5. Front. 
 
 The captain then commands : 
 
 1. By file right (or left) — DuKss. 2. Front. 
 
 At the Command dresx, each file moves forward in succession and 
 steadily, the troopers turning the head to the right and taking the 
 last stei)S slowly, in order to arrive abreast of the files already formed 
 without passing beyond the alignment, observing then to halt, give 
 the hand, relax the legs, and keep the head to the right until the 
 commanil fnnit. 
 
 Each file executes the samo movement when the preceding one has 
 arrived on the base of alignment, so that one file only may align itself 
 at the same time. 
 
 At the command front, turn the head to the front. The captain 
 gives the command/c^ji^ when the last file is aligned. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE TROOP. 295 
 
 When the troopers execute those alignments this instruction is 
 repeated in givini; the two files of the ri^ht an obliiiuo direction. For 
 this purpose the two files having marched forward four paces, as has 
 l)een prescribed, execute a hnlf-turn to ihe right (or left) and march 
 six paces in this new direction. 
 
 The troop being unmasked, the roniaiuder of the movement is 
 executed by the same commands and on the same principles as in the 
 last case; each file as it arrives nearly opposite the place it is to 
 occupy executes a h<il/-tnrn to the right (or left), so that, h;i\iug left 
 the troop by one straight line, it arrives upon the new alignment by 
 another. 
 
 474. The two files of the right, or left, are made to rein b.ack four 
 paces, and align themselves parallel to the troop and opposite the place 
 they occupied in it by the commands : 
 
 1. Two files from right for left), backward. 2. March. 
 3. Halt. 4. Right (or left) — Dress. 5. Froxt. 
 
 The captain then commands: 
 1. By file, right (or left), backward — Drkss. 2. Froxt. 
 
 At the command dresa, each file reins back in succession, keeping 
 perfectly straight, the troopers turning the head to the right and 
 passing a little to the rear of the files already formed, in order to come 
 up abreast of them by a movement to the froiil, which renders the 
 alignment more easy. 
 
 The troopers of the front rank rein back slowly, those of the rear 
 rank regulate themselves upon their file-closers, preserving always 
 their proper distance. 
 
 At the command front, turn the head to the front. 
 
 475. The alignment is then executed by twos (or by fours). For 
 this purpose the two or four files of the right move forward as has 
 been prescribed, and the captain commands : 
 
 1. By tw,>s (or by fours ), right (or left) — Dress. 2. Front. 
 
 At the command drcitf, the files align themselves in succession by 
 twos (or by fours), following the principles prescribed for the align- 
 ment by file, being particular to set out and arrive upon the alignment 
 together. 
 
 At the command front, turn the head to the front. 
 
296 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 Alignment of the troop. 
 
 476. The captiiin, aftor liavirifr iilaoeil the rifjht ptiide so that no 
 troojier will lie compelled to rein liat-k, ("oniinnnds : 
 
 1. Right — Dress. 2. Fkont. 
 
 At the comiuand r{<iht — Drkss, all the troopers align themselves 
 steadily but promjitly to the right. 
 
 The troop being aligned the captain commands : 
 
 Front. 
 
 The captain causes these different alignments to be executed by the 
 left, following the same principles, but by inverse means. 
 
 To open and close the ranks. 
 
 477. To open the ranks the captain commands : 
 
 1. JRear rank, opeti order. 2. March. 3. Ilighl — Dress. 
 4. Front. 
 
 At the command niarvh, the front rank remains immovable, the rear 
 rank reins back si.\ paces, each trooper preserving the direction of his 
 file-leader. The file-closers rein back until thej' are six puces from 
 the rear rank. The chiefs of platoons move forward six jmces, and 
 face the centre of the platoons by turniiuj to the left ahniit. 
 
 At the command n't/ht — 1)hkss, the rear rank dresses to the right. 
 At the command front, the head is turned to the front. 
 
 To close the ranks the cajUain commands : 
 
 1. Rear rank, close order. 2. March. 3. Right — Dress. 
 4. Front. 
 
 At the command march, the rear rank closes upon the front to tbo 
 distance of two feet, ejich trooper taking care to preserve the direction 
 of his file-leader. The chiefs of platoons resume their places by a turn 
 niout to the rii/ht, and the file- closers take their proper distances from 
 the roar rank. 
 
 At the command right — Drk.ss, the troop is aligned to the right. At 
 the command front, the head is turned to the frynt. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE TROOP. 297 
 
 To rein back the troop. 
 
 478. The troop being at a halt, the captain commands: 
 
 1. Troop, haclward. 2. Guide right (or left). 3. March. 
 
 At the command miuvh, all the troopeis rein hack at once, regulat- 
 ing their movements by those of the right guide. 
 
 When the troop has reined back some steps the captain commands: 
 
 1. Troop. 2. Halt. 3. Pdght (or left) — Dress. 4. Front. 
 
 To break the troop by file. 
 
 479. The troop being in line, the captain commands: 
 
 1. By file. 2. March. 
 
 (Fig. 109.) At the command hi/ file, the troopers of the first file (front 
 anil rear rank) gather their horses, and the others in succession as soon 
 as the file on the rigiit is in motion. The chief of the first platoon, fol- 
 lowed by the first sergeant, or guide of the right, posts himself in front 
 of the first file. 
 
 At the command mnich, the chief of the platoon, the guide, and the 
 first file on the right move straight to the front; they are followed by 
 the next file; each file moves off when the haunches of the horses of 
 the rear rank man, which has broken, arrives at the heads of the horses 
 of the front rank; each file marches six paces straight to the front, 
 makes a quarter-turn to the right, and marches in the new direction 
 until it reaches its place in the column, when it makes a quarter-turn to 
 the left. 
 
 The chief of the second platoon bresiks with his first file, keeping 
 abreast with and one pace to his left. The first lieutenant is in the 
 rank of file-closers, opposite the centre of the column, and the second 
 sergeant or guide of the left follows the last file. 
 
 To break the platoon by the left the movement is executed following 
 the same principles, but by inverse means, at the commands: 
 
 1. By the left file. 2. March. 
 
 Direct march in column by file. 
 
 480. The troopers should keep their horses straight and march at a 
 free and equal gait; they should keep their eyes to the front iind con- 
 
298 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 tinue in the direction of the column, so a? to perceive only the trooper 
 who marches before thcni ; to march at the same gait with him. preserv- 
 ing always llie distance of two feet from head to croup, that his own 
 horse m.ay not tread upon tiie heels of the horne in front. This distance 
 should be rei'ovcred gradually when lust. 
 
 The column changes direction to the right or left a< prescribed, No. 
 410. 
 
 To halt the column the captain commands : 
 
 1. Column. 2. H.vlt. 
 
 At the command hall, the troopers stop together in the direction of 
 their file-leaders and at their distances, taking care to prevent the horse.s 
 from stepping back. 
 
 To move off the captain commands' 
 
 1. Column, forward. 2. March. 
 
 At the command mnrch, the troopers move off together. 
 
 The column being at a halt, if the captain wishes to commence the 
 move at a trot he conforms to what is ])n!scribed. Xo. 42:5. In this 
 case the chiefs of platoons move off promptly at the ti<ii that the trooj)- 
 ers in the roar ra.ay take this gait at once without marching first at a 
 w„lk. 
 
 Indicldual oblique march. 
 
 481. The column marching by file, the cai>tain commands: 
 
 1. Left for right) Mique. 2. March. 
 
 At the command iimrrh, each trooper executes a iiuarter-tuni to the 
 h'/'i, and moves forward in his new direction, all following parallel lines 
 and regulating themselves toward the right, in order to keep on the 
 same line and to preserve their distances on that side. 
 
 To return to the primitive direction the captain commands : 
 
 Forward. 
 
 At this command the troopers return to the original direction by a 
 quiirter-tiirn to the ri<Jht, in advancing, and move forward in the direc- 
 tion of their file-leaders. 
 
 The troop marching in column hij file, to form it to the front, to the 
 left, or on right, into line. 
 
 482. The column marching right in front, to form it to the front into 
 line the captain commands : 
 
SCHOOL OF THE TROOP. 299 
 
 1. Front into line. 2. March. 3. Right — Dress. 4. Front. 
 
 (Fig. 110.) At the comm.xnd mnrch, the first file continues to march 
 straight forward. The others immediately commence oblii\uing to the 
 left, march in their new direction, and each file makes a quarter-turn tu 
 the rtijht on coming opposite to the place he is to occupy in the troop. 
 When the first file has marched twenty paces the chief of the first 
 platoon commands halt. At this command it halts square to the front, 
 the guide on the right of the front rank man; tlie other files come up 
 in succession on the left of the first and dress to the right. 
 
 At the command front, turn the head to the front. 
 
 The captain gives the command riyht — Dress immediately after hidt, 
 and commands front when the last file is aligned. 
 
 The column marching left in front, the movement is executed follow- 
 ing the same principles, but by inverse means. 
 
 4S3. The column marching right in front, to form it into line upon 
 its left flank the captain commands : 
 
 1. Lefl into line. 2. March. 3. Left — Dress. 4. Front. 
 
 (Fig. 111.) At the command march, the first file turns to the left and 
 moves straight forward ; the other files continue to march on, and at 
 two paces before arriving opposite the place they are to occupy in the 
 troop they turn in succession to the left. 
 
 When the first file has marched twenty paces the chief of the first 
 platoon commands halt. At this command it halts — the guide on the 
 right of the front rank man ; the other files come up and form in suc- 
 cession on the left of the first and dress to the right. 
 
 At the command //-out, turn the head to the front. The captain gives 
 the command ri^jht — Dress immediately after //(l/^ a.nd front when the 
 last file is aligned. 
 
 A column marching left in front is formed into lino on the right flank 
 by inverse means. 
 
 484. The column marching right in front., to form in line upon 
 the prolongation and in advance of its right flank the captain com- 
 mands : 
 
 1. On right into line. 2. March. 3. Right — Dress. 4. Front. 
 
 (Fig. 112.) At the command mnrch, the first tile turns to the right 
 and moves straight forward ; the other files continue to march on, and 
 each turns in succession to the right at one pace beyond the point 
 where the preceding one turned. 
 
 When the first file has marched twenty paces the chief of the first 
 
300 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 platoon commamls hnU. At this couimand it halts : the guide taking 
 his place on the right of the front rank, the other files come up and 
 form in succession on the left of the first and dress to the right. 
 
 A column marching left in front is formed into line on the left hy 
 inverse means. 
 
 To break the troops by twos or by fours. 
 
 4S5. The troop being in line, the captain commands : 
 
 1. By twos (or by fours). 2. March. 3. Guide left. 
 
 (Fig. 113.) At the first command the chief of the first platobn 
 places himself in front of the two or four files of the right ; the right 
 guide places himself on his right. At the command march, the first 
 two or four tiles of the right move straight to the front ; they are 
 followed by the other files, who move oft" when the haunches of the 
 horses of tlie rear rank are on a lino with the heads of the horses of 
 the front rank. These files march straight forward six paces, execute 
 a quarter-luni to the n'l/hl by troopers, and march in this direction until 
 they meet the column, when they take their i)laces in it by making a 
 (fuarter-turii to the Iv/t. 
 
 The chief of the second platoon breaks with the first two or four files 
 of his platoon, keeping abreast with them and at one pace from the 
 flank of the column on the side of the giii<lc, each rank of two or four 
 preserving between them the distance of two feet. 
 
 The captain assures himself that the officers, the file-closers, and 
 guide are properly placed. 
 
 The trooper on the left of the first rank of twos (or fours) is guide of 
 the column ; he keeps his eyes to the front, moves straight forward, and 
 marches so tliat the troopers of his rank may bo at one p.ace from the 
 croup of the horse of the chief of the first platoon. The trooper on the 
 left of each of the other ranks, who is guide of his rank, preserves the 
 head direct, and keeps at the distance of two feet from his file-leader 
 and in the same direction ; the other troopers of each rank look occa- 
 sionally toward the guide, in order to align themselves and regulate 
 their march upon him. They feel the boot lightly toward that side and 
 yield to all ijressnre coming from it. When the march is by fours they 
 resist all pressure coining from the side opposite the guide. 
 
 The column marching by twos or by fours, the captain commands: 
 
 1. T7-ot. 2. March. 
 
 At the cominiind iiko-cIi, the troo])ers take the trat, taking care not to 
 fret their horses. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE TROOP. 301 
 
 When the column has marched a sufficient distance at the trot, the 
 captain commands : 
 
 1. Walk. 2. March. 
 
 486. The column marching in column of twos or fours, right in front, 
 to change direction the captain commands : 
 
 Head of column to (he left (or right). 
 
 At this command the chief of the first platoon commands: 
 
 1. Left — Turn. 2. Forward. 
 
 At the command left, the left trooper, who is pivot, prepares to turn 
 at the same gait, the trooper of the opposite side to lengthen his. 
 
 At the command luni, the first rank of twos or fours turns to the 
 left. The pivot turns without changing his gait, describing an arc of 
 a circle of fire paceii. The trooper on the opposite side turns in length- 
 ening the gait ; the other troopers turn the head toward the marching 
 flank to regulate their rate of march, feeling lightly the boot on the 
 side of the pivot. At the command foru-ard, the troopers who had 
 increased the gait resume the precise pace at which they were before 
 moving, and the head of the column marches straight forward in the 
 new direction. Each rank executes the same movement on arriving 
 upon the ground where the first has turned. 
 
 The column marching by twos or by fours, the captain halts it as 
 prescribed, school of the trooper. 
 
 To recommence the march he commands : 
 
 1. Column, forward. 2. March. 3. Guide left. 
 
 487. The column marching by twos or by fours, the captain com- 
 mands : 
 
 1. Left (or right) oblique. 2. March. 
 
 (Fig. 114.) At the command march, each trooper executes a quarter- 
 turn to the left. The trooper on the left of the first rank, who is guide 
 of the column, moves straight forward in the new direction, and paral- 
 lel to the chief of the first platoon. The trooper on the left of each of 
 the other ranks, who is guide of his rank, moves forward also in the 
 new direction, observing the guide of the column so as to keep on 
 the same line and in a parallel direction with him. 
 
 .The other troopers move forward, looking occasionally to the left, so 
 as to align themselves upon their guide. Each one places the left knee 
 
302 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEEHS AND MILITIA. 
 
 behind the right knee of the man on the left and the head of his horse 
 opposite the lower part of the neck of the horse on liis left. 
 To return to the primitive direction the captain commands: 
 
 Forward. 
 
 At this command the troopcr.s return to the original direction by 
 a quarter-turn to the riij/it. 
 
 The troop marching in column by twos or hy fours, to form it to 
 the front, to the left, or on right into line. 
 
 4^*8. The troop marching in column by twos or by fours, right in 
 front, the captain commands: 
 
 1. Front into line. 2. March. 3. Right — Drkss. 4. Front. 
 
 (Fig. 115.) At the command march, the first two (or four) files con- 
 tinue to march straight forward : wlien they have marched thirty paces 
 the chief of the first platoon commands : 
 
 JIalt. 
 
 At this command the first two (or four) files halt square to the 
 front; the guide of the right returns to the right of the troop. All 
 the other files of twos or fours oblique to the left, march in this 
 direction, and come up in succession by a qunrtcr-turn to the r{(jht 
 on coming opposite their places and without command of the chiefs of 
 platoons. 
 
 The captain, who moves to the right flank after the command mnrrh, 
 commands the alignment when the chief of the first platoon commands 
 halt. 
 
 As soon as the chiefs of platoons arrive upon the line they place 
 themselves at the centre of their platoons and align themselves. The 
 guide of the left returns to the left of the troop when the last two (or 
 four) files arrive upon the line. The first lieutenant superintends the 
 alignment of the rear rank and then takes his post in rear of the 
 centre. 
 
 489. The column marching right in front, to form it into line on its 
 left flank the captain commands : 
 
 1. Left into line. 2. March. 3. Right — Dress. 4. Front. 
 
 (Fig. 116.) At the command march, the four leading files turn to the 
 left and move straight forward; when they have marched thirty paces 
 the chief of the first platoon commands : 
 
school of the troop. 303 
 Halt. 
 
 At this commnnd llie two (or four) leading files halt and the guide 
 places himself on the right of the troop. All the other files continue 
 to march on, and at three paces before arriving opposite the place they 
 are to occupy in the troop turn in succession to the left without the 
 command of the chiefs of ])iatoons. 
 
 The captain, the first lieutenant, the chiefs of platoons, and the 
 guide of the left conform exactly to what is prescribed for the front 
 into line. 
 
 490. The column nuirching right in front, to form line upon the pro- 
 longation and in advance of its right flank the captain commands : 
 
 1. On the right into line. 2. March. 3. Right — Dress. 
 4. Front. 
 
 (Fig. 117.) At the command march, the four leading files turn to the 
 right and march straight forward ; when they have marched thirty paces 
 the chief of the first platoon commands haft. 
 
 At this command the four leading files halt and the right guide takes 
 his place on the right of the troop. All the other files continue to march 
 forward, each turning to the right in succession and without the com- 
 mands of the chiefs of platoons, at the distance three paces beyond the 
 point where the preceding rank has turned, forming to the left and upon 
 the alignment of the first. 
 
 The captain, the first lieutenant, the chiefs of platoons, and the left 
 guide conform exactly to what is prescribed for the/ro«* into line. 
 
 491. The troop is broken by the left at the commands : 
 
 » 
 
 1. By twos {pT hy fours) from the left. 2. March. 3. Guide 
 right. 
 
 The column is exercised at the march in column, the changes of di- 
 rection, and the individual oblique marches. It is also exercised at the 
 different formations, which are executed, following the same principles, 
 but by inverse means, at the commands: 1. Front {right or left) into 
 line. 2. March. 3. Left — Dress. 4. Front. 
 
 492. When the troop has acquired precision and regularity in the for- 
 mations at the different gaits the captain exercises it in breaking by 
 fours from a halt at the trot and at the gallop. 
 
 To form the troop to the left in one rank. 
 
 493. The troop being formed into two ranks the captain com- 
 mands : 
 
304 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 1. Lefl intn single rank. 2. March. 3. Front. 4. Ha'lt. 
 5. Right — Drkss. 6. Front. 
 
 (Fig. lis.) At the conimatnl march, the front rank moves forward six 
 paces, dressing b}' the right: the truopcr on the left of the rear rank 
 fill-Ill? to the left and moves forward ; he is followed by nil the other 
 troopers of that rank, who execute the same movement in succession. 
 
 At the command front, the troopers of the left of the rear rank 
 turn to the right, and the other troopers in succession when they 
 have arrived nearly opposite the place they are to occupy in the 
 rank. 
 
 At the command halt, the trooper on the left, halls, and so do the 
 others in succession, on arriving abreast of him. 
 
 At the command ri<jht — Drkss, all the troopers of the rear rank dress 
 to the right. 
 
 At the command /;-o(/^ turn the head to the front. 
 
 To form the troop to the right in two ranks. 
 
 494. The troop being in one rank, tlie captain designates the trooper 
 who is to be on the left of the front rank, also the one to be the right of 
 the rear rank, and commands : 
 
 1. Right into tioo ranks. 2. March. 3. Right — Dress. 
 4. Front. 
 
 (Upper part of fig. 118.) At the command march, the front rank moves 
 forward six paces, dressing by the right; the trooper on the right of the 
 rear rank turns to the riijht as soon as the front rank has parsed and 
 moves forward obliquely to the right; when he is nearly in rear of the 
 trooper on the right of the front rank he fronts by turning to the left. 
 All the other troopers execute the same movement in succession, placing 
 themselves exactly behind their file-leaders and at their proper dis- 
 tances. 
 
 At the command tti/ht — Dress, all the troopers align themselves to 
 the right. 
 
 At the command /ronf, turn the head to the front. 
 
 To form twos and fours at the same gait. 
 
 495. The troop marching in column by file, right in front, to form 
 twos the captain commands : 
 
 1. Form twos. 2. March. 
 (Fig. 119.) At the command »iarcA, the first file continues to march on. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE TROOP. 805 
 
 and halts when it has marched ten paces ; the second file obliques to the 
 left and comes up abreast of the first ; on arriving there it halts and 
 dresses to the right. All the other files continue to march straight 
 forward, Nos. 2 and 4 executing thoir movement in the same manner 
 but in succession, and when Nos. 1 and 3, upon which they should 
 form, have nearly arrived at their proper distance, and are about to 
 halt. 
 
 496. The troop marching in column by twos, right in front, to form 
 fours the captain commands : 
 
 1. Form fours. 2. March. 
 
 At the comniand march, the first two files continue to march on, and 
 halt when they have gone ten paces ; the two following files oblique to 
 the left, and come up abreast of the first two; on arriving there they 
 halt, and dress to the right. All the other files continue to march 
 straight forward, Nos. 2 and 4 of each rank executing their movement 
 in the same manner when Nos. 1 and 3, upon which they should form^ 
 have Aearly arrived at their proper distance and are about to halt; 
 
 497. When a column is at a trot the leading file or files pass to the 
 H-ii(k ; at the command march, the others continue to march at the trot 
 until they have arrived abreast of those on whom they should form; 
 then they pass to the walk. 
 
 When the column is at a galfop the leading file or files pass to the 
 trot at the command march ; the others continue at the gallop until 
 they have executed their formation, when they pass to the trot. 
 
 When twos or fours arc formed at the trot, or at the gallop, the guide 
 is announced as soon as the first files have doubled. In executing the 
 same movements at a ic'ilk, as the head of the column halts, the guide 
 is not announced. 
 
 In a column marching loft in front these movem-^nts are executed by 
 inverse means. 
 
 To break by tiOos and by file at the same gait. 
 
 498. The troop marching in column by fours, right in front, to break 
 by twos the captain commands : 
 
 1. By ttoos. 2. March. 3. Guide left. 
 
 (Fig. 120.) At the command h\j twos, all the troopers prepare to halt 
 
 except Nos. 1 and 2 of the leading files. At the command marcA, Nos. 
 
 1 and 2 of the leading files continue to march at the same gait; all the 
 
 others halt. Files Nos. 3 and 4 of the leading rank oblique to the right 
 
 20 
 
3U0 MANLAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 at the moment they are passed by tjie croups of the horses of the rear 
 rank of Nos. 1 and 2 and place themselves in column behind them. 
 
 Kach rank of four executes tho same movement in regular succes- 
 sion, files Nos. 1 and 2 breaking as soon as files Nos. .3 and 4 of the rank 
 which precodcs them have commenced obliquing, in order to enter the 
 column. 
 
 Files Nos. 1 and 2, which break to tho front, regulate their gait so as 
 to preserve their distances; and files Nos. 3 and t keep their horses 
 straight, so as not to constrain the movements of files Nos. 1 and 2. 
 
 499. The troops marching in column by twos, right in front, to break 
 by file the captain commands : 
 
 1. By file. 2. March. 
 
 At the command hy file, all the troopers prepare to halt except the 
 right file of the leading rank of twos. At the command march, the 
 right file of the leading rank of twos continues to march at tho same 
 gait; all the others halt. The left file of this same rank obliques to 
 the right the moment it is passed by the croup of the rear rank horse 
 of No. 1, and places itself in column behind tho first file. The 
 guide of the right takes his place in rear of the chief of tho first 
 platoon. 
 
 Each rank of twos executes the same movement in succession, files 
 Nos. 1 and 3 breaking as soon as files Nos. 2 and 4, who precede them, 
 have commenced obli(iuing, in order to enter the column. 
 
 Files 1 and 3, which break to the front, regulate their gait so as to 
 have their distances. Files 2 and 4 keep their horses straight, so as 
 not to constrain the movements of files 1 and 3. 
 
 When the column is at a trvt the right files of the leading rank con- 
 tinue at that guit; all the others take the ualk at the command march, 
 and resume the trot on entering the column. When tho column is at 
 the yal/op the files which arc to break take the trot at the command 
 march, and resume the ynllop on entering the column. 
 
 The column marching left in front, the movement is executed by 
 inverse means at the command; 1. By tiros (or by file), from the left 
 march. If tho column marches by twos the guide is indicated to tho 
 right immediate!}' after the command inarch. 
 
 To form twos and fours in doubling the gait. 
 
 500. Tho troop marching by file right in front, to form twos, the 
 captain commands : 
 
SCHOOL OF TUE TROOP. 8U7 
 
 1. Form ticos — (rot. 2. March. 3. Guide left. 
 
 At the command form twos — trot, all the troopers prepare to trot, ex- 
 cept the leading file, and take it at the command march. The second 
 file obliques to the left and comes up abreast of the first, and on 
 arriving there takes the walk; all the other files continue to move at 
 the trot. Files 4 and 2 execute the movement in the same manner 
 when 3 and 1, upon which they are to form, have nearly arrived at 
 their distance and are about to pass to the tcalk. 
 
 501. The troop marching in column of twos, right in front, to form 
 fours the captain commands : 
 
 1. Form fours — trot. 2. March. 8. Guide left. 
 
 At the command form fours — trot, all the troopers, except the two 
 leading files, prepare to take the trot and take it at the command march. 
 The two files following the first two oblique to the left and come up 
 abreast of these two, resuming the walk as they do so ; all the other 
 files continue to march forward at the trot. Files 1 and 3 of the next 
 file of fours close upon the leading file and pass to the walk, when 
 Nos. 2 and 4 of the same file oblique to the left and come up abreast 
 of them, taking the irnlk, and so do all the remaining files in succes- 
 sion. 
 
 When the column is at the trot, the movement is executed on the 
 same principles. At the command march, all the troopers, except the 
 files at the head of the column, pass to the tjallop, and resume the trot 
 when the formation is executed. 
 
 The column marching loft in front, the movement is executed by 
 inverse means. 
 
 To break by twos and by file i?j doubling the gait. 
 602. The troop marching in column by fours, the captain commands: 
 1. By twos — trot. 2. March. 3. Guide left. 
 
 At the command bj/ tiros — trot, files 1 and 2 of the leading rank of 
 fours prepare to trot. At the command march, they commence the trot; 
 all the other files continue to march at the walk ; files 3 and 4 take the 
 trot in succession and oblique to the right, in order to place themselves 
 in column behind files 1 and 2. 
 
 The movement being terminated the captain orders the walk. 
 
308 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTKERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 503. The troop mnrching in column of twos, right in front, to break 
 by file the captain commands: 
 
 1. By file — trot. 2. March. 
 
 At the commantl by Jile — trot, the right file of the leading rank of 
 twos prepares to trot. At the command murcA, it commences the trot ; 
 all the other files continue at the walk; files 2 and 4 assume the trot in 
 succession and oblique to the right, in order to place themselves behind 
 files 1 and 3 in the column. 
 
 When the column is at the trot, to breiik in doubling the gait the 
 captain commands: 1. /?// tipon (or by file), gallop. 2. March. 
 
 504. The column marching left in front, the movement is e.\ecuted 
 by inverse means at the commands; 1. lij/ t iron (or by file), from the 
 left. 2. March. If the column is to march by twos, the guide is 
 indicated to the right immediately after the command march. 
 
 SABRE EXERCISE. 
 
 505. The captain causes the sabre exercise to be executed at a halt; 
 for this purpose be opens the ranks and commands : 
 
 1. Bt/ the left for riffht), open files. 2. M.vrch. 3. Right (or 
 left) — Din-:ss. 4. Front. 
 
 At the command march, the right trooper of each rank moves for- 
 ward si.\ paces; the one on the left of each rank turns to the left and 
 moves forward; he is followed by all the other troopers of his rank, who 
 execute the same movement as soon as they have the necessary space 
 to put themselves in file at their proper distances. The second trooper 
 from the right of each rank after having niarclied three paces turns 
 and dresses to the right; each of the other troopers looks occasionally to 
 the rear, and performs the same movement in succession when at three 
 paces from the one who follows him and dresses upon those already 
 formed ; the troopers of the rear rank place themselves exactly behind 
 their file-leaders. 
 
 After the command march, the captain moves to the riglit of the 
 front rank, and when the second trooper from the right has turned to 
 the front he commands ri<jht — Dukss. After having rectified the 
 alignment and tiic distances in the two ranks he commands front. 
 
 500. When the caiUain wishes to reform the troop he commands: 
 
 1. To the right (or left) close files. 2. March. 
 At the coniuiiuid iiionh, the right trooper of each rank moves forward 
 
SCHOOL OF THE TROOP. 809 
 
 six paces; all the other troopers execute a turn to the right and more 
 forward. 
 
 Each trooper, on arriving within two paces of the place he is to 
 occupy in line, turns to the left and places himself on the left of the 
 troopers already formed and dresses to the right. The captaiu closes 
 the ranks as soon as they are formed. 
 
 Direct march of the troop in line. 
 
 507. The most important point in the direct maych being to keep the 
 horses straight in the ranks, it is indispensable that the trooper should 
 preserve the head direct. 
 
 To keep themselves aligned the troopers should feel lightly the boot 
 of the man on the side of the guide, and march at an equal gait. They 
 should yield to all pressure coming from the side of the guide and resist 
 that coming from the opposite side. 
 
 The guide should always march at a free and steady gait, and change 
 it with steadiness in order to avoid irregularity in the ranks. If the 
 troopers are in front or in rear of the alignment, too near or too far from 
 the man on the side of the guide, the}' move from or approach him 
 gradually. When the guide feels himself thrown out of his direction 
 he extends his arm to the front to indicate that there is too much press- 
 ure toward him, when the troopers carry the hand toward the opposite 
 side, give a glance to the guide, and straighten their horses as soon as 
 the guide is relieved. 
 
 The guide shoirld be alternately to the right and to the left, that the 
 troopers maj' acquire the habit of dressing equally well toward either 
 direction. 
 
 508. To march the troop forward the captain commands : 
 
 1. Troop, forward. 2. Guide right (or left). 3. March. 
 
 At the command mdrch, all the troopers move straight forward, at the 
 same gait with the men on the side of the guide. 
 
 The troopers march straight forward, feeling the boot lightly on the 
 side toward the guide. 
 
 To halt the troop the captain commands 
 
 1. Troop. 2. Halt. 3. Right (or left) — Drkss. 4. Froxt. 
 
 At the command halt, the troopers stop. 
 
 At the command ri'f//(f — Dress, the.v align themselves; and at the 
 command //oil/, turn the head to the front. 
 
 After the troop has been exercised sufficiently in the direct march at 
 
310 MANUAL iOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 the tcalk it will be practised at the trot, and afterward at the gallop; 
 when marching at & gallop the troop should habitually pass to the trot 
 and the icalk, before being halted; but when the troopers are masters 
 of their horses it may be hatted from the gallop. 
 
 Countermarch. 
 
 509. The troop having arrived at the extremity of the ground, iu 
 order to change the direction the captain commands: 
 
 1. Countermarch^ by the right flank. 2. By file to the right. 
 3. March. 
 
 (Fig. 121.) At the command countermarch, by the right jlank, the 
 chiefs of platoons turn to the right, the chief of the first platoon placing 
 himself in front of his first file; the file-closers turn to the Uft and pass 
 to the left of the troop, placing themselves abrea.«t of the rear rank. 
 
 The guide of the right places himself promptly behind the guide of 
 the left, facing to the rear, the croup of his horse at six paces from the 
 rear rank. 
 
 At the command march, the trooper on the right of each rank tnrnt 
 to the right, the rear rank man joining the front rank man ; they then 
 wheel together to the right, the latter lengthening his gait a little; they 
 pass very near the croups of the horses of the rear rank, and are fol- 
 lowed by the other troopers, who execute the same movement in suc- 
 cession, taking care to pass over the same ground. 
 
 When the first file is two paces from the right guide, who indicates 
 the place where it is to form, the captain commands : 
 
 1. Front. 2. Halt. 3. Jtight — Dukss. 4. Front. 
 
 The file-closers follow the movement, and resume their places as they 
 arrive at them 
 
 After having commanded march, the captain moves rapidly to the 
 flank by which the movement is executed, in order to direct the head 
 of the column and to reform the troop to the rear upon a line parallel 
 to the one it at first occujiied. 
 
 The troop l)eiug aliirneil, the captaiu commands front. At this com- 
 mand the chiefs of platoons face to the front by a turn to the left. 
 
 The countermarch should generally be executed at the trot. For this 
 purpose, after the second command the captain indicates the gait. 
 
 This movement is executed by the lefl flank, by inverse means. 
 
8CH00L OF THE TROOP. 311 
 
 The troop being in line, to form it in column with distance. 
 610. The captain commauds : 
 
 1. Platoons, right wheel. 2. March. 3. Halt. 
 
 (Fig. 122.) At the first command the left file of each platoon pre- 
 pares to step ofi" promptly and the pivot to turn upon its own ground. 
 
 At the command march, each platoon executes its wheel to the right, 
 following the principles of the wheel on a fixed pivot, the marching 
 flanks taking care to step ofi' and wheel together. 
 
 At the command halt, the marching flanks and all the troopers halt 
 at the same instant, those of the rear rank resuming their places behind 
 their file-leaders. 
 
 The captain commands halt when the platoons have nearly com- 
 pleted the wheels. 
 
 The chiefs of platoons, without leaving their platoons, observe that 
 the movement is correctly executed. 
 
 During the movement the guide of the left passes as file-closer behind 
 the second file from the left of the second platoon. 
 
 To march in column with distance. 
 
 511. In this order of column the guides should preserve between 
 them a distance equal to the front of their platoons, and regulate their 
 gait upon that of the preceding guide. 
 
 The chiefs of platoons are responsible for the preservation of the dis- 
 tance, which should be half of the front of the platoon, assuming it to 
 contain twelve files, measured from the croups of the horses of the rear 
 rank of the leading platoon to the heads of the horses of the front rank 
 of the rear platoon. 
 
 The troop being in open column, right in front, the captain com- 
 mands : 
 
 1. Column, forward. 2. March. 3. Guide left. 
 
 At the command march, both platoons put themselves in motion at 
 the same time. 
 
 Before the column commences the march the captain gives the guide 
 of the first platoon a point of direction. 
 
 Changes of direction. 
 
 512. In the open column the changes of direction are executed by 
 successive wheels on « muvable pilot, so that the march of the column 
 
312 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND JllLITIA. 
 
 may not bo retarded. The arc of a circle dcscrilied by the pivots 
 should be fii-c puce'. 
 
 The column being iu march, to change the direction the captain 
 commands: 
 
 Head of column to the left or half-left (or to the right or half-right). 
 
 (Fig. 12.3.) At this command the chief of the first platoon com- 
 mands: 1. Lc/( — TuHN. 2. Forward, which is executed on the 
 principles of the wheel upon a movable pivot. 
 
 The chief of the second platoon gives the same commands in time 
 for his platoon to turn upon the same ground. 
 
 In this change of direction while marching, the guide of the right, 
 at the command head of column to the left, moves rapidly to the side of 
 the pivot, and places himself so that the head of his horse will mark 
 the centre point of the arc described by the pivot. 
 
 Both platoons commence their wheel at two and a half paces before 
 arriving abreast of the head of the horse of the guide of the right, so 
 as to prevent the column from being thrown out. The guide resumes 
 his place when the second platoon has completed its wheel. 
 
 Individual oblique tnarch. 
 
 51.3. The troop marching in column, with distauce, right in front, to 
 cause it to gain ground toward one of the flanks, without changing the 
 front of the column, the captain commands : 
 
 1. Lefl (or right) oblique. 2. March. 
 
 (Fig. 124.) At the command nidrch, the troopers all execute at the 
 same time n qiiurter-tiirn to the right, so that the head of each horse 
 m.iy be opposite the extremity of the neck of the horse on his right, 
 and that the right kneo of each trooper may be in rear of the left knco 
 of the trooper on his right. This first movement being executed th« 
 troopers move forward in the new direction, regulating themselves 
 upon the guide. 
 
 Tlie guide of the yecond platoon pays attention to march on the same 
 line, to preserve his distance, and to keep in a direction exactly parallel 
 to that of the guide of the first platoon. 
 ' To resume the primitive direction the captain commands: 
 
 • Forward. 
 
 At this command the troopers straighten Ihuir horses and move 
 forward, regulating themselves upon the guide. 
 
 In the oblique nuirch the guiilc i.i always on the obliquing iide, 
 
SCHOOL OF THE TROOP. ' 313 
 
 without being imlicateil: aud after the command fnrtcard, the guide 
 returns, without indication, to the side on which he was before the 
 oblique. 
 
 To break by fours, by twos, and by Jile / to form twos, fours, and 
 platoons at the sa7Jte gait. 
 
 514. The troop mandiing in column with distance, right in front, to 
 break by fours at the same gait the captain commands : 
 
 1. By fours. 2. March. 3. Guide left. 
 
 At the command hy fours, repeated by the chief of the first platoon, 
 this officer places himself in front of the first four files on the right; 
 the right guide places himself ou his right. 
 
 At the command march, which is also repeated by the chief of the 
 platoon, this platoon breaks by fours, as prescribed, No. 485, and 
 the chief of the second platoon commands halt. 
 
 The chief of the second platoon commands hy /ours, in sufiicient 
 time to command yiiarch the moment the last four files of the 
 first platoon commence the oblique movement in order to enter the 
 column. 
 
 515. The troop marching in column by fours, right in front, to break 
 by twos, at the same gait, the captain commands : 
 
 1. By twos. 2. March. 3. Guide lefl. 
 
 The chiefs of platoons conform to what is prescribed in order to 
 break by fours, and give the command halt ; and then, 1. Ihj twos, 
 2. March, so as to cause no confusion in the column. 
 
 516. The troop marching in column by twos, right in front, to break 
 by file at the same gait the captain commands : 
 
 1. By file. 2. March. 
 
 Which is executed as prescribed for breaking by twos, the guide of 
 the right placing himself behind the chief of the first platoon. 
 
 517. The troop, marching in column with distance, at the trot, 
 right in front, to break by fours at the same gait the captain com- 
 mands : 
 
 1. By fours. 2. March. 3. Guide left. 
 
 At the first command, repeated by the chief of the first platoon, this 
 officer and the guide of the right place themselves as prescribed, No. 
 614, and the chief of the second platoon commands walk. 
 27 
 
314 MANUAL FOR VOI.l.NTEKRS AND* MII.ITIA. 
 
 At the comninnd vmrrh, rcpcnfcd hy lioth the chiefs of plntoons. the 
 first platoon brenks hy fours, as prescribed, No. 514, and the second 
 platoon takes the iralk. 
 
 The chief of the second platoon commands fcy four*, trot, in 
 sufficient time to command march when the last four files of the 
 first platoon commeuce the oblique movement in order to enter the 
 column. 
 
 The same priniipk-s are ujiplicuble to breaking by twos, and by 
 file. 
 
 When the column is at the (/(lUop these movements arc executed on 
 the principles just prcscriltcd, the whole column except the first four 
 files passing to the trot, and resuming the ijalloj} as the files break in 
 order to enter the column. 
 
 518. The troop marching in cohimn by file, right in front, to form 
 twos at the same gait the captain commands: 
 
 1. Form twos. 2. March. 
 
 At the commands /orm ^^o« and march, repeated b}' the chief of the 
 first platoon, this platoon executes the movement as prescribed. No. 
 500 ; the guide of the right moves to the right of the chief of the 
 first platoon, who commands halt after having marched ten paces. 
 The other platoon continues to march by file, and executes the move- 
 ment at the command of its chief, who docs not touunand march 
 until the first file of his platoon has arrived at its proper distance. 
 
 519. The troop marching in column by twos, right in front, to form 
 fours at the same gait the captain commands : 
 
 1. Form fours. 2. March. 
 
 Which is executed as is prescribed for forming twos. 
 620. The troop marching in column of fours, right in front, to form 
 platoons at the same gait the captain ccmimands : 
 
 1. Form platoons. 2. March. 
 
 At the first command the chief of the first platoon commands form 
 platoon. 
 
 At the command march, repeated by the chief of the first platoon, 
 the guide of the right places himself on the right of this platoon, which 
 forms as front into line, No. 488; the chief of the platoon commands 
 halt after having marched twenty paces. 
 
 The other platoon continues to march in column by fours, and forms 
 at the command : 1. Form platoon — March, given by its chief in suf- 
 
SCHOOL OF THE TROOP. 315 
 
 fieient time to command halt when the first four files of the platoon 
 arrive at six paces from the platoon which precedes. 
 
 521. When the column is at the trot the same principles are con- 
 formed to, cxc».'])t that instead of halting, the first two or four files of 
 the first platoon pass to the icrdk at the command march given by their 
 chief. The second platoon continues to march at the trut, and execute 
 the movement at the same gait, the first two or four files of the platoon 
 passing also to the n-alk at the command march, given by the chief of 
 the platoon when they arrive at their proper distances. 
 
 When the column is at the (jnllop, to form twos, fours, etc., the same 
 principles are observed, the first two or four files of each platoon pass- 
 ing to the trot at the command inarch, given by their chief. 
 
 When these formations are executed at the trot and at the gallop, the 
 guide is announced by the captain as soon as the first files have 
 doubled or the first platoon is formed ; in the last case only each chief 
 of platoon repeats the command of the guide as soon as his platoon is 
 formed. 
 
 To break by fours, by (tvo.i, and hj Jile ; to form twos, fours, and 
 platoons in doubling the gait. 
 
 522. The trooper marching in column with distance, right in front, 
 to break by fours in doubling the gait the captain commands : 
 
 1. By fours — trot. 2. March. S.Guidelef. 
 
 At the first command, repeated by the chief of the first platoon, this 
 officer and the guide of the right place themselves as prescribed. No. 
 514. 
 
 At the command tnarch, repeated by the chief of the first platoon, 
 this platoon breaks by fours as prescribed. No. 514. 
 
 The other platoon continues to march at the walk ; its chief com- 
 mands by fount — trot, in sufficient time to command march the moment 
 the last four files of the first platoon commence the oblique movement 
 in order to enter the column. 
 
 These principles are applicable to breaking by twos and by file. 
 
 When the column is at the trot, to break at the gallop the same prin- 
 ciples are observed at the commands : 
 
 1. By fours, gallop. 2 March. 3. Guide left. 
 
 523. The troop marching in column by files, to form twos in doubling 
 the gait the captain commands: 
 
16 .MAMAL FCiR VOLUNTEERS ANIi MII.ITIA. 
 
 1. Form twos — trot. 2. March. 3. Guide left. 
 
 At the commands form ticon — trot, and mnrrh, repeated by the chief 
 of the firjt platoon, this platoon executes its movements as prescribed, 
 No. 500, and the guide of the right moves to the right of the chief of 
 the first jilafoon. 
 
 At the first command the chief of the second platoon commands trot. 
 At the command march, repeated by him. the second platoon takes the 
 trot. He commands form tirot in sufRcient time to command march 
 the moment the first file of the platoon is nearly at its proper distance; 
 the first file then passes to the walk. 
 
 524. The troop marching in column of twos, to form fours in 
 doubling the gait the captain commands : 
 
 1. Form fours — trot. 2. March. 3. Guide left. 
 
 Which is executed as prescribed for forming twos. 
 
 525. The troop marching in column by fours, to form platoon in 
 doubling the gait the captain commands : 
 
 1. Form ptntonns — trot. 2. March. 3. Guide left. 
 
 At the fir.st command the chief of the first platoon commands form 
 platoon — trot. 
 
 The chief of the second platoon commands trot. 
 
 At the command viarch, repeated by these officers, the first platoon 
 forms as prescribed, No. 520, and the guide of the right places himself 
 on the right of this platoon. The second platoon takes the trot. The 
 chief of this platoon gives the command /^rwi tiros in sufficient time to 
 Command march the moment the first file of his platoon is nearly at its 
 proper distance ; the first file then passes to the icall:. 
 
 620. The troop marching in column by twos, to form fours in 
 doubling the gait the captain commands : 
 
 1. Form fours — trot. 2. March. 3. Guide left. 
 
 Which is executed as prescribed for forming twos. 
 527. The troop marching in column by fours, to form platoons in 
 doubling the gait the captain commands : 
 
 1. Form platoons — trot. 2. March. 3. Guide left. 
 
 At the first command the chief of the first platoon commands/orm 
 platoon — trot. 
 
 The chief of the second platoon commands trot. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE TllOOP. 317 
 
 At the command march, repeated by these officers, the first platoon 
 forms as prescribed. No. 520, and the guide of the right places himself 
 on the right of this platoon. 
 
 The second platoon takes the trot .and forms at the command forvi 
 platoon, given by its chief in sufficient time to command march, when 
 the first four files arrive at their proper distance from the first platoon; 
 then these four files take the wal/c. 
 
 The captain commands guide left when the first platoon is formed, 
 and gives a point of direction. 
 
 The chief of the second platoon commands the guide as soon as his 
 platoon is formed. 
 
 When the column is at the trot these formations are executed at the 
 yalliip, following the same principles at the commands : 1. Form ticoa, 
 or form fuurs, or form ]>kitoon9, gallop. 2. MauCH. 
 
 The troop marching in column ivith distance, to face it in the 
 opposite direction, and to face it to the front again. 
 
 528 The troop marching in open column, right in front, the cnptain 
 commands : 
 
 1. Platoons, le/l about wheel. 2. March. 
 
 (Fig. 125.) At the first command the trooper on the left of each 
 platoon, who becomes the pivot, prepares to halt, without, however, 
 slackening his pace. 
 
 At the command march, the pivots halt and the marching flanks 
 wheel at the gait in which the column was marching, regulating them- 
 selves upon the outer flank of the platoon at the head of the column, 
 so as to complete the first half of the movement at the same instant. 
 
 The movement being nearly finished the captain commands : 
 
 1. Forward. 2. Guide right. 
 
 During this movement the guide of the left places himself on the 
 left of the second platoon ; the guide of the right takes his place as 
 file-closer in rear of the second file from the right of the first platoon, 
 and the other file-closers pass to the side opposite the guide. 
 
 To cause the troop to resume its primitive direction the captain 
 commands : 
 
 1. Platoons, right about wheel. 2. March. 3. Forward. 
 4. Guide left. 
 
 529. The column being on the march, to halt it the captain com- 
 mands : 
 
818 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MIMTIA. 
 
 1. Column. 2. Halt. 
 
 At the Cr.st coramiiiid both platoons prepare to halt, and at the 
 command liull halt at the same time. 
 
 To form line to the left. 
 
 530. The troop being in column with distance, right in front, to 
 form it in line on its left flank the captain commands : 
 
 1. Left into line, wheel. 2. Maucii. 3. Halt. 4. Right — 
 
 DUESS. 5. FxiONT. 
 
 At the first command the guide of the right moves upon the prolon- 
 gation of the guides of the column, at the distance of the front of a 
 platoon, facing the side toward which the line will be formed. 
 
 At the command march, the troop wheels into line, the trooper on 
 the left wing of each platoon serving as a pivot, and turning upon his 
 own ground. 
 
 The captain commamls halt the minneiit the inurrliing (lanks have 
 nearlj' completed their )novement, and then ri<i'nt — Drkss. 
 
 At this command both platoons align themselves. 
 
 The troo]) being aligned, the captain commands front. 
 
 During the wheel the guide of the left resumes his place in line. 
 
 531. The formation of the troop into a column with distance, left in 
 front; the march of this column; the changes of direction in a col- 
 umn, loft in front, etc., etc., are executed upon the same principles as 
 a column, right in front, but by inverse means. 
 
 To form line to the ritjht hij invention. 
 
 532. The troop marching in open column, right in front, to form it 
 in line upon its right flank by inversion the captain changes the guide; 
 for this purpose ho commands : 
 
 Guide right. 
 
 The captain passes by the head of the column to the side of the 
 new guides, rectifies their direction, then halts the column and com- 
 mands : 
 
 1. By inversion, right into line, wheel. 2. Makcii. 3. IIalt. 
 4. Left — Dress. 5. Front. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE TROOP. 319 
 
 Which is executed as prescribed for wheeling into line by the left, but 
 by inverse means. 
 
 To put the troop in column again, right in front, the captain com- 
 mands : 1. Platoont, left wheel. 2. MARCH. 3. H if.T (or FoRWARD). 
 •1. Ouide left. 
 
 To form on right into line. 
 
 533. The troop marching in column with distance, right in front, to 
 form it in Hue on the prolongation and in advance of its right dank the 
 captain commands : 
 
 1. On right into line. 2. March. 3. Guide — Right. 
 4. Front. 
 
 (Fig. 126.) At the first command the chief of the first platoon com- 
 mands right, and at the command mnrch he commands turn; the platoon 
 turns to the right, and moves forward at the command /oriparrfy when 
 it has marched thirtj' paces its chief commands half, and then right — 
 Dress. 
 
 The second platoon continues to march forward, without approaching 
 the line; as soon as it arrives abreast of the fourth file from the left of 
 the first platoon its chief commands : 1. Right — Ti'rn. 2. Fou\v\itD. 
 The platoon then directs itself toward the place it is to occupy in line, 
 and on arriving abreast of the file-closers its chief commands halt, and 
 then left — Dress. 
 
 When the troop is aligned the captain commauds fiont. 
 
 To form on left into line by inversion. 
 
 534. The troop marching iu column with distance, right in front, to 
 form it in line upon the prolongation and in advance of its left flank 
 the captain commands : 
 
 1. By inversion, on left into line. 2. March. 3. Guide left. 
 4. Front. 
 
 At the first command the chief of the first platoon commands left. 
 
 At the command march he commands tiirti ; the platoon turns to the 
 left, and moves forward at the command /orifanfy when it has marched 
 thirty paces its chief commands hall, and then /e/V— Dress. 
 
 The second platoon continues to march forward, without approaching 
 the line; when it arrives abreast of the fourth file from the right of the 
 first platoon its chief commands : 1. Left — Turn. 2. Forward; this 
 platoon directs itself toward the place it is to occupy in line, and on 
 
320 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 arriring abrenst of the file-cIosers its chief coinmaiuls hult, and then 
 left — Drkss. 
 
 To form front into line. 
 
 535. The troop being in column with distance, right in front, to form 
 it in line upon the head of the column the captain commands : 
 
 1. Front iiUo line. 2. March. 3. Guide right. 4. Front. 
 
 (Fig. 127.) At the first command the chief of the first platoon com- 
 mands plitloou, /(irw<tr(l, and the chief of the second commands platoon, 
 left half-tcheel. 
 
 At the command mnrrh, repeated by these ofliccrs, the first platoon 
 moves forward; its chief repeats the indication of the guide, and when 
 it has marched thirty paces he commands : I. Halt. 2. l{i<jht — Dkess. 
 
 The chief of the second platoon, when the left half-wheel is exe- 
 cuted, commands : 1. FoRWAUi). 2. Cfiirfe ny/ff, and marches straight 
 forward. When the right of his platoon arrives opjioi^ite the left of 
 the first platoon he commands: 1. Ri<jht half-tcheel. 2. Forward; 
 and when he arrives abreast of the file-closers : 1. Halt. 2. Itiyht — 
 DitESS. 
 
 The troop being aligned, the captain commands front. 
 
 To form line faced to the rear, on the rear of the column. 
 
 5,36. The troop being in column with distance, right in front, to form 
 line faced to the roar the captain commands: 
 
 1. Plaloonis, left about wheel. 2. March. 3. Front into line. 
 4. March. 5. Guide left. 6. Fuunt. 
 
 (Fig. 128.) At the second command each platoon executes its wheel 
 to the left about. • 
 
 At the fourth cdinnuinil the chief of the S'-'coud i)lat()on, now in 
 fr'int, when its wheel is nearly completed commands forward, guide 
 hfi ; and when it has marched thirty paces: 1. Ualt. 2. Left — 
 DitEss. 
 
 The chief of the second jilatoon, on comjiloting three-fourths of his 
 wheel, commands : 1. FoitWAUi). 2. (fi/n/t /c/V, and directs it tuward 
 the place it is to occupy in line, conforming in other respects to what is 
 jirescribed fox fimtt into line wh( n the column is Icfl in front. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE TROOP. 321 
 
 To form line faced to the rear on the head of the column. 
 
 537. Tbc troop being in column with distance, rij^ht in front, to form 
 line faced to the rear upon the head of the column the captain com- 
 mands : 
 
 1. By inversion, front iiito line. 2. March. 3. Guide left. 
 
 (Fig. 129.) At the first command the chief of the first platoon com- 
 mands platoon, forward; and the chief of the second, /)/afoo)i, right 
 hnl/->chcel. 
 
 At the command march, repeated by these officers, the movement is 
 executed as prescribed U^r front into line, but by inverse means. 
 
 The captain without rcctifjMng the alignment commands : 
 
 1. Platoon, left about wheel. 2. March. 3. Halt. 4. Right — 
 Dress. 5. Front. 
 
 Movements by fours, the troop being in column toilh distance. 
 
 538. The troop being in column with distance, right in front, to cause 
 it to gain ground toward its left flank the captain commands : 
 
 1. By fours, left wheel. 2. March. 3. Forward. 4. Guide right. 
 
 (Fig. 130.) At the command march, each rank of fours executes its 
 wheel to the left, according to the principles of the wheel on a fixed 
 pivot; Nos. 4 turn upon themselves, sustaining with the left leg the 
 haunches of their horses, in order not to constrain the movement of the 
 rank immediately behind them; all the troopers regulate themselves 
 toward the marching flanks. 
 
 539. To take a direction parallel to the first, and return to column 
 with distance, the captain commands : 
 
 1. By fours, right wheel. 2. March. 3. Halt. 
 
 This is executed on the same principles, but by inverse means. 
 If instead of halting the captain wishes the column to march forward 
 ho commands : L Forward. 2. Guide left. 
 
 540. The troop being in column with distance, right in front, it is 
 caused to gain ground toward its right flank by the commands: 1. By 
 fours, right wheel. 2. MARCH. 3. FoRWAlU). 4. Guide left; and to 
 resume the primitive direction at the commands : 1. By fours, left 
 wheel. 2. March. 3. Halt (or Forward). 4. Guide left. 
 
 541. The troop being in column with distance, right in front, to 
 cause it to march to the rear the captain commands : 
 
322 MANUAL FOK VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 1. By fours, lefl about wheel. 2. March. 3. Fouward. 
 4. Guide right. 
 
 (Fig. 131.) At tbc command march, the muvcmuiit is executed in 
 each rank l>y foiir.s, so as to throw the rear rank hufore the frout rank, 
 and the ranks of fours are inverted throughout the column. 
 
 If iiiistead of moving forward after the wheel to the left about iy jonri 
 the captain wishes to halt the column he commands halt. 
 
 To return to the primitive direction the captain commands: 
 
 1. By fours, riyht about wheel. 2. March. 3. Halt. 
 
 Which is executed as just prescribed, but by inverse means. 
 If the captain wishes the column to march forward he commands: 
 1. FOKWARD. 2. Guide left. 
 
 542. In all the movements to the left and to the ri<iht by fours the 
 chiefs of platoons move up abreast of the first rank of their jdutoons, 
 on the side of the guide. 
 
 The captain, the file-closers, and the guides of the right and left 
 preserve their places after the wheel to the left or n'yht by fours is com- 
 pleted, facing in the new direction. 
 
 In the wheel to the left or riyht about by foum, the chiefs of platoons 
 march behind the centres of their platoons and the file-closers in front. 
 The guide of the right is on the left of his platoon and the guide of the 
 left in front of his. 
 
 WHEELINGS. 
 
 543. During the wheel the chiefs of platoons keep at the centre of 
 their platoons, and correctly aligned, keeping their horses upon the arc 
 of a circle, more or less great, iu proportion to their distance from the 
 pivot. The files on the flanks of jilatoons close ui)on each other, all 
 observing tlie progression of the marching flank and keeping upon the 
 arcs they should describe. 
 
 To wheel on a fixed pivot. 
 
 644. The troop is exercised in wheeling on a fixed pivot first at the 
 walk, then at the trot, also at the gallo]). 
 
 The troops being halted and correctly aligned, the captain com- 
 mands: 
 
 1. Troop in circle, to the right. 2. March. 
 
 Which is executed on the principles prescril)ed, Nos. 434 and 435. 
 
I 
 
 SCHOOL OF THE TKOOP. dli.i 
 
 To halt the troop during the wheel the captain commands : 
 
 1. Troop. 2. Halt. 3. Left — Dkess. 4. Front. 
 
 At the first command the troopers of the rear rank straighten their 
 horses and resume their places behind their file-leaders. 
 ' At the second command all the troopers halt. 
 
 At the third command the troop dresses to the left. 
 
 The troop being aligned, the captain commands /roll^ 
 
 If instead of halting the captain wishes to resume the direct march 
 he commands : 
 
 1 . Forward. 2. Guide left. 
 
 At the first command the troopers of the rear rank straighten their 
 horses and place themselves behind their file leaders, and the whole 
 troop moves forward at the gait in which it was marching before the 
 wheel. 
 
 545. The troop wheeling to the right at the xcnlk, or at the (rot. the 
 captain commands : 
 
 1. Troop in circle, left wheel. 2. March. 
 
 Which is executed as prescribed, Nos. 434 and 4.S5. 
 646. The troop being halted, the captain commands: 
 
 ( right (or left') wheel. ^ 
 
 1. Troop, 4 right about [or left about) wheel. > 2. March. 
 
 ( right half (or left half) loheel. ) 
 
 3. Troop. 4. Halt. 5. Left (or right) — Dress. 6. Front. 
 
 To exercise the troop while marching at the wheels on a fixed pivot 
 the captain commands : 
 
 ( right (or left) wheel. ") 
 
 1. Troop, ■< right about (^or left about) whf el. > 2. March. 
 
 ( 7-ight half (or left half) wheel. ) 
 
 3. Forward. 4. Guide left {or guide right). 
 
 To wheel on a movable pivot. 
 
 547. The troop marching in line, to change direction to the right the 
 captain commands : 
 
 1. Right — Turn. 2. Forward. 
 
 Which is executed as prescribed. No. 438, the pivot describing an arc 
 of o circle of Jifteen paces. 
 
324 MANUAL FOU VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 Movements by /ours. 
 
 5 IS. The troop being in line, to cause it to gain ground toward its 
 riglit flank tlie eaptaiii coinraands , 
 
 1. By fours, right wheel. 2. Makch. 3. Forward. 4. Guide 
 
 Which is executed as prescribed, No. 540. Tlie chiefs of platoons 
 march on the side of the guide, at one pace from and abreast of the 
 leading files of their platoons. 
 
 The guide of the right marches in front of the column at one pace 
 from the leading rank of eight, the guide of the left behind the last 
 rank of eight of the second platoon. 
 
 To put the troop in line again the captain commands : 
 
 1. By fours, lejl wheel. 2. March. 3. Halt. 4. liit/ht — 
 Dress. 5. Front. 
 
 Which is executed as prescribed. No. 540, the guides resuming their 
 places in line. 
 
 The troop marching in line, to break it by platoons, to the right, 
 and to form it again into line. 
 
 549. The troop marchin<; in lino, to cause it to gain ground toward 
 its rigli' flank the captain commands: 
 
 1. Platoons, right ti'heel. 2. Marcu. 3. Forward. 
 4. Guide left. 
 
 AVhich is exercised as prescribed, No. 510, the ]iivots halting short 
 and the left file of each platoon stepping out ])romptly. so as to arrive 
 together in column. 
 
 To put the troop in line again the captain commands: 
 
 1. Platoons, left wheel. 2. March. 3. Forward. 
 4. Guide right. 
 
 Tlic marching flanks regulate their movements so as to arrive to- 
 gether in line. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE TROOP. 325 
 
 The troop marching in line, to break it to the front by platoons, 
 and to reform it. 
 
 550. The captain commands: 
 
 1. By platoon, to the front. 2. March. 3. Guide left. 
 
 (Fig. 1.32.) At the command mnrch, the first platoon continues to 
 march forward; its chief repeats the command rjiii'le left. At the first 
 command the chief of the second platoon commands : Platoon, right 
 hnlf-wheef, which is commenced at the command march; when it is 
 executed the chief of the platoon commands: 1. Forwaud. 2. (Snide. 
 left, and marches it straight forward. When the left of bis platoon 
 arrives in the direction of the first platoon he commands : 1. Left half- 
 wheel. 2. March. 3. Forward; in order to take his position in column. 
 
 The movement is executed in the same manner at the trot and at tho 
 gallop. 
 
 551. The troop marching in column with distance, right in front, 
 to fiirm it at the same gait the captain commands : 
 
 1. Form troop. 2. Marcei. 3. Guide right. 
 
 This movement is executed in the same manner as front into line, 
 No. 5.35, except that, as the troop is on the march, the chief of the fir.«t 
 platoon does not command /j^^^orm forward, or march, but repeats the 
 command for the guide. 
 
 The troop marching at the trot, this movement is executed on the 
 same principles, except that the chief of the first platoon commands : 
 
 1. Walk. 2. March ; the guide of the right moving up on the line 
 wiyi tho chiefs of platoons, and the chief of the second platoon com- 
 mands: 1. Walk. 2. March, on arriving in line. When the column 
 is at the gallop the platoons take the trot in succession. 
 
 The troop marching in line, it is broken by the left by inverse means 
 at the commands: 1. By the left, by platoong to the front. 2. March. 
 3. Guide right. 
 
 The same movement may bo performed by doubling the gait at the 
 commands: 1. By platoons to the fnont, trot. 2. March. 3. Guide left. 
 At the first command the chief of the first platoon commands trot ; 
 the chief of the second commands ;7/'tYoo)i, right half-wheel, trot. 
 
 At the command march, the movement is executed as before. 
 
 The line may be reformed at the commands : 1. Form troop, trot. 
 
 2. March. 3. Guide right. At the first command the chief of the 
 second platoon commands platoon, left half-wheel, trot. The first 
 
326 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MII.ITIA. 
 
 platoon continues to inarch nt a xcnU.-, and its chief repeats the com- 
 niaud for the guide. When the second platoon arrives in line its chief 
 commands: 1. Walk. 2. Makch. 
 
 T II E C II A 11 G E . 
 
 552. The troop is exercised at the charjre: 1. /ii line. 2. In column. 
 3. j4» fornijers. 
 
 The chanje in line is executed bj- the troop when in line ; it should 
 bo as short as possible, so as to arrive in good order and without 
 fatiguing the horses. 
 
 The charge in column is executed by the troop when broken into 
 column of platoons with distance. 
 
 To execute the charge at foramen all the troopers of the troop 
 disperse, and direct themselves each upon the point he wishes to 
 attack, observing not to lose sight of their officers, who charge with 
 them. 
 
 553. The troop being in line, the captain orders the sabres to be 
 drawn and the platoons to charge in succession. 
 
 For this purpose the captain advances 240 paces to the front, taking 
 a trumpeter with him ; and when he wishes the movement to com- 
 mence ho causes a signal to bo given. 
 
 The first platoon then moves forward at the commands: 1. Platoon, 
 forward. 2. Guide right (or left). 3. March, by its chief. It passes 
 in succession from the walk to the trot, from the trot to the gallop, and 
 from the gallop to the charge. 
 
 When the platoon has moved some sixty paces at the charge the 
 chief of platoon commands: 1. Alteiitii>n. 2. Platnon. 3. IIai.t. 4. 
 Jiight — Dress. 5. Front. 
 
 At the command attention, the trooi)er8 carry the sabre to the 
 shoulder. At the command jilntoou, thej' take the trot. At the com- 
 mand halt, they stop. At the command right — Dre.ss, they align 
 themselves to the right. At the command front, turn the head to the 
 front. 
 
 The second platoon fallows when the first has halted. 
 
 654. To execute the charge by the troop the captain places himself 
 in front of the centre of his troop and commands : 
 
 1. Trocp forward. 2. Guide right ('or left). 3. March. 
 When the troop has marched twenty paces ho commands : 
 1. Trot. 2. March. 
 
 I 
 
SCHOOL OF THE TROOP. 327 
 
 At sixty paces further he commands: 
 
 1. Gallop. 2. March. 
 
 At eighty paces further he commands: 
 
 Charge. 
 
 At this command, repealed by the chiefs of platoons, the troopers 
 of both ranks take the position of raise nabre. They give hand and 
 lengthen the gallop, without losing control of their horses or disuniting. 
 
 When the troop has passed over sixtj* paces to the charge the captain 
 commands : 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Troop. 3. Halt. 4. Right — Dress. 
 6. Front. 
 
 At the command aitentinn, repeated by the chiefs of platoons, the 
 troopers prepare to slacken the pace, and carry the sabre to the 
 shoulder. 
 
 At the command troop, the chiefs of plat'>ons comtaanA platoon, and 
 the troopers pass to the trot. 
 
 At the command halt, repeated by the chiefs of platoons, the troopers 
 halt. 
 
 At the command ru;/;^ — Dress, thej- align themselves to the right. 
 
 The troop being aligned, the captain commands /roH^ 
 
 When the troop executes the charge correctly, instead of halting 
 when the charge is finished the captain commands : 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Trot. 3. March. 
 
 655. At these commands, repeated by the chiefs of platoons, the troop 
 passes to the trot and he commands : 
 
 1. First (or second) platoon, as foragers. 2. March. 
 
 At these commands, repeated by the chief of the platoon designated, 
 the platoon moves forward at the gallop and disperses as foragers. A 
 trumpeter follows the chief of the platoon. 
 
 The other platoon follows at a trot; when it has passed over 150 
 paces the captain causes the rallt/ to be sounded. At this signal, re- 
 peated by the trumpeter of the platoon dispersed as foragers, the latter 
 rally upon the other platoon bj' wheeling to the left about, and resum- 
 ing their places in rank by the shortest line, the troopers entering the 
 
328 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 ranks by llic rear. When tliroc-fnurths of the jilntoon linvc rallied and 
 are in line ll.e cajitain ennim.inclsi : 
 
 1. Allptitiiin. 2. Gallnp. 3. March. - 4. Ciiargk. 
 
 The troiip again executes the rlinrije iu linr ; the troopers who have 
 not been able to rally charge upon the flanks of the troop. 
 
 550. The troop marching in column with distance, at the tmt, the 
 captain commands : 
 
 1. To the charge. 2. March. 
 
 At the first command the chief of the first platoon commands ^<i//'(;j. 
 
 At the command innrch, repeated by the chief of the first platuon, 
 this platoon commences the t/filliip. 
 
 The other platoon follows at a trot, taking the (jail op when the first 
 platoon has gotten 50 paces in front of it. 
 
 When the first platoon has passed over 80 paces at the gnllup its 
 chief commands vharge. At this command the platoon executes the 
 charge ; and when it has passed over 60 paces its chief causes it to pass 
 to the ^-o/ by the commands : 1. Attention. 2. Trot. 3. March. 
 
 The other platoon pays attention to the movements of the first, so as 
 to change the gait in time and to resume the ordinary distance ; the 
 captain halts the column when he thinks proper. These charges are 
 executed, each platoon in turn taking the head of the column. 
 
 657. The troop marching in column witli distance, at the trot, the 
 captain commands : 
 
 1. First platoon, as /oratjej-s. 2. March. 
 
 At the command inurch, repeated bj' the chief of the first platoon, 
 this platoon disperses as foragers. The troop continues to march at 
 the trot, and when it has passed over 100 or 150 paces the captaiu 
 causes the rnl/y to be sounded. 
 
 At this signal the platoon rallies and reforms in rear of the second. 
 
 RALLYING. 
 
 558. To give the troopers the habit of rallying promptly, after hav- 
 ing been dispersed as foragers, the captain places the troop at the ex- 
 tremity of the drill ground ; and after giving notice to the files on the 
 flanks of platoons, the file-closers, and the trumpeters to remain upon 
 the line with him, he causes the disperte to be sounded. At this sig- 
 
SCHOOr, OF THK TROOP. 329 
 
 nal the troopers disperse and charge as foragers ; when they are at the 
 distance of 100 or 200 paces the captain causes the rnlh/ to be sounded. 
 
 The captain causes the troopers to disperse without confusion, and in 
 rallying sees that they direct themselves to the right and left of the 
 troop, in order to unmask the front of the troop, and to reform in 
 passing to the rear. 
 
 When the troopers rally without confusion this movement is re- 
 peated without requiring the flank files, etc., to remain on the line of 
 the troop. At the signal the troop disperses in every direction to the 
 front. 
 
 When the troop is dispersed the captain causes the rally to be 
 sounded. 
 
 At this signal the officers, the noB-commissii.ned officers, and the 
 troopers rejoin rapidly ; the officers align themselves promptly upon 
 the captain, and the non-commissioned officers promptly mark the 
 flanks of the platoons. 
 
 As soon as tlie captain has rallied two-thirds of the troop he moves 
 forward, charges again, and halts. 
 
 These movements arc first executed at the tmt and then at the 
 g-dlop. 
 
 Light cavalry should be particularly exercised in ch'iryin;/ nn for- 
 agers and in raUytmj. 
 
 SKIRMISHING. 
 
 559. The troop being in line the captain commands : 
 
 1. First (or second) platoon, as sliirmisheis. 2. March. 
 
 At the first command the chief of the first platoon orders the sabres 
 to be returned and the arms to be loaded; he then commands: !• 
 Platoon, foncard. 2. Guide right. .3. Trot. 
 
 At the command march, repeated by the chief of the platoon, this 
 platoon moves forward at the trot. After marching 100 paces to the 
 front the chief of the platoon commands: 1. Six files from right {or 
 left), as skirmishers. 2. March. .3. (rtiidr right (or left). 
 
 At the first command the senior file-closer places himself in front of 
 the files of his left, who are intended to support the skirmishers, and at 
 the command m((rch, causes them to halt and draw sabre. 
 
 At the command march, the six files of the right continue to move 
 
 forward : after going ten paces they disperse as skirmishers, extending 
 
 themselves so as to cover the exposed part of a troop in passing beyond 
 
 each of its flanks. The right trooper obliques to the right, the left 
 
 28 
 
o80 MANUAL FOR VOLL'NTEkilS AND MILITlA. 
 
 trooper to the li-ft. The troopers" of the rear rank come up ns soon as 
 possible abreast of the front rank, each one placin;^ himself on the 
 left of tli» file-closer, and as soon as they are in line all take the posi- 
 tion of advance cinbine or rcii»e pintnl. They continue to march 
 until the signal to halt. 
 
 The chief of platoon causes the halt to be sounded when the skir- 
 mishers are at 100 or 150 paces from the reserve. 
 
 The troopers keep at five paces apart, regulating themselves toward 
 the guide during the time they act as skirmishers. 
 
 The chief of platoon places himself in rear of the skirmishers, in 
 order to superintend their movement.-!. 
 
 When the captain wishes the skirmishers to re-enter the troop he 
 causes the rally to be sounded. At this signal the chief of the platoon 
 employed as skirmishers rallies his platoon, and then rejoins the troop 
 at a gallop. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SQUADRON. 331 
 
 Article IX. 
 SCHOOL OF'THE SQUADRON. 
 
 560. The object of the gchool of the squadron is to instruct four 
 platoons to execute together what has been taught to two, and to pre- 
 pare the squadron to perform what it will be required to do when a 
 part of the regiment. 
 
 To make the formations in line better understood they are executed 
 at first from a halt. Each movement after baring been correctly exe- 
 cuteil by the right is repeated by the left. ^ . ' 
 
 The troopers are made to mount and dismounl by the times, but 
 without explanation. 
 
 The captain commanding requires the distance between the platoons 
 to be preserved exactly in all the movements; he sees that the troop-" 
 era are not constrained, and that the rear rank men are not only in 
 the direction of their file-leaders, but that there is always two feet 
 between the heads of their horses and the croups of those of the front 
 rank. 
 
 The second captain is charged with the alignment of the rear rank 
 and the rank of file-closers ; he resumes his place in liae at the com- 
 mand /con*. • /' ■ 
 
 The captain commanding mores whererer his presence is most 
 required; the troopers are required to observe ahiolnte gilence, and all 
 rectifications are done by signs or in a low voice. 
 
 A large majority of the movements are the same, and are executed 
 by the same commands as those already laid down in the school of the 
 troop ; the only difference being that what is laid down as applicable to 
 irco platoons must now be made to apply to four. All the movements 
 of the squadron are indicated in the following number, those marked 
 in italics, not having been already described in the school of the troop, 
 are described further on ; for all the other movements a simple refer- 
 ence to corresponding movements in the school of the troop will bo 
 sufiicieut to make them all perfectly intelligible. 
 
 For the manner of forming the squadron, and the posts of the 
 officers, see No. 18. 
 
332 MANUAL FOR V&LUNTEKRS AND MILITIA. 
 
 MOVEMENTS OF THE SQUADRON. 
 
 561. .^«cce»»ire alignment of platoons in the nquadron. 
 
 Alignment of the squadron. 
 
 To open and close ranks. 
 
 To break the squadron by fours. 
 
 Direct march in column by fours. 
 
 Change of direction. 
 
 Individual oblique march. 
 
 The squadron marching in column by fours, to form it to the front, 
 to the left, or on right into line. 
 
 To regulate the rapidity of the gaits. 
 
 To form the squadron in one rank, and to form it in two ranks. 
 
 The squadron being in line, to form it in column with distance. 
 
 To march in column with distance. 
 
 Changes of direction by suucessire wheels. 
 
 Individual oblique march. 
 
 Change of gait, being in column with distance. 
 
 To break by fours, by twos, and by file; to form twos, four.^, and pla- 
 toons at the same gait. 
 
 The squadron marching in column with distance, to face it to the 
 opposite direction, and to face it again to the front. 
 
 To halt the column. 
 
 To form line on the left. 
 
 7'(> break by the riyht to march to the left. 
 
 To form lino to the right by inversion. 
 
 To break to the rear by the right to tiiarch to the left. 
 
 To form on right into line. 
 
 To form on left into line by inversion. 
 
 To break by platoons to the front. 
 
 To form front into line. 
 
 To break by 2)latooHS to the right, and to move forward after the 
 tcheel. 
 
 To form line to the front by inrcrsion. 
 
 To brctik by platoons to the right, head of column to the left or half- 
 left. 
 
 To form lino faced to the roar, on the rear of the column. 
 To form line faced to the rear, by inversion, on the rear of the 
 colnntti. 
 
 To break by plaloonii to the right, head of column to the right or half- 
 right. 
 
 To form, line faced to tlic rear, on the head of the column. 
 
 To firm line faced to the rear, by iufemion, on the head of the column. 
 
SCHOOL OF THK SQUADRON. 333 
 
 Movements by fours, the squadron being in column with distance. 
 
 Direct march of the squadron in line. 
 
 Countermarch. 
 
 Wheelings. 
 
 To wheel on a fixed pivot. 
 
 To wheel on a movable pivot. 
 
 Itidtvidnal oblique march. 
 
 Oblique march bi/ platoons. 
 
 Movements by fours. 
 
 The squadron being in line, to chute it to gain ground to the rear, and 
 to face it again to the front. 
 
 The squadron marching in line, to break by platoons to the right, 
 and to form it again in line. 
 
 The squadron marching in line, to march it to the rear by wheeling the 
 platoons about. 
 
 The squadron marching in line, to break it to the front by platoons 
 and to reform it. 
 
 The squadron marching in line, to break it to the front by platoons in 
 doubling the gait, and to re/or/n it. 
 
 Passage of obttaclei. 
 
 Charge. 
 
 Rallying. 
 
 Skirmishing. 
 
 The column by divisions. 
 
 Successive alignment of platoons in the squadron. 
 
 562. The squadron being in line, the captain commanding places the 
 two non-commissioned officers, principal guides of the right and left, 
 upon a line parallel to the front of the squadron, at thirty paces from 
 the front rank, and facing each other. 
 
 On receiving notice from the captain commanding, the chief of the 
 first platoon commands: 1. Platoon, forward. 2. Guide right. 3. 
 March. At the command march, the plat'ion moves forward ; at one 
 pace from the point which marks the new alignment the chief of the 
 platoon commands : 1. Halt. 2. Right — Duess. At the command /nt^f, 
 the chief of the platoon and guide of the right establish themselves 
 immediately, the latter bringing the he.ad of his horse ag.ainst the boot 
 of the principal guide of the right. 
 
 The first platoon being correctly aligned, the first captain com- 
 mands : 
 
 1. By platoon, rigJit — DuEss. 2. Front. 
 
384 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 .. •'.,•■■. 
 
 \- '■ '■ ' i"'" -.' - '■■.■■ 
 
 (Fig. 1.3.3.) At-the*firstconiiuand;tlijB «bief. of th« Second {tl&tQoac6tD- 
 
 mands : 1. Hntotm, junctird. '.2-." Giiidt right.- 3f March." Havifig 
 
 arrived abreast of the filc-oloaers of the platoon which furms the' base 
 
 uf the alignment, he eomuiunds : 1. Halt. 2. Uiijht — Duess, and at 
 
 the sami; time moves forward on the line of the chief of that platoon. 
 
 At the command halt, the platoon stops. At the command right — 
 
 Dress, all thc'troopers move. forward together upon the alignment. 
 
 Each chief of platoon executes the same movement, commanding 
 march when the one who precedes him has commanded Aa/f. The guide 
 of the left, lit the /;amnia'nd half fron^ the chief of the fourth platoon, 
 brings up the head, of his horse against the boot of the principal guide 
 of the left. "The' squadron being aligned, the first captain commatids 
 front. 
 
 The alignment being correctly executed, it is repeated, giving the 
 new base of alignment a direction oblique to the front of the squadron. 
 For this purposte'the chief, of the first platoon, on receiving notice from 
 the captain commanding, moves his platoon twenty-four paces to the 
 front, and caiisies it to execute a half-wheel to the right at the com- 
 mands : 1. Right half-wheel. 2. Forward : and after marching at six 
 paces in the new direction he halts and aligns it. The first platoon 
 being correctly aligned the first captain commands : 
 
 \. By platoon, right — Dress. 2. Front. 
 
 (Fig. 1.34.) The movement is executed by the platoons in succession ; 
 each chief of platoon moves straight forward and commands: 1. Right 
 half — Whkei.. 2. FouwARD, in time to complete the wheel at the mo- 
 ment the right arrives opposite the left of the platoon which precedes 
 it. The squadron being aligned, the first captain commands /ro»it. 
 
 To brealr by the right to march to the left. 
 563. The squadron being in line, the first captain commands: 
 1. Platoon, break to the right, to march in the left. 2. March. 
 
 (Fig. 135.) At the first command the chief of the first platoon com- 
 mands : 1. Platoon, forward. 2. Guide left. At the command morfA, 
 repeated by the chief of the first platoon, this platoon marches ten paces 
 to the front, turns to the left, and moves forward at the commands : 1. 
 Left — Turn. 2. Forward. 
 
 The chief of the second platoon, and successively those of the third 
 and fourth, command: 1. Platoon, finrard. 2. Guide left, when the 
 chief of the platoon on the right commands march; and they command 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SQUADRON. 335 
 
 march when the chief of that platoon, after having turned to the left, 
 commands /oncard. 
 
 To break to the rear by the right, to march to the left. 
 564. The squadron b«ing in line the first captain commands : 
 
 1. Platoons, break by the right to the rear, to march to the le/l. 
 . . 2. March. 
 
 (Fig. 1.36.) At the first command the chief of the first platoon 
 commands pluloou, right about wheel. At the command march, repeated 
 hy the chief of the first 'pfsitoon, this platoon executes its wheel to the 
 right about ; when nearly terminated, its chief commands :• 1. Forward. 
 
 2. Guide left ; and after marching ten, paces straight forward, he com- 
 mands: 1. Right — Turn. 2. Forward. , The chief of the second 
 platoon, and those of the third and fourth in succession, command 
 platoon, right about wheel when the chief of the platoon on the right 
 commands march, and they command march when that platoon has 
 passed over three-fourths of its first wheel. 
 
 *' *. .'i 
 
 To break by platoon.'^ to the right, and to move forward after the 
 wheel. 
 
 ■ 565. The squadron being in line,- the captain commanding com- 
 mands : 
 
 1. Platoon, right wheel. 2. March. 3. Forward. 4. Guide. 
 
 left. 
 
 At the first command the left file of each platoon prepares to step oflF 
 promptly and the pivot to turn upon itself. At the command march, 
 each platoon executes its wheel to the right, following the principles of 
 the wheel on a fi.xed pivot. At the third command the platoons march 
 straight forward. 
 
 To form line to the front by inversion. 
 
 566. The squadron Being in open column, right in front, to form 
 line by tnversiou upon the head of the column, the first captain com- 
 mands: 
 
 1. Byinversion, front into line. 2. March. 8. Guide left. 
 4. Front. 
 
336 MANUAL Full VOLUNTKKUS AND MILITIA. 
 
 At Ibo first conimnml the chief of (he first platoon commands plu- 
 tooii, /orirnrd ; and then the other chiefs of platoons command />/(»<oon, 
 rif/hl hnlf-trhcel. At the cominan'l wnrcfi, repeated by these officers, 
 the movement is executed as prescribed, No. 535, but by inverse luouns. 
 
 This formation is executed in the same manner when the column ia 
 marching; in this case the chief of the first platoon does not com- 
 mand platoon, /oncard uor march, but repeats the indication of the 
 guide. 
 
 To break by platoons to the right, head of column to the left or half- 
 
 left. 
 
 5()7. The squadron being in line, the first captain commands: 
 
 1. Platoons, right wheel — head of column to the left (or half-left"). 
 2. March. 3. Forward. 4. Guide left. 
 
 At the command march, each platoon executes its wheel to the riijht. 
 At the third command the chiuf of the first platoon commands: 1. 
 Le/t. — TuiiN. 2. FoiiWAiiD; the other platoons move on and turn in 
 succession, at the command of their chiefs, on the groiiml upon which 
 the first had turned. 
 
 The first captain commands forwird when the wheels are nearly 
 completed, and gives a point of direction. 
 
 To form line faced to the rear by inversion, on the rear of the 
 column. 
 
 568. The sijuailron being in column with di.stiince. right in front, and 
 obstacles are presented on its right flank, to form line faced to the rear 
 the first captain commands : 
 
 1. Platoons, right about wheel. 2. Maucii. S. By inversion, 
 front into line. 4. March. 5. Guide right. G. Front. 
 
 At the second command each platoon executes its wheel to the ri(jht 
 about. At the fourth command tho chief of the fourth platoon, which 
 becomes the head of the column, when its wheel is nearly completed 
 commuuds: 1. FoiiWAiiD. 2. Guide rltjht, and wlion it has marched 
 thirty paces; I. Halt. 2. Rijht — Diii;s8. Tho chiefs of the other 
 platoons, at three fourths of tho wheel, command : I. Fouwakd. 2. 
 Guide rijlit, and direct themselves toward the place they are to occupy 
 in line, conforming in other respects to what is proscribed for Iti/ iiircr- 
 sion, front into lim-, when the left is in front. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SQUADRON. 8J37 
 
 To break by platoons to the right, head of column to the right (or 
 half-right). 
 
 569. The squadron being in line, the first captain commands: 
 
 1. Platoons right wheel — head of column to the right (or half- 
 right). 2. March. 3. Forward. 4. Guide left. 
 
 At the command march, each platoon executes its wheel to the right. 
 At the third command the chief of the first platoon commands : 1. 
 Right — Turn. 2. Forwaud. The other platoons move on, and turn, 
 in succession, at the commands of their chiefs, on the same ground. 
 The first captain commands furicurd when the wheels are nearly com- 
 pleted. 
 
 To form line faced to the rear, by inversion on the head of the 
 column. 
 
 570. The squadron being in column with distance, right in front, and 
 obstacles are ijrescnted on its right flank, to form line upon the head of 
 the column, faced to the rear, the first captain commands : 
 
 1. Front into line. 2. I^f%RCH. 3. Guide right. 
 
 Which is executed as prescribed for front into line, right in frmit, 
 No. 535, but without rectifying the alignment. 
 
 The squadron being formed, the first captain immediately commands: 
 
 1. Platoons right about wheel. 2. March. 3. Halt. 4. Lefi — 
 Dress. 5. Front. 
 
 The movement is executed in the same manner when the column is 
 marching. 
 
 Individual oblique march. 
 
 671. The squadron marching in line, to cause it to gain ground 
 toward the right flank without changing the front of the squadron 
 the first captain commands : 
 
 1. Right oblique. 2. March. 
 
 (Fig. 137.) To resume the primitive direction the first captain com- 
 mandi : 
 29 
 
338 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 Forward. 
 
 This movement is executed at a tmlk, or at a trot, but never at a 
 yiillop. 
 
 Oblique march by platoons. 
 
 572. Tlie squiidron being in line, to cause it to puin ground toward 
 its right flank by the oblifjuc march by jilatoons the first captain com- 
 mands : 
 
 1. Platoons, right halj-wheel. 2. March. 3. Forward. 
 4. Guide right. 
 
 (Fig. 138.) At the command march, each platoon executes its hnlf- 
 wheel to the right on a fixed pivot. At the third command each platoon 
 moves forward, conforming to the principles of the direct march. 
 
 To cau.se the squadron to resume the primitive direction the first 
 captain commands: 
 
 1. Platoons, left half-vheel. 1. March. 3. Forward. 
 4. Guide right. 
 
 Which is executed as just pr#cribcd, but bj' inverse means. 
 
 During this march the right guide of the first platoon marches 
 directly upon the point which has been indicated to him. The guides 
 of the other platoons preserve their distances, take for file-leader the 
 fourth trooper from the left of the platoon which precedes them, and 
 keep it two paces from him. The second captain places himself behind 
 the guide of the first platoon, in order to superintend his direction. 
 
 The squadron being m line, to cause it to gain ground to the rear, 
 and to face it again to the front. 
 
 673. The squadron being in line, to face it to the opposite direction 
 the first captain commands: 
 
 1. By fours, right about wheel. 2. March. 3. Forward. 
 4. Guide left. 
 
 (Fig. 139.) Which is executed as prescribed, No. 541. The chiefs of 
 platoons, the file-closers, and the guides wheel abnut individually, and 
 march, the chiefs of platoons behind the centres of their platoons, the 
 file-closers in front, and the guides of the right and left of the rear rank, 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SQUADRON. 339 
 
 now become the frout. At the fourth command the file-closer nearest 
 the guide passes to the left, in order to place himself in front of the 
 guide, the first captain gives him a point of direction, which is also 
 indicated to the guide of the right or left, who in this movement 
 remains on'the flank of the squadron. 
 
 The squadron is faced again to the front by a similar movement. 
 
 The squadron marching in line, to march it lo the rear by wheeling 
 the platoons about. 
 
 574. The squadron marching in line, guide right, the first captain 
 commands : 
 
 1. Platoons, right about tcheel. 2. March. 3. Forward. 
 4. Guide left. 
 
 (Fig. 140.) At the command march, the pivots halt short and turn 
 upon themselves, the marching flanks step off at the same instant, reg- 
 ulating themselves by the right during the first half of the wheel, so aa 
 to arrive together in column, and by the left during the second half, so 
 as to arrive together in line. In each platoon the rear rank and the 
 file-closers carry the hand toward the marching flank, in order to facil- 
 itate the movement. At the third command the squadron resumes the 
 direct march. At the fourth command the indicated guide moves up 
 on the line of the oflSccrs ; he is immediately replaced, and a point of 
 direction given. 
 
 In this movement the guide of the right turns lo the ri<jht, moves 
 Straight forward the extent of the front of a platoon, and txrng a^ain 
 to the ri<jht, in order to place himself on the left of the squadron. The 
 guide of the left executes the same movement, to place himself on the 
 right of the squadron. 
 
 The squadron marching in line, to break it to the front by platoon 
 in doubling the gait, and to reform it. 
 
 575. The first captain commands : 
 
 1. By platoons, to the front, trot. 2. March. 3. Guide left. , 
 
 At the first command the chief of the first platoon commands trot, 
 and those of the other platoons command platoon, right half-wheel, 
 trot. At the Command march, repeated by these oflScers, the movement 
 is executed as prescribed. No. 550. 
 
340 MANUAL roil VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 The squa<lroi) marching id lino at the trot, the movement is executed 
 at the gnthip on the same principle:<. 
 
 The squadron marching in column with distance, right in front, to 
 form it in doubling the gait the first captain commands : 
 
 1. Foiin squadron, trot. 2. Mahcii. 3. Guide right. 
 
 At the first command the chiefs of the three last platoons command 
 phit'iiiH, left half-wheel, trot. At the command mnrch, repeated by the 
 chiefs of the last three platoons, the first platoon continues to march 
 straight forward at the wall:, and its chief repeats the indication of the 
 guide. The three other platoons execute their half-wheel to the left at 
 the trot on a fixed pivot. The half-wheels being nearly terminated, 
 the chiefs of these platoons command: 1. FonwARD. 2. Guide ri/jht ; 
 they move straight forward, and as soon as the right file of their pla- 
 toon is in the direction of the left file of the platoon which precedes 
 they command: \.' Right half-icheel. 2. March. 3. Forward, and 
 then walk, in sufficient time to command march when their platoon 
 arrives in line; then the troopers resume the walk and align them- 
 selves in marching. Each platoon after its half-wheel to the left moves 
 straight forward on the point where it is to turn, aud without obliquing 
 toward the platoon which precedes it. 
 
 Passage of obstacles. 
 
 576. The squadron marching in line, to execute the passage of 
 obstacles the first captain commands: 
 
 1. Obstacle. 2. First platoon. 3. Halt. 
 
 (Fig. 14L) At the command halt, repeated by the chief of the first 
 platoon, this platoon halts, and its chief immediately commands : L 
 Left oblique, trot. 2. Marcii ; aud this platoon doubles on the second. 
 When the platoon which has aligned is in rear of the one upon which 
 it has doubled its chief commands: 1. Forward. 2. Guide right. 3. 
 Walk. 4. March. 
 
 To cause the j)lat<)on which has obliqued to return to its place the 
 first captain commands : 
 
 1. First platoon. 2. Into line. 
 
 At the command into line, the chief of the platoon commands: 1. 
 liiyhtublitjue, trot. 2. March; when opposite the ground the platoon 
 is to occupy, he commands: 1. Forward. 2. Guide left. 3. Walk ; 
 and when the platoon is in line, march. The chief of the platoon com- 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SQT'ADROX. 341 
 
 mands foncard a little before its left file has passed beyond the right 
 file of the platoon on which it is to form. 
 
 The second platoon executes the same movement in obliquing to the 
 right behind the first platoon ; the third in obliquing to the left behind 
 the fourth, and the fourth in obliquing to the right behind the third ; 
 each platoon should always double upon that with which it forms the 
 division. 
 
 577. The squadron marching in line, to execute the passage of ob- 
 stacles upon the head of each platoon the first captain commands : 
 
 1. Iti each platoon, hy fours (or by twox), trot. 2. March. 
 3. Guide right. 
 
 (Fig. 142.) At the first command the chiefs of platoons command hy 
 /ourn (or by ticos), trot. At the command murch, repeated by the.se offi- 
 cers, each platoon breaks by fours ; the chiefs of platoons march at the 
 heads of their platoons ; the guide of the right, who marches on the line 
 of officers, places himself on the right of the chief of the first platoon : 
 the guide of the left in rear of the fourth platoon, and the file-closers 
 on the right flanks of their platoons. Each i)latoon, having thus broken 
 in column, should assume a direction parallel to that one which is the 
 guide, keeping on the same line and alwaj's at the distance of its front, 
 to be able at any moment to reform line. 
 
 To reform the squadron, each platoon, having broken by fours, or by 
 twos at the trot, right in front, the first captain commands : 
 
 1. Form platoons. 2. March. 3. Guide right. 
 
 At the first command the chiefs of platoons command form platoon. 
 At the command march, repeated bj' their officers, each platoon forms. 
 If the ground does not permit all the platoons to form at once, the one 
 before which the obstacle is presented forms in the rear of the other 
 platoon of its division, and retakes its place in line as soon as prac- 
 ticable. 
 
 S K I R xM I S H I N G . 
 
 578. When the squadron is in sight of the skirmishers the first cap- 
 tain orders no signal except the rally. The chief of the skirmishers 
 observes the movements of the squadron he covers, and conforms to 
 them as soon as practicable, requiring his trumpeter to sound the nec- 
 essary signals. 
 
 When the squadron changes front the chief of the skirmishers moves 
 
342 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTKERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 upon the new front, unless the first captain gives orders to the contrary. 
 If the squaclron is out of sipht of the skirmishers the first captain 
 causes tlic signals which correspond to the movcuients be executes to be 
 sounded, in order to give notice to the chief of the skirmishers, who 
 conforms to them as soon as practicable. The trumpeter who follows 
 the chief of the skirmishers should give the signals only upon the order 
 of that officer. The skirmishers should execute their movements only 
 by the signals of the trumpeter who accompanies the officer who com- 
 mands them. 
 
 The squadron being in line the first captain commands: 
 
 ]. First (or fourth) platoon, as skirmishers. 2. JMarch. 
 
 At the first comuiaud the chief of the first platoon orders the sabres 
 to be returned, the holsters to be uncovered, and the arms to be loaded; 
 he then coninlands: 1. Plutaon, /oncard. 2. Guidv ritjht. 3. Trot. 
 At the command march, repeated by the chief of the platoon, this platoon 
 moves forward. After marching 100 paces to the front the chief of the 
 platoon commands: 1. Sue jUca from riyht (or left), ns thirmi'ilierit. 
 2. March. .^. Guide riyht (or left), which is executed as prescribed, 
 No. 559. When the first captain wishes the skirmishers to re-enter the 
 squadron he causes the ruUy to be sounded. At this signal the chief of 
 the skirmishers rallies his platoon, as prescribed. No. 559, and then 
 rejoins the squadron at a gallop, directing himself upon one of the 
 flanks to resume his place in line. 
 
 579. When the first captain wishes to relieve a platoon which is skir- 
 mishing the chief of the new platoon moves forward upon the reserve 
 of the platoon which is acting as skirmishers. On coming up abreast 
 of it he orders out six files as skirmishers; the remaining files halt, and 
 draw sabres. As soon as the new skirmishers have passed five paces 
 beyond those they are to relieve the latter turn about and rally upon 
 their reserve. The platoon, having rallied, is conducted back to the 
 squadron at a trot. 
 
 580. When the entire squadron is to act as skirmishers the first cap- 
 tain orders the sabres to be returned, the holsters to be uncovered, and 
 the arms to be loaded ; he then commands : 
 
 1. Squadron, forward. 2. Guide right. 3. 7Vo/. 4. M.A.RCH. 
 
 Having arrived at the point where the reserve is to be established, 
 about 100 paces from the front of the body to bo covered, and more if 
 it has been commanded, the first captain commands: 
 
 1. Three first (ov last) platoo7is, as skinnishers. 2. March. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SQUADRON. 343 
 
 At the command march, the chief of the platoon which is to support 
 the skirmishers halts that platoon and causes sabre? to be drawn. 
 The chiefs of the three other platoons continue to march on, each 
 directing himself by the shortest route, 100 paces to the front toward 
 the part of the line his platoon is to occupy, and having reached it, he 
 disperses his platoon as skirmishers. The right platoon covers the 
 right of the regiment, and extends 30 or 40 paces beyond it ; another 
 platoon covers the centre, and the left platoon covers the left, extending 
 also 30 or 40 paces beyond. The chiefs of those platoons remain 25 
 paces in rear of the line of skirmishers and pass over the extent occu- 
 pied by the troopers of their platoons. The reserve remains in rear of 
 the centre of the line of skirmishers. 
 
 The first captain, followed by the first sergeant, keeps habitually 
 balf-way between the reserve and the skirmishers, to direct th« move- 
 ments. The second captain, followed by the second sergeant, passes 
 the line and gives notice to the first captain of everything that it is 
 important for him to know. 
 
 681. If the first captain wishes to rally the skirmishers upon them- 
 selves he causes the ralli/ of HJiiniiinhern to be sounded. At this signal 
 each platoon rallies as rapidly as possible on its chief. If the first 
 captain then ivishes to rally tho squadron he moves upon the point 
 where he intends it shall form, and causes the rail;/ to be sounded 
 where three-fourths of each platoon has rallied. At this new signal 
 the reserve and each platoon of skirmishers move at a gdllup upon the 
 point where the captain commanding is placed. The troopers who did 
 not rejoin their platoon when it rallied upon itself direct themselves 
 toward the scjuadron. 
 
 The squadron being dispersed as skirmishers, if the first cajitain 
 wishes it to rally immediately he orders the rally to be sounded ; at 
 this signal the officers, the skirmishers, and the reserve rally upon the 
 point occupied by the first captain. 
 
 The troopers being dispersed as skirmishers, if the first captain wishes 
 them to charge IIS f'oragcrg he orders them to cease firing and causes the 
 ditperse to be sounded. At this signal the chiefs of platoons move 
 forward in line and the skirmishers draw sabres; they charge imme- 
 diately. The reserve follows at the trot, or at the gallop, as may be 
 necessary. After the charge the first captain orders the rally to be 
 soundeil, when the troopers rally in rear of the reserve. 
 
 The skirmishers being ralliL'd by platoons, if the first captain wishes 
 to charge he orders the charge to be sounded. At this signal each 
 chief of platoon conducts his platoon to the charge, in good order; the 
 reserve supports the movement at the trot or gallop. The iirst captain 
 places himself so as to be able to direct the general movement. The 
 
344 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 Feoond captiiin charges willi tlic j>lat<>on nonrost ti> liiin. Tho platoons 
 rally behind the reserve: the first captain moves upon that point at tho 
 same time that he onlers the r«ll\i to be soundeil. 
 
 TiiK Column by Divisions. 
 
 582. The squailnm being in line, ii'the first captain wishes to form it 
 into column by divisions he commands: 
 
 1. Division!!, right (or left) ichcd. 2. March. 3. Halt (or 
 , Forward). 4. Guide left (or right). 
 
 AVhich is executed in the same manner as the breaking of the troop 
 or squadron into a column of platoons, either to halt or move forward 
 ■without halting. The same movement may be executed when the 
 squadron is marching in line. 
 
 The principles prescribed for the column of platoons are applicable 
 to the march in column by divisions, the difTcrcut modes of passing 
 from line into column, and from column into line. 
 
 To gaiu ground toward its flunks or to the rear, employ the means 
 prescribed for the column by platoons. The wheels about can be also 
 executed by divisions. The distance, measured from the croufs of the 
 horses of the rear rank of one division to the heads of.the horses of tho 
 division which follows, should lie e(|ual to the front of the division, less 
 the depth of the two ranks. In the wheels on a movable pivot by 
 divisions the ninth file of the platoon, upon which the wheel is exe- 
 cuted, is the middle point of the radius of tlie wheel. The pirot de- 
 tcriben nn ore of a circle of ten pacei. 
 
 5S.3. The scjuadron marching in column by platoons, right in front, 
 to form the divisions at the same gait the first eaj)tain commands: 
 
 1. F(u-7n divisions. 2. March. 
 
 At the first command the chiefs of tho second and fourth platoons 
 command jilntaou, left hnlf-uheil. At the command march, repeated 
 by the same officers, the second and fourth jilatoons execute a half- 
 u-hce/ lo the lift on a fixed pivot. The first and third platoons continue 
 to march straight forward, and after having marched thirty paces their 
 chiefs command halt. Tho chiefs of the second and fourth platoons, 
 when the half-wheel to the left is nearly terminated, command : 1. Fon- 
 WAHD. 2. Guide rifjht. They move straight forward, and as soon as 
 the right of their platoon arrives in the direction of tho left file of 
 the platoon which precedes they command : 1. Hiijht half-wheel. 2. 
 Makch. 3. FouWAKi). They move forward and command halt on 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SQUADRON. 845 
 
 arriving a1)rcast of tlie jilatoon belonging to tlic same division. The 
 lieutenants commanding tbe divisions then command left t/ros», move 
 to the left of the division, rectily the alignment, command front, and 
 return to the centres of their platoons. 
 
 584. The squadron marchin/ in column by divisions, right in front, 
 to break the divisions by platoons the first captain commands : 
 
 1. By plaloous. 2. Makcii. 3. Gtiule left. 
 
 At the first command the chiefs of the second and fourth platoons 
 command platoon, right half-irJieel. At the command march, repeated 
 by the same ofiicers, the second and fourth platoons execute a half- 
 wheel to the rif/ht on a fixed pivot, and the first and third platoons con- 
 tinue to march on. The chiefs of the second and f<.urth platoons, the 
 half-wheel to the tight being nearly terminated, command: 1. FoRWAnn. 
 2. Guide lift ; they move straight forward, and as soon as the left files 
 of their platoons arrive in the direction of the left file of the platoon 
 which precedes they command: 1. Left hnlf-nhrel. 2. March. 3. 
 Forward, and move forward in taking their proper distances. 
 
 The divisions are broken by platoons, on the same principles, in 
 marching at the trot or gallop. 
 
 585. Tl'.e squadron marching in column by platoons, right in front, 
 to form divisions in doubling the gait the first captain commands: 
 
 1. Form ilivisionx, trot. 2. March. 3. Gitide left. 
 
 Which is executed as prescribed above, tbe first and third platoons 
 continuing to miirch at the same gait, and the chiefs of tbe second 
 and fourth platoons commamling: 1. J'latoon, left half-tcheel, trot. 
 2. March. 3. Forward. 4. Guide right; and 1. Ilight half-trheel. 
 2. March. 3. Forwahp. 4. ^\'alk■. When they arrive abreast of the 
 platoon on which they form they command : 5. March. 
 
 580. The sqiiadron marching in column by divisiims, right in front, 
 to break the division by jilatocns in doubling the gait the first captain 
 commands: 
 
 1. By platoons, trot. 2. March. 3. Guide right. 
 
 At the first command the chiefs of the first and third platoons com- 
 mand trot ; those of the second and fourth platoons command /)/((/o(/)(, 
 right hrilf-icheii, trot. At the command march, repeated by tbe chiefs 
 of platoons, the first and third platoons move forward at tbe trot. The 
 second and fourth execute their holf-uheel to the right on a fixed pivot, 
 at the trot, and tlie movement is cumploted as described above. 
 
340 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 587. The (iqiiadron being in line, to break it by divi.sion by the right 
 to march to the left the first captain commands : 
 
 1. Divisions, break by the right — to march to the left. 2. March. 
 
 Which is executed aa prescribed for a column of platoons. 
 To break the squadron by divisions to the rear by the right, to 
 march to the left, the first captain commands : 
 
 1. Divisions, break by the right to the rear — to march to the left. 
 2. March. 
 
 Which is executed as prescribed for the column of platoons. 
 
EVOLUTIONS OF THE REGIMENT. 347 
 
 Article X. 
 EVOLUTIONS OF THE REGIMENT. 
 
 588. When the regiment is in line tlie .squadrons are drawn up on the 
 same line, with intervals of twelve paces between them, and the field 
 and staff of the regiment are posted as indicatetl, No. 18. 
 
 When it is in column right in front, and on the march, the guide is 
 habitu.ally to the left, and as constantly to the right when the left is in 
 front; in the marcli of the column the colonel does not indicate the 
 guide, except in cases where he sees proper to depart from the principle 
 just laid down. Whenever the guide is indicated by the colonel the 
 captains commanding all repeat it. 
 
 Successive alignment of the S(jHn<lrons in the regiment. 
 
 589. The regiment being in line, the colonel causes the right general 
 guide and the principal guide of the left of the first S(|uadron to bo 
 placed thirty paces in front of the squadron opposite the right and left, 
 and facing each other. The left general guide immediately places 
 himself on the same line in front of the extreme left of the regiment, 
 facing the right general guide. 
 
 The captain commanding the first squadron, on an intimation from 
 the colonel, commands: 1. Squfidron, forward. 2. Guide right. 3. 
 March. The squadron having arrived within one pace of the new lino 
 the captain commands halt. At this commiind the squadron halts, the 
 captain and the guides of tlie right and loft advance and align them- 
 selves ; the first captain commands n''jht — Duess ; and when the align- 
 ment is Complete, //-Kiif. 
 
 The colonel then commands : 
 
 1. Attention. 2. By squadron, right — Dress. 
 
 At the second command the capt.iin commanding the second squad- 
 ron commands: 1. Sqii'iilroit, forward. 2. Guide rujht. 3. March. The 
 squadron having reached the rank of file-closer.'* of the first squadron 
 
« MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 the first captain (•(unnianils : 1. Squndrou. 2. Halt. The ]>rincipal 
 guiilc of the left throw.-- himself out opim.sito the left of the squadron, 
 faces to the ri?;ht, and ali^^ns himself on the puides in front of the first 
 squadron; the officers and guides of the right and left align themselves 
 correctly; the first captain throws himself to the left wing and com- 
 mands ri</ht — DiiESs. The squadron hciug aligned, the captain com- 
 ma nds/roll^ 
 
 Each captain commanding causes the movement to be esccuteii in 
 succession, and commands march as soon as the one preceding bim 
 commands halt. The regiment being aligned, the colonel commands 
 front. 
 
 Alignment of the regiment. 
 
 590. The re;^imcnt being in line, the colonel causes the general guides 
 to be fixed on the new line, facing each other, and the guides of the 
 left to be placed on intermediate point?, facing to the right; he then 
 commands : 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Right — Dress. 
 
 At the second command, repeated by the captains commanding, the 
 squadrons are aligned in such manner that the men of the front rank of 
 each squadron may have the heads of their horses on the line of the 
 guides. The regiment being aligni'd, the colonel commands /con/. 
 
 To break the regiment by fours. 
 
 591. The regiment being in line, the colonel commands: 
 
 1. Attention. 2. By fours. 3. March. 
 
 (Fig. 143.*) The second command is repeated by the captain com- 
 manding the first squadron. At the command march, repeated by the 
 captain, the first Hqitadron breaks by fours as in the school of the squad- 
 ron. The first captain of tiie second squadron commands bif fours, in 
 time to Command viarrh at the instant the fourth platoon of the squad- 
 ron which precedes it commences its movement. When the half of the 
 second ."quadron has broken, the captain changes direction in order to 
 join the column. The other sciuadrons break in succession in the same 
 way, and change direction as directed for the second. 
 
 To form platoons at the same gait. 
 
 592. The regimeut marching in I'uhimn by fours, the right in front, 
 the colonel commands : 
 
 * But tlireo squadrons aro represented in the figure. 
 
EVOLUTIONS OF THE REGIMENT. 349 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Form Platoons. 3. March. 
 
 Tho second command is repeated by the captain commanding the 
 first squadron. At the command march, also repeated hy the captains, 
 platoons are formed in the first squadron, as prescribed in the schoi>l of 
 the squadron. The other squadrons continue to march, and platoons 
 are formed in succession, in the same manner as in the first, at the 
 commands: 1. Form platoons. 2. March. 
 
 To break the platoons by fours at the same gait. 
 
 593. The regiment marching in column by platoons, right in front, 
 the colonel commands : 
 
 1. Attention. 2. By fours. 3. March. 
 
 At the second command, repeated by the captain commanding the 
 first squadron, the first captains of tho other squadrons command 
 column. At the command march, repeated by the captain command- 
 ing the first squadron, the captains commanding the other squadrons 
 command halt. The first captain of the second squadron, and in 
 succession those of the other squadrons, command: 1. Hy fours. 2. 
 March, in sufficient time for the head of the squadron after it is 
 broken to be at its proper distance from the rear of the squadron which 
 precedes. 
 
 If the column is marching at a frnt the chiefs of squadrons, except 
 tho first, take the wuIIk at the command march, and at the proper time 
 for breaking the squadrons command : 1. By fours, trot. 2. March. 
 
 7^0 form platoons in douh'ing the gait. 
 
 594. The regiment marching in column of fours, right in front, the 
 colonel commands: 
 
 1. Attention. 3. Form platoons, trot. 3. March. 
 
 At the second command, repeated by the captain commanding the 
 first squadron, the chiefs of the other squadrons command trot. At 
 the command march, repeated by all the chiefs of squadrons, platoons 
 are formed in the first squadron. The other squadrons take the trot, 
 and form in succession at the command : 1. Form plutoons. 2. 
 March, given by each chief the nearest the head of his squadron, at 
 its proper distance from the squadron which precedes. 
 
350 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 To break the platoons in doubling the gait. 
 
 695. Tbe regiment luarchin;^ in column (if platoon, right in front, 
 the colonel commands : 
 
 1. Attention. 2. By fauj-.i, trot. 3. !Makcii. 
 
 The second command is repeated by the chief of the first squadron, 
 and at the command uuirch, this squadron breaks by fours. The other 
 squadrons continue to march at a walk, and the chiefs command in 
 succession : 1. Dy fours, trot. 2. March, at such time as to preserve 
 their distance. 
 
 To foiin the regiment to the front, to the left, or upon the right 
 into tine. 
 
 596. The regiment marching in column by fours, the right in front, 
 to form lino to the front the colonel commands : 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Front, into line. 3. March. 
 
 At the second command, repeated by the chief of the first squadron, 
 the chiefs of the other squadrons command hend of column to the half- 
 left. At the command march, repeated by the chiefs of squadrons, the 
 first squadron forms front into line, as directed for a single squftilron. 
 The other chiefs command guide rxyht, throw themselves at the heads of 
 their squadrons, and direct them by the shortest line to a point 100 paces 
 behind the point the right of the squadron is to occupy in line; as soon 
 as the head of each squadron reaches this point, the chief commands 
 hend of column to the half-riyht, and when tlie third platoon of his 
 squadron is in the new direction he commands front into Hue, in time 
 to give the command march at the moment the head of his column 
 arrives within thirty paces of the line of battle. The regiment being 
 aligned, the colonel commands front. 
 
 597. The regiment marching in column by fours, the right in front, 
 to form line to the left flank the colonel commands : 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Left, into line. 3. March. 
 
 The second command is repeated by the chief of the first squad- 
 ron. At the command march, repeated by him, the first squadron 
 is formed into line to the left, as prescribed in the school of the 
 troop. No. 489. The other chiefs throw themselves to the heads of 
 their squadrons, and each, in succession, commands left into line, 
 in time to command march tbe moment their first four files get to 
 
EVOLUTIONS Of THE REGIMENT. 851 
 
 the proper turniug poiut. The regiment being aligned the colonel com- 
 mands /roii'. 
 
 598. The regiment marching in column by fours, the right in front, 
 to form the line on the prolongation of the right flank the colonel com- 
 mand.-;: 
 
 1. Attention. 2. On the right, into line. 3. March. 
 
 The second command is repeated by the chief of the first squadron. 
 At the command march, also repeated by him, he forms his squadron 
 into line on the right, as prescribed, school of the troop. No. 490. The 
 other chiefs of squadrons command guide n'r/hl, throw themselves to the 
 heads of their squadrons, and each commands upon the right into line in 
 time to command march at the proper ])oint for turning to the right, in 
 order to take its proper place in line. The regime^ being obliqued, the 
 colonel commands yVoiif. 
 
 To form the regiment into column with distance. 
 
 599. The regiment being in line, to break to the right by a general 
 movement the colonel commands : 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Platoonx, right wheel. 3. March. 
 
 The second command is repeated by all the captains commanding. 
 At the command march, also repeated by them, the move is executed at 
 the same time in all the squadrons, as prescribed in the school of the 
 troop, Xo. 510. At the moment the platoons have nearly completed the 
 wheel the captains commanding command halt. The chiefs of squad- 
 rons see that the chiefs of platoons, guides, etc., take their proper 
 posts. If the colonel wishes to put the column in march without halt- 
 ing he commands, when the wheel lacks about one-fourth of its com- 
 pletion : 
 
 4. Forward. 
 
 This command is repeated by the chiefs of squadrons. 
 
 To break by the right to inarch to the left. 
 
 600. The regiment being in line, to break by successive movements 
 from the right to pass before the front of the line the colonel com- 
 mands : 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Platoons, break by the right, to march to the leji. 
 3. March. 
 
do:: MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 At the second CDmniand, repeated l\v the cajilnin commanding the 
 first squadron, the chief of the first platoon commands: 1. Platoon, 
 forirard ; 2. (Suidc left. At the command mnrch, repeated by the chief 
 of the first squridron and by the chief of the first platoon, the movement 
 is executed in the first squadron as it is prescribed, school of the squad- 
 ron, No. 5C;i. The chiefs of the other squadrons repeat the second 
 command in succession, in time to command murrh when the fourth 
 platoon of the squailron which is on their right is opposite the centre of 
 the second platoon of their squadron. 
 
 To break- to the rear by the ri(jht, to march to Ike left. 
 
 601. The regiment being in line, to break by successive movements to 
 the right to pass by the rear of the line the colonel commands : 
 
 1. Attetilion. 2. Platoonx, break to the rear by the right, to warch 
 to the left. 3. March. 
 
 At the second command, repeated by the captain commanding the 
 first squadron, the chief of the first platoon commands platoon, n'fjkt 
 about tvhcel. At the command mnrch, repeated by both these officers, 
 the fir.st squadron executes the movement as prescribed, school of the 
 squadron. No. 5G-t. The chiefs of the other squ^idrons repeat the com- 
 mands in succession, in time to command niarch at the instant the 
 fourth platoon of the squadron on tlieir right, after having finished its 
 ri(/hl about and advance, has executed throe-fourths of its change of 
 direction to the right. 
 
 To form the regiment into close column. 
 
 602. The regiment being in line, if it be the desire of the colonel to 
 form it into a close column, faced to the right, he commands: 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Squadrons, right wheel — -form close column. 
 3. March. 
 
 (Fig. 141.) At the second command the captains commanding squad- 
 rons command nqnadron, riyht wheel. At the command niarch, repeated 
 by the chiefs of squadrons, all the squadrons wheel tu the right. The 
 wheel being nearly completed, the chief of the first squadron throws 
 himself to its left and commands: 1. Squadron. 2. Halt. 3. Left 
 — DiiKSS. 4. FiioNT. The chiefs of the other squadrons command : 1. 
 FoRWAUu. 2. Guide left ; and at twelve paces from the squadron which 
 precedes: 1. Squadron. 2. Halt. 3. Left — Dkess. 4. FnONT. 
 
 603. The regiment being in line, to form a close column without 
 changing tho front the colonel commands: 
 
EVOLUTIONS OF THE REGIMENT. 353 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Upon the third squadron, form close column. 
 3. March. 
 
 (Fig. 145.) At the second command the chief of the third squadron 
 throws himself to its left and commands : 1. Left — Dre.s.s. 2. Front. 
 The chief of the second squadron commands jAatoous, right }cheel — 
 fourth platoon, left half-wheel. The chief of. the first squadron com- 
 mands platoons, riijht wheel — head of column to the half-right. The 
 chief of the fourth squadron commands platonnn, right wheel — frst 
 platoon, right about wheel. The chief of the fifth squadron commands 
 platoons, right wheel — head of column to the half-right. 
 
 At the connraand march, repeated by all the chiefs of squadrons 
 except thnt of the third, all the other squadrons break by platoons to the 
 left and right; and when the wheels are nearl}' completed each chief on 
 the right commands: 1. Fouward. 2. Guide right ; those on the left 
 command: 1. Forward. 2. Guide left. Each one throws himself at 
 the head of his column, to direct it. 
 
 The chief of the fourth platoon, second squadron, after having exe- 
 cuted the half-wheel to the left moves forward ami commands : I. Left 
 — TuRX. 2. Forward, so as to enter the column in a direction parallel 
 to the front of the third squadron, passing near the heads of the horses 
 of the officers. The other platoons of this squadron change direction 
 on the same ground, and by the same commands from their chiefs. 
 The chief of S(iuadron continues to march at the head of his squadron, 
 and commands platoons, right n-heel, in time to command march when 
 its fourth platoon has arrived opposite the right of the fourth platoon 
 of the third squ.adron. The platoons having executed the wheel, he 
 commands: 1. Halt. 2. Left — Dukss. 3. Front. 
 
 The chief of the fourth platoon of the first squadron, after having 
 executed his wheel to the left, commands : 1. Right — Turn. 2. For- 
 ward, and directs himself diagonally to the front in such manner as 
 to turn to the left on a line parallel to the front of the second squadron 
 at the command head of column to the half-left, given by the chief of 
 the squadron when the fourth platoon arrives opposite the right flank 
 of the squadron already formed. The rest of the movement is per- 
 formed in precisely the same manner as has been laid down for the 
 second squadron. 
 
 The chief of the first platoon of the fourth squadron, after having 
 executed his right about wheel, moves forward and commands: 1. Left 
 — Turn. 2. Forward, so as to enter the column in a direction paral- 
 lel to the third squadron at the command head of column to the l<ft, 
 given by the chief of squadron, when this platoou has gained a 
 distance of twelve paces in rear of the third squadron. The three 
 30 
 
354 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 other platoons execute a >'i<jf>i '<""" on the same ground on which the 
 first platoon made its rujht about, and Ic/t turn on the same ground 
 that the first did. As soon as the chief of the squadron finds himself 
 opposite the left of the third squadron he halts, allows his column to 
 pass him, and gives the command platoons, left wheel, in time to com- 
 mand marrh as soon as the fourth platoon gets opposite its place. The 
 platoons having executed the wheel, he commands : 1. Halt. 2. Left 
 — Dress. 3. Front. 
 
 The chief of the first platoon of the fifth squadron, after having 
 executed the icheel to the right, commands: 1. Right — Turn. 2. For- 
 ward, and directs himself diagonally, in such manner as to turn to the 
 left on a line parallel to the fourth squadron, at the command head of 
 column to the half-left, given by the chief of the squadron when the first 
 platoon reaches the left flank of the squadrons already formed. The 
 squadron is then brought to its proper position in the column by the 
 same commands and means as for the fourth squadron, 
 
 604. The regiment being in line, to form in close column, with the 
 left in front, without changing the front, the colonel commands : 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Upon the third squadron, form close column, the 
 left in front. 3. March. 
 
 The commands are repeated and the movements executed in accord- 
 ance with the principles laid down above, with this difierence, that the 
 squadrons on the right form in rear of the squadron which serves as 
 the basis of the formation, while those on the left form in advance of 
 this same squadron ; and that the alignment is to the right. 
 
 603. The regiment marching in line, if the colonel wishes to form a 
 close column, faced to the right, without halting, he commands: 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Squadrons, right wheel, form close column. 
 3. March. 
 
 At the second cnnimand the captains couiinanding command tquad- 
 rout, right wheel, trot. At the command march, repeated by the captains 
 commanding, a movement is executed. The wheel being nearly com- 
 pleted, the chief of the first squadron commands : 1. Forward. 2. 
 Guide left. 3. Walk. 4. March ; the other chiefs of squadrons com- 
 mand : 1. Forward. 2. Onide left; and at twelve paces from the 
 preceding squadron : 1. Walk. 2. March. 
 
 To march in column. 
 ei'6. Tiie principled of the march in column with distance, as pre- 
 
EVOLUTIONS OF THE REGIMENT. 355 
 
 scribed for the troop or squadron, are applicable to the march of 
 the regiment; the squadrons are separated by a distance equal to the 
 front of a platoon, plus twelve paces, the interval between squadrons in 
 line. 
 
 The regiment being in column with distance, right in front, the 
 colonel indicates to the adjutant the direction he wishes the column to 
 take. He commands : 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Column, forward. 3. March. 
 
 The second command is repeated by the chiefs of squadrons. At the 
 command march, also repeated by these oflBcers, the movement is 
 executed as for a single troop or squadron. 
 
 To halt the column the colonel commands : 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Column. 3. Halt. 
 
 The second command is repeated by the chiefs of squadrons, and at 
 the command hatt, all the platoons halt at once. 
 
 To change the direction of the column tvith distance. 
 
 607. The regiment marching in column with distance, with the right 
 in front, to change the direction the colonel commands: 
 
 Head of column to the left. 
 
 At this command, repeated by the chief of the first squadron, this 
 squadron executes the movem'^nt as is prescribed for the change of 
 direction of a column of platoons, school of the troop. No. 512. Each 
 of the chiefs of squadrons, in succession, gives the same command 
 when the head of his column reaches the point where the first squadron 
 changed its direction. The principal guide of each squadron places 
 himself at the wheeling point, and remains there until the last platoon 
 of his squadron has commenced the wheel, when he is relieved by the 
 guide of the succeeding squadron. 
 
 608. The regiment marching in column with distance, with the right 
 in front, to cause it to face in the opposite direction the colonel 
 commands : 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Platoon, left about wheel. 3. March. 
 4. Forward. 
 
 The last three commands are repeated by the chiefs of squadrons ; 
 the movement is executed in all the squadrons as prescribed for a 
 single squadron. No. 574. 
 
356 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 t)09. The repiment heinj; in column with distance, at a halt or on the 
 march, in order to gain ground in the direction of one of the flanks 
 the colonel commands: 
 
 1. Attention 2. By fours to the left (or right). 3. March. 
 4. Forward. 
 
 The last three commands are repeated by the chiefs of squadrons, 
 and the movement is executed in all the squadrons as prescribed for a 
 single troop. No. 528. 
 
 610. The regiment being in column with distance, at a halt or on the 
 march, to cause it to face in the opposite direction the colonel com- 
 mands : 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Bt/fnurs, left (dr right) about wheel. 3. March. 
 4. Forward. 
 
 The last three commands are repeated by the chiefs of squadrons, 
 and the movement is executed as for a single troop or squadron, No. 
 673. 
 
 611. The regiment marching in column with distance, to cause it to 
 gain ground to the left or right, without changing the front, the colonel 
 commands: 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Left (or right) oblique. 3. March. 
 
 The last two commands are repeated by the captains commanding, 
 and the movement is executed in each squadron as prescribed for a 
 single troop or squadron. 
 
 The column having obliqued sufficiently, the colonel commands: 
 
 Forward. 
 
 This command is repeated by the chiefs of squadrons, and the 
 movement is executed as in a single troop. 
 
 To form the regiment into line upon one of its flanks, or on the 
 prolongation of one of its flanks. 
 
 612. The regiment being in column with distance, with the right in 
 front, to form in lino upon its left flank the colonel commands: 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Left into line, wheel. 3. March. 
 
 The second command is repeated by the captains commanding 
 squadrons. At the command march, repeated by the chiefs of squad- 
 
EVOLUTIONS OF THE REGIMENT. 357 
 
 rons, the movement is executed in each squadron as prescribed, No. 
 630. The regiment being aligned, the colonel commands /roiir. 
 
 613. The regiment marching in column with distance, the right in 
 front, to form into line on the prolongation of the right flank the colonel 
 commands: 
 
 1. Attention. 2. On the right into line. 3. M.\RCH. 
 
 The second command is repeated by the chief of the first squadron. 
 At the command march, also repeated by him. the movement is executed 
 in the first squadron as prescribed for a single troop, No. 530. The 
 chiefs of the other squadrons command guide right, throw themselves to 
 the heads of their columns, and in succession command on the right into 
 line, in time to command march when the first platoon is twelve paces 
 beyond the left of the one which precedes. The regiment being aligned, 
 the colonel commands /conf. 
 
 To form the regiment into line to the front. 
 
 614. The regiment being in column with distance, the right in front, 
 in order to form it into line upon the head of the column the colonel 
 commands : 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Front into line. 3. March. 
 
 (Fig. 146.) At the second command, repeated by the captains com- 
 manding the first squadron, the chiefs of the others command column, 
 •forward — head of column to the half-left. At the command march, 
 repeated by all the chiefs of squadrons, the first squadron is formed as 
 prescribed for a troop. No. 535. The chiefs of the other squadrons 
 place themselves at the heads of their columns. The first platoon of 
 each squadron having made a half-wheel is moved forward in a diagonal 
 direction by command of its chief, the others following in regular 
 succession. The chiefs of squadrons command guide right as soon as 
 the first platoon has changed its direction to the left. When the head 
 of the second squadron gets within sixty paces of the line the chief of 
 the squadron commands head of column to the half-right ; the chief of 
 squadron commands /Voii( into line in time to command march when the 
 third platoon has turned to the right and the fourth platoon is marching 
 toward its place in the line. The other squadrons are brought up upon 
 the line in the same manner as the second. The regiment being aligne<I, 
 the colonel commands_/Vc/»f. 
 
 615. The regiment being in column with distance, the riglit in front, 
 if it be the wish of the colonel to bring it into line faced to the rear he 
 commands : 
 
358 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Into line, faced to the rear. 3. March. 
 
 (Fig. 147.*) At the second comtnand, repeated by the chief of the 
 first squadron, the chiefs of the other squadrons command column, 
 fortcard — head of column to the half-right. 
 
 At the command march, the first squadron performs the movement as 
 directed for a single troop or squadron, No. 637. The second sciuadron, 
 and the others in succession, march in a diagonal direction toward the 
 line, the chief of squadron at its head ; when at the distance of sixty 
 paces from the line, he commands head of column to the half-left, fol- 
 lowed by the command into line faced to the rear, just as the third 
 platoon has taken the new direction, and before the fourth has com- 
 menced the half-wheel. The squadron is then formed into line in the 
 same manner as the first, by the commands : 1. Platoon, left about 
 wheel. 2. March. 3. Halt. 4. Right — Dress. 5. Front. The 
 regiment being aligned, the colonel commands /ronf. 
 
 To form a column with distance into line by the union of two 
 movements. 
 
 616. The regiment marching in column with distance, the right in 
 front, and a portion of the column having changed its direction to the 
 right, if it is desired to come into line faced to the front, the colonel 
 halts the column at the moment the fourth platoon of the squadron 
 which last entered upon the new direction has marched forward twelve 
 paces after turning to the right and commands: 
 
 1. Attention. 2. To the left — and front into line. 3. March. 
 
 (Fig. 148.) At the second command, repeated by the field ofiicers, 
 the chiefs of squadrons who are in the new direction command left into 
 line, wheel. The chief of the squadron immediately in rear of the one 
 which entered the new direction last commands front into line. The 
 chiefs of the other squadrons command column, forward, head of column 
 to the half-left. At the command march, repeated by the field officers 
 and by the chiefs of squadrons, the portion of the column in the new 
 direction forms to the left into line, while the rear portion forms to the 
 front into line. The regiment being aligned, the colonel commands 
 front. 
 
 Tlie column marching left in front and having changed direction to 
 the loft, is brought into line to the front upon the aauio principles but 
 by inverse means. 
 
 617. The regiment marching in column with distance, right in front, 
 
 *Two squnUrunH uuly are reproKented in the figure. 
 
EVOLUTIONS OF THE REGIMENT. 359 
 
 and one portion having changed direction to the left, to form it into 
 line faced to the rear the colonel halts the column the moment the 
 fourth platoon of the squadron which last entered thl new direction 
 has turned to the left and commands : 
 
 i. Attention. 2. To the left — and upon the head of the third (or 
 other) squadron — into line, faced to the rear. 3. March. 
 
 (Fig. 149.*) At the second command, repeated by the field oflBcers, 
 the chiefs of squadrons whose squadrons arc in the new direction (first 
 and second) command Ir/t into line, wheel. The chief of the squadron 
 in rear of the last which is in the new direction (say the third) com- 
 mands : by inversion, front into line. The chiefs of the remaining 
 squadrons command : 1. Column, foricard. 2. Head of column to the 
 half-riijht. At the command mareh, repeated by the field officers and 
 by the chiefs of squadrons, the squadrons are brought into line; those 
 on the new line are brought to the left into line, while those in rear, 
 after having been brought by inrersion, front into line, ccmplefe the 
 movement by plutoona, left <ibout u-heel. The regiment being aligned 
 the colonel commands front. 
 
 The column marching loft in front having changed direction to the 
 right, a portion still being in the old direction, is brought into lino 
 upon the same principles, but by inverse means. 
 
 618. The regiment being in column with distance, the right in front, 
 to form front into line upon a line that the head of the column has 
 passed the colonel commands: 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Upon the third (or other) squadron, front into 
 line. 3. March. 
 
 At the second command, repeated by the field officers, the chiefs of 
 squadrons which are in front of the designated squadron command 
 platoons, riyht about wheel. The chief of the third squadron com- 
 mands front into line. The chiefs of the fourth and fifth squadrons 
 command : 1. Column, forward. 2. Head of column to the half-left. 
 
 At the command march, repeated by the field officers and by the 
 chiefs of squadrons, the third squadron, and those in its rear, perform 
 the movement front into line with the right in front. The chiefs of the 
 first and second squadrons, after having wheeled about by platoons, 
 conform to what is prescribed for into line, faced to the rear, upon the 
 head of the coliiiirn, except that they complete the movement by a left 
 about wheel by platoons. 
 
 The regiment being aligned the colonel commands front. 
 
 * But two snuadrons. the secoud and third, aro represented iu the figure. 
 
360 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 To form a close column into line upon one of Us flanks, or upon 
 the prolongation of one of its Jlanks to the front . 
 
 C 
 
 619. The regiment being in close column, the right in front, to form 
 
 it into line upon the left flank of the column the colonel commands: 
 
 1. Attention. 2. By the rear of the column — left into line, wheel. 
 
 3. March. 
 
 (Fig. 150.) At the second command the chief of the fifth squadron 
 commands squadron, left wheel. The chiefs of the other sfiuadrons 
 command: 1. Squadroun, /oncard. 2. Guide left. At the command 
 march, repeated by the chiefs of squadrons, the first four squadrons 
 move forward; the fifth executes its wheel to the left; when it is 
 nearly completed, the chief commands: LFohward; and afterward: 
 
 2. Squadron. 3. Halt. 4. Left — Drkss. 5. Froxt. The chief of 
 the fourth squadron commands tqundron, left wheel, in time to com- 
 mand march when the fifth squadron has made two-thirds of its wheel 
 to the left, completing the movement as directed for the fifth squadron. 
 The chiefs of the other squadrons conform in succession to whiit has 
 been prescribed for the fourth. The regiment being aligned, the 
 colonel commands front. 
 
 620. The regiment marching in close column, the right in front, to 
 form it in line on the prolongation of the right flank to the front the 
 colonel commands : 
 
 1. Attention. 2. On the right into line. 3. March. 
 
 (Fig. 151.) At the second command the chief of the first squadron 
 commands right. At the command march, he commands turn ; when 
 the wheel is nearly completed he commands: 1. FonwARn. 2. Guide 
 right; and when the squadron reaches the new line: 1. Squadron. 2. 
 Halt. 3. Right — Dress. 4. Front. Tlic chiefs, of the other squad- 
 rons command guide right, throw themselves to the right of their 
 squadrons, and command in succession right, in time to give the com- 
 mand turn when their squa irons have gone the proper distance beyond 
 the left of the squadron which precedes ; the rest of the movement is 
 executed as directed for the first scjuadron. The regiment being 
 aligned, the colonel commands front. 
 
 To deploy a close column. 
 
 621. The regiment being in close column, the right in front, to 
 deploy it in advance of the head of the column on one of the interior 
 squadrons the colonel commands : 
 
EVOLUTIONS OF THE REGIMENT. 361 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Upon the third aquadron — deploy column. 
 3. March. 
 
 (Fig. 152.) At the second command the chiefs of the first and 
 second squadrons command platonnt, right wheel ; the chiefs of the 
 fourth and fifth coniraaud plntoona, left wheel. The chief of the third 
 squadron eommimds : 1. Siinndroii, forward. 2. Guide right. At the 
 command march, repeated by all the chiefs of squadrons except that of 
 the third, their squadrons break by platoons to the right and Irft ; when 
 the wheels are nearly complete the chiefs of the first and second 
 squadrons comman'i: 1. Forward. 2. Guide left; those of the third 
 and fourth command: 1. Forward. 2. Guide right. They all throw 
 themselves to the heads of their columns. The chief of the third 
 squadron fjives the command »i<irrh when his front is unmasked ; halts 
 his squadron one pace behind the line and commands: 1. Right — Dress. 
 2. Front. 
 
 The chiefs of the other squadrons march at the head of their respect- 
 ire columns until they have reached the point on the right or feft that 
 the left or right of their squadron shoubl be from the squadron which 
 precedes them on the left or right; they then halt in their own persons, 
 allow their squadrons to march past them, and command platoons, left 
 wheel, if they are on the right, and plutonns. right wheel, if they are on 
 the left of the third squadron, in time to give the command march the 
 moment the rear platoon has gotten its proper interval ; the wheels 
 being nearly completed, the chiefs on the right command: 1. Forward. 
 2. Guide left ; those on the left : 1. Forward. 2. Guide right. AVhen 
 the squadrons reach the rank of file-closers of the squadron on the left 
 or right the chiefs command : \. Squadron. 2. Halt. .3. Left [or right) 
 Dress. 4. Front. The regiment being aligned, the colonel commands 
 ^ont 
 
 622. The squadron on the march in close colunn, right in front, to 
 deploy forward without halting the colonel commands : 
 
 1. Atte7ition. 2. On the ^rst squadron — deploy column. 
 3. March. 
 
 At the second command the chief of the first squadron commands 
 guide right, and throws himself in front of the centre of his squadron; 
 the other chiefs command platoonn, left icheel, trot. At the command 
 march, repeated by the chiefs of the last four squadrons, the first 
 squadron continues to march; the others break hy platoons, left wheel, 
 trot, and when the wheel is nearly completed each chief of squadron 
 commands: 1. Forward. 2. Guide right. After reaching the point 
 31 
 
3R2 MAMMAL FOR VOIANTtKRS AND MIMTIA. 
 
 tlie right uf his Miua(lr"ii ought to ori-uiiy he halts, allows his squadron 
 to march past hiiu, and cominand jtliihinnx, right ichecl in time to com- 
 mand iiKirch when his first platoon has its proper place; the wheels 
 being nearly coiiipk'ltd, he commands: I. FouwAitn. 2. Giiidr n'ljht, 
 throws himstlf in front of the centre of his squadron, and when ho 
 reaches the line (n which the first is marching commands : 1. H'-i//.-. 
 2. March. 
 
 March in line. 
 
 623. The lejiiuient being in line, to march it to the front the colonel 
 commands : 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Squadrons, forward. 3. The rifjht (or left') 
 squadron, the squadron of direction. 4. Mauch. 
 
 The second command is repeated bj' the field officers and chiefs of 
 squadrons : iit the third command, repeated by the field oflicers, the 
 chiefs of squadrons cinimand guide right (or left), and the adjutant 
 indicates the direction to be taken by the guide of the right of the first 
 squadron. At the command mtirch, rcpeutnl by the field oflicers and 
 the chiefs of squadrons, the regiment moves ofi' and the first squadron 
 conforms to what is prescribed for the march of a single troop or squad- 
 ron, Ko. 507 ; the others are careful to preserve the alignment and their 
 intervals on the side of the guide. 
 
 The regiment rjarching in line is halted at the command : 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Squadrons. 3. Halt. 4. Right (or left) — 
 Dress. 
 
 The last three commands are repeated by the field ollicors and the 
 chiefs of squadrons. The captains align their S((uadrons and command 
 front. The regiment being aligned, the colonel comulands/roH^ 
 
 624. The regiment marching in line, with the guide right, to cause it 
 to giin ground to the front and flank at the same time the colonel 
 commands : 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Platoons, i-ight half-wheel. 3. March. 
 4. Forward. 
 
 When the colonel wishes to renew the march to the front he com- 
 mands : 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Platoons, left half-wheel. 3. March. 
 4. Forward. 
 
EVOLUTIONS OF THE REGIMENT. 363 
 
 (525. To gain grounil to the right without at the same time gainiug 
 to the front the colonel commands: 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Platoons, right wheel. 3. March. 4. Forward. 
 
 The regiment having gained sufficient ground to the right, tlie colo- 
 nel commands : 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Platoons, left wheel. 3. March. 4. Forward. 
 
 626. The regiment ranrching in line wiih the guide right, to cause it 
 to march in retreat tlie colonel commands : 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Platoons, right about ivheel. 3. March. 
 4. Forward. 
 
 To cause it to re--ume the march fo the front the colonel commands: 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Platoons, left about wheel. 3. Makch. 
 4. Forward. 
 
 The last three commands arc repeated by the field officers and chiefs 
 of squadrons. 
 
 To change the front of the line. 
 
 627. The regiment being in lino, if it is wished to change the front 
 of the line so that it shall face to the right the colonel commands : 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Change front on the right tving. 3. March. 
 
 At the second command, repeated by the field officers, the chiefs of 
 squadrons command ja/'»^<>oii.s, riijht irheel. At the command march, re- 
 peated by the field officers and chiefs of squadrons, all the squadrons 
 break by platoons to the right ; when the wheels are nearly completed 
 the chief of the first squadron commands: 1. Front into line. 2. 
 Maucii. 3. Gui'te riijht. The chiefs of the other squadrons command : 
 1. Forward. 2. Head of column to the hnlf-lefl ; the rest of the move- 
 ment is executed as prescribed for coming front into line, the right 
 being in front. No. 535. The regiment being aligned, the colonel com- 
 mands front. 
 
 628. The regiment beiiig in line, to cause it to change its front 
 to the left, at the same time gaining ground to the rear, the colonel 
 commands : 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Change front to rear on the right wing. 3. 
 ^ March. 
 
364 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 At the seeonil command, rcpcatrd by the field officers, the chiefs of 
 squadrons command pldlnoim, riijht irhecl. At the command march, 
 repeated by the field officers and chiefs of squadrons, all the s(|uadr<iD8 
 break by platonnn to the ritjht ; when the wheels are nearly completed, 
 the cliief of the first squadron commands: 1. liy invemion, front into 
 line. 2. Marcii. .■?. Guide left; the chiefs of the other squadrons 
 command: 1. FonwAHi). 2. Head of column to the hrilf-riijht ; tho 
 remainder of the movement is executed upon the principle for coming 
 into line, faced to the rear. The regiment being aligned,. the colonel 
 commands front. 
 
 To pass a defile. 
 
 629. The regiment being in line, and it is proposed to pass a defile in 
 front of some point of the line, say the interval between the third and 
 fourth squadrons, and the defile is wide enough to admit the front of a 
 division, the colonel commands : 
 
 1. Attention. 2. On the fourth platoon of the third squadron, 
 and thejirst of the fourth, pass the defile in front. 3. March. 
 
 (Fig. 153.) At the second command, repeated by the field officers, 
 the chief of the third squadron commands p/ntoons, left irheel — fourth 
 platoon, forward ; that of the fourth squadron commands plntoont, 
 right wheel — first platoon, forwird. The chiefs of the first two squad- 
 rons command 2>^rt<ooii«, left wheel ; and the chief of the fifth platoons, 
 right ichcel. At the command march, repeated by the field officers and 
 the chiefs of squadrons, the two platoons designated march forward 
 and, obliquing to the right and left, unite; all the others break to tho 
 left and right, and tho wheels being nearly completed, the chiefs of 
 the squadrons on the right command: 1. Forward. 2. Guide left; 
 those of the squadrons on the loft: 1. Forward. 2. Guide right. 
 The platoons of the right and left columns so regulate their march as 
 that those of the same number coining from the head of the column 
 shall reach the turning point at the same time, so that when the turn 
 is completed they may march through the defile abreast of each other. 
 The column thus formed passes the defile, presenting tho front of a 
 division and preserving the distances prescribed for a column of pla- 
 toons. 
 
 When the two squadrons at the head of tho column have cleared tho 
 defile the colonel commands: 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Front into line. 3. March. 
 Tho second command is repeated by tho field officer^ and tho chiofs 
 
EVOLUTIONS OF THE REGIMENT. 365 
 
 of the third and fourth squadrons. At the command march, repeated 
 by these same officers, these two squadrons form front into line, the 
 heads of the columns of platoons obliquing to the right and left in 
 order to regain the interval which should separate squadrons. The 
 chiefs of the other squadrons continue to march forward, and com- 
 mand, those on -the right, head of column to the right ; those on the left, 
 head of column to the left. The columns move parallel to the line of 
 battle, and when the heads of squadrons reach the proper points those 
 of the right column are brought on the U/t into line, and those of the 
 left on the riijht into line. The regiment being aligned, the colonel 
 commands /roll^ 
 
 630. The regiment being in line, to pass a defile in rear of the lino 
 the colonel commands: 
 
 1. Attention. 2. By philoom^ from the toings, to pas.'i the defile 
 in rear of the interval between the third and fourth squadrons. 
 3. March. 
 
 At the second command, repeated by the field officers, the chief of 
 the first squadron commands platoons, break to the rear by the riyht, to 
 viarch to the left. At the command march, repeated by these same offi- 
 cers, the first squadron breaks as directed, school of the squadron. No. 
 664, and the column niiirches toward the defile in a direction parallel to 
 the regiment until its head reaches the defile, when it turns to the left. 
 The chief of the second stiuadron repeats these commands in time for 
 it to follow the first squadron at its proper distance ; the chief of the 
 fifth squadron at the same time commands : 1. Platoons, break to the 
 rear by the left, to march to the riyht. 2. MAnCH, so that the two col- 
 umns may reach the defile at the same time, and join after turning into 
 it, presenting the front of a division. The third and fourth squadrons 
 break by the same commands, and pass through the defile in the same 
 way as has been prescribed for the second and fifth. When the squad- 
 rons, after having passed the defile, reach the new line established in 
 rear of the defile, the first turns to the left, and when the double column 
 reaches it, the second turns to the left and the fifth to the right. When 
 the last platoon of each column has turned into the line, and the two 
 are separated by the interval between squadrons, the colonel, who 
 marches in rear, commands : 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Column. ■ 3. Halt. 4. To the left and right 
 into line. 5. March. 6. Right — Dress. 
 
 All these commands, except the first, are repeated by the field officers 
 
36G MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 and cbiefs of squadrons. The rej^imcnt being alijjncd, tlie colonel 
 commands /io;i». 
 
 The charge. 
 
 fi'M. The regiment niarcliiu^ in line, the colonel commands: 
 
 1. AUention for the charge. 2. Draw — Sabre. 3. Trot. 
 4. Makcii. 
 
 The third cummand is repeated hy the field officers and by the chiefs 
 of squadrons. At the command march, repeated by these same officers, 
 the Squadrons take the iniK After having gone 150 paces at this gait, 
 the colonel commands : 
 
 1. Gallop. 2. March. 
 
 The first command is repeated by the field officers and by tl»e chiefs 
 of squadrons; and at the command march, alsi) repeated by them, the 
 s(juadrons take the ydllop. After having gone about one hundred paces 
 at this gait, and being only about sixty paces from the supposed line, 
 the colonel causes the rharije to be sounded. At this sound, repeated 
 bj' all the trumpets, all the ofi5cers command charge. The men of the 
 front and rear ranks place their sabres in the positions for the charge 
 (see school of the troop. No. 554). 
 
 The colonel wishing to arrest the charge commands : 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Squadrons. 3. Halt. 4. Right (or left) — 
 Urkss. 
 
 At the command attention, repeated by all the officers, the squadrons 
 prepare to change the gait and the troopers return sabres. At the com- 
 mand tqitadrons, repealed by the field officers and chiefs of squadrons, 
 the chiefs of platoons command plalnuii, and the squadrons take the 
 trot. At the command halt, repeated by the field officers, the chiefs of 
 squadrons, and the chiefs of platoons, the squadrons halt. 
 
 At the command right (or le/t) — drea^, repeated by the field officers 
 and by the chiefs of squadrons, the squadrons are aligned. The regi- 
 ment being aligned, the colonel commands front. 
 
 At the sound of the charge, the officers remain in their places iu line ; 
 the colonel and other field officers place themselves upon the officers' 
 line. 
 
 Charge in column. 
 632. The charge in column is employed against infantry formed in 
 
EVOLUTIONS OP THK REGIMENT. 3G7 
 
 column or in square. For this purpose the regiment is formed in doer 
 colmiiii, and the S(|uadrous talie in succession a distance equal -to doubiB 
 their front, so that the first squadron having charged it is promptly 
 followed by the second, which, if the first has made an opening in the 
 square, throws itself into it and couiplstes its overthrow. In case 
 the first squadron is repulsed it retires by tha right and left, to reform 
 in the rear, disengaging the front of the second squadron ; this squad- 
 ron renews the charge; if it does not succeed it clears the ground for 
 the third; .and thus they continue until the charge m.ay have com- 
 pletely failed. 
 
 Such charge-:, made in rapid succession, ought to finish by breaking 
 the square, if they are directed as they ought t) bo. against the angles, 
 which are the weakest points, unless guarded by artillery. 
 
3G8 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 A H T I C L E XI. 
 
 ]. J G 11 '1^ A R T I L L E R Y T A C 'r I C S . 
 
 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 
 
 60.3. Liglit artillt'iymt'ii should, bofore rocLivirif; iiistriictinn in their 
 duties at the ]jicce, be fainiliar witli the tirst part of the scl\ool of the 
 Buldier, as laid down in Infantry Tactics, and with the Manual of 
 the Sabre, No. 410, and following. If intended for horse artillerymen, 
 they should also be instructed in the duties of the troojicr. No. 382, 
 and following. 
 
 The drivers — one to ever}- pair of horses — should have e.xpcrienco 
 in the uiauaj^eineut of horses in harness. 
 
 6.34. The cannoneers of a piece, when united, constitute a gun detach- 
 ment, which is composed ordinarily of nine men in mounted artillery, 
 and eleven in horse artillery; two of whom — the gunner who com- 
 mands the detachment and the chief of the cai.*sou — should bo 
 corporals. 
 
 The detachment i.s formed by the gunner, who causes the cannoneers 
 to form in two ranks, eighteen inches between them, elbows slightly 
 touching, lie tells the detachment off from the right, No. 1 being on 
 the right of the rear rank. No. 2 on the right of the front rank. No. 3 
 on the left if No. 1, No. 4 on the left of No. 2, and so cm, the even 
 numbers being in the front, and the odd numbers in the rear rank. 
 The chief of caisson is told ofl' as No. S. When the detaelunent is 
 composed of more or less than eight men. the chief of caisson should 
 be the highest even number. When the detachment, from any cause, 
 consists of less than nine men, the higher numbers arc left out. and 
 additional duties are imposed upon the cannoneers present. 
 
 Wlien the chief of the piece, who should bo a sergeant, is present, 
 and is not acting as the instructor, he performs the duties and takes 
 tlie position of the gunner, who then takes post one yard in rear of tho 
 right file and acts as file-closer, except when the chief of piece is out 
 of ranks, when he resumes his post. 
 
 For purposes of instruction, each detachment should be halted in 
 front of and facing the piece, the latter being unlimbercd,* and the 
 
 * Willi the liuilicr removed from tlie Ijoilv, and carried to llie rear, the trail 
 resting upon the grouml and the trail Iiandsiiikc. in the rings, as nliown in Fig. 14, 
 The piece is then prepared for firing or for action. Tho front in this case moans 
 in front of the mnz/.le. 
 
LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 369 
 
 different numbers called upon successively to perform their retpective 
 duties j)i detail, while the rest of the detachment are required to 
 attend to the instruction and to the mauner in which the motions are 
 performed. 
 
 Posts of the cannoneers. Piece unlimbered. 
 
 635. The gunner is at the end of the trail handspike; Nos. 1 and 2 arc 
 about two feet outside the wheels, No. 1 on the right and No. 2 on the 
 left; with howitzers, they are rather in rear of the muz7,le; with guns, 
 in line with the front part of the wheels. Nos. 3 and 4 are in line with 
 the knob of the cascabel, covering Nos. 1 and 2; No. 5 five yards in 
 rear of the left wheel ; No. 6 in rear of the limber, which is turned 
 about so as to face toward the piece (see No. 29); and No. 7 on his 
 left, covering No. 5; No. 8, the chief of the caisson, is four yards in 
 rear of the limber and on its left; all face to the left, which is the 
 direction in which the muzzle of the piece is pointing. 
 
 The chief of the piece is opposite the middle of the trail handspike, 
 outside of nud near the left cannoneers. In actual firing he places 
 himself where he can best observe the effect of the shot. 
 
 Loading and Jiring. 
 
 636. The piece is supposed to be on the drill ground, unlimbered and 
 ready for action: the limber is in position behind the piece and facing 
 toward it, the end of the pole .six j-ards from the end of the trail hand- 
 spike; and th« detachment in front of and facing the piece. 
 
 Before commencing the individual instruction of the cannoneers the 
 in.*tructor should enter into an explanation of the different kinds of 
 field guns, their names, and the names and uses of the different parts 
 of the gun and carriage before them. This done, he commences the 
 instruction with ihe gunner, who commands and points the piece in 
 action. 
 
 637. Commanding and pointing. — The gunner is responsible for the 
 manner in which the numbers discharge their duty. lie communicates 
 the orders which he receives for the kind of ammunition to be fired; 
 sending to No. 6 (who is charged with preparing the fuse) the time of 
 flight or the distance for each round, when firing shells or spherical 
 case-shot. He should, when the firing is slow, see that each fuse is 
 properly prejjared, and make such corrections as are necessary; for 
 this purpose he, as well as No. 6, should be provided with a fuse-gouge. 
 
 On receiving the command or signal to commence firing, he gives 
 the command load ; takes hold of the handspike at the end with the 
 
370 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 right hand, and at the centre with the left: pliicoa his left knee against 
 the left hand, bonding over it, the right knee being slightly bent; looks 
 over the top of the piece, and gives the direction. He then steps to 
 the breech to give the elcvatiun, which he docs by placing the hatisse 
 (see No. 6G3) on its seat, taking hold of a handlo of the elevating screw, 
 drawing back his right foot, bending over his left knee, and ^sighting 
 through the slit in the hausse. 
 
 When the piece is loaded and pointed he removes the hausse, gives 
 the couiraand ready, and, stepping clear of the wheel to that side 
 where he can best observe the effect of his shot, gives Iha command 
 fire. As soon as the piece has been tired, he causes it to bo run up to 
 its former place, if the recoil has made it necessary. 
 
 When the instructor, instead of giving the command com:uciiic jirini/, 
 gives that of load, the gunner repeats it, and performs the same duties 
 as before, except that he does not command //"/« until the firing is 
 ordered to commence. After the command to cummence Jlriny is given, 
 the action is continued by the gunner without further command from 
 the instructor until the firing is ordered to cease. When the com- 
 mands are all given by the instructor, as in loading by detail, the gun- 
 ner performs the same duties, but without repeating the commands. 
 
 fi38. SpniKjiiKj and rainmimj. — Until the command loud No. 1 stands 
 faced to the front, in line with the front of the wheels, holding the 
 sponge about the middle of the statf in his right hand, aud trailing it 
 at an angle of 45°, .sponge head up. 
 
 The instructor commands: 
 
 By detail — Load. 
 
 Three parses and four mollona. 
 
 Fimi motion. At the command load, No. 1 faces to the left, stops 
 oblitjuely to the right with his right foot, without moving his left, and 
 at the same time brings the sponge to a perpendicular position by 
 drawing his right hand up in line with the elbow. The sponge is 
 grasped firmly in the hand, the rammer head held over the right toe, 
 and the elbow kept close to the side. 
 
 Second motion. lie steps obli(|uely to the left with his left foot, 
 planting it about half-way between the piece and the wheel and oppo- 
 site the muzzle, bringing the sponge at the same time across his body 
 to the left, so tliat his right hand may be opposite the middle of the 
 body, the sponge staff being inclined at an angle of 45° across the 
 front of it. 
 
 Third motion. He takes aside step to the right of thirty inches with 
 the right foot, and, bending tho right knee, brings the sponge to a hori- 
 
LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 371 
 
 zontal position, extenting the hands to the ends of the staff, the sponge 
 head V> the left, the back of the riglit hand up. and that of the left 
 down, the sponge head pressing against the face of the piece. 
 
 Fourth rniition. He inserts the sponge head, dr^ps his left hand 
 behind his thigh, shoulders square, feet equally turned out, straightens 
 the right knee, bends tlie left, and, leaning over it, forces the sponge 
 home. 
 
 Sponge. 
 
 Three pel iisen and four nioh'ong. 
 
 First motion. At the command sponi/e. No. 1 fixes his eye on the vent 
 to see that it is closed, gives two turns to the sponge, pressing it at the 
 same time against the bottnni of the bore. 
 
 Second motion. He draws out the sponge, at the same time straight- 
 ening iiis left knee and ))en(liiig his right, seizes the staff near the 
 sponge head with his left hand, back of the hand down, and places the 
 siiongc against the face of the piece. 
 
 Third million. lie turns the sponge by bringing his hands together 
 in the middle of the staff, giving a cant with each hand, throwing the 
 sponge head over, at the same time turning his wrists, so as to bring, 
 the staff to a horizontal position : he (hen extends his hands to the ends 
 of the staff, the back of the left up, that of tbe right down. 
 
 During the whole time of sponging No. 1 keeps his eye on the vent. 
 If at any time it is not closed, he will discontinue the manneuvre, and 
 command stup rent. 
 
 Fourth motion. He introduces the r.araraer head into the muzzle as 
 soon as No. 2 has inserted the charge, and joins his left hand to his 
 right, casting his eyes to the front. 
 
 Ra.m. 
 
 Tini pnnii'ii and three motions. 
 
 First motion. At the command >-<ihi. No. 1 rams home, throwing 
 the weight of his body with the rammer; bending over his left 
 knee, and passing his loft arm, with the elbow slightly bent, and 
 back of the hand up. in a horizontal position over the knee, until it 
 points in the direction of the left trunnioii; the right shoulder 
 thrown back, and the eyes cast toward the front until the cartridge is 
 home. 
 
 Second motion. He jerks the spunge out with his right hand, al- 
 lowing it to slide through the hand as far as the middle of the staff. 
 
372 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 when he grasps it firmly, .and, ."seizing it close to the raramer he.iil with 
 the left hand, back of the hand up, places the rammer head against the 
 face of the jiiece, straightens his left knee, and stands erect, eyes to his 
 own front. 
 
 Third tnolinn. He then draws the sponge close to his body, and 
 immediately steps back outside the wheel, first with the right, then 
 with the left foot; so that when the right foot is brought to it the 
 right hip may be on a line with the front of the wheel. In draw- 
 ing the right foot to the left, ho gives the sponge a cant with his 
 left hand, at the same time quitting it, and brings the sponge to a 
 perpendicular position in the right hand, the rammer head resting on 
 the right toe. 
 
 licady. At (his command, which is given as soon as the piece is 
 loaded, or the firing about to commence. No. 1 breaks oft" well to the 
 left with his left foot, bending the left knee and straightening the right 
 leg, drops the end of the sponge staff into the left hand, back of the 
 hand down, and fi.\es his eyes on the muzzle. The heels should be 
 parallel with the wheel, the body erect on the haunches, and the sponge 
 and rammer held in both hands in a horizontal position, the sponge 
 head to the left. 
 
 The piece having been fired, No. 1 rises on his right knee, and 
 returns to his position as in the third motion of mm. 
 
 At the command load, ho steps in and jierforms his duties in the 
 same manner as before. 
 
 When the loading is not by detail No. 1 goes through all his 
 .duties at the command load, returns to his position outside the 
 wheel, as given in the third motion of ram ; breaks off at the com- 
 mand ready, and at the firing of the gun ri.ses, steps in, and performs 
 his duties as before. This ho continues until the command cense 
 friiiy is given, at which command he resumes the position he had 
 before the first command load. If the sponging has been commenced 
 when the command cease Jirimj is given, it is completed before No. 1 
 resumes his pc)st. 
 
 In sponging and ramming, if the length of the piece requires it, the 
 sponge and rammer are to bo pressed home in two motions, No. 1 
 extending his right hand to the end of the staff us soon as it reaches 
 the muz/.le. 
 
 In sponging Jiovitzcrn. No. 1 presses the sponge to the bottom of the 
 chamber, which should be well sponged outj he wipes the bore by 
 rubbing its whole .surface, witlmut allowing the sponge to turn iu his 
 hand.s. 
 
 6;i9. LiKidinij. — The instructor ])laces No. 2 on the left of the piece, 
 where he remains faced to the front until the command luad. At this 
 
LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 373 
 
 command he faces to his right, and by two oblique steps, corresponding 
 to those of No. 1, the first with his left foot, the second with his right, 
 at the command tiro, he places him.«clf near the muzzle of the piece. 
 At the command three, he brings up his left foot to the side of the right 
 and faces to the right, bringing his hands together to receive the nminii- 
 nition from No. 5 ; the cartridge in the right, the shot in the left hand. 
 As soon as the sponge is withdrawn b}' No. I he faces to the left and 
 puts the ammunition into the muzzle, taking care that the scam of the 
 cartridge does not come under the vent, and then steps back, commenc- 
 ing with his left foot, to his position outside the wheel, in the same 
 manner that No. 1 docs. 
 
 At the command ready, he breaks off well to the right with bis right 
 foot, bending the right knee and straightening the left knee; the body 
 erect on the haunches, the ej'os fixed on the muzzle. 
 
 The piece having been fired, No. 2 raises on his left leg, remains 
 far-ing the piece until he hears the command load, or the filing of the 
 gun, then steps in and performs his duty as before. At the command 
 ceane firing, he resumes his position outside the wheel and faces to the 
 front. 
 
 With the howitzer. No. 2 puts in the charge so that the fuse may rest 
 against the rammer head and No. 1 rams it home very carefully. 
 
 640. Serriiig the vent. — The instructor places No. 3 on the right of 
 the piece, on a line with the knob of the cascabel and covering No. 1 ; 
 he holds the priming wire in his right hand, thumb through the ring, 
 the thumbstall on the left thumb, and the tube pouch fastened to his 
 waist. 
 
 At the command load, he steps to his left, wipes the vent field (or* 
 surface around the vent) with the thumbstall, which he then holds 
 pressed upon the vent, keeping his elbow raised ; his fingers on the left 
 side of the piece, so as to allow the gunner to point over his thumb ; the 
 right hand on the tube pouch. When the piece is sponged, and the 
 charge inserted by No. 2, he jumps to the end of the trail handspike, 
 and, seizing it with both hands, prepares to move it to the right or left, 
 on a signal from the gunner, who taps the right of the trail for a move- 
 ment to the left, and the left of it for a movement to the right. As 
 soon as the piece is pointed the gunner raises both hands as a signal to 
 No. .^, who then resumes his post. 
 
 At the command ready, he steps to the piece, pricks the cartridge, 
 taking care not to move the charge, and covers the vent with his left 
 hand as soon as the friction tube is inserted. At the command /?»■«, ho 
 steps to his right, clear of the right wheel, and at the firing of the gun, 
 or at the command loa'l, aervea the vent as before. 
 
374 MANUAL FOn VULL'NTEKUS AND MILITIA. 
 
 No. 3 must krcj) tlio vent closeil frnin tlic time tlic spon;^e enters the 
 muzzle until the oliarge is inserted by No. 2. 
 
 641. Firini/. — The instructor places No. 4 on the loft of the piece, 
 opposite No. 3 and covering No. 2; he is equijipcd wilh a tuhe pouch 
 and lanyard. 
 
 At the comniaiid loml, No. 4 inserts the lanyard hi'"k into the ring 
 of a primer and stands fast. 
 
 At the command ready, ho steps in with the right foot, drops the tube 
 in the veni, takes the lanyard in his right hand, moves to the rear so 
 far as to keep the lanyard slack, hut capable of being stretched, with- 
 out altering his position, which should be outside the wheel, the left 
 foot broken to the left and rear. 
 
 As soon as No. 3 is clear of the wheel after the command /n-e i^ given 
 No. 4 pulls the lanyard briskly and firmly, passing the hand, back up, 
 in a downward direction to the rear, so as to keep tho lanyard-hook 
 from flying back in the direction of the face. Should the tube fail to 
 explode the charge, the gunner immediately commands don't advance, 
 the J) n' tlic r hn» failed. Upon which No. 2 steps inside the wheel, close 
 to the axletrce, receives a priming wire over the wheel from No. 3, and 
 a prepared primer from No. 4, pricks, in.-serts the primer, and resumes 
 his post. At the command cease firing, No. 4 secures his lanyard. 
 
 In the absence of No. 4 No. 3 discharges his duties ; after pricking 
 th« cartridge he prepares and inserts a friction tube, steps to his post, 
 faces the vent, breaks to his rear with his left foot, and at the command 
 Jirc, discharges the piece. lie then resumes his post and tends the vent 
 as before. 
 • 642. Serriuij aiiiminiition. — The instructor stations No. 5 five yards in 
 rear of the left wheel, and covering it, No. 7 in rear of and near tho left 
 limber wheel, and No. 6 in rear of the limber chest to issue ammunition. 
 He is provided with a fuse-gouge, and prepares the shells or spherical 
 case-shot, according to the distance or time ordered, before delivering 
 -them to No. 5. 
 
 7'o cut the Fuse. — Place the projectile between the knees, fuse upper- 
 most, and support it with the left hand. Holding the fuse-gouge in tho 
 right hand, place the left corner of its edge close to, and on the right 
 of the graduated mark indicating the time desired: then cut away grad- 
 ually until the composition is exposed for a length about ecjual to the 
 width of tho gouge. Care must be taken not to cut the fuses more 
 rapidly than the demand for shells or case-shot requires. 
 
 At the command load, No. 5 runs to the ammunition chest, receives 
 from No. 7 or No. 6 a single round, the shot in the right hand, the car- 
 tridge iu his left; takes it to the piece and delivor.s it to No. 2; returns 
 
LlfillT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 375 
 
 immediiitely for aDothtr round, and then halts at bis post until the 
 piece i? fired. In firing shell or spherical case he exhibits the fuse to 
 the gunner before delivering it to No. 2. 
 
 Ammunition puucbcs are worn by Nos. 5 and 7, hung from the left 
 shoulder to the riglit side; the round is so placed in the pouch that the 
 cartridge will be to the front. When it is brought up No. 6 holds open 
 die pouch and No. 2 takes out the round with both hands. In rapid 
 firing with round shot and canister, Nos. 5 and 7 may alternate in 
 delivering the charges. At the command ccoHe Jirhif/, No. 5 carries t!ie 
 round back to No. 6. No. 6 should keep the lid of the ammunition 
 chest closed as much as possible. At the command rente firing, \\b 
 carefully replaces the nmmunitiMin in the chest and secures the lid. 
 
 ftAZ. Londiug hi/ detail. — For the instruction of the cannoneers united 
 for the service of the gun the exercise is first conducted by detail, the 
 instructor giving all the commands. His commands are: Load by 
 detnH — LOAP, TWO, xnnEE, four: sponge; two, three, four: ram; 
 TWO, three: nEAnY ; fire; cease firing. 
 
 When the men are sufficiently instructed to go through the munual 
 without detail the commands of the instructor for that purpose are: 
 load; commence Jiring ; ceane jiritig ; or simply commence firing, and 
 cease firing. After the command commence firing, the action is con- 
 tinued as laid down for loading without detail, until the comraand 
 ceafe firing is given, which is repeated by the chief of the piece and 
 the gunner. 
 
 Moving the piece hy hand. Piece unlimbered. 
 
 644. 7'« the front. — The cannoneers beiug at their posts, the instructor 
 commands: 
 
 1. By hand to the front. 2. March. 3. Halt. 
 
 At the first command the gunner seizes the end of the handspike, 
 and Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 the spokes of the wheels. No. 1 with his left 
 hand; Nos. 2, 3, and 4 with both hands; No. 1 holds the sponge with 
 his right hand, the staff resting upon his right shoulder, sponge head 
 down. At the second command they move the piece forward, the gun- 
 ner raising the trail until the command hall is given, when all resume 
 their posts. 
 
 645. To the rear. — The instructor commands : 
 
 1. By hand to the rear. 2. March. 3. Halt. 
 
 At the first command the gunner, facing to the rear, seizes the hand- 
 spike with his right hand; Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 seize the wheels as 
 
370 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 before, except that N". 1. holding the sponge in liis left hand, uses bis 
 right hand at the wlicel. At the couimand lunrch. thoy move the piece 
 to tlie rear, the gunner rai,<yug the trail, until the command halt is 
 given, when all resume their posts. 
 
 Changing posts. 
 
 046. In order to instruct the men in all the duties of the piece the 
 instructor causes them to change posts. 
 For this jiurpose he commands : 
 
 1. Change posts, i. March. 
 
 At the command change pontx, the men on the right of the piece face 
 to the rear; those who have equipments lay them down. No. 1 resting 
 the sponge head on the nave of the wheel. At the command vuirch, 
 each man takes the place and equipments of the man in his front. 
 
 No. 1 takes the place of No. 3. 
 
 No. .3 " " No. 8. 
 
 No. 8 " " No. 6. 
 
 No. 6 •• •• No. 7. 
 
 No. 7 " " No. 5. 
 
 No. 5 " " No. 4. , 
 
 No. 4 " " No. 2. 
 
 No. 2 " " No. 1. 
 
 The gunner changes with one of the numbers by special direction of 
 the instructor. 
 
 647. EqiiipmentH. — The gunner, who is responsible for the equip- 
 ments, either distributes them from the limber chest or they may be 
 hung on the neck of the cascabel and distributed by him to the proper 
 numljcrs at the command take equipmcnlK, from the instructor. Ho 
 receives them again at the command replace equipment', making such 
 disposition of them as may bo directed. 
 
 Limbering. 
 
 648. To the front. — The instructor commands : 
 
 Limber to the front. 
 
 At this command No. 1 steps up between the mu/.zlc and the wheel 
 by the obli(iue steps indicated for loading; turns the staff, seizing it 
 with the left hand, at the same time shifting his right, the back of the 
 right up, that of the loft down, and passes the sponge on its hook, 
 
LIGFIT ARTILLERY TACTICS. Oil 
 
 rammer head to the rear, to No. 3. who receives the head, secures it 
 again.st the stop, and keys it up. The piece is then hrought about by 
 the cannoneers, and the limber, inclining to the right, passes to its 
 place in front of it, being drawn, when the horses are not attached, by 
 Nos. 6 and 7, who take hold of the end of the pole for the purpose. 
 
 To bring tlie piece about the gunner and No. 5 pass to the right of 
 the handspike and, facing toward the left, seize it, the gunner near the 
 end, and No. 5 at the middle and on his right, raise the trail and carry 
 it round to the left; Nos. 1 and 2 bear down upon the muz/.le, and Nos. 
 3 and 4, each using both hands, bring the wheels around; No. 3 turn- 
 ing the right wheel to the rear, and No. 4 the left wheel to the front. 
 When the piece is brought about, the trail is lowered ; Nos. 3 and 4 
 step within the wheels to avoid the limber ; Nos. 1 and 2 remain at the 
 muzzle, and the gunner and No. 5 step up between Nos. 3 and 4 and 
 the trail, the gunner first taking out the handspike and passing it to 
 No. 4, by whom it is put up. 
 
 As soon as the limber is in front of the piece the gunner comra.ands 
 halt, limber vp ; upon which the limber halts, the gunner and No. 5 raise 
 the trail by means of the handles, and, as.sisted by Nos. 3 and 4 at the 
 wheels, and Nos. 1 and 2 at the muzzle, run tlie piece forward and place 
 the lunette upon the pintle; the gunner then puts in the key, and all 
 take their posts : when necessary, Nos. 6 and 7 assist at the trail in 
 bringing tlie piece about and in limbering up. 
 
 649. To the right (or left). — The instructor commands: 
 
 Limber to the right (or leJT). 
 
 The tr.ail is turned to the right (or left), and the piece limbered up as 
 before ; the limber inclining to the right (or left), and taking its place 
 by a right (or left) wheel. 
 
 650. To the rear. — The instructor commands : 
 
 Limber to the rear. 
 
 The limber inclines to the right, and takes its place by wheeling 
 about to the left ; the piece is then limbered up as before. 
 
 Posts of the cannoneers. Piece Umbered. 
 
 651. Nos. 1 and 2 opposite the muzzle ; Nos. 3 and 4 opposite the 
 knob of the cascabel ; the gunner and No. 5 opposite the rear, and 
 Nos. 6 and 7 opposite the front parts of the limber wheels ; No. 8 is on 
 the left and opposite the limber chest of the caisson. All face to the 
 front, which is now in the direction of the pole instead of the muzzle, 
 
 32 
 
378 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEEtlS AND MitlTlA. 
 
 antl cover each other in lines one j'ard from the wheels; the even num- 
 bers on the right, the otid on the left. The chief of the piece is on the 
 left, and, if not mounted, opposite the end of the pole; if mounted, he 
 is near the leading driver and on his left. 
 
 To form the detachment. 
 852. To (he/rot)t. — The instructor commands: 
 
 Detachment — Front. 
 
 The gunner commands canno7iters, /oricard, march ; the even num- 
 bers move directly to the front; the odd numbers closing to the right 
 upon them when clear of the piece. The gunner files them to the left, 
 halts the detachment in front of the piece, and faces them to the front. 
 No. 8 moves directly forward, and takes his place in the detachment. 
 
 653. To the rear. — The instructor commands : 
 
 Detachment — Rear. 
 
 The gunners command cannoneeri,- rear face, march. At the com- 
 mand march, the odd numbers move directly to the rear, the even num- 
 bers closing to the right upon them after passing the piece; the detach- 
 ment is filed to the left at the proper distance, halted by the gunner 
 opposite the piece and faced to the front, No. 8 taking his proper place 
 in the detachment. 
 
 In forming the detachments in line, they are always, after halting, 
 dressed to the right by the gunner. 
 
 Posts of the detachments at their pieces. 
 
 C54. In front. — The detachment is in lino facing to the front, two 
 yards from the end of the pole of the leading horses. 
 
 In rear. — The centre of the detachment two yards behind the muzzle 
 and facing it. 
 
 On the ri<jht or Irft. — The detachment is in line opposite the axletreo 
 of the limber, and three yards from it. In horse artillery it is in line 
 with and three yards from the leading horses. In all cases it faces to 
 the front. 
 
 Chanye of posts of detachments at their pieces. 
 
 655. From front to rear. — The detachments being in line in front of 
 their pieces, to post them in rear the instructor commands : 
 
LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 379 
 
 Detachments — Rear. 
 
 The gunner commands cnnnoueera, rear face, ntarch. At the com- 
 mand march, Nos. 1,2, 3, and 4 oblique sufficiently to the left, and 
 Nos. 5, 6, 7, and 8 to the right ; move along the sides of their piece, 
 reunite as soon as they have passed it, and arc halted at the proper 
 distance, faced to the front, and aligned to the right by the gunner. 
 
 From rear to front. — The instructor commands : 
 
 Detachments — Front. 
 
 The gunner repeats the command, and adds march. At this command 
 the cannoneers oblique; Nos. 1, 2, .S, and 4 to the right. Nos. 5, 6, 7, 
 and 8 to the left ; pass their piece, reunite in front, and are halted and 
 aligned to the right by the gunner. 
 
 From rear to right (or left). — The instructor commands : 
 
 Detachments — right (or lej^). 
 
 Tlie gunner commands ri(jht (or left) oblique, vmrch, and afterward 
 forward, and halt, in time to bring the detachment to its post on the 
 right or left. He then aligns it to the right. 
 
 In horge artillery, to change from front to rear, the gunners command 
 left rererie, M Ancn ; FORWARD; left reverse, MknCH ; IIalt. The /^/« 
 reverse is executed on the same principle as the left about wheel in cavalry 
 tactics. 
 
 From rear to front. — The gunners command right oblique, March ; 
 Forward. Lift oblique, march; Forward ; Halt. 
 
 From rear to right (or left). — The gunners command right (or left) 
 oblique, March ; Forward; Halt. 
 
 From right (or left) to rear. — The gunners command right (or left) 
 reverse, March; Forward; right (or left) reverse, March; Halt. 
 
 If the piece is moving when the last change of post is ordered the 
 gunner halts, or slackens the pace until it passes, and then commands 
 left (or right) oblique, March; Forward. 
 
 The commands of the instructor in all these cases are the same as in 
 mounted artillery. The movements are executed in the same manner 
 when the detachment.s are dismounted. 
 
 To post the cannoneers at the piece limbered. 
 
 656. The detachment being formed in line in front or rear, or on tho 
 right or left, the instructor commands: 
 
380 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 Cannoneers, to your posts. 
 
 From (he /rout. — The gunner faces the detachment to the right, and 
 commands to your pottt, march. At this command the cannoneers, 
 Nos. 1 and 2, turning to the right, and opening out, file to their posts, 
 halt at their proper places, and face to the front. 
 
 From the rear, rtjht or left. — At the command cannoneeri. to your poiti, 
 the gunner, in each case, faces the detachment to the left, and marches 
 the cannoneers by that flank to their posts. 
 
 Moving the piece by hand. Piece limbered. 
 
 657. To the front. — The instructor commands: 
 
 1. Forward. 2. March. 3. Halt. 
 
 At the first command Nos. 6 and 7 seize the end of the pole with both 
 hands, the gunner and No. 5, facing toward the pole, seize the splinter- 
 bar with one hand and the pole with the other. Nos. 3 and 4 seize the 
 spokes of the hind wheels with both hands, and Nos. 1 and 2 apply both 
 hands at the head of the carriage. At the second command, all acting 
 together, move the piece forward until the command halt is given, when 
 all resume their posts. 
 
 To the rear. — The instructor commands: 
 
 1. Backward. 2. March. 3. Halt. 
 
 At the first command all face to the rear; Nos. 6 and 7 seize the end 
 of the pole with both hands ; No. 5 and the gunner seize the spokes of 
 the limber, and Nos. 1. 2, 3, and 4 those of the hind wheels. At the 
 command march, all moving together move the piece to the rear, Nos. 
 6 and 7 keeping it straight by the use of the pole. At the command 
 halt, all resume their posts. 
 
 Unlimbering, and coming into action. 
 To the front. — The instructor commands: 
 Action — Front. 
 
 658. At this command the gunner takes out the key, and assisted by 
 No. 6, raises the trail from the ))intle, and then commands drive on, 
 upon which Nos. 6 and 7 reverse the limber, and proceed with it to the 
 rear; again reverse to the left, and halt so that the limber shall cover 
 
LIGHT ARTILLHRY TACTICS. 381 
 
 the piece, with the end of the pole six yards from the end of the trail 
 handspike. At the same time that the limber moves oflF the piece is 
 brought about in all respects as in limbering to the front, except that 
 the gunner and No. 5, without lowering the trail, carry it about, each 
 by means of the handle on his own side. Nos. 6 and 7, when neces- 
 sary, assist at the trail, after placing the limber in position. 
 
 As soon as the piece is brought about and the trail lowered, No. 4 
 takes out the handspike and passes it to the gunner, who fixes it in the 
 trail. No. 1 takes out the sponge, No. 3 unkeying it, and No. 4 pre- 
 pares his lanyard. All then take their posts as required when the piece 
 is nnli'mbered. 
 
 To the riijht (or le/t). — The instructor commands: 
 
 Action right for lefl). 
 
 659. The piece is unlimbered in the same manner as for action, front, 
 and placed in the required direction, the limber wheels to the left (or 
 right), and takes its place in rear, by reversing to the left (or right). 
 
 To the rear. — The instructor commands: 
 
 1. Fire to the rear. 2 In batteky. 
 
 660. At the command in battery, the piece is unlimbered as before ; 
 the trail immediately lowered, and the gun prepared for action ; the 
 limber moves directly forward at the command rfrifc on from the gun- 
 ner, and takes its place by coming to the left about. 
 
 Movements with the prolonge. 
 
 661. The piece being in battery to fix the prolonge to fire retiring 
 the instructor commands : 
 
 Fix PRot.oNGE to fire retiring. 
 
 At this command the limber inclines to the right, wheels to the left 
 about, and halts four yards from the trail. No. 5 uncoils the prolonge 
 and passes the toggle to the gunner, who fixes it in the trail by passing 
 it upward through the lunette, while he attaches the other end to the 
 limber by passing the ring over the pintle and keying it. 
 
 At the command retire, the cannoneers face about and all march on 
 the left of the piece, except Nos. I and 3. They keep the implements 
 in their hands, and at the command halt, face about, resume their 
 posts, and go on with the firing. 
 
 Should the piece bo loaded at the command retire, No. 3 puts in the 
 priming wire. At the command halt, he takes it out again and No. 1 
 
382 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 rams home. If the command load be given when the piece is in 
 moliun, No. 6 puts in the charge and No. 2 serves vent, receiving from 
 No. 3 the necessary imiilcmcnts for that purpose. 
 
 The piece being in action, to fix the prolongo to fire advancing the 
 instructor commands: 
 
 Fix trolonge to fire advancing. 
 
 At this command the limber passes its piece on the right, and halts 
 when in front of it, Nos. 1 and 3 stepping within the wheels to avoid 
 the limber. No. 5 uncoils the prolonge, carries it to the front, gives 
 the toggle to No. 2, who puts it in the lunette of the axle-strap, while 
 he places the ring over the pintle and keys it. 
 
 In advancing, the men retain their implements and march at their 
 posts. At the command halt, No. 2 takes out the toggle and com- 
 mands drive on, upon which the limber takes its place in rear and the 
 firing is renewed. 
 
 When the i)iece is limbered, to fix the prolonge to fire retiring or 
 advancing the same commands are given. The piece is uulimbered 
 and the prolonge attached as before. 
 
 To fix the prolonge passing a ditch, or for any other purpose, the 
 covamaud is jijc proloufje. The prolonge is then fixed to the trail as 
 before. 
 
 In "moving with the prolonge, the gunner attends the handspike, and 
 in changes of direction is careful to circulate the trail round in proper 
 time to prevent the prolonge being cut by the wheels. No. 7 clears 
 the prolonge from the limber wheels, and Nos. 1 and 2 from the gun 
 wheels. In wheeling about, the limber first backs a little and then 
 describes a small circle. In passing a ditch, the gunner takes out the 
 handspike. 
 
 In fixing the prolonge for any puri)ose. the caisson wheels, or rever- 
 ses, if necessary, so that the horses of the limber and caisson may face 
 in the same direction. 
 
 To detach the prolonge from the limber and coil it up the instructor 
 commands : 
 
 Coil prolonge. 
 
 At this command the gunner takes out the toggle, and No. 6 takes 
 ofi" the ring and coils the prolonge, first passing the ring over the upper 
 prolongo hook. 
 
 To coil the prolonge and limber to the rear the instructor commands 
 coll prolonyc — limber to the rear. The prolonge is detached and coiled 
 as before, the piece is run toward the limber, which reins back on 
 
LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 383 
 
 receiving the command rein back from the gunner, and is limbered up. 
 To limber to the front, right, or left, the instructor commands : 
 coil proloiige — limber to the front (right or left), which is executed as 
 already described, the gunner commanding drive on as soon as the 
 prolonge is detached. 
 
 Service of the gun with diminished numbers. 
 
 662. Disabled men are replaced as soon as possible by the highest 
 numbers, or, if no men are selected to replace them, the highest num- 
 bers will be reduced to fill the vacancies thus created. During action 
 Nos. 1 and 2 may occasionally change places and numbers ; the duties 
 of No. 1 are very fatiguing. 
 
 Service of the piece by two men. — The gunner commands, points, 
 serves the vent, and fires; No. 1 sponges, loads, and serves ammuni- 
 tion. 
 
 Three men. — The gunner commands, points, serves the vent, and 
 fires; No. 1 sponges; No. 2 loads and serves ammunition. 
 
 Four men. — The gunner commands and points; No. 1 sponges; No. 
 2 loads and serves ammunition ; No. 3 serves vent and fires. 
 
 Five men. — The gunner commands and points; No. 1 sponges; No. 2 
 loads; No. .S serves the vent and fires ; No. 4 serves ammunition. 
 
 Six men. — The gunner commands and points; No. 1 sponges; No. 
 2 loads ; No. 3 serves the vent and fires ; Nos. 4 and 5 serve ammuni- 
 tion. 
 
 Seven men. — The gunner commands and points ; No. 1 sponges; No. 
 2 loads; No. 3 serves the vent and attends to the trail; No. 4 fires; 
 No. 6 is at the limber and serves ammunition to No. 5, and occasionally 
 changes with him. 
 
 Eight men. — No. 7 assists No. 6 ; the other numbers as before. 
 
 Supply of ammunition when in action. 
 
 663. When it can be done without inconvenience ammunition will be 
 served direct from the rear chest of the caisson, No. 8 performing the 
 duties prescribed for No. 6 at the limber chest. At convenient moments 
 the ammunition served out by No. 6 will be replaced from the rear 
 caisson chest. If the ammunition chest on the limber of the piece is 
 exhausted the limber is replaced by that of the caisson, and the empty 
 chest exchanged for the centre one of the caisson. 
 
 As a rule, the limber chests, and especially that of the piece, will be 
 kept full at the expense of the others, so that in case of a sudden move- 
 
384 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 ment on the field there shall always be .1 sufficient supi)ly of aininuni- 
 tion at hand. 
 
 Pointing and ranges. 
 
 664. To point a piece \s to place it iu such a position that the shot 
 may reach the object it is intended to strike. To do this, the axis of 
 the trunnions being horizontal, the line of metal, called also the natu- 
 ral line of sight, must be so directed as to pass through the object, and 
 then the elevation given to the i)ieee to throw the shot the required dis- 
 tance. The direction is given from the trail, and the elevation from the 
 breech : the trail being moved to the right and left by a handspike, and 
 the breech raised or depressed by an elevating screw. 
 
 The tijcin 0/ the j}iece coincides with that of the cj'linder of the bore. 
 
 The line 0/ light in pointing is the line of direction from the eye to 
 the object. It lies in a vertical plane, passing through, or parallel to 
 the axis of the piece. 
 
 The nngje of night is the angle which the line of sight makes with the 
 axis of the piece. 
 
 The natural line of sight is the straight line passing through the 
 highest points of the base ring, the swell of the muzzle, muzzle sight, or 
 muzzle baud. 
 
 The natural angle 0/ tight is the angle which the natural line of sight 
 makes with the axis of the piece. 
 
 The dispart of a piece is half the difTcrencc between the diameter of 
 the base ring and swell of the muzzle, or the muzzle band. 
 
 By range is commonly meant the distance between the piece and the 
 object which the ball is intended to strike; or the first graze of the 
 ball upon the horizontal plane on which the carriage stands. Point- 
 blank range is tno distance between the i)iece and the point-blank. 
 Ej-treme range is the distance bctwoun the piece and the point where the 
 ball finally rests. 
 
 665. Theory of pointing. — The point-hlank is the second point of 
 intersection of the trajectory or curve described by the projectile in its 
 flight with the lino of sigiit As the angle of sight is increased the 
 projectile is thrown further above the line of sight, and the trajectory 
 and point-blank distance become more extended. 
 
 The point-blank range increases with tlie relociti/, the diameter, and 
 the densitji of the ball. 
 
 A piece is said to be aini''d p lint-hlank when the lino of metal, 
 which is the natural lino of sight, is directed upon the object. This 
 must be the case when the object is at point-blank distance. AVhen 
 at a greater distance, the pendulum hausse, or the tangent scale, is 
 raised upon tho breech until the sight is at the height which the 
 
LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 385 
 
 degree of elevation for the distance may require. An nrtijicial lino of 
 sight, and an artificial point-blank, are thus obtained, and the piece is 
 aimed as before. 
 
 The different lines, angles, etc., which are to be taken into account in 
 pointing, will be understood by the following: (See fig. B.) 
 
 A B, axis of the piece. B E I F, trajectory, or curve described by 
 the ball. C F, line of sight. C D A, angle of sight or dispart. The 
 ball being thrown in the direction of the axis A B, is acted upon by 
 the force of gravity, and begins to fall at once below that line at the 
 rate of 16 J feet for one second, 64i for two, 144} for three, and so on in 
 proportion to the time. It cuts the line of sight at E, a short distance 
 from the muzzle of the piece, and descending, again cuts at the point 
 F. This second point of intersection is the point-blank. 
 
 Pendulum hnusse. — The instrument at present in most general use in 
 pointing field guns at objects beyond the natural point-blank is called 
 a, pendulum liausse, of which the component parts are denominated the 
 scale, the slider, and the seat. The scale is made of sheet brass; at 
 the lower end is a brass bulb filled with lead. The slider is of thin 
 brass, and is retained in any desirable position on the scale by means 
 of a brass set-screw with a milled head. The scale is passed through a 
 slit in a piece of sleel, with which it is connected by a brass screw, form- 
 ing a pivot on which the scale can vibrate laterally; this slit is made 
 long enough to allow the scale to take a vertical position in any 
 ordinary cases of inequality of the ground on which the wheels of the 
 carriage may rest. The ends of this piece of steel form two journals, 
 by means of which the scale is supported on the seat attached to the 
 piece. The seat is of iron, and is fastened to the base of the breech by 
 three screws in such manner that the centres of the two journal notches 
 shall be at a distance from the axis equal to the radius of the base ring. 
 
 A muzzle sight of iron is screwed into the swell of the muzzles of qunt 
 or into the middle of the muzzle rings of howitzers. The height of the 
 sight is equal to the dispart of the piece, so that a line from the top 
 of the muzzle sight to the pivot of the scale is parallel to the axis of the 
 piece. Consequently, the vertical plane of sight passing through the 
 centre line of the scale and the top of the muzzle sight will be also 
 parallel to the axis in any position of the piece; the scale will therefore 
 always indicate the angle which the line of sight makes with the axis. 
 The hausse, when not in use, is carried by the gunner in a leather 
 pouch, suspended by a shoulder strap. 
 
 On pointing. 
 
 666. As it is impossible to point a piece correctly without knowing 
 the distance of the object, artillerymen should be frequently practised in 
 CBtimating distances by the eye, and rectifying the estimate afterward, 
 .33 
 
.386 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND .MILITIA. 
 
 either by paring (he distance, or by measurement with a tnpe-line 
 or chain, until ihoy acquire the habit of estimating them correctly. 
 
 Sliillii are inteiidtil to bur.xt »ii the uliject aimed at : uphericnl ca»e- 
 thot are intended to bur-^t from fifty to scvcnly-five 3'ard.s short of it. 
 
 Shell or s-phcrical case firing, for long ranges, is less accurate than 
 that of solid shot. 
 
 At high elevations, a solid shot will range further than a shell or 
 cpherical casc-slu't, of the same diameter, fired with an equal charge. 
 But at low elevations, the shell or sjiherical case will have a greater 
 initial velocity and a longer range. If, however, the charges are pro- 
 portioned to the weights of the projectiles, the solid shot will, in all 
 cases, have the longest range. 
 
 The velocity or range of a shot is not aflccted in any njipreciaMe de- 
 gree by checking the recoil of the carriage, by using a tight wad, or by 
 different degrees of ramming. 
 
 The principal causes which disturb the true flight of the projectile 
 are as follow.« : 
 
 1st. If the wheels of the carriage are not upon the same horizontal 
 plane, the projectile will deviate toward the lowcut side of the carriage. 
 
 2d. If the direction of the wind is aero.«s the line of fire, deviations 
 in the flight of the projectile will be occasioned, and in pro]iortion to 
 the strength of the wind is the angle its direction make? with the line 
 of fire and the velocity of the projectile. 
 
 3d. If the centre of gravity of the projectile be not coincident with 
 the centre of figure, the projectile will deviate toward the henn'ext "ide, 
 that is, in the same direction that the centre of gravity of the projec- 
 tile, while resting in the piece, lies with regard to the centre of figure. 
 Therefore, if a shot be placed in the piece so that its centre of gravity 
 is to the riijJit of the centre of the ball, the shot will deviate to the 
 right ; and vice rcma. If the centre of gravity be above the centre of 
 figure the range will be inrreaeed ; if below it will be dimini."'hcd. 
 
 Solid shot should be used from H50 yards upward ; the Uoc of canister 
 should begin at 350 yards, and the rapidity of the fire increases as the 
 range diminishes. In emergencies, double charges of canister may be 
 used at 150 or 160 yards, with a single cartridge. 
 
 Spherical case should not, as a general ruloj be used for a less range 
 than oUO yards; and neither spherical ease nor shells should be fired at 
 rapidly advancing bodies, as, for instance, cavalry charging. 
 
 The fire of spherical case and of shells on bodies of cavalry in line 
 or column, and in position, is often very efi'ectivo. To the destructive 
 eflects of the projectile are added the confusion and disorder occasioned 
 among I he horses by tlie noise of their explosion ; but neither shells 
 nor spherical case should be fired so rapidly as solid shot. 
 
 In case of necessity, solid shot may be fired from howitzers. 
 
LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 387 
 
 SCHOOL OF THE BATTEEY. 
 
 Composition of the battery, and the officers and men necessary to 
 man it. 
 
 667. The battery is composed of four, six, or eight pieces ; six pieces 
 will be .supposed. It is divided into three sections of two pieces each, 
 denominated the ri<jht, centre, and left sections, according to their posi- 
 tion in line. The battery is commanded by a captain ; each section is 
 comiuauded by a lieutenant, called the chief of section, and an addi- 
 tional lieutenant is necessarj' to command the line of caissons. Each 
 piece is commanded by a sergeant, as chief of the piece, while the gun- 
 ner and chief of caisson are corporals. The officers and men necessary 
 to man the battery constitute a company, which is divided into as many 
 platooni as there are pieces. Each platoon is composed of the drivers 
 and cannoneers of a single piece, and is commanded by the chief of 
 the piece ; the cannoneers of a piece, as already stated in the school 
 of the piece, constitute the gun detachment. AVhen the drivers and 
 cannoneers form together the drivers form on the left. 
 
 Two platoons constitute a section. 
 
 In addition to the platoons, there should be a first (or orderly) ser- 
 geant attached to the company; a quartermaster-sergeant, i'wo buglers 
 or trumpeters, one guidon, and as many artificers as mny be necessary 
 to keep the guns, carriages, harness, etc., in order. 
 
 When the company is formed, the platoons form in lino in the order 
 of their pieces. 
 
 Posts of the officers, non-commissioned officers, etc. 
 
 668. The captain commanding goes where bis presence may be neces- 
 sary, or his commands best heard. His position in the order in line is 
 four yards in front of the centre of the company ; in the order in col- 
 umn or when the company is faced by a flank, four yards outside the 
 flank in the first case, and from the company in the second, and oppo- 
 site the centre. 
 
 The lieutenants commanding sections in line or in column of sections, 
 are two yards in front of the centres of their respective sections; in 
 columns of platoons or of detachments or when faced bj' a flank, they 
 are two yards outside the marching flank, and opposite the centres 
 of their respective sections ; except that, when faced by a flank, the 
 
388 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 chief of the lea<ling section takes his place at the side of the leading 
 file. ■ 
 
 The chief uf the line of caissons is four yards in rear of the centre 
 of the company when it is tii line ; when it is in cnluiiin or faced by a 
 Jlnuk, he is four yards outside the pivot flank, and opposite the centre 
 of the company. 
 
 The chiefs of pieces, when the company is in line, in column of sfc- 
 tionn, or faced by n Jiank, are on the right of the gun detachments of 
 their respective platoons, in the front rank. In column of platoonn or 
 o/ (leiachmentK, they are one yard in front of the centres of their pla- 
 toons or of their gun detachments. 
 
 The gunners, when the company is in line or in column of aectiot}^, 
 are one yard behind the right files of their respective gun detachments. 
 In column of platoons or deUtchmentg, they are on the right of the gun 
 detachments. When faced by a fnnk they face wiih the company and 
 retain their relative positions. 
 
 The chiefs of caissons are in their places in the ranks as No. 8 
 of the gun detachments, or as the front rank men on the left of their 
 platoons. 
 
 The first sergeant, when the company is I'li line, is on the right of 
 the front rank, and one yard from it; when it is in colnmn he is on the 
 marching flank, one yard outside the section, platoon, or detachment 
 nearest bim when in line. When the company faces by a /lank he faces 
 with it. 
 
 The quartermaster-sergeant is on the left of the company, and 
 occupies positions corresponding to those of the first sergeant on the 
 right. 
 
 AVheu the company is in line the buglers are on the right of the first 
 sergeant, in one rank, and two yards from line; in column, they are si.\ 
 yards in front or rear of the subdivision next them in line, according 
 as th.at subdivision forms the head or rear of the column. When the 
 corai)any is faced by a /lank they face also. 
 
 The artificers occupy positions on the left of the company, cor- 
 responding to those of the musicians on the right. 
 
 The guidon forms with the musicians, or takes such positions as the 
 captain prescribes. 
 
 Manning the battery. 
 
 669. The gun detachments and teams, having been properly told 
 ofl', are marched to the battery or park, with the teams in front. 
 
 The chiefs of pieces and caissons, when mounted, march with the 
 teams; when the teams reach the battery they are hitched by the 
 drivers. 
 
LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 389 
 
 In forming the dctuchments they are formed in line, touching each 
 ^other, and in positions corresponding to the positions of their pieces in 
 the battery. The chiefs of sections, etc., are at their posts as directed 
 for the company in line. 
 
 The detachments are marched to the battery cither in column or in 
 line, as circumstances may require. 
 
 Each detachment is halted by its gunner when opposite its piece, and 
 wheeled into line. 
 
 If approaching from the front or rear, the detachments are formed 
 in line facing the battery in the same order as their pieces and the 
 captain commands : 
 
 Detachments, opposite your pieces. 
 
 At this command each detachment is wheeled or faced in the 
 proper direction bj' its gunner, marched opposite its piece, and formed 
 in line. 
 
 The captain, after all the detachments have been halted in front or 
 rear of their pieces, commands : 
 
 Cannoneers, to your posts. 
 
 At this command the gunners face their detachments, and all take 
 their posts as directed in No. 656. 
 
 The position of the detachment in hi>rnc artilhry is habitually two 
 paces in rear of the muzzle of the piece, but its position may be 
 changed by the means laid down in No. 655. 
 
 During the manoeuvres of mounted artillery the cannoneers are 
 seated on the ammunition chests as follows : The gunner and Nos. 
 6 and 6 on the limber chest of the piece, the gunner on the right 
 and No. 6 on the left; Nos. 1, 2, and 7 on the limber chest of the 
 caisson. No. 2 on the right and No. 1 on the left; Nos. 3, 4 and 8 
 on the middle chest of the caisson. No. 4 on the right and No. 3 on the 
 left. 
 
 When circumstances require it, Nos. 6 and 7 may be directed to 
 mount the rear chest of the caisson. The}' sit with their backs to the 
 front, No. 6 on the right- 
 
 To mount and dismount the cannoneers. 
 
 670. To Hioioif.— The captain halts the battery, if not already at a 
 halt, and commands : 
 
 1. Cannoneers, prepare to 7nount. 2. Mount. 
 
300 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 At the first command tlie cannoneers run to their respective places, 
 and stand facinjj the chests which they are to mount. The gunner nndy 
 No. 5 in rear of the gun limber ; No. 6 on the right of the gunner ; 
 Nos. 1 and 2 in rear of the caisson limber; No. 7 on the left of No. 1 ; 
 Nos. 3 and 4 in front of the middle chest of the caisson ; No. 8 on the 
 right of No. .3. The gunner and Nos. 2 and'3 seize the handles with 
 the right hand and step upon the stocks with the left foot, and Nos. 5, 
 1, and 4 seize the handles with the left hand and step upon the stocks 
 with the right foot. 
 
 At the command mount', the gunner and Nos. 1, 2, .3, 4, and 6 spring 
 into their seats. The gunner and Nos. 5, 1, and 2 scat themselves in 
 their places with their backs to the front, and immediately face about 
 by throwiug their legs outward over the haudlcs. 
 
 No. 8 then springs into his seat in the same manner as No. 3: Nos. G 
 and 7 step in rear of their chests, place their hands upon f.hcm, step 
 upon the stocks with their nearest feet, spring up, step over the bo.tcs, 
 and take their seats, placing their hands on the shoulders of the men 
 already seated, in order to steady themselves. 
 
 When the command caiinoneern, iiioiiiit, is given by itself, the men run 
 to their places and spring into their scats at once. No. 8 taking his seat 
 before No. 3. 
 
 671. To dismount. — The captain lialts the carriages as before, and 
 commands : 
 
 1. Cannoneei's^ prepare to dismount. 2. Dismount. 
 
 At the first command the cannoneers stand up in their places, e.\cept 
 the gunner and No. 5, who face about. At the second command the 
 whole jump off and run to their posts. 
 
 AVhen the command cannoneers, dinnioutit, is given. by itself, tlie men 
 jump from their chests in the same manner. 
 
 The cannoneers always dismount at the command action front, riijht 
 (or Iv/t). They also dismount at the command /;i battery as soon as the 
 carriage on which they are mounted halts. 
 
 In horse artillery the gunner dismounts the cannoneers when the 
 command action front, ritjht, or Uft, or in battery, is given, and all 
 move to their posts in double-quick time, and unlimbcr as rapidly as 
 possililc. 
 
 The object of mounting the cannoneers on the ammunition chests is 
 generally to enable the battery to make quick movements. 
 
 To unpark. 
 
 070. Everything being pre])ared for maureuvriiig, if the captain 
 wishes to unpark l)y the right he commands : 
 
LIGHT ARTIIJiKUY TACTICS. 301' 
 
 1. By piece — fr mi the right — front into column. 2. March. 
 
 At the command march, the right piece, followed by its caidsuu, 
 marches direct to the front, and ihe cai)tiiia indicates the direction it 
 should take. The other pieces and caisson.s follow the movement of 
 the right piece, each so regulating its march by that which pi'ccedes it 
 as to march in the same direction, and two yards behind. Each chief 
 of section directs the march of his carriages, which are so conducted 
 by their chiefs as to enter the columns by the' most simple movement. 
 The C(dumn of pieces is thus formed with a distance of two yard.-! be- 
 tween the carriages; and in horse artillery with tlu: same distance 
 between the carriages and detachments. 
 
 The captain goes wherever his duty may require, but generally 
 remains on the left flank, opposite the centre of the column. 
 
 The chief of the leading section places himself near the chief of 
 the leading piece, and on his left; the other chiefs of sections four 
 yards from the left flank, abreast of the cer^tres of their respective 
 sections. 
 
 The chief of the line of caissons is iii rear of the chief of the centie 
 section. 
 
 Each chief of piece and caissin. wliei ni xmtcd, is near his leading 
 driver, on the left. 
 
 The trumpeter is near thocapt;iin. 
 
 When the battery is parked with the caissons in front, the captain 
 causes it to unpark by the right by the same commands — the move- 
 ments being executed in the same manner. 
 
 The battery may be imparked by the left accorli ng to the same 
 principles and by inverse means. 
 
 The column of pieces is not tj be considered a column of manoeuvre. 
 It will be changed into a column of sections as soon as the nature of 
 the ground will permit. But the cvigencies of service sometimes re- 
 quire that formations into line and battery should be made directly 
 from the column of pieces. In such qases, the principles and com- 
 mands laid down for similar formations from the column of sections 
 will govern. In the formations to the right or left the pieces must 
 close up, and wheel successively when opiiosite their proper places. 
 
 To halt. 
 
 To halt the battery when marching in coliuun of piei-es the captaiu 
 commands : 
 
392 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 1. Column. 2. Halt. 
 
 At the second couimnnil, repeated by the chiefs of section!", all the 
 carriages are immediately halted. 
 
 Change of gait. 
 
 673. The changes of gait in column of pieces are executed hy the 
 following commands from the captain : 
 
 To 1)1133 from the walk to a trot. '' 
 
 1. Trol. 2. M.\KCH. 
 To pas.s from a trot to a walk. 
 
 1. Walk. 2. March. 
 
 At the first command, repeated by the chiefs of sections, all the 
 drivers and others on horseback prepare to change the gait; and at the 
 second, repc;ited in like manner, they pass at once to the gait indicated 
 by the first command. 
 
 To form sections. 
 
 674. When the battery is marching at a walk in column of pieces, to 
 form sections at the same gait by gaining ground to the left the captain 
 commands : 
 
 1. Form sections, left oblique. 2. Makch. 3. Guide right. 
 
 (Fig. 154.) The chief of the leading section repeats the commands 
 /orm Kectioii, left obl{<{iie, march; yuide riijlit, in succession after the 
 captain. At the command march, the two first carriages, piece, and 
 caisson continue to march, and halt when they have advanced five 
 yards. The two following gain their interval of fourteen yards by ob- 
 liquing to the left, and place themselves abreast and parallel with the 
 other two. 
 
 The other sections continue to march in column of pieces, and are 
 formed successively by their chiefs; each commanding y'orm ncetioii, 
 left nblirjuc, in time to command viarcli when the leading carriage of 
 his section has arrived within five yards of its distance. The chief of 
 section then commands (/k/i/c ritjht. 
 
 When the column of pieces is marching at a trot, the formation is 
 executed according to the same principles and by the same commands. 
 But the leading carriages, instead of advancing five yards and halting 
 
LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 393 
 
 as Iteforc, pass to a walk as soon as the commaml march is repeated by 
 the chief of section. The other sections continue to march at a trot, 
 and execute the movement at that gait, the two leading carriages of 
 each section passing to a walk at the command mnrch, which must be 
 given when they have closed to their proper distance. 
 
 When the column of pieces is at a halt, the formation is executed a^ 
 prescribed for the column at a walk. In this case the carriages all 
 move at the command viarrh, and the leading ones halt after advancing 
 five yards. 
 
 When the column of pieces is marching at a walk, to form sections 
 al a trot gaining ground to the left the captain commands : 
 
 1. Form seciio7is, left oblique, (rot. 2. March. 3. Guide right. 
 
 The chief of the leading section repeats the commands form gccti'o?i, 
 left obliqve, trot; warrh ; guide right, in succession after the captain. 
 At the command nuirrh, the two leading carriages continue to march in 
 the original direction at a walk. The two following oblique to the left, 
 gain their intervals at a trot, and resume the walk when opposite the 
 leading carriages. 
 
 At the first command the chiefs of the other sections command trot / 
 and at the second, which they repeat, their sections commence the trot. 
 
 The chiefs of the second and third sections command forni section, 
 left oblique, in time to command march when the leading carriage of 
 each section has nearly gained its distance. The leading carriage then 
 resumes the walk, and the chief of section commands yiiide riijht. 
 
 The chiefs of sections superintend their carriages, and take the posts 
 assigned them in the order in column as soon as their sections are 
 formed. 
 
 Sections are formed by gaining ground to the right according to the 
 same principles and by inverse means. 
 
 The lattery heihy in column of pieces, to' form the caissons on the 
 flank. 
 
 675. When the batterj' is in column of pieces, with the caissons in 
 rear, to form the pieces and caissons into separate columns, as in the 
 flank march of a battery in line, the captain commands: 
 
 1. Caissojis left Cor caissons left, trot). 2. March. 3. Guiele 
 right. 
 
 These commands are repeated by the chiefs of sections, the caissons 
 oblique at once to the left, gain the interval of fourteen yards, and 
 
394 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 place themselves opposite their pieces ; the pieces closing upon each 
 other at the same time to the us\ial distance. The gait is regulaU-d as 
 in the formation of sections: and when t'le movement is performed at 
 a walk the leading carriaj^c halts after adTam-iug its own lenj;ih. 
 
 The chiefs of sections take their places as in column of sections. 
 
 The caissons are formed on the right according to the same jirinci- 
 ples and by inverse means. 
 
 When the pieces arc in rear, they arc formed on the right or left of 
 their caissons in the same manner and by corresponding commands. 
 
 To march in column. 
 
 676. The battery being in column ut a halt, to advance the ca])tain 
 commands : 
 
 1. Column, forward. 2. March. 3. Guide left (ov right). 
 
 The commands forward, march ; yuide left (or right), are repeated 
 by the chiefs of sections. At the command march, all the carriages 
 advance, the guide maintains the direction, and the carriages, as well 
 as the detachments of horse cannoneers, preserve their intervals and 
 distances. 
 
 To march by a Jlank. 
 
 677. The battery being in column, in march, or at a halt, to gain 
 ground to the left the captain commands : 
 
 1. Column, hy the left Jlank. 2. March. 
 
 (Fig. 155.) The commands hi/ the left flank, march, are repeated by 
 the chiefs of sections. At the command march, each carriage wheels at 
 once to the left. 
 
 AVhon the wheel i.< nearh' completed the captain commands : 
 
 1. Forward. 2. Guide right. 
 
 These commands arc repeated by the chiefs of sections. At the 
 command forward, all the carriages march direct to the front. 
 
 The lino is regularly established and the carriages aligned in each 
 rank, with their distances of two and intervals of fourteen yards. 
 The chiefs of sections take their places between the loading carriages 
 as in lino. 
 
 To cause the battery to resume its original direction the captain 
 commands : 
 
LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 305 
 
 1. Battery, by the right Jlank. 2. March. 3. Forward. 
 4. Guide reft. 
 
 The commands by tho riijht flank, march ; foncard ; guide left, are 
 repeated and executed according to the principles before described. 
 
 After the flank march, to march the battery in a direction opposite 
 to the original one the captain commands : 
 
 1. Battery, hy the left flank. 2. March. 3. Forward. 
 4. Guide right. 
 
 In home artiUcry the flank march is executed according to the 
 same principles and by the same commands. The line formed by the 
 flank movement is established, and the carriages aligned in each rank, 
 with distances of five and intervals of fourteen or twenty-one yards, 
 according to the relative positions c)f the pieces and caissons. The 
 detachments wheel in the same direction as their pieces ; and, after 
 following them during a part of the movement, place themselves by 
 their sides, two j-ards from the wheels, with the heads of their leading 
 horses on a line with the axletrees of the limbers. lu marching by 
 the left flank they are on the left of their pieces, and. the reverse 
 when marching by the right. When sufficient ground has been gained 
 to the flank, and the battery resumes its formation in column by 
 marching in the original direction, the dL'tachjnents wheel in the same 
 direction as their pieces and place themselves in their rear. But when 
 the march in column is in the opposite direction they resume their 
 places by allowing their pieces to pass them and then falling in their 
 rear. 
 
 The flank march, to gain ground to the right, is execut:-d according 
 to the same principles and by inverse means. 
 
 In each case the captain and the chief of the lino of caissons change 
 their direction to the left or right, and conform to the movements of 
 the battery. 
 
 Oblique march. 
 
 678. The batterj- being in column, in march or at a halt, to cause 
 it to march obliquely to gain ground to the front and left the captain 
 commands : 
 
 1. Column, left oblique. 2. M.\ucii. 3. Guide right. 
 
 The chiefs of sections repeat the commands left oblique ; miirch ; 
 yuide ri'jht. At tho command iinircji, all the carriages oblique at 
 
396 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 once to the left, and march ilircct to the front in the new directi<in ; 
 niDvinj!; in parallel lines, dressing by the right, and iireservinp their 
 intervals from that flank. 
 
 In obliquing, the heads of the horses of each rank are on a line 
 parallel to the original front of the column. The interval between 
 the carriages is fourteen yards, measured parallel to the front; and 
 only ten if measured perpendicularly to the oblii|ue direction. Each 
 carriage of the right file man-hcs in the prolongation of the left 
 carriage of the rank which precedes its own, and at a distance of nine 
 yards. 
 
 The officers conform to the movement and preserve their relative 
 positions. 
 
 To resume the original direction tlio captain commands: 
 
 FOKWAUD. 
 
 This command is repeated bj' the chiefs of sections, and the car- 
 riages resume the original direction by obliquing to the right. 
 
 If the captain wishes to halt the column for the purpose of rectifying 
 its alignments, intervals, or obliquity, he commands : 
 
 1. Column. 2. Halt. 
 
 And to resume the march iu the oblique direction : 
 
 1. Column. 2. March. 3. Guide right. 
 
 The commands halt ; march ; ijuide riyht, are repeated by the chiefs 
 of sections. 
 
 The right oblique is executed according to the same principles and 
 by inverse means. 
 
 Passage of carriages in column. 
 
 679. When the battery is marching in column at a walk, to change 
 the relative positions of the front and rear ranks without altering the 
 gait the captain commands : 
 
 1. Pieces pass your caissons (or caissons jjass your pieces). 
 2. March. 
 
 These commands are repeated by the chiefs of sections ; and at the 
 command march, the leading carriages of each section halt. Those of 
 the rear rank e.vecute the i)a»sage without changing the gait, and halt 
 as soon as they have reached their positions in front. 
 
 To continue the march without halting the carriages of the rear 
 
LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 397 
 
 rank the captain commands fonrard when the passa<!;c is nearly com- 
 pleted, and the command is repeated by the chiefs of sections. 
 
 Wiien the column is marching at a trot the passage is executed ac- 
 cording to the same principles and b^- the same commands, except that 
 the carriages of the front rank move at a walk instead of halting at the 
 command march. The carriages of the rear rank execute the passage 
 at a trot, and then change the gait to a walk. 
 
 When the column is at a halt the- passage is executed according to 
 the same principles and by the same commands. If the captain wishes 
 to put the. column in march immediately after the movement he com- 
 mands forward, when the passage is about being completed, and then 
 ffiiide left (or rir/ht). These commands are repeated by the chiefs of 
 sections. 
 
 When the column is marching at a walk, to execute the passage at a 
 trot the captain commands: 
 
 1. Pieces pass your cav^sons, frol. (or caissons pass your pieces, 
 trot). 2. Makcii. 
 
 These commands arc repeated by the chiefs of sections. At the 
 command march the carriages of the front rank in each section con- 
 tinue to march at a walk. Those of the rear rank execute the passage 
 at a trot, and resume the walk as soon as the passage is completed. 
 
 About in column. 
 
 680. The battery being in column, in march or at a halt, to face it to 
 the rear the captain commands : 
 
 1. Pieces and caissons left about. 2. Makch. 
 
 These commands are repeated by the chiefs of sections; and at the 
 second all the carriages execute the about. When the movement is 
 about being completed the captain commands column, halt; or for- 
 nard, guide rii/ht (or left); the commands halt or forward, guide right 
 (or left), arc repeated by the chiefs of sections. 
 
 Countermarch in column. 
 
 681. The battery being in column, in march or at a halt, to execute 
 the countermarch in each section the captain commands: 
 
 1. Countermarch. 2. March. 
 These commands arc repeated by the chiefs of sections, and at the 
 
398 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 second each piece aiul its cai.>'»on •■scmtc the countermarch. When 
 the morement i.s about being completed, the captain commands column, 
 halt; OT fortrnid ; ijnide right (or Ifft). 
 
 These commands are repeated as in the preceding paragraph. 
 
 To change direction in column. 
 
 fiS2. The liatiery being in column, in march or at a halt, to cause it 
 to change direction to the left the captain commands: 
 
 Head of column to the left. 
 
 The chief of the leading section commands Ir/t wheel — March ; and 
 afterward, fortrurd. At the command vinrch, the pivot carriage exe- 
 cutes the wheel without changing the gait. The carriage on the 
 wheeling flank wheels in such a manner as to conform to its movement, 
 increasing the gait and preserving the intervals. At the command 
 / oniard, the pivot carriage moves direct to the front, and the other 
 resumes its original gait after completing the wheel and arriving upon 
 the same line. The carriages of the rear rank preserve their distance 
 and follow those of the front rank. 
 
 Each of the other sections, on arriving at the point where the first 
 wheeled, executes the same movement and by the same commands 
 from its cliief. 
 
 Each chief of section must give the coni.nand left wheel in time to 
 command march when the heads of his leaders are three yards from 
 the wheeling point. And the command /ocictn-rf must be given as soon 
 as the leading pivot carriage has entered the new direction. 
 
 The change of direction to the right is executed according to the 
 same principles and by inverse means. 
 
 To diminish the front of a colu:iin on the mai'ch. 
 
 683. The battery niarcliing iif a walk in cohiuin of sections, to form 
 column of pieces from the right at that gait the captain commands: 
 
 1. By the riffht, break sections. 2. March. 
 
 (P'ig. li>4.) The chief of the leading section commands successively, 
 after the captain, Ay the right, break section ; march. At the command 
 march, the two right carriages of the leading sections continue to march 
 at a walk, and all the other carriages halt. The left carriages of the 
 leading section remain halted until the leaders of the leading carriage 
 are passed by the wheel horses of the rear carriage on the right. They 
 
LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 399 
 
 then oblique, to the right, take their jilaces in column, and follow the 
 two leading carriages. The other sections are broken in succession by 
 the same commands from their chiefs, the command march being given 
 when the wheel horses of the left carriages of the next preceding sec- 
 tion enter the right obli<;|ue. 
 
 When the column is marching at a trot, the column of pieces is formed 
 according to the same principles and by the same commands. But in 
 this case the carriages which halted before slacken the gait to a walk, and 
 resume the trot to oblique and enter the column. 
 
 When the column is at a halt, the movement is executed as prcsoribed 
 for a column marching at a walk : the two risrht carriages of the lead- 
 ing section moving forward at a Wiilk at the command march. 
 
 The battery marching at a walk in column of sections, to form col- 
 umn of pieces from the right at a trot the captain commands: 
 
 1. Bi/ the right, break secliuns, trot. 2. M.\RCH. 
 
 The chief of the leading section commands successively, after the 
 captain, bi/ the riijht, break section, trot ; march; and the right carriages 
 of the leading se(?tion move forward at a moderate trot. The left car- 
 riages of the same section commence the trot on obliquing to enter the 
 column. 
 
 The other sections are broken successively by the same commands 
 from their chiefs; and the carriages are regulat€d by each other as in 
 breaking sections at a walk. 
 
 This formation is executed from the left, according to the same prin- 
 ciples and by inverse means. 
 
 In column with the caissons on the jlank, to replace them in front 
 or rear. 
 
 684. The battery being in column with the caissons on the flank, to 
 re-establish them in rear of their pieces the captain commands: 
 
 1. Caissons, rear (or caissoris, rear, trot). 2. March. 
 
 Each chief of section repeats the commands in time to command 
 march when the leading piece of his section is to commence the move- 
 ment. The piece at the head of the column moves forward with the 
 required gait, and its caisson places itself in rear by an oblique. The 
 other pieces move forward in succession, and are followed by their 
 caissons in like manner. 
 
 All the carriages preserve the usual distance in column. 
 
400 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 This inovemeut i;! jicrformeil with the difforent gaits, iiud according 
 to the principles prescribed for breaking sections. 
 
 The formation for placing the caissons in front is executed by the 
 commands cainKout, front (or cni»foii», front, trot); march, the caissons 
 ob1i(|uing successively in front of their pieces. 
 
 To pass from the order in column to ike order in line, and the 
 reverse. 
 
 In all formations in line or column the movements are th? same 
 whether the pieces or ciiissons lead. 
 
 Forward inio line. 
 
 685. The battery being in cnlumn at a halt, to form it into line on 
 the head of tbo coltunn, gaining groiuul to the left, the captain com- 
 mands : 
 
 1. Fonoard into line, left oblique. 2. March. ' 3. Guide right. 
 4. Front. 
 
 (Fig. 156.) At the first command tbo chief of the leading section 
 commands section, forward, and those of the other sections section, left 
 nbliiiun. At the command march, repeated by the chiefs of sections, tbo 
 loading section moves to the front, and its chief repeats the command 
 for the guide. After advancing eighteen j'ards, or for horse artillery 
 twenty-two, he commands section, halt; vi<jht dress. 
 
 Each of the other chiefs of sections repeats the command for the 
 guide, and conducts his section by a left oblique, until by the direct 
 march it may gain its proper interval from the section immediately on 
 its right. He then cun\n\a.uAs forward, and when within four yarils of 
 the line section, halt ; riyht, dress. 
 
 When the battery is aligned the captain commands front. 
 
 Tho movement is executed on the opposite flank, according to the 
 same principles and by inverse means. 
 
 lu this case tho commands are forward into line, riyht oblique, march; 
 guide left, front. 
 
 The formation /orioarrf into line by a right or left oblique is executed 
 in a similar manner when the column is in march. In this case the 
 chief of tho leading section gives no command, except for the ^uide, 
 until he has advanced the distance before prescribed, lie then halts 
 his section as before. 
 
LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 401 
 
 To form line faced to the rear. 
 
 686. The battery being in column at a halt, to form it into line faced 
 to the rear on the head of the column, gaining ground to the left, tho 
 captain commands : 
 
 1. Into line, faced to the rear, left oblique. 2. March. 
 3. Guide right. 4. Front. 
 
 (Fig. 157.) At the first command the chief of the leading section 
 commands section, foricnrd ; and those of the other sections section, 
 left oblique. At the command march, repeated by the chiefs of sections, 
 the movement is executed as in Xo. 6S5. with the exception of the 
 alignment. AVhen the leading section has advanced eighteen yards, or 
 for horse artillery twenty-two, it is halted by its chief until the centre 
 section arrives upon the same line. He then commands countermarch — 
 march; and when the countermarch is nearly completed section, halt ; 
 left drets. 
 
 The centre section is halted upon the line, in like manner, until the 
 left section comes up, and is then countermarched and aligned by the 
 same commands. 
 
 When the left section arrives upon the line it is countermarched 
 before baiting, and then aligned like the rest. 
 
 When the centre and left sections are countermarched the commands 
 halt ; left dress, should be given, if possible, when they arc four yards 
 in rear of the line on which the leading section is established. 
 
 When the battery is aligned the captain commands front. 
 
 The movement is executed on the opposite flank, according to the 
 same principles and by inverse means. 
 
 The formation into line, faced to the rear, by a right or left oblique, 
 is executed in a similar manner when the column is in march. In this 
 case, as the leading section is already in motion, its chief only repeats 
 the command for the guide, as in No. 685. 
 
 To form line to the right or lefl. 
 
 687. The battery being in column, in march or at a halt, to form it 
 into line to the left the captain commands : 
 
 1. Lefl into line, wheel. 2. Marcfi. 3. Battery — Halt. 4. Lefl 
 — Dress. 5. Fkoxt. 
 
 (Fig. 158.) At the first command the chiefs of sections command 
 section, left tcheel; and at the second, which they repeat, all the sections 
 34 
 
■iO'l MANUAL FOK VOLUNTEEUS AND MILITIA. 
 
 wheel lo ibe lel'l. EiicL cluL-f "f section coiiiiuandsy">irira;rf, tjuide le/t, 
 as soon as bis leading pivot carriage has taken the new direction. 
 
 When the rear carriages have coniplete<l the wheel, and the sections 
 ure in line, the captain coiuniands battery, halt ; left dre«$. 
 
 The commands halt, left dresa, are repeated by the chiefs of sec- 
 tions, and when the alignment is completed the captain commands 
 fyont. 
 
 The battery is formed into line to the right according to the same 
 principles and by inverse means. 
 
 7o fo7-!7i line on the right or left. 
 
 688. The battery marching in column, to form it into line on tb« 
 right the captain commands : 
 
 1. On the right into line. 2. Makch. 3. Guide inght. 4. Front. 
 
 (Fig. 159.) At the first command the chief of the leading section 
 commands section, riyht wheel ; and at the second, which ho repeats, 
 the section wheels to the right. As soon as the leading pivot carriage 
 enters the new direction be commands yVu-icarrf, (/lu'c/c ;-i"(//i< / and a.s 
 the section completes the wheel and unmasks the column he commands 
 section, halt; right dresn. 
 
 The chiefs of the other sections repeat the command for the guide, 
 and their sections continue to move forward. As each section passes 
 the one preceding it in the formation its chief establishes it on the 
 line, with the proper interval, by the same commands. The commands 
 section, halt ; right drerni, are given when the section is four j-ards in 
 rear of the lino. 
 
 When the battery is aligned the cajitain commands front. 
 
 The line is formed on the left according to the same principles and 
 by inverse means. The commands are on the left into line, march; 
 guide left; front. 
 
 When the column is at a halt, the line is formed on the right or left 
 in the same manner. In this case the chiefs of the two rear sections 
 command section, fonvard, and afterward repeat the commands march; 
 guide right (or left.) 
 
 To break into column to the front. 
 
 689. The battery being in line at a halt, to break into column to the 
 fruiit from tlieriglit the captain conimunda : 
 
LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 403 
 
 1. By section frovi the right, front into column. 2. March. 
 3. Guide left. 
 
 (Fig. 160.) At the first command the chief of the right section com- 
 mands section, foricard ; and those of the other sections section, right 
 oblique. At the command march, repeated by the chief of the right sec- 
 tion, that section moves forward, and its chief repeats the command for 
 the guide. 
 
 Each of the other chiefs of sections repeats the commands march, 
 guide left, after the section on his right has commenced the movement, 
 and when the leaders of its rear carriages are in line with him. After 
 obliquing sufficiently to gain the rear of the preceding sections he com- 
 mands /orirort/. 
 
 The movement is executed from the left according to the same prin- 
 ciples and by inverse me.ins. 
 
 To break into column to the rear. 
 
 The battery being in line, in inarch or at a halt, to break into column 
 to the rear from one of the flanks the captain executes an about or a 
 countermarch, according to the kind of carriage he may wish in front, 
 then halts the battcrj', and breaks it into column to the front by the 
 preceding manoeuvre. 
 
 To break into column to the right or left. 
 
 fi90. The battery being in line, in march or at a halt, to break it into 
 columns to the left the captain commands: 
 
 1. By sections, left wheel. 2. March. 3. Forward. 4. Guide 
 
 left. 
 
 At the first command the chiefs of sections command section, left 
 wheel; and at the second, repeated by those chiefs, all the sections 
 wheel to the left. When the wheels are nearly completed the captain 
 commands fonoard, guide left ; and the chiefs of sections repeat the 
 commands. 
 
 When the column is not to advance, the command column, halt, is 
 substituted tor /orward, guide left. 
 
 The battery is broken into column to the right according to the same 
 principles and by inverse means. 
 
404 MANUAL FOR V0LUNTEEK8 AND MILITIA. 
 
 To break into column to the front from one flank, to march 
 totcard the other. 
 
 6U1. The batlcry being in line at a halt, to break from tUo right to 
 march to the loft the captain commands : 
 
 1. By section, break from the right, to march to the lejl. 
 2. March. 3. Guide left. 
 
 At the first command the chief of the right section commands section, 
 forward ; and at the second, which he repeats, the section moves for- 
 ward and he commands guide left. After advancing eleven yards he 
 changes the direction to the left by the commands section, left wheel ; 
 7n((rch ; forward. 
 
 Each of the other chiefs of sections commands section, forward, in 
 time to command march when the limber wheels of the rear carriages in 
 the section preceding his own arrive in front of him. He then conducts 
 the section to the front, changes its direction to the left, and places it in 
 rear of the preceding section by the commands already prescribed for 
 the section on the right. 
 
 The battery is broken from the left to march to the right according 
 to the same principles and by inverse means. 
 
 To break into column to the rear from one flank, to march toward 
 the other. 
 
 692. The batterj' being in line at a halt, to break to the rear from 
 one flank to march toward the other the captain first executes an 
 about, or countermarch, according to the kind of carriage he may 
 wish in front. He then halts the battery and executes the preceding 
 manoeuvre. 
 
 To break into culumn to the front tchen the battery is marching in 
 
 line. 
 
 693. The battery marching in line at a walk, to break into column 
 to the front from the right, and at the sam6 gait, the captain com- 
 mands : 
 
 1. By the right, break into sections. 2. March. 3. Guide left. 
 
 The chief of the right section repeats the command for the guide, 
 and his section continues to move at the same gait. At the command 
 
LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 405 
 
 march, tho other sections are halted by the command section, hall, from 
 their chiefs. 
 
 The halted sections are put in motion successively by their chiefs ; 
 each commanding section, right oblique, in time to command jnarch 
 ■when the leaders of the rear carriages in the section on his right arrive 
 opposite to him. The sections oblique, and enter the column as de- 
 scribed in No. 689. 
 
 M'^hen the battery is marching at a trot the movement is executed 
 according to the same principles. But the sections which halted in the 
 preceding case slacken the gait to a walk at the commands walk, 
 vtarcli, from their chiefs. They again trot, and enter the column by 
 the commands lection, right oblique ; trot; march ; /ortcard. 
 
 AVhen the battery is marching in line at a walk, to break into column 
 from the right at a trot the captain commands: 
 
 1. By (he right, break into sections, trot. 2. March. 3. Guide 
 
 left. 
 
 At the first command the chief of the right section commands trot ; 
 and at the second, which he repeats, the section changes its gait to a 
 trot. He afterward repeats the command guide left. 
 
 Each of the other sections continues to march at a walk until re- 
 quired to enter the column, when its chief conducts it, as already 
 described, by the commands section, right oblique ; trot ; march ; 
 forward. 
 
 The battery is broken into column from tho left according to the 
 same principles and by inverse means. 
 
 To form line advancing. 
 
 694. When the battery is marching in column at a walk, to form it 
 into line at a trot, gaining ground to the left, and continue the march 
 the captain commands : 
 
 1. Form line advancing, left oblique, trot. 2. March. 3. Guide 
 
 right. 
 
 The chief of the leading section repeats the command for the guide, 
 and his section continues to move at a walk. 
 
 At the first command the chiefs of the otlier sections command sec- 
 tion, left oblique, trot. The command march is repeated by the same 
 chiefs ; and when the oblique movement is commenced they repeat the 
 command guide right. Each chief commands forward as soon as his 
 section has obliqued sufficiently to tho left, and walk in time to com- 
 mand march as it arrives on the line. 
 
40(5 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 When the battery is marching in column at a trot the movement is 
 executed according to the same principles. In this case the captain 
 does not command li-ot ; and the chief of the leading section com- 
 mands tcalk, march, successively, after the first and second commands 
 of the captain. The chiefs of the other sections give the same com- 
 mands as thfir sections arrive on the line. 
 
 The movement is executed so as to gain ground to the right accord- 
 ing to the same principles and by inverse means. 
 
 To form double column on the centre section. 
 
 695. The battery being in lino at a halt, to form double column on 
 the centre section the captain commands: 
 
 1. Double column on the centre. 2. M.\RCU. 3. Guide right 
 (or left). 
 
 (Fig. 161.) At the first command the chief of the centre section 
 commands section, forward; the chief of the right section section, left 
 oblique; and the chief of the left section section, right oblique. At the 
 command vmrch, repeated by the chief of the centre section, that sec- 
 tion marches to the front and its chief repeats the command for the 
 guide. 
 
 When the wheel horses in the rear rank of the centre section have 
 passed the leaders in the front rank of the other sections the chiefs of 
 those sections repeat the command inarch, and the sections commence 
 the oblique. 
 
 When the piece nearest the column is about entering it, in each of 
 these sections the chief of the right section commands bi/ the left, break 
 section, inarch; and the chief of the left l>i/ the riyht, break section, 
 march. The right and left sections, without change of gait, then form 
 into columns of pieces in rear of the right and left carriages of the 
 centre section. 
 
 The chiefs of the flank sections are careful to make their pieces enter 
 the column at the proper time. And when the column is formed they 
 place themselves outside of it, four yards from the centres of their 
 respective sections. 
 
 The chief of the line of caissons follows the movement, sees that his 
 carriages do not enter the column too soon, and when the column is 
 formed places himself four yards in rear of the centre. 
 
 When the battery is marching at a walk, to form the double column 
 at tho same gait the captain commands: 
 
LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 407 
 
 1. Double column on the centre. 2. March. 3. Guide right 
 (or lej}). 
 
 The chief of the centre section repeats the command for the guide, 
 and the section continues to advance. 
 
 At the command march, the other sections are halted by the com- 
 mand section, half, from their chiefs. They are afterward formed into 
 column by the commands and means prescribed for forming double 
 column from a halt. 
 
 When the battery is marching at a trot, the double column is formed 
 according to the same principles. In this case the flank sections pass 
 to a walk, instead of halting as before, and resume the trot to oblique, 
 and enter the column. The commands from their chiefs are walk; 
 march; sfction, left (or right) oblique, trot ; march, and b>/ the left (or 
 right), break section; march. 
 
 When the battery is marching at a walk, to form the double column 
 at a trot the captain commands: 
 
 1. Double column on (he centre, trot. 2. March. 3. Guide 
 right (or left). 
 
 At the first command the chief of the centre section commands trot. 
 At the second, which he repeats, the section moves forward at a mod- 
 erate rate and lie repeats the command for the guide. 
 
 The flank sections continue to walk until the centre has advanced 
 sufliciently to allow them to oblique, and arc then formed into column 
 as already prescribed; their chiefs commanding section, left (or right) 
 oblique, trot; march; and by the left (or right), break section; march. 
 
 To form the double column with a battery of four pieces the captain 
 gives the same commands as with a battery of six. The right section 
 is broken into column of pieces by the left and the left section by the 
 right. The chiefs of sections place themselves on the outer flanks of 
 the column, abreast the leading drivers of the leading carriages. The 
 senior chief repeats the command for the guide, and gives such other 
 commands as are required for the head of the column ; the leading 
 carriages moving as a section for the time being. 
 
 7'o deploy the double column into line to the front. 
 
 696. The battery being in double column at a halt, to form it into line 
 to the front ths captain commands : 
 
408 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 1. Forward, into line. 2. March. 3. Front. 
 
 (Fig. 162.) At the first command the chief of the centre section com- 
 mands section, fovtcard; the chief of the right section section, into line, 
 right oblique; and the chief of the left section tection, into line, left 
 obliifue. At the command march, repeated by these chiefs, the centre 
 section advances five yards, and its chief commands tection halt; right 
 (or left) — dresi. 
 
 The flank sections oblique to the right an 1 left; and as their pieces 
 arrive in rear of their proper places on the line they move forward, 
 halt, and dress toward the centre without command. 
 
 As soon as the battery is aligned the captain commands /^oll^ 
 
 When the column is marching the movement is executed in the same 
 manner. In this case the chief of the centre section does not com- 
 mand section, forward; march, but halts and aligns his section after 
 advancing five yards. 
 
 When the column is marching at a trot, to deploy it into line to the 
 front at the same gait without discontinuing the march the captain 
 commands : 
 
 1. Form line advancing. 2. March. 3. Guide right ("or left). 
 
 At the first command the chief of the centre ?eclion commands ical/c; 
 the chief of the right section section, into line, right oblique; and the 
 chief of tho left section sertlon, into line, left oblique. At the command 
 march, repeated by these chiefs, the centre section slackens its gait to 
 a walk and the flank sections deploy. As each piece arrives upon the 
 line its gait is changed to a walk without command. The movement 
 is executed as in the preceding cases; but when tho line is formed it 
 continues to advance; the captain commanding guide right (or l^t), 
 which command is repeated by the chiefs of sections. 
 
 When tho column is marching at a walk, to deploy it iuto line to the 
 front at a trot without discontinuing tho march the captain commands: 
 
 1. Form line advancing, trot. 2. M.\RCU. 3. Guide right (or 
 hfl). 
 
 At the first command the chief of the right section commands section, 
 into line, right oblique, trot; and the chief of the left section section, 
 into line, left oblique, trot. At the command inarch, repeated by these 
 chiefs, the flank sections deploy at a trot; the centre section continues 
 to march at a walk ; and the line having beun formed as in the pre- 
 ceding case, the captain gives tho command for tho guide. 
 
 When the battery consists of four pieces the double columu is do- 
 
LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 409 
 
 ployed into line to the front bj' the same commands from the captain 
 as when it consists of six. The chiefs of sections give the same com- 
 mands as in the other case, and then their sections are formed as in No. 
 674. When the line is to be halted, as in {orming /ortcnrd into line, the 
 senior chief commands halt; right (or Ic/l) die$s, as soon as the leading 
 carriages have advanced five yards; and the alignment is made upon 
 the central carriages. 
 
 2o form the double column into line to the riijlit or left. 
 
 697. The battery being in double column at a halt, to form it into 
 line on the right the captain commands : 
 
 1. To and on the right into line. 2. Maucu. 3. Front. 
 
 At the first command the chief of the leading section commands 
 section right wheel ; and the other chiefs of sections forward. At the 
 second, repeated by those chiefs, the leading section wheels to the right 
 and is established on the line as in Nq. 687. The other pieces advance 
 under the direction of their chiefs and of the chiefs of sections, wheel 
 to the right in succession as they arrive opposite their places, establish 
 themselves on the line, and dress upon the pieces already aligned. 
 When the alignment is completed the captain commands //-oia. 
 
 When the column is marching the line is formed to the right in the 
 same manner, except that the chiefs of the flank sections omit the 
 commands forward march. The line is formed to the left according to 
 the same principles and by inverse means. 
 
 When the battery consists of four pieces the double column is de- 
 ployed into line to the right or left by the same commands from the 
 captain as when it consists of six. In this case the leading pieces are 
 wheeled to the right or left, as a section, and established on the line. 
 For this purpose the senior chief of section commands right (or left) 
 wheel; march; forward; guide right (or left); halt; right (or left) 
 dress. The other pieces move forward, wheel in succession as they 
 arrive opposite their places, and form on the line as already de- 
 scribed. 
 
 To advance in line. 
 
 698. The battery being in line at a halt, to cause it to advance the 
 captain indicates to the guide the points on which he is to march and 
 commands : 
 
 1. Battery, forward. 2. March. 3. Guide right (or lejl). 
 .35 
 
41(1 MANUAL FOR Vol.r NTKl.HS AND MILITIA. 
 
 The <?oniniand.« yVirirnei-/ ; luarrh ; ijuidf rlijht (or lij'l), are repeated 
 by tbe chiefs of sections. At the cninmand march, all the carriages 
 move forward at a walk and the chiefs of sections preserve the align- 
 ment toward that chief of carriage who serves as (/iiji/po/jAe /iiie. The 
 guide niaichci! steadily in the given direction, and the chiefs of car- 
 riages regulate their intervals and alignment by him. 
 
 The carriages of the rear rank follow those in front, at their appro- 
 priate distance of two yards. The chief of the line of caissons super- 
 intends the march of the rear rank of carriages, and moves wherever 
 his presence may be necessary for that purpose. 
 
 In horse artillery the dcta^ments preserve (heir alignments and 
 follow their pieces at the proper distance. 
 
 To huh the battery and align it. 
 
 699. Whin tbe battery i? marrliing in line, to halt and align it tho 
 captain commands : 
 
 1. Batlenj—BAi.T. 2. Eight {or left) — Dhkps. 3. Front. 
 
 The commnnds loll : rit/ht (or left) — dresti, a.re repeated by tho 
 chiefs of sections. At the first command the carriages and detach- 
 ments halt, and at the second align themselves by the right (or left) in 
 their respective ranks; tlic carriages dressing by the drivers of their 
 wheel horses. The carriages are placed as squarely on the line as 
 possible without opening or closing the intervals. The captain super- 
 intends tbe alifinmcnt of the front rank of carriages, and the chief of 
 the line of caissons that of the rear: each placing himself for that 
 purpose on the flank of the guide. When tbe battery is aligned the 
 captain commands front. 
 
 When tbe battery is halted, if it cannot be aligned by •slight move- 
 ments, the captain causes one or two carriages from one of the flanks 
 or centre to advance four yards, or to n greater distance, if nece.s.-<ary, 
 and then causes the alignment to be made by the right, left, or centre, 
 by the command right, left ; or, on the centre, dress. At this command 
 the carriages and detachments move forward, and align themselves 
 according to the principles just explained ; the drivers halting a little 
 in rear of the line, and dressing forward so as to place the carriage as 
 squarely upon it as possible. 
 
 7V; change flirrcliou in line. 
 
 700. The battery being in line iit u halt, to wheel it to the right the 
 captain commands ; 
 
LIGHT ARTILLKRY TACTICS. 411 
 
 1. Battery, right ivheel. 2. March. 3. Forward. 4. Bat- 
 tery — Halt. 5. Rhjht — Dkkss. 6. Front. 
 
 The commaiKls riyht wh^cl ; march ; J'oncnrd; hatt ; ri(jlit drcsn, are 
 repeated by the chiefs of sections. 
 
 At the command march, the pivot carriage moves at a walk, and de- 
 scribes a quadrant (twenty-two yards) of a circle whose radius is four- 
 teen yards. The other carriages move at a trot, and preserve their 
 intervals from the pivot. They regulate their gaits according to their 
 distances from the pivot, so as to remain as short a time as possible in 
 rear of the line, without urging their horses injuriously, and so as to 
 arrive upon it in succession. The carriages of the rear rank follow at 
 the proper distance in the tracks of those in front. 
 
 At the command /oricart/, which is given when the leading pivot car- 
 riage has described its arc of twenty-two yards, that carriage moves 
 direct to the front; and when the rear pivot carriage is in the new 
 direction the captain commands battery ; halt ; riijht dress. The com- 
 mands /oj-iraz-rf; halt; right dress, are repeated by the chief of the right 
 section immediately after the captain ; and by the other chiefs in time 
 to be applicable to their sections; the pivot carriages halting at the 
 command halt, and the others halting and dressing toward the pivot as 
 they arrive in succession on the line. 
 
 When the battery is aligned the captain commands front. 
 
 The battery is wheeled to the left according to the same principles 
 and by inverse means. 
 
 When the battery is at a halt or marching in line, to wheel it to the 
 right and continue the march the captain commands : 
 
 1. Battery, right tvheel. 2. March. 3. Forward. 
 
 The movement is executed as already described, except that the 
 pivot carriage, after wheeling, continues to march in the new direction, 
 and the others conform to its gait and direction as they arrive on the 
 line. 
 
 The direction is changed to the left according to the same principles 
 and by inverse means. 
 
 FORMATIONS IN BATTERY. 
 
 * In line, with pieces in front, to form in battery to the front. 
 
 701. When the battery is in line at a halt, with the pieces in front, to 
 form in battery to the front the captain commands : 
 
412 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 1. Js BATTERY. 2. Guide left. 3. March. 
 
 (Fig. 163.) These eotumands are repeated by the chiefs of sections. 
 At the command in battery, the caissons stand fast and the pieces ad- 
 vance. The intervals and ali nment are preserved, and the chiefs of 
 pieces and sections march at their places in line. At the command 
 march, which is given as soon as they have advanced seventeen yards, 
 the chiefs of pieces and sections halt and the pieces execute an uhuut. 
 As SDon as the nlout is completed the pieces are halted, unlimbcred, and 
 prepared for firing; the limbers being taken to their places in battery 
 by an about. 
 
 When the cannoneers are marching bj' the sides of their pieces they 
 halt at the command march, allow their pieces to pass them, change 
 sides, and move forward to the posts they are to occupy when their 
 pieces have completed the about. They are not required to observe any 
 particular order during this movement. 
 
 When the cannoneers are mounted on the ammunition chest those on 
 the caissons dismount and run to their posts at tlje command i;i battery. 
 Those on the pieces dismount after the about. 
 
 The chiefs of pieces and sections take their posts in battery as soon 
 as the formation is completed. 
 
 In horse artillenj the movement is executed in the same manner and 
 by the same commands. But the pieces advance only ten yards before 
 executing the about. The horses of the detachments do not advance. 
 But at the command I'li batterij the cannoneers dismount and run to their 
 posts. 
 
 After the formation the captain rectifies the alignment if necessary. 
 
 When the battery is marching in line, with the pieces in front, it is 
 formed in battery to the front, according to the same principles and by 
 the commands Vh battery, march. The caissons halt at the command »u 
 battery; and in horse artillery the detachments do the same; the can- 
 noneers dismounting and running to their posts. 
 
 To form in battery to the front by throicing the caissons to the 
 rear. 
 
 702. When the battery is in line at a halt, with the pieces in front, to 
 form in batterj' to the front bj' throwing the caissons to the rear the 
 captain commands : ^ 
 
 Action front. 
 
 At this command, repeated by the chiefs of sections, the pieces are 
 
LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 413 
 
 unlimbered and wbcelcd about by hand; the limbers reversing to the 
 left at the same time, and takiiig their places in battery as described 
 in the school of the piece, No. 658. The caissons reverse to the left, 
 move to the rear, reverse again to the left, and take their places in 
 battery. 
 
 When the cannoneers are mounted on the ammunition chest they 
 dismount and run to their posts at the command action front. 
 
 In horse artillert/ when this mode of coming into action is resorted 
 to the detachments move to the posts belonging to their horses in bat- 
 terj' before dismounting, except when the number of horses is so small 
 that they may be led to the rear by the horse-holders. In this case the 
 captain commands distiioitut ; immediately after, action front. When 
 the detachments conduct their horses to the rear they dismount without 
 command from the captain. 
 
 The battery is generally in line at a halt when this mode of coming 
 into action is resorted to. It may also be used in successive formations 
 by giving the command action front when a part of the battery has 
 been halted on the line. But with bad ground or heavy pieces this 
 mode of coming into action should not be used. 
 
 Jn line, with caissons in front, to form in battery to the front. 
 
 703. When the battery is in line at a halt, with the caissons in front, 
 to form in battery to the front the captain commands : 
 
 1. Pieces, pass your caissons. 2. March. 3. In battery. 
 4. Guide left. 5 March. 
 
 (Fig. 163.) These commands are repeated by the chiefs of sections ; 
 the pieces i)ass their caissons, and at the command in battery, given as 
 soon as the pieces have passed their caissons, the formation is e.\ecutcd 
 as prescribed in No. 702. 
 
 In horse artillery the command in battery is given when the detach- 
 ments have passed the caissons. 
 
 When the battery is marching in line, with the caissons in front, it 
 is formed in battery to the front according to the same principles and 
 by the commands pieces, pass your caissons (or pieces, pass your cais- 
 sons, trot); march ; iji battery; guide left, march. 
 
 In line, with pieces in front, to form in battery to the rear. 
 
 704. When the batter}' is in lino at a halt, with the pieces in front, to 
 form in battery to the rear the captain commands : 
 
414 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 1. Fire to the rear. 2. Caissons, pass your pieces, trot. 
 3. March. 4. In battery. 
 
 The last three cuuiinands are repeated by the chiefs of sections. At 
 the third the caissons pass their pieces .at a brisk trot, and at the 
 fourth, which is given as soon as the caissons have passed, the cannon- 
 eers unlimber and ])repare for firing. 
 
 The caissons advance seventeen yards lieyoud their pieces, execute 
 an about together, and take their places in battery. 
 
 When the cannoneers are mounted on the ammunition chests the 
 caissons advance seventeen yards beyond their pieces, and then halt 
 to allow the cannoneers to dismount before executing the about. As 
 soon as the caissons halt the cannoneers dismount and run to their 
 posts. When the battery is at a halt, as in the present case, it is 
 considered better to dismount the cannoneers before commeucing the 
 movement. The chief of the line of caissons precedes the movement 
 of his carriages, and places himself on the line to be occupied by 
 their leaders when the about is commenced. He takes his place in 
 battery as soon as the about is completed and the carriages are on the 
 line. 
 
 The chiefs of pieces and sections take their place.-; in battery as soon 
 as the formation is completed. 
 
 In home artillery at tlie command /)( hatteri/ the detachments incline 
 to the right, pass their pieces at a brisk trot, and take their places in 
 battery by a ItJ't about. The cannoneers then dismount, run to their 
 posts, unlimber, and prepare fur firing. 
 
 When the batter3' is marching iu line, willi the pieces in front, the 
 formation in battiry to the rear is executed according to the same 
 principles and by the same commands. At the command in battery, 
 which is given as soon as the caissons have passed their pieces, the 
 latter halt, the dotachuients iu horse artillery pass them, and the 
 movement is completed as already described. 
 
 In line, wit/t caissons in front, to form in ballery to the rear. 
 
 705. When tlie battery is in line at a lialt, with the caissons in front, 
 to form in liattery to the rear the captain cumniands : 
 
 1. Fire to the rear. 2. In battkuy. 
 
 At the command in lattery, which is repeated by the chiefs of sec- 
 tions, the cannoneers unlimber and prepare for firing. 
 
 The chiefs of pieces and sections take their places in battery. 
 
 i 
 
LIGUT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 415 
 
 The caissons muve at a brisk trot and talte their places in battery, 
 under the superintendence of their chief. 
 
 In horse artillery, at the coui'.nand in batten/, the detachments pass 
 their pieces at a trot, move to their places in battery, dismount, and 
 run to their posts. 
 
 When the battery is marching in line, with the caissons in front, the 
 formation in battery to the rear is executed according to the same prin- 
 ciples and by the same commands. 
 
 In battery, to form in fine to the front. 
 
 706. Being in battery, to firm in line to the front with the caissons 
 in rear the captain commands : 
 
 Limber to the front. 
 
 This command is repeated by the chiefs of secti')n.s, and the pieces 
 are limbered as described in No. 64S : the caissons closing at the samo 
 time to the proper distances without further command. 
 
 When the captain wishes to place tha caissons in front he commands 
 limber to the front ; and, while the pieces are limbering, (.■.t «■««'»«», pait 
 your pieces, trot; march. The caissons pass, and halt in front of their 
 pieces ; or, if the captain wishes the buttery t') advance, he commands 
 forward; ijnide right (or left), as the caissons arc coinpletin < the pas- 
 sage, and the battery moves forward at a walk. 
 
 In horse artillery, when the pieces are limbered to the front the hori<e- 
 holders advance within two yard.s of their pieces ; and thore the can- 
 noneers mount. 
 
 The captain rectifies the alii^nincnt if neces.s:iry, and commands 
 front. 
 
 When the battery is to advance immediately tiie captain cmmands 
 forward ; guide right (or le/'t), instead of battery, halt ; and the cai.ssous 
 close on the march. 
 
 M'hen the captain wisho? to place the caissons in frunt be may cause 
 the pieces to be limbered to the rear and command : 
 
 1. Caissons pass your pieces, Irof, pieces left about. 2. March. 
 3. Battery — Halt (or Forward) — Guide right (or left). 
 
 These commands are repeated and executed as already prescribed ; 
 the pieces e.vecuting the about as soon as the ground has been unmasked 
 by the caissons, and the battsry halting or advancing as sion as the 
 passage is completed. 
 
 In horse artillery, when the pieces are limbered to the rear t'.ic can- 
 noneers run to their horses, mount, and rejoin their pieces. 
 
416 
 
 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 In battery, to form in line to the rear. 
 
 707. When in battery, to form in line to the rear the cnptain causes 
 the pieces to be limbered to the rear; and then, if he wishes to place 
 the caissons in front, commands : 
 
 1. Caissons, left about; pieces foncard. 2. Makcii. 3. Bat- 
 tery — Halt (or Fouward) — Guide right (or lejl). 
 
 The first two commands are repeated by the chiefs of sections; the 
 cfli.'sons execute the about, and the pieces close to their proper distance. 
 The third command, which is given at the moment the about is finished, 
 is repeated and executed as prescribed. 
 
 The captain rectifies the alignment if necessary, and commands 
 front. 
 
 In horse nrtitlery, the detachments oblique to the left to facilitate the 
 movement of the caissons. And then if the batterj' halts they place 
 themselves at once in rear of their pieces; or if it advances they wait, 
 and do the same by wheeling to the right as they pass. 
 
 If the formation in line to the rear is to be executed by placing the 
 pieces in front, the captain, after causing the pieces to be limbered to 
 the rear, commands : 
 
 1. Pieces, pans your caissons ; caissons, left about. 2. March. 
 3. Battery — Halt (or Forward) — Guide right (or left). 
 
 The first two commands are repeated by the chiefs of sections; the 
 pieces pass their caissons ; and the caissons execute the about as soon 
 as the ground is unmasked. The third command is repeated and 
 executed according to the principles prescribed in No. 69S. 
 
 The captain rectifies the alignment if necessary, and commands 
 front. 
 
 In horee artitdry the detachments place themselves behind their 
 pieces as soon as they are jiassed bj- them. 
 
 In forming line to the rear, either with pieces or caissons in front, 
 the caissons may be jilaced at once in front of their pieces for greater 
 convenience in mounting the cannoneers. For this purpose as soon as 
 the c.Tptaiii has commanded liinbcr to the rear he commands : 
 
 1. Caissons, /« front of yonr pieces (or caissons, in front of your 
 pieces, trot). 2. March. 
 
 These commands are repeated by the chiefs of sections; and while 
 the pieces are limbering the caissons oblique to the right, move forward 
 
LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 417 
 
 near tho middle of the interval between the leaders of the pieces, place 
 themselves in front of them by two successive wheels to the left, and 
 halt. 
 
 In horse artilleri/, when the caissons are ordered to the front of their 
 pieces the horse-holders oblique to the left at the command march, and 
 halt between the leading drivers of the pieces. As soon as the/'can- 
 Doneers are mounted the detachments take their posts in rear of their 
 pieces. 
 
 In column, loith pieces in front, to form in hattery to the front. 
 
 708. (Fig. 164). When the battery is in column at a halt, with the 
 pieces in front, to form in battery to the front by gaining ground to 
 the left the captain commands: 
 
 1. Forward into hattery f left oblique. 2. March. 3. Guide 
 right. 
 
 At the first command the chief of the leading section commands 
 gection, foritnrd; and those of the other sections section, left oblique. 
 The chief of the line of eaii^sons moves quickly to the right of the 
 leading section, to cause the caissons to halt at the proper time and 
 to superintend their alignment. At the command march, repeated by 
 the chiefs of sections, the movement is executed as prescribed in 
 No. 685, for forming line to the front. .But as each section arrives on 
 the line, instead of halting its chief forms it in battery to the front by 
 the commands in battery; march, which are executed as prescribed in 
 No. 701. 
 
 The formation in battery to the front, by gaining ground to tho 
 right, is executed according to the same principles and by inverse 
 means. 
 
 When the batterj- is marching in column it is formed in battery to 
 the front by applying the principles of No. 701. 
 
 771 column, with caissons in front, to form in hattery to the front. 
 
 709. When the battery is in column at a halt, with the caissons in 
 front, to form in battery to the front by gaining ground to the left the 
 captain commands : 
 
 1. Forward, into hattery, left oblique. 2. March. 3. Guide 
 right. 
 
 At the first comniaHd the chief of the leading section commands 
 
418 MANUAL FUR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 sectiiiH foiionrd; and those of the other sections teclion, left oblique. 
 The chief of the lino of caissons moves quickly to the right of the 
 leading section, to halt the caissons at the proper time and to superin- 
 tend their alignment. At the command march, repeated by the chiefs 
 of sections, the movement is executed as prescribed iu No. 701, for 
 forming line to the front. But a,s each section arrives on the line, in- 
 stead of halting its chief forms it in battery to the front by the com- 
 ma.uds pieces, paiiD your caissono; march; in battery; march, which will 
 be executed Jis prescribed in No. 703. 
 
 The formiitiun in battery to the front by gaining ground to the right 
 is executed according to the same principles and iiy inverse means. 
 
 When the battery is marching in column, it is formed in battery to 
 the front by applying the principles laid down in the latter part of No. 
 703. 
 
 In column, with pieces in front, to form in battery to the rear. 
 
 710. When the battery is in column at a halt, with the pieces in 
 front, to form in battery to the roar by gaining ground to the left the 
 captain commands : 
 
 1. Into battery, faced to the rear, left oblique. 2. March. 
 3. Quide riyhl. 
 
 (Fig. 1G5.) At the first command the chief of the leading section 
 commands section, fonourd; and those of the other sections section, left 
 oblique. The chief of the line of caissons goes to the right of the lead- 
 ing section, to direct the about of the caissons and to superintend their 
 alignment. At the command march, repeated by the chiefs of sections, 
 the movement is executed as prescribed in No. 685, for forming line to 
 the front. But as each section arrives on the lino, instead of halting 
 its chief forms it in battery to the rear by the commands caissons, pass 
 your pieces, trot; march; in battery, whicli are executed as proscribed 
 in No. 704. 
 
 The formation in battery to the rear by gaining ground to the right 
 is executed according to the samo principles and by inverse means. 
 
 When the battery is marching in column it is formed into battery to 
 the rear by applying the principles proscribed in the latter part of 
 Nos. 085 and 704. 
 
LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 419 
 
 In column, with caissons in front, to form in battery to the rear. 
 
 711. The battery being in column at a halt, with the caissons in 
 front, to form in battery to the rear by gaining ground to the left the 
 captain commands : 
 
 1. Into battery, faced to the rear, left oblique. 2. March. 
 3. Guide right. 
 
 At the first command the chief of the leading section commands 
 Kecfion forward ; and those of the other sections suction left oblique. 
 The chief of the line of caissons goes to the right of the leading sec- 
 tion, to direct the about of the caissons and to superintend their 
 alignment. At the command march, repeated by the chiefs of sections, 
 tlie movement is executed as prescribed in No. 685 for forming line to 
 the front. But as each section arrives on the line, instead of halting 
 its chief forms it into battery to the rear by the command in battery, 
 which is executed as prescribed in No. 704. 
 
 The formation in battery to the rear by gaining ground to the right 
 is executed according to the same principles and by inverse mea'is. 
 
 When the batterj' is marching in column it is funned into battery to 
 the rear by applying the principles of Nos. 085 and 704. 
 
 In column, loith pieces in front, to form in battery to the right or 
 
 left. 
 
 712. AV^hen the battery is in column, in march, or at a halt, with the 
 pieces in front, if the captain wishes to form it in battery to the left by 
 gaining ground to the right he commands : 
 
 1. Fire to the lef, by section, right wheel. 2. March. 3. Cais- 
 sotis, pass your pieces, trot. 4. M.\rch. 5. In battery. 
 
 (Fig. 166.) At the tirst command the chiefs of sections command 
 section, riyht irhcel ; and at iha second, which they repeat, all the sec- 
 tions wheel to the right. The caissons follow their pieces at the proper 
 distance. 
 
 At the commands caisfont, pn^s i/our picccn, trot ; march, which are 
 given before the completion of the wheel and repeated by the chiefs of 
 sections, all the caissons pass their pieces at a trot. 
 
 At the command in bntteri/, which is given and repeated in like man- 
 ner as soon as the caissons have passed and the pieces are square on 
 the new line, all the sections form at once into batterj' to the rear as 
 prescribed in No. 704. 
 
420 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 AVlicn the captnin wishes to form in battcrj to the left by gaining 
 ground to the left he cumiuands: 
 
 1. Fire to (he left, by section, left wheel. 2 March. 3. In 
 liATTKUv. 4. Mauch. 
 
 (Fig. 107.) At the first coiumanJ the chiefs of sections command 
 lection, left wheel ; and at the second, which they repeat, all the sec- 
 lions wheel at onco to the left. 
 
 At the command in bnllcrt/, which is f^iven and repeated as soon as 
 the caissons have completed the wheel, all the sections form at once 
 into battery to the front as prescribed in Xo. 703. 
 
 The two formations in battery to the ri;;ht by gaining ground to the 
 left or right arc executed according to the same principles and by 
 inverse means. 
 
 /n ctjlumn, with caissons in front, to form in battery to the right or 
 
 left. 
 
 71.3. 'When the battery is in column, in march, or at a halt, with the 
 caissons in front, to form it in battery to the left by gaining ground to 
 the right the captain commands: 
 
 1. Fire to the left, by section, right wheel. 2. Makcu. 3. In 
 
 BATTERY. 
 
 At the first command the chiefs of sections command section, ritjlit 
 wheel ; and at the second, which they repeat, the sections wheel at once 
 to the right, and move to the front at the commands /oc/rar(^, (/idV/e 
 riijht, from their chiefs. 
 
 At the command in hatlery, which is given and repeated as soon as 
 the pieces are 6({uare on the new line, all the sections form at once into 
 battery to the rear as prescribed in No. 704. 
 
 To form in batter^' to the left by gaining ground to the left the 
 captain commands : 
 
 1. Fire to the left, by section, left wheel. 2. March. 3. Pieces, 
 pass your caissons. 4. March. 5. In battkry. 6. March. 
 
 At the first command the chiefs of sections command section, left 
 wheel ; and at the second, which they repeat, the sections wheel at onco 
 to the left. The third and fourth commands are given and repeated 
 just before the completion of the wheel ; and the fifth is given when 
 the pieces have passed their caissons and the latter arc square upon 
 
 I 
 
LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 421 
 
 the new line. The sections are then formed in battery to the front as 
 prescribed in No. 703. 
 
 The formations in battery to the right by gaining ground to the right 
 or left are executed according to the same principles and by inverse 
 means. 
 
 In column, with pieces in front, to form in battery on the right or 
 
 lef.' 
 
 714. When the battery is marching in column, with the pieces in 
 front, to form in batterj' on the right the captain commands: 
 
 1. On the right, into battery. 2. March. 3. Guide right. 
 
 At the first command the chief of the leading section commands sec- 
 tion, right ichcrt ; and the chief of the line of caissons goes to that sec- 
 tion. At tlie command march, repeated by the chief of the leading 
 section, that section wheels to the right, .and its chief conducts it to the 
 line by the c\>raaia.nds fonimrct , guide right. And then, without halting, 
 it is formed into battery to the front, as prescribed in No. 703, by the 
 commands i)i batlcrj/, vinrch, from its chief. 
 
 The other sections continue to advance; and as each arrives opposite 
 its place in battery, after passing the one preceding it in the formation, 
 it is formed into battery by its chief by the commands section, right 
 mhcel ; march; forirard ; guide right; in battery; march ; the command 
 in battery being given as the caissons arrive in line with those already 
 established. 
 
 The formation in battery on the left is executed according to the 
 same principles and by inverse means. 
 
 AVhen the battery is in column at a halt it »s formed in battery on the 
 right or left according to the same principles. In this case the chiefs 
 of the two rear sections command section, forward, immediately after 
 the first command of the captain, and then repeat the commands march; 
 guide right (or left). 
 
 In column, rcith caissons in front, to forin in battery on the right 
 or left. 
 
 715. When the battery is marching in column, with the caissons in 
 front, to form in battery on the right the captain commands : 
 
 1. On the right, into battery. 2. March. 3. Guide right. 
 At the first command the chief of the leading section commands 
 
422 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS ANT) .MILITIA. 
 
 sfctiDU, right trhril ; and the cbicf of tlic line of caissons goes to that 
 section. At the coninianfl tnarcli. repeated by the chief of the leading 
 eectioc, that section wheels to the right, and is conducted to the line 
 by the commands furtcard, guide right, from its chief; as soon as it 
 reaches the line the section is formed in battery to the front by the 
 commands ptecen, pass your cniseovs ; march; in Imttcry; march, from 
 its chief. 
 
 The other sections continue to advance, and as each arrives opposite 
 its place in battery, after having passed the one preceding it in the for- 
 mation, it is wheeled to the right and formed into battery by its chief in 
 the same manner as the leading section. 
 
 The formation in battery on the le/t is executed according to the same 
 principles and by inverse means. 
 
 When the battery is in column at a halt it is formed in battery on 
 the right or left according to the same principles; the chiefs of the 
 two rear sections giving the additional commands prescribed in No. 
 714. 
 
 To deploy the double column into hattenj to the front or rear. 
 
 716. The battery being in double column at a halt, to deploy it into 
 battery to the front the captain commands: 
 
 1. Forward into battery. 2. March. 
 
 At the first command the chief of the centre section commands sec- 
 tion, foncard ; that of the right section into line, right oti/iqiic; that of 
 the left section into line, left oblique ; and the chief of the line of cais- 
 sons goes to the leading'section. At the command march, repeated by 
 the chiefs of sections, the centre section advances five yards, and with- 
 out halting is formed into battery to the front as prescribed in No. 701 
 or 703, accor<ling to the kind of carriage in front. 
 
 The pieces of the flank sections are brought upon the line by obliq- 
 uing, and placed succcssivelj' in battery without ciinira;in<l ; regulating 
 by the centre section. 
 
 When the battery is marching in doul)le column it is deployed into 
 battery to the front in the same manner, except that the chief of the 
 centre section does not command section, fonoard ; march. 
 
 When the battery is in double column, marching or at a halt, it is 
 deployed into batterj' to the rear according to the principles prescribed 
 in this No. and in No. 704 or 705, according to the kind of carriage in 
 front. The commands are : 
 
 1. Into battery, faced to the rear. 2. March. 
 
 I 
 
MOHT AKTILLEKY TACTICS. 423 
 
 When the batterj' cons-ists of four pieces, the double column is de- 
 ployed into battery to the front or rear by the same commands from 
 the captain as when it consists of six. The sections are formed into 
 battery as prescribed for the flank sections in this number. The senior 
 chief of section, besides superintending the formation of his own, gives 
 the commands required for the centre section, and the leading pieces 
 conform to the movements of that section. 
 
 To deploy the douhle column into battery to the right or left. 
 
 717. When the battery is in double column, marching or at a halt, to 
 form it in battery to the right the captain commands: 
 
 1. To and on the right into battery. 2. M.A.RCH. 
 
 The centre section is formed in baltery on the right, as prescribed for 
 the leading Fcction in No. 712 or 71.'?, according to the kind of carriage 
 in front. 
 
 The other pieces are brought into line a? prescribed in No. 697, and, 
 without halting, are formed successively in battery to the front without 
 ccmniands, regulating by the centre section. 
 
 The deployment into battery to the left is executed according to the 
 same principles and by inverse means. 
 
 AVhen the battery consists of four pieces, the double column is de- 
 ployed into battery to the right or left by the same commands from 
 the captain as when it consists of six. In this case the leading pieces 
 are wheeled to the right or left as a section, and conducted to the line 
 by the senior chief of section; and then, without halting, they are 
 formed into battery to the front by the same chief. The other pieces 
 move forward, wheel in succession as they arrive opposite their places, 
 and form in battery on the alignment of those already established. 
 
 To pa.'^s from the order in battery to the order in column. 
 
 7J8. Being in battery, to form column the captain first causes the 
 line to be formed as prescribed in No. 706 or 707, and then forms 
 column by one of the manoeuvres for passing from the order in line to 
 the order in column. 
 
 FIRINGS. 
 719. When everything is prepared for tiring the captain commands: 
 
424 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 Commence firing. 
 
 This command, given bj- itself or after load, is repented by the chiefs 
 of sections and the firing immediately commenced. 
 
 The firing is discontinued by the command or signal cease firing, 
 which is repeated by the chiefs of sections and pieces. 
 
 When the battery is f<irmcd for action, the pieces are not loaded 
 until the command load or commence firing is given by the captain. 
 In successive formations, when this command is given it is repeated in 
 succession by the chiefs of sections as their sections are formed on the 
 line. 
 
 At the command cenite firing, such pieces as are loaded must bo dis- 
 charged. 
 
 To fire adva?icing. 
 
 720. AVhen the battery is firing, to advance by half-batteries the 
 captain commands: 
 
 1. Fire advancing by half-battery. 2. Right half-battery — 
 Advance. 
 
 At the second command the chief of the right half-battery discon- 
 tinues firing, causes his pieces to be limbered to the front, and com- 
 mands /orioarrf, march; guide left. Or he may cause them to be lim- 
 bered to the rear, and after executing the about command forward, 
 guide left. The half-battery advances and the caissons preserve their 
 distance in battery. 
 
 As soon as the right half-batter}- reaches the new position, previously 
 indicated by the captain, its chief places it in battery by the com- 
 mands halt; action, front; or I'li batteri/; march; the two last commands 
 being given in quick succession. The caissons halt at these com- 
 mands, and as soon as the pieces are unlimbered the firing is renewed 
 by command from the chief of half-battery. 
 
 The fire of the left half-battery is continued during the movement of 
 the right, care being taken to direct the pieces so that their fire shall 
 not injure the half-battery in advance. 
 
 As soon as the right half-battery commences firing the left moves 
 forward with the guide to the right; and, after passing the right half- 
 battery as far as the latter has advanced, is formed into battery and 
 the firin*; commenced. The movements of the left half-battery are 
 effected by commands and means corresponding to those of the right. 
 
 The right half-battery again advances as soon as the left commences 
 firing; and the two continue to advance alternately until the captain 
 
LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 425 
 
 causes the firing to cease. The battery is then aligned, or formed into 
 line to the front or rear, by the proper commands from the captain. 
 
 While advancing by half-battery the captain places himself habitu- 
 ally with the most advanced portion of the battery, and is accompanied 
 by the chief of the centre section. The chief of the line of caissons 
 remains habitually with the rear half-battery. 
 
 In horse artillery, while advancing by half-battery the detachments 
 preserve their distance in battery. When the pieces are limbered to 
 the front the horse-holders advance to enable the cannoneers to mount 
 more readily ; but as soon as the pieces advance the detachments 
 resume their distance in battery. 
 
 To fire advancing by half-battery, commencing with the left, is exe- 
 cuted according to the same principles and by inverse means. 
 
 The movement may also be executed bj' sections; the sections advanc- 
 ing in succession according to their positions in the battery. 
 
 To fire in retreat. 
 
 721. When the battery is firing, to retire by half-batteries the captain 
 commands : 
 
 1. Fire retiring, hy half-battery. 2. Right half-battery — Retire. 
 
 At the second command the chief of the right half-battery discon- 
 tinues firing, limbers to the rear, and commands caisnons, left about, 
 ntnrch. As soon as the al>out is completed he commands forward, 
 guide right ; and conducts the half-battery to the ground previously 
 indicated by the captain ; the pieces preserving their distance in bat- 
 tery by marching nineteen yards in rear of the caissons. As soon as 
 the ground has been reached, th^chief of half-battery commands halt ; 
 in battery, and commences firing ; taking care not to injure the other 
 half-battery. The limbers and caissons remain facing toward the rear 
 as long as the firing in retreat continues. 
 
 As soon as the right half-battery commences firing the left retires 
 with the guide lo the left; and, after passing the right half-battery as 
 far as the latter has retired, it is formed into battery and the firing 
 again commenced. The movements are executed in a manner corres- 
 ponding to those of the other balf-battcry. 
 
 The half-batteries continue to retire alternately until the captain 
 causes the firing to cease. The battery is afterward aligned, or 
 formed into line to the front or rear, by appropriate commands from 
 the captain.' 
 
 While retiring by half-battery the captain remains habitually with 
 36 
 
426 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 the portion of the battery nearest the enemy, and is acconipanied V>y 
 the chief of the centre section. The chief of the line of caissons ac- 
 companies the other half-battery. 
 
 In Iiorte arlilleri/, the detachments move to the left to facilitate the 
 about of the caissons. They afterward place themselves behind, and 
 follow them during the retrograde movement, at the distance of two 
 yards ; remaining faced to the rear as long as the firing in retreat con- 
 tinues. 
 
 To fire retiring by half-battery, commencing with the left, is exe- 
 cuted according to the same principles and by inverse means. 
 
 The movement may also be executed by sections ; the sections retir- 
 ing in succession according to their positions in the battery. 
 
 Movements for Jiring in echelon. 
 
 722. When the battery is iu Hue at a halt, with pieces in front, to 
 advance in echelon of pieces the captain commands : 
 
 1. By piece from the right, front into echelon. 2. March. 
 
 (Fig. 168.) At the first command the right piece moves forward, 
 followed by its caisson. The next piece moves forward in like manner 
 as soon as its leaders are abreast the wheel horses of the rear carriage 
 on the right; and the other pieces commence the movement in succes- 
 sion according to the same rule. 
 
 The officers preserve the same relative positions as in line. 
 
 When the battery is marching in line, at a walk or trot, the echelon 
 is formed according to the same principles and by the same commands; 
 the gaits being regulated as in breaking sections. 
 
 The battery advances in echelon of pieces from the left according to 
 the same principles and by inverse means. 
 
 When the caissons are in front, the battery advances in echelon of 
 pieces from the right or left according to the same i)rinciples and by 
 the same commands. 
 
 When the battery is in echelon, marching or at a halt, it may be 
 formed into battery to the front, rear, right, or left. 
 
 When firing in echelon to the front or rear, the direction of the fire 
 may be changed to the right or loft. For this purpose the captain 
 orders the firing to cease, and commands action, ritjht (or left). At 
 this command the trails of the pieces are turned to the left (or right), 
 and the limbers and caissons take their places in rear of the pieces. 
 T3ut if retiring with the prolonge fixed, the caissons stand fast and the 
 liuihi-rs back to ;illow tlic trails t<i lie tunicil in the j)ropcr direction. 
 
LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 427 
 
 The prolonge must be suflBciently slack to allow the recoil of the guns. 
 This last method is only applicable to firing to the right when retiring 
 by the right, and to the left when retiring by the left. 
 
 To fire to the rear. 
 
 727. When the battery is firing, to fire to the rear the captain causes 
 the firing to cease and commands : 
 
 1 . Fire to the rear. 2. Limbers and caLtsons, pass your pieces, 
 trot. 3. March. 
 
 These commands are repeated by the chiefs of sections. At the 
 command tiiarch, the pieces are ^heeled about by turning the trails to 
 the left; and the limbers and caissons oblique to the right, pass them, 
 and take their places in batter3' by a left n-rcrse. 
 
 In horse artiUery the horses follow their limbers, pass them, and take 
 their places by wheeling about to the left. 
 
 CHANGES OF FRONT IN BATTERY. 
 
 Change of front to fire to the right, left iving forward, and the 
 reverse. 
 
 724. When the battery is firing, if the captain wishes to make a per- 
 pendicular change of front to fire to the right, throwing forward the 
 left wing, he discontinues firing and commands : 
 
 1. Fire to the right. 2. Change front forward on the right piece. 
 3. March. 
 
 (Fig. 169.) At the second command the chief of the right section 
 places the right piece in the new direction by causing the trail to be 
 moved to the left. He also causes the left piece of his section to 
 be moved forward by hand and established on the new line. When the 
 ground is unmasked the limbers and caissons of these pieces oblique to 
 the left, move forward, and take their places in battery by wheeling 
 to the right: the caissons aligning themselves by the chief of the line 
 of caissons established on the right. 
 
 The other chiefs of sections cause their pieces to be limbered by the 
 command limber to the frn)it. the caissons, and, in horse artilleri/, the 
 horse-holders also, closing upon the pieces while they are limbering. 
 As soon as they are limbered the chiefs of sections command forward. 
 
 At the second command the chief of the line of caissons places him- 
 
428 MANUAL FOU VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 self on the left of the rigbt piece of the centre section, facing to the 
 front, to mark the right of the new line of caissons. 
 
 At the cummand march, repeated by the cliiofs of the centre and left 
 sections, these sections move to the front; and when each has arrived 
 opposite its place on the new line its chief commands section, right 
 wheel; march; /oricard ; and afterward »n battery, murch, so as to 
 form upon the alignment of the right section. When the caisson of 
 the right piece of the centre section reaches the point where its piece 
 wheeled it wheels to the left, takes its distance in rear, wheels about, 
 and dresses to the right upon the line of caissons. 
 
 The other caisson of the same section obliques to the left when its 
 piece commences the wheel ; and, after gaining its distance, establishes 
 itself on the line by wheeling and dressing to the right. 
 
 The pivot piece commences tiring again as soon us it is in position, 
 and the others as they arrive on the line. 
 
 The change of front to fire to the left, right wing forward, is exe- 
 cuted according to the same principles and by inverse means. 
 
 In home aililleri/ the detachments fullow their pieces and halt at their 
 proper distance from the line. That of the left piece of the right sec- 
 tion, when limbered, wheels to the kft when its piece wheels to the 
 right, allows its; caisson to pass it, and takes its plaoe by wheeling 
 about to the left. The horse-holders of the pieces not limbered oblique 
 to the left with their limbers, and, like them, take their places in battery 
 by wheeling to the right. When it is deemed advisable, the captain 
 may retain the cannoneers at their pieces and allow all the horse- 
 holders to conduct their horses to the new line. The same may be 
 done in the other changes of front. 
 
 Change of front to fire to the left, left wing forward, and the 
 reverse. 
 
 725. When the battery is firing, if the captain wishes to make a 
 ))erpeudicular change of front to fire to the loft, throwing forward the 
 left wing, he discontinues firing and commands : 
 
 1. Fire to the left. 2. Change front forward on the right piece. 
 3. Makch. 
 
 (Fig. 170.) .\t the second command the chief of the right section 
 causes the right piece to be placed in the new direction at once, by 
 moving the trail to the right; and the limber and caisson of that piece 
 will oblique to the right, and take their places in its rear by wheeling 
 to tli(^ left; the caisson dressing upon llio chief of tiie line of caissons. 
 
LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 429 
 
 He also causss his left piece to be moved to its place and established 
 on the line by hand ; the limber of this piece, passing it on the right, 
 takes its place by wheeling to the left, its caisson obliques to the right, 
 passes on the right and in rear of the right caisson, and takes its place 
 also by wheeling to the left. 
 
 The chiefs of the other sections cause them to be limbered to the 
 front; and while limbering they command cnixenns pnns your pieces, trot; 
 march. When this is executed the chief of the centre section commands 
 section, ritjht wheel, and that of the Icti/oncard. 
 
 At the command nHtrch, repeated by the chiefs of the centre and left 
 sectiont!, these sections move as ordered, with the caissons leading. The 
 centre section is conducted to the line by its chief, and formed by the 
 commands /o/-irart^ and in hattcri/. The left section advances five yards, 
 and is conducted to the lino by two successive riglit half-wheels. It 
 is there formed in like manner upon the alignment of the right sec- 
 tion. 
 
 At the second command from the captain the chief of the line of 
 caissons places himself in prolongation of the line, thirty-two yards on 
 the right of the right piece, and faces to the front to mark the left of 
 the new line of caissons. 
 
 The pivot piece recommences firing as soon as it is unmasked : and 
 the others when they arrive on the line. 
 
 The change of front to fire to the right, right wing forward, is exe- 
 cuted according to the same principles and by inverse means. 
 
 In horse artiUeri/, the horse-holders of those pieces which are placed 
 on the line by hand conduct the horses to their positions in battery by 
 following their limbers. 
 
 Change of front tojire to the left, left wing to the rear, and the 
 reverse. 
 
 726. When the battery is firing, if the captain wishes to make a per- 
 pendicular change of front to fire to the left, throwing the left wing to 
 the rear, he causes the firing to cease and commands : 
 
 1. Fire to the left. 2. Change front to the rear on the right piece. 
 3. March. 
 
 At the second command the chief of the riglit section places the 
 right piece in the new direction by causing the trail to be moved to the 
 right. lie also causes the left piece of his section to be moved to the 
 rear by hand and established on the new line. The limbers and cais- 
 sons of these pieces move at once to the right, obliquing sufncien^y to 
 
430 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 place themselves in rear of their respective pieces, and take their places 
 by wheeling to the left or left about. 
 
 The other chiefs of sections command limber to the rear, and, imme- 
 diately afterward, rarnKoii*, in front of your pieces, trot ; march. The 
 caissons place themselves in front of their pieces while they are lim- 
 bering, and halt as prescribed in No. 707. The chiefs of these sections 
 then command fortcard. 
 
 The chief of the line of caissons places himself in the prolongation of 
 the line, thirty-two }'ards on the right of the right piece, and faces to 
 the rear to mark the right of the new line of caissons. 
 
 At the command nmrvh, given by the captain and repeated by the 
 chiefs of the centre and left sections, the chiefs of these sections com- 
 mand guide left, and afterward, in succession, section, left wheel; march, 
 forward; in battery. The carriages dress toward the pivot as they 
 arrive on the line. 
 
 The pivot piece recommences firing as soon as it is unmasked; and 
 the others when they arrive on the line. 
 
 The change of front to fire to the right, right wing to the rear, is 
 executed according to the same principles and by inverse means. 
 
 In horse artillery, the detachments pass their pieces at the command 
 march, place themselves two yards in rear of the muzzles, follow them, 
 and, at the command i'h battery, take their places. The horse-holders 
 of those pieces which are moved by hand follow their limbers and con- 
 duct their horses to their positions bj' movements corres])onding to those 
 of their caissons. When the left piece of the right section is limbered 
 the horses of the detachment are conducted to their places in the same 
 manner as though the i)icce were uulimbered, except that the detach- 
 ment mounts. 
 
 Change of front to fire to the right, left wing to the rear, and the 
 reverse. 
 
 727. When the battery is firing, if the captain wishes to make a per- 
 pendicular change of front to fire to the right, throwing the left wing 
 to the rear, ho discontinues tiring and commands : 
 
 1. Fire to the right. 2. Change front to the rear on the right 
 piece. 3. March. 
 
 At the second command the chief of the right section commands 
 limbers and caissons, in rear of your pieces trot ; march. The limbers 
 and caissons oblique to the right, and pass their pieces with the 
 limbers leading. As soon as the limbers have passed they wheel 
 
LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 431 
 
 twice to the left and cover their pieces. The caissons pass their limbers 
 and cover them in like manner. The chief of the section causes the 
 trail of his right piece to be moved to the left and his left piece to bo 
 placed upon the new alignment by hand. 
 
 The chiefs of other sections command limber to the rear, and caisson*, 
 in rear of yonr pieces, trot ; march. When this is executed they com- 
 mand fortcard. 
 
 At the second command the chief of the line of caissons places him- 
 self on the left of the right piece of the centre section, facing to the 
 rear, to mark the left of the new line of caissons. 
 
 At the command march, from the captain, repeated by the chiefs of 
 the centre and left sections, those sections, as well as the limbers and 
 caissons of the first, are established upon the new line as described in 
 No. 724. 
 
 The pivot piece recommences firing as soon as it is placed in the new 
 direction ; and the others as tlicy arrive on the line. 
 
 The change of front to fire to the left, right wing to the rear, is exe- 
 cuted according to the same principles and by inverse means. 
 
 In horse artillery, the mounted detachments pass their pieces with 
 the caissons at the command march, and take their places in rear of 
 the muzzles by successive wheels to the left. The horse-holders of 
 the pieces which are moved by hand follow their limbers and wheel 
 into their places in like manner. The remainder is executed as in 
 No. 724. 
 
 To pass a defile in front. 
 
 728. When the battery is firing, to pass a defile in front of the right 
 section the captain commands : 
 
 1. To the front, by the right section, pass the defile. 2. March. 
 
 At the first command the chief of the right section discontinues firing, 
 limbers his pieces to the front, and commands forward. At the com- 
 mand march, repeated by this chief, who also commands gui'le left, the 
 section moves forward, passes the defile, and is again established in 
 battery, and the firing commenced by his command. 
 
 As soon as the right section commences firing the centre is put in 
 motion in like manner. Its chief conducts it through the defile by 
 successive wheels, and forms it into battery in line with the first. 
 
 As soon as the centre section commences firing the left passes in like 
 manner. 
 
 While one section is passing the defile the others continue firing; 
 care being taken not to injure the section in advance. 
 
432 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 When the defilo is in front of the left section it is passed according 
 to the same principles, commencing with that section. 
 
 When the defile is in front of the centre section it is passed accord- 
 ing to the same principles, commencing with that section and liy the 
 commands to the front, by the centre section, pant the defile; march. 
 Unless there is some reason to the contrary, the right section will pass 
 before the left. 
 
 When the flank or oblique march is bettor suite<l to the nature of the 
 ground the chiefs of sections will give the required commands. 
 
 When the defile will admit but one piece at a time the sections are 
 broken by their chiefs in such a manner as to cause the nearest piece to 
 enter first. The sections are reformed by their chiefs immediately after 
 passing the defile. 
 
 To pass a defile in rear. 
 
 729. When the battery is firing, to pass a defile iu rear of the centre 
 section the captain commands : 
 
 1. To the rear, hy the rujht section, pass the dejile. 2. March. 
 
 At the first command the chief of the right section discontinues 
 firing, limbers to the rear, and commands caiisonn, left ahont, pieceB, 
 forward. At the command march, repeated by the chief of the right 
 section, the caissons of that section e.\ecate the about and the pieces 
 close to their proper distance at a trott As soon as the about is com- 
 pleted the chief commands fonrard, (juide left, conducts the section 
 through the defile by successive wheels, and forms it into battery iu 
 rear of its first position. 
 
 The left section is put in motion as soon a? tlic right commences 
 firing. It is conducted through the defile by its chief, and formed into 
 battery in rear of its first position by the principles already described. 
 
 The ceutre section moves as soon as the left commences firing. It is 
 formed into battery in rear of its first position and in line with the 
 other two sections. 
 
 The passage of the defile may be executed, commencing with the left 
 section, according to the same principles and by inverse means. 
 
 When the defile is iu re.-ir of one of the flanks the movement should 
 commence with the other. It should alwiiys cud by passing the section 
 or piece covering the defile. 
 
 When the defile will admit but one piece at a lime the suctions are 
 broken by their chiefs in such a manner as to cause the piece farthest 
 from the defile to enter first ; and the sections are again formed as soon 
 as possible after leaving the defilo. 
 
 i 
 
HONORS PAID BY THE TROOPS, ETC. 433 
 
 Article XII. 
 
 HONORS PAID BY THE TROOPS — INSPEC- 
 TIOXS — REVIEWS, ETC. 
 
 HONORS TO BE PAID BY THE TROOPS. 
 
 730. Whenever a person entitled to compliments from the troops 
 visits any camp or military post, and the commanding officer has 
 official notice of his presence, the troops are paraded to salute him. 
 
 The President or Vice-President of the Confederate States, and the 
 Governor of the state to which the troops belong, are to be saluted with 
 the highest honors — all standards and colors drooping, officers and 
 troops saluting, drums beating, and trumpets sounding. 
 
 A General commanding-in-ehie/ is to be received: by cavalry, with 
 sabres presented, trumpets sounding the march, and all the officers 
 saluting, standards drooping; by infantry, with drums beating the 
 march, colors drooping, officers saluting, and arms presented. 
 
 A Mnjor-Gcneral is to be received: by cavalry, with sabres pre- 
 sented, trumpets sounding twice the trumpet flourish, and officers salut- 
 ing; by infantry, with three ruffles, colors drooping, officers saluting, 
 and arms presented. 
 
 A Brigadier-General is to be received: by cavalry, with sabres pre- 
 sented, trumpets sounding once the trumpet flourish, and officers salut- 
 ing; by infantry with two ruffles, colors drooping, officers saluting, 
 and arms presented. 
 
 An Adjutant-General or Inspector-General, if under the rank of tk 
 general officer, is to be received at a review or inspection of the troops 
 under arms: by cavalry, with sabres presented, officers saluting; by 
 infantry, officers saluting and arms presented. The same honors to be 
 paid to any field officer authorized to review and inspect the troops. 
 When the inspecting officer is junior to the officer commanding the 
 parade, no compliment will be paid; he will be received only with 
 swords drawn and arms shouldered. 
 37 
 
434 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 All guards arc to turn out and present arms to rjeurrnl nficert as 
 often as they pas? thcui, except the personal guards of general oflScers, 
 - which turn out onlv to the generals whfse giiards they arc and to oflS- 
 cers of superio'r rank. 
 
 To commanders of regiments, garrison, or ennip, their own guard 
 turn out and present arms once a day; after which, they turn out with 
 shouldered arms. 
 
 To thv J/diibrrs of ilit Cabiiirt; to the Chirf .luHtlrc. the Pte'^idcnt of 
 the Sumte, tnxl Speaker of the Ilvtise of RfpreKcutattvei of the Con- 
 federate ti'tatet; and In Gorernors in'thin their rtgpective statra and 
 terriluries, the same honors will he paid as to a general comnianding- 
 in-chief. 
 
 Offieeri of a forexiju srnier may l>e complinunted with the honors 
 due to their rank. 
 
 Aiiien'rnn and Fordgn Envoys or JUinislDn will be receiveil with the 
 complimonls due to a major-general. 
 
 731. The colors of a regiment passing a guard are to he saluted, the 
 trumpets snuuding, and the drums beating a march. 
 
 When general oflScers, or persons entitled to salute, pass in the rear 
 of a guard the oflSctr is only to make his men stand shouldered, nnd 
 not to face his guard about or beat his drum. 
 
 When general officers, or persons entitled to a salute, pass guards 
 while in the act of relieving both guards are to salute, receiving the 
 word of command from the senior (jfficer of the whole. 
 
 All guards are to be under arms when armed parties approach their 
 posts: and to parties commanded by commissioned officers they arc to 
 present their arms, drums beating a march, and officers saluting. 
 
 No compliments by guards or sentinels will be paid between retreat 
 and reveille, except as prescribed for gra)id roimdit. 
 
 All guards and sentinels are to pay the same compliments to the 
 officers of the navy, marines, and militia in the service of the Confed- 
 erate States as are directed to be paid to the officers of the arm}', ac- 
 cording to their relative ranks. 
 
 It is equally the duty of non-commissioned officers and soldiers, at 
 all tinien and iii all siiuationn. to pay the proper compliments to officers 
 of the navy and marines, and to officers of other regiments, when in 
 uniform, as to officers of their own particular regiments and corps. 
 
 Courtesy among military men is indispensable to discipline. Respect 
 to superiors will not be confined to obedience on duty, but will be ex- 
 tended to all occasions. It i.- always the duty of the inferior to accost 
 or to ofter first the customary salutation, and of the superior to return 
 such complimentary notice. 
 
 Sergeunt.s, with swords drawn, will salute l^y bringing them to a 
 
 J 
 
HONORS PAID BY THE TROOPS, ETC. 435 
 
 present; with muskets, by bringin;^ the left hand across the body, so as 
 to strike the muskets near the right shonhler. Corporals out of the 
 ranks, and privates not sentries, will carry their muskets at a shoulder 
 as sergeants, and salute in like manner. 
 
 When a soldier without arms, or witlv side arms only, meets an 
 officer, he is to raise his hand to the right side of the visor of his cap, 
 palm to the front, elbow raised as high as the shoulder, looking at the 
 same time in a respectful and soldier-like manner at the officer, who 
 will return the compliment thus offered. 
 
 A non-commissioned officer or soldier being seated, and without 
 particular occupation, will rise on the approach of an officer and make 
 the customary salutation. If standing, he will turn toward the officer 
 for the same purpose, [f the parties remain in the same place or on 
 the same ground, such compliment need not be repeated. 
 
 Artillery Salutes. 
 
 732. The Pretident of the Confederate State* and the Governor of the 
 state to which the troops belong, to receive a salute of twenty-one 
 guns. 
 
 The Vice-Prenident is to receive a salute of seventeen guns. 
 
 The Heads of the (/relit Executive Department* of the National Gov- 
 ernment ; the General commanding the army ; the Lieutenant-Governor of 
 the stale to which the troops belong ; the Governors of other states and 
 territories, fifteen guns. 
 
 A 3fnjor-Genernl, thirteen guns. 
 
 A Brigadier-General , eleven guns. 
 
 Foreign shipx-of-war will be saluted in return for a similar compli- 
 ment, gun for gun, on notice being officially received of such intention. 
 If there be several posts in sight of, or within six miles of each other, 
 the principal only shall reciprocate compliments with ships passing. 
 
 Officers of the Navy will be saluted according to relative rank. 
 
 Foreign Officers invited to visit a fort or post may be saluted accord- 
 ing to their relative rank. 
 
 Envoys and Ministers of the Confederate States and foreign powers 
 are to be saluted with thirteen guns. 
 
 A general officer will be saluted but once in a year at each post, and 
 only when notice of his intention to visit the post has been given. 
 
 Salutes to individuals arc to be fired on their arrival only. 
 
 A national salute will be fired at meridian on the anniversary of the 
 Independence of the Confederate States, at each military post and 
 camp provided with artillery and ammunition. 
 
4.'J6 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 Escorts of Honor. 
 
 733. Escorts of honor may be composed of cavalry or infantry, or 
 both, according to circumstances. They are guards of honor for the 
 purpose of receiving and escorting personages of high rank, civil or 
 military. The troops for this purpose will be selected for their soldierly 
 appearance and superior discipline. 
 
 The escort will be drawn up in line, the centre opposite to the place 
 where the personage presents himself, with an interval between the 
 wings to receive him and his retiuue. On his appearance he will be 
 received with the honors due to his rank. When he has taken his 
 place in the line, the whole will be wheeled into platoons or companies, 
 as the case may be, and take up the march. The same ceremony will 
 be observed, and the same honors paid, on his leaving the escort. 
 
 When the position of the escort is at a considerable distance from 
 the point where he is expected to be received, as. for instance, where 
 a court-yard or wharf intervenes, a double lino of sentinels will be 
 posted from that point to the escort, facing inward, and the sentinels 
 will successively salute as he passes. 
 
 An officer will be appointed to attend him, to bear such communica- 
 tions as he may have to make to the commander of the escort. 
 
 Funeral Honors. 
 
 7.34. The funeral escort of a General commanding-in-chlef, shall con- 
 sist of a regiment of infantry, a squadron of cavalry, and six pieces 
 of artillerj'. 
 
 That of a Mnjor-General, a regiment of infantry, a squadron of cav- 
 alry, and four pieces of artillery. 
 
 That of a Bru/ndicr-General, a regiment of infantry, one company 
 of cavalry, and two pieces of artillery. 
 
 That of a Colonel, a regiment. 
 
 That of a Lieutenant-Colonel, si.x companies. 
 
 That of a Major, four companies. 
 
 That of a Captain, one company. 
 
 That of a nubnltern, half a company. 
 
 The funeral escort shall always be commanded by an officer of the 
 same rank with the deceased; or, if none such bo present, by one of 
 the next inferior grade. 
 
 The funeral escort of a non-commissioned staff officer shall consist 
 of sixteen rank and file, commanded by a sergeant. 
 
 That of a sergeant, of fourteen rank and file, commanded by a 
 serjicant. 
 
 J 
 
HONORS PAID BY THE TROOrs, ETC. 437 
 
 That of a corporal, of twelve rank and file, commanded by a corpo- 
 ral ; and 
 
 That of a private, of eight rank and file, commanded by a corporal. 
 
 The escort will be formed in two ranks, opposite to the quarters or 
 tent of the deceased, with shouldered arms and bayonets unfixed; the 
 artillery and cavalry on the right of the infantry. 
 
 On the appearance of the corpse the officer commanding the escort 
 will command : 
 
 Present — Arms 5 
 
 when the honors due to the deceased will be paid by the drums and 
 trumpets. The music will then play an appropriate air, and the coffin 
 will be taken to the right, where it will be halted. The commander will 
 next order : 
 
 1. Shoulder — Arms. 2. By company (or platoon), lefi wheel. 
 3. March. 4. Reverse — Arms. 5. Column, forward. 
 6. Guide right. 7. March. 
 
 The arms will be reversed at the order by bringing the firelock under 
 the left arm, but to the front, barrel downward, left hand sustaining 
 the lock, the right steadying the firelock behind the back ; swords are 
 reversed in a similar manner under the right arm. 
 
 The column will Ije marched in slow time to solemn music, and on 
 reaching the grave will take a direction so that the guides shall be next 
 to the grave. When the centre of the column is opposite the grave the 
 commander will order : 
 
 1. Column. 2. Halt. 3. Right into line, wheel. 4. March. 
 
 The coffin is then brought along the front, to the opposite side of the 
 grave, and the commander then orders : 
 
 1. Shoulder — Arms. 2. Present — Arms. 
 And when the coffin reaches the grave he adds : 
 
 1. Shoulder — Arms. 2. Rest on — Arms. 
 
 The rest on arms is done by placing the muzzle on the left foot, both 
 hands on the but. the head ou the hands or bowed, right knee bent. 
 
 After the funeral service is performed, and the coffin is lowered into 
 the grave, the commander will order : 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Shoulder — Arms. 3. Load at will. 4. Load. 
 
438 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEEUS AND MILITIA. 
 
 When three rounds of small arms will be fired by the escort, taking 
 care to elevate the jjieccs. 
 
 This being dune, the commander will order: 
 
 1. B(/ company (or platoon), right wheel. 2. March. 3. Col- 
 umn, forward. 4. Guide left. 5. Quick — March. 
 
 The music will not bcf^in to play until the escort is clear of the in- 
 closure. 
 
 When the distance to the place of interment is considcraldc, the 
 escort may march in common time and in column of route, after leav- 
 ing the camp or garrison, and till it approaches the burial-ground. 
 
 The pall-bcarcrs, six i^ number, will be selected from the grade of 
 the deceased, or from the grade or grades next above or below it. 
 
 At the funeral of an ofiiccr, as many in commission of the army, divis- 
 ion, brigade, or regiment, according to the rank of the deceased, as can 
 conveniently be spared from other duties will join in procession, in 
 uniform and with side arms. The funeral of a non-commissioned officer 
 or private will be attended, in like manner, by the non-commissioned 
 officers or privates of the regiment or company, according to the rank 
 of the deceased, with side arms only. 
 
 Persons joining in the procession follow the coffin in the inverse 
 order of their rank. 
 
 The usual badge of military mourning is a piece of black crape 
 around the left arm, above the elbow, and also upon the sword-hilt; 
 and will be worn when in full uniform or in undress. 
 
 As family mourning, crape will be worn by officers (when in uniform) 
 only around the left arm. 
 
 The drums of a funeral escort will be covered witli black crape, or 
 thin black serge. 
 
 Funeral honors will be paid to deceased officers without military rank, 
 according to their assimilated grades. 
 
 INSPECTIONS OF T Hi': TROOPS. 
 
 735. The innpection of troojis, as a division, regiment, or other body 
 composing a garrison or command not less than a company, will gen- 
 erally be preceded by a review. 
 
 Form of inspection for infantry. 
 
 The present example embraces a battalion of infantry. The inspect- 
 ing officer and the field and staff officers will bo on foot. 
 
HONORS PAfD By THE TROOPS, ETC. 439 
 
 The battalion being in the order of battle, the colonel will cause it 
 to break in open column of companies, right in front. He will next 
 order the ranks to be opjned, when the color-rank and color-guard, 
 under the direction of the adjutant, will take post ten paces in front, 
 and the band ten paces in rear of the column. 
 
 The colonel, seeing the ranks aligned, will command : 
 
 1. Officers and sergeants, to the front of your companies. 
 2. March. 
 
 The oflBcers will form themselves in one rank, eight paces, and the 
 non-commissioned officers in ond rank, si.t paces in advance, along the 
 whole fronts of their respective companies, from right to left, in the 
 order of seniority; the pioneers and music of each company in one 
 rank, two paces behind the non-commissioned "fficcrs. 
 
 Tbeaoloncl will next command : 
 
 Field and staff, to the front — March. 
 
 The commissioned officers thus ilcsignaled will form th-'mselves in 
 one rank, on a line C'luil to the front of the oolum-i, sis paces in front 
 of the colors, from right to left, in th-i order of seniority; and th« 
 non-commissioned staff, in a similar manner, two paces in rear of the 
 preceding rank. The colonel, seeing the movement e."ceeuted. will take 
 post on the right of the lieutenant-colonel, and wait the approach of 
 the inspecting olli.-er. But such of the field officers as may be superior 
 in rank to the inspector will not take post in front of the battiilion. 
 
 The inspector will commence in front. After inspecting the dress 
 and general appearance of the field and commissioned stall under arms 
 the inspector, accompanied by these officers, will pass down the open 
 column, looking at every rank in front and rear. 
 
 The colonel will n^iw command: 
 
 1. Order arms. 2. Rest; 
 
 when the inspector will proceed to make a minute inspection of the 
 several ranks or divisions, in succession, commencing in front. 
 
 As the inspector approaches the non-commissioned staff, colr)r-raiik, 
 the color-guard, and the band, the adjutant will give the necessary 
 orders fir the inspection of arras, boxes, and knapsacks. The colors 
 will be pl.mtcd firm in tiie grt>Hnd, to enable the color-bearers to display 
 the c(inten-.s of their knapsacks. The non-commissioned staff may be 
 dismissed as soon as inspected: but the color-rank and color-guard 
 will remain until the colors arc to be escorted to the place fV"m which 
 thev were taken. 
 
440 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 As the inspector successively approaches the companies the captains 
 will com m anil : 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Company. 3. Inspertiim — AiiMS. 
 
 The inspecting officer will then go through the whole compnuy and 
 minntclj' inspect the arms, accoutrements, jind dress of each soldier. 
 After this is done the captain will command : 
 
 Open — Boxes ; 
 
 when the ammunition and the boxes will be examined. 
 The captain will then conamand: 
 
 1. Shoulder — Akms. 2. Close order. 3. March. 4. Order — 
 Arms. 5. Slack — Arms. 6. To the rear, open order. 7. 
 March. 8. Front rank — Aijout — Face. 9. Unsling — 
 Knapsacks. 10. Ope7i — Knapsacks. 
 
 The sergeants will face inward at the second command, close upon 
 the centre at the third, and stack their arms at the fifth command: at 
 the sixth command they face outward, and resume their positions at 
 the seventh. When the ranks are closed, preparatory to take (irms, the 
 sergeants will also close upon the centre, and, at the word, take their 
 arms and resume their places. 
 
 The knapsacks will be placed at the feet of the men, the lliips from 
 them, with the great-coats on the flaps and the knapsacks leaning on 
 the great-coats. In this position the inspector will examine their con- 
 tents, or so man}' of them as he may think necessary, commencing 
 with the non-commissioned officers, the men standing at attention. 
 
 When till- inspector has passed thnm^'h the company the captain will 
 command : 
 
 Repack, knapsacks, 
 
 when each soldier will repack and buckle up his knapsack, leaving it 
 on the ground, the number upw;ird, turned from him, and then stand 
 at rest. 
 
 The captain will then command: 
 
 1. Atltuliitu. 2. Cow})any. 3. Slhuj, knapsacks. 
 
 At the word uliny, each soldier will take his knapsack, holding it by 
 the inner straps, and stand erict; at the last word he will replace it on 
 his back. The captain will continue: 
 
HONORS PAID BY THE TROOPS, ETC. 441 
 
 4. Front rank — About — Fack. 5. Close order. 6. March. 
 7. Take — Arms. 8. Shoulder — Arms. 9. Officers and Ser- 
 geants, to your posts. 10. March. 
 
 And will cause the company to file off to tbeir tents or ipiarters, except 
 the comj)any that is to re-escort the colors, which will await the further 
 orders of the colonel. 
 
 In an extensive column some of the rearmost companies may, after 
 the inspection of dress and general appearance, bo permitted to stuck 
 arms until just before the inspector approaches them, when they will 
 be directed to take arms and resume their position. 
 
 The inspection of the troops being ended the field and staff will next 
 accompany the inspector to the hospital, magazine, arsenal, quarters, 
 sutler's shop, guard-house, and such otiicr places as he may think prop- 
 er to inspect. The captains and subalterns repair to their companies 
 and sections to await the inspector. 
 
 The hospital being at all times an object of particular interest, it will 
 be critically and minutely inspected. 
 
 The men will be formed in the company quarters in front of their 
 respective bunks, and on the entrance of the inspector the word atten- 
 tion will be given by the senior non-commissioned officer present, when 
 the whole will s.alnte with the hand, without uncovering. 
 
 The ins|)ector, attended by the company officers, will examine the 
 general arrangement of the interior of the quarters, the bunks, bedding, 
 cooking and table utensils, and such other objects as may present them- 
 selves : and afterward the e.xterior. 
 
 The adjutant will exhibit to the inspector the regimental books and 
 papers, including those relating to the transactions of the Council of 
 Administration. The compauj' books and papers will also be exhibited, 
 the whole together, generally at the adjutant's office, and in the pres- 
 ence of the officers not otherwise particularly engaged. 
 
 The Inspector will examine critically the books and accounts of the 
 administrative and disbursing officers of the command and the money 
 and property in their keeping. 
 
 Inspection of cavalry. 
 
 7.36. The regiment being in line as prescribed for a review, the 
 colonel causes the companies to wheel to the right. He then orders 
 the ranks to be opened; at which the standard-bearer, under the 
 direction of the adjutant, is posted about twenty paces ahead of the 
 column. 
 
442 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS ANI> MILITIA. 
 
 The colonel seeing the ranks aligned commands: 1. OJficeri nnd nnn- 
 commia^ioiied oj}icers. 2. T<i the /rcut o/ i/<nir conipanie-i — MarcH ; on 
 which the officers form themselves in one ra!ik, twelve paces, and the 
 uon-coramitisioncd officers in one rank, six paces in advance, along the 
 whole front of their respective troops, in the order of rank, the highest 
 on the right and the lowest on the left; the trumpeters of each com- 
 pany, at the same time, take post on the alignment of tlio front rank, 
 six paces from the right. 
 
 Seeing the last order in a train of execution the colonel comm ands : 
 1. Field mid staff'. 2. Tn the front — MAiicn. The commissioned offi- 
 cers tluis designated form themselves in one rank, twelve paces in front 
 of the standards, in the following order, beginning on the right : lieu- 
 tenant-colonel, major, adjutant, quartermaster, etc. The non-commis- 
 sioned staff in a similar manner, six paces in rear of the preceding 
 rank. The band is formed in one rank, ten paces in rear of the col- 
 umn, the chief musician four paces in front of it. 
 
 The colonel, if a higher officer inspects the column, now takes hia 
 post on the right of the lieutenant-colonel. 
 
 The inspection commences in front. After inspecting the dress and 
 general appearance of the field and commissioned staff the inspector, 
 accompanied by these officers, passes down the column, looking at every 
 rank, in front and rear, with a view to the same object. lie afterward , 
 in a like manner, passes and inspects the arms. As ho successively 
 approaches each company for this purpose its captain commands : 1. 
 Attention. 2. Inspection of — Ansrs. 
 
 The inspector then dismounts with the field and commissioned staff, 
 for the purpose of inspecting horse furniture and valises, preparatory 
 to w-hich the colonel causes the column to dismount. The men being 
 then in the position of stnnd to horse, the colonel commands rest, for 
 the whole column, when the in.5pectc)r proceeds to make a minute in- 
 spection of the several ranks in succession, commencing in front. 
 
 On approaching the non-commissioned staff and the band the adju- 
 tant gives the necessary orders for the inspection of boxes and valises; 
 and in like manner as to the standard-bearer. The nou-eonimissioned 
 staff may be dismissed as soon as inspected. 
 
 As the inspjctor successively approaches the companies each captain 
 commands: 1. Attention. 2. Unstrap valises. 3. Open boxes, when 
 the vali.ses are placed at the feet of the men, with the flaps from them. 
 In this position the inspector ma^- examine the contents of tlie whole, 
 boxes and valises, or of as many as he may think necessary. 
 
 As the inspector passes each company the captain orders the valises 
 to be repacked and restrapped, and the men to file off to their tents or 
 quarters, except the company which is to escort the standard, which 
 awaits the orders of the colonel. 
 
HONORS PAID BY THE TROOPS, ETC. 448 
 
 FORMS OF PARADE. 
 
 737. On all parades of pcremony, such as Reviews, Guard Mounting, 
 at Troop or Retreat parades, instead of the word rent, which allows the 
 men to move or change the position of their bodies, the command will 
 
 ■ be parade, rest. At the last word of this command the soldier will 
 carry the right foot six inches in rear of the left heel, the left knee 
 slightly bent, the body upright upon the right leg. the musket resting 
 against the hollow of the right shoulder, the hands crossed in front, the 
 backs of them outward, and the left hand uppermost. At the word 
 attention, the soldier will resume the correct position at ordered arms. 
 In the positions here indicated the soldier will remain silent and mo- 
 tionless : and it is particularly enjoined upon all officers to cause the 
 commands above given, on the part of the soldier, to be executed with 
 great briskness and spirit. 
 
 Officers on all duties under arms are to have their swords drawn 
 without waiting for any words of command for that purpose. 
 
 Drc.<<.<i parade. 
 
 738, There shall bo daily one dress parade, at troop or retreat, as the 
 commanding officer may direct, 
 
 A signal will be beat or soundel half an h >ur before troop or retreat 
 for the music to assemble on the regimental parade, and each company 
 to turn out under arms on its own parade, for roll call or inspection by 
 its own oflScers. 
 
 Ten minutes after that signal the Adjutant''! call will be given, when 
 the captains will march their companies (the band playing) to the regi- 
 mental parade, where they take their positions in line as directed. No. 
 297. When the line is formed the captain of the first company, on 
 notice from the adjutant, steps one pace to the front and gives to his 
 company the command order ariiii ; p.trade, rent, which is repeated by 
 each captain in succession to the left. The adjutant takes post two 
 paces on the right of the line; the sergeant-major two paces on the 
 left. The music will be formed in two ranks on the right of the adju- 
 tant. The senior oflScer present will take command of the parade, and 
 will take post at a suitable distance in front, opposite the centre, facing 
 tlie line. 
 
 When the companies have ordered arms the adjutant will order the 
 music to beat off, when it will commence on the right, beat in front of 
 the line to the left, and back to its place on the right. 
 
 When the music, has ceased tlie adjutant will step two paces to the 
 front, face to the left, and comm.and : 
 
444 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Battalion. 3. Shoulder — Arms. 4. Prepare 
 to open ranks. 5. To the rear, open order. 6 March. 
 
 At the sixth comtnaml the ranks will be opened according tu the 
 system laid down in the Inlaiitry Tactics, the commissioned officers 
 marching to the front, the company officers four paces, field officers 
 six paces, opposite to their positions in the order of battle, where they 
 will halt and dress. The adjutant, seeing the ranks aligned, will 
 command : 
 
 Front, 
 
 and march along the front to the centre, face to the right, and pass the 
 line of coiuininy officers eight or ten paces, when he will come to the 
 riyhl (iboiii and command : 
 
 Present — Arms; 
 
 when arms will be presented, officers saluting. 
 
 Seeing this executed, he will face about to the commanding officer, 
 salute, and report " Sir, the parade i» funned." The adjutaut will 
 then, on intimation to that efi'ect, take his station three paces on 
 the left of the commanding officer, one pace retired, passing round 
 his rear. 
 
 The commanding ufliccr, having acknowledged the salute of the line 
 by touching his hat, will, alter tlie adjutant has taken his post, draw 
 his sword and command : 
 
 1. Ballalion. 2. Shoulder — Arms; 
 
 and add such exercises as he may think proper, concluding with : 
 
 Order — Arms ; 
 
 then return his sword and direct the adjutant to receive the reports. 
 
 The adjutant will now pass round the right of the commanding 
 officer, advance upon the line, halt midway between him and the line 
 of company officers, and command : 
 
 1. First sergeants, to the front and centre. 2. March. 
 
 At the first conmiuiHl they will Khaiildir oniiH as sergeants, march 
 two paces to the front, and face inward. At tlic second command they 
 will march to the centre and halt. The adjutant will then order: 
 
 1. Front — Face. 2. Report. 
 
HONORS PAID BY THE TROOPS, ETC. 445 
 
 At tbe last word each in succession, beginning on the right, will 
 salute by bringing the left hand smartly across the breast to the right 
 shoulder and report the result of the roll call previously made on the 
 company parade. 
 
 The adjutant again commands : 
 
 1. First sergeants, outward — Face. 2. To your posts — March. 
 
 when they will resume their places and order arms. The adjut.ant will 
 now face to the commanding officer, salute, report absent ofScor.s, and 
 give the result of tho first sergeants' reports. The commanding officer 
 will next direct the orders to be read, when the adjutant will face about 
 and announce : 
 
 Attention to orders. 
 
 He will then read the orders. 
 
 The orders having been read the adjutant will face to the command- 
 ing officer, salute, and report; when, on an intimation from the com- 
 mander, he will face again to the line and announce : 
 
 Parade is dismissed. 
 
 All the officers will now return their swords, face inward, and close 
 ou the adjutant, he having taken position in their line, the field officers 
 on tho flanks. The adjutant commands : 
 
 1. Front — Face. 2. Forward — March ; 
 
 when they will march forward, dressing on the centre, tho music play- 
 ing, and when within six paces of the commander the adjutant will 
 give the word : 
 
 Halt. 
 
 The officers will then s.alute the commanding officer by raising the 
 hand to the cap, and there remain until he shall have communicated 
 to them such instructions as he may have to give, or intimates that the 
 ceremony is finished. As the officers disperse the first sergeants will 
 close the ranks of their respective companies and march them to the 
 company parades, where they will be dismissed, the band continuing 
 to play until the companies clear the regimental parade. 
 
 All field and company officers and men will be present at dresi 
 parades, unless especially excused, or ou some duty incompatible with 
 such attendance. 
 
 A dross parade once a day will not be dispensed with, except on 
 extraordiuarj- and urgent occasions. 
 
446 MANUAL FOR VOLU.NTKERS AND .MILITIA. 
 
 Revieic of a battalion of infantry. 
 
 739. Preparatory to n review the adjutant will cause a camp-coli)r 
 to be placed 80 or TOO j>aces, or more, according to the length of the 
 line, in front of and ipposite to where the centre of the battalion will 
 rest, where the reviewing officer is supposed to take his station ; and, 
 although he may choose to quit that position, still the color is to be 
 considered as the point to which all the movements and formations are 
 relative. 
 
 The adjutant will also cause ])oints to be marked at suitable dis- 
 tances for the wheelings of the divisions; so that their right flanks, 
 in marching past, shall only be about four paces from the camp-color, 
 where it is supposed the reviewing officer places himself to receive tiie 
 salute. 
 
 The battalion being formed in the order of battle, at nhouldrrcd armt, 
 the colonel will command : 
 
 1. Battalion, ■prepare for review. 2. To the rear, open order. 
 3. March. 
 
 At the word march, the field and stafl' officers dismount; the company 
 officers and the color-rank advance four paces in front of the front 
 rank, and place themselves opposite to their respective places in the 
 order of battle. The color-guard replace the color-rank. The staff 
 officers place themselves, according to rank, three paces on the right of 
 the rank of company officers, and one pace from each other; the music 
 takes post as at a parade. The non-commissioned staff take post one 
 pace from each other, and three paces on the right of the front rank of 
 the battalion. 
 
 When the ranks are aligned the colonel will command : 
 
 Front, 
 
 and place himself eight paces, and the lieutenant-colonel and major 
 will place themselves two paces in front of the rank of company offi- 
 cers and opposite to their respective places in the order of battle, all 
 facing to the front- 
 When the reviewing officer presents himself before the centre, and 
 is fifty or sixty paces distant, the colonel will face about and com- 
 mand ; 
 
 Present — Arms, 
 
 and resume his front. The men present arms and the officers salute, 
 so as to drop their Hwordv with the last motion of the firelock. The 
 
HONORS PAID BY THE TROOPS, ETC. 44:7 
 
 non-comtnissioned staff salute by bringing the swonl to a poisr, the 
 hilt resting on the breast, the blade in front of the face, inclining a 
 little outward. The music will play, and all the drums beat, accord- 
 ing to the rank of the reviewing officer. The colors only salute such 
 persons as, from their rank, and by regulation (see No. 730), are enti- 
 tled to that honor. If the reviewing officer bo junior in rank to tho 
 commandant of the parade no compliment will be paid to him, but he 
 will be received with arms carried, and the oflScers will not salute as 
 the column passes in review. 
 
 The reviewing ofiicer having halted, and acknowledged the salute of 
 the line by touching or raising his cap or hat, the colonel will face 
 about and command : 
 
 Shoulder — Arms, 
 
 when the men shoulder their pieces; the officers and non-commissioned 
 staff" recover their swords with the last motion and the colonel faces to 
 the front. 
 
 The reviewing officer will then go toward the right, the whole 
 remaining perfectlj' steady, without paying any furtiier compliment, 
 while he passes along the front of the battalion and proceeds round 
 the left flank, and along the rear of the file-closers, to the right. 
 While the reviewing officer is going round the battalion the band will 
 play, and will cease when he has returned to the right flank of the 
 troops. 
 
 When the reviewing officer turns off to place himself by the camp- 
 color in front the colonel will face to the line and command: 
 
 1. Close order. 2. March. 
 
 At the first command the field and ciimpany officers will face to the 
 right about, and at the second cummand all persons, except the colonel, 
 will resume their places in the order of battle; the field and staff offi- 
 cers mount. 
 
 The reviewing officer having taken his position near the camp-color, 
 the colonel will command: 
 
 1. By company, right u'hcel. 2. Quick — March. 3. Pass in 
 review. 4. Column, forward. 5. Guide right. 6. March. 
 
 The battalion, in column of companies, right in front, will then, in 
 common time and at shouldered nrmi, be put in motion; the colonel 
 four paces in front of the captain of the leading company; the lieu- 
 tenant-culonel on a line with the leading company; the major on aline 
 with the rear company; the adjutant ou a line with the second com- 
 
448 MANUAL FOK VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 pany; the scrgeant-inajor on aline with the coiujiany next prccciling 
 the rear — each six pacfs from the flank (left) opposite to the reviewing 
 officer; the staff officers in one rank, according to the order of prece- 
 dency, from the ri'^ht. four paces in rear of the column ; the music 
 preceded by the principal musician, six paces before the colonel ; the 
 pioneers, preceded by a corporal, four paces before the principal musi- 
 cian ; and the quartermaster-sergeant two paces from the side opposite 
 to the guides and in line with the pioneers. 
 
 All other officers and non-commissioned officers will march past in 
 the places prescribed for them in the march of an open column. The 
 guides and soldiers will keep their beads steady to the front in passing 
 in review. 
 
 The color-bearer will remain in the ranks while passing and saluting. 
 
 The music will begin to play at the command to march, and after 
 passing the reviewing officer wheel to the left out of the column and 
 take a position opposite and facing him, and will continue to play until 
 the rear of the column shall have passed him, when it will cease and 
 follow in the rear of the battalion, unless the battalion is to pass in 
 quick time also, in which case it will keep its position. 
 
 The officers will salute the reviewing officer when they arrive within 
 six paces of him, and recover their swords when six paces past him. 
 All officers, iu saluting, will cast their eyes toward the reviewing 
 officer. 
 
 The colonel, when he has saluted at the head of the battalion, will 
 place himself near the reviewing officer, and will remain there until the 
 rear has passed, when he will rejoin the battalion. 
 
 The colors will salute the reviewing officer, if entitled to it, when 
 within six paces of him, and be raised when they have passed by him 
 an equal distance. The drums will beat a march, or ruffle, according 
 to the rank of the reviewing officer, at the same time that the colors 
 salute. 
 
 When the column has passed the reviewing officer the colonel will 
 direct it to the ground it marched from and command : 
 
 Guide lejl, 
 
 in time for the guides to cover. The column having arrived on its 
 ground the colonel will command: 
 
 1. Column. 2. Halt, 
 
 form it in order of battle, and cause the ranks to be opened. The 
 review will terminate by the whole saluting as at the beginning. 
 
 If, however, instructions have been previously giveu to march the 
 
 i 
 
HONORS PAID BY THE TROOPS, ETC. 449 
 
 troops past in quick time also, the colonel will, instead of changing the 
 guides, halt the column, and wheeling it into line as above directed, 
 give the command : 
 
 I. Quick time. 2. March. 
 
 In passing the reviewing officer again no salute will be offered by 
 either officers or men. The music will have kept its position opposite 
 the reviewing cifficer, and at the last command will commence playing, 
 and, as the column approaches, will place itself in front of and march 
 off with the column, and continue to play until the battalion is halted 
 on its original ground of formation. The I'eview will terminate in the 
 same manner as prescribed above.* 
 
 The colonel will afierward cause the troops to perform such exercises 
 and manoeuvres as the reviewing ollicer may dircit. 
 
 When two or more battalions are to l)e reviewed they will be formed 
 in parade order, with the proper intervals, and will also perform the 
 same movements that are laid down for a. single battalion, observing 
 the additional directions thnt are given for such movements when 
 ajiplied to the line. The brigadier-genera! and his staff, on foot, will 
 place themselves opposite the centre of the brigade ; the brigadier- 
 general two paces iu front of the rank of colonels; his aid two paces 
 on his right, and one retired ; and the other brigade staff oflioers, those 
 having the rank of field officers in the rank of lieutenant-col.mels and 
 majors; ami those below that rank in the rank of comp.any officers. 
 
 In passing in review a major-general will be four paces iii front of 
 the colonel of the leading battalion of his division ; anil the brigadier- 
 general will be on the right of the colonels of the leading battalions of 
 their brigades; staff officers on the left of their generals. 
 
 When the lino exceeds two battalions the reviewing officer may cause 
 them to march past in quick time only. Li such cases the mounted 
 officers only will salute. 
 
 A number of companies, less than a battalion, will be reviewed as a 
 battalion, and a single compan}' as if it were with the battalion. In 
 the latter case the company may pass in column of platoons. 
 
 If several brigades are to be reviewed together, or in one line, this 
 further difference will be observed : the reviewing personage, j<iined by 
 the general of the division, on the right of his division, will proceed 
 down the line, parallel to its front, and when near the brigadier- 
 generals respectively will be saluted by their brigades in succession. 
 The music of each, after the prescribed salute, will pla\' while the 
 reviewing personage is in front or in rear of it, and onl}' then. 
 
 * Or the battalion may pase a third time at tlie double-quiel-, and then reform. 
 38 
 
450 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTKI.RS AND MILITIA. 
 
 In inarching in review with several battalions, in common time, the 
 music of each succeeding battuHon will commence to play when the 
 music of the preceding one has ceased, in order to follow its battalion. 
 When marching in quick time the music will begin to play when the 
 rear company of the preceding battalion has passed the reviewing 
 oflScer. 
 
 The reviewing officer or personage will acknowledge the salute by 
 raising, or taking oflf his cap or hat when the commander of the troops 
 salutes him, and also when the colors pass. The remainder of the time 
 occupied by the passage of the troops he will be covered. 
 
 Review of a regiment of cavalry. 
 
 740. The regiment being in line, the captains one pace in advance of 
 the centres of their companies, the lieutenants coramauding platoons 
 one pace in advance of the centres of their platoons, the colonel com- 
 mands : 
 
 \. Attention. 2. Prepare for review. 3. Rear rank, open order. 
 4. March. 6. Right — Dup:ss. 6. Front. 
 
 At the fourth command the ranks are opened, all the officers in the 
 rank of file-closers advancing to the front and placing themselves on 
 the line of officers opposite to the positions they before occupied. The 
 stafi" officers place themselves on the right of the rank of company 
 officers, according to their relative rank, one pace from each other. 
 The quartermaster-sergeant and the sergeant-major are on the right of 
 the front rank of the regiment. 
 
 The colonel, lieutenant-colonel, major, and adjutant are posted as in 
 order of battle. 
 
 The music is formed at the same time in one rank on the right of the 
 regiment, and ten paces from it. 
 
 After the ranks arc opened the colonel commands : 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Draw — Sabre. 
 
 In this parade order the regiment awaits the approach of the per- 
 ■ eonage who is to review it; for whose guidance a camp-color will have 
 been placed eighty or one hundred and fifty paces in front of the 
 centre, according to the extent of the line and the plain in front of it. 
 
 When the reviewing personage is midway between the camp-color 
 and the colonel the latlcr turns his horse to the ii(jht ubuut on his 
 ground and eommamls: 
 
HONORS PAID BY THE TROOPS, ETC. 401 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Present — Sabre. 
 
 and resumes his proper front. The oflBcers all salute. 
 
 When the reviewing personage, who has baited until the proper com- 
 pliments are paid, advances the colonel brings bis sabre to a carri/, 
 turns about as before to the line, and commands : 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Carry — Sabre. 
 
 when the whole line remains perfectly steady, except the colonel, who 
 resumes his proper front. 
 
 The reviewing personage now turns off to the right of the regiment, 
 passes thence, in front of all the officers, to the left, around the left and 
 behind the rank of file-closers to the right again. While he is passing 
 around the regiment, no matter what his rank, the music will play ; and 
 when he turns off to take his station near the camp-color the music will 
 cease. 
 
 When the music ceases the colonel turns about and commands: 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Rear rank; close order. 3. March. 
 
 At the command march, all the officers from the rank of file-closers 
 return to their position in that rank. 
 
 The reviewing personage having taken a position near the camp- 
 color, previously placed at a proper distance, the colonel causes the, 
 regiment to break into column of companies, right in front, and com- 
 mands : 
 
 Pass in review. 
 
 At this command the band and trumpeters repair to the head of the 
 regimental column, six paces in front of the colonel. The quarter- 
 master-sergeant places himself ten paces in front of the colonel, two 
 paces from the flank opposite to the guides. 
 
 The quartermaster, surgeon, etc., in one rank, in the order in which 
 they are named, four paces in rear of the last division. 
 
 The colonel is six paces in front of the captain of the leading com- 
 pany. 
 
 The lieutenant-colonel on a line with the first company, six paces 
 from the flank opposite to the guide. 
 
 The major on a line with the last company, six paces from the side 
 opposite to the guide. 
 
 The adjutant on a line with the second company, six paces from the 
 flank opposite to the guide. 
 
 The sergeant-major on a 'line with the company next to the rear, six 
 paces from the flank opposite to the guide. 
 
452 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 Captains two paecs in advance of the centres of their companies. 
 
 Chiefs of platuons two paces in advance of the centres of their 
 platoons. 
 
 Officers of the rank of file-closers on the side opposite the guide, on 
 a line with the chiefs of platoons. 
 
 The column is then put in march, at a walk, with the guide ou the 
 side next to the reviewing personage. 
 
 The column first passes at a walk, and afterward, if required, at a 
 trot. 
 
 When the head of the column arrives within fifty paces of the review- 
 ing personage the music commences to play. 
 
 The band having passed, the chief musician causes it to wheel out of 
 the column and take position opposite to the reviewing personage; the 
 music continues to play until the last company has passed, when it 
 ceases and follows in the rear. 
 
 Passing at a walk, all the officers salute with the sabre as they suc- 
 cessively arrive within six paces of the reviewing personage, turning 
 their beads toward him. 
 
 If more than one regiment passes, the different regiments will march 
 with intervals of about forty paces between them. 
 
 Review of a battery <.f artillery. 
 
 741. The battery being in line, with the trumpeters ou the right, the 
 captain commands: 
 
 \. Attention. 2. Prepare for review. 3. To the rear, open order. 
 4. March. 5. Right — Dress. 6. Front. 
 
 At the third command the chief of the line of caissons commands 
 caiatona, left reverae, and places himself on the right flank, sixteen 
 yards in rear of the line of pieces, facing to the left, to mark the point 
 where the right of the lino of caissons is to rest. In horse artillery the 
 distance is twenty yards. 
 
 At the same command the gunners face the detachments to the rear, 
 in foot artillery, by the command aluut — face; and in horse artillery, 
 they command bnckicard. 
 
 At the commimd march, repeated by the chief of the line of caissons, 
 the caissons reverse to the left, move to the rear, reverse again to the 
 left, and align themselves by appropriate conunands from the chief of 
 the line of caissons. As soon a.s the ground is unmasked the gunners 
 repeat the command march, at which the cannoneers in foot artillery 
 march forward, and are formed six yards in rear of their pieces, the 
 
HONORS PAID BY THE TROOPS, ETC. 453 
 
 chiefs of caissons joining tlieir detacbmcnts at tbe same time. In 
 horse artillery, the cannoneers rein back and are halted by the gun- 
 ners at the same distance. 
 
 At the fifth command the battery is aligned: the pieces and detach- 
 ments by tbe captain, and the caissons by tbe chiefs of the line of cais- 
 sons. At the sixth command, given bj' the captain when the alignment 
 is completed, the chief of the line of caissons takes his post as in line. 
 The captain then commands: 
 
 Draw — Swords. 
 
 This is executed by tbe officers, non-commissioned oflBcers, and 
 detachments only, and the captain takes his post as in line. 
 
 In tins order the battery awaits the approach of the reviewing officer. 
 When he is midway between the camp-color and the captain the latter 
 turns his horse to the liijht about and commands : 
 
 Present — Swords. 
 
 He immediately resumes his front, and salutes. The officers, non- 
 commissioned officers, and detachments all salute as in cavalry ; and 
 the music plays according to the rank of the reviewing officer. 
 
 The reviewing officer having baited and acknowledged the salute, the 
 captain brings his sword to a carry, turns about to the line as before, 
 and commands : 
 
 Carry — Swords. 
 
 He immediately resumes his front, the reviewing officer turns off to 
 the right of the battery, passes along its front, and returns to the right 
 by passing between the lines of carriages or in rear of the caissons. 
 While the reviewing olFicer is passing around the battery the music 
 plays. It ceases when he turns ofl" to take his post at the camp- 
 color. 
 
 When the music ceases the captain turns about and commands: 
 
 1. Detachments. 2. Return — Swords. 3. Battery. 4. Close 
 order. 5. March. 
 
 In horse artillery the first and second commands are not given. 
 
 At the fourth command the gunners in foot artillery command left 
 /(ice, and in horse artillery /oncan/. 
 
 At the command march, repeated by tbe gunners, the cannoneers in 
 mounted artillery take their posts as prescribed in the school of the 
 piece. The caissons, and in horse artillery the cannoneers, close to 
 their proper distances iu line. 
 
454 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 The reviewing oflicer liaving taken a position near the camp-color 
 the captnin causes the cannoneers to mount, if in foot artillery, and 
 breaks the battery into column of sections to the right by the usual 
 cummands. He then commands : 
 
 Pass in review, 
 
 and puts the column in march, at a walk, with the guide to the right. 
 The captain then places himself at the head of the column, four yards 
 in advance of the chief of the leading section. The trumpeters march 
 four yards in advance of the captain ; and the chief of the line of 
 caissons outside the column, opposite the centre, and four yards from 
 the left flank. 
 
 When the head of the column has arrived within forty yards of the 
 reviewing oflicer the music begins to play ; and as soon as the latter 
 has passed it wheels out of the column to a position in front of the 
 reviewing officer, where it faces him, and continues to play until the 
 column has passed. It then ceases, follows in rear of the battery, and 
 resumes its place at the head of the column after the next change of 
 direction. 
 
 All the officers salute in succession as they arrive within six yards of 
 the reviewing officer, casting their eyes toward him at the same time, 
 and bringing their swords to a carry after having passed him six yards. 
 As soon as the captain has saluted he places himself near the reviewing 
 officer, remains until the rear has passed, and then rejoins his battery. 
 
 The column is so conducted as to march parallel to the line ou which 
 the battery is to form, and fur enough in its rear to enable the column 
 to wheel into line. It is then wheeled into line, the ranks opened, and 
 the review terminated by a salute as at the beginning. 
 
 When instructions have been previously given to pass a second time, 
 either at a trot or a gallop, it will be done before wheeling into line; 
 the officers passing the .second time without salute. 
 
 When artillery has been passing in review with other troops, and is 
 marching in prolongation of the line on which the different corps are to 
 form, it may be wheeled by sections to the right, and, after gaining the 
 necessary distance, countermarched and established ou the line. 
 
 When a battery is to march past in line, or in column of half- 
 batteries, it will be done according to the principles already described. 
 In line the officers will be at their usual posts. In column of half- 
 batteries the cii]ituin will be two j'ards in advance of the chief of the 
 leading hulf-battery ; each chief of half-buttery two yards in front of 
 the centre of his coniniand ; the chief of the centre section on the left 
 of the leading half- battery, four yards from the leading driver; and 
 
HONORS PAID BY THE TROOPS, ETC. 455 
 
 the chief of the line of caissons in the same position with respect to 
 the rear half-battery. 
 
 In all cases the trumpeters are four yards in front of the captain. 
 
 When the battery is to be minutely inspected the captain will cause 
 the ranks of the detachments to be opened, if required, by the com- 
 mands: 
 
 1. Detachments. 2. To the rear, open order. 3. March. 
 
 Which will be executed as in infantry or cavalry, as the case may 
 require. 
 
 GUARD MOUNTING. 
 
 742. At the first call for guard mounting the men warned for duty 
 turn out on their company parades for inspection by the first sergeants; 
 and at the second call repair to the regimental or garrison parade, 
 conducted by the first sergeants. Each detachment as it arrives will, 
 under the direction of the adjutant, take post on the left of the one that 
 preceded it, in open order, arms shouldered, and bayonets fixed; the 
 supernumeraties five paces in the rear of the men of their respective 
 companies; the first sergeants in rear of them. The sergeant-major 
 will dress the ranks, count the files, verify the details, and when the 
 guard is formed report to the adjutant, and take post two paces on the 
 left of the front rank. 
 
 The adjutant then commands front, when the oflScer of the guard 
 takes post twelve paces in front of the centre, the sergeants in one 
 rank, four paces in the rear of the oflScers; and the corporals in one 
 rank, four paces in the rear of the sergeants — all facing to the front. 
 The adjutant then assigns their places in the guard. 
 
 The adjutant will then command: 
 
 1. Officer and non-commissioned officers. 2. About — Face. 
 3. Inspect your guards — March. 
 
 The ron-cdmmissioned oflBcers then take their posts. The com- 
 mander of the guard then commands: 
 
 1. Order — Arms. Inspection — Arms, 
 
 and inspects his guard. When there is no commissioned oflBcer on the 
 guard the adjutant will inspect it. During inspection the band will 
 play. 
 
 The inspection ended, the oflicer of the guard takes post as though 
 the guard were a company of a battalion in open order under review; 
 
456 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 at the same time, alsi"', tlie officers of tlic day will take post iu front of 
 the centre of the guanl; the old officer of the day three paces on the 
 right of the ntw officer of the day, one pace retired. 
 The adjutant will now command : 
 
 1. Parade— Rest. 2. Troop—Beat off; 
 
 when the music, beginning on the right, will beat down the line in 
 front of the officer of the guard to the left, and back to its place on the 
 right, where it will cease to play. 
 The adjutant then commands : 
 
 1. Atte/Uion. 2. Shoulder — Arms. 3. Close order — March. 
 
 At the word clone order, the officer will face about; at march, resume 
 his post in line. The adjutant the:i commands: 
 
 Present — Arms. 
 
 At which he will face to the new officer of the day. salute, and report: 
 "S!r, the guard is formed." The new officer of the day, after acknowl- 
 edging the salute, will direct the adjutant to march the guard in 
 review, or by fl.ank to its post. But, if the adjutant be senior to the 
 officer of the day, he will report without salutin^j with the sword then, 
 or when marching the guard in review. 
 
 In review the guard march past the officer of the day, according to 
 the order of review, conducted by the adjutant, marching on the left of 
 the first division; the sergeant-major on the left of the last division. 
 
 When the column has passed the officer of the day the officer of the 
 guard marches it to its post, the adjutant and sergeant-major retiring. 
 The music, which 'has wheeled out of the column and taken post 
 opposite the officer of the day, will cease, and the old officer of the 
 day salute, and give the old or standing orders to the new officer of 
 the day. The supernumeraries, at the same time, will bo marched 
 by the first sergeants to their respective company parades and dis- 
 missed. 
 
 In bad weather, or at night, or after fatiguing marches, the cere- 
 mony of turning oft' may bo dispensed with, but not the inspection. 
 
 Grand guards, and other brigade guards, are orgajiizcd and mounted 
 on the brigade parade by the staff officer of the parade, under the 
 direction of the field ollieer of the day of the brigade, according to tbo 
 principles here prescribed for a police guard of a regiment. The 
 detail of each regiment is assembled on the regimental parade, verified 
 by the adjutant, and marched to the brigade parade by the senior 
 
HONORS PAID BY THE TROOPS, ETC. 457 
 
 officer of tbe detail. After inspection and review the officer of the day 
 directs the several guards tn their respective posts. 
 
 The officer of the old guard, having his guard paraded, on the ap- 
 proach of the new guard commands : 
 
 Present — Arms. 
 
 The new guard will march in quick time past the old guard at 
 ehoulder arms, officers saluting, and take post four paces on its right, 
 where, being aligned with it, its commander will order: 
 
 Present — Arms. 
 
 The two officers will then approach each other and salute. They 
 will then return to their respective guards and command : 
 
 1. Shoulder — Arms. 2. Order — Arms. 
 
 The officer of the new guard will now direct the detail for the 
 advanced guard to be formed and marched to its post, the list of 
 the guard made and divided into three reliefs, experienced soldiers 
 placed over the arms of the guard and at the remote and responsible 
 posts, and the young soldiers in posts near the guard for instruction 
 in their duties, and will himself proceed to take possession of the 
 guard-house or guard-tent, and the articles and prisoners in charge of 
 the guard. 
 
 During the time of relieving the sentinels and of calling in the small 
 posts the old commander will give to tbe new all the information and 
 instructions relating to his post. 
 
 The first relief having been designated, and ordered two paces to the 
 front, the corporal of the new guard will take charge of it and go to 
 relieve the sentinels, accompanied by the corporal of the old guard, 
 who will take command of the old sentinels, when the whole are re- 
 lieved. 
 
 If the sentinels are numerous the sergeants are to be employed, as 
 well as the corporals, in relieving them. 
 
 The relief, with arms at a support, in two ranks, will march by a 
 flank, conducted by the corporal on the side of the leading front rank 
 man ; and the men will be numbered alternately in the front and rear 
 ranks, the man on the right of the front rank being No. I. Should an 
 officer approach, the corporal will command carry arms, and resume 
 the support arms when the officer is passed. 
 
 The sentinels at the guard-house or guard-tent will be the first re- 
 lieved and left behind; the others are relieved in succession. 
 
 When a sentinel sees the relief approaching he will halt, and face to 
 .39 
 
458 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEtRS AND MIMTIA. 
 
 it with his arm? at a shoulder. At six paces, iho ci rporal will corn- 
 mand : 
 
 1. Relief. 2. Halt. 
 
 When (he relief will halt, and carry arms. The corporal will then 
 odd "No. 1/' or "No. 2,'' or "No. ;?," according to tho number of the 
 popt. 
 
 Arinx — Port. 
 
 The two sintincis will, with arms at port, llun approach each other, 
 when the old sentinel, under the direction of" the corporal, will whisper 
 the instructions to the new sentinel. This done, the two sen'inclf will 
 thouldtr arms and the old sentinel will pa.^s, in quick time, to his placo 
 in rear of the relief. The corpural will then command : 
 
 1. Support — Arms. 2. Furicard. 3. March. 
 
 And the relief proceeds in the same manner until the whole are re- 
 lieved. 
 
 The detachmciits and sentinels from the old guard hiivinj:; come in it 
 will he marched, at shiinhier arms, along the front of tho new guard, in 
 quick time, the new guard standing at present arms ; officers saluting, 
 and the music of both guards beating, except at the outposts. 
 
 On arriving at the regimental or garrison parade, tho commander of 
 the old guard will send the detachments composing it, under charge of 
 the non-commissioned olEccrs, to their respective regiments. Before 
 the men are dismissed their pieces will be drawn or discharged at a 
 target. On rejoining their companions the chiefs of squads will ex- 
 amine the arms, etc., of their men, and cause the whole to be put away 
 in good order. 
 
 When the old guard has marched ofi' fifty jjaccs the officer of tho new 
 guard will order his men to stack their arms, or place them in the arm- 
 racks. 
 
 The commander of tho ;:uard will then niiike himself acvjuainted 
 with all the instructions for his post, visit the sentinels, and question 
 them and the non-commissioned officers relative to the instructions they 
 may have received from other persons of the old guard. 
 
 Method of escortint/ and receiving the color of an infantry 
 regiment. 
 
 743. When the regiment turns out under arms, and the color is 
 wuuiud, one of the flank companies iu its tour, or, if both be absent, h 
 
HONORS PAID BY THE TROOPS, ETC. 459 
 
 battaliou companj', other than that of the color, will be put in march 
 to receive and e.-^curt the coUir. 
 
 The march will be iu the following order, in quick time and without 
 mu.<ic : the drum-major and field music, followed hy the band; the 
 escort in column by platoon, right in front, with arms shifted to the 
 right shoulder (see No. 176), and the color-bearer between the pla- 
 toons. 
 
 Arrived in front of the tent or quarter!- of the colonel, the escort 
 will form line, the licld music and band on the right, and arms will be 
 carried. 
 
 The moment the escort is iu line the color-boarer, preceded by the 
 first lieutenant and followed by a sergeant of the escort, will go to 
 receive the color. 
 
 When the color-bearer shall come out, followed by the lieutenant and 
 sergeaut, he will halt before the entrance; the escort will prenent arms 
 and the drums will beat to the color. 
 
 After some twenty seconds the captain will cause the beat to cease, 
 arms to be shouldered, and then break by platoon into column ; the 
 color-bearer will place himself between the platoons and the lieutenant 
 and sergeant will resume their posts. 
 
 The escort will march back to the battalion to the sound of music in 
 quick time and in the same order as above. 
 
 Honors paid to the color. 
 
 Arrived at the distance of twenty paces from the battalion, the escort 
 will halt and the music cease ; the colonel will place himself six paces 
 before the centre of the battalion, the color-bearer will approach the 
 colonel, by the front, in quick time ; when at the distance of ten paces 
 he will halt; the colonel will cause arms to be presented and /o //;e 
 color to be played, which being executed the color-bearer will take his 
 place in the front rank of the color-guard, and the battalion, by com- 
 mand shoulder urm^. 
 
 The escort, field music, and band will return in quick time to their 
 several places in line of battle, marching by the rear of the battalion. 
 
 The color will be escorted back to the colonel's tent or quarters in 
 the above order. 
 
 Method of escorting and receiving the standard of a cavalry 
 regiment. 
 
 744. The squadrons of a regiment, commencing with the first, furnish 
 in turn the escort of the standard. 
 
460 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTKERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 Tbe captains cnmmaniling and the second captain alternate in com- 
 mand of the escort. 
 
 The escort is composed of two platoons (a troop). 
 
 The first platoon of the escort furnishes the advanced guard, com- 
 posed of two men in front, iriih the oarlinc or ri/le ndvmiccd or pistol 
 ratted ; a corporal and four men, with drawn sabres, march ten paces 
 from them. 
 
 The trumpeters, formed bj' fmirs, and conducted by the adjutant, 
 march ten paces from the four men who precede. 
 
 The rest of the platoon, with drawn sabres, having the lieutenant at 
 its head, marches by fours, ten paces from the trumpeters. 
 
 The standard-bearer follows immediately after, between two ser- 
 geants. 
 
 The second platoon, with drawn sabres, having the second lieutenant 
 at the head, follows the standard-bearer, marches by fours, and fur- 
 nishes the rear guard, composed of a corporal and two men, who march 
 with drawn sabres, ten paces in rear of tbe second platoon. 
 
 Two other men, with the carbine or ri/Ie advanced, or pistol rained, 
 march ten paces in rear. 
 
 The captain marches four paces from the left flank, oiiposite to the 
 standard-bearer. 
 
 The detachment having arrived where the standard is kept, without 
 sounding the trumpets, is there formed into line. 
 
 The adjutant dismounts, takes the standard, and gives it to the 
 standard-bearer. 
 
 Reception of the standard. 
 
 As soon as the standard apjiears the captain orders sabres to be pre- 
 sented ; the trumpets sound to the standard. 
 
 After this signal has been twice repeated the captain orders the 
 sabres to be carried, and breaks in the same order in which ho came; 
 the trumpets sound the tnarch. 
 
 When the standard arrives in front of the right or left wing of the 
 regiment the colonel orders the sabres to be drawn; the trumpets cease 
 to sound, and, with the escort, take their place in line, passing behind 
 the regiment. 
 
 The standard-bearer, accompanied by the two sergeants, moves to- 
 ward the centre of the regiment, parallel to the front, and halts before' 
 the colonel, fronting the regiment; the colonel then orders the sabres 
 to be presented and the trumpets to sound to the standard ; he salutes 
 with the sabre. The standard-bearer then takes his place in lino and 
 the colonel orders the sabres to bo carried. 
 
HONORS PAID BY THE TROOPS, ETC. 461 
 
 The field officers salute with the sabre when the standard passes 
 before them. 
 
 The standard receives the same honors on its departure as on its 
 arrival, and is escorted to the colonel's quarters in the order prescribed 
 above. 
 
 Reception of one body of troops by another. 
 
 745. The commanding ofTicer of the receiving corps, having notified 
 the commander of the other body of his intention, brings his command 
 into line so that it shall be on the right of the route which it is 
 intended the other shall take. The commander of the body receiving 
 the compliment should have his command in column, right in front ; 
 and when he sees the other body in line, or receives an intimation from 
 its commanding officer that he is ready to receive him, he puts his 
 column in motion : when its head is within six paces of the left of the 
 line on its right the latter will be brought to a present, and will con- 
 tinue in that position until the rear of the column has passed the right 
 of the line. The column pusses at shoulder armi, each otficer saluting 
 as soon as he comes within six paces of the left of the line. When the 
 rear of the column has passed some twentj'-five or thirty paces beyond 
 the right of the line the column is brought into line, on the same side 
 with the first line. As soon as this is done the first line breaks into 
 column, right in front, and marches past the second, receiving the same 
 compliments that it extended when the other body passed. After 
 marching past it may be formed into line again as it was at first, when 
 both commands may be brought to an order, the ofiicers advancing and 
 being presented; or the column may halt long enough to allow the 
 other command, now in line, to reform column, when both take up 
 the march, the leading column serving as an escort for the other. 
 
 ORDERS. 
 
 74G. The orders of commanders of armies, divisions, brigades, and 
 regiments are denominated orders of such an army, division, etc. And 
 all orders are either general or special. Orders are numbered, general 
 and special, in separate series, each beginning with the year. 
 
 General orders provide for thg organization, discipline, instruction, 
 and movement of the troops ; announce the hours for roll-calls and 
 duties; the number and kind of guards, and the time when they shall 
 be relieved ; police regulations, and the prohibitions required by cir- 
 cumstances and localities; returns to be made, and their forms; laws 
 and regulations for the forces; promotions and appointments; eulogies 
 or censures to corps or individuals, and, ginerall}-, whatever it may be 
 important to make known to the whole command. 
 
4G2 :manual fou voluntkeks ano mii.itia. 
 
 Special orders are such ns do not concern the troops gonorallv, and 
 need not be publishod (o the whole coiumaud ; such !i!< rehitc to the 
 march of some particulur corps, the establishment of some post, the 
 detachinir of individuals, the granting requests, etc. 
 
 An order will state, ut the head, the :<ourcc, place, and date, and at 
 the foot, ihe name of the commander who gives it, followed by the sig- 
 nature and title of the staff o£5cer by whom it is written, for example : 
 
 For an army — 
 
 General (or Special) Orders, 
 No. 1. 
 
 Fur a divisiou — 
 
 Head-qiiartffg. Arini/ <i/ Ocviipntinn, 
 CoRiTS Chiusti, Tkxas, 
 .sr-vjf., 18—. 
 
 By order of General Z. T.. 
 
 W. S. B., AUft-<jrwr<,l. 
 
 Head-qiinrtera, 'Ad D., Va. M., 
 
 WiN'cuKSTER, Va., Dec, 18 — . 
 
 General (or Special) Orders, 1 
 
 No. — . } 
 
 By order of Major-General A. B., 
 
 C. D., AsHistaiit Adj't-GenernK 
 
 or Dlrisuin liiKpvctitr. 
 
 For a brigade — 
 
 Heitd-qiicirtern, \)lli fin'(/nde, ]'ii. .)/., 
 
 Camp xeak , Jan., IS — . 
 
 General (or Special) Orders. ) 
 No. — . ; 
 
 By order of Brigiidicr-Goneral F. G., 
 
 H. I., Anxistmit Adj't-irenenil. 
 
 or Brigade /nupectm: 
 
 For a regiment — 
 
 Orders (or Special) Orders, ) 
 No. — . J 
 
 IIcad-qiitirt'i-M, 20lh fiei/imeut Vii. .)/., 
 C— N., AmjtiHt, IS — . 
 
 By •■nlcr of Colonel 0. P. Q., 
 
 R. S., Adjntunt. 
 
 Orders are ordinarily transmitted throu>;h all the intermediate com- 
 manders in tlie order of rank. When an intermediate commander is 
 omitted the officer who gives the order shall inform him, and he who 
 receives it shall report it to his immediate superior. 
 
 The orderly hour.s being fi.xed at each hea<l-quarter.^, Ifce staff officers 
 and chiefs of the special services either attend in per.son or send their 
 assistants to obtain the orders of the d;i3' ; and the first sergeants of 
 
HONORS PAID BY THE TROOPS, ETC. 46-J 
 
 companies repair for that purpose to the regimental or garrison head- 
 quailers. 
 
 During marches and active operations, and when the regular orderly 
 hours cannot he observed, all orders will he eithir sent direct to the 
 troops, or the respective commanders or corps will bo iuform'jd when to 
 Bend to head-quarters for them. 
 
 MUSTERS. 
 
 747. Musters of the volunteers and militia are made at least once a 
 year by the brigade inspectors. When troops are in actual service 
 musters are made every two months: usuallj' on the. last day of every 
 second month. In this casv. they are made by an inspector-general, if 
 present, otherwise by an officer specially designated by the commander 
 of the army, division, or brigade; and in the absence of the inspector- 
 general, or officer specially designated, the muster is midj by the com- 
 mander of the post. 
 
 When one inspecting officer cannot inspect all the troojis himself on 
 the day specified, the commanding officer will designate such other 
 competent officers as may be necessary to assist him. All stated mus- 
 ters of the troops should be preceded by a minute and careful inijiKction 
 in the prescribed mode; and if the command be more th.m a company, 
 by a revieir. before inspection. 
 
 The mustering officer having inspected the companies in sgccession, 
 beginning on the right, returns to the first company to muster it. The 
 company being at order arms, with open ranks, as when inspected, the 
 captains will, as the mustering officer approaches, command : 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Company. 3. Shoulder — ArM'*. 4. Support — 
 Arms. 
 
 The mustering officer will then call over the names on the roll, and 
 each man as his name is called will distinctly answer here, and bring 
 his piece to a curry and to an order. 
 
 After each company is mustered the captain will order it to be marched 
 to the company parade, and there dismissed to quarters to await the 
 inspector's visit. After mustering the companies the mustering officer, 
 attended by the company commanders, will visit the guard and hospi- 
 tal to verifj- the jireseiico of the men reported there. Tlie muster and 
 pay rolls are made on printed forms in accordance with the directions 
 on them. On the muster rolls companies are designated by the name 
 of the captain, whether present or absent. The pay roll is left blank 
 to be filled up by the paymaster. 
 
4C-4 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 THE ROSTER. OR 1» K T A I L S FOR SERVICE. 
 
 748. The duties performed by ck'tnil are of three classes. Thejimt 
 clast comprises: first, frriipd RUiirds find outposts; second, interior 
 guards, as of miifiazine, ho.»iiital, etc.; third, orderlie.<; fourth, police 
 guards. 
 
 The second cluDH comprises: first, detachments to protect labor on 
 military works, as field works, communications, etc.: second, working 
 parties on such works; third, detachments to protect fatigues. 
 
 The third class are all fatipues, without arms, in or out of camp. 
 In the cavalry, stable guards form a separate roster, and count before 
 fatigue. 
 
 The rosters are distinct for each class. Oflicers are named on them 
 in the order of rank. The details are taken in succession in the order 
 of the roster, beginning at the Lead. Lieutenants form one roster; the 
 first and second lieutenants are entered on it alternately. The senior 
 first lieutenant is the first on the rosier; the senior second lieutenant is 
 the second, etc. The captains form one roster, and are exempt from 
 fatigue, except to superintend issues. A captain commanding a bat- 
 talion temporarily is exempt from detail, and duty falling to him 
 passes. Lieutenant-colonel.'- and majors are on one roster. They may 
 be detailed for duties of the first and second classes when the impor- 
 tance of the guards and detachments requires it. The roster is kept 
 at division and brigade head-quarters. The rosters of the captains and 
 lieutenants are kept at regimental head-quarters, and those of the com- 
 panies by the first sergeants. In the company, sergeants, corporals, 
 and privates form distinct rosters. 
 
 Oflicers, non-commissioned officers, and soldiers take duties of the 
 first class in the order stated, viz: the first for the detail, takes 
 the grand guards; the next, the interior guards; the last, the police 
 guard ; and the same rule in regard to the details and duties of the 
 second class. In the detaiLs for the third class, the senior olficer takes 
 the largest party. The party first for detail takes the service out of 
 cani)i. 
 
 When llic officer whose tour it is is not able to take it, or is not pres- 
 ent at the hour of marching, the next after him takes it. When a 
 guard has passe<l the chain of sentinel.-^, or an interior guard has reached 
 its post, the otficer whose tour it was cannot then take it. He takes the 
 tour of the ofliccr who has taken his. When an officer is jircvcnted by 
 sickness from taking hi.s tour it pastscs. These rules apjily equally to 
 non-commissioned oiRcers and soldiers. 
 
 Duties of the first and second class are credited on the roster when 
 the guards or detachments have passed the chain of seutiucls or an 
 
HONORS PAID BY THE TROOPS, ETC. 465 
 
 interior guard has reached its post; fatigue duties when the parties 
 have passed the chain or begun the duties in camp. 
 
 Every oflBcer, non-commissioned officer, or soldier on duty of the 
 first class, or who is of the next detail for such duty, takes, when 
 relieved, the duty of the second or third class that has fallen to him 
 during that time, unless he has marched fur detachment of more than 
 tweuty-four hours. 
 
 Soldiers march with knapsacks for all duties of the first class; and 
 with arms and equipments complete on all working parties out of camp, 
 unless otherwise ordered. In the cavalrj-, horses arc packed for all 
 mounted service; and dismounted men, and those whose horses are not 
 in order are preferred for the detail for dismounted service. Those 
 who are mounted are never employed on those services if the number 
 of the other class is sufficient. 
 
 Every non-commissioned officer and soldier in the cavalry detailed 
 for dismounted service must, before he marches, take to the first ser- 
 geant of his troop, or sergeant of his squad, his horse equipments and 
 valise ready jiaiked. In ease of alarm the first sergeant sees that the 
 horses of these men are equipped and led to tlie rendezvous. 
 
 In the field, artillerymen are not called upon for any duty outside 
 their own batteries or camps. 
 
 These rules in regard to the roster apply also to service in garrison. 
 
 DUTIES OF (iUARDS. 
 
 749. Sentinels will be relieved every two hours, unless the state of 
 the weather, or other causes, should make it necessary or proper that it 
 be done at shorter or longer intervals. 
 
 Each relief, before mounting, is inspected by the commander of the 
 guard or of its post. The corporal reports to liim, and presents the old 
 relief on its return. 
 
 The countijiKujii, or watchword, is given to such persons as are enti- 
 tled to pass during the night, and to officers, non-commissioned officers, 
 and sentinels of the guard. Interior guards receive the countersign 
 only when ordered by the commander of the troops. 
 
 The ptirvle is imparted to such officers only as have a right to visit 
 the guards and to make the gr.aud rounds; and to officers commanding 
 guards. 
 
 As soon as the new guard has been marched oflT, the officer of the 
 day will repair to the office of the commanding officer and report for 
 orders. 
 
 The olliccr of the day must see that the officer of the guard is fur- 
 nished with the parole and countersign before rdieat. 
 
 Tie officer of the day visits the guards during the day, at such times 
 
4fifi MANUAL FOn VOLUXTEERS AND MILTTIA. 
 
 «s he may deem ncce5?ary, iiiul makes his r'unuls at ni^ht at least onoo 
 aftiT twelve o'clock. 
 
 Upon beinj; relieved, the olficer of the day will iiiiiko such romurkij 
 in the report of the otiicer of the guard as cirfumstanees roi.|uire, and 
 present the same at head-quarters. 
 
 Commaudcrs of guards leaving their posts to visit their sentinels, or 
 on other iluty, are to mention their intention and the probable time of 
 their absence to the next in command. 
 
 The olFicers are to remain constantly at their guards, except while 
 visiting their sentinels or necessarily engaged elsewhere on their proper 
 duty. 
 
 Neither oIlicerA-nor soldiers are to take off thjir clothing or accou - 
 trenients while they are on guard. 
 
 The otiicer of the guard must see that the eounter.=ign is duly com- 
 muuicate<l to the sentinels a little before twilight. 
 
 AVheu a fire breaks out, or any alarm is raised in a garrison, all 
 guards are to be immediately under arms. 
 
 Inexperienced otlicers are put on guard as supernumeraries, for the 
 purpose of instruction. 
 
 Sentinels will not take orders, or allow themselves to be relieved, 
 except by an oflicer or non-commissioned otTiecr of their guard or 
 party, the otiicer of the day, or the commanding ofR'.'er; in which case 
 the orders will be immediately notified to the commander of the guard 
 by the oiriccr giving them. 
 
 Sentinels will report every broaeli of orders or regulations thoy are 
 instructed to enforce. 
 
 Sentinels must keep themselves on the alert, observing everything 
 that takes place within sight and hearing of their post. They will 
 carry their arms habitually at support, or on either shoulder, but will 
 never quit them. In wet weather, if there be uo sentry-box, they will 
 secure arms. 
 
 No sentinel shall quit his post or hjld conversation not necessary to 
 the proper disdiarge of his duty. 
 
 All persons, of whatever rank in the service, are required to observe 
 respect toward sentinels. 
 
 In case of disorder, a sentinel must -jail out the (jiiard; and if a tire 
 takes place, he must cry — ''Fire.'" adding the number of his post. If, 
 in cither case, the danger be groat, he must discharge iiis firelock 
 before calling out. 
 
 It is the duty of a sontiuel to repeat all calls made from posts more 
 distant from the main body of the guard than his own, and no senti- 
 nel will be posted so distant as not to be heard by the guard, either 
 directly or through other sentiuels. 
 
HONORS PAID BY TFIt; TP.OOrS, ETC. 467 
 
 Sentinels will halt, come to attention, and pi-nne-nt <irms to jieneral 
 and field oflicers, to the ofTicer of the day, and to the commandinj; ofR- 
 cer of the post. To all other officers they will carry nrma. 
 
 When a sentinel, in his sentry^-box. sees an officer approaching, he 
 will stand at attention, and as the officer passes will salute him by 
 bringing the left hand briskly to the musket, as high as the right 
 shoulder. 
 
 The sentinel at any post of the guard, when he sees any body of 
 troops, or an officer entitled to oompliraent approach, must call : "Turn 
 out the (juarrl," and announce who approaches. 
 
 Guards do not turn out as a matter of compliment after sunset; but 
 sentinels will, when officers in uniform approach, pay them proper 
 attention, by facing to the proper front and standing stead3' at shoulder 
 arms. This will be observed until the evening is so far advanced that 
 the sentinels begin challenging. 
 
 After retreat (or the hour appointed by the commanding officer), 
 until broad daylight, a sentinel challenges every person who approaches 
 him, taking at the same time the position of arms port. He will suffer 
 no person to come nearer than within reach of his bayonet until the 
 person has given the countersign. 
 
 A sentinel in challenging will call out — '• 117i« comes there ? " If 
 answered — "Friend, with the countersign," and he be instructed to pass 
 persons with the countersign, he will reply — ''Adrance, friend, with 
 the countersif/n." If answered — "Friends,'' he will reply — "Halt, 
 friends ; advance one, with the countersign." If answered — "Relief," 
 "Patrol," or "Grand rounds," he will reply — ''Halt. Advance ser- 
 geant (or corporal), with the countersign," and satisfy himself that the 
 party is what it represents itself to be. If ho have no authority to 
 pass persons with the countersign, if the wrong countersign be given, 
 or if the persons have not the countersign, he will cause them to stand, 
 and call — '^Corporal of the t/uard." 
 
 In the daytime, when the sentinel before the guard sees the officer of 
 the daj' approach, be will call — "Turn out the guard, officer of the day." 
 Tlie guard will be paraded, and salute with presented arms. 
 
 When any person approaches a p )st of the guard at night, the 
 sentinel before the post, after challenging, causes him to halt until 
 examined by a non-commissioned officer of the guard. If it be the 
 officer of the day, or any other officer entitled to inspect the guard and 
 to make the rounds, the non-commissioned officer will call — "Turn out 
 the guard," when the guard will be paraded at shoulder arms, and the 
 officer of the guard, if he thinks necessary, may demand the counter- 
 sign and parole. 
 
 The officer of the dav. wishinc; to make the rounds, will take an 
 
468 
 
 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEKRS AND MILITIA. 
 
 escort of a non-commissioned olliccr and two men. AVhcn tlie rounds 
 are challenged by a .sentinel, the ser-jeant will answer — "(imiid 
 rouiiils," and the sentinel will reply — "Halt, (jraiid louinls. Aihtiwe, 
 tergcaiil, with Ihe couiilemiijit." Upun which the sergeant advances and 
 gives the countersign. The sentinel will ihen cry — "Adrauce ronndt," 
 and stand at a shmilder until they have passed. 
 
 When the sentinel before the guard challenges, and is answered — 
 "O'raiid rounds," he will rc\Ay — ''Unit, gniiid ruunda. Turn out the 
 guard; grand rounds." Upon which the guard will be drawn up at 
 shoulder arms. The officer commanding the guard will then order a 
 sergeant and two men to advance; when within ten paces, the sergeant 
 challenges. The sergeant of the grand rounds answers — "Grand 
 rounds." TBe sergeant of the guard replies — '-Adrance, sergeant, with 
 the countersign." The Sergeant of the rounds advances alone, gives the 
 countersign, and returns to his round. The sergeant of the guard calls 
 to his officer — ^'The counterxign is right," on which the officer of the 
 guard calls — ^'Adrnnre, rounds." The officer of the rounds then 
 advances alone, the guard stanaing at shoulder arms. The officer of 
 the rounds passes along the front of the guard to the officer, who keeps 
 his post on the right, and gives him the parole, lie then examines the 
 guard, orders back his escort, and, taking a new one. proceeds in the 
 same manner to other guards. 
 
 All material instructions given to a sentinel on post by persons en- 
 titled to make grand rounds ought to be prouiptly notified to the 
 commander of the guard. 
 
 Any general officer, or the commander of a post or garrison, n)ay 
 visit the guards of his command, and go the grand rounds, and be 
 received in the same manner as prescribed for the officer of the day. 
 
 FOUM OK GUARD REPORT. 
 
 Report of a Guiin) mounted at , on the . and relieved on the . 
 
 Paroi.r. 
 
 a 
 s 
 
 13 
 
 a 
 
 V 
 
 a) 
 as 
 
 ■i 
 
 c 
 c 
 
 = 
 
 a 
 
 01 
 
 o 
 H 
 
 6 
 
 £ 
 
 be 
 
 bo 
 
 < 
 
 A 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 RTICLl 
 CHAR( 
 
 1 
 
 :s ] 
 
 N 
 
 Received the 
 foregoing ar- 
 ticles. 
 
 1 
 
 Coi^NTKRSICiN. 
 
 
 
 A. B , 
 
 Lieut. iHt In- 
 lautry. 
 
 Detail. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
HONORS PAID BY THE TROOPS, ETC. 
 
 469 
 
 LIST OF THE GUAKD. 
 
 Reliefs, and whex Posted. 
 
 Wheeb 
 
 
 Ist Relief 
 
 2(1 relief. 
 
 i 3d Relief. 
 
 1 
 
 M 
 
 From — to — and 
 
 From — to — 
 
 ' From — to — ' 
 
 
 
 — to — . 
 
 .and — to — . 
 
 and — to — . 
 
 Posted. 
 
 
 No. 
 
 Name. 
 
 Co. 
 A 
 
 Rt. 1 
 
 Name. 
 
 Co. 
 D 
 
 Rt. 
 
 3d 
 
 Name 
 
 Co. 
 G 
 
 Rt. 
 
 8th 
 
 
 ■ 1 
 
 CD. 
 
 I. J. 
 
 0. P. 
 
 Guard-house. 
 
 
 2 
 
 E. F. 
 
 B 
 
 4Mi 
 
 K. L. 
 
 E 
 
 2d 
 
 Q.R. 
 
 H 
 
 9th 
 
 Magazine. { 
 
 
 3 
 
 G. H. 
 
 C 
 
 6th 
 
 1 
 
 M. N. 
 
 F 
 
 5th 
 
 8. T. 
 
 1 
 
 I 
 
 10th 
 
 Qnar. Store. 
 
 
 1 
 
 Sergeant W. V., Co. A. 1st Artillery. 
 
 Serg't Guard. 
 
 
 2 
 
 Corporal W. .\.. Co. B. 1st Infantry. 
 
 Corp'l " 
 
 
 3 
 
 Corporal Y. Z.. Co. C. 3(1 Infantry. 
 
 
 
 LIST OF PRISONERS. 
 
 
 Names. 
 
 a 
 t 
 B 
 o 
 
 1 
 
 "5) 
 
 o 
 
 Confined. 
 
 Charges. 
 
 Skntercbs. 
 
 
 No. 
 
 When. 
 
 By whom. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 6 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 A. B. C, 
 Lieut. 
 
 ■ Regiment , 
 
 Commanding the Guard. 
 
 GUARDS. 
 
 750. Guards, in time of war, are bodies of men whose duties are to 
 secure an army or place from being surprised by an enemy. 
 
 By a proper disposition of the guards, and bj' a faithful discharge of 
 the duties imposed upon tbem, a whole army can at all times, and 
 
470 MA.NUAL FOR VOLUNTKhRS AM) MILITIA. 
 
 under nil fircum.>-tnncef!, be kept in reu<linc.-s for action ; the larger 
 part of tbe nrmy, even in purMiit of an enemy and momentarily 
 expecting to meet him, miiy with safety seek that repose which is so 
 necessary to keep up the physical energies of the forces ; and as the 
 guards gcneriilly constitute hut a comparatively small portion of the 
 command, and are frcqucntlj' relieved, no soldier is likely to be called 
 upon to endure nn amount of fatigue greater than a man in his vigor 
 ought to bear. 
 
 In order that the guards of an army may protect it properly, they 
 must be so posted as to cover both the front and flanks of the position, 
 and at the same time have possession of all the avenues of approach to 
 it. The ordinary arrangement of guards is such that, no matter how 
 far the outer line may lie from the main body, it may rally from point 
 to point if driven in by an advancing enemy, gaining strength each 
 time, until it finally reaches the main body. Thus, even the most 
 advanced posts need never be cut oflf, while it would be impossible for 
 an enemy to surprise the main body. 
 
 The usual arrangement consists of two or three lines of posts, within 
 relief of each other and extending around the main body as a centre, 
 the exterior line throwing out a chain of sentinels in its front, and 
 so distributed as to prevent the approach of any one without being 
 seen. 
 
 751. The inner line consists of what arc denominated police guards ; 
 there is a police guard for each regiment, which is posted within the 
 regimental camj) (see camp of an infantry regiment). These guards 
 are of sufticient strength to supply a chain of sentinels along the front 
 and rear of the regiment, connecting it with the regiments on the right 
 and left, thus forming a chain of sentinels close to and all around the 
 camp. 
 
 The next line consists of a number of strong detachments, termed 
 pickets; they are posted upon the main avenues of approach to the 
 position, and serve as supports to the exterior lines, upon which they 
 rally when driven in by the enemy. 
 
 Next beyond the pickets is the line of yrnnd (jnai-ds, and of course 
 occupying a wider circumference; they are posted in the most favor- 
 able position for oUserving the enemy, and throw out the extreme 
 line, called the line of outposts. The line of grand guards, while 
 supported by the pickets, in turn furnishes support to the outposts 
 when necessary. 
 
 Besides these various lines, patroli are kept up between the various 
 posts, to keep the one informed of the condition of the other; and, 
 also, between the outposts and the extreme lino of sentinels, to see that 
 the duties of the latter are properly performed. 
 
IIOiNORS PAID BY THE TROOPt?, ETC. 471 
 
 This iirrnngement secures positions favorable for observaiion and 
 mutual support. 
 
 "The duties of the outpist.'*, aud of tlie grand guards which form 
 their supjiorts, are strictly those of observation. If attacked, they 
 offer no resistance further than to enable them to feel the enemy per- 
 fectly, and never lose sight of him. The task of holding the enemy 
 in check by a vigorous resistance, so as to procure sullicieut time for 
 the main body to make its disposition for battle, is consigned to the 
 pickets." — Mahan. 
 
 Police Guard. 
 
 752. The police guard is detailed every day from each regiment, and 
 consists of two sergeants, three corporals, two musicians, and men 
 enough to furnish the necessary sentinels and patrols. The men are 
 taken from all the companies, from each in proportion to its strength. 
 
 The guard is commanded by a lieutenant, under the supervision of a 
 captaiu as regimental ollicer of the day. It furnishes ten sentinels at 
 the camp; one over the arms of the guard; one at the colonel's tent; 
 three on the color front; one over the colors; three fifty paces in rear 
 of the Held officers' tents; and one on each flauk, between it and the 
 next regiment. If it is a flank regiment, one more sentinel is posted 
 on the outer flank. 
 
 An advanced post is detached from the police guard, composed of a 
 sergeant, a corporal, a drummer, and nine men to furnish sentinels and 
 the guard over the prisoners. The men are the first of the guard roster 
 from each company. The men of the advanced post must not leave it 
 under any pretext. Their meals are sent to the post. The advanced 
 post furnishes three sentinels; two a few paces in front of the post, 
 opposite the right and left wing of the regiment, posted so as to see as 
 far as possible to the front, and one over the arms. 
 
 In the cavalry, dismounted men are employed in preference on the 
 police guard. The mounted men on guard are sent in succession, a 
 part at a time, to groom their horses. The advanced post is always 
 formed of mounted men. 
 
 In each company, a corporal has charge of the stable guard. Ilis 
 tour begins at retreat and ends at morning stable-call. The stable 
 guard is large enough to relieve the men on post every two hours. 
 They sleep in their tents, aud are called by the corporal when wanted. 
 At retreat he closes the streets of the camp with cords, or uses other 
 precautions to prevent the escape of loose horses. 
 
 The officer of the day is charged with the order and cleanliness of 
 the caniji; a fatigue is furnished to him when the number of prisoners 
 
472 MANUAL F<tR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 is insufficient to clean the cnuip. He has the calls beaten by the druiu- 
 mer of the guard. 
 
 The police guard and the advanced post pay the same honors as 
 other guards. They take arms when an armed body approaches. 
 
 The sentinel over tlie colors has orders not to permit them to be 
 moved except in the presence of an escort; to let no one touch them 
 but the ci)liir-l)earcr, or the sergeant of the police guard when he is 
 accompanied by two armed men. 
 
 The sentinels on the color-front permit no soldier to take arms from 
 the stack, except bj' order of some officer, or a non-commissioned olTi- 
 cer of the guard. The sentinel at the colonel's tent has orders to 
 warn him, day or night, of anj* unusual movement in or about the 
 camp. 
 
 The sentinels on the front, flanks, and rear see that no soldier leaves 
 camp with horse or arms unless conducted by a non-conimis'sioned offi- 
 cer. They prevent non-commissioned officers and soldiers from pass- 
 ing out at night, except to go to the sinks, and mark if they return. 
 They arrest, at any time, suspicious persons prowling about the camp, 
 and, at night, every one who attempts to enter, even the soldiers of 
 other corps. Arrested persons are sent to the officer of the guard, who 
 sends them, if necessary, to the officer nf the day. 
 
 The sentinels on the front of the advanced post have orders to per- 
 mit neither non-commissioned officers nor soldiers to pass the line 
 without reporting at the advanced post, to warn the advanced post of 
 the approach of any armed body, and to arrest all suspicious persons. 
 The sergeant sends persons so arrested to the officer of the guard, and 
 warns him of the approach of anj' armed body. 
 
 The sentinel over the arms at (ho advanced post guards the prisoners 
 and keeps sight of them, and suffers no one to converse with them with- 
 out permission. They are only permitted to go to the sinks one at a 
 time, and under a sentinel. 
 
 If any one is to be passed out of camp at night the officer of the 
 guard sends him under escort to the advanced post, and the sergeant of 
 the post has him passed over the chain. 
 
 At retreat^ the officer of the guard has the roll of his guard called, 
 and inspects arms, to see that they are loaded and in order; and visits 
 the advanced posts for the same purpose. The sergeant of the police 
 guard, accompanied by two armed soldiers, folds the colors and lays 
 them on the trestle in rear of the arms. He sees that the sutler's stores 
 are then closed and the men leave them, and that the kitchen fires are 
 put out at the appointed hour. 
 
 The officer of the day satisfies himself frcquentlj' during the night 
 of the vigilance of the police guard and advanced post. He prescribes 
 
 J 
 
HONORS PAID BY THE TROOPS, ETC. 473 
 
 patrols and round? to be made hy the officer and non-eommissioned 
 officers of the guard. The officer of the guard orders them when he 
 thinks necessary. He visits the sentinels frequently. 
 
 At reveille the police guard takes arms : the officer of the guard 
 inspects it and the advanced post. The sergeant replants the colors 
 in place. At retreat and reveille the advanced post takes arms ; the 
 sergeant makes his report to the officer of the guard when he visits the 
 post. 
 
 When necessary the camp is covered at night with small outposts, 
 forming a double chain of sentinels. These posts are under the orders 
 of the commander of the police guard, and are visited by his patrols 
 and rounds. 
 
 The officer of the guard makes his report of his tour of service, in- 
 cluding the advanced post, and sends it, after the guard is marched off", 
 to the officer of the day. 
 
 When the regiment marches the men of the police guard return to 
 their companies, except those of the advanced post. In the cavalry, 
 at the sound hoot and saddle, the -officer of the guard sends one half 
 the men to saddle and pack; when the regiment assembles all the men 
 join it. 
 
 When the camping party precedes the regiment, and the new police 
 guard marches with the camping party, the guard, on reaching the 
 camp, forms in line thirty paces in front of the centre of the ground 
 marked for the regiment. The officer of the guard furnishes the senti- 
 nels recjuired by the commander of tiie camping party. The advanced 
 post takes its station. 
 
 The advanced post of the old police guard takes charge of the pris- 
 oners on the march, and marches, bayonets fixed, at the centre of the 
 regiment. Ou reaching camp it turns over the prisoners to the new 
 advanced post. 
 
 PICKETS. 
 
 75.3. The detail for the pickets is made daily, and is composed of a 
 lieutenant, two sergeants, four corporals, a drummer, and about forty 
 privates for each regiment. For a smaller force the picket is in pro- 
 portion to the strength of the detachment. The duty of the pickets is 
 to hold the enemy iu cheek, and the points which they take up should, 
 if possible, be susceptible of good defence : such as villages, defiles, 
 etc.; when these advantages do not present themselves temporary ob- 
 stacles, such as abatis, etc.. should be resorted to. The points occupied 
 by the pickets should be about midway between the line of outposts and 
 the position of the main body. 
 
 Small posts should be thrown forward by the pickets, between them 
 40 
 
■474 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 and the linn of grand guards. These give greater security to the pick- 
 ets, and furnish support to tiie grand guard. 
 
 GRAND GUARDS AND OUTPOSTS. 
 
 764. The numbers, strength, and position of grand guards are regu- 
 lated by the commanders of brigades; in detached corps, by the com- 
 manding officer. When it can be done the grand guards of infantry 
 and cavalry are combined, the cavalry furnishing the advanced senti- 
 nels. When the cavalry is weak the grand guards are infantry, but 
 furnished with a few cavalry soldiers to get and carry intelligence of 
 the enemy. 
 
 The strength of the grand guard of a brigade will depend on the 
 strength of the regiments, the nature of the countr}', the position of 
 the enemy, and the disposition of the inhabitants. It is usually com- 
 manded by a captain. 
 
 Under the supervision of the generals of divisions and brigades the 
 grand guards are especially under tjie direction of a field officer of the 
 day, in each brigade. In case of necessity captains may bo added to 
 the roster of lieutenant-colonels and majors, for this detail. 
 
 Grand guards usually mount at the same time as the other guards, 
 but may mount before daybreak if the general of brigade thinks it 
 necessary to double the outposts at this time. In this case they assem- 
 ble and march without noise, and during the march throw out scouts ; 
 this precaution should always be taken in the lirst posting of a grand 
 guard. The doubling of guards weakens the corps and fatigues the 
 men, and should seldom be resorted to, and never when preparing to 
 march or tight. 
 
 755. A grand guard is conducted to its post in the first instance by 
 the field oliicer of the day, guided by one of the statf ollicers who 
 accompanied the general in his reconnoissance. After the post has 
 been established the commander sends to the field oliiccr of the day, 
 when necessary, a soldier of the guard to guide the relieving guard to 
 the post, lie also sends to him in the evening a corporal or trusty man 
 of the guard for the note containing the parole and countersign, and 
 sends them before dark to the outposts. lie will not suffer his guard to 
 be relieved e.\cept by a guard of the brigade, or by special orders from 
 competent authority. 
 
 If there is no pass to bo observed or defended the grand guards are 
 placed near the centre of the ground they are to observe, on sheltered, 
 and, if possible, high ground, the better to conceal their strength and 
 observe the enemj'; they ought not to be placed near the edge of a 
 Wood. When, during the day, they are phfed very nenr, or in sight of 
 the enemy, they fall liaek at night on juirts .seleitod liirther tj ihe rear. 
 
HONORS PAID BY THE TROOPS, ETC. 475 
 
 After a grand guard is posted the first care of the commander and of 
 the field officer of the day is to get news of the enemy ; then to recon- 
 noitre his position and the roads, bridges, fords, and defiles. This 
 reconnoissance determines the force and position of the outposts and 
 their sentinels day and night. These posts, when of infantr^^, should 
 be about 200 paces in front of the line of grand guards, and when of 
 cavalry from 600 to 800; and are commanded by officers or non-com- 
 missioned officers, according to their importance. Cavalry posts may 
 be relieved every four or eight hours. 
 
 The commander of a grand guard receives detailed instructions 
 from the general and field officers of the day of the brigade, and 
 instructs the commanders of the outposts as to their duties and the 
 arrangements for the defence or retreat. The commanders of grand 
 guards may, in urgent cases, change the positions of the outposts. 
 If the outposts are to change their position at night, thej' wait until 
 the grand guard has gotten its position and darkness hides their 
 movements from the enemy ; then march .■silently and rapidly under 
 charge of an officer. 
 
 In detached corps small posts of picked men are at night sent for- 
 ward on the roads by which the enemy may attack or turn the position. 
 They watch the forks of the roads, keep silence, conceal themselves, 
 light no fires, and often change place. They announce tlic approach of 
 an enemy by signals agreed upon, and retreat, by routes examined 
 during the day, to places selected, and rejoin the guard at daybreak. 
 
 Grand guards have special orders in each case, and the fidlowing in 
 all cases: to inform the nearest posts and the field officer of the day, or 
 the general of brigade, of the march and movements of the enemy, and 
 of the attacks they receive or fear; to examine every person passing 
 near the post, particularly those coming from without; to arrest suspi- 
 cious persons, and all soldiers and camp-followers who try to pass out 
 without permission, and to send to the general, unless otherwise direct- 
 ed, all country people who come in. 
 
 75(5. All outguards stand to arms at night on the approach of patrols, 
 rounds, or other parties; the sentinel over the arms will call them out. 
 
 The sentinels and videttes are placed on points from which they can 
 see farthest, taking care not to break their connection with each other 
 or with their posts. They are concealed from the enemy as much as 
 possible by walls, or trees, or elevated ground. It is generally even of 
 more advantage not to be seen than to see far. They should not be 
 placed near covers, where the enemy ma_v capture them. A sentinel 
 should always be ready to fire; videttes carrj' their carbines or pistols 
 in their hands. A sentinel must be sure of the presence of an enemy 
 before he fires ; once satisfied of that, he must fire, though all defence 
 
476 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 on his part bo useles?, as the safety of the post may depend on it. 
 Sentinels fire on all persons deserting to the enemy. 
 
 If a sentinel's post must bo where he cannot commnnieate with the 
 guard, a corporal and three men are detached for it, or tlie sentinels 
 are doubled, tiiat one may communicate with the guard. During the 
 day communication may be made by signals, such as raising a cap or 
 handkerchief. At night sentinels are placed on low ground, the better 
 to see objects against the sky. 
 
 To lessen the dut3' of rounds, and keep more men on the alert at 
 night, sentinels on outposts are relieved everj' hour. To prevent senti- 
 nels from being surprised, it is sometimes well to precede the counter- 
 sign by signals, such as striking the musket with the hand, striking 
 the hands together, etc. 
 
 On the approach of any one at night, the outpost sentinel orders — 
 "Halt ! " If the order is not obeyed, after being repeated once, he fires. 
 If obeyed, he calls — " ll'Ao goes there f" If answered — "Rounds," or 
 "Patrol," he says — "Advance, with the coitnterai'i/n." If more than one 
 advance at the same time, or the person who advances fails to give the 
 countersign or signal agreed on, the sentinel fires and falls back on his 
 guard. The sentinel over the arms, as soon as his hail is answered, 
 turns out the guard, and the corporal goes to reconnoitre. When it is 
 desirable to hide the position of the sentinel from the enemy, the hail 
 is replaced by signals; the sentinels give the signal, and those ap- 
 prnaching the counter signal. 
 
 AVith raw troops, or when the light troops of the enemy are numer- 
 ous and active, and when the couutrj' is broken or wooded, the night 
 stormy or dark, sentinels should bo doubled. In this case, while one 
 watches, the other, called a Jlying sentiiul, moves about, examining the 
 paths and hollows. 
 
 The commanders of grand guards visit the sentinels often; cliango 
 their position when necessary; make them repeat their orders; teach 
 tlicin under what circumstances and at what signals to retire, and par- 
 ticularly not to fall back directly on their guard, if pursued, but to 
 lead the enemy in a circuit. 
 
 757. At niglit half the men of the grand guard ofT ])ost watch under 
 arms, while the rest lie down, arms by their sides. The horses are 
 always bridled ; the horsemen hold the reins, and must not sleep. An 
 liour before break of day, infantry grand guards stand to arms and 
 cavalry mount. At the outposts some of the infantry are all night 
 under arms, some of the cavalry on horseback. 
 
 The commander of a grand guard regulates the uumbcrs, the hours, 
 and the march of patrols and rounds according to the strength of his 
 command and the necessity for precaution; and, accompanied by those 
 
HONORS PAID BY THE TROOPS, -ETC. 477 
 
 who are to command the patrols and rounds daring the night, he will 
 reconnoitre all the routes thej' are to follow. • Patrols and rounds 
 march slowly, in silence, and with great precaution : halt frequently to 
 listen and examine the ground. The rounds consist of an officer or 
 non-commissioned officer, and two or three men. Toward the break of 
 day the patrols ought to be more frequent, and sent to greater dis- 
 tances. They examine the hollow ways and ground likely to conceal 
 an enemy, but with great caution, to avoid being cut off" or engaged in 
 an unequal combat ; if they meet the enemy, they fire and attempt to 
 stop his march. While the patrols are out, the outposts are under 
 arms. 
 
 Cavalry patrols should examine the country to a greater distance 
 than infantry, and report to the infantry guard everything they observe. 
 The morning patrols and scouts do not return until broad daylight; and 
 when they return the night sentinels are withdrawn and the posts for 
 the day resumed. 
 
 On their return, commanders of pjvtrols report in regard to the ground 
 and everything they have observed of the movements of the enemy or 
 of his posts, and the commander of the grand guard reports to the field 
 officers of the day. The fires of grand guards should be hidden by a 
 wall, ditch, or other screen. To deceive the enemy, fires are sometimes 
 made on unoccupied ground. Fires are not permitted at small posts 
 liable to surprise. 
 
 If a body of troops attempt to enter the camp at night, unless their 
 arrival has been announced, or the commander is known to, or is the 
 bearer of a written order to the commander of the grand guard, he 
 stops them, and sends the commander under escort to the field olficer of 
 the day, and at the same time warns the posts near him. 
 
 Bearers of flags are not permitted to pass the outer chain of senti- 
 nels; tiieir faces are turned from the post or army; if necessary, their 
 eyes are bandaged; a non-commissioned officer stjiys with them to 
 prevent indiscretion on the part of sentinels. 
 
 The commander of the guard receipts for dispatches, and sends them 
 to the field officer of the day or general of brigade, and dismisses the 
 bearer; but if he has discovered what ought to be concealed from the 
 enemy, he is detained as long as necessary. 
 
 Deserters are disarmed at the outposts, and sent to the commander 
 of the grand guard, who gets from them all the information he can 
 concerning the enemy. If man}' come at night, they are received 
 c(iiitioiis/i/, a few nt a time. They are sent in the morning to the field 
 ofileer of the day, or to the nearest post or camp, to be conducted to 
 the general of brigade. All suspected persons are secreted by the com- 
 manders of the outposts. 
 
478 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 Article XIII. 
 
 DUTIES OF CAPTAINS— COMPANIES— DUTIES IN 
 CAMP AND GARRISON, ETC. 
 
 758. Captains or commanders of companies fill one of the most 
 important stations in the service, when they are viewed in relation to 
 the direct influence they exercise upon the soldiery ; to them attaches 
 the high responsibility of the instruction, good order, etheiency, and 
 discipline of their companies; and no one should be willing to accept 
 the post who is not qualified, or ready to qualifj' himself for a faithful 
 discharge of all the duties of the o(fice. 
 
 It is the duty of every captain to make himself familiar with tactics, 
 or at least so much of it as will enable him to command his company 
 properly in every situation ; and to become perfectly acquainted with 
 its interior management. 
 
 In the case of a vacancy in the office of cai)tain, or in his absence, 
 the command of the company devolves on the officer next in rank. 
 Captains should require their lieutenants to assist them in the perform- 
 ance of all company duties, the knowledge thus acquired being essential 
 to every company officer. 
 
 In the volunteers and militia, the captain and lieutenant arc elected 
 by the company after its organization ; the non-commissioned officers 
 arc either elected in the same way or are selected by the captain. 
 
 759. Arms and accoutrements are issued by order of the adjutant- 
 general to volunteer companies after their organization, and to such of 
 the militia as the Governor may deem it proper to arm. Before a vol- 
 unteer company can receive its arms, the captain must procure the 
 following certificate from the colonel of the regiment to which the 
 company is attached : 
 
 Form of Inspection Return to enable a Volunteer Company to 
 receive Public Anns. 
 
 I, A. 15., Commandant of the Regiment of Virginia Militia, 
 
 do hereby certify that on the day of , I mustered and in- 
 spected the (troop of cavalry, company of artillery, company of light 
 
 infantry or riflemen, as the fact may be) commanded by Captain 
 
 , (attached to or belonging to, as the fact may be) the said 
 
DUTIES OF CAPTAINS — COMPANIES, ETC. 479 
 
 regiment; at which muster and inspection there were of the said com- 
 pany men, fully and completely uniformed, in the mode prescribed 
 
 by law. 
 
 Given tiiider my hand, this duy of , 18 — . * 
 
 760. The militia laws of many of the states permit volunteer com- 
 panies to choose their own uniforms; all experience proves that the 
 plainest and simplest uuiform is the best for service. It is a mistake 
 to suppose that handsome and expensive uniforms are to be preferred; 
 the best uniform is that which combines comfort, appropriateness, and 
 durability. 
 
 Plain and substantial overcoats, with capes, should always form a 
 part of the uniform; and some simple fatigue dress, to be worn when 
 off duty, or on fatigue, will always be found to be a great saving to the 
 uniform. 
 
 Each man of the company should be provided with a knapsack for 
 his clothing, a haversack for his rations, and one or two thick blankets. 
 In addition, there should be one bedsack for every two men, to be made 
 of substantial linen or cotton goods: it should be made about six and 
 a half feet long, by three and a half feet wide, .=ewed up at both ends, 
 and having a slit in the centre, ])rovided with strings to tie it close, so 
 as to prevent the straw working out. The haversack is made of white 
 linen or cotton duck: it is worn from the right shoulder to the left side; 
 it should be large enough to contain at least three days rations of bread 
 and meat, and would be much improved by having a small tin box in 
 it large enough to contain the meat ration. (Fig. 171 is a representa- 
 tion of the haversack.) The ctmpany should at all times be supplied 
 with tents, etc., for service in the tield; together with the requisite 
 number of camp kettles, tin table furniture, etc. 
 
 761. There are several fcrms of tents — the common tent, covering an 
 area of about seven feet square, and capable of accommodating from 
 five to six men : the wall tent, usually used by officers, about nine feet 
 square, and having its roof protected hy a second piece of canvas, 
 known as the"y/y;" the Sibley tent, which is conical in shape, has 
 but a single central pole, with an arrangement at the top to admit of a 
 fire in the centre for cooking .purposes, or for comfort in cold weather, 
 and sufliciently large to accommodate from twelve to fifteen men; and 
 the shelter tent of the French, The Sibley tent is in general use in the 
 C. S. service. Fig. 172 is a representation of the Sibley tent, and fig. 
 1 73 of the shelter tent. The latter is invaluable in a summer campaign 
 when transportation is limited. 
 
 A new invention has been lately introduced into the C. S. ^^ervice, 
 
 *Tbis is the Virginia form; each state has its own form. 
 
480 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 whioh promisos to he very useful : it is called the tent knaivack, and 
 serves the purpose of a kn:ip.<ack on the march, and a shelter tent when 
 in camp. It is a piece of gutta-percha, five feet three inches long, and 
 three feet eight inches wide, with double edges on one side, and brass 
 studs anil button holes along two edges, and straps and buckles on the 
 fourth; with two sticks, three feet eight inches long, by one and a half 
 inches in diameter, and a small cord. When used as a knapsack, the 
 clothing is packed in a cotton bag, and the gutta-percha sheet is folded 
 around it. lapping at the ends. The clothing is thus protcclcd by two 
 or three thicknesses of gutta-percha; the knapsack adapts itself to the 
 size of the contents, so that a compact and portable bundle can be 
 made, whether the "kit" be entire or not: and witli the cotton bag, it 
 forms a convenient, commodious, and desirable receptacle fur all a sol- 
 dier's clothing and necessaries. (Fig. 174.) 
 
 The stnds and eyelets along two edges of the tent knapsack are for 
 the purpose of fastening a number of them together, and thus making 
 a large sheet which may be used as a shelter tent. When used, the 
 sheet is to be stretched on a cord supported by two sticks, or by two 
 rifles, muskets, or carbines, and pinned down at the sides with small 
 pins. The sheet of four knapsacks is ten feet six inches long, and seven- 
 feet four inches wide, and, when pitched on a rope four feet fo\ir inches 
 above the ground, covers a horizontal space of six feet six inches wide, 
 and seven feet four inches long, which will accommodate from five to 
 seven men. (Fig. 173.) Or four of these knapsacks may be united; 
 an edge pinned to the ground, and the opposite one secured to a pole 
 facing a fire, forming a half-fuced camp, as shown in Fig. 175. 
 
 762. Every man should be provided with the following articles at all 
 times, such as are not on the person to bo kept in the knapsack: 
 
 Two woollen under.shirts. 
 
 Two pairs thick cotton drawers. 
 
 Four pairs woollen socks. 
 
 Two pairs stout shoes, with broa<l, thick soles, for footmen. 
 
 One ])air boots, and one pair shoes, for horsemen. 
 
 Towels, handkerchiefs, comb and brush, and tooth-brush. Stout 
 linen thread, large needles, a bit of wax, a few buttons, paper of pins, 
 and a thimlilo, all contained in a small buckskin or stout cloth bag. 
 
 In additi m, every man should hi supplied with a tin jdate. quart 
 cup, with the handle well riveted on, so as to serve the siddier for 
 making his cofTce. etc., in case of necessity, as well as for an ordinary 
 drinking cup, knife, fork, and spoon. The plate may be carried in 
 the knapsack, or on the outside of it under the straps, or all tlie plates 
 of the company may be packed in the camp-kettles: the cup may be 
 carried on the waist belt or on the knapsack strap, and the knife, fork, 
 
DUTIES OF CAPTAIxVS — COMPAXIES, ETC. 481 
 
 and spoon should be carried in a leathern sheath which slips on to the 
 waist belt, to be worn in front, and on the left of the centre of the 
 body. Fig. 176 shows the manner of arranging the sheath. 
 
 Every company should be provided with a small chest, partitioned 
 off into several compartments, and large enough to contain a week or 
 ten days issue of the small rations, such as beans, rice, coffee, sugar, 
 salt, etc. The issues of bread, pork, etc., should be transported in the 
 original packages. 
 
 When a militia company is called. into service the captain should, at 
 the earliest possible moment, have it properly uniformed and equipped, 
 and taught how to take care of its arms, clothing, etc.; each man 
 should bo provided with his knapsack, haversack, blanket, knife and 
 fork, spoon, tin plate, and cup. 
 
 Canteens are also necessary in most cases; they arc worn over the 
 haversack. 
 
 76:^. The captain shall cause the men of his company to be num- 
 bered in a regular series, including the non-commissioned oflicers, and 
 divided into several squads, eacli to be put under the charge of a non- 
 commissioned oliiecr. As far as practicable, the men of each squad 
 are quartered together. 
 
 Each of the lieutenants is charged with a squad for the supervision 
 of its order and cleanliness ; and captains should rcijuiro their subal- 
 terns to assist them in the performance of all comjianj' duties. 
 
 The utmost attention should be paid by captains to the cleanlinsss 
 of their men, as to their persons, clothing, arms, accoutrements, and 
 equipments, and also as to their quarters or tents. 
 
 The name of eacu soldier should be labelled on his bunk in quarters, 
 and his company number should be placed against hi* arms and accou- 
 trements. 
 
 The arms are placed in arm-racks, the stoppers in the muzzles, the 
 cocks let down, and the bayonets in their scabbards, the accoutrements 
 suspended over the arm.s, and the swords or sabres, when these aro 
 worn, hung up by the belts on pegs. 
 
 The knapsack of each man should be placed at the foot of his bunk 
 when he is in quarters, packed with his effects, and ready to be slung ; 
 the overcoat rolled, strapped, and placed under the knapsack; the cap 
 on a shelf, and his boots well cleaned. Dirty clothes should be kept in 
 an appropriate part of the knapsack; nothing to be put under the 
 bedding. 
 
 Cooking utensils and table furniture should be clean, and in their 
 appropriate places ; blacking and brushes out of sight ; the fuel in 
 boxes. 
 
 The cleaning up should take place at least once a week. The chiefs 
 41 
 
4h2 MAM.M, K>n VOLLiNTFiKS AM) MILITIA. 
 
 of FCjUfids Fbould caiitc VninkR and bedding to be uvcrbauKid, flonrs 
 cleaned, and aru')?, accoutrfnitnts, etc., all put in order. 
 
 Non-commispioned ofliccrs in charge of squads should bt- bold imme- 
 diattly refp<>iii>ible tint ihcir intn observe what is prescribed above; 
 tbiit they wash tbdr bands and faces duilj' : that ibcy brush or comb 
 their heads and beards; that those who go on duty put their arms, 
 Bccoutrenicnt.s. dress, etc., in the best order. 
 
 C( miuanders <.f ccmpanies should sec that the arms and accoutre- 
 ments in possetsion of the men arc always kept in goi^d order, and 
 that proper care is taken in cleaning them. 
 
 Arms .--hould r.ot be taken to jjieces without permission of an olficer. 
 Bright barrels should be kept clean and free from rust without poli.sh- 
 ing them: tare should be taken not to bruise or bend the barrel. 
 After firing, wash out the bore, wipe it dry, and then pass a bit of 
 cloth, slightly greased, to the bottom. In these operations, a rod 
 of woi d with a loop on one end is to be used in.'^tead of the rammer. 
 The barrel, when not in use, should be closed with a stopper. For 
 exercise, each innn should keep him.'elf jirovided with apiece of solo 
 leather to fit the cap or coiuitersiuk of the hammer, to prevent break- 
 ing the nipple. 
 
 All field pieces in the possession of artillery companies should be 
 kept clean and dry ; their vents frequently examined to see that 
 they are clear; the elevating screw wiped clean, worked, and oiled. 
 When tarpaulins are placed over them, tbej' should occasionally be 
 removed, ibe guns and carriages brut^hed dfl", and, if damp, allowed 
 to dry. 
 
 The implements should all be kept clean and under cover; the har- 
 ness and leather articles should be brushed and greased with uent'a-fuot 
 oil as often as their condition requires it, and, if thcj' have a reddish 
 hue, mix a little lampblack with the oil. First brush the leather, then 
 pass over it a sponge wet with warm water, and apply the oil before 
 the leather is quite dry. 
 
 Arms should not be left loaded in armories, quarters, or tents, or 
 when the men are off duty, except Tiy special orders. The ammunition 
 in the possession of the men should be inspected frequently, and any 
 damaged, wasted, or lost by neglect, sboul(l,be paid for. 
 
 Knajitai'ks should be black ; they should bo marked on the outside 
 with the number of the regiment, and on the in.side with the letter of 
 the company, and the number of the soldier on such part as will 
 readily be seen at inspections. 
 
 Haversacks should bo marked on the flap with the number and name 
 of the regiment, the letter of the company, and the number of the 
 soldier. 
 
DUTIES OF CAPTAINS COMPAMES, ETC. 483 
 
 Both officers and men shonM wear the prcscriVjod unifurm, in camp 
 or garrison. 
 
 In camp or quarters, the olfieers should visit the kitchens daily and 
 inspect the kettles, food, etc., and ut all times carefully attend to the 
 messing and economy of their companies. 
 
 The company rations are usually taken charge of by the orderly 
 sergeant, and is.sued daily to the cooks by whom they are prepared and 
 served to the company. The men of the company serve in turn as 
 cooks, two being the usual number serving at once. When in camp, 
 the men present themselves at meal times to the cooks, who issue to 
 each man in turn his proper allowance ; in garrison or quarters, (he 
 tables are set out and the cooks place each man's ration on his plate, 
 and in his cup, before the company is marched in. 
 
 When not actually in the field the ration is in most ca.«es more than 
 sufficient, so that by care on the part of the orderly sergeant and cooks 
 there is more or less saved on the rations of the company ; this saving 
 is sold for the benefit of the company, and constitutes what is denomi- 
 nated the Company Fund. 
 
 DUTIES IX CAMP AND GARRISON. 
 
 764. The duties in camp and garrison are to be condiicted, as far as 
 practicable, in the same manner and on the same principles. 
 
 The Reveille is the signal for the men to rise and the sentinels to 
 leave off challenging. It is usually sounded at dawn of day, except 
 when the troops are on the march, when the signal may be sounded at 
 a much earlier hour. The men form on their company parade grounds, 
 and as soon as the reveille ceases the rolls are called by the orderly 
 sergeants, superintended by a commissioned officer. 
 
 Immedia'ely after the roll call (after stable duty in the cavalry and 
 light artillery), the tents or quarters should be put in order by the men 
 of the companies, superintended by chiefs of squads; the parades, 
 streets of the camp, etc., are cleaned by the piolice party of the day, in 
 charge of a non-commissioned olliccr, and superintended by the officer 
 of the day. and the guard-house or guard-tent by the guard, or prison- 
 ers, if there are any. 
 
 Breakfnst call is sounded at — o'clock in the morning, and is the 
 signal for breakfast. 
 
 The Troop sounds at — o'clock in the morning, for the purpose of 
 assembling the men for duty, inspection at guard mounting, and 
 morning Sress parade, when the commanding oflScer commands it. 
 
 The Sttrgenn's call is to sound or beat at — o'clock in the morning, 
 when the sick, able to go about, are conducted to the hospital by the 
 
484 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEKllS AM) MILITIA. 
 
 first sergeants of companies, who hand to the surgeon :i list of all tho 
 sick in the coni])auy. 
 
 After tho siirj;con has passeil upon the sick, the first sergeants pro- 
 ceed to make off the morning reports of their companies, which, after 
 being signed by their captains, arc taken to regimental head-iiuartcrs 
 lit firnt Krrgeitnti' call. 
 
 The morning report of the company is made off in a book kept for 
 that purpose, called the nuirnimj report hook, and in accordance with 
 Form No. \. The rulings extend across both pages of the book when 
 open ; the report occupies but a single line each morning, so that if 
 the number of linos are sufficient a single heading will suliiec for tho 
 reports of an entire month. 
 
 The Dhiiicr call is sounded at — o'clock, and is tho signal for 
 dinner. 
 
 The Retreat is sounded at sunset, when there is a roll call and tho 
 orders for the day are read. When the weather permits, there is a 
 dress parade at retreat, and the orders are read out at the close of it. 
 Each regiment or battalion has an indcpendcut parade, commanded 
 by the colonel. 
 
 The Tattoo is sounded at — o'clock in the evening, when the rolls 
 are called ; no soldier is allowed to be out of his tent or ((uarteis after 
 this hour, without special permission. 
 
 In the cavalrj'. Stable calls arc sounded immediately after rereilie, 
 and an hour and a half before retreat ; Water calls at the hours directed 
 by the commanding officer. 
 
 The Drnmmers' call is beaten by the drums of the police guard five 
 minutes before the time of beating the stated calls, when the field music 
 assembles before the colors of their respective regiments, and as soon 
 as the beat begins on the right is taken up along tho line. 
 
 Calls for drills are sounded at such hours as the comniiuuling officer 
 may designate. 
 
 765. Daily duties must be announced in order, and the officers to 
 perform them are detailed according to the rules of the roster. 
 
 The number and rank of the officers for daily duty are to bo regu- 
 lated by the strength and circumstances of the camp or garrison; tho 
 officers detailed for duty should remain in or about the camp or garri- 
 son during their tours of duty. 
 
 Besides tho officers detailed for guard duty, the officers for daily 
 duties in large commands are as follows : 
 
 A General officer of the day for each divi.-^ion ; a Jield officer of the 
 day for each brigade ; and a regimental officer of the day for each 
 regiment. 
 
 In camps or garrisons of one regiment or less, tho officers are as 
 follows : officer of the day and officer of the <jnard. 
 
DUTIES OF CAPTAINS — COMPANIES, ETC. 485 
 
 ; 
 
 The General officer of the flat/ is to superintend tlie regularity and dis- 
 cipline of the camp of the division, visit the guards and outposts, call 
 out and inspect tbc guards as often and at such times as he thinks 
 proper; to receive all reports of guards, and make immediate commu- 
 nication of any extraordinary circumstances to his commanding olficcr, 
 or to the Gcneral-in-chief. 
 
 The Field officer of the dai/ has the immediate superintendence of 
 the camp of the brigade ; ho is to bo present at the mounting and 
 dismounting of the brigade or grand guards; he is to call them out 
 to inspect them; to order such patrols, posts, and outposts as may be 
 necessary; to see that the grand guard is vigilant, that none are 
 absent, and that their arms and accoutrements arc in order; that the 
 officers and non-commissioned officers are acquainted with their duty, 
 and that the sentries arc properly posted, and have received proper 
 orders. 
 
 Tiie Ihtjimiutixl offi'cer of the d<ii/ in each regiment, and in commands 
 li.ss than a regiment, is charged with the order and cleanliness of the 
 camp or garrison; he has the calls beaten by the drummer of the police 
 guard ; he attends the parading of the guards, and orders the roll to be 
 called frequently and at unexpected periods, and reports everything 
 extraordinary to the commander of the garrison or camp; he is to visit 
 the hospital at various hours, and make a report of its state to the 
 commanding officer. He should satisfy himself frequently during 
 tlie niglit of the vigilance of the police guard, and prescribe patrols 
 and rounds to be made by the officer of the guard. lie should give 
 attention to the condition of the sinks, the regulation of the camp fires, 
 the removal of rubbish, etc., and for these purposes a fatigue party 
 wiil bo I'uruishi'd him when necessary. 
 
 CAMPS. 
 Camp of Infanlry. 
 
 766. Each company has its tents in two files, facing nn a street per- 
 pendicular to tbc color line. The width of the street depends on the 
 front of the camp, but should not be less than five paces. The interval 
 between the rauks of tents is two paces ; between the files of tents of 
 adjacent companies, two paces; between regiments, twenty-two paces. 
 
 The color line is ten paces in front of the front rank of tents. The 
 kitchens are twenty paces behind the rear rank of company tents; the 
 non-commissioned stafl" and sutler, twenty paces in rear of the kitch- 
 ens; the company officers, twenty paces further in rear; and the field 
 and staff, twenty paces in rear of the company officers. 
 
4^6 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 I 
 
 The company officers arc iu rear of their rcspcciive companies; the 
 captains on the right. 
 
 The colonel and lioutcnant-colonel are near the centre of the line of 
 field and staff; the adjutant, a major, and surgeon on the right; the 
 quartermaster, a major, and assistant surgeon on the left. 
 
 The police guard is at the centre of the line of the non-commissioned 
 staff, the tents facing to the front, the stacks of arms on the left. 
 
 The advanced post of the police guard is about 200 paces in front of 
 the color line, and opposite the centre of the regiment or on the best 
 ground; the prisoners' tents about four paces in rear. In a regiment 
 of the second line, the advanced post of the police guard is 200 paces 
 in rear of the line of its field and stalf. 
 
 The horses of the staff officers and of the baggage train are twenty- 
 five paces in rear of the tents of the field and staff; the wagons are 
 parked on the same line, and the men of the train camped near them. 
 
 The sinks of the men are 150 paces in front of the color line — those 
 of the officers 100 paces in roar of the train. Both are concealed by 
 bushes. When convemient, the sinks of the men may be placed in rear 
 or on a flank. A portion of the earth dug out for sinks to be thrown 
 back occasionally. 
 
 The front of the camp of a regiment of 1,000 men, in two ranks, 
 will be 400 paces, or one-fifth less paces than tlie number of files if the 
 camp is to have the same front as the troops in order of battle. But 
 the front may be reduced to IDG paces by narrowing the company 
 streets to five paces; and if it be desirable to reduce the front still 
 more, the tents of companies may be pitched in single file — those of a 
 division facing on the same street. 
 
 Camp of Cavalry. 
 
 707. In the cavalry, each company has one lilo of tents — the tents 
 opening on the street facing the left of the camp. 
 
 The hor.ses of each company are placed in a single file, facing the 
 opening of the tents, and are fastened to pickets planted firmly in 
 the ground, from three to si.x paces from the tents of the troops. 
 
 The intervals between the files of tents should be such that, the regi- 
 ment being broken into column of companies [as indicated in plate], 
 each company should be on the extension of the line on which the 
 horses are to be picketed. 
 
 The streets separating the squadrons are wider than those between 
 the companies by the interval separating squadrons in line; these in- 
 tervals are kept free from any obstruction throughout the camp. 
 
 The horses of the rear rank are placed on the left of those of their 
 Cle-leailers 
 
DUTIE!? OF CAPTATVS — COMPANTRS, ETC. 4S7 
 
 The horses of the lieutenants are placed on the right of their pla- 
 toons ; those of the captains on the right of the company . 
 
 Each horse occupies a space of about two paces. The number of 
 horses in the company fixes the depth of the camp and the di^tan^e 
 between the files of tents; the foraije is placed between the tents. 
 
 The kitchens are twenty paces in front of each file of tents. 
 
 The non-commissioned officers are in the tents of the front rank. 
 Camp-followers, teamsters, etc., are in the roar rank. The police guard 
 in the rear rank, near the centre of the regiment. 
 
 The tents of the lieutenants are thirty paces in rear of the line of 
 their company; the tent.'' of the captains thirty paces in rear of the 
 lieutenants. 
 
 The colonel's tent tliirty paoos in rear of the captains', near the centre 
 of the regiment; the lieutonaat-oloncl on his ri>;ht : the adjutant on 
 his left; the majors on the same line, opposite thi second company on 
 the right and left ; the surjj:eo;i on the lett of the adjutant. 
 
 The field and staff have their horses on the Ijft of thsir tunts. on the 
 same line with the company horses; sick horses are placed in one liae 
 on the right or left of the camp. Tbe men who attend thani have a 
 separate file of tents; the forges and wagons in rear of this filo. The 
 horses of the train and of cainp-fo'.lowers are in one or mire files ex- 
 tending to the rear, behind the right or h^ft squadron. The advanced 
 post of the police guard is two hundred paces in front, opposite the 
 centre of the regiment; the horses in one or more files. 
 
 The sinks for tho men are onj hundred and fifty paces in front — those 
 for oHiL-crs one hundred paces in rear of tho camp. 
 
 Camp of Arliller;/. 
 
 768. The artillery is encampL-d njar the troops to which it is attached, 
 so as to be protected from attack and to contribatc to the defence of the 
 camp. Sentinels for the park are furnished by tho artillery, and, when 
 necessary, by the other troops. 
 
 For a battery of six pieces the tents are in three files — one for each 
 section; distance between the ranks of tents fifteen paces; teats open- 
 ing to the front. The horses of each section are picketed in the file, ten 
 paces to the left of the file of tents. In tho horse artillery, or if the 
 number of horses makes it necessary, the horsas are in two files on the 
 right and left of the file of tenfs. Tiie kitchens are tweuty-five paces 
 in front of the front rank of tents. The tents of the offi^-'ers are in tho 
 outside files of company tents, twenty paces in roar of the rear rank — 
 the captain on the right, the lieutenants on the left. 
 
 The park is opposite the centre of the camp, forty p.aces in roar of the 
 
488 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 afliccrs' tents. The carriages in files four paces apart ; dist.ince between 
 ranks of carriages suflicient for the horses when harnessed to them : tlie 
 park pnard is twenty-five paces in rear of the park. The sinks for the 
 men one hundred ;ind fifty paces in front ; for the otllcers one hundred 
 paces in rear. Tiie liarness is in the tents of the men. 
 
 BIVOUACS. 
 
 769. A regiment of cavalry being in order of battle, in rear of tho 
 ground to l)e occupied, the colonel breaks it by platoons to the right. 
 The horses of each platoon are placed in a single row, atid fastened as 
 prescribed for camps ; near the enemy they remain saddled all night, 
 with slackened girths. The arms are at first stacked in rear of each 
 row of horses; the sabres, with the bridles hung on them, arc placed 
 against the stacks. 
 
 The forage is placed on the right of each row of horses. Two stable- 
 guards for each ]>laloon watch the horses. 
 
 A fire for each platoon is made near the color line, twenty paces to 
 the left of the row of horses. A shelter is made for the men around 
 the fire, if possible, and each man then stands his arms and bridle 
 against the shelter. 
 
 The fires and shelter for the ofllcers arc i)laeed in rear of tho line of 
 those for the men. 
 
 The interval between tho squadrons must bo without obstruction 
 throughout the whole depth of the bivouac. 
 
 The intervals between the shelters should be such that the platoons 
 can take up a line of battle freely to tho front or rear. 
 
 The distance from the enemy decides the manner in which the horses 
 are to be fed and led to water. When it is permitted to unsaddle, the 
 saddles are placed in the roar of the horses. 
 
 In infantry, the fires are made in rear of the c«A,)- lim-, on the 
 ground that would be occupied by tho tents in camp. The companies 
 are placed around them, and, if ]l0^sible, construct shelters. When 
 liable to surprise, the infantry should stand to arms at daybreak, and 
 the cavalry mount until the return of the reconnoitring parties. If 
 tho arms are to bo taken apiirt, to clean, it must be done by detach- 
 meuts successively. 
 
 C A X T N M E N T S . 
 
 770. The cavalry should be placed under shelter whenever the dis- 
 tance from the enemy, and from the ground where the trooj>s are to 
 form for battle, permits it. Taverns and farm-houses, with largo stables 
 and free access, are selected for quartering them. 
 
 I 
 
DUTIES OF CAPTAINS — COMPANIES, ETC. 489 
 
 The colonel indicates the place of <assombling in case of alarm. It 
 should generally be outside the cantonment; the egress from it should 
 bo free; the retreat upon the other positions ftcuio, and roads leading 
 to it on the side of the enemy obftructcd. 
 
 The uecessar3' orders being given, as in cstiiblisbing a camp, the 
 picket and grand guards are posted. A sentinel may be placed on a 
 steeple or high house, and then the troops are marched to the quarters. 
 The men sleep in the stables, if it is thought necessary. 
 
 The above applies in the main to infantry. Near the enemy, com- 
 panies or platoons should be collected, as much as possible, in the same 
 bouses. If companies must be separated, they should be divided b.y 
 platoons or squads. All take arms at daybreak. 
 
 When cavalry and infantry canton together, the latter furnish the 
 guards by night and the former by day. 
 
 Troo)is cantoned in the presence of the enemy should be covered by 
 advanced guards and natural or artifieiiil obstacles. Cantonments 
 taken during a cessation of hostilities should be established in rear of 
 a lino of defence, ?ind in front of the point on which the troops would 
 concentrate to receive an attack. The general commanding-in-chicf 
 assigns the limits of their cantonments to the divisions, the command- 
 ers of divisions to brigades, and the commanders of brigades post their 
 regiments. The position for each corps, in case of attack, is carefully 
 pointed <>ut by the generals. 
 
 M A R (' II E S . 
 
 771. For marching, the force, if a liirge one, is divided into as many 
 columns as circumstances permit, without weakening any one too much. 
 The object of the movement and the nature of the ground determine the 
 order of march, the kind of troops in each column, and the number of 
 columns. They ought to preserve their communications and be within 
 supporting distance of each other. The commander of each column 
 6ught to know the strength and direction of the others. 
 
 The advance and rear guards arc usually light troops; their strength 
 and composition depend on the nature of the ground and the position 
 of the enemy. They serve to cover the movements of the army, and to 
 hold the enemy in cheek until the general has time to make his arrange- 
 ments. 
 
 The '' (/eiierril," sounded (>ne hour before tbe time of marching, is the 
 signal to strike tents, to load the wagons, pa«k horses, etc.. and send 
 them to the place of assembling. The fires are then put out, and care 
 taken to avoid burning straw, etc., or giving the enemy any other indi- 
 cation of the movements. 
 
400 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MTMTTA. 
 
 The '' «i«rc/i " beats in tbc infantrj*. ami the "«(/ra»r«" is sounded 
 in the cavalry, iu succession, as each is to take its place in the column. 
 The infantry forms in column of companies or platoons; the cavalry 
 in cnluran of twos, fours, or of platoons: and the artillery by sections. 
 
 When the army shouM form suddenly to meet the enemy, the "long 
 roll" is beat, and "to horse" sounded. The troops form rapidly in 
 front of their camp. 
 
 Batteries of artillery and their caii^sons move with the corps to which 
 they are attached; the field train and ambulances march at the rear of 
 the column: and the baggage with the rear guard. 
 
 Cavalry and infantry do not march together, unless the proximity of 
 the enemy makes it necessary. 
 
 In cavalry marches, when distant from the enemy, each regiment, 
 arid, if possible, each squadron, forms a separate column, in order to 
 keep up the same gait from front to rear, and to trot, when desir able, 
 on good ground. In such cases the cavalry may leave camp later, and 
 can give more rest to the hors3s aad more attention to the shoeing and 
 harness. 
 
 After the march has coiunicncod the troops habitually take the route 
 step. The men should not be allowed to straggle, or leave the ranks 
 for any but a necessary purpose, and then but for a few moments at a 
 time. 
 
 The general and field otficers frequently stop, or send officers to the 
 rear, to see that the troops march in the proscribed order and keep 
 their distances. 
 
 In approaching a defile, the colonels arc warned ; they close their 
 regiments as they come up; each regiment passes separately, at an ac- 
 celerated pace, and in as close order as possible. The lea<ling regiment 
 having i)assed, and left room enough for the whole column in close 
 order, halts, and moves again as soon as the last regiment is through. 
 In the cavalry, each squadron, before quickening the pace to rejoin the 
 column, takes its original order of march. 
 
 When a march is to be continued from day to da_Y, the diiily march 
 should commence at a very early hour; the rate of going should be as 
 regular as possible, not more than two and a half miles an hour; and 
 the guides should be careful to preserve their distance, so as to prevent 
 oscillati(ms in the rear of the column, which are very fatiguing to the 
 men. At the expiration of every hour, or a little more, the halt is 
 sounded, when the men are allowed to take their ease for about ten 
 minutes, when the march is resumed. In this way a day's march of 
 twenty miles or more may be made by mid-day, or a little later; the 
 men gel their dinners aft'jr getting into camp, have the afternoon to 
 
DUTIES OF CAPTAINS — COMPANIKS, ETC. 4!>l 
 
 rest, wash their clothing, clean thoir arms, etc., ami arc fresh for an 
 early start on the following day. 
 
 In forced marches, or where the march is a long one, the halt at noon 
 may be from an hour to an hour and a half, when the men maj' loosen 
 their belts, take a lunch, smoke, and take their ease in any way they 
 choose until the hour for resuming the m.arch; the march may be con- 
 tinued until the middle of the afternoon, and still the men will have 
 time to get their cup of hot coflFee for supper, and made themselves 
 comfortable for the night. The march of the first two days should be 
 short ; after that it may be increased to the required number of miles ; 
 the march from day to day should be as nearly of equal length as the 
 convenience of fuel and water, etc., for camping purposes will admit. 
 
 772. A.campiiuj purtij, headed by the quartermaster of the command, 
 precedes the column for the purpose of selecting and marking off the 
 camp before the arrival of the troops. The camp is marked by placing 
 camp colors on the line intended for the color line of the command. 
 
 When the column roaches the camp ground, the infantry comes into 
 line on the color line: the cavalry in rear of its camp. 
 
 The number of meu to be furnished for guards, pickets, and order- 
 lies ; the fatigue parties to be sent for wood and water for the cook, 
 etc.; the hour of marching, etc., are then announced by the brigadier- 
 generals to the colonels, and by them to the field officers — the adjutant 
 and captains formed in front of the regiment, the first sergeants taking 
 post behind their captains. The adjutant then makes the details, and 
 the first sergeants warn the men. The regimental oflicer of the day 
 forms the picket, and sends the guards to their posts. The colors are 
 then planted at the centre of the color line, and the arms are st.acked 
 on the line. The fatigue parties proceed to their duties, and the men 
 of the company not on detail pitch the tents. 
 
 In the cavalry, each troop moves a little in rear of the point at which 
 its horses are to be secured, and forms in one rank; the men then dis- 
 mount; a detail is made to hold the horses; the rest stack their arms 
 and fix the picket rope; after the horses are attended to the tents are 
 pitched, and caeli horseman places liis arms at the side from the 
 weather 
 
 Artillery is brought into line, and the picket ropes fixed : the drivers 
 unhitch, take off harness, secure their horses to the picket ropes, etc., 
 while the cannoneers proceeil to pitch the tents. 
 
402 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTKERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 A R T I c L p: XIV. 
 THE STAFF. 
 
 Adjutant-General's department. 
 
 77.3. The general duties of tbc adjutant-general and of the as!^istant 
 adjutant-generals have been laid down under the head of army orgau- 
 ization. 
 
 The adjutant-generals of the several states are required to make 
 annual returns of the strength and condition of the militia, the state 
 of the arms, etc., applicable to military purpo.«es, to the governor or 
 conimander-iu-chief of the state, and to forward a consolidated return 
 of the mililia. arms, etc., to the President of the Conledurato States, 
 through the adjutant-general of the Confederate States army, agree- 
 ably to a form furni^ibed by bim. 
 
 Assistant adjutant-generals, in addition to the duties already speci- 
 fied in general terms, attend to the formation of their divisions or 
 brigades, publish all orders received at division or brigade head-tiuar- 
 jers; issue all orders proceeding from the general eommandiiig the 
 division or brigade J preserve the records of the division or brigade; 
 inspect and form division or brigade guards; prepare and keep the 
 necessary rosters of the officers of the division or brigade; and regu- 
 late all details for duty depending uj>on the rosters. 
 
 774. It is the duty of the assistant adjutant-general of each brigade 
 to prepare a montinrj report of the brigade every morning after the 
 receipt of the regimental morning reports (see Form No. 2), in accord- 
 ance with Form No. 3, which is si 'ued by him and the general com- 
 manding the brigade, and forwarded to division head-quarters. The 
 assistant adjutant-general of the division prepares, in like manner, a 
 consulidated morning report of the division, to bo transmitted to the 
 adjutant-general of the army corps, or army of which the division 
 forms a part. (Sue Form No. 4.) 
 
 Thus the commanding general is from daj' to day kept advised as to 
 the e.\act strength and condition of his command. 
 
 The assistant adjutant-general of a detached brigade, division, or 
 
THE STAFF. 493 
 
 army in the field, bas to prepare a monthly return of the command, to 
 be signed by himself and his CDraraanding general, to be forwarded to 
 the adjutant-general at general head-quarters. 
 
 775. When orders arc received at, or emanated from the hcad-rinarters 
 of an army or army corps, the adjutant-general, or assistant adjutant- 
 general, as the case may be, transmits copies to each of the assistant 
 adjutant-generals at division head-quarters; tiie assistant adjutant- 
 generals at division hcad-rjuarters in turn transmit copies to the assist- 
 ant at each of the lirigado head-quarters, and fmm brigade bead-quarters 
 they go to the adjutants of regiments, by whom thoy are read to the 
 troops on parade. When troops arc on a campaign, the orders are given 
 to otlicers of the staff, who report for tbcm daily at the diflfercnt hcail- 
 quarters. See article '' Orders." 
 
 776. The parole and roiintrrniijn emanate daily from head-quarters, 
 in the form of "special orders;" copies of both, under seal, are trans- 
 milted to division liead-quartcrs ; from thence to brigade bead-quarters, 
 and from brigade hcal-quarters to regimental head-quarters, provided 
 there is any officer of the regiment who is entitled to the jxiroln; if 
 not, the coHiitcrsii/n only is sent. Copies of one or both are sent to 
 such persons of the division, brigade, or regiment, as may be entitled 
 to them. 
 
 The parole is only sent to the field and regimental olficcrs of the 
 day, oliiccrs of guards, and to such other officers a^ may bo entitled to 
 visit and inspect guards. 
 
 The parole and cnuntcmign are usually sent out on small pieces of 
 paper, so folded as to make it impossible to discover cither without 
 breaking the seal. Fig. 1 77 shows the manner in which the paper should 
 be folded ; ahcd is the paper, of which ac is a little longer than ah; it is 
 folded so as to bring the edge ed to coincide with df, the point c being 
 brought to /', the fold being along de ; the point (/ is then folded over 
 upon e, making the fold along the line f(j; the projecting edge ahfe is 
 then folded over, sealed near both ends, and the '• countersign" is di- 
 rected on the opposite side. 
 
 777. By the militia laws of Virginia, and most of the other states, 
 the division and brigjide inspectors are the chiefs of staff of their 
 respective divisions and brigades, and they discharge the duties of 
 assistant adjutant-generals in the divisions and brigades with which 
 they serve. 
 
 778. The adjutants of regiments are the chiefs of the regimental 
 staffs, and perform within their regiments the various duties required of 
 them in the formation of their regiments, in all parades, inspections, 
 manoeuvres, formations of guards, etc. The adjutant publishes all orders 
 received at regimental head-quarters, and issues all orders emanating 
 
404 
 
 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 ffin the hcud-qunrtcr." of the regiment ; keeps a roster of the otficers 
 of the regiment, and makes all <letails for duty from the roster; has 
 charge of the field music, band, and pioneers; and discharges such 
 other duty as his eoloiicl may require. 
 
 At theyM-«( gcrycaula' call, the orderly sergeants of companies jiresont 
 the morning reports of their companies, made off in conformity with 
 the requirements of Form No. I, and signed by iheir captains. The 
 ailjutiint then proceeds to make off the morning report of the regiment, 
 as required in Form No. 2, whicli is signed by himself and the colonel, 
 and transmitted to brigade head-quarters. 
 
 On receiving the parole and coiinterHujn from brigade head-quarters, 
 he sends a copy of both to the colonel and to the regimental otiicer of 
 the day, and copies of the coiiiiteraiyn to the surgeon, and such other of 
 the staff officers of the regiment as, from the nature of their duties, may 
 require it. 
 
 The Quartermaster's department. 
 
 779. This department has to provide (juarters and transportation for 
 the troops; storage and transportation for all supplies; clothing; camp 
 and garrison equipage; cavalry and artillery horses; fuel; forage; 
 straw; and stationery. Its duties, when troops are in actual service, 
 are very important, and embrace such a wide range of subjects that a 
 large number of agents, and thorough organization, are inilispcnsable. 
 
 7S0. Under the head of quarters are included all buildings for the 
 use of an army ; as quarters for men and otlicers, hospitals, store-houses, 
 offices, and stables. When quarters are to be occupied, they are allotted 
 by the quartermaster at the station, under the control of the command- 
 ing ollicer. 
 
 The number of rooms, and amount of fuel for otricer.-^ and men, are 
 as follows : 
 
THE STAFF. 
 
 495 
 
 Fuel for officers and men. 
 
 A Major-Gpiicral 
 
 A Biigadior-Geneitil or Colonel 
 
 A Lioutcnaiit-Coloiiel or Major 
 
 A Captain or Cliaplain 
 
 Lieutenant 
 
 Military store-keeper 
 
 The General coniniamlinfr lliearniy 
 
 Tlie Coniniandinp: oftirer of a division or department, an 
 Assistant or Deputy Quartermaster-General 
 
 The Commanding officer of a regiment or jiost. Quarter- 
 master, Assistant Quartermaster, or Commissary of 
 Subsistence 
 
 An acting Assistant Quartermaster when approved by 
 the Quartermaster-General 
 
 Wagon and Forage master Sergeant-Major. Ordnance- 
 Sergeant, or Quartermaster-Sergeant 
 
 Each non-commissioned officer, musician, private.officer's 
 servant, and washerwc^man 
 
 Each necessary fire for the sick in liospital. to be regu- 
 lated by tlie surgeon and commanding officer, not ex- 
 ceeding 
 
 Each guard-fire, to be regulated by the commanding offi- 
 cei'. n«t ejrceidinff 
 
 A Commissary or Quartermaster's store-house, when ne- 
 cessary, not exceeding 
 
 A regimental or post mess 
 
 To every six non-c(nimissioned officers, musicians, and 
 privates, servants, and washerwomen. i'lH square feet 
 of room north of 38° N., and 256 eq\iare feet south of 
 that latitude. 
 
 Cords of 
 wood per 
 mouth.* 
 
 
 5 
 4 
 
 3 
 2 
 
 1 
 1 
 1 
 Vs 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 No officer shall occupy more than his proper quarters, except by 
 order of the commanding officer, when there is an excess of quarters at 
 the station. But the amount of quarters sliall be reduced /jro rata by 
 the commanding officer wlien the number of officers and troops makes it 
 necessarj'. 
 
 A mess room, and fuel for it, are allowed only when a majority of 
 the officers of a post or regiment unite in a mess. Fuel for a mess room 
 should not be used elsewhere, or for any other purpose. 
 
 Fuel issued to officers or troops is public property for their use, and 
 what is not actuallj' consumed should be returned to the quartermaster's 
 department. Fuel is issued only in the month when due. 
 
 * Or coal, at the rate of 1,500 lbs. anthracite, or 30 bushels bituminous to the 
 cord. 
 
490 
 
 MANUAL FOR VULUXTKERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 In allottii)):: fiuarters, oflSccrs have choice according to rank ; but tho 
 coniniunding officer uiny direct the officers to be stationed convenient to 
 their troops. An officer may select quarters occupied by a junior; but 
 havin;; made his choice, he must abide by it, and ?h:ill nut a;;aiu at the 
 post displace a junior, unless himself displaced by a senior. 
 
 An officer arriving at a station should make requisition on the <|uar- 
 termaster for his quarters and fuel, accompanied by a copy of the order 
 ])utting him on duty at the station. If in C(jmmand of troops, his req- 
 uisition should bo for the whole, and designate the number of officers 
 of each grade, of nun-commissioued officers, soldiers, and servants. 
 
 781. When troops are moved, or officers travel with escorts or stores, 
 the means of transport provided shall bo for the whole command. 
 Proper orders in the case, and an exact return of tho command, includ- 
 ing officers' servants and company women, will be furnished to the 
 quartermaster who is to furnish the transportation. The baggage to be 
 transported is limited to camp and garrison equipage and officers* bag- 
 gage. Officers' bagg.age should not exceed (mess-clicst and all personal 
 eff"ects included) as follows : 
 
 General Officer 
 Field Oflicers.. 
 
 Captains 
 
 Subalterns . . . • 
 
 In the Field. 
 
 125 pounds. 
 100 
 
 80 " 
 
 80 " 
 
 Changing Stations. 
 
 1000 pound 
 800 " 
 700 
 600 " 
 
 These amounts may be reduced jjro mtn by tho commanding officer 
 when necessary, and may be increased on transports by water, when 
 proper, in special cases. 
 
 .A.11 the books, papers, and instruments necessary for tho duties of 
 staff officers ; also regimental and company desks, and the medicine 
 chests of medical officers, must be transported. 
 
 Estimates of tho medical director, approved by the commanding 
 officer, for the transportation of the hospital service, and tho sick, will 
 be furnished to the (luartormaster. 
 
 The baggage trains, ambulances for tho sick and wounded, and all 
 the means of transport, continue in charge of tho proper officers of the 
 quartermaster's department, under tho control of the commanding 
 officers. 
 
 When snp])iies are turned over to the quartermaster for transporta- 
 tion, each package must be directed, and its contents marked on it. 
 
 On transports, cabin passage is provided for the officers, and reason- 
 able and proper accommodation for the troops, and, when possible, a 
 separate apartment for the sick. 
 
THE STAFF. 
 
 497 
 
 782. The forage ration is fourteen pounds of hay, and twelve pounds 
 of oats, corn, or barley. Forage is issued to officers only in the month 
 when due, and at their proper stations, and for the horses actually kept 
 by them in service, not exceeding in number as follows : In time of 
 war, major-general, seven horses; brigadier-general, live; colonels 
 who have the cavalry allowance, five; other colonels, four; lieutenant- 
 colonels and majors who have the cavalry allowance, four ; other lieu- 
 tenant-colonels and majors, three ; captains who have the cavalry 
 allowance, three; all other officers entitled to forage,' two ; and in time 
 of peace, general and field officers, three horses; officers below the 
 rank of field officers in the regiment of cavalry, etc., two horses; all 
 other officers entitled to forage, one horse. 
 
 No officer is allowed to sell forage issued to bim. Forage issued to 
 public horses or cattle is public property ; whatever is not consumed is 
 accounted for. 
 
 783. Issues of stationery are made quarterly, in amount as follows: 
 
 
 
 
 u 
 
 
 
 l£ 
 
 ■9 
 
 • 
 
 
 hr 
 
 fe 
 
 z: 
 
 U 
 
 _o 
 
 ft 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 c3 
 
 zi 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 it 
 
 QJ 
 
 a 
 
 ^*-> 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 tfcH 
 
 <t-, 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 01 
 
 
 
 
 J2 
 
 0) 
 
 a 
 
 
 S 
 
 □ 
 
 n 
 
 0) 
 
 ft 
 
 ,3 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 =1 
 
 '^ 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 ^ 
 
 Commander of an army, department, or division 
 — what may l)c necessary for himself and staff 
 for their public duty 
 
 CommandL'r of a briga<le, for himself and staff . . 
 
 Oflicer comraandiiig a regiment or post of not less 
 than five companies, for himself and staff. ... 
 
 Officer commanding a post of more than two and 
 less than five companies 
 
 Commanding officer of a post of two companies. . 
 
 Commanding officer of a post of one company or 
 less, and commanding officer of a company. . . 
 
 A Lieutenant- Colonel or Major not in command 
 of a regiment or post 
 
 Officers of the Inspector-General's, Pa,y, and 
 Quartermaster's departments — the prescribed 
 bl.ank books and printed forms, and the sta- 
 tioner}' required for their pul>lio duty 
 
 All officers, including Chaplains, not enumerated 
 above, when on duty and not supplied by their 
 respective departments 
 
 12 1 
 
 10 1 
 
 8 i 
 6 i 
 
 5 i 
 
 3 i 
 
 li k 
 
 6 i 
 
 1 i i 
 
498 
 
 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 Steel pens, with one holder to twelve pens, may be issued in place of 
 quills, and envelopes in place of envelope paper, at the rate of 100 to 
 the quire. 
 
 To each officer if allowed an inkstand, one stamp, paper-folder, 
 sand-bos, wafer-box, and as many load pencils as may be required. 
 
 Necessary stationery for military courts and boards will bo furnished 
 on the requisition of the recorder, approved by the prcsidinj; officer. 
 
 Regimental, company, and post books, and printed blanks for the 
 officers of quartermaster and i)a}- departments, will be procured by 
 requisition on the quartermaster-general. 
 
 Postiige and dispatches by telegraph on public business, paid by an 
 officer, will be refunded to him on his certificate to the amount, and to 
 the necessity of the communication by telegraph. 
 
 784. Supplies of clothing and camp and garrison equipage will be 
 sent by the quartcrmnster-gencral to the officers of his department 
 stationed with the troops. The contents of each package, and the 
 sizes of the clothing in it, will be marked on it. 
 
 The allowance of camp and garrison equipage is as follows: 
 
 A General 
 
 Field and staff officer above the 
 rank of captain 
 
 Other staff" officers and captains.. 
 
 Subalterns of a company, to cverj' 
 two 
 
 To every fifteen foot and thirteen 
 mounted men 
 
 * i 
 
 Bed sacks and straw are provided for troops in garrison. Requisi- 
 tions will be sent to the quartermaster-general for the authorized flags, 
 colors, standards, guidon.s, drums, fifes, bugles, and trumpets. 
 
 Commanders of companies draw the clothing of their men, and the 
 camp and garrisim equipage for the officers and men of their company. 
 The camp and garrison equipage of other officers is drawn on their 
 own receipts. 
 
 When clothing is lu^cded for issue to the men, the company com- 
 mander will procure it from the quartermaster on requisition, approved 
 bv the commanding officer. 
 
THE STAFF. 499 
 
 Commanders of companies take receipts of their men for the clothing 
 issued to them, on a receipt roll, witnessed by an officer or non-com- 
 missioned ofiicer. Each soldier's clotliing account is kept by the cap- 
 tain in a company book, the account setting forth the money value of 
 the clothing received and receipted for. 
 
 785. Every separate command should have its quartermaster; if it 
 is a regiment, or less, one of the subalterns may discharge the duty by 
 order of the commanding officers; if a brigade or division, an ofiicer 
 of the quartermaster department is assigned by the quartermaster- 
 general. In the volunteers and militia, quartermasters are appointed 
 by the colonels, brigadier-generals, or major-generals of regiments, 
 brigades, or divisions; but while quartermasters so appointed must 
 obey the directions of their commanding officers, their accountability 
 as officers of the quartermaster's department is just the same. 
 
 All requisitions for supplies, for transportation, forage, etc., are made 
 upon the quartermaster of the command requiring them; if it is in his 
 power to fill the requisition, he does so; if not, he makes his requisition 
 upon the next higher ofiicer of the department, and so on. 
 
 In order to facilitate the operations of the department, deptos of 
 supplies, in charge of dcjiot qiiartermaHers, are established at convenient 
 points, and from which quartermaster's supplies are drawn upon proper 
 requisition. 
 
 In order to secure a proper accountabilitj- on the part of the officers 
 of the quartermaster's department, the quartermaster-general should 
 institute a proper system of returns, accounts, etc., requiring all officers 
 of the department to conform strictly to their requirements, and in the 
 settlement of their accounts to present satisfactory vouchers for all 
 money or public property expended. For the necessary forms see the 
 general regulations of the Confederate States army. 
 
 Subsistence department. 
 
 786. Every command should have its commissary or assistant com- 
 missary; when the command is less than a regiment, the same officer 
 may, and usually docs discharge the duties of both commissary and 
 quartermaster. 
 
 Subsistence supplies are issued on requisitions approved by the com- 
 manding officer, in the same way that quartermaster's supplies are 
 issued. The commissary must, however, so regulate his own requi- 
 sitions upon purchasing or depot commissaries, as to keep on hand a 
 sufficient supply to meet the wants of the troops. 
 
 Good and sufficient store-room for the subsistence stores will be pro- 
 cured by the commissary from the quartermaster. 
 
500 
 
 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 787. The ration is tbree-fourths of a pound of pork or bacon, or one 
 and a fourth pound of fresh or salt beef; eighteen ounces of bread 
 or flour, or twelve ounces of hard bread, or one and a fourth pound 
 of corn meal, and at the rate, to one hundred rations, of eight quarts 
 of peas or beans, or, in lieu thereof, ten pounds of rice ; six pounds of 
 coffee: twelve pounds of sugar; four quarts of vinegar; one and a 
 half pound of tallow, or one and a fourth pound of adamantine, or 
 one pound sperm candles, four pounds 9 soap, and two quarts of 
 salt. 
 
 On a campaign, or on marches, or on board transports, the ration of 
 hard bread is one pound. 
 
 Fresh beef, when it can be procured, should be furnished at least 
 twice a week; the beef Jto be procured, if possible, by contract. 
 
 788. Company provision returns are usually made every week or ten 
 days, in accordance with Form No. 12; the return must be signed by 
 the commanding officer of the regiment, or post, when the command is 
 less than a regiment. 
 
 When it is practicable, a consolidated return for the regiment, or 
 post, is made and signed by the commanding officer (see Form 13); but 
 the return must state the allowance for each company, in order to pre- 
 vent any confusion in the issues. 
 
 Issues to the hospitals are made on returns l>y the medical officer 
 for such provisions only as are actually required for the sick and the 
 attendants. The cost of such parts of the ration as are issued is 
 charged to the hospital at contract or cost prices, and the hospital is 
 credited by the whole number of complete rations due through the 
 month at contract or cost prices; the balance, constituting the hoHpiinl 
 /iiiid, or any portion of it, may be expended by the commissary, on the 
 requisition of the medical officer, in the purchase of anj' article for the 
 subsistence or comfort of the sick. 
 
 An e.xtra issue of fifteen pounds of candles per month may be made 
 to the principal guard of each camp or garrison, on the order of the 
 commanding officer. Extra issues of soap, candles, and vinegsvr are 
 permitted to the hospital when the surgeon does not avail himself of 
 the commutation of the hospital ration, or when there is no hospital 
 fund; salt in small quantities is issued for public horses and cattle. 
 When the officers of the medical department find antiscorbutics 
 necessary for the health of the troops, the commanding officer may 
 order issues of fresh vegetables, piokled onions, sour-crout, or molasses, 
 with an extra quantity of rice and vinegar. Potatoes are usually 
 issued at the rate of one pound per ration, and onions at the rate 
 of three bushels in lieu of one of beans. Troops at sea are recom- 
 mended to draw rice and an extra issue of molasses in lieu of beans. 
 
THE STAFF. 501 
 
 When a soldier is detached on duty, and it is impracticable to carry 
 his subsistence with him, it will be commuted at seventy-five cents 
 a day, to be paid by the commissary, when due, or in advance on the 
 order of the commanding officer. The ration of a soldier stationed 
 ■where he has no opportunity of messing, is commuted at forty cents. 
 
 789. As in the case of the quartermaster's department, the commis- 
 sary-general should organize such a system of returns, accounts, etc., 
 on the part of the officers of the department, as to insure a proper 
 accountaliility on their part. See the army regulations for the neces- 
 sary forms. 
 
 Medical department. 
 
 790. The senior medical officer on duty with any body of troops in 
 the field will, unless otherwise specially ordered, be ex officio the medi- 
 cal director; and will have the general control of the medical officers, 
 and the supervision of the hospitals under their charge. 
 
 The senior medical officers of a hospital distribute the patients, 
 according to convenience and the nature of their complaints, into 
 wards or divisions, under the particular charge of the several assistant 
 surgeons, and should visit them himself each day, as frequently as the 
 state of the sick may require. 
 
 His prescriptions of medicine and diet are written down at once in 
 the proper register, with the name of the patient and the number of his 
 bed ; the assistants fill up the diet table for the day, and direct the 
 administration of the prescribed medicine. 
 
 He should enforce the proper hospital regulations to promote health 
 and prevent contagion, bj' ventilated and not crowded rooms, scrupu- 
 lous cleanliness, frequent changes of bedding, linen, etc. 
 
 791. At stirgiion's call, the sick then in the companies will be con- 
 ducted to the hospital by the first sergeants, who will each hand to the 
 surgeon, in his company book, a list of all the sick of the company, on 
 which the surgeon shall state who are to remain or go into hospital ; 
 who are to return to (juarters as sick or convalescent ; what duties the 
 convalescents in quarters are capable of; what cases are feigned- and 
 any other information in regard to the sick of the company he may 
 have to communicate to the captain. He will then make a morning 
 report of the sick to the commanding officer (Form No. 17). 
 
 Pay department. 
 
 792. The troops should be paid in such manner that the arrears shall 
 at no time exceed two mouths, unless the circumstances of the case 
 
502 
 
 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 render it unavoidable. The paymaster-general should take care, by 
 timely remittances, that the paymasters have the necessary funds to 
 pay the troops. 
 
 The payments, except to officers and discharged soldiers, are made 
 on muster and pay rolls; those of companies and detachments are 
 signed by the company or detachment commander; those of the hosr 
 pital arc signed by the surgeon; and all muster and pay rolls are signed 
 by the mustering and inspecting officer. 
 
 Copies of the necessary blank forms for muster and pay rolls may 
 always be obtained from the office of the Adjutant-General C. S. army. 
 These blanks are too large to be properly represented in a work like this. 
 
 When a company is paraded for payment, the men should bo called 
 to the pay table one at a time, commencing with the non-commissioned 
 officers, who are paid according to rank ; the privates are called in 
 alphabetical order. Every member of the company, or detachment, 
 must, on receiving his pay, sign his name opposite his name in the pay 
 roll, and his signature must be witnessed by the captain, or some other 
 officer of the company or detachment, whose duty it is to be present 
 when the company or detachment is paid. 
 
 Officers are paid on certified accounts, as in Form 5. 
 
Itfominjs R*portfi of Oaptain '•f^jDompany 
 
 FORM No. 1 . . 
 
 Reeiznent of — —, Sta^kiii At 
 
 for the Month of 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 L. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■A M 
 
 
 
 
 
 DATE. 
 
 PBESEST. K 
 
 ABSENT. 
 
 1 mi 
 
 it 
 
 f 
 
 >• 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 jl 
 
 Fob Putt. | Sick. 
 
 ' SPKCIAI. 
 DOTT. 
 
 .^,: 1 
 
 
 Sios. 
 
 With 
 
 LCATK. 
 
 WniiooT 
 
 LtATl. 
 
 DlTATCHtP 
 SlRVlCI. 
 
 ■*6 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 V 
 
 Is 
 
 , 
 
 1 1 li 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 s 
 
 ~ 
 
 
 " 
 
 
 ~ 
 
 :i 
 
 
 
 ~ 
 
 ~ 
 
 ~ 
 
 ~ 
 
 - 
 
 ~ 
 
 " 
 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 Stonatcu. 
 
 1' KEMAKK3. 
 
 SlflNATOIlK. {| 
 
 5 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 mI 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 r 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
I 
 
It K M \ U K 8 
 
Mornitiy: Rt'port of 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 F O R M N o . 3 . 
 
 
 
 
 -Vrmj uf , Comn 
 
 f "■ ' ■ " 
 
 COMMAND. 
 
 I 
 
 
 '•"-'•■' II 
 
 
 . a s e; N^ 
 
 PRBaXNT 
 
 i 
 1 
 
 Alterations sisck 
 Yesterday. 
 
 REMARKS. 
 
 For Duty. 
 
 r 
 
 if 
 
 ! 
 
 S,CK. 
 
 EXTIt.V 
 
 Uui-Y. 
 
 IH 1 
 
 Arrrst. 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 r 
 
 1 
 i 
 
 7."S 
 
 zz. 
 
 TSli:-. 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 § 
 
 1 
 ■< 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 d. 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 t 
 
 I 
 
 1 
 
 .4 
 
 £ 
 
 ! 
 
 E G 
 
 ^3 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 ^_ 
 
 
 i 
 
 1- 
 
 1 
 
 s 
 s 
 e 
 
 1 
 
 - 
 
 j_ 
 
 .; 
 ■J.U 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 j, 
 i 
 
 _ 
 
 - 
 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 1 
 
 ^ 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 staff 
 
 
 Reg't Inft'y, 
 
 • 
 
 aR.m'MPAi, 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Station, 
 
 i 
 
 f • 
 
 (Signed) C. D. 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 Srigtidier-Qmernl, Commanding BriginU. 
 
 (S 
 
 ign 
 
 ed) 
 
 A 
 
 B 
 
 /lMis(n« 
 
 .Uunitl-Cirni 
 
 ■a;. 
 
 
 . 
 

 
 
 
 FORM No. 4. 1 
 
 Division, --Vriny. t'oiiimnndod by III sxj or-Oenera 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 C M M A N P . 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 s 
 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 
 [ABSENT. 
 
 II- 
 
 r 
 
 1 ' 
 1 
 
 Altuutionb sinob 
 
 YUTKRD\T. 
 
 REM Anns. 
 
 POK DUIT. 
 
 
 
 SlOK. 
 
 Extra Duty. Ik Abssst. 
 
 i 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 °,S^:;J™. 
 
 IT"™' S'""- *"' 
 
 III 
 
 s 
 
 3 
 1 
 
 2 
 1 
 
 iil 
 III 
 
 Ii 
 
 fie 
 
 i 
 
 i 
 e 
 5 
 
 1 
 
 Ii s 
 
 1 III 
 
 S .2 
 S S 
 E S 
 
 II ,' 
 
 ill 11 
 
 2 
 \ 
 
 n 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 11 
 
 t 
 
 E 
 o 
 
 £ 
 1 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 s. 
 
 
 « 
 
 1 
 
 B 1 ^ 
 
 a'i i 
 & S & 
 
 1 
 « 9 
 
 S 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 ■| 
 'i 
 
 11 i 
 
 f 
 
 « 
 
 i 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 e 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 i 
 1 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 1, 
 
 . Geneml Slaft' of Division 
 
 
 
 ' Regiment Cavalry 
 
 ' Capt. B 's Battery 
 
 ; Capt. C '9 Battery 
 
 
 G T L 
 
 
 1 
 
 Static 
 
 * This column inohides Non-Commia 
 Officers, Musicians and Privates. 
 
 t This column includes the entire for 
 
 Datk. 
 
 
 (.Signod) C. I). 
 
 Mnior-Ofurrnl, Cnmmanditiq Dtrisioii. 
 
 io„c.,> ( 
 
 3ignfd) A. B 
 As 
 
 iitta 
 
 1' Mj 
 
 1,1 
 
 ,„/-aciia-al. 
 
r^ 
 
Tlie 
 
 FORM No. 
 To -,_. 
 
 Dr. 
 
 COMMENCEMENT 
 
 EXPIRATION. 
 
 ON WHAT ACCOUNT. 
 
 priTAt© servftut not soldier 
 CLOTHING. 
 
 SUBSISTENCE. 
 
 For myself for 
 
 private 9 
 
 I HEREBY CERTIFY, That the foregoinE account ia oi 
 or received money in lieu of any part tiiereof. for any part .. 
 Ihat I d,d not. dunni; the term ehiirged.oranv part therr..! 
 
 St 'for4i'ifel\'.c;i' oX'SarfoTS plo-'.il.ha;; 
 
 I have noibeen in the pertorinance of any .stajTduty for wli 
 for the number of years stated in the chi ' " ' *" 
 
 PAY m,V. MONTH. 
 
 J 
 
 iinbsent without li 
 
 2 any pnrt of the 
 
 i •• 111 iirouratB deacriptidn of my »er 
 
 ii- .ioiiblAfttion post charged for 
 
 I ■ 1 ^ that iTvns aoiunlly in the cjnr 
 
 111 lilKinnal ration is charsed for; fa 
 
 1 -Hi} .i^coiint whataoever: and that th 
 
 iind to the.__ day of. 
 
 of doUtfcs and _ 
 
 3 Rpceived 
 
 (SI >NED i:^ nUPLICATB.) 
 
i 
 
THE STAFF. 
 
 503 
 
 
 o5 
 
 
 
 
 
 \A 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 •< 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 « 
 
 
 
 
 •spnno^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 ' 
 
 
 H 
 
 O 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 •siaqsng 
 
 ■< 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 >J 
 
 
 
 >J 
 
 
 •saqonj 
 
 < 
 
 
 
 ij 
 
 
 
 <] 
 
 ■a' 
 
 
 H 
 
 o 
 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 •488J 
 
 H 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 ■spjoo 
 
 •spjoD ni 'qoua 
 
 
 
 
 o; QOuuMojiTj ifiq^noj<[ 
 
 
 
 
 •Fiox 
 
 
 ■sjnuA 
 
 
 -J8S pui! sassaapuiTCj 
 
 
 
 
 ■sa^uAud 
 
 pu'B 'sai?ioisnm 'saao 
 
 
 
 
 -lyo panoissioitnoo-no^ 
 
 
 
 
 •suja:H'Bqng 
 
 
 •saitj^dBQ 
 
 
 
 
 
 85 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 E- 
 
 
 
 
 -=1 
 
 
 "cS 
 
 f- 
 
 
 
 OQ 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 E- 
 
 
 
 s ^ 
 
 233 
 
 .- a 
 
 M ^ Ph 
 
604 
 
 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 i 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 9) 
 
 < 
 
 (2 
 
 
 
 
 
 < 
 o 
 
 •spanoj 
 
 •Biaqena 
 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 •saqouj 
 
 
 •133J 
 
 
 
 •SpjOQ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 i't 
 
 1 Ui 
 
 > 
 4PH 
 
 _ 
 ^ 
 
 A 
 
 u. ^ 
 
 C - 3 
 
 2 3 t>- 
 
 = I' a a 
 
 t. > 4> 
 
 » O t> 
 
 J 
 
THE STAFF. 
 
 505 
 
 S" 
 
 <S <A 
 
 ® .2:3 
 
 « s 
 
 o o 
 o §> 
 
 si 
 
 CO r^ 
 
 ■sS 
 
 M 
 
 
 a 
 
 "3 6 ' 
 
 •JO gpunod 
 
 •JO spunojj 
 
 ^ -JO spano<i 
 
 o 
 
 •S-w 
 
 g a 
 
 •JO spunoj 
 
 •JO gpanoj^ 
 
 2 < 
 
 aappojjospanojj 
 
 •.(wq JO gpanoj; 
 
 •B^Bo JO epanoj 
 
 ^ajj^q JO spano J 
 
 •njoo JO spanoj 
 
 •suoi;tij jo jaqran^ 
 
 •sXbp jo jsqnin^ 
 
 si'Btnin'B jo aeqmnn ib}ox 
 
 •aaxo jo aeqran^ 
 
 •sainm jo jaqmn^ 
 
 •sosjoq JO aaqinn^ 
 
 •aoniBinbaa jo ojuq 
 
 P5 o 
 
 •^ .2 
 
 M-e Pi 
 
 4* 
 
506 
 
 -MANUAL lOR VOLUNTtLRS AND MILIXIA. 
 
 'A V 
 
 ^ 
 
THE STAFF. 
 
 507 
 
 £ 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 
 •"1 
 
 s 
 Pi 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 o 
 
 < < 
 
 < 
 
 r3 
 a 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 i- ■ 
 
 o = 
 
 ►J o 
 
 J < 
 1^ 
 
 Pounds. 
 
 
 
 Total Drawn 
 For. 
 
 
 
 
 •s;nBAJ8g 
 
 
 
 •S3SS3Jpun%rj 
 
 
 
 •sajTJAud pun 
 'sniiioisnni 's.i30igo 
 pauoissiminoD-uo^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 is 
 c 
 
 CO 
 
 
 c 
 
 * 
 
 u e -S 5 
 
 es a, s, 
 
 a. = 5- g* 
 
 11 ^ 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 w " P3 
 
508 
 
 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 fi^ 
 
 •43:3 
 9t ^ 
 
 •s 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 1 
 
 ! 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 i •■'9P 
 
 -iiod Jjni JO sjadBj 
 
 •adB} JO saoaijj 
 
 
 •XBAl 
 
 Snjitjas JO s30uno 
 
 
 •BJOJBM. JO B90un0 
 
 
 •siiinb JO jaqnin^ 
 
 
 •jadud 
 aSpujJBo JO sjaaijs 
 
 
 •jadtid 
 duosjooj JO saain^ 
 
 
 'J ad 
 
 -Bd je^-jai JO saJinf) 
 
 
 
 
 a u n 
 
 = lU I. 
 
 fe -"^ c o 
 
 § ^ ^"^ 
 
 •- 5 « fc 
 
 T5 to O O , 
 
 £•"8 
 ■5 o •:: ft a 
 
 a.2 
 
 <v a> im tM 
 
 .c 
 
 ■'00 
 
 
 •3 " 
 
 J3 
 
 a<| 
 
 
 
 
 .^ 
 
 
 
 ea ^ 
 
 
 ■a c« 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 hi ^ t! =3 
 
 <tf 
 
 iJ'p. 
 
THE STAFF. 
 
 509 
 
 » 'So 
 /-> ® 
 
 r ^ 
 
 
 P5 
 
 - 
 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 1 
 
 
 •iiug 1 
 
 
 •dtsog 1 
 
 
 •S9|pa'B0 1 
 
 
 •jBSantjY 1 
 
 
 •JuSng 1 
 
 
 ■83JB0J 1 
 
 
 •90IH 1 
 
 
 •sauag | 
 
 
 •jnoij 1 
 
 
 •5|-«od 1 
 
 
 •jaoq T1S8J J 1 
 
 
 •suojiBj JO jaqran^ 
 
 
 
 •Sif^p JO aaqran^ 
 
 
 
 •F?ox 
 
 
 i 
 
 •asraoM JO jaquin^ 
 
 
 •nam jo Jaqnin^ 
 
 
 
 
 ?! 
 
 O 
 
 -< 
 H 
 OQ 
 
 «: 
 
 o 
 
 00 
 
 o 
 
 
 
510 
 
 MANUAL FOR A'OT.I^NTKrRS AND MILITIA. 
 
 bo 
 
 I 
 
 n 
 
 (4 
 
 
 < 
 
 _ 
 
 
 o 
 
 CO 
 
 sa 
 
 o 
 
 ->; 
 
 
 
 
 •?i«s 
 
 
 
 •iluog 
 •soipuBj 
 
 
 
 
 
 unSaui^ 1 
 
 
 •juSng 1 
 
 
 •33goo 1 
 
 
 •aoi'a 1 
 
 
 •suiiag 1 
 
 
 •jnoj^ 1 
 
 
 •>i-»od: 1 
 
 
 •jODq qs3J^ 1 
 
 
 •suoi^Tjj JO aaqran^ 
 
 • 
 
 
 •sXup JO joquin^ 
 
 
 
 •l«ioi 
 
 
 •naraoAi jo jaqmn^ 
 
 
 
 •natn jo-aaqtan^ 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 Ol 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 I* 
 
 % 
 
THE ST.\FF. 
 
 /■>11 
 
 ^_ CO -f » v: S -« c^_ -f -3 ■>» a; -<; •to'^t y^-r 
 
 I -spanoj 
 
 r-.r1««P»eOCO>*0 00 
 
 T»> O O 
 
 8II?9 
 
 •saoiiBO 
 
 •spanoj 
 
 -fiasuno rA 
 
 ci Tf »■- c. ri "t; w -^ p-^ ■'t oc ?i :.5 o -.i*^ od c-i '.t o 
 
 O O O O r-J p.^ r-' r-«' ri Ci ^' t^ oC ^1 ■.* c" CJ •« 00 
 
 -<1-l^r-iU5 OO 
 
 cocwMttxse^tfjocw-* 
 o d c> 1-^ t-I i-H «•! e4 ?« CO e 
 
 c 
 w 
 
 o 
 
 : o o o o : : : : 
 : ci -J- c » : : : : 
 
 :« st-i-i" : ; : ; 
 
 
 
 '^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ojoiw CO CO : : ; : 
 
 1 o o 
 
 rlO 
 
 M -* to CO O « 
 
 r-CO^t-O>r-.CC»/?^C0^CS*l 
 
 -ftoooocQO :oooo 
 
 .-tp-WCO'^:Ol-.«>C;wMOCO 
 I-. — o» o c 
 
 COJOC-* - torico'^oooo 
 
 Ca CI jC OL oc I'; I-.; ^ ^ ?D r« u: -t 
 
 Oi-HC^CC"^«0®t.^COO&CO?<-.C 
 
 ^ o o o ': : : ; 
 
 31 CO CI a» 
 
 :Fii-iiMeoco-*->»"0 0ooo 
 
 •p-NcO'+uOd-accRcrsroo 
 
 •saaniio 
 
 •sisjjBg 
 
 'S3JUU(^) 53 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■^ 
 
 
 
 -♦ 
 
 COri 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1-1 « D3 -* •■# O O 
 
 1-OC 
 
 S : : 
 
 ~(N-C (O 00 O !<"•<> 
 
 IC-I-C 
 
 
 
 
 
 -cig 
 
 "bo ci" : -*"o6 c) 
 
 
 •*oc 
 
 
 " 
 
 c< M ••1' >ra » I- 
 
 o o — 
 
 CI CO IT. «; I- 
 
 00 o 
 
 o.^ 
 
 ^ oc T» 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 -^sg i 
 
 ■* 
 
 00 c< 
 
 :"* ^ 2 
 
 :-l< CO 
 
 :oo : 00 : 
 
 00 
 
 
 00 
 
 
 
 •MCO 
 
 
 Or-< 7< 
 
 U5 t- O "N »c 
 
 a 7Z '^ '^ t~ 
 
 00 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 2| 
 
 r- CI o" 
 
 
 O X)-J" 
 
 iNOCrJI 
 
 :e<oo 
 
 too :oo : 
 
 00 
 
 
 00 
 
 
 
 1-1 M M CC ■* U5 
 
 ;c » 1~ 
 
 .« -M O 1- ut 
 
 r- 7) :0 M -t 
 
 il 
 
 o 
 
 GS 
 
 S§ i 
 
 
 ""g ; 
 
 •SIIOIJVJJ JO OJJ 
 
 
5TJ 
 
 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 EH 
 
 
 w 
 
 
 OQ 
 
 
 W 
 
 
 » 
 
 
 HH 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 h-l 
 
 
 « 
 
 
 » 
 
 ^ 
 
 s 
 
 ■* 
 
 
 
 f^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 CC 
 
 ^ 
 
 1-4 
 
 S 
 
 Ah 
 
 Hi 
 
 & 
 
 o 
 
 QQ 
 
 Ph 
 
 O 
 
 
 Fs< 
 
 
 Jz; 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 1— 1 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 H* 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 S3 
 
 
 <y 
 
 
 (3 
 
 
 Pi 
 
 •^ '^ a) « 
 ->^ > r r 
 
 I 
 
THE STAFF. 
 
 513 
 
 b: 
 
 n 
 
 a 
 
 
 •poia 
 
 
 •qSno|jnj uq 
 
 
 •jxt^idsoq jTijanoS o:) ■jnag 
 
 
 •90IAJ8S tnojj paSjisqosid 
 
 
 •p3}J3S3(I 
 
 
 •Xjnp 01 paojnia'^ 
 
 
 •po^jirapv 
 
 
 Complaint. 
 
 
 •ifutsdraoQ 
 
 
 •sdjoo JO lueiniSa'jj 
 
 
 •JIUTJH 
 
 
 
 
514 
 
 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 5" 
 
 a 
 
 1 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 5" 
 
 -a 
 a 
 
 EH 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 9 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 Monday. 
 
 
 
 
 Sunday. 
 
 
 
 
 s 
 ■< 
 
 
 
 
 c ** >^ m .> 
 
 > •- 
 
 Ml ; t 
 
 § II S "f .2 ^ g « 
 
 Si . ." r; « - ~ i^ s 
 
 C3 •S 
 
 " 2 2 tc 
 
 ? o ^ 
 
 c ^ o - — -r - 
 - - -^^ c - ^ '- .5 
 
 O tn " . C '^— u " 
 Ci..:i J— >>= = &;.^„ 
 'i 1 Z g i ^ § S .2 -2 
 
 ^ to. ^ X ■•J 
 o a> .— 
 5 MO 
 
 fc o -3 >,« iJ-S jaH 
 aim-; i: :; c " ■:? "" 
 
 -^3 . c r: a ^■S « ' o 
 ^ a ^ - "^ou:<u^ 
 
 ^ .= 1 s :s -2 .2 „ 5 .2 . 
 
 © *^ £ '" 5 i>i.cs ■^ _ ^ &i 
 
 ^ c.S 
 III 
 
 _ a o • - -Ho ^ 
 
 
 c - = O 
 
 5 5 c " 
 
 I. o 
 
 c i^-e 
 
 ft,-^-g o a S 
 
 o r ta J^ iJ ce S ?^' 
 
 '^ c o - — t;^ ~ 
 
 a, ;3 ■ - eu b . 
 a -5 »: " • 
 
 c t ^ ]d ^ 
 
 S g 5 S B: 
 « c w}.:: 2 n ~ .t .- — c 
 
 ' o I. 
 
 i 
 
THE STAFF. 
 
 515 
 
 •sja^JBiib uj 
 
 •lB}Klsoq uj 
 
 •paia j 
 
 ■ITJlidsoq UManoS o^ ^nag >■ 
 
 ■poSjuqDsiQ 
 
 
 iCjnp 0} pou.uiioH 
 
 
 K hi H 
 S 2 « 
 
 n E- B 
 f2 "^fS 
 
 •sjaiJ'Bnb nj 
 
 •ITJ^iiisoq nj 
 
 •>l.ns uo>n?x 
 
 •R.iojj'Bnb nj 
 
 •IT!)idsoq nj 
 
516 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 Article XV.. 
 BATTLES. 
 
 793. A battle is a general action between two armies : if only a small 
 portion of the forces are engaged, it is usually denominated a combat, 
 an affair, a sJcirniiiili, etc., according to the character of the engage- 
 ment. Battles are of three kinds: 1st. Defensive battles, or those 
 fought in a chosen position by an army which awaits the attack of an 
 enemy. 2d. Offetisive battles, or those made by an army which attacks 
 the enemy drawn up in position and awaiting the attack. 3d. The 
 mixed or unforeseen battles, which occur between two armies meeting on 
 the march. 
 
 794. AVhen an armj' awaits the attack, it takes its position and forms 
 its line of battle according to the nature of the ground, and the sup- 
 posed character and strength of the enemy's forces. When some im- 
 portant position is to be protected by au army, such as when a siege is 
 to be covered, a capital to be protected, depots of supplies guarded, or 
 some point important to the operations of the campaign is to be held, 
 such battles are usually given. 
 
 795. The first condition to bo satisfied by a position is, that the open- 
 ings shall be more favorable for falling on the enemy when he has 
 approached to the desired point than those which he can have for 
 attacking our line. Second, the artillery should be so posted as to 
 command all the avenues by which the enemy can approach. Third, 
 wo should, if possible, have good ground upon which to manceuvre our 
 troops unseen by the enemy. Fourth, we should have a full view of the 
 enemy as he advances to the attack. Fifth, the flanks of our line should 
 be well protected by natural or artificial obstacles. Si.xth, we should 
 have the means for effecting a retreat in the event of a defeat, without 
 exposing the army to destruction. 
 
 It is seldom that all these conditions can bo satisfied at the same 
 time; sometimes the very means of satisfying one maybe in viola- 
 tion of another. A river, a forest, or a mountain, which secures the 
 flank of an army, m»y become an obstacle to a retreat; again, the 
 
 J 
 
BATTLKS. 517 
 
 position may be dilfieult of attack in front, or on the wings, and at the 
 same time unfavorable for retreat. 
 
 AVe may sometimes be obliged to make the attack at all hazards, to 
 prevent the junction of two of the enemy's corps, to cut off forces that 
 are separated from the main body by a river, etc. As a general rule, 
 the attacking force has a moral superiority over the defensive, but this 
 advantage is frequently counterbalanced by other conditions. 
 
 796. When wo are acting on the offensive, the main thing is to 
 seize upon the decisive point of the field. This point is determined 
 by the configuration of the ground, the position of the contending 
 forces, the object to be attained by the battle ; or by a combination of 
 these. 
 
 797. It frequently happens that battles result from the meeting of 
 armies in motion, both parties acting on the offensive. Indeed, an army 
 that is acting on the defensive may, on the approach of the enemy, 
 advance to meet him while on the march. Battles of this kind may 
 partake of the mixed character of offensive and defensive actions, or 
 they may be in the nature of a surprise to both armies. 
 
 798. An order of battle is the particular disposition given to the 
 troops for a determined manoeuvre on the field of battle. A line of 
 battle is the general name applied to troops drawn up in their usual 
 order, without any determined manoeuvre; it may apply to defensive 
 positions or to offensive operations, where no particular object has 
 been decided on. Military writers lay down twelve orders of bat- 
 tle, viz, : 
 
 1st. The simple parallel order, in which the two armies occupy 
 parallel lines. This is regarded as the worst possible position for a 
 battle, for the two parties here fight with equal chances, and the 
 combat mu^' continue until accident, superior numbers, or mere 
 physical strength decides the day ; skill can have but little influence 
 in such a contest. 
 
 2d. The parallel order with a crotchet, in which one of the wings 
 is thrown forward or back, giving the line this form. This order is 
 sometimes used in defensive position, and in the offensive with the 
 crotchet thrown forward. Wellington, at Waterloo, formed the parallel 
 order with the retired crotchet on the right flank. 
 
 .3d. The parallel order reinforced on one or both wings. This order 
 may in certain cases secure the victory, but it has many objections. 
 The weak part of the line is too near the enemy, and may, notwith- 
 standing the efforts of the general to the contrary, become engaged, 
 and run the risk of defeat, thereby counterbalancing the advantages 
 gained by having a strong point. Neither will the reinforced part of 
 the line be able to profit by any success it may gain, and take the 
 
518 MA^L■AL iOU VOLUMEERS AND iMlLlTIA. 
 
 euemy's line in flunk anJ rear, without endangering its connection 
 with the rest of the line. 
 
 •Jth. The parallel order reiul'orccd on the centre. The same objec- 
 tiuns are applicublc to this as to the last. 
 
 oth. The simple oLlitjue order, in which the two lines are oblique to 
 each other. 
 
 6th. The oblique order rein forced on the assailing wing. This is 
 suited to an inferior aruiy attacking a superior, for it euiibles the 
 general to carry the mass of his force on a single jioiut of the enemy's 
 line, while the weaker wing is out of reach of immediate attack, and 
 holds the remainder of the enemy's line in check by acting as a 
 reserve ready to be concentrated on the favorable point as occasion may 
 require. 
 
 7th. The perpendicular order on one or both wings, in which the 
 attacking force occupies one or more lines perpendicular to the de- 
 fensive, and on one or both of its flanks. A battle may begin with 
 this order, but soon it must change to the oblique. An attack upon 
 both wings can only be made with safely when the attacking force is 
 vastly superior. 
 
 Slh. The concave order, in which the army occupies a curve con- 
 cave to the enemy ; in this order the wings are in advance of the 
 centre. It may be used with advantage in some cases and in par- 
 ticular localities. 
 
 9th. The convex order, in which the array is disposed iu a curve 
 convex to the enemy, the centre being thus thrown in advance of the 
 wings. This order is sometimes formed to cover a defile, to attack a 
 concave line, or to ojipose an atlack before or after the passapc of a 
 river. 
 
 10th. The order by echelon on one or both wings, in which the army 
 is arranged in echelon from right to left, or from left to right. This 
 order on one wing may be frequently employed with advantage; but if 
 it be made on both wings, there is the same objection to its use as to 
 the perpendicular order on both wings. 
 
 11th. The order by echelon on the centre, in which the centre is in 
 the advance, and the wings are disposed in echelon to the right and left. 
 This order may be employed with success against an army formed in a 
 thin or too extended line of battle, for then it would penetrate and 
 break the line. 
 
 • The echelon order possesses many advantages. The several corps 
 composing the army may mana'uvre sejiaratcly, and, consequently, 
 with greater ease. Each echelon covers the flank of the one which 
 precedes it; and uU may be combined to eflect a given object, and 
 extended without weakening any part too much. 
 
BATTLES. 519 
 
 12lli. The cnmbiiied orders of attack in columns on the centre and 
 one wing at the same time. This is better suited than either of the 
 others for attacking a strong lino. 
 
 79'J. No general rule can be laid down as to which of these orders of 
 battle should be employed, or whether either should be exclusively 
 followed throughout the battle. The question must be decided by the 
 general himself on the ground, where all the circumstances may bo 
 duly considered. An order well suited to one position might be the 
 worst possible in another. 
 
 Whatever the plan adopted by the attacking general, he should 
 endeavor to dislodge the enemy, by piercing or turning his line. If he 
 can conceal his real intentions and deceive the enemy respecting the 
 true point of attack, success will be more certain. 
 
 800. We will now discuss the particular manner of arranging the 
 troops on the line of battle, or the manner of employing each arm, 
 beginning with the infontiy, as this ia the mt st important. 
 
 Poxition and furnialion. — On the field of battle, whether the object 
 be to attack or defend, the infantry is divided into three bodies — an 
 advanced guard, the main body, and a reserve. Their relative propor- 
 tion will depend upon the total force and the character of the position 
 occupied. The advanced guard must be of sufficient strength to hold 
 the enemy in check, but at the same time the main body, upon which 
 the brunt of the action should fall, must not be left of insufficient 
 force, by unnecessarily increasing the advanced guar(f ; and the reserve 
 should be strong enough to repair any disaster that may befall the 
 main body, or to profit by its success in accomplishing the complete 
 overthrow of the enemy. 
 
 These three bodies are separated from each other by intervals which 
 will depend upon the nature of the ground. The advanced guard 
 occupying the front ; the m:yn body at a distance from one hundred 
 and fifty to three hundred paces in its rear ; and the reserve at a like 
 interval iu rear of the main body. Where the ground, for example, ia 
 undulating, and therefore favorable to masking the troops from the 
 enemy's fire, these intervals may, if requisite, be reduced to eighty or 
 one hundred paces. 
 
 The troops composing these three bodies will be formed either in 
 columns of battalions, or be deployed, according to the circumstances 
 under which they may be placed. For an attack, for evolution, or for 
 defence against cavalry, the formation of columns of battalions is best. 
 To repel the enemy's attack by a fire, and, in some cases, to present a 
 less favorable mark to his artillery, the battalions are deployed. The 
 battalions, whether deployed or in column, preserve the proper inter- 
 
520 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 vals for evolutions; those interval.* may be increased in obstructed 
 ground without weakening the defence. 
 
 The battalions composing the main body may be dra^n up in one or 
 two lines. The latter usually obtains only when a largo force is 
 present. In this case the reserve no longer holds the position of a 
 third line, as in tho other, but forms an independent boily, to be used 
 according to the emergency, the seconil line supporting the battalions 
 of the first, and, for this purpose, occupying positions to the rear 
 opposite to their intervals. 
 
 801. Defence. — When the position is taken up to receive the enemy's 
 attack, and there either to remain on the defensive or to assume the 
 offensive, as circumstances may justify, the advanced guard will be 
 posted on the ground most favorable to hold the enemy in check, and 
 so force him, by disputing it with tenacity, to develop his means and 
 plans. This is best done by a judicious combat of skirmishers, who, 
 for this purpose, are thrown forward three or four hundred paces to 
 feel the enemy, and are only reinforced when closely pressed. 
 
 Whether the advanced guard shall maintain its ground obstinately 
 until reinforced by the main body, or whether it shall fall back, either 
 on the flanks or to the rear of the main body, must be determined by 
 the strength of the position. If this be so strong that the enemy's loss 
 in carrying it must be great, then it should be pertinaciously main- 
 tained ; in the contrary case it must, after a suitable show of resistance, 
 bo abandoned. 
 
 As a general rule, troops should be placed as much out of view as 
 practicable before they go into action, by taking advantage of covers 
 offered by tho ground. The main body should be kept masked in this 
 way until it is called to engage tho enemy. If it advance to support 
 tho advanced guard, it will usually attack with the bayonet; if the 
 advanced guard is called in, the main body will usually receive tho 
 enemy by its fire, ihe battalions being deployed for this purpose. If 
 tho enemy is staggered by this fire, or, in advancing, shows, by the 
 wavering or confusion of his line, a want of confidence, the fire may be 
 followed up either by a charge of the troops in line, or they may 
 be formed in columns of attack before charging, if tho enemy perse- 
 veres in bis onward movement. A charge by a column, when the 
 enemy is within fifty paces, will prove effective if resolutely made. 
 
 The reserve is composed of the most reliable troops. It should be 
 distinguished for cool courage ; acting under all circumstances, cither 
 defensive or offensive, with circumspection and determined resolution. 
 
 As the object of the reserve is to infuse greater energy into tho action 
 of the main body, and, if necessary, to strike a last and decisive blow, 
 it should be kopt masked from the enemy's fire and view until ealled 
 
BATTLES. 521 
 
 into action. The proper moment for engaging the reserve is either 
 when the enemy has been shaken in his attack by the resistance offered 
 by the main body, or when the latter is unable further to resist the 
 enemy's efforts. If engaged too soon, the resistance offered to the 
 reserve may prevent its making a decisive blow ; if not engaged in 
 time, the main body may be too far exhausted and disorganized to 
 rally. 
 
 In cases where the reserve forms a second line, to support the main 
 body, it should approach the first line when it becomes engaged, to be 
 ready to replace it when circumstances may render it necessary. The 
 advanced guard, in such cases, should retire to the rear, to act as a 
 reserve. 
 
 802. Attach. — In the attack of infantry, the same fundamental dis- 
 positions are made as for the defensive. The advanced guard will not 
 throw forward its skirmishers until they are near enough to engage the 
 enemy. The line of skirmishers should be strongly supported, and 
 will press the enemy with vigor and without relaxation. If the force 
 engaged be small, the main body will regulate its movements by those 
 of the lino of skirmishers; if considerable, the reverse will obtain. 
 
 The main body and reserve follow the advanced guard in column, 
 preserving the requisite intervals. The columns should take every 
 advantage of the ground to mask their movements — getting rapidly 
 over anywhere they are much exposed to fire. So soon as the ad- 
 vanced guard is checked, it will fall back cither on the flanks of the 
 columns, or to the rear; and the main body will be immediately 
 brought into action, either by deploying and opening its fire, or by a 
 vigorous charge with the bayonet. If the main body falters in its 
 attack, or gives any signs of want of resolution, the reserve should ad- 
 vance at once through the intervals, and make a vigorous charge with 
 the bayonet. 
 
 If the attack by the main body is made with the bayonet, the inter- 
 val between it and the columns of the reserve may be lessened to eighty 
 or one hundred paces. The flanks of the columns of attack, and the 
 intervals between them, should be occupied by skirmishers. This is 
 an important precaution; as, by forcing the enemy to deliver his fire 
 before the columns have reached within a destructive range, the main 
 obstacle to their onward movement will be removed. 
 
 803. Pursuit. — If the assailed retires, the pursuit may be conducted 
 with system and in good order. The line nearest the enemy will throw 
 forward a few troops in pursuit; which, in most cases, will be preceded 
 by skirmishers. The line in close order will follow these troops until it 
 attains a good position to receive the enemy, should he make an offen- 
 sive movement, when it will be halted and formed in readiness for 
 
 44 
 
522 MANUAL rOK VOLUNTEKRS AM) MILITIA. 
 
 action. A pursuit by infantry alone cannot be pu.«hed far, even should 
 the enemy retire without any order or show of resistance, us the re- 
 treating force will soon distance their pursuers. 
 
 804. lletreat. — When, cither in the defensive, or offen.tive, it becomes 
 necessary to retire, the first point to be attended to is to withdraw the 
 troops engaged either to a good position to their rear, where they can 
 halt and face the enemy, or else behind the line in their rear, which 
 should hold the assailants in check, and allow the retreating troops to 
 fall back in good order. Having fairly got disengaged, dispositions 
 must be promptly made to withdraw from the field. This ma}' bo done 
 by the entire force moving oflT together, if the enemj' shows no disposi- 
 tion to follow up his success with energy; or, in the contrary case, by 
 retiring by successive portions; the line which withdraws falling some 
 150 paces by the rear of the one by which it is covered, while falling 
 back, and then forming, to cover in turn, the retreat of the latter. 
 
 The dispositions made in the retreat will depend entirely upon the 
 character of the enemy's pursuit and the features of the ground. It 
 will usually be made in columns, C()vercd by skirmishers if the pursuit 
 is made by infantry alone; if by cavalry, the retreat must be made 
 with great circumsjiection ; the troops retiring slowlj' and in good 
 order, adopting the formation against cavalrj'; never hastening the 
 march, unless near a good position for defence, which should be at- 
 tained as rapidly as possible, unless closely pressed bj' the cavalry. 
 
 If it be necessary to continue the retreat for some marches, under the 
 eye of the enemy, a rear guard must bo formed; selecting from a fourth 
 to a third of the entire force for this service. The main duty of the 
 rear guard is to hinder the cnemj' from pressing too closely on the 
 main body; and it should, therefore, under no circumstances allow 
 itself to bo forced back upon the main body. The dispositions adopted 
 by the rear guard will depend upon the features of the ground; its rear 
 will usually be covered by a line of skirmishers. The rear guard will 
 keep within good supporting distaneo of the main body; and, when 
 pressed by the enemy, the latter, whenever a favorable position offers, 
 will halt and form, to cover the former, and force the enemy to greater 
 circumspection. 
 
 805. Measures for protract iii<j an cmjaycmcnt. — In the attack, as in 
 the defence, it may fretjuently become an object to protract an engage- 
 ment, without coining to any decisive result; either for the purpose of 
 holding a position for a certain time, to favor other objects, as the 
 arrival of reinforcements; or to occupy an adversary upon one point, 
 while a decisive blow is preparing on another. This game can be 
 played only upon ground favorable to alterations from the defensive to 
 the oircu.>iive; and should only be intrusted to troops thoroughly con- 
 
BATTLES. 523 
 
 versant with the duties of skirmishers. The main body is kept some 
 two thousand paces to the rear of the skirmishers in such affairs; tak- 
 ing advantage of the ground, and making suitable dispositions of the 
 troops to avoid the effects of the enemy's artillery. Small columns are 
 thrown forward between itself and the troops engaged, which take post 
 in covered ground, to be on h.and to support the skirmishers. The 
 troops engaged should be promptly reinforced when the enemy presses 
 onward; and attempts should be made, by charging him in flank, to 
 force him to retire. The troops in action should be frequently relieved, 
 and the opportunity should be seized, when the fresh troops come up, 
 to make an onward movement on the enemy, and force him from any 
 points he may have gained. 
 
 806. Defence againut cnv<dry. — When infantry is threatened by cav- 
 alry, the proper formation to repel its charge is that of squares. If but 
 one square is formed, it must rely on its own resources to beat off the 
 enemy; but when there are several they may give mutual support by 
 bringing a flank fire from one upon a force advancing, or either of the 
 two contiguous to it. The safety of infantry against cavalry will de- 
 pend upon the preservation of perfect coolness, good order, and connec- 
 tion in the ranks ; the avoidance of any precipitate movements which 
 might bring about a surprise; and the husbanding of its ammunition, 
 and reservation of its fire until the enemy is within a deadly range. 
 Well disciplined infantry, while in position, and when not exposed to 
 a fire of artillery, may securely trust to its own resources to repulse the 
 best cavalry, so long as it adopts the proper precautions. If annoyed, 
 as sometimes may happen, by the fire of a few horsemen, advanced to 
 draw the fire of the squares, it will be better to throw out some skir- 
 mishers, ten or twelve paces from the squares, to keep off such attacks 
 than to open a fire from the squares. 
 
 807. Defence, etc., against artillery. — Infantry may take advantage 
 either of covers presented by the features of the ground, or of occa- 
 sionally shifting its position, to avoid the fire of artillery. Very 
 slight undulations, obstructions, like the low banks along the borders 
 of ditches, will serve to cover troops, by causing the shot to rise above 
 them. If no covers are at hand, the chances of casualties, when 
 within point-blank range, may be diminished bj' moving forward or 
 backward some fifty paces; if the fire be a ricochet, the position 
 should be shifted some fifty paces to the right or left. The enemy's 
 batteries may be annoyed, and sometimes be forced to change their 
 position, by sending out good maclvsmen, who advance singly to within 
 some 250 paces of them; when, lying down, they can pick off the 
 officers, men, and horses. 
 
 808. Attack of artillery. — AVhenever it is found necessary to carry a 
 
524 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 buttery by the bayonet, the troops for this duty are divided into two 
 detat-hmcnt? : one of which is charged with capturing the guns, and 
 the other with attacking the supports of the battery. 
 
 The dispositions made by the detachment which mov«s against the 
 guns will be the usual one of skirmishers: the line surrounding the 
 battery, and opening their fire upon it when within about 250 paces, 
 taking advantage for this purpose of any covers to screen the men. 
 The sujiports of the line of skirmishers should be kept well to the rear, 
 to be ready against a flank movement on the line. If this manoeuvre 
 succeeds in drawing tlie fire of the guns, and any confusion is observed 
 among the men, then a rush must be made immediately upon them 
 with the bayonet. 
 
 Tlic detachment against the supports of the battery will make its 
 dispositions according to the kind of troops which composes the sup- 
 ports. If of infantry, the detachment to seize the guns, divided into 
 two portions, will advance either in line or column, as may be best, 
 on the flanks of the line of skirmishers; gradually getting in advance 
 of it, and closing on the flanks of the batterj', so as to attack the sup- 
 ports in flank; or else they may keep to the rear of the line of skir- 
 mishers, in order to tempt the supports to move forward, and thus mask 
 the fire of their guns. If the supports are of cavalry, the detachment, 
 divided into two columns, will follow the line of skirmishers, in rear of 
 the flanks, to cover it against a charge of cavalrj'. 
 
 CAVALRY. 
 
 809. Position. — This arm is usually placed in the rear of the infantry, 
 on ground favorable to its manoeuvres, and where it will bo masked 
 from fire until the moment arrives to bring it into action; here, if act- 
 ing on the defensive, the cavalry watches its opportunity to support 
 the other troops, driving back the enemy, by prompt and vigorous 
 charges, when these are hard pressed ; or, if on the offensive, biding 
 its time to rush upon the assailant and complete his destruction, when 
 his. ranks commence to waver or show signs of disorganization from 
 the assaults of the other arras. 
 
 Formation. — The habitual formation of cavalry for the attack is a 
 line of two ranks, with a reserve or support in rear. The supports are 
 indispensably recjuisite to guard against those chances of danger to 
 which cavalry is particularly exposed, if attacked in turn, when in a 
 state of partial disorganization, after a successful charge, or when 
 threatened by an oflen.sive movement against its flanks. The supports 
 otfer a safeguard against either of these dangers; for, if the front 
 line is brought up by the enemy, after a successful charge, it can 
 
 1 
 
BATTLES. 525 
 
 retire and rally in rear of the supports ; and if the enemy makes a 
 movement against the flanlvs, the supports, placed behind them and in 
 column, can form and anticipate the enemy's charge. For the fore- 
 going reasons, cavalry should not give way to a headlong pursuit after 
 a successful charge, unle.«s its supports are at hand ; and, in cases 
 where a charge is made without supports, a portion only should engage 
 in pursuit, the rest being rallied to form a support. 
 
 Cavalry is seldom called on to use fire-arms. When on outpost 
 service, or acting on the defensive on ground unfavorable to charging, 
 a portion of the force may be dispersed as flankers, to hold the enemy 
 in check by their fire. In this case their movements are regulated in 
 the same way .as other skirmishers. 
 
 810. Defence. — The defensive qualities of cavalry lie in the offensive. 
 A body of cavalry which waits to receive a charge of cavalry, or is 
 exposed to a fire of infantry, or artillery, must either retire or be 
 destroyed. Tliis essential qu.ality of cavalry renders its service invalu- 
 able in retreats when the enemy pursues with vigor. In such cases it 
 should be held in constant readiness to take advantage of every spot 
 favorable to its action ; and, by short and energetic charges, force the 
 enemy to move with circumspection. 
 
 811. Attack ognintt in/'tintn/. — So long as infantry maintains its po- 
 sition firmly, particularly if the ground is at all unfavorable to the 
 movements of cavalry, the chances are against a successful attack by 
 the latter. Cavalry should therefore wait patiently until a way is pre- 
 pared for its action, by the fire of artillery on the enemy's infantry; or 
 until the infantry has become crippled and exhausted by being kept in 
 action for some time ; or else, watching its opportunity, make a charge 
 while the infantry is in motion, so as to surprise it before it can form 
 to receive the attack. 
 
 Cavalry should direct its charge on that point of the enemy's in- 
 fantry where it will itself be e.xposed to the least column of fire. If 
 the infantry is in line, the charge should be made on one of its 
 flanks ; if in square, on one of the angles of the square ; and when 
 several squares are formed, so as to afford mutual support by their 
 fire, selecting the squares on the flanks as most vulnerable, from their 
 position. 
 
 The formation usually recommended for charging against squares, 
 is that of three squadrons in line at double distance ; the leading 
 squadron being followed by the others, either directly in its rear, 
 or else the squadrons may ba formed in echelon, successively over- 
 lapping each other by about the front of a platoon. The angle of 
 the Square is charged by each squadron in succession, if the charge 
 of the one preceding it fails ; the repulsed squadrons each wheeling to 
 
52G MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 the right or left, on retiring, to leave tlie way clear for its successor. A 
 fourth squadron in coluuin follows those in line, to surround the square, 
 and make prisoners if it should be broken by the charge. 
 
 To draw the fire of the infantry before charging, a few jskilful 
 flankers may be thrown forward, to open a fire on the square. 
 Stratagem may also be tried, by moving along the front of the 
 infantry, at some 400 paces, and then charging, if it is attempted 
 to throw away its fire at this distance. In an attack where several 
 squares are in line, if one fires to second another it should instantly bo 
 changed. 
 
 812. Attack against artillery. — In attacks against artillery, the de- 
 tachment of cavalry should be divided into three bodies ; one-fourth of 
 the detachment being charged with carrying the guns; one-half to 
 attack the supports of the battery ; and the remaining fourth acting as 
 a reserve, to cover the parties in advance from an nfTensive movement 
 against their flanks or rear. 
 
 The party to secure the guns make their attack in dispersed order 
 and endeavor to gain the flanks of the battery. When the battery has 
 a fair sweep over the ground along which they must advance, they 
 should, by manoeuvering and false attacks, try to confuse the artillerists, 
 and draw their fire before making their charge. 
 
 The attack against the support of the battery will be directed in the 
 usual manner, the party manoeuvering to gain their flanks. 
 
 ARTILLERY. 
 
 813. Position. — The manner of placing artillery, and its employment, 
 must bo regulated by its relative importance under given circum- 
 stances, with respect to the action of other arms. In the defen- 
 sive, the principal part is usually assigned to the artillery ; and 
 the positions taken up by the other arms will, therefore, be subordinate 
 to those of this arm. In offensive movements the reverse generally 
 obtains. 
 
 814. Defence. — In defensive positions the security of the batteries 
 is of the last importance. Unless the batteries are on points which are 
 inaccessible to the enemy's cavalry and infantry, they must be 
 placed under the protection of the other troops, and be outflanked by 
 them. 
 
 As in the defensive we should bo i)rcpared to receive the enemy on 
 every point, the batteries must bo distributed along the entire front of 
 the position occupied, and on those points from which they can obtain 
 a good sweep over the avenues of approach to it; the guns being 
 masked, when the ground favors, from the enemy's view, until the 
 proper moment arrives for opening the fire. 
 
BATTLES. 527 
 
 The distance between tlie batteries should not be much over 600 
 paces, so that by their fire they may cover well the ground intervening 
 between them, and afford mutual support; the light guns being placed 
 on the more salient points of the front, from their shorter range and 
 greater facility of manoiuvring; the heavier guns on the more retired 
 points. Guns of various calibre should not be placed in the same 
 battery. A sufficient interval should also be left between batteries of 
 diiTerent calibre, to prevent the enemy from judging by the variations 
 in the efi"ect of the shot of the \Veight of metal of the batteries. 
 
 Those positions for batteries should be avoided from which the shot 
 must pass over other troops to attain the enemy. And those should 
 be sought for from which a fire can be maintained until the enemy has 
 approached eveA within good muskct-range of them. 
 
 When the wings of a position are weak, batteries of the heaviest 
 calibre should be place<l to secure them. 
 
 A sufficient number of pieces — selecting for the object in view horse 
 artillery in preference to any other — should be held in reserve for a 
 moment of need, to be thrown upon a point where the enemy's progress 
 threatens danger, or to be used in covering the retreat. 
 
 The collection of a large number of pieces in a single battery is a 
 dangerous arrangement, particularly at the outset of an engagement. 
 The exposure of so many guns togetVier might present a strong induce- 
 ment to the enemy to make an efl^ort to carry the battery ; a feat the 
 more likely to succeed, as it is difficult either to withdraw the guns or 
 change their position promptly, after their fire is opened; and one 
 which, if successful, might entail a fatal disaster on the assailed, from 
 the loss of so many pieces at once. 
 
 In all defensive dispositions the ammunition should be most care- 
 fully husbanded. A fire should never be opened until the enemy is 
 within good range, and, when once opened, be continued with perse- 
 verance and coolness np to the last moment in which it can be made 
 cflFective. 
 
 815. Attaclc. — In the outset of offensive movements, good positions 
 should be selected for the heaviest pieces, from which they can main- 
 tain a strong fire on the enemy until the lighter pieces and the columns 
 of attack are brought into action. These positions should be taken on 
 the flanks of the ground occupied by the assailant, or on the centre, if 
 more favorable to the end to be obtained. In all cases, wide intervals 
 should be left between the heavy batteries and the other troops, in 
 order that the latter may not suffer from the return fire which the 
 assailed will probably open on the batteries. For the same reason, 
 care should be taken not to place other troops behind the point occu- 
 pied by a battery, where they would be exposed to the return fire of 
 
528 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 the assailed; when this cannot he avoided, the troops should he so 
 placed as to be covered by any undulation of the ground, or else be 
 deployed in time to lessen the effects of the shot. 
 
 The artillery which moves with the column of attack should be 
 divided into several strong batteries, as the object in this case is to 
 produce a decisive impression upon a few pojnts of the enemy's line, 
 by bringing an overwhelming fire to bear upon these points. These 
 batteries should keep near enough to the other troops to be in safety 
 from any attempts of the assailed to capture them. Their usual posi- 
 tions will be on the flanks, and near the heads of the columns of 
 attack ; the intervals between the batteries being sufficient for the fire 
 manfKuvres of the other troops in large bodies. The manoeuvres of 
 these batteries should be made with promptitude, so that no time may 
 be lost for the action of their fire. They should get rapidly over unfa- 
 vorable ground to good positions for firing, and maintain these as long 
 as possible ; detaching, in such cases, a few pieces to accompany the 
 column of attack. In all the movements of the batteries, great care 
 should be taken not to place them so that they shall in the least 
 impede the operations of the other troops. 
 
COURTS MARTIAL. 52:j 
 
 ^ 
 
 Article XVI. 
 COUETS MARTIAL. 
 
 816. Courts- Martial are military court-s instituted for the investi- 
 gation and punishment of all offences committed by officem, soldiem, 
 eutlers, retainers to the camp, and persons servinrj irith the army, in vio- 
 lation of military law and the custom of war. Their powers and duties 
 are laid down in genefral terms in the Articles of War, from Article 64 
 to 91 inclusive. 
 
 817. Commissioned officers clothed with military rank and entitled 
 to command are the only persons in the Confederate States service who 
 are eligible as members of courts m.irtial ; this excludes all paymasters, 
 surgeons, and assistant-surgeons whose rank is only assimilated. 
 
 818. Courts martial are of three kinds. General, Regimental, and 
 Garrison. 
 
 A genrt-al court martial is competent to lake jurisdiction over any 
 offence of a military nature that can be committed by military persons; 
 and its powers to award punishments are coextensive with this right. 
 Commissioned officers are not amenable to anj' other than a general 
 court martial, and it is provided by Article 75 of the Articles of War 
 that they shall not be tried by officers of an inferior rank, if it can be 
 avoided. 
 
 819. A general court martial can only be appointed or assembled by 
 the President of the Confederate States, by the governor of a state as 
 commauder-in-chief of the forces of the state, by a general command- 
 ing an army, or by a general or colonel commanding a separate military 
 department. The warrant for assembling the court, or the appoint- 
 ment of the members thereof, is in the form of an order, and issues 
 directly from the officer to whom the law has delegated such power. 
 
 820. It is provided by Article C-t of the Articles of AVar that general 
 courts martial may consist of any number of members, from five to 
 thirteen inclusively; but they shall not consist of less than thirteen 
 when that number can be convened without manifest injury to the 
 service. It is to be observed, however, that the oliieer empowered to 
 appoint a court is invested with discretionary authority as to the nyxisi 
 
 4.) 
 
530 MANUAL I'UR VOLUNTEKUS AND MILITIA. 
 
 bcr of ortioefs which shall compose it, aud thi;ir riiiik relatively to that 
 of the accused. 
 
 821. The proceedings and decisions of general courts martial aro 
 frubject to review or revision by the officer ordering the same, or the 
 officer coinnianding the troops for the time being. In the Confederate 
 States service no sentence of a general court martial in time of peace, 
 extending to the loss of life, or the dismission of a commissioned officer, 
 or which shall, either in time of peace or war, respect a general officer, 
 can be carried into execution, until after the whole proceedings shall 
 have been transmitted to the Sccretarj' of War, to be laid before the 
 President of the Confederate States for his confirmation or disapproval, 
 and orders in the case. All other sentences may be confirmed and ex- 
 ecuted by the officer ordering the court, or the commanding officer for 
 the time being, as the case may be. Every officer authorized to order 
 a general court martial shall have power to pardon or mitigate any 
 punishment ordered by such court, except the sentence of death, or of 
 cashiering an officer. 
 
 822. Kegimentiil and garrison courts martial take cognizance of and 
 punish offences of minor degree. The regimental court martial is or- 
 dered by the colonel or other commander of the regiment for the trial 
 of ofl'cnces in the regiment; it consists of three commissioned officers. 
 
 Garrison courts martial are in like manner composed of three com- 
 missioned oflicers, and appointed b}' the comiiianders of garrisons, 
 forts, barracks, or other places where the troops consist of mixed corps. 
 
 The proceedings of regimental and garrison courts martial are sub- 
 mitted to the officers ordering them, or to their successors in command, 
 for revision and decision on the sentences pronounced. The jurisdic- 
 tion of these courts is very limited, and can in no case extend to the 
 trial of capital cases or commissioned officers. 
 
 THE TRIAL. 
 
 823. A court martial having been deemed necessary to investigate 
 the conduct of an officer or soldier against whom a charge has been 
 preferred, the order appointing the members and judge advocate to 
 compose the same, as well as the time and jilaco of meeting, is duly 
 promulgated. 
 
 AVhen the hour has arrived for assembling, the members of the ceurt 
 martial take their places at the table according to rank, on the right 
 and left of the president, the latter at the head of the table. The 
 judge advocate is seated opposite to the president. The prisoner and 
 lii.s counsel (if he has any) have a place assigned, with the necessary 
 
COURTS MARTJAL. 631 
 
 accommodation tor writing, on the right hand of the judge advocate. 
 The witness stands near the judge advocate, on his left hand. In case 
 a third party, as prosecutor, should he permitted to appear, he will be 
 placed to the left of the judge advocate. The court being seated and 
 called to order, no member can leave his seat without the permission of 
 the president. 
 
 It is usual for the judge advocate to prepare a copy of the charges 
 for the use of the court, which is placed upon the table previous to the 
 arraignment. 
 
 The court having been called to order, and any preliminary matter 
 which may have required their attention being disposed of, it is pro- 
 claimed open. The parties are then called, and appear in court. 
 
 The prisoner, unless there be danger of escape or rescue, must appear 
 without fetters, and free from shackles of any kind ; when the court 
 adjourns, the prisoner, if a soldier, is remanded to the hands of the 
 guard. 
 
 The judge advocate now reads the order for the assembling of the 
 court. It is proper also to read the charges to be investigated, so that 
 the court may have before them the matter which they are about to 
 swear that they will "truly trj' and determine.'" 
 
 824. The order for convening the court having been read, the judge 
 advocate asks the prisoner if he has any objection to any member 
 present, named in the order, or any cause of challenge to present. 
 
 Peremptorj' challenge or challenges are not permitted, but the pris- 
 oner must assign bis reasons in writing, or, if brief, the judge advocate 
 will record them as stated. 
 
 In case a member should be challenged (and only one can be chal- 
 lenged at a time), the reasons therefor, and, when susceptible of such, 
 the reply or explanation oifered, are committed to writing as a part of 
 the minutes of the court, and make a portion of the proceedings ; and 
 the court is cleared in order to deliberate and decide on the objection 
 assigned. The member objected to always withdraws during the dis- 
 cussion which follows, and, of course, does not vote on the question. 
 Upon the reopening of the court, the judge advocate (by direction of 
 the court) makes known the decision, and the challenged member 
 resumes his seat, or withdraws altogether, as the case may be, and a 
 member in waiting, or supernumerary, if an}' be detailed, supplies his 
 place. 
 
 The judge advocate cannot be challenged on any pretence whatever. 
 
 825. The judge advocate then proceeds to administer the prescribed 
 oath; the members of the court and the judge advocate stand; the 
 person or persons to be sworn lift the right hand, ungloved, when the 
 judge a<lvocate recites in an audible voice: "You, Colonel A. B., Major 
 
5o2 MANUAL FUR VOLUNTKKRS AND MILITIA. 
 
 B. C, Major 1). F., and Captain G. II. (tliii.'< iiauiing, with his rank, 
 each membep'of tho court), d<> Bwenr that you will well and truly try 
 and determine," etc., etc. ''So help you God." (See 69th Article of 
 War.) 
 
 Tho presiding officer then administers tho oath to the judge advo- 
 cate, who observes the same form; during which time all the members 
 of the court remain standing, and observe the most decorous silence 
 and attention. 
 
 Tho same oath prescribed to be taken bj- the members of a general 
 court martial is directed to bo taken by tho members of a regimental 
 and garrison court martial. No particular oath of secrecy is required 
 of the recorder, as he is a member of tho court. 
 
 Whenever several persons are to bo tried by the samo court martial, 
 upon diflferent charges, tho court must be resworn at the commencement 
 of each trial, and the record of each case made up separately and signed 
 by the president and judge advocate. 
 
 826. The court having beeu sworn in the presence of the prisoner, the 
 judge advocate reads the charge to the prisoner in open court, whom 
 the judge advocate arraigns, by addressing by his proper title or rank, 
 and name : " You have heard the charges preferred against you : hi>w 
 say you — guilty, or not guilty? " 
 
 The prisoner may plead guilty or not guilty; but it must be made 
 simply and unqualifiedly, as nothing exculpatory can at this time bo 
 received. No njieciul justification can be offered as a plea, as such 
 would bo an anticipation of the defence. He may stand mute, that is, 
 refuse to answer; or answer foreign to the purpose; or maj- plead in 
 bar of trial. 
 
 Tlie ordinary plea is " not guilty," upon which the trial proceeds. 
 The plea being recorded, the judge advocate calls the first witness, and 
 gives notice that should there bo any persons present in court who have 
 been summoned as witnesses, they will retire until called for, as it is a 
 rule that the witnesses of neither party can be present during the exami- 
 nation of other witnesses. 
 
 827. The witness is sworn by the judge advocate, and the same form 
 of administering the oath is observed as was indicated for swearing in 
 of tho members. The words are: "You do swear (or affirm) that the 
 evidence you shall give in the cause now in hearing shall be tho truth, 
 the whole truth, and nothing but the truth, so help you God." 
 
 Tho name, rank, regiment, or corps, or distinctive condition of the 
 witness is recorded by the judge advocate at length, so that the person 
 may by the description bo easily identified. 
 
 The examination of the witnesses is always in the presence of every 
 member of the court; and tho " countenance, looks, and gestures of a 
 
COURTS MARTIATi. 538 
 
 witness " are considered of importance, as adding to or taking from 
 the weight of his testimony. The testimony is sometimes given in the 
 form of a narrative, but more frequently bj- interrogations. Narration 
 in mau}' cases is the most natural and easy method to observe, but 
 interrogation is the more direct and searching means of soliciting evi- 
 dence, and also the more certain. All evidence received is recorded in 
 the order in which it is given, and as nearly as may be in the very 
 words of the witness. In case a witness should be too ill to atteud the 
 court, the latter may adjourn to the room or bedside of the former to 
 receive his evidence. . Questions are reduced to writing by the party 
 originating them, and read aloud by the judge ailvocate, who writes 
 them on the proceedings. Should an objection be made to a question 
 on examination, the court is cleared, and a majoritj' of voices deter- 
 mines whether it shall be put or not. 
 
 A question having been rejected, is not, therefore, expunged from 
 the record, of which it makes a part, unless by consent of the parties 
 before the court, but appears on the record, with the decision of the 
 court. A party before the court cannot object to a question put by the 
 court, though he may to a. question put by a member of it, before the 
 collective opinion of the court has been expressed in relation to it. All 
 questions originating with members, and which have been received, 
 are recorded as "hi/ the court," but when made the subject of discus- 
 sion and rejection, they are entered upon the record as ''by a member." 
 
 When a witness is sworn, the party who calls him commences the 
 examination, which is styled the examination in chief; that being 
 finished, the opposite party asks what questions he may deem neces- 
 sary, and this latter interrogation is called the cross-examination. A 
 re-examination of the witness, by the first party, follows the cross- 
 examination, upon such points as the latter may have touched on, and 
 then the court put such questions as they may deem requisite to elicit 
 the whole truth. 
 
 The examination of the witness having been completed, his evidence, 
 if deemed necessarj' by the court, or if desired by him, is read over 
 previous to his leaving, to give him the opportunity of correcting any 
 errors therein. Accordingly, any remark or explanation, with such a 
 view, is entered on the proceedings; but no erasure or obliteration of 
 what has been previously stated can be made. 
 
 Should either partly perceive, after having concluded his case, that a 
 material (|uestion has been omitted, he submits it to the court, who will 
 always allow it to be put. 
 
 The witnesses called by the prosecutor having been examined, and 
 all the evidence to substantiate the charges submitted to the court, the 
 prisoner enters upon his defence. Should it be necessary for prepara- 
 
534 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEKRS AND MILITIA. 
 
 tion, the court, at the request of the prisoner, would grant time to 
 enable him to proceeil with more certainty or precision. 
 
 Witnesses for the defence are examined in the same order as those 
 presented on the part of the prosecution. The prosecutor cross- 
 examines, and the prisoner re-examines to the same extent allowed to 
 the prosecutor. 
 
 828. The examination of witnesses having been closed, the prisoner 
 takes his time to address the court, when, by argument and statement 
 of facts as shown in the evidence, he presents to the court every con- 
 sideration which m.'iy tend to weaken the force of the prosecution. 
 The greatest liberty con.sistent with strict propriety, especially in 
 regard to third persons not before the court, is at all times allowed* a 
 prisoner; and he therefore may impeach, by evidence, the character of 
 witnesses brought against him, and remark on their testimony and 
 the motives by which tliej' and the prosecutor appear to have been 
 actuated. Coarse and insulting, language cannot, however, be tol- 
 erated. 
 
 Should either party, in the course of tlu-ir examination of the 
 witnesses, or by bringing forward new ones for that purpose, introduce 
 new matter, the opposite one has the right of calling other witnesses to 
 rebut such new matter. 
 
 The address (or defence) of the prisoner, prepared subsequent to the 
 reception of all the testimony, is read by the prisoner, or, if anj' cause 
 should prevent his so doing, it may be, at the request of tlie prisoner, 
 read by his counsel, the judge advocate, or a military friend. 
 
 The judge advocate, or the prosecutor, can always claim the right of 
 replying to the defence of the prisoner,^nd the court will generally 
 grant a reasonable time for the preparation of it. When the reply has 
 been read, the trial is closed. Should the prisoner have examined 
 witnesses as to matter not touched upon in the course of the prosecu- 
 tion, or should he have reflected upon the credibility of the prosecu- 
 tor's evidence, the prosecutor is allowed to examine witnesses to the 
 new matter, and for the re-ostablishment of the character of his 
 witnesses. 
 
 FINDING. 
 
 820. The charges having been investigated by the prodnction and 
 examination of all the evidence which the parties have deemed neces- 
 sary, it is now the business of the court to decide upon the question of 
 guilt. 
 
 It is necessary, however, before proceeding to this stage of the trial, 
 that each and every allegation made against the prisoner should be 
 fully inquired into; and this, too, entirely without reference to the 
 
k 
 
 COURTS MARTIAT.. 535 
 
 proof of any one item, which might even call for the uttermost sen- 
 tence which a court martial can award, either against the life or the 
 commission of the ofiFender: and so, too, must a distinct judgment be 
 pronounced upon every specification adduced in support of the 
 charges. 
 
 Every member should fully satisfy himself of the extent and value 
 of the testimony on record; and, for this purpose, a fair copy of the 
 proceedings is laid upon the table, or read over by the judge advocate, 
 for the convenience of reference, and to make certain, while the siibject 
 or particulars of the evidence is still fresh in the minds of the members, 
 that such copy is a faithful transcript of the same. 
 
 This is of importance when the case is intricate, or the testimony 
 voluminous ; and it is also a very useful practice for the judge advocate, 
 in such cases, to prepare an index, or short notes of the evidence, in 
 order that reference to the record may be made more easj'. 
 
 It is competent for the court at this stage of the proceedings to call 
 back a witness for the purpose of asking any particular question 
 thought necessary: but the parties must be present during such further 
 examination. Indeed, before the finding, the court can recall a witness 
 at any time, 
 
 630, The court having had sufficient time for a re-examination of 
 the evidence, if necessary, and for deliberation and free discussion, the 
 president, having ascertained that every member is ready to give his 
 opinion, signifies to the judge advocate to proceed. The latter then 
 reads, in '-onsecutive order, the specifications to each charge, and 
 addresses each member, beginning with the youngest: "'From the 
 evidence in the m.atter now before you, how say you of the specification 
 or charge — is the prisoner guilty or not guilty?"' The vote upon each 
 specification of the charge having been given and recorded, the opinion 
 on the charge is then given, and so on in succession for all the specifi- 
 cations and charges which have been the subject of investigation. In 
 order to avoid the exposure of each individual opinion as his vote is 
 given, the members write upon slips of paper the opinion •juHty or not 
 guilty, and h:»nd them to the judge advocate, who, after receiving every 
 vote, arranges them, and announces the verdict. As the vote of each 
 member is given the judge advocate makes a minute of the same, which 
 should be carefully retained by him, to meet the possible contingency 
 of proceedings in the common law courts, touching the legality of the 
 acts of the court martial. 
 
 The majority of the voices determines the conviction or acquittal of 
 the prisoner, except in such cases as when (upon conviction) the law 
 absolutely, and without any discretion in the court, condemns him to 
 suffer death. In all such cases, a two-thirds vote is necessary to convic- 
 
5'd(] 
 
 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 tion. nnd the rccfrd must cxplioiily stale that two-iliirds of fho court 
 concurred in the findinp. 
 
 Should it Iiappcn, by the organization of the court, or from the acci- 
 dent of sickness or death of any of the members, that there is an 
 equality of votes upon the finding:, the doubt must be resolved in favor 
 of the prisoner, and he must have the benefit of acquittal. 
 
 831. The degree of guilt of which the prisoner is found, or the extent 
 to which the charge is proved, ought to be well defined and clearly 
 expressed : and so, likewise, the mode of declaring the prisoner acquit- 
 ted is a matter of some importance. Acquittals which are characterized 
 b}' the terms hmiornhfi/: most hniioi nlily; fully; or mont fiil/i/, should be 
 emploj-cd when the nature of the charges makes them necessary; but 
 in general, when no circumstances exist which rail for emphatic opin- 
 ions, a simple verdict of acquittal is the better formula. To declare 
 that the charges are net proved is improjier. 
 
 In the deliberation of the court upon the finding to be declared, it is 
 proper to observe the (iistinctions which may be made between the crime 
 as alleged in the charge and the degree of offence proved. A court 
 martial, therefore, ma^', iu some instances, find a prisoner guilty of tlie 
 offence in a less degree than that stated. But a court martial, although 
 tmpoweied to find him guilty in a less degree, cannot find a higher 
 degree (f guilt than that alleged in the charge. 
 
 The finding declared by a majority, or specific proportion of all the 
 Court, when the law, in particular ofleuces, requires such, is the decision 
 of the court, and the minority are bound by it. 
 
 OF THE SENTENCE. 
 
 832. The court, having determined the finding of innocence or guilt 
 of the prisoner, proceed to the conclusion of their labors by pronouncing 
 an acquittal, or affixing the punishment, according to the nature and 
 degree of the offence. 
 
 Whatever may have been the opinion of a member as to the finding 
 of the court, he must, upon a conviction being declared by the legal 
 number of votes, give his opinion as to the nature and degree pf pun- 
 i.^hnient, and ajiporiiou the same according to the degree of crime of 
 which the majority have found the prisoner guilty. The minority then 
 act independently of their individual opinions, and award punishment 
 according and adequate to the ollouee of the accused. If the prisoner 
 has been convicted of a particular oflcnco, for which punishment is pre- 
 scribed by law, every member must vote the punishment which the law 
 has prc.'cribed. In cases not provided for by special penalty, it is of 
 importance to the court to consider what kinds and degrees of punish- 
 
COURTS MARTIAL. 537 
 
 ment are legallj' applicable to tlic ca.'c. and none should be inflicted 
 except sucli as are in accordance with t.be custom of war in like cases, 
 or the common law of the land. 
 
 833. In passing sentence, courts martial should be careful to employ- 
 clear and unambiguous language, so that the kind and degree of 
 punishment shall be set forth definitely and precisely; and the mode of 
 intlicting capital punishment should be designated. The military laws 
 do not .say how a criminal, otTending against such laws, shall be put to 
 death, but leave it to the custom of war. Shooting or hanging is the 
 method determined by such custom. A spy is generally hanged ; and 
 mutiny, accompanied with loss of life, is punished by the same means. 
 Desertion, disobedience of orders, or other military^ crimes, usually by 
 shooting. 
 
 C ONFTEMATION OF SENTENCE — REVISION. 
 
 834. "When the proceedings of a court martial are submitted to the 
 oflSoer ordering the same for his confirmation or disapproval, and or- 
 ders, it becomes his duty to peruse, in the most critical manner, the 
 record of the court, and to ascertain any error which may have been 
 admitted. Or. should the record be found perfect in all its parts, he is 
 to signify his decision thereon, and give his orders accordingly. But 
 if any mistake or error in the conduct of the trial be presented to view, 
 the proceedings of the court may be sent back to them for revision. 
 The officer who directs the court to reconvene to reconsider its original 
 opinion, points out. at the same time, the particular cause which makes 
 a reconsideration necessarj'; and the court is therefore bound tore- 
 examine, with deliberation and care, the reasons upon which the former 
 opinions rested. The jirincipal cause for requiring courts martial to 
 revise their judgments is when an insuflSeient or undue weight has 
 been given to the testimony, and is supposed to arise from inadvertence, 
 misconception of the law, or the custom of war; or where an exorbi- 
 tant, inadequate, or illegal punishment has been awarded. 
 
 Every officer having authority to review the proceedings of courts 
 martial has power to suspend the execution of the sentence, to pardon 
 or mitigate any pucishment ordered by such court. He cannot, how- 
 ever, alter or commute the punishment, even with the consent of the 
 party sentenced. 
 
 OF THE JUDGE ADVOCATE. 
 
 835. By the laws of the Confederate States it is ma'le the duty of the 
 Judge Advodate to "piosccute in the name of the Confederate States, 
 
538 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTKKRS AND MILITIA. 
 
 but shall so far consider himself as counsel for the prisoner, after the 
 said prisoner shall have made his plea, as to object to any leading 
 question to any of the witnesses, or any question to the prisoner the 
 answer to which might tend to criminate himself; and administer to 
 each member of the court, before they proceed upon any trial, the 
 following oath, which shall also be taken by all the members of the 
 regimental and garrison courts martial." 
 
 The charges upon which a prisoner is to be tried having been placed 
 in the hands of the judge advocate, he is to ascertain what witnesses 
 or evidence will be necessary, both for the prosecution and defence, 
 and thereupon suoimon every person whose testimony may be required. 
 This duty should be performed at the earliest period possible, to avoid 
 any delay in the proceedings. He is to furnish the accused party with 
 a copy of the charges as soon as possible, or ascertain if such has'been 
 transmitted to him from another source; and should any alteration be 
 made in the charges, the prisoner should be immediately apprised of it. 
 
 Between the adjournment of one day and the meeting on the next 
 the judge advocate prepares a fair copy of the proceedings, which 
 upon the reassembling of the court is read over. 
 
 The bHsincss of the court having been concluded, the record of the 
 proceedings is signed by the president of the court, and countersigucd 
 by the judge advocate. 
 
 83fi. The duties of a judge advocate before a court of inquiry are in 
 many respects the same as officiating before a general court martial, 
 tliough of limited extent. 
 
 A court of iuquiry may be composed of from one to three officers, 
 with a judge advocate, or suitable person as recorder, to reduce the 
 proceedings and evidence to writing; all of whom are to be sworn 
 according to a prescribed oath. (See 95th Article of War.) 
 
 The judge advocate prepares the case for investigation. Uo sum- 
 mons the necessary witnesses, aud gives notice to the parties interested 
 as to the place and time of meeting. Ho swears tlie witnesses in the 
 same way as they are sworn before a court martial, aud he records the 
 testimony and keeps the proceedings from day to day. 
 
 The business of the court having beeu completed, the record will be 
 authenticated by the signatures of the president and the judge advo- 
 cate, and by the latter transmitted to the authority by which the court 
 was convened. 
 
COURTS MARTIAL. 539 
 
 837. Form of order for convening a general conrt martial. 
 
 Adjutant-General's Office, 
 Richmond, Jan. — , 18. 
 General Orders, 1 
 No. — . J 
 
 A general court martial will assemble at , at ten o'clock, a. m., 
 
 the 15th instant, or as soon thereafter as practicable, for the trial of 
 , and such prisoners as may be brought before it. 
 
 Detail for the court. 
 
 1. Colonel A. B 1st Regiment of Infantry. 
 
 2. Colonel CD 2d " " Cavalry. 
 
 3. Major E. F .3d " " Artillery. 
 
 4. Major G. H 5fh " "Infantry. 
 
 5. Captain L. M 1st " " Dragoons. 
 
 fi. Captain N. 4th " "Infantry. 
 
 7. Etc., etc., etc 
 
 Captain P. S., of the 2d regiment of artillery, is appointed the judge 
 
 advocate of the court. 
 
 Should any of the officers named in the detail be prevented from 
 attending at the time and place specified, the court will nevertheless 
 proceed to. and continue the business before it, jirovided the number of 
 members present be not less than the inininniiu prescribed by law — the 
 above being the greatest number [trhen the court in composed of lesn 
 than thirteen meiiihcrs] that can be convened without manifest injury to 
 the service. 
 
 B}' command of Major-General S. 
 
 S. C, Adjutant-General. 
 
 8.38. Form of the proceedings of a general court martial. 
 
 Proceedings of a general court martial, convened at , by virtue 
 
 of the following order, viz: 
 
 [Here insert the order.J 
 
 — o'clock, A. M., Jan. 15, 18 — . 
 The court met pursuant to the above order. Present: 
 
 Colonel A. B 1st Regiment of Infantry. 
 
 Colonel C. D 2d " " Cavalry. 
 
 Major E. F 3d " " Artillery. 
 
 Major G. H 5th " " Infantry. 
 
 Captain L. M 1st " " Dragoons. 
 
 Etc., etc 
 
 Etc., etc 
 
 Captain P. S., of the 2d regiment of artillery, judge advocate. 
 Captain T. W., Sth regiment of infantry, the accused, also present. 
 
540 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 The judge advocate linving read the order convening the court, asked 
 Captain T. W. if he had any objection to any member named therein, 
 to which he replied — 
 
 ( If nn)i chnUetujc it tnnrie, it mint he noir, nnd to one member at n time. ) 
 The court was then duly sworn by the judge advocate, and the judge 
 advocate was dulj* sworn by the presiding officer of the court, in the 
 presence of the accused. 
 
 (/< »» at thi» atatje of the proceeditiya that the accused makes his request 
 Jor the -pririlfge of introducing his counsel, and tcill, also, if he desires it, 
 state his reasons for post2)oiientent of the trial. These matters being set- 
 tled, the court proceids.) 
 
 The charges were read aloud by the judge advocate. Judge advocate 
 (addreseiu'f the accused): '• Captain T. W., you have beard the charge, 
 or charges, preferred against 3'ou ; how say you — guilty or not guilty?" 
 T') which the accused, Captaiu T. \V , pleaded as follows: — {The 
 judge advocate here gives notice that should there be any persons present 
 in court who huve been nuinmoned <in ii-itncmien, they innsl retire and icait 
 until called for.) 
 
 Captain D. N., 2d regiment df nrtilkry, a witness on the part of the 
 prosecution, was duly sworn. 
 
 Question by the judge advocate. ? 
 
 Answer. . 
 
 Question. — ■ ? 
 
 Answer. . 
 
 Cross-examined by the acfusi'd. ? 
 
 Answer. . 
 
 Question. ? 
 
 Answer. . 
 
 Question by the lourt. ? 
 
 Answer. — — . 
 
 Question. ? 
 
 Answer. . 
 
 I'c-pxauiinpd l)y tlie judge advocate. ? 
 
 Answer. . 
 
 Question. ? 
 
 Answer. . 
 
 ( The ejrdniination of the witness being completed, his testimony is read 
 orer to him, and corrected, if necessary — when the next witness is called. 
 The judge adroratc hari>ig prcsi-nted all the evidence for the prosecution, 
 states Huch fact, and announces that the ))roHecntion has closed — when the 
 accused enters upon the defence.) 
 
 Lieutenant A. B., 3d regiment of infantry', ii witness for the defenie, 
 was duly sworn. 
 
COURTS MARTIAL. O-ll 
 
 Question by the accused. ? 
 
 Answer. — ■ . 
 
 Question. • — — — ? 
 
 Answer. . 
 
 Cross-exainineii. 
 
 Question by judge advocate. ? 
 
 Answer. . 
 
 Question. ? 
 
 Answer. . 
 
 Question by the court. ? 
 
 Answer. . 
 
 {The eriilence mi both sides hnvuuj been henrd, the avcused asks for 
 time to prepare his defence.) 
 
 The court adjourned to meet again at ten o'clock, A. m., on the 
 
 in St. 
 
 Ten o'clock, a. m., , 18 — . 
 
 The court met pursuant to adjournment. Present, Colonel A. B. ; 
 Colonel C. D.; Major E. F.: Major «. IT.: Captain J. M., etc., etc. 
 Captain P. S., judjjc advocate, and Captain T. W., the accused. 
 The proceedings of yesterday were read over, when the accused, 
 Captain T. W., presented and read (or which irns read by his connsrl) 
 the written defence (A.) appended to these proceedings. 
 
 (Should the jiidije adrocnte intend to repli/, he would notify the court, 
 inid ask for the requisite time for jyrepnrat ion.) 
 
 The statements of the parties being thus in pos.session of the court, 
 the court was cleared for deliberation ; and having matureJy considered 
 the evidence adduced, find Captain T. W., of the 8th Regiment of 
 Infantry, as follows : 
 
 Of the first specification of 1st charge, , (Tuilty. 
 
 Of the second specification of 1st charge, , Not guilty. 
 
 Of the third specification of 1st charge, , Guilty. 
 
 Of the First chauge, , Guilty. 
 
 Of the first specification of 2d charge, , Not guilty. 
 
 Of the second specification of 2d charge, , Not guilty. 
 
 Of the Second charge, , Not guilty. 
 
 And the court do therefore sentence the said Captain T. W. of the 8th 
 
 Regiment of Infantry, to . 
 
 (Signed) A. B., 
 
 Colonel 1«< Regiment of Infantry, and President of the C. M. 
 (Signed) P. S., 
 
 Judge Advocate. 
 There being no further business before them, the court adjourned 
 sine die. 
 
 (Signed) A. B., 
 
 Colonel 1st Regiment of Infantry, and President nf the C. M. 
 (Signed) P. S., 
 
 Judge Advocate. 
 
ARTICLES OF WAR. 
 
 AN ACT FOR ESTABLISHING RVLES AND ARTICLES FOR THE GOVERNMENT 
 OF THE ARMIES OF THE CONFEDERATE STATES. 
 
 Section 1. The Congress of the Confederate Slates of America do 
 enact, That, from and after the passage of this act, the following shall 
 be the Rules and Articles by which the armies of the Confederate States 
 shall be governed : 
 
 Art. 1. Everj' officer now in the army of the Confederate States 
 shall, in six months from the passing of this act, and every officer who 
 shall hereafter be appointed, shall, before he enters on the duties of his 
 office, subscribe these Rules and Regulations. 
 
 Art. 2. It is earnestly recommended to all officers and soldiers dili- 
 gently to attend divine service ; and all officers who shall behave 
 indecently or irreverentlj' at any place of divine worship shall, if com- 
 missioned officers, be brought before a general court martial, there to 
 be publicly and severely reprimanded by the president; if non-com- 
 missioned officers or soldiers, every person so oflFending shall, for his 
 first oflFencc, forfeit one-sixth of a dollar, to J)e deducted out of his 
 next pay ; for the second offence he shall not only forfeit a like sum, 
 but be confined twenty-four hours; and for every like offence, shall 
 suffer and pay in like manner ; which money, so forfeited, shall be 
 applied by the captain or senior officer of the troop or company to the 
 use of the sick soldiers of the company or troop to which the offender 
 belongs. 
 
 Art. 3. Any non-commissioned officer or soldier who shall use any 
 profane oath or execration shall incur the penalties expressed in the 
 foregoing article j and a commissioned officer shall forfeit and pa}^, for 
 each and every such offence, one dollar, to be applied as in the preced- 
 ing article. 
 
 Art. 4. Every chaplain, commissioned in the army or armies of the 
 Confederate States, who shall absent himself from the duties assigned 
 him (except in cases of sickness or leave of absence), shall, on convic- 
 tion thereof before a court martial, be fined not exceeding one month's 
 
544 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MIMTIA. 
 
 pay, besides the lusa of his pay during his abseuce, or be discharged, 
 as the said court inartiat shall juilgo proper. 
 
 Art. 5. Any oflBccr or .soldier who shall use conteiuptuoua or disre- 
 spectful words against the President of the Confederate Stales, against 
 the Vice-President thereof, against the Copgress of the Confederate 
 States, or again:^t the Chief Magistrate or Legislature of any of the 
 Confederate States in which he may be ijuartered, if a coniuiissioned 
 officer, shall be cashiere 1, or otherwise punished, as a court ujartial 
 shall direct; if a uoorcoimnissioned officer or soldier, ho shall sufter 
 such punislnucnt as shall be inflicted on hiui by the sentence of a court 
 martial. 
 
 Art. 6. Any officer or soldier who shall behave himself with con- 
 tempt or disrespect toward his commanding officer shall be punished, 
 according to the nature of his offence, by the judgment of a court 
 martial. 
 
 Art. 7. Any officer or soldier who shall begin, excite, cause, or join 
 in any mutiny or sedition, in any troop or company in the service of 
 the Confederate States, or in any party, post, detachment, or guard, 
 shall suli'er death, or such other punishment as by a court martial shall 
 be intlicled. 
 
 Art. 8. Any officer, non-commissioned officer, or soldier, who, being 
 present at any mutiny or sedition, does not use his utmost endeavor to 
 suppress the same, or, coming to the knowledge of any intended mutiny, 
 does not, witiiout delay, give information thereof to his commanding 
 officer, shiiU bo punished by the sentence of a court martial with death, 
 or otlierwise, according to the nature of his offence. 
 
 Art. 9. Any officer or soldier who shall strike his superior officer, 
 or draw or lift up any weapon, or ofler any violence against him, being 
 in the execution of his office, on any pretence whatsoever, or shall 
 disobey any lawful command of his superior officer, shall suffer death, 
 or such other punishment as shall, according to the nature of his 
 offence, be inflicted upon him by the sentence of a court martial. 
 
 Art. 10. Every non-commissioned officer or soldier who shall enlist 
 himself in the service of the Confederate States shall, at the time of 
 his so enlisting, or within si.v days afterward, have the Articles for the 
 government of the armies of the Confederate States read to him, and 
 shall, by the officer who enlisted him, or b}' the commanding officer of 
 the troop or company into which he was enlisted, be taken before the 
 ne.xt justice of the peace, or chief magistrate of any city or town cor- 
 porate, not being an officer of the army, or where recourse cannot be 
 had to the civil magistrate, before the judge advocate, and in his 
 presence shall take the following oath or affirmation : " I, A B, do 
 solemnly swear, or affirm (as the case may be), that 1 will bear true 
 
% 
 
 AHTICLKS or WAK. 545 
 
 allegiance to the Confederate States of America, and that I will serve 
 them honestly ani faithfully against all their enemies or opposers 
 whatsoever ; and observe and obey the orders of the President of the 
 Confederate States, and the orders of the oflScers appointed over me, 
 according to the Rules and Articles for the government of the armies 
 of the Confederate States." Which justice, magistrate, or judge advo- 
 cate is to give to the officer a certificate, signifying that the man 
 enlisted did take the said outh or affirmation. ,, 
 
 Art. 11. After a non-commissioned officer or suldier shall have been 
 duly enlisted and sworn, he shall not be dismissed the service without 
 a discharge in writing; and no discharge granted to him shall be suffi- 
 cient which is not signed by a field officer of the regiment to which he 
 belongs, or commanding officer, where no lield officer of the regiment is 
 present; and no discharge shall be given to a non-commissioned officer 
 or soldier before his term of service has expired Imt by order of the 
 President, the Secretary of AVar, the commanding; officer of a depart- 
 ment, or the sentence of a general court martial; nor shall a commis- 
 sioned officer be discharged the service but by order of the President 
 of the Confederate States, or by sentence of a general court martial. 
 
 Art. 12. Every colonel, or other officer commanding a regiment, 
 troop, or company, and actually quartered with it, may give furloughs 
 to non-commissioned oflicors or soldiers, in such number, aud for so 
 long a time, as he shall judge to be most consistent with the good of 
 the service; and a captain, or other inferior ollioer, commanding a 
 troop or company, or iu au3' garrison, fort, or barrack of the Confed- 
 erate States (his field officer being absent), may give furlnughs to non- 
 commissioned ofliccrs and soldiers, for a time not exceeding twenty 
 days in si.\ months, but not to more than two persons to be absent at 
 the same time, excepting some extraordinary occasion should require it. 
 
 Art. 13. At every muster, the commanding oiBcer of each regiment, 
 troop, or company there present, shall give to the commissary of mus- 
 ters, or other oliicer who musters the said regiment, troop, or company, 
 certificates signed by himself, signifying how long such officers as shall 
 not appear at the said muster have been absent, and the reasons of (heir 
 absence. In like manner, the commanding officer of every troop or 
 company shall give certificates, signifying the reasons of the absence of 
 the non-commissioned officers and private soldiers; which reasons and 
 time of absence shall be inserted in the muster-rolls, opposite the names 
 of the respective absent officers aud soldiers. The certificates shall, 
 together with the muster-rolls, be remitted by the commissary of mus- 
 ters, or other officer mustering, to the Department of War. as speedily 
 as the distance of the place will admit. 
 
 Art. 14. Every officer who shall be convicted before a general 
 iti 
 
546 MANUAL Full VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 court niurtiul of having signed a false certilicate relating to the ab- 
 sence of either officer or private soldier, or relative to his or their pay, 
 shall be cashiered. 
 
 Art. 15. Every ofticcr who shall knowingly make a false muster of 
 man or horse, and every officer or commissary of musters who shall 
 willingly sign, direct, or allow the signing of muster rolls wherein such 
 false muster is contained, shall, upon proof made thereof by two 
 witnesses before a general court martial, bo cashiered, and shall bo 
 thereby utterly disabled to have or hold any office or employment in 
 the service of the Confederate States. 
 
 ^ Art. 16. Any commissary of musters, or other officer, who shall bo 
 convicted of having taken money, or other thing, by way of gratifica- 
 tion, on mustering any regiment, troop, or company, or on signing 
 muster-rolls, shall be displaced from his office, and shall be thereby 
 disabled to have or hold any oliice or emi>l()3'ment in the service of the 
 Confederate States. 
 
 Art. 17. Any officer who shall presume to muster a person as a 
 soldier who is not a soldier shall be deemed guilty of having made a 
 false muster, and shall suflfer accordingly. 
 
 Art. 18. Every officer who shall knowinglj' make a false return to 
 the Department of War, or to any of his superior oliicers, authorized to 
 call for such returns, of the state of the regiment, troop, or company, 
 or garrison under his command; or of the arras, ammunition, clothing, 
 or other stores thereunto belonging, shall on conviction thereof before 
 a court martial, be cashiered. 
 
 Art. 19. The commanding officer of every regiment, troop, or inde- 
 pendent company, or garrison of the Confederate States shall in the 
 beginning of every month remit, through the proper channels, to the 
 Dcjiarlment of War, an exact return of the regiment, troop, indepen- 
 dent company, or garrison under his command, specifying the names 
 of the officers then absent from their posts, with the reasons -for and 
 the time of their absence. And any officer who shall be convicted af 
 having through neglect or design omitted sending such returns shall 
 be punished according to the nature of his crime by the judgment of a 
 general court martial. 
 
 Art. 20. All oliicers and soldiers who have received pay, or have 
 been duly enlisted in the service of the Confederate States, and shall 
 be convicted of having deserted the same, shall suffer death, or such 
 other punishment as by sentence of a court martial shall be inflicted. 
 
 Art. 21. Any non-commissioned officer or soldier who shall without 
 leave from his commanding officer absent himself from his troop, com- 
 pany, or detachment shall, u])on being convicted thereof, be. punished 
 according to the nature of his oflence, at the discretion of a court 
 martial. 
 
ARTICLES OF WAR. 547 
 
 Art. 22. No non-commissioned officer or soldier shall enlist himself 
 in any other regiment, troop, or company without a regular discharge 
 from the regiment, troop, or company in which he last served on the 
 penalty of being reputed a deserter, and suffering accordingly. And 
 in case any officer shall knowingly receive and entertain such non-com- 
 missioned officer or soldier, or shall not after his being discovered to 
 be a deserter immediately confine him, and give notice thereof to the 
 corps in which he last served, the said officer shall by a court martial 
 be cashiered. 
 
 Art. 23. Anj' officer or soldier who shall be convicted of having 
 advised or persuaded any nther officer or soldier to desert the service of 
 the Confederate States shall suffer death, or such other punishment as 
 shall be inflicted upon him by the sentence of a court martial. 
 
 Art. 24. No officer or soldier shall use any reproachful or provoking 
 speeches or gestures to another, upon pain, if an othcer. of being put in 
 arrest : if a soldier, confined, and of asking pardon of the party offended, 
 in the presence of his commanding officer. 
 
 Art. 25. No officer or soldier shall send a challenge to another offi- 
 cer or soldier to fight a duel, or accept a, challenge if sent, upon pain, 
 if a commissioned officer, of being cashiered; if a non-commissioned 
 oflRcer or solilier, of suffering corporal punishment, at the discretion of 
 a court marti.al. 
 
 Art. 26. If any commissioned or non-commissioned officer com- 
 manding a guard shall knowingly or willingly suffer any person what- 
 soever to go forth to fight a duel, he shall be punished as a challenger; 
 and all seconds, y)romoters, and carriers of challenges, in order to duels, 
 shall be deemed principals, and be punished accordingly. And it sh.all 
 be the duty of every officer commanding an army, regiment, company, 
 post, or detachment, who is knowing to a challenge being given or 
 accepted by any officer, non-commissioned oflBcer, or soldier under his 
 command, or has reason to believe the same to be the case, immediately 
 to arrest and bring to trial such offenders. 
 
 Art. 27. All officers, of what condition soever, have power to part 
 and quell all quarrels, frays, and disorders, though the persons concerned 
 should belong to another regiment, troop, or company : and either to 
 order officers into arrest, or non-commissioned olRcers or soldiers into 
 confinement, until their proper superior officers shall be acquainted 
 therewith : and whosoever shall refuse to obey such officer (though of 
 an inferior rank), or shall draw his sword upon him, shall be punished 
 at the discretion of a general court martial. 
 
 Art. 28. Any officer or soldier who shall upbraid another for refus- 
 ing a challenge, shall himself be punished as a challenger; and all 
 officers and soldiers are hereby discharged from any disgrace or opinion 
 
548 iMANt'AL iUU VOLUMKERS AMI) MILITIA. 
 
 of disadvantage which might arise from their having refused to accept 
 of challenges, jis they will only have acted in obedience to the laws, 
 and done their duty as good soldiers who subject themselves to dis- 
 cipline. 
 
 Akt. 2'J. Xo sutler shall be permitted to sell any kind of liquors or 
 victuals, or to keep tlieir houses or shops open for the entertainment of 
 soldiers after nine at night, or before the beating of the reveille, or 
 upon Sundays, during divine service or sermon, on the penalty of being 
 dismissed from all future suttling. 
 
 AiiT. 30. All ofliccrs commanding in the field, forts, barnicks, or 
 garrisons of the Confederate States, arc hereby required to see that the 
 persons permitted to sutlle shall supply the soldiers with good and 
 wholesome provisions, or other articles, at a reasonable price, as they 
 shall be answerable for their neglect. 
 
 AiiT. 31. No officer commanding in any of the garrisons, forts, or 
 barracks of the Confederate States shall e.xact exorbitant prices for 
 houses or stalls, let out to sutlers, or connive at the like exactions in 
 others; nor by his own authority, and for his private advantage, lay 
 any duty or imposition upon, or be interested in the sale of any vict- 
 uals, liquors, or other necessaries of life brought into the garrison, fort, 
 or barracks for the use of the ."oldicrs, on the penalty of being dis- 
 charged from the service. 
 
 AuT. 32. Every oHicer commanding in quarter.-;, garrisons, or on the 
 march shall keep good order, and to the utmost of his power redress all 
 abuses or disorders which may bo committed bj' any oflicer or soldier 
 under his command; if, upon complaint made to him of ollieers or 
 soldiers beating or otherwise ill-treating any person, or disturbing fairs 
 or markets, or of committing any kind of riots, to the disquieting of 
 the citizens of the Confederate States, he, the said commander, who 
 shall refuse or omit to see justice done to the ofifender or olfenders, and 
 reparation made to the party or parties injured, as far as part of the 
 offender's pay shall enable him or them, shall, upon proof thereof, be 
 cashiered, or otherwise punished as a general court martial shall direct. 
 
 AiiT. 33. When any commissioned oliicer or soldier shall bo accused 
 of a capital crime, or of having used violence, or committed any offence 
 against the person or property of any citizen of any of the Confederate 
 States, such as is punishable liy the known laws of the land, the com- 
 manding oliicer and oflRcers of every regiment, troop, or company to 
 which the person or persons so accused shall l)elong are hereby required, 
 upon ap))lication duly made by, or in behalf of the party or parties 
 injured, to use their utmost endeavors to deliver over such accused 
 person or persons to the civil magistrate, and likewise to be aiding and 
 assisting to the officers of justice iu apprehending and securing the 
 
ARTICLES OF WAR. 549 
 
 person or perso)!S so accused, in order to bring him or them to trial. If 
 any commanding officer or officers shall wilfully neglect, or shall refuse, 
 upon the application aforesaid, to deliver over such accused person or 
 persons to the civil magistrates, or to be aiding and assisting to the 
 olFicers of justice in apprehending such person or persons, the officer or 
 oftjcers so ofi"ending shall l)e cashiered. 
 
 Art. 3-i. If any officer shall think himself wronged by his colonel, 
 or the commanding officer of the regiment, and shall, upon due appli- 
 cation being made to him be refused redress, he may complain to the 
 general commanding in the state or territory where such regiment shall 
 be stationed, in order to obtain justice; who is hereby required to ex- 
 amine into said complaint, and take i)roper measures for redressing the 
 wrong complained of, and transmit, as soon as possible, to the Depart- 
 ment of War, a true state of such complaint, with the proceedings had 
 thereon. 
 
 Art. 35. If any inferior officer or solilier shall think himself 
 wronged by liis captain or other officer, he is to complain thereof to the 
 commanding officer of the regiment, who is hereby required to summon 
 a regimental court martial, for the doing justice to the complainant ; 
 from which regimental court martial either party may, if he think 
 himself still aggrieved, appeal to a general court martial. But if, upon a 
 second hearing, the ajjpeal shall appear vexatious and groundless, the 
 person so appealing shall be punished at the discretion of said court 
 martial. 
 
 Art. 36. Any commissioned officer, store-keeper, or commissary who 
 shall be convicted at a general court martial of having sold, without a 
 proper order for that purpose, embezzled, misapplied, or wilfully, or 
 through neglect sulfered any of the provisions, fora;^e, arms, clothing, 
 ammunition, or other military stores belonging to the Confederate 
 States to be spoiled or damaged, shall at his own expense make good 
 the loss or damage, and shall, moreover, forfeit all his pay. and be 
 dismissed from the service. 
 
 Art. 37. Any non-commissioned officer or soldier who shall be con- 
 victed at a regimental court martial of having sold, or designedly or 
 through neglect wasted the ammunition delivered out to him to be 
 employed in tho service of the Confederate States, shall be punished 
 at the discretion of such court. 
 
 Art. 38. Every non-commi.=sioned otficer or soldier who shall be 
 convicted before a court martial of having sold, lost, or spoiled, 
 through neglect, his horse, arms, clothes, or accoutrements shall under- 
 go such weekly stoppages (n^it exceeding the half of his pay) as such 
 court martial shall juilgc sufficient for repairing the loss or damage ; 
 and shall suflfcr coutiuemeut, or such other corporal punishment as his 
 crime shall dciorvo. 
 
550 MANUAL i'OU VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 Art. 39. Every officer who Rhnll be convicted before a court mnr- 
 tiiil of havin)^ embezzled or misapplied any money with which he may 
 have been intrusted for tlie payment of the men under his command, 
 or for enlisting men into the service, or for other ])urposes, if a com- 
 missioned officer, shall be cashiered, and compelled to refund the 
 money ; if a non-commissioned officer, shall be reduced to the ranks, 
 be put under stopjia^cs until the money be made good, and snifler such 
 corporal punishment as such court martial shall diret't. 
 
 Art. 40. Every captain of a troop or company is charged with the 
 arms, accoutrements, ammunition, clothing, or other warlike stores 
 belonging to the troop or company under his command, which ho is to 
 be accountable for to his colonel in case of their being lost, spoiled, or 
 damaged, not by unavoidable accidents, or on actual service. 
 
 Aut. 41. All non-commissioned officers and soldiers who shall be 
 found one mile from the camp without leave, in writing, from their 
 commanding officer, shall suffer such punishment as shall be inflicted 
 upon tlism by the sentence of a court martial. 
 
 Art. 42. No officer or soldier shall lie out of his quarters, garrison, 
 or camp without leave from his superior officer, upon penalty of being 
 punished according to the nature of his offence, by the sentence of a 
 court martial. 
 
 Ai!T. 43. Every non-commissioned officer and soldier shall retire to 
 his quarters or tent at the beating of the retreat; in default of which 
 he shall be punished according to the nature of his offence. 
 
 Art. 44. No officer, non-commissioned officer, or soldier shall fail in 
 repairing, at the time fixed, to the place of parade, of exercise, or other 
 rendezvous appointed by his commanding officer, if not prevented by 
 sickness or some other evident necessity, or shall go from the said 
 place of rendezvous without leave from his commanding officer, before 
 he shall be regularly dismissed or relieved, on the penalty of being 
 punished, according to the nature of his offence, by the sentence of a 
 court martial. 
 
 Art. 45. Any commissioned officer who shall bo found drunk on his 
 guard, party, or other duty shall be cashiered. Any non-commissioned 
 officer or soldier so offending shall suffer such corporal punishment as 
 shall bo inflicted by the sentence of a court martial. 
 
 Art. 46. Any seutinel who shall be found sleeping upon his post, 
 or shall leave it before he shall be regularly relieved, shall suffer death, 
 or such other punishment as shall be inflicted by the sentence of a 
 court martial. 
 
 Art. 47. No soldier belonging to any regiment, troop, or company 
 shall hire another to do bis duty for him, or be e.\cused from duty but 
 in cases of sickness, disability, or leave of absence; and every such 
 
ARTICLES OF WAR. 551 
 
 soldier found guilty of hiring his duty, iis also the party so hired to do 
 another's duty, shall be punished at the discretion of a regimental 
 court martial. 
 
 Art. 48. And every non-commissioned oflScer conniving at such hir- 
 ing of duty aforesaid shall be reduced ; and every commissioned oflScer 
 knowing and allowing such ill practices in the service shall be pun- 
 ished by the judgment of a general court martial. 
 
 Art. 49. Any officer belonging to the service of the Confederate 
 States, who, by discharging of fire-arms, drawing of swords, beating 
 of drums, or by any other means whatsoever shall occasion false 
 alarms in camp, garrison, or quarters, shall suffer death, or such other 
 punishment as shall be ordered by the sentence of a general court 
 martial. 
 
 Art. 60. Any officer or soldier who shall, without urgent neeessitj', 
 or without the leave of hi.-< .superior officer, quit his guard, platoon, or 
 division shall be punished, according to the nature of his offence, by 
 the sentence of a court martial. 
 
 Art. 51. No officer or soldier shall do violence to anj' person who 
 brings provisions or other necessaries to the camp, garrison, or quar- 
 ters of the forces of the Confederate States, employed in any parts of 
 the said states, upon pain of death, or such other punishment as a 
 court martial shall direct. 
 
 Art. 52. Any officer or soldier who shall misbehave himself before 
 the enemy, run away, or shamefully abandon any fort, post, or guard 
 which he or they may be cominan<led to defend, or speak words induc- 
 ing others to do the like, or shall cast away his arms and ammunition, 
 or who shall quit his post or colors to plunder and pillage, every such 
 offender, being duly convicted thereof, shall suffer death, or such other 
 punishment as shall bo ordered by the sentence of a general court 
 martial. 
 
 Art. 53. Any person belonging to the armies of the Confederate 
 States who shnll make known the watchword to any person who is not 
 entitled to receive it according to the rules and discipline of war, or 
 shall presume to give a parole or watchword different from what be 
 received, shall suffer death, or such other punishment as shall be 
 ordered by the sentence of a general court martial. 
 
 Art. 54. All officers and soldiers are to behave themselves orderly 
 in quarters and on their march ; and whoever shall commit any waste 
 or spoil, either in walks or trees, parks, warrens, fish-ponds, houses, or 
 gardens, cornfields, enclosures of meadows, or shall maliciously destroy 
 any property whatsoever belonging to the inhabitants of the Confed- 
 erate States, unless by order of the then commander-in-chief of the 
 armies of the said states, shall (besides such penalties as they are 
 
552 MANUAL iOtt VOLUMEERS ANU MlLlllA. 
 
 liable to by law) be punished 'iiccoriUng to the nature iind dejcreo of 
 the oflence, bj' the jud^^oicnt of a regimental or general court martial. 
 
 Art. 55. Whosoever, belonging to the armies of the Confederate 
 States in foreign parts, shall force a safeguard shall suffer death. 
 
 AiiT. 56. AVhosoever shall relieve the enemy with money, victuals, 
 or ammunition, or shall knowingly harbor or protect an enemy, shall 
 suffer death, or such other punishment as shall bo ordered by the sen- 
 tence of a court martial. 
 
 AuT. .^7. Whosoever shall be convicted of holding correspondence 
 with, or giving intelligence to the enemy, either directly or indirectly, 
 shall sufler death, or such other puuishmcut as shall bo ordered by the 
 sentence of a court martial. 
 
 Art. 58. All public stores taken in the enemy's camp, towns, forts, 
 or magazines, whether of artillery, ammunition, clothing, forage, or 
 provisions, shall be secured for the service of the Confederate States ; 
 for the neglect of which the commanding officer is to be answerable. 
 
 Art. 59. If any commander of any garrison, fortress, or post shall 
 be compelled by the officers and soldiers under his command to give 
 lip to the enemy, or to abandon it, the commissioned officers, non- 
 commissioned officers, or soldiers who shall be convicted of having so 
 (ifl'endcd. shall suffer death, or such other punishment as shall bo 
 iuliictud upon them by the sentence of a court martial. 
 
 Art. CO. All sutlers and retainers to the camp, and all persons 
 whatsoever serving with the armies of the Confederate Status in the 
 field, though not enlisted soldiers, are to be subject to orders, according 
 to the rules and discipline of war. 
 
 Art. 61. Officers having brevets or commissions of a prior date to 
 those of the corps in which they serve, will take place on courts mar- 
 tial or of inquiry, and on boards detailed for military purposes, when 
 composed of different corps, according to the ranks given them in tlicir 
 brevets or former commissions; but in the regiment, corps, or company 
 to which such officers belong, they shall do duty and take rank, both 
 in courts and on boards as aforesaid, which shall be composed of their 
 own corps, according to the commis^ious by which they are there 
 mustered. 
 
 Art. 62. If, upon marches, guards, or in quarters different corps 
 shall happen to join, or do duty together, the ollieer highest in rank, 
 according to the commission by which he is mustered, in the army, 
 navy, marine corps, or militia there on dut}' by orders from competent 
 authority, shall command the whole, and give orders for what is need- 
 ful for the service, unless otherwise directed by the President of the 
 Confederate States, in orders of special assigiimcut pr>viding for 
 the case. 
 
AKTICLKS OF WAR. ^O-} 
 
 Art. 6". The functions of the engineers being generally confined to 
 the most elevated branch of military science, they are not to iissume, 
 nor are they subject to be ordered on any duty beyond the line of their 
 immediate profession, except by the special order of the President of 
 the Confederate States ; but they arc to receive every mark of respect 
 to which their rank in the armj' may entitle them respectively, and are 
 liable to be transferred, at the discretion of the President, from one 
 corps to another, regard being paid to rank. 
 
 Art. 04. General courts martial maj"- consist of any number of com- 
 missioned officers from five to thirteen, inclusively ; but they shall not 
 consist of less than thirteen, where that number can be convened with- 
 out manifest injury to the service. 
 
 Akt. Go. Any general officer commanding an armj', or colonel com- 
 man-ding a separate dcjiartmont, may appoint general courts martial 
 whenever necessary. But no sentence of a court martial shall be 
 carried into execution until after the whole proceedings shall have been 
 laid before the officer ordering the same, or the officer commanding the 
 troops for the time being; neither shall any sentence of a general 
 court martial, in the time of peace, extending to the loss of life, or the 
 dismission of a commissioned officer, or which shall, either in time of 
 peace or war, respect a general officer, be carried into execution, until 
 after the whole proceedings shall have been transmitted to the Secre- 
 tary of War, to be laid before the President of the Confederate States 
 for his confirmation or disapproval, and orders in the case. All other 
 sentences may be confirmed and executed by the officer ordering the 
 court to assemble, or the commanding officer for the time being, as 
 the case may be. 
 
 Art. 66. Every officer commanding a regiment or corps may ap- 
 point, for his own regiment or corps, courts martial, to consist of three 
 commissioned officers, for the trial and punishment of oflences not 
 capital, and decide upon their sentences. For the same purpose, all 
 officers commanding any of the garrisons, forts, barracks, or other 
 places where the troops consist of dififerent corps may assemble courts 
 martial, to consist of three commissioned officers, and decide upon 
 their sentences. 
 
 Art. 67. No- garrison or regimental court martial shall have the 
 power to try capital cases or commissioned officers ; neither shall they 
 inflict a fine exceeding one month's pay, nor imprison, nor put to hard 
 labor any non-commissioned officer or soldier for a longer time than 
 one month. 
 
 Art. 68. Whenever it may be found convenient and necessary to 
 the public service the officers of the marines shall be associated with 
 the officers of the land forces for the purpose of holding courts martial 
 47 
 
554 MANTAL FOB VoT.UNTKKRS ANU .MIL.1TIA. 
 
 iiud tr^'iujj ciflVuderD bwlougiug to either: iiud iu such onscs the drclers 
 of the senior officer of either corps who uiaj be present uud duly 
 authorized bhnll lie received nnd obeyed. 
 
 Anr. 69. The juJgo advocate, or some persou deputed by hiui or by 
 the general or olficer commanding the army, dctucliment, or garrison 
 shall prosecute in the name of the Confederate .States, but shall so fur 
 consider himself a.s counsel for the prisoner, after the said prisoner 
 shall have made his plea, as to object to any leading question to any 
 of the witnesses, or any question to the prisoner, the answer to which 
 might tend to criminate himself, and administer to each member of the 
 court before they pr<iceed upon any trial the following oaih, which 
 fchnll, also, be taken by all uiembers of the regimental and garrisoa 
 courts martial: 
 
 "You, A U, do swear thai you will well and truly try and determine 
 according to evidence the matter now before you between the Confed- 
 erate States of America and the prisoner to be tried, and that you will 
 duly administer justice according to the provisions of 'An act estab- 
 lishing Rules and Articles for the government of the armies of the 
 Confederate State.o,' without partiality, favor, or aCeclion; and if any 
 doubt should arise not explained by said Articles according to your 
 conscience, the best of your understanding, and the custom of war in 
 like cases; aud you do further swear that you will not divulge the sen- 
 tence of the court until it shall bo published by the proper authority ; 
 neither will you disclose or^iscover the vote or opinion of any particu- 
 lar member of the court martial unless required to give evidence thereof 
 as a witness by a court of justice in due course of law. So help you 
 God." 
 
 And 80 soon as the said oath shall have been administered to the 
 respective members the president of the court shall administer to the 
 judge advocate, or perbon officiating as such, un oath in the following 
 words ; 
 
 "You, A B, do sw*ar that you will not disclo.se or discover the vote 
 or opinion of any particular member of the court martial, unless re- 
 quired to give evidence thereof as a witness by a court of justice in due 
 course of law; nor divulge the s-entenee of the court to any but the 
 proper authority until it shall be duly disclosed by the same. So help 
 you Goil." 
 
 Art. 70. 'When a prisoner arraigned before u general court martial 
 shall from obstinacy and deliberate design stand mute, or answer 
 foreign to the purpose, the court may proceed to trial and judgment as 
 if the prisoner had regularly pleaded not guilty. 
 
 Anr. 71. When a member shall bo challenged by a prisoner h« must 
 state his cause of challenge, of which the court shall after due deliber- 
 
ARTICLKS Of WAR. OOD 
 
 ation determine the relevancy or validity, and decide accordingly; and 
 no challenge to more than one member at a time shall bo received by 
 the court. 
 
 AuT. 72. All the members of a court martial are to behave TTith 
 decency and calmness; and in giving their votes are to begin with the 
 youngest in commission. 
 
 Art. 73. All persons vrho give evidence before a court martial are 
 to be examined on oath or affirmation in the following form : 
 
 "You swear or affirm (as the case raaj' be) the evidence you shall 
 give in the cause now in hearing shall be the truth, the whole truth, 
 and nothing but the truth. So help you God." 
 
 Art. 74. On the trials of cases not capital before courts martial 
 the deposition of witnesses not in the line or staff of the army may bo 
 taken before some justice of the peace and read in evidence: provided 
 the prosecutor and person accused are present at the taking the same, 
 or are duly notified thereof. 
 
 Art. 75. No officer shall be tried but by a general court martial, 
 nor by officers of an inferior rank, if it can be avoided. Nor shall 
 any proceedings of trial be carried on, excepting between the hours of 
 eight in the morning and three in the afternoon; excepting in cases 
 which in the opinion of the ofiicer appointing the court martial require 
 imuiediate example. 
 
 Art. 70. No person whatsoever shall use any menacing words, signs, 
 or gestures in presence of a court martial, or shall cause any disorder 
 or riot, or disturb their proceedings on the penalty of being punished 
 at the discretion of the said court martial. 
 
 Art. 77. Whenever any officer shall be charged with a crime, ho 
 shall be arrested and confined in his barracks, quarters, or tent, and 
 deprived of his sword by the commanding offirier. And any officer 
 who shall leave his confinement before he shall be set at liberty by the 
 commanding officer, or by a superior officer, shall be cashiered. 
 
 Art. 78. Non-commissioned officers and soldiers charged with 
 crimes shall be confined until tried by a court martial, or released by 
 proper authority. 
 
 Art. 79. No ofiicer or soldier who shall bo put in arrest shall con- 
 tinue in confinement more than eight days, or until such time as a 
 court martial can be assembled. 
 
 Art. 80. No officer commanding a guard or provost marshal shall 
 refuse to receive or keep any prisoner couimitteJ to his charge by an 
 officer belonging to the forces of the Confederate States: provided the 
 officer committing shall at the same time deliver an account in writing 
 signed by himself of the crime of which the said prisoner is charged 
 
 Akt. 81. No officer commanding a guard, or provost marnhal, shall 
 
OOb MANLAIi FOR VOLI. NTKKUS AND MIIJTIA. 
 
 presume to relen.^c any ]ier.-oii coiomittcil to his chargij without proper 
 aulhority for so oointr, nor shall he sufl'er any person to escape, on tlio 
 penalty of l)eing punislicd for it by the sentence of a court martial. 
 
 AiiT. 82. Every officer or provost uiarshnl to who.sc oliargc jirison- 
 crs shall be committed shall within twenty-four hours after such com- 
 mitment, or as soon as he sh.all be relieved from his guard, make report 
 in writing to the commnnding officer of their names, their crimes, and 
 (he names of the officers who -jouimitted them, on the penalty of being 
 punislied for disobedience or nos^lect at the discretion of a court martial. 
 Akt. S.I. Any commissioned officer convicted before a general court 
 martial of conduct unbecoming an officer and a gentleman, shall be 
 dismissed the service. 
 
 AnT. 8-1. In cftscs where a court martial may tliink it proper to 
 sentence ;i commissioned ofli>''er to be suspended from command, they 
 shall have power also to suspend his pay and emoluments for the same 
 time, .according to tlic nature and heinousnes^ of the offence. 
 
 Art. 85. In all cases where a commissioned officer is cashiered for 
 cowardice or fraud, it sliall be added in the sentence that the crime, 
 name, and place of abode, and punishment of the delinquent, be pub- 
 lished in the newspapers in and .about the camp, and of the particular 
 state from which the oflendcr came, or where he usually resides: after 
 which it shall be deemed scand.alous for an officer to associate with him. 
 Aht. 86. The commanding officer of any post or detachment in 
 which there shall not be a number of officers adequate to form a gen- 
 eral court martial, shall, in cases which require the cognizance of such 
 a court, report to the commanding oflicer of the department, who shall 
 order a court to be assembled at the nearest post or department, and 
 the party accused, with necessary witnesses, to be transported to tho 
 place where the said court shall be assembled. 
 
 Art. 87. No person shall bo sentenced to suffer death but by the 
 the concurrence of two-thirds of. tho members of a general court 
 martial, nor except in the cases herein expressly mentioned ; and no 
 officer, non-commissioned officer, soldier, or follower of the army shall 
 bo tried a second time for tho same offence. 
 
 Art. 88. No person shall bo liable to be tried and punished by a 
 general court martial for any offence which shall appear to have been 
 committed more than two years before the issuing of the order for such 
 trial, unless the person, by reason of having absented himself, or some 
 other manifest impediment, shall not have been amenable to justice 
 within that period. 
 
 Art. 89. Every ofi'iecr authorized to order a general court martial 
 sh.all have power to pardon or mitigate any punishment ordered hy 
 such court, except the scnteneje of death, or of cashiering an otiicer: 
 
ARTICTiES OP WAR. 557 
 
 which, in the cases where he has authority (liy Article 65) to carry 
 them into exccutiou, he may suspend, until the pleasure of the Pret^i- 
 dent of the Confederate States can be known : which suspension, 
 together with copies of the proceedings of the court martial, the said 
 officer shall immediately transmit to the President for his determination. 
 And the colonel or commanding officer of the regiment or garrison 
 where any regimental or garrison court martial shall be held, may par- 
 don or mitigate any puiiishmcut ordered by such court to be inflicted. 
 
 AiiT. 90. Every judge advocate, or person officiating as such 'at 
 any general court martial, shall transmit, with as much expedition as 
 the opportunity of time and distance of place can admit, the original 
 proceedings and senteuce of such court martial t" the Secretary of 
 War; which said original proceedings and sentence shaU. be carefully 
 preserved iu the office of said Secretary, to the eud that the persons 
 entitled thereto may be enabled, upon application lo the said officer, to 
 obtain copies thereof. 
 
 The party tried by any general court martial shall, upon demand 
 thereof, made by himself or b^' any person or persons in his behalf, be 
 entitled to a copy of the sentence and proceedings of such court martial. 
 
 Art. ill. In cases where the general or commanding officer may 
 order a court of inquiry to examine into the nature of any transaction, 
 accusation, or imputation against any officer or soldier, the said court 
 shall Consist of one or more officers, not exceeding three, and a judge 
 advocate, or other suitable person, as a recorder, to reduce the pro- 
 ceedings and evidence to writing; all of whom shall be sworn to the 
 faithful performance of their duty. This court shall have the same 
 power (o summon witnesses as a court martial, and to examine them on 
 oath. But the}' shall not give their opinion on the merits of the case, 
 (-•xceptiug they shall be thereto specially reiiuired. The parties accused 
 shall also be permitted to cross-examine and interrogate the witnesses, 
 so as to investigate fully the circumstances in the question. 
 
 Art. 92. The proceedings of a court of inquiry must be authenti- 
 cated by the signature of the recorder and the president, and delivered 
 to the commanding officer, and the said proceedings may be admitted 
 as evidence by a court martial, in cases not capital, or extending to the 
 dismission of an officer, providing that the circumstances are such that 
 oral testimony cannot be obtained. But as courts of inquiry may be 
 perverted to dishonorable purposes, and maj' be considered as engines 
 of destruction to military merit, in the hands of weak and envious 
 commandants, they are hereby prohibited, unless directed by the Pres- 
 ident of the Confederate States, or demanded by the accused. 
 
 Art. 9S. The judge advocat(3 or recorder shall administer to the 
 members the follpwing oatfa: 
 
558 .MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
 
 "You jball well and truly examine and inquire, according to your 
 evidence, into the mutter now before you, without partiality, favor, 
 affection, prejudice, or hope of reward. So help you God." 
 
 After which the president shall administer to the judge advocate or 
 recorder the following oath: 
 
 '"You, A B, do swear that you wil!. according to your best abililic;<, 
 accurately and impartially record the proceedings of the court, and the 
 evidence to be given in the case in hearing. So help you God." 
 
 The witnesses shall take the same oath as witnesses sworn before a 
 court martial. 
 
 Art. 94. When any commissioned oflScer shall die or be killed in 
 the service of the Confederate States, the major of the regiment, or the 
 officer doing the major's duty in his absence, or in any post or garrison 
 the second officer in command, or the assistant military agent, shall 
 immediateh- secure all his effects or equipage then in camp or quarters, 
 and shall make an inventory thereof, and forthwith transmit the same 
 to the office of the Department of War, to the end that his executors 
 or administrators may receive the same. 
 
 AuT. 96. AVbcn any uon-commissioucd olliccr.or soldier shall die or 
 be killed iu the service of the Confederate States, the thou commanding 
 officer of the troop or companj' shall, in tlie presence of two other com- 
 missioned officers, take an account of what effects he died possessed of, 
 above his arms and accoutrements, and transmit the same to the ollico 
 of the Department of War, which said effects arc to bo accounted for 
 and paid to the representatives of such deceased non-commissioned 
 officer or soldier. And in case any of the ofliccrs so authorized to tako 
 care of the effects of such deceased non-commissioned officers and 
 soldiers should, before they have accounted to their representatives for 
 the same, have occasion to leave the regiment or post, by proferment or 
 otherwise, they shall, before they be permitted to quit the same, deposit 
 in the hands of the commanding officer, or of the assistant military 
 agent, all the effects of such deceased non-commissioned officers and 
 soldiers, in order that the same may be secured for, and paid to their 
 respective representatives. 
 
 AiiT. 96. All officers, conductors, gunners, matrosscs, drivers, or 
 other persons whatsoever, receiving pay or hire in the service of the 
 artillery, or corps of engineers of the Confederate States, shall be 
 governed bj' the aforesaid Rules and Articles, and shall bo subject to bo 
 tried by courts martial, in like manner with the officers and soldiers of 
 the other troops in the service of the Confederate States. 
 
 AuT. 97. The officers and soldiers of any troops, whether militia or 
 others, being mustered and in pay of the Confederate States, shall, at 
 all times and in all places, when joined, or acting in conjunction with 
 
ARTICLKS OF WAU. 659 
 
 the regular forces of the Confederate States, be governed by these 
 Rules and Articles of War, and shall be subject to be tried liy courts 
 martial, in like manner with the officers and soldiers in the regular 
 forces; save only that such courts martial shall be composed entirely of 
 militia oliicers. 
 
 AitT. 98. All ofliccrs serving by commission from the authority of 
 any particular state, shall, on all detachments, courts martial, or other 
 duty, wherein they may bo employed in conjunction with the regular 
 forces of the Confederate States, take rank next after all officers of the 
 like grade in said regular forces, notwithstanding the commissions of 
 such militia or state oliicers may be older than the commissions of the 
 officers of the regular forces of the Confederate States. 
 
 Art. 99. All crimes not capital, and all disorders and neglects which 
 officers and soldiers may bo guiltj' of, to the prejudice of good order 
 and military discipline, though not mentioned in the foregoing Articles 
 of AV^ar, are" to be taken cognizance of by a general or regimental court 
 martial, according to the nature and degree of the offence, and be pun- 
 ished at their discretion. 
 
 Art. 100. The President of the Confederate States sh.all have power 
 to prescribe the uniform of the army. 
 
 AiiT. 101. The foregoing Articles are to be read and published onco 
 in every six months to every garrison, regiment, troop, or company 
 mustered, or to be mustered in the service of the Confederate States, 
 and are to be duly observed and obeyed by all officers and soldiers who 
 are, or shall be in said service. 
 
 Section 2. Aud be it further enacted, That, in time of war, all per- 
 sons not citizens of, or owing allegiance to the Confederate States of 
 America who shall be found lurking as spies in and about the fortifica- 
 tions or encampments of the armies of the Confederate States, or any of 
 them, shall suffer death, according to tho law aud usage of nations, by 
 sentence of a general court martial. 
 
^8 f.§ ^ 
 
 
 •r 
 
 "H -| 
 
 - 
 
 3 n 
 
 •■ 
 
 r 
 
 - 
 
 = 
 
 : 
 
 -':^ 
 
 : 
 
 = Q 
 
 b. - 
 
 : 1 
 
 ; 
 
 -_ 
 
 : 
 
 "- € 
 
 = 
 
 l^ 1 
 
 _ 
 
 - 
 
 4 
 
 
 ■^^ -5 -^ Nj tt; 
 
 Mj«0 
 
:!lc 
 
 ;».,s««^««^ 
 
 
 A 
 
 Ji,^ 
 
 
 43 
 
 ij.!«.t 
 
 
 ,!J« 
 
 f*Jar*/-*^far 
 
 
 4 
 
 ,*».,».. 
 
 
 Atis 
 
 iiiu&va .*u/y-*« 
 
 
 dc 
 
 
 
 sHc 
 
 i«^..// Oi/ibMA 
 
 4" 
 
 ,r 
 
 ZvM,(w«*nt 
 
 At 
 
 Ao.vul £i«iiwwuit 
 
 ■ ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 t^jafl»*--lfiyc^ 
 
 rP 
 
 «^5 
 
 V-'^vtcr ^fiutf Jtr#*«At 
 
 
 sj 
 
 x/iio-nl^ 
 
 
 cic 
 
 ^n^<huA 
 
 
 'in 
 
 P-.fCJf«J Jli(««tM«n 
 
 
 .3* 
 
 Oo^Si^Ur 
 
 
 Si^JiaMStmrvr 
 
 
 s(? 
 
 StLgU^ 
 
 
 c? 
 
 Urpcr^X 
 
 
 3 
 
 .VbI". »^ (ft* fre-** SoaA 
 
 
 
 .VM-«^rt«B«--A««A 
 
 
 5''" iquaoRON 
 
 i xmmmm x mm: m mmw tm 
 
 .8. • 
 i. 
 
 J.iuu J I%1»(«, Cb^lcilt^ S C 
 
ORDER IN COLUMN OF PLATOONS 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 4 
 
 <¥■ t&|B> 
 
 ffcl, 
 
 — - -^ J 
 
 i 
 
 \Mi 
 
 L 
 
OHDER. LN COLUMN OF Dr\T810N». 
 
 4. c 
 
 2 SqUAOROMS. 
 
 ,^ s 
 
 F I C 5 
 
 
 s 
 
 ORDEB IN CLOSE COCUMN 
 
 FIC. 6 
 
 1^ ia> 
 
 
 cs»-- 
 
BL. 5. 
 
 ORDER IN 1.LNE 
 
 TOUNTED i BATTEf^'f 
 
 :k5: 
 
 Mcbf 
 
 iU 
 
 77^141 Ik /./-ill 
 
 nrIM 
 
 '1 ^<-iii t\ 
 
 u 
 
 14 II 
 
 II 
 
 u 
 
 ,i. 
 
 .«i. /^ -ill 
 
 
 14 
 
 \^: 
 
 I'll I ' 1 " 
 
 11 ^ M 
 
 :t: 
 
 :'!'•. 
 
 II 
 
 11 
 
 M 
 
 ^^ 
 
 }i /^ 8 
 
 
 
 •6* 
 
 *e« 
 
 4^ 
 
 
 .4 
 
 
 
 
 1 -- -^ 
 
 5rl3BS^^ 2S 
 
 J^ 
 
 s 
 
 ^^"'^ s,*- 
 
 2S« iO 4- 11 ^sjs^ $■ 
 
 3-«3S§-|- i 
 
 ses 
 
 ::S2}^ $ 
 
 •5 
 
 
 Zv^ane / Co^si^eilXvOh' Cfi>arU^i307i^ 
 
PI 6: 
 
 ORDER IN COLUMN. 
 
 MOUNTED BATTEP.Y HORSE ARTILLERI 
 
 F 10. 8. 
 
 I 
 
 "! 
 
 II s 
 
 - 8 A 
 
 *i 
 
 llHi 
 KftH 
 
 nA^ ik 't^-M 
 
 
 4 -^^ +f+ 
 
 t\ km 
 
 MHI 
 
 
 *^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 MUI 
 IMI 
 
 ...ill 
 
 'k "A% 
 
 1 
 
 ^ 
 
 1 
 
 M 
 
 -^ 
 
 «ot 
 
 ^ 
 
 + 
 
 mil 
 
 INH 
 
 mil 
 
 MMI 
 
 sm 
 
 ^»^ 
 
 i 1 
 
 M 
 
 J! 
 
 S 
 
 <a» , , 
 
 ' ji/ ^*3^ 
 
 J':tir^tJcfs-^'t<ZS.Ufi. Cn-tu-lti -jtr. ■ 
 
MOUNTED BATTERY 
 
 H'-s I*: :^: >: 
 
 .iii 
 
 
 m 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 III! 
 
 fCH ♦rjj* KTU. KTH 
 
 
 :i 
 
 A 
 
 
 it 
 
 SL^i 
 
 s 
 
 af3J^*-$ 
 
 
 
 i^-l 
 
 * • . saS^'. 
 
 4 • *§ ^'»r'-=^. 
 
 Sfctfu-^ ^sfj^ivUl- JZ-rtii- Cfi iXrZtrtzm- 
 
p/..a. 
 
FIC. 15. 
 
 BUO. 
 
 £m.U ^arljnti^f 
 
 I ^ 
 
 ■f.33 
 
 t, 
 
 
 
 \ 
 
 ^ 
 
 z 
 
 ■ \ 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 - v 
 
 
 
 
 Z' 
 
 
 
 no. i«. 
 
 Fij-'-^ ^ C0ysTfeZ.X-Uh Charlestra,. 
 
 -/% 
 
 <w.. 
 
 FIC. 17. 
 
 ^^^^1 
 
I 
 
PI J 2. 
 
 IIS, < 
 
 t^CogswUZztA CharUdi'n . "U 
 
 FIG. 25. 
 
 FIG. 26. 
 
if 
 
PLJ1-. 
 
 \mf t xfSiffAZ^A, CktcrUfCcn, 
 
Tlls'i 
 
 r-^Ti 
 
 F 
 
 ^ ^ 
 
 i u 
 
 9d-h, E5 
 
 S HJ 
 
 ^y^ 
 
 1 
 
 ^=w^ ^ 
 
 ; m 
 
 ^A. :. ; 
 
 ! 
 
 ^=y^ FIC45. ' 
 
 1 a 
 
 
 \ ^ 
 
 fcl_tL_ 1 
 /■TTta □ ■ 
 .<--..<£ — _.. 
 
 1 c 
 
 1 ?i 
 
 n ^ 
 
 □ 
 
 5 
 
 ri I 1.1 
 □ZLXj 
 
 J_l 
 
 I' I I I I 
 
 FIO 47. |-T-T-r- 
 
 i?gr~i 
 
 FIG 4» 
 
 ^vajus S^ Coqswdi CharZtsion., S C 
 
:Dt^ 1 
 
 PU9 
 
 H 5 
 
 ixi I I I I I I i !~n 
 
 , i i I I 1 1 I I I I I I 
 I 
 
 B & □ 
 
 D^ 
 
 r^.i I ! 
 
 TTTTTL 
 i I r , 1 I ITT3 
 
 I 
 
 FIG 50 
 
 ; Hj 
 
 : D 
 
 |M 
 
 :: a 
 
 -en- 
 
 FIO 51, 
 
 U..L .M,J_..LJ..J_U 
 
 t 
 
 El 
 
 '^ ^ ^^j>**U, OlAJ'ltJt^riiSC 
 
JPIZO 
 
 FIC 6E 
 
 I I I I'll L—l — LJ 
 
 r-i I 11 I I I I I 'I 
 
 ^ 
 
 ;VKiliJst55J4m?S!}^S5S5^S535^ 
 
 ^^^^^ifc^iJJ^Jje^Nea^ 
 
 
 
 1^^^^ 
 
 ai □ 
 
 ^^^^^^ 
 
 a 
 
 
 FIC 53 
 
 9 
 
 
 V 1 M M 
 
 ■ M H 
 
 B □-□ 
 
 
 
 9 
 
 
 
 
 : L 1 I j. 1 i 1 1 
 
 XJ_.L_ 
 
 L_l_i 
 
 . l._J„ 
 
 LJJ.J._M 
 
 crr-T-r 
 
 j.jxj 
 
 1. 1. 1 
 
 ■T"' 
 
 1 L 
 
 1 LJ I'J 
 
 [±] 
 
 S 
 
 IZSl 
 
 B 
 
 & 
 
 □ 
 
 FIC 54 
 
 -s- 
 
 [> D> 
 
 LH D 
 
 ij.j...i.jj..Lj-i-±jj.-LLi..Li-j_r r:i 
 
 $ CfifSvCU CtutrUshl.S.C. 
 
PLZl 
 
 I aaaiBgagiiisiiitiiiiili ■■■■■■ aaiaiijaa 
 
 ! ! ■ 
 
 j I r aaaa 
 
 I 
 
 i 
 
 FIG 58. 
 
 u gA an ■■■■■■ ■■ ■■ ■■■ 
 
 r-v 
 
 L... 
 
 i nA 
 
 1 li 
 
 ii! ii 
 
 
 "Evaiu % OagsvtifX, CKaurlulm,, S. C. 
 
PI 22 
 
 A H IQ 03 B 10 j 
 
 ■f»» 
 
 ./.I 
 
 FIG 57 
 
 I • a a ■ 
 ■ B a a 
 
 ^yanj ^ C6asynU.CkarUeion..S C, 
 
Ti-ia 
 
 ' ■ 
 
 FIG 58 
 
 Smu I CogiwtO, OarUitoiiSC. 
 
 \ 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 T>C 2iA 
 
 B 
 
 
 a 
 
 ' 
 
 
 ' 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 
 B 
 
 S 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 1* ■ 
 
 
 m 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 ta 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 g 
 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 g 
 
 
 
 :• 
 
 
 
 B 
 
 
 m 
 
 
 
 •" 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 
 m 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 B 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 a 
 
 9 
 
 s 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 
 1 «. 
 
 
 
 s 
 a 
 
 
 •:•■ 
 
 
 • ■ 
 
 ; 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 B 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■ N 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 • IJ 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 s 
 
 
 s 
 m 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 B9 
 
 
 
 
 F<e 59 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 
 m 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 z 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 
 " 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 
 \ 
 
 
 
 
 fraru § Cogs tuM. CharUsiim,. S C 
 
 
 
 
 
 
i^ll^li^l^^l^l^l^ll rf 
 
 .■; BEjUZd* 
 
 no 60 
 
 FIC 62 
 
 ■y^WW^-Mi-M' 
 
 >«■• ■■■» 
 
 i.' FIC g 63 
 
 ! . ^ 
 
 "~:^^~T~~r~T~T~~'^i ^^ ^ 
 
HliilllliF 
 
 FIG 68 
 
 qiiiiiiip 
 
 Hiiiiiiiiiir 
 
 4 
 
 H 
 
 s^ 
 
 
 
 "■^ 
 
 "X" 
 
 H 
 
 H 
 
 \y 
 
 H 
 
 H^ 
 
 "Xh* 
 
 NV' 
 
 r- 
 
 _L 
 
 _.j" 
 
 ,(^ 
 
 si 
 
 VG 
 
 3 — ^i> 
 
 ^ 
 
 i^y/7ju> ^ CngswrZly Ch/irU&lpn,, S.C 
 
 ■<"\ \ \ \ 
 
 It 
 
 
 ;j..-i->-..:v..j..j'.. 
 
 FIG 69. 
 
 a a 
 
 FIG 70 
 
Hi mm 
 
 J^ 
 
 FIC 72 
 
 iHiniiiii 
 
 \ \ 
 \ 
 
 ' I 
 
 \. 
 
 \ 
 
 \ \ 
 
 
 \ 
 
 FIG 73 
 
 \ ^£4 
 
 gfiz^ 
 
 =ES 
 
 I 
 
 Uv^vi i (ogiwU,Clua-Usr^Ti,S 0. 
 
• P1.2S 
 
 I ^ Qyi-^tll,Uiii,(./>xrUi/x7i,i.C 
 

I^ZH 
 
 fllllll 'l l ll!lllipilllllllllMlliP ill| i|| ||||lllHllllllllllllllllllia» IllllllltHlllllllllllllllliyillillll 
 
 ' : b — P ^»— *-- -- H H P 
 
 ' -l,_ H rP 
 
 M H- 
 
 FIG 76 
 
 MWIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIHIIIIIIIIIIIf i 
 
 !!IIII!IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIH Ill 
 
 FlC 77 
 
 iiinimiiiiiiiiiMiiiiiii 
 
 q L 
 
 H H 
 
 H k 
 
 -o^^ 
 
 /^vUTbs ^ Cc^awnU, UiA, Charltshm., S C. 
 
 «so^i 
 
.^fiXX 
 
 .ddilllllBttK 
 
 u^ d^ u" H" 
 
 \ ^. 
 
 \ 
 
 F I G 80 
 
 SWff^ 5 Cogswell. iM. i^^<W&Etoa, ^. C 
 
=^==:::sF 
 
 S 
 =^' 
 
 \ \ 
 
 i 
 
 •MiimiMiiiiiiyiiMF 
 
 FIC 81 J 
 
 M H " 
 
 L s 
 
 ?=;^ 
 
 ! 
 1 
 
 
 
 i= 
 
 H 
 
 
 inrr 
 
 Fl 63 
 
 1 
 
 y J^ 
 
 V. 
 
 — 1^~ 
 
 ^- ••(•■■"•.,. 
 
 ' ^ « " . " 
 
 FIC 85 
 
 ^ i ^ I -^ 
 
 FIG 84 
 
 u ■ 
 
 l-t 
 
 m 
 
 J 
 
 ^^— 
 
 i' 
 
 ^ 
 
 I 
 I 
 
 FIG 87 
 
 7h (^ MovLnZ 
 
 ^ 
 
 -^ygyuS ^ ^^>y<w^l^^2eM>,<^^l^^&n ^C 
 
Plan 
 
 (3, 
 
 A 
 
 J 
 1 
 1 
 
 
 FIC 88 
 
 
 1 
 
 } 
 
 
 
 tj 
 
 
 ^"^ 
 
 
 
 k^^' 
 
 
 
 (^^^ 
 
 
 
 %^^^ 
 
 
 
 B> li 
 
 'i 
 
 
 1"" 
 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 \<3k 
 
 —''' ^""— — 
 
 ..i?^' 
 
 1/^ ES' aa: ^d^ sa-- 
 
 i 
 
 n 
 
 d 
 
 -^5>-^t..e!!b-C?!>-^S.'-e?? -^Si ^1 
 
 i 
 
 i I 
 
 i^@ M 4 A i 
 
 i i 
 
 -^^^-^^^'-^^'-^^ vggj ^ <F^ "' <p^ • cF=q ' -fe <^^- 
 
 3vej\A j ^ojjwcX^. Za^ ChaarlMlxnv.S.C 
 
FIC 91 
 
 FIG 9£ 
 
 ¥E- 
 
 i.. 
 
 
 — -^><: 
 
 ■H -aa- 
 
 -<S5- 
 
 --bKI 
 
 -B>';! 
 
 -<«-- 
 
 jjci 
 
 S>/| 
 
 7»/ ■. 
 
 -J 
 
 [^ 
 
 jeg*^ ^ (jj^jy^JX, hA, Charltshm,^ S-C. 
 
Pterl <^ <3 <C3 <I^) <3 
 
 ' 
 
 FIG 95 
 
 p^ f^^ ^- ff9> ^5:- ei- 
 
 FIG 93 
 
 n C 94 
 
 4* 
 
 1 
 
 '^'S^ <e5 '^ /^ '^'^ ^^i;^ 
 
 4 ^« 
 
 v^_ 
 
 lAvAn-j f Ci>g,well;U^ CharUilmu, S. C. 
 
i 
 

 no 96 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^c 
 
 ^^ 
 
 X \ 
 
 p ^ 1'^ 
 
 ^ S> B> ^ E> B> 
 
 ^,^ 
 
 1 
 
 
 FIG 97 
 
 
 
 / 
 
 
 
 J^" 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ril 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 <U 
 
 
 
 
 ^■^ 
 
 
 S 
 
 |] 
 
 <« 
 
 fi 
 
 
 
 
 V' 
 
 / 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 / 
 
 k 
 
 
 •1SI <3S <IS!) O <S 
 
 ] <sl 
 
 £V»U I OigiyM, hlA, aatrl^^biw. CU 
 
Fim 
 
 FIG 99 no 100 
 
 
 : ^ B> Q> s>^ 
 
 ^ — — ^ 
 
 
 , --- -_ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ;^ / ; 
 
 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 
 <^ » «s^ 
 
 I 
 
 
 ^ 1 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 .-- 4. ! 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 i -^ ''^ '♦^ ^ 
 
 
 
 1/ ^ 
 1 ^ 
 
 
 ! /-- <^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 2 "----^^ 1 
 
 ^ 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^<S3<!s <:3 ^:&^ -^ 
 
 
 
 
 Evwi ^dgtwJl, CharltOrnJS C 
 
Fl C lOl 
 
 J 
 
 55 
 
 FIG 103 
 
 
 ■CD-- 
 
 CZD- 
 
 ^^^ 
 
 FIG loa 
 
 cikjfpiifBpync 
 
 iiolvi^ii 
 
 ISVaun ^ UgsyitiX, bZh, Ouwlahn, S.C 
 
 '^ 
 
F^ 30 
 
 
 1 
 
 FIG low- 
 
 est 
 
 rS3> 
 til- 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 FIO 105 
 
 ^^.1^^ r:.-^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 J^viUuS § Coqsy)rtU^ hJh/ThjK r yubenjS C 
 
J>1.39. 
 
 F 1 O. I06. 
 
 Fl C 107. 
 
 
 ^' 
 
 F I O . lOtj. 
 
 > 
 
 
 c^ ^A^'- 
 
 F I O .109. 
 
 mi- cwv xm ,. 
 
 51/11 II iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiaiiiiiilnl/l-y 
 
 MifieiPiilMIMIM 
 
 ■m 
 
 SyoTU £ Coyti^eii^UA/. CharlutoruSC 
 
M -/<). 
 
 
 
 % % 
 
 -,--f^ 
 
 B>^ 
 
 B>; 
 
 FIG. 118. 
 
 F I O- III. 
 
 a 
 
 M ^ 
 
 £vans£'ih<^s>yell'ZuA'C^arle-!6on/ S.C. 
 
PU1. 
 
 ^^ 
 
 % i 
 
 F I C . 112 
 
 
 ii I ISyill^ii^ill^iSirilSiMltil^ilSI! 
 
 S'^^emj ^Cs^fitrtUrZstt^. Charl€stcn^ S C. 
 
:pi.4^z 
 
 no. 114. -^ 
 
 9 % 
 
 
 ^' •'//•' 
 
 ■.■/■# 
 
 3^ 
 
 m 
 
 ^ 
 
 •■lifi 
 
 1. fiSffi [^ 
 
 ^vawa. <g f£y.f»reg/t6i C^arit^tOTv.S. C 
 
PL 43 
 
 % % 
 
 <^ 
 
 <ff^ 
 
 a^._ 
 
 F IC. 116. 
 
 F I . 117, 
 
 ^: 
 
 
 £vaju LaqstvtiL Zit^. •'Aariaia'S >. 
 
J'l 4^. 
 
 \^ ^^^<BWS3<^5<E3<eS-1SKB!!5<ISXB!)<K>:^3':E5] 
 
 <d 
 
 ,ffva.flJii'CfqsyyeSSu/i-: Oi-arUsc/^'. 
 
J>1 4 J 
 
 FIC. 121 
 
 FtC. 122. fcj> 
 
 FIC. 120. 
 
 CB L 
 
 .<^ 
 
 
 / 3^1 
 
 /ffi^ 
 
 ■■•-,t??J. 
 
 FIC. 123. 
 
 \\ 
 
 All 
 
 ''h 
 
 
 j&veuva Jh Gf^sHW^J^i^ C^xt^le*ton. >^. i 
 
ri /6: 
 
 
 _.--",■■ AA/^OV^<^^AAA/\ 
 
 £v-afu £. !!bys>ye2iIuJi/ (TuirlesiyrvS C. 
 
P7 4y. 
 
 .:S 
 
 
 4 
 
 ^ /l/^^|AVVyW\/NM 
 
 WvVVVVWWM 
 
 AAAHAAA/JAAAAAA 
 
 ■ ^lir^ilfll 
 
 Syeuu ^ CcqrtrtHXith'.Otiarlsrtan, 
 
I>7.4/f. 
 
 .Fl O. 132. 
 
 •■--'•^toh* >« 
 
 '^ ci •.j 
 
 t 1 O. 133. 
 
 rfi^ ci^c s^L 
 
 •'W^^ri^ t>tirr^ert>»X' J*, l 
 
I 
 
jy\AAAAAAAA^ X A AAA^^yWy^ /^^ 
 
 J'1.49 
 
 *^ 1^ «li^ «ft^ 4 ^1^ 
 
 FIG. 134. 
 
 <^^ii 
 
 OU! 
 
 lAAAAAAAAA^/jAAAAAAAAA^^ WVAAAAAAArt^ 
 
 J^ftmt £■ GoosweU-Zt^ C^Mrlejto'i. S. i. 
 
M.SO. 
 
 %\ 
 
 %^ 
 
 
 ■ 1- — '--l--^ 
 
 i-^ s^i- c^ s^L n id 
 
 F I C. 135. 
 
 C0 {3h,)[ 
 
 F\ C. 136. 
 
 
 4 • 
 1 ^■'' 
 
 no. 137, 
 
 ,../?ti -^ 
 
 ! ■ ;^ 
 
 ^^ s^. c^c ^i^ ^i "^ 
 
 AAAAAAAAAAaAAAAAAAAAAA^^yyVV^/V^ 
 
 _Svaju <^ AfSMvliJ^ttA/ CX/orUttowSC. 
 
Fl,.61. 
 
 FIG. 138. 
 
 fX5: 
 
 ■VWytAAiNN. 
 
 S%L c'lc s\l i^ 
 
 sl ^^ xa 
 
 .....^j , ^'\t- c'\c jji. .y;;1 
 
 ^ 
 
 s^ 
 
 K ■< 
 
 ,SL CC SL L C 
 
 IP D iJ f ^ 
 
 0^ . .1* 
 
 fi'r'Ofi-*' <fC>^s^ui/7.UA' (^ux^-i^iort, Si 
 
TI.S2. 
 
 F 1 C I ^O 
 
 / s^^b s'a^ 5 a/: ■ 
 
 f-^ 
 
 ^r A % 
 
 piiA4L>kA_v w_v>_\x ^. s 
 
 Ci0: 
 
 ^^wws^w^?/52i2!SS3S^^^EE22^2S2Z2W2EL 
 
 ^W/Trj j^rrrrrr/ /r//^ff/ //•yyv<5w7vV7^?\7V/ 
 
 q S'^L C^C. S|Z. z,| 511 
 
 .Fvai/ie<6 ioysjrvUJi'UA' C^arlacion. S.C 
 
t 
 
Ploy 
 
 c \, r^C .1/ ck.il 
 
 .r: 
 
 ! -J ! I 
 
 ^S «^ clBc sfii 
 
 L^ S^l ch S^t ., /in \^S 
 
 Svanf <f Co^rwdLZxt^. ^.^xrUfCcn/. SC 
 
ms-f. 
 
 i 
 
 F I C. 142 
 
 
 Ic 
 
 
 
 .\\4iASi\\NS^\V.V\Vk\\%\V>\^'>'*^\''''5.NVVN\N\\N'v\\V\ 
 
 '3 
 
 X 
 
 
 
 F I C . 14-3. 
 
 mo) 
 ca 
 
 . , ipiiyy!JOgyByyy§ ^iHBBiBBBBHHIIBflll! 
 
 , E IS 2: : Hi i ffl E 
 
 .Evtms ^ ^o^rwt^cLi^- Ckior^ittm^ 
 
i 
 
/y.,>TJ' 
 
 .n?T 
 
 
 
 r'w 
 
 u ^ 
 
 -J 
 
 i-Tr:'^-:^-T---|.---l 
 
 a 
 
 u J J J A 
 
 l]- 
 
 3 J '.J ;* 3 
 
 1^1 
 
 
 
 _1 
 
 -J J_. 
 
 J J J J 
 
 J J J J J 
 
 -^T.--^ 
 
 ^— ^^ IIJ 
 
 J J J J J 3 
 
 n ill a 
 
 u 
 
 tJ^Q 3 J J ■ J -^ ^ 
 
/Y-..;/'' 
 
 ¥ 
 
 
 V/ ^ 
 
 m. 
 
 ^■t; 
 
 .^3 
 
 »^a 
 
 '^ 
 
 F lO 146. 
 
 J 3 jut^ J 
 
 □ ^ ti: -Zi-:±i-^t^ 
 
 tj" J- 
 
 j J J J J 
 
 3 J'S J 
 
 'i Hl . I \ X LL 
 
 zu -^^ 
 
 u id J a J 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 F I C. 14-7. 
 
 
 j^ v«7i,rf ayi^MXM. Otu^t^n. SC. 
 
y/ ./r. , 
 
 
 J 'J J 
 
 Jug 
 
 
 J 01 Q J ID 
 
 : 3 > 
 
 P ii*3M]^- fl*ifc& *W^ 
 
 
 A-i:^f/ 
 
 ua...>' 
 
 FIG. 14£ 
 
 f-f:?' 
 
 £vaneii(iffmll£iA Oiarlaton. S.t". I 
 
a ill 
 
 i^ 2 
 
 U LJ 
 
 ni'~""- 
 
 1-- 
 
 J- 
 
 -^H-^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 Q CJ ' 
 
 a a 
 
 Tirp" 
 
 
 n~ 
 
 --^:--^i 
 
 [J 
 
 
 a 
 
 3 J 
 
 nb^ 
 
 ■ ^^ 
 
 '"^ 
 
 ^'V-!.--'ni!l 
 
 a/f a a 
 
 ^z A*" 
 
 ' a 'tL a a □ a ■ 
 ---13 -a a- -in-.-. 
 
 a^i^ 
 
 
 i3 J 
 
 SI a 3 
 
 ^ a 3 a a a 
 
 a DI 01 ID CI 
 
 a !^ 
 
 3; 
 
 3! 
 
 ^:3 
 
 a 3 .^ a 
 am Ha 
 
 I --iii r:^-~T:,--T 
 aa -^ L 
 
 ■^ a a 
 
 S 
 
 -3a 
 
 a 
 
 £>rcuis ^ 6o^Jwe^^zMfi^Zcarlefto7f S C. 
 
FIS9. 
 
 L^ 
 
 
 k 
 
 pfc 
 
 -|. 
 
 
 
 
 
 s| 
 
 \ El 
 
 \ 
 
 ' 1 ; 
 
 -. 
 
 e3| 
 
 ^ir 
 
 
 a ' 
 
 \rsi 
 
 ■.1 
 
 
 
 
 rl 
 
 - 
 
 Ld' 
 
 Un 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 '1 
 
 
 
 ,_ L_J 
 
 Svans- (fC>ynrtll.iJu<r7tstBn^SC. 
 
i-ieo. 
 
 tSTFTt 
 
 
 i^fnn 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 ; V^ ; _>■ ; ;-- j .- 
 
 ! \.J......H 
 
 ;.:.=: --fg 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 f=- ^ • is 
 
 -. 
 
 *= = = .:.. = . -O 
 
 -\ 
 
 i ISI 
 
 \ 
 
 ' m 
 
 1 
 
 ^•ycLns f^ Co^s-yveU/Iyi^. Oiaritrion/S C 
 
Pf.ff/. 
 
 I 1 
 i . H 
 
 «;| 
 
 1 
 
 u 
 
 ij n4M 
 
 -iC3f 
 
 80 
 
 tot 
 
 A 
 
 2IW 
 
 s 
 
 u 
 
 8 
 
 -tCH- 
 
 1CH- 
 +1^ 
 
 
 IS 
 
 
 •Ha- 
 
 40 
 
 f 
 
 % 
 
 I 
 
 Sitintd^ t^jm^e^^ai/. iTuzrittio/i^.SC. 
 
^^®i-:«3^4H- 
 
 J'l.SZ 
 
 r-SS^t^- :g:^^0-^- 
 
 ■^^ 
 
 ..«iH 
 
 -^^r^ :S-^'^^-$ - - — ---^f+ 
 
 ^is^H- ssii3-a 
 
 ■rJh- 
 
 
 I 
 
 ■^ 
 
 dd 
 
 +> 
 
 EtfQuis ^ a^tweU- iitit/. CkarlKimi. S C. 
 
■^: 
 
 
 
 
 JfigtTtf £ fToyjweZZ,^ ^v^?L, CA.ar^fejcan.i' f^ 
 
 I 
 
 1^- 
 
 M 
 
 &t 
 
 A 
 
 I'l tin 
 
 'I 
 
 '6 
 
 &j 
 
 ^\ li 
 
 m 
 
 
I 
 
 
 .m- 
 
 "1 
 
 nil 
 
 lit? 
 
 
 * ± 
 
 
 /f 
 
 n 
 
 
 1^ ?i 
 
 fi 
 
 ^.m 
 
 K'l 
 
 'ii 
 
 f^>i 
 
 
 fi ':^) 
 
 1 
 
 £wiS I fiyf WZ , ?t6^ Ckarltslan,. S C 
 
t3 
 
 4t 
 
 m 
 
 i«l 
 
 m 
 
 * 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 i-3ie^ *-3^^ 
 
 -¥ 
 
 MKMJ^ -^^S^ 
 
 ^^s^m^ -^isg^ 
 
 ■■i5Mia^ -*^5»^^ 
 
 I-u®*ilfe *-31Erf 
 
 Evnne ^Oufswell, Uih CharUi6an,S C. 
 
I'lea 
 
 M 
 
 KH 
 
 ffd 
 
 Enju i Ctigs^cJl^ Ztrti Chjtrialm~ S C 
 
 KH 
 
 SiiiSS'r::-- -J^^^iS"' 
 
 _i ^s?SS"5^ trS^tiiiSs 
 
 :3K^^ :x-3e«» 
 
 -£SK»« ^3i«« 
 
 -53iat« $-3n^ 
 
 0> 
 
J>l6f 
 
 m 
 
 tH--' ^' 
 
 111 
 
 I- 1 
 
 
 ^' Hi 
 
 El 
 
 tvarx^- Cogswtil/. Ubh Cha^lfflo-n,, S C 
 
 \?\ 
 
 
 1^ lll 
 
 ftl 
 
o 
 
 o 
 
 
 ^ t 
 
 n^ 
 
 I 
 
 i'Higj i CofffM, IrtK. Cluu-lulm S C 
 
 IS 
 
 I--! 
 
 't1 
 
 M 
 
 fl' 
 
 
 ^^ 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 i^ 
 
 
 1i ttl ^ 
 
 h'J\ \6\ K-\ tH »CH ^ 
 
:pi no 
 
 -ll^ ^f 4i '^ '!' 
 
 
 leH 
 
 let 
 
 4^ 
 
 I? Tl 
 
 ^ da^tfl 
 
 tel ; N 
 
 •ft 4' 
 
 ^ -^B^iS ^^aHI 
 
 -^ ^^m. :^^S££ 
 
 ^a^is 
 
 F. 
 
 ^5H^ ^^321 
 
 Zww* ^ G)^f)»»-Ji, iirt, CharU^hm,, 5 C. 
 

<< I 
 
 
 1^1 \ 1^ 
 
 'Evcms ^ CotffWiW, y^tk. Cfuxrieshnvj S- 
 
 4iH .J 
 
 % 
 
 .^ ' 
 
 %\ 
 
 itii 
 
1-^ 
 
 lei 
 
 CO 
 
 Hmnt ^ Oogt^dAJ. hJ^ CkarltiUn,, S C 
 
 PI 72 
 
 m m 
 
 (Ql 
 
 
 tj . +] +1 ^; +f' ^;T 
 
 A 
 
 N 
 
 ^fi 
 
 M 
 
J^ 73 
 
 u£ 
 
 I t? ^, 
 
 % 
 
 
 sS 
 
 -?f 
 
 •t 
 
 i 
 
 V It^l 
 
 lis ' \ 
 III 'I' 
 
 r'li 
 
 i\ 
 
 JSiort (, CogivM, Utk. ChMrUsiiK ■? C 
 
 A 
 
 I 
 
 SOBMIl 
 
 US, 
 
WhZ 
 
 lfo« '«£ 
 
 <j^ ■^.fflg»<^ 6 
 
 o 
 
 
 1^ 
 
 / 8 'SB 
 
 3(! 
 
 i; 8 
 
 fe% 
 
 f 
 
 ^wt£$_Ctfjfi»ye2i Chxrleitt/rii S C 
 
i^\ 
 
 If^ 
 
 oO 
 
 
 
 feii 
 
 a'iCT,n.s $ C^gJire^, Zi .^, Chaflzjbi'rr.S C 
 
 » El 
 
 ta 
 
 «4 
 
 IB) 
 
 * 
 
 M 
 
 i 
 
 p-i 
 
 a i 
 
 1 
 
 
 ^1 »t 
 
 i % 
 
<T> 
 
 m 
 
 N 
 
 m 
 
 £vvu ^ Cog.:wrU. Udi, CkoT-lyUJun, . 
 
 -m 
 
 m ^ 
 
 "Si^jES^ -"^W^ ■■ ^ 
 
 ■M 
 
 
 \- 
 
 
 ■"--^. 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 m 76 
 
I 
 
i 
 
 t^i 
 
 1^1 
 
 m 
 
 ! 
 
 I'l 77 
 
 i 
 
 jyi 
 
 A ta 
 
 ^ _, 
 
 -ifi Hi 111 til X ill ^^m ■/-tS 
 
 ■"3?- sM§E --iS 
 
 I ,._. 
 
 -■t^^Ef-^^^gH- SI 
 
 i 
 
 .^gi^l-^.fe^^ ^~~-^^^E~""--!s 
 
 littuu j) ''/ig.'iiiid.f'.WiK Oujrltibrn^S C 
 
EmM S 'jxii-ndil. liA, (.hMirl<i^h,T,. S C 
 
ri 79 
 
 FIG 173 
 
 ^^^M' 
 
 f.m.n,j jt yjga - nr.lL. '■•JA , Ci urUuiui, J- C 
 
 
-iAOVtHtCO CutlHO 
 
 C LOR L I N L 
 
 33 a_J JJ acj 
 
 ja au jj j3 
 
 -^-f^ 
 
 ~< r vi 
 
 ,P 
 
 U -1 _i _, ^ 
 
 uJt3 LJLI Ll^ tJCJ _j«l 
 
 □ J cja a:j ^_, _ju 
 
 >r / T C H £ N s 
 
 1-1 LI ^ lJ LJ "" 
 
 fi'^Suf M OM L C C aojT- M Su/ri 
 
 cu 
 
 f? ^ t-J^ M 
 
 u^ 
 
 
 •frJ--, 
 
 ♦ 00 p/i c es 
 
 iF=a 
 
 J^raJM ^ Cc,(iiwtll,luJ<.. C/iiU-Luton.iC 
 
-/is - '*ACC4 . , _^. ^'i'. ^ 
 
 joe.^Z'ifl^ 
 
 --»■??» iJL". ^ A. -i?^ ?* . 
 
 o Q zj— □ a '- -^j 
 
 a _, a -n a"' i3 r— 
 
 g. -n--Ta — Tj- 
 
 ■□ tj"" XD "a "oi 
 
 US DODO a o cjoQj [z] CJ-' C3 ^a 
 j^ n'-'a — Tj" 
 
 
 ooao3opoaoaoa a ca $cj 
 cr : — ID "'a — a-- 
 
 jj "□■""n — a — u 
 
 t^^a7^,j ^ Ccg^y^til, Utfi-^ C/rjirltsiim,, 
 
Tvez 
 
 Js 
 
 F IG, 
 
 oi 
 
 e 
 
 HEAD quARTERSj-''' 
 
 June—-,, -18 — 
 
 
 Farvl*^. '-, fVa.t'hu^dtoni. 
 
 hir^^tOT 
 
 C^ounhe-i-siqnf ^'Movmij Jim^rh. 
 
 By or/irr uf^ 
 
 A B., Adjt 
 
 FIG. A 
 
 FIG. B 
 
 177. 
 
 jZwu 'i Cogtndl, Kh Chgrlethin, S 1